《Ruler of the Unknown》


 **Chapter One: Captains Log**

    **June 14, Year Eight: Clear Skies**


    ¡°Once again, the muffled whispers have returned, that strange sound that isn¡¯t a sound¡ªchaotic and dark. This wretched place is no place for a human.


    My first mate, Old John, suggested I try the fragrant ladies at the Red-Lipped Inn.


    I admit, the thought crossed my mind, but I managed to resist. I can¡¯t squander the echo coins I¡¯ve worked so hard to earn on such frivolities. I can¡¯t afford to relax for even a moment if I want to get home.


    Humans are creatures of the land, and the fact that we find ourselves in the Undersea proves there¡¯s a way back up. I must find it!


    I dreamt of my family again last night. I miss them, but I¡¯m starting to forget what they look like¡­¡±


    Suddenly, the ship, the *Rat*, lurched violently, interrupting Charles Reed¡¯s writing.


    The old oil lamp beside his diary illuminated his face. His black eyes and hair painted a typical Asian visage, but his skin was almost translucent, reminiscent of a movie vampire.


    From a modern perspective, Charles might even be considered somewhat handsome, yet his expression was heavy with fatigue, making him look utterly haggard.


    After straining to listen to the sound of the waves outside, Charles detected nothing unusual. He picked up his pen and continued to write.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need those special service workers; keeping a diary can improve my hallucinations too. I¡¯ve been managing to sleep five hours a night lately¡ªit''s been ages since I¡¯ve had such restful sleep.


    Of course, learning from the cautionary tales of those who wrote before me, I¡¯ve chosen to write in a language only I can decipher: Chinese.¡±


    ¡°Creeeak~~¡± A harsh metallic screech pierced the air, like something sharp was scratching at the hull.


    ¡°Damn it.¡± Charles snapped his diary shut, furrowing his brow as he made his way to the round porthole.


    He peered outside, and the view was just as he had seen eight years ago: a lightless sky and a murky green sea forming a dark curtain in the distance.


    Darkness ruled everything outside, and in that darkness, something monstrous seemed to brew, exuding an eerie atmosphere.


    But in the Undersea, there were no stars, no moon¡ªendless darkness was the main theme, and this darkness was precisely what proved everything was normal.


    Gazing at the seemingly normal exterior, Charles frowned even deeper. Years of sailing experience told him something was amiss. He decided to investigate.Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    He opened the bedside cabinet, revealing hundreds of gleaming yellow bullets rolling with the waves.


    Drawing his revolver, he expertly loaded a bullet and strode toward the helm.


    ¡°Captain, what brings you here so early? Your shift hasn¡¯t even started yet,¡± the helmsman, a scruffy old man, inquired. Beside him, a teenager in a sailor''s outfit slouched in a chair, his youthful face pale and devoid of color, much like Charles.


    ¡°Old John, why is the *Rat* swaying? Is our course normal?¡± Charles asked, directing his question at the helmsman.


    He stepped forward and kicked the chair leg, jolting the teenager awake.


    ¡°Ha! Probably just some underwater creature catching a whiff of our meat. You know, in the Undersea, those disgusting things outnumber the fish. Don¡¯t worry, the *Rat* is an iron ship; they can¡¯t break through,¡± the old man chuckled, stepping back to let Charles take control.


    Despite Old John¡¯s reassurances, Charles remained on high alert.


    In this bizarre place, humans were no longer at the top of the food chain; survival depended solely on caution.


    Charles pressed a button on the old equipment, and the searchlight ahead blazed to life. He scanned the surface of the sea through the transparent glass.


    Between the sea and the helm lay a deck stacked with cargo; the entire ship was only about thirty meters long.


    ¡°The route to the Coral Isles has been traversed by countless cargo ships. Those creatures wouldn¡¯t come here just for fun. Something¡¯s off,¡± Charles gripped the worn, reflective wheel, his brow furrowed tightly.


    Old John paused. ¡°Could we have strayed from our course? That¡¯s impossible; look, the beacon is still in the distance.¡±


    He pointed toward a faint light far away.


    In the starless Undersea, the only navigational aids were compasses and those brightly lit beacons along the route. As long as they could see the beacon, it meant the route had been established as safe by exploring ships.


    Just then, Charles¡¯s pupils contracted to pinpoints as he swallowed hard. ¡°How long have you been watching that beacon?¡±


    ¡°Just a few minutes, I¡¯ve been keeping my eyes on it,¡± Old John replied, his voice gradually lowering, a hint of fear creeping into his rotund face.


    After sailing for so long, they hadn¡¯t passed this beacon. It was clear that the beacon was moving at the same speed as their steamship. Something was wrong!


    Suddenly, Charles sprang into action, hands spinning the wheel furiously, pulling hard to the left.


    With a metallic creak, the steamship began to turn. Thankfully, the *Rat* was quick to pivot, putting distance between them and that strange beacon.


    Before Charles could breathe a sigh of relief, the teenager pointed at the glass window, eyes wide in terror.


    ¡°Captain! That thing is getting closer! So fast!! It¡¯s catching up!¡±


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles shouted into a nearby pipe, ¡°Chief Engineer! Crank the boiler to the max! Something¡¯s chasing us!¡±


    ¡°Understood, Captain!¡± a hearty voice echoed from the iron pipe.


    Thick, black smoke billowed from the ship¡¯s funnel as the steamship¡¯s speed began to climb.


    ¡°It¡¯s still closing in!! It¡¯s so fast! It¡¯s going to catch us! What in the world is that monster?!¡±


    The boy¡¯s voice rose in pitch due to sheer terror, trembling like a leaf, on the verge of collapse.


    ¡°Deep! Close your eyes!!¡± With adrenaline coursing through him, Charles kicked the boy¡¯s calf, sending him sprawling to the ground.


    Old John pressed the boy¡¯s head firmly to the floor, his face reddening as he shouted, ¡°Don¡¯t look, don¡¯t listen, don¡¯t think!! The Captain will get us home!¡±


    Just then, a loud crash shook the ship, sending the two tumbling. Charles clung desperately to the helm to avoid being thrown off.


    ¡°Captain, it¡¯s hit us!¡±


    Charles¡¯s face turned ashen, his jaw clenched tight.


    He leaned close to the pipe and hissed, ¡°Chief Engineer!! Overload the boiler for thirty seconds!!¡±


    ¡°Captain! That¡¯s not possible! It¡¯s too old!! It¡¯ll explode!¡±

 **Chapter Two: The Monster**

    ¡°Do as I say! I know my ship better than anyone!!¡±


    After shouting at the boiler room, Charles turned to his first mate on the floor. ¡°John! Get half the cargo off the ship!¡±


    He knew that now was not the time for hesitation; survival was more important than anything else.


    ¡°Yes, sir!¡± The stout old man kicked open the helm door and rushed out.


    Listening to the splashes of cargo hitting the water, Charles felt his heart bleed.


    Fortunately, after a series of measures, the *Rat*, now lightened, began to pick up speed, slowly distancing itself from whatever was chasing them.


    When the true beacon finally appeared ahead, Charles, drenched in cold sweat, cautiously released his grip on the helm.


    The trembling teenager crawled to Charles''s feet, clutching his leg tightly.


    ¡°Captain¡­ I just saw¡ª¡±


    Charles pinched the boy''s cheek, silencing him. ¡°What did I tell you before boarding? What¡¯s the third rule?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t look at or think about the monsters in the water unless they¡¯re close to the ship. If you see them, don¡¯t speak of it¡­¡±


    ¡°Good. Now stand up, drop anchor, and gather everyone on deck. I need to take a headcount.¡±


    Releasing the boy, Charles stepped out of the helm. The deck was a chaotic mess, water pooling everywhere, ropes floating on the surface, swaying back and forth.


    Wading through the calf-deep water, Charles made his way to the stern. The ship¡¯s tapered rear was caved in, as if struck by a massive hammer, covered in some unknown black goo that emitted a foul stench.


    Given the shape, it was easy to imagine the size of the creature that had just collided with the ship. However, eight years of sailing had dulled Charles¡¯s curiosity; he was now focused on other concerns.


    ¡°Repairing this will cost a fortune¡­¡± Charles felt a surge of frustration; he was now one step further from his dreams.


    At that moment, the whispers returned, creeping from the surrounding darkness.


    ¡°Ph¡­nglui mglw¡­nafh¡­¡±


    ¡°Damn!¡± Charles clenched his fist and pounded his forehead with his knuckles, the pain dulling the irritation brought on by the whispers.


    As he saw the other crew members gathering on deck, Charles lowered his hand and approached them.


    Upon seeing their captain, several men of varying heights quickly lined up. Regardless of their appearances, their faces were all as pale as Charles¡¯s.


    ¡°John, first mate, assisting the captain and organizing work plans, responsible for cargo loading schedules, helmsman from 12 to 24,¡± the stout old man spoke first.This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    Next to Old John stood a tall, muscular man covered in grease, who quickly added, ¡°James, chief engineer, responsible for maintaining the boiler¡¯s operation; also overseeing the propulsion system, auxiliary equipment, boiler, lubrication, cooling, and fuel.¡±


    Beside the tall man was a lanky figure, looking like a human scarecrow. ¡°Freddie, the cook, responsible for the crew¡¯s meals.¡±


    Following the cook was a pale boy named Deep, who swayed slightly, still recovering from the earlier chaos. ¡°D-Deep, deckhand, responsible for cleaning the deck and maintaining the anchor, cables, and loading equipment.¡±


    Charles quickly scanned the group and noticed one person was missing. ¡°Where¡¯s the bosun?¡±


    The four men exchanged glances, but no one answered.


    Suddenly, a blood-curdling scream erupted from below deck.


    ¡°Something¡¯s come aboard! Grab your weapons!¡± Charles shouted, leading the crew as they rushed toward the sound.


    As they entered the dimly lit crew quarters, an icy chill shot up their spines.


    Inside the dark cabin were only two figures: the bosun standing in terror, and another man lying on the ground, unrecognizable, his skin flayed off, each movement sending shudders of pain through his bloodied body.


    He lay there, screaming and desperately struggling, his breath growing weaker by the second.


    ¡°Jim! Find out who he is!¡± Charles quickly drew his revolver.


    The bosun, face pale with fear, crawled toward the bloodied figure, leaning in to listen.


    After a few seconds, he turned back in panic, pointing at Charles. ¡°Captain¡­ he says he is you!¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    Hearing the frantic footsteps of his crew behind him, Charles decisively aimed his gun at the bosun.


    ¡°Charles, captain, responsible for the safety and transport of the vessel, ensuring the safety of crew and cargo, decisively and steadily handling emergencies, helmsman from 0 to 12! Bosun! Report your duties now!!¡±


    ¡°You need to kill him!! He¡¯s not your captain anymore!¡± The bosun screamed, pointing at Charles in terror.


    ¡°Bang!¡± As Charles pulled the trigger, a bloody hole appeared in the bosun''s forehead, from which not blood, but a semi-coagulated dark yellow liquid oozed out.


    As the truth unraveled, the wounded bosun began to twist and change, his mouth splitting to the back of his head, limbs swelling grotesquely as he lunged at Charles with a horrific shriek.


    ¡°Bang bang bang!¡± Bullets rained down on the bosun, his skin tearing like a burlap sack, revealing a dark, rotting, toad-like torso beneath.


    Despite expending six bullets, the creature still didn¡¯t fall, lunging towards Charles.


    Having faced such horrors before, Charles remained calm, rolling aside to evade the monster''s attack.


    While dodging, he swiftly reloaded his revolver, flipping it back for another six shots.


    Under the barrage of twelve bullets, the creature¡¯s legs buckled, collapsing to the floor.


    Gasping for breath, Charles glanced at the grotesque corpse before him, then turned to the terrified crew members behind him.


    ¡°Stop staring! Get this damned thing off my ship,¡± Charles commanded, striding toward the unmoving body.


    Ignoring the overwhelming stench of blood, he adjusted the head to see the missing front tooth. It was clear now; this was his bosun, the other had been the monster in disguise.


    A flicker of pain crossed Charles¡¯s face, but he quickly masked it, reloading his gun and beginning to patrol the ship, searching for any other lurking threats.


    Deep followed Old John, struggling to move the body.


    The boy turned to his companion in awe. ¡°The captain is so powerful.¡±


    ¡°Ha! Of course! Otherwise, how would he be captain while you¡¯re just a deckhand? He was just like you when he first came aboard.¡±


    ¡°Really? What was Captain Charles like when he joined?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a long story; it¡¯s been nearly seven or eight years. I was on another ship as a third mate when Charles drifted in. When I first met him, he couldn¡¯t even speak.¡±


    ¡°Really? How did he become captain?¡±


    ¡°The old captain took pity on him and let him follow from a distance. When we returned to port and realized he wasn¡¯t a monster, he stayed on our ship, learning to speak and how to be a sailor. Not long after he learned to talk, he declared he wanted his own ship to lead humanity back to the land of light. We all laughed, thinking he was mad.¡±


    ¡°And then?¡±


    ¡°Then he worked his way up from sailor to bosun, and just when we thought he¡¯d become a second mate, he actually saved enough to buy a second-hand cargo ship¡ªthis very *Rat* beneath our feet.¡±

 **Chapter Three: The Relic**

    ¡°My bosun is dead again, killed by those things. How much longer can this go on? I¡¯m so tired of holding on.


    Sometimes I wonder if I¡¯ve already died and this is hell.


    But then I think, it can¡¯t be. The demons of hell are far more charming than those creatures. Everything here defies logic, including the humans.


    When I first arrived, I thought this place was in the early stages of the Industrial Revolution. But later, I learned they¡¯ve developed quite a bit of technology on the mysterious side.


    Yet, it¡¯s all for naught. Humanity still scrapes by like ants, surviving in a world filled with deadly horrors. We¡¯re not the only civilization living in clusters here.¡±


    Charles¡¯s thoughts were interrupted by a knock at the door, followed by the voice of his deckhand, Deep.


    ¡°Captain, we¡¯re approaching Coral Main Island.¡±


    Charles walked to the bow, spotting the lighthouse flickering in the darkness. A sigh of relief escaped him; no matter what, they had finally arrived.


    As the *Rat* slowly neared, the grand island behind the lighthouse came into view.


    The gray-white of coral rock dominated the island¡¯s color, with various human dwellings matching the hue.


    The port of Coral Island was bustling, with steamships of all sizes coming and going. Rugged sailors waved their hats, celebrating their survival.


    This was a newly developed island, one that couldn¡¯t sustain humanity solely on coral; it needed resources from other islands. This was also the lifeblood for cargo ships like the *Rat*.


    Among the crowds at the dock, many locals had inwardly curled ears¡ªthose were the native inhabitants of Coral Island.


    Anyone who lived on Coral Island for over five years would have their ears curl inward for unknown reasons. No one knew why.


    But this didn¡¯t deter migrants from other islands; compared to the troubles elsewhere, ear deformities were the least of their concerns.


    After a quick exchange with the dock manager, Charles stepped out of the port, his expression grim.


    As he had anticipated, a significant portion of the cargo was missing. This trip hadn¡¯t just failed to earn him money; he had lost quite a bit. These two months had been in vain.


    The time it took to sort the dock¡¯s supplies was a brief respite for the crew of the *Rat*.


    Nearby, a row of buildings of varying heights stood, some serving as inns for sailors, while others were places of leisure.


    On the bustling streets, ragged beggars lay about, murmuring incomprehensible words only they understood.


    These were sailors driven mad by the sea. No one knew what they had experienced. To avoid ending up like them, one had to remember the iron rules of the ocean: don¡¯t look, don¡¯t listen, don¡¯t think.


    They were the lucky ones, as most sailors lost at sea simply vanished with their ships.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    The door of the Bat Inn swung open, revealing a brightly lit hall where a group of burly men eyed the newcomers with malicious intent.


    However, upon catching a whiff of the sea salt on Charles, they quickly averted their gazes; anyone who could survive the sea was not to be trifled with.


    ¡°I need a room for five days and some food delivered to my room.¡±


    ¡°Five days lodging for 630 Echo Coins, and a delicious mushroom soup for 30. Total: 660.¡±


    In the damp room, Charles enjoyed his meal. The food in this underground world wasn¡¯t great. He tore the dark bread into pieces and tossed them into the thick mushroom soup.


    Even soaked, the bitter bread still stuck to his throat, but he was used to it.


    Charles pulled out a phone from his pocket, eating while mindlessly swiping at the scratched screen, which reflected the same darkness as the world outside.


    In the single room, only the sound of Charles¡¯s slow chewing filled the air.


    ¡°Captain, are you in there?¡± Old John¡¯s voice suddenly came from outside the door.


    Charles quickly tucked his phone away. ¡°Come in, the door¡¯s open.¡±


    The first mate cautiously entered, an apologetic expression on his face. ¡°Captain, I wanted to talk to you. I don¡¯t want to continue.¡±


    Charles frowned. ¡°Why? Haven¡¯t you seen enough of this?¡±


    Every time a crew member died, he was prepared for someone to leave. He had expected it to be Deep, who had nearly wet his pants from fear, not his loyal first mate, John.


    John waved his hands repeatedly. ¡°I¡¯m too old. Sometimes I fall asleep at the helm. I want to get away from the sea.¡±


    Charles¡¯s mood darkened further, but he didn¡¯t try to persuade him to stay. Parting on good terms was better.


    He placed a small stack of bills on the table. ¡°Here¡¯s your share.¡±


    John took his payment but didn¡¯t leave, hesitating in place.


    ¡°Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°Ha, Captain, you know, I¡¯ve saved a bit, but most of my money went to those women. This isn¡¯t enough for me to live on.¡±


    ¡°What? You¡¯re not asking me to sponsor you, are you?¡±


    ¡°No, no, I know that¡¯s impossible. But I have something good I¡¯d like to sell you. I won¡¯t need this weapon once I disembark.¡±


    John pulled out a black knife about the length of his forearm. It resembled a large dagger more than a knife.


    Charles eyed the stout old man with curiosity. This knife was indeed the first mate¡¯s weapon, but he didn¡¯t lack for close-range weapons.


    ¡°Captain, don¡¯t underestimate this knife; it¡¯s a relic!¡±


    Charles had heard of such mysterious items but had never seen one.


    The origins of relics were shrouded in mystery. Some said they came from the ocean, others from the legendary land of light, and still others from unexplored islands. Regardless of their origins, it was certain that these items held special powers.


    These powers were varied and came with a price; the cost differed depending on the power.


    Charles had once seen a ring at an auction on England Island worth 580,000 Echo Coins, granting the wearer temporary invisibility, but the price was unbearable itching all over the body.


    ¡°What¡¯s special about this knife?¡±


    Seeing Charles¡¯s interest, John perked up. ¡°This weapon is incredibly sharp¡ªvery sharp!¡±


    He looked around the room, eager to test it on something.


    ¡°Thanks, but I still prefer guns.¡±


    Using just a revolver against those monsters felt inadequate. Charles wanted a relic for self-defense, but he didn¡¯t want something useless.


    Though the technology tree of the sea world was a bit skewed, some of the larger islands were electrified, equipped with guns and cannons. What use was a divine weapon in such a world, especially one with side effects?


    Seeing that Charles was hesitant to buy, Old John grew anxious. ¡°Captain, it has other special abilities! Just holding it will speed up your body¡¯s healing.¡±


    ¡°Two abilities? What¡¯s the cost?¡± Relics were peculiar; the benefits and drawbacks were rarely proportional. Sometimes, the benefits were minimal, while the side effects could make the owner¡¯s life miserable.


    ¡°It¡¯s not too severe. If you hold it for a long time, you¡¯ll feel a suicidal impulse. Just don¡¯t hold it for too long.¡±


    Charles took the black knife, surprised at its lightness. It felt almost like plastic rather than metal.


    He drew the blade across his hand, and the wound did indeed start to heal slowly, but it wasn¡¯t exaggerated¡ªperhaps three times the usual rate.


    ¡°The cost is acceptable, and the benefit is decent. My ship doesn¡¯t have a doctor, so this can help fill that gap.¡±


    Charles decided to buy the knife. It was essential to invest in tools for survival.


    Both parties understood each other well, and in the end, Charles purchased the relic for 160,000 Echo Coins.

 **Chapter Four: The Cult of Futan**

    With Echo banknotes in hand, John turned to leave, a smug smile on his face. But just as he pushed the door open, he hesitated and turned back, conflicted.


    Looking at the shadows interwoven with light and darkness behind him, he hesitated to speak.


    ¡°Captain, I¡¯m leaving too. To be honest, why don¡¯t you come ashore as well? Even if you save up enough to buy an exploration ship, what then? The Land of Light doesn¡¯t exist.¡±


    ¡°It does.¡±


    Charles¡¯s tone was calm, but his eyes held a resolute glint.


    ¡°Something larger than an island hangs in the sky, selflessly providing us with light and warmth, dispelling darkness. How could that be? It¡¯s all just a scam made up by the Church of Light.¡±


    Seeing Charles remain silent, Old John sighed and continued to persuade him. ¡°When I first met you, even though you couldn¡¯t speak, you were so vibrant, so cheerful and confident. I thought, what a fine young man! If I had a granddaughter, I¡¯d definitely introduce her to you.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to hide it from me. I know you¡¯ve been hearing the voice of the divine for many days now. If this continues, you¡¯ll truly go mad. Just give it up.¡±


    Charles, expressionless, walked to the door and slammed it shut with a ¡°bang.¡±


    ¡°Child, you¡¯re too obsessed.¡± John¡¯s footsteps faded away, and silence returned outside.


    ¡°Am I too obsessed?¡± Charles murmured to himself, leaning against the door as his expression twisted in pain.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong with wanting to go back?¡± he suddenly shouted, his voice filled with anguish.


    ¡°I¡¯ve never committed any crimes!! Why does this happen to me? Why!!¡±


    ¡°Eight years!! A full eight years!! Why must I suffer like this!! I just want to go home, is that so wrong?!!¡± Charles roared in frustration.


    ¡°glui mglw¡­¡­na¡­¡­¡± The whispering in his ears returned, driving him to distraction.


    ¡°Damn it!!¡± In a fit of rage, he drew his handgun and pressed it against his temple.


    Just as his trembling finger was about to pull the trigger, a muffled protest came from the neighboring wall.


    ¡°What''s all this noise!! Keep it down!!¡±


    Suddenly, Charles fell silent. He tucked the gun back into his waistband and carefully wrapped the wooden knife in a cloth.


    That night, Charles dreamed of many things, but when he awoke again, he remembered nothing.


    ¡°Knock, knock, knock.¡± The door was rapped on again.


    When Charles opened the door, he found a bald man with octopus tentacle tattoos on his face standing before him.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Are you Captain Charles of the *Rat*? I¡¯m Hook, nice to meet you.¡±


    Charles eyed the man warily, taking in his ordinary features and inwardly curved ears, signifying he was a local of Coral Island. The octopus tattoos confirmed his faith.


    ¡°What does a Futan follower want with me? You¡¯re not planning to offer me as a sacrifice to your omnipotent god, are you?¡±


    Sensing the hostility in Charles¡¯s words, Hook showed no anger.


    ¡°To become a worthy sacrifice for a powerful being, you might not qualify. I¡¯m here for something else, Captain Charles. I hear you¡¯re in need of money, yes?¡±


    Charles wasn¡¯t surprised; this wasn¡¯t the first time this guy had approached him.


    ¡°I don¡¯t smuggle contraband,¡± he replied, ready to close the door.


    In truth, he was lying. Sometimes he did smuggle if the profit was enough, but he was resolute in avoiding too much contact with these cultists.


    The difference between a Futan follower and the madmen on the streets was merely the ability to speak normally; no sane person would consider the underwater monsters as gods.


    Just as the door was about to close, Charles suddenly heard a number float in from outside. ¡°One million Echo.¡±


    Looking at the black pupils peering through the crack of the door, Hook smiled confidently.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, this reward can fully cover your financial shortfall, allowing you to purchase a top-tier exploration ship. Just think about it! If you discover a new island, you¡¯ll own your land and become the governor of that new island. Then, women, power, and endless Echo Coins will all be yours.¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t know how these people had learned of his intentions, but he felt a twinge of temptation. With that much money, the path home would be significantly closer.


    He didn¡¯t let his guard down, though; the Futan cult was no charity. A huge reward always came with extreme danger.


    ¡°What do you want me to smuggle?¡± Charles asked warily.


    ¡°It¡¯s not about smuggling goods; we want you to help us find something. Please, follow me. Our high priest will explain the details to you.¡±


    After thinking for a few seconds, Charles opened the door and stepped outside.


    The two walked out of the port area, crossing through the fishy-smelling docks towards the residential area of the island.


    The residential area of Coral Main Island was less chaotic and more lively. If it weren¡¯t for the gray-white coral buildings, Charles could have sworn he was walking in mid-18th century London.


    The island had banks, hospitals, clothing stores, and theaters¡ªmodern facilities abounded. If not for the locals¡¯ deformed ears and pale skin, everything seemed perfectly normal.


    One island equated to one city, bustling with people. Their clothing indicated a mix of rich and poor, with everyone busy with their own affairs.


    ¡°Grilled spider crab legs, only 4 Echo Coins each!¡±


    ¡°Daddy, I can¡¯t walk anymore!¡±


    ¡°Extra! Extra! Major news! Governor Niko will marry his sixth husband in six days!¡±


    ¡°Excuse me, sir, may I have a moment of your time? I¡¯d like to introduce you to our Father and Savior, the omniscient and omnipotent being, Futan Sawito.¡±


    The tranquil scenery made Charles uneasy; no matter how peaceful it appeared, everything here felt as fragile as a bubble. Though rare, islands housing millions of humans had sunk before.


    As they wove through the gray-white buildings, they finally arrived in front of a massive church.


    Upon entering the church, the noise instantly quieted. In the center of the main hall stood a massive stone sculpture that could barely be described as humanoid.


    Though it was humanoid, its features resembled a standing, decaying octopus. The outwardly curling scales and the countless eyes covering its body made one feel ill at first glance.


    Dressed in black robes, the followers stood in neat lines, softly chanting a language devoid of consonants. Charles found the words somewhat familiar, resembling the phrases from his hallucinations.


    ¡°The high priest is in the confession room. Please follow me,¡± Hook said, leading Charles deeper into the church.


    As they moved past the crowd, security tightened at the back of the hall. Each corner and doorway had a black-robed follower standing guard. Though none spoke, Charles felt their eyes watching him.


    In a dimly lit room, Charles saw the high priest of the Futan cult, a figure in red robes kneeling on the floor.


    Hook respectfully performed a gesture of reverence before stepping back.


    The high priest slowly rose but didn¡¯t turn around.


    ¡°Captain Charles, my church needs you to find something. A relic of my lord.¡±

 **Chapter Five: The High Priest of Futan**

    The high priest''s voice was old and sticky, as if he had phlegm lodged in his throat, making Charles uncomfortable to listen to.


    ¡°Where is it?¡±


    ¡°Not far, on a newly discovered island to the left of Coral Islands.¡±


    Charles continued to ask, ¡°Why do you need me? There are many who are stronger than I, both in terms of men and ships.¡±


    ¡°Ha ha ha, that place is a bit dangerous. We need a cautious captain.¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t believe his words about ¡°a bit dangerous.¡± ¡°A bit dangerous¡± wasn¡¯t worth a million Echo Coins.


    ¡°You¡¯ve probably said that to others before me, haven¡¯t you? What happened to them?¡±


    The high priest spoke with a tone of disdain, ¡°Isn¡¯t Captain Charles the one who claims he wants to buy an exploration ship? If you¡¯re afraid of such minor dangers, you don¡¯t seem like a hero who can expand our human territory.¡±


    Seeing that the red-robed figure hadn¡¯t directly answered his question, Charles realized that the fates of his predecessors must not have been good; that place was definitely very dangerous.


    After a moment¡¯s thought, he decided to take on the task. Fortune favors the bold, and he didn¡¯t want to delay any longer.


    As for danger? How safe could any voyage be these days? There was no place on the Sea of Mysteries that was truly safe.


    ¡°Fine, but how can I be sure you¡¯ll keep your word?¡±


    The high priest of Futan seemed reasonable. ¡°I can deposit the reward in the British Bank and have them as witnesses.¡±


    After a brief pause, he continued, ¡°I have a small question: Captain Charles, why are you so eager to buy an exploration ship? For power? Echo Coins? Or for honor?¡±


    Charles had no intention of hiding the truth. ¡°To seek the Land of Light.¡±


    Upon hearing this, the red robe trembled, and the aged voice carried a hint of panic. ¡°Seeking the Land of Light? You¡¯re not one of those followers of the Church of Light, are you?¡±


    ¡°No.¡±


    Hearing Charles¡¯s answer, the high priest finally breathed a sigh of relief. ¡°Good, because if you were one of those heretics, we would have to reconsider our deal. Don¡¯t get involved with them; those heretics are completely insane¡ªthey are a cult!¡±


    Hearing a Futan follower, who enjoyed sacrificing the living, say this made Charles want to laugh. By the standards of the surface world, every religion in the Sea of Mysteries was a cult, with various rituals that were as inhumane as could be.


    As Charles stepped out of the confession room, the bald man named Hook entered, holding a cup of blood-red liquid, which he respectfully placed behind the high priest.


    ¡°Go sign the contract now, and let him set sail as soon as possible.¡±


    Hook nodded and, after a moment of hesitation, cautiously asked, ¡°High Priest, do you think this will succeed?¡±This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    A black octopus tentacle emerged from beneath the red robe, curling around the cup and pulling it back inside. ¡°Take your time; this is only the ninth. Don¡¯t rush¡­ The Lord¡¯s treasures can only belong to us.¡±


    Without wasting any time, Charles followed Hook to the largest bank on Coral Island.


    Seeing Hook write the name of the Futan Church on the contract eased Charles¡¯s mind. The legality of this contract was now backed by the governor of Coral Island. The Futan Church wouldn¡¯t dare break their promise, as the price they would pay for doing so would far exceed a million Echo Coins.


    ¡°Captain Charles, I heard your first mate has disembarked, is that right?¡±


    ¡°What does that have to do with this matter?¡± Charles tucked the contract into a pocket of his clothing.


    ¡°Of course, it doesn¡¯t. Just to ensure you complete your task quickly, the Futan Church has specially chosen a first mate for you. He has rich sailing experience, so please don¡¯t refuse.¡±


    Looking at the bald man before him, Charles frowned. ¡°To monitor me?¡±


    ¡°No, he¡¯s just here to guide you. That island is quite remote, and we¡¯re afraid you might not find it.¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t mind; currently, their interests aligned. These people wouldn¡¯t send someone over to hinder him at this moment.


    ¡°I¡¯ll set sail three days from now at six o¡¯clock.¡±


    Three days later at the port, it was starting to get lively, with teams of laborers moving cargo like ants.


    Charles stood at the bow of the ship, waiting, while the other crew members chatted idly on the deck. Among them were two unfamiliar faces¡ªnew sailors¡ªwhile the previous sailor, Deep, had already been promoted to first mate.


    The suddenly promoted young man looked excited, with his hands clasped behind his back, acting as if he were an experienced mentor to the new sailors, even though many of them were older than he was.


    However, the chief engineer and the cook were not so carefree; they knew this mission wouldn¡¯t be simple.


    ¡°James, I thought you would disembark like John?¡± the thin, bamboo-like cook, Frey, said.


    ¡°The captain saved my life. Wherever he goes, I go. Besides, the captain said this mission has generous rewards. Once I get the payment, I can propose to Mosika,¡± he said, seemingly picturing the wedding scene, with a happy expression on his face.


    ¡°What if you die? This isn¡¯t a delivery mission; exploring islands is the job of explorers.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not afraid. It¡¯s not bad to go along with you.¡±


    The chief engineer thought of something and turned to his companion. ¡°Frey, what about you? Why did you come along?¡±


    ¡°You know my personality; I¡¯m too lazy to move around,¡± Frey said, casting his gaze toward the captain¡¯s back, his eyes filled with calm.


    In truth, he stayed because he had seen the captain secretly take out a rectangular object a few years ago. This object not only played music like a record player but also had ghostly performances of plays.


    Though he didn¡¯t know what it was, he felt it was some powerful relic, and he suspected that this relic required tears as a price. The usually rational captain had cried like a child that day.


    From that moment on, he felt he was bound to this captain. With such a powerful relic at his side, safety was assured.


    The high rewards at sea didn¡¯t matter; the workload didn¡¯t matter; living was the most important thing.


    It turned out his choice was correct; those who set sail at the same time as him had mostly died, while he remained perfectly fine.


    Suddenly, Charles squinted as he saw a row of black-robed Futan followers walking through the laborers toward the dock, led by the bald man named Hook.


    ¡°Where are they? Hurry up, I¡¯m in a rush,¡± Charles said, his expression slightly impatient.


    Hook smiled and gently clapped his hands, prompting one of the figures behind him to step forward.


    When Charles saw the person¡¯s attire, he thought he was looking at a mummy. The beige bandages tightly wrapped around the person, leaving no skin visible.


    ¡°You can call him Bandage or whatever else. He used to be a first mate and knows the location of that island. He will be a great help on this journey.¡±


    ¡°Is what¡¯s inside alive?¡± Charles asked, his tone cautious.


    ¡°Ha ha, don¡¯t worry. He¡¯s a human, a flesh-and-blood person.¡±


    Hook pulled out a dagger and made a deep cut across the bandaged man¡¯s face, revealing black skin beneath the loosened bandages, with crimson blood oozing from the wound.


    ¡°A black man? Are there still black people in this world?¡± Charles looked again and realized he had misjudged. The man¡¯s skin wasn¡¯t black; it was covered in dense letters and tattoos, giving the illusion of being black at first glance.

 **Chapter Six: The Target Island**

    Charles pointed to the nearby ship, the Mouse, and turned to walk down the stairs.


    The bandaged man showed no concern for the bleeding wound on his face and performed a Futan greeting to Hook before following him.


    Just as the two were boarding the ship, Hook extended his right hand and plunged a bloodied dagger directly into the chest of a nearby follower.


    ¡°Ahhh!!!¡± The scream echoed throughout the port.


    Seeing the black robes of the Futan followers, the other people in the port didn¡¯t dare to intervene and quickly lowered their heads to focus on their own tasks.


    Charles turned to see this scene and felt disgusted. This was precisely why he had avoided contact with the Futan Church. He turned to the curious crew member, Deep, and shouted, ¡°Stop watching! Raise the anchor and set sail!¡±


    Hook forcefully pulled out a still-beating heart, holding it in his hand. He approached the Mouse, rubbing the heart against the ship¡¯s hull while murmuring something.


    ¡°Get away! Don¡¯t touch my ship with that disgusting thing.¡± Charles quickly drew his revolver and pointed it at Hook¡¯s head.


    ¡°Captain Charles, with this, your ship will be protected by great powers,¡± Hook said, unfazed.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need it!¡± Charles¡¯s finger rested on the trigger.


    Seeing that Charles wasn¡¯t joking, Hook smiled slightly and took a step back, bowing slightly.


    ¡°Captain Charles, we Futan believers pride ourselves on being polite and friendly. Why do you always have such prejudices against us?¡±


    Looking at the bloody heart in Hook¡¯s hand, Charles couldn¡¯t be bothered to explain.


    Under Hook¡¯s watchful gaze, the smoke stack of the Mouse began to emit black smoke as it slowly sailed into the dark ocean.


    ¡°Deep, take the helm,¡± Charles called to the first mate before heading to the captain¡¯s cabin with the bandaged man.


    A yellowed nautical chart was spread out on the table. The chart wasn¡¯t very detailed; large areas of black were marked only with a few scattered islands.


    This was the only type of chart available at the port; more detailed maps were controlled by the Explorers¡¯ Association.


    ¡°Where is your item? How far is it from Coral Island?¡±


    The bandaged man¡¯s right hand, bound in bandages, accurately pointed to an unmarked spot in the darkness.


    ¡°An unexplored area¡­¡± Charles had anticipated this answer. An island that had been previously explored wouldn¡¯t come with such a high reward.


    ¡°What does your sacred object look like?¡± Charles continued to inquire.


    The bandaged man took a while to respond, slowly saying, ¡°The statue of the Lord¡­ made of gold¡­¡±


    Although his speech was slow, the voice was surprisingly youthful, sounding like a boy in the midst of voice change.This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    ¡°Is that object a relic?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°What dangers are on that island?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Faced with Charles¡¯s further inquiries, the bandaged man fell silent.


    ¡°Go take the helm. Your watch is from twelve to twenty-four. If you need a break, Deep can take over for a while; I¡¯ve taught him how to steer.¡±


    The bandaged man quietly stood up and walked outside.


    Charles tapped his fingers on the table, organizing his thoughts. It sounded simple: find the object and bring it back. But if it were truly that simple, the Futan Church wouldn¡¯t have sought outsiders.


    That place was definitely very dangerous. The fact that the Futan first mate didn¡¯t provide any hints could mean one of two things: either he genuinely didn¡¯t know, as the previous team had sunk to the seabed and couldn¡¯t relay any information, or the dangers were so great that they deliberately concealed them to avoid scaring him off. Neither scenario was good news; for now, he could only take it one step at a time.


    The journey at sea was incredibly oppressive. The Mouse was pitifully small, and the limited space made movement difficult. Fortunately, aside from the two new sailors, the others were accustomed to the cramped conditions.


    At first, Charles was somewhat wary of the new first mate, keeping a close eye on him. However, after a few days of interaction, he found that the bandaged man, aside from speaking slowly and having a strange appearance, posed no issues.


    He steered the ship steadily, appearing quite skilled. Charles¡¯s wariness eased somewhat, but it didn¡¯t completely dissipate.


    As the navigational markers slowly disappeared, the Mouse ventured into uncharted territory.


    Without distant lights for navigation, the crew¡¯s spirits began to tense. There was a saying in the Sea of Mysteries: when a ship enters unexplored waters, the seabed has already prepared a place for the crew.


    But as days passed, the fierce battles Charles had anticipated did not come. This stretch of ocean was as calm as a lake; looking down from the bow, the surroundings resembled still ink.


    This calmness did not bring comfort; it felt like the calm before a storm, oppressive and suffocating.


    Charles remained highly alert, patrolling the deck day and night, fearing that something from below could come aboard.


    The ship¡¯s searchlight pierced the darkness like a beam of light, providing the crew with a small sense of security.


    ¡°July 1, Year 8 of the Crossing, Clear


    Today, everything is still normal. This tangible oppression is driving my crew mad. Deep, that kid, kneels on the deck whenever he has a moment, praying to various deities.


    I stopped him; the gods of the Sea of Mysteries aren¡¯t so easy to worship. Speaking carelessly can easily invite disaster.


    Fortunately, the cook found a nest of little mice in the storeroom, which distracted them. Watching them carefully feed the little mice, I felt a twinge of sentiment.


    They have companions now, but what about me? Why was I the only one who crossed over? Being alone is truly lonely. I wish I had a companion.¡±


    When the ink dried, Charles closed the diary and placed it in the cabinet.


    From the very bottom of the cabinet, he took out a square glass bottle filled with a brown liquid, raised it to his lips, and drank deeply. The dizzying sensation relaxed his taut mind.


    Charles had never understood why some people liked to drink; the bitter taste was akin to horse urine. But now he understood.


    A fatigued mind craved more alcohol to numb itself, but Charles didn¡¯t drink any further. A couple of sips could help him relax, but excessive drinking would scatter his resolve to return home.


    Just then, a cheer erupted from outside. Charles was taken aback, quickly putting the bottle away and rushing to the deck.


    First Mate Deep rushed in front of Charles, excitedly waving his arms, his face flushed as if he wanted to say something but couldn¡¯t.


    Charles¡¯s gaze crossed the ship''s edge, looking into the distant darkness. Under the searchlight¡¯s illumination, a massive object appeared directly ahead of the Mouse¡ªit was an island; they had arrived.


    As the steamship slowly approached the shore, the cheers gradually faded. Along the coastline of the island, eight dilapidated steamships were anchored, big and small. Judging by the signs of decay on their hulls, some had likely been there for two or three years.


    The ships lay still, like coffins adrift on the sea.


    ¡°How¡­ how can there be so many ships? Where are their crews?¡± Deep¡¯s voice trembled with anxiety, but no one answered his question.


    At that moment, looking at the island, a shadow fell over everyone¡¯s hearts.


    Charles didn¡¯t rush to disembark; instead, he led Deep and James to the nearest steamship.


    There were no bloodstains, no chaos; fuel and food were plentiful. Everything seemed normal, except for the absence of crew members.


    Suddenly, Charles thought of something. He burst into the captain¡¯s cabin and began rummaging through the drawers, searching for the hidden diary.

 **Chapter Seven: The Undetectable**

    "January 11, 435


    We have finally arrived! May the great powers bless us. As long as we retrieve the sacred object, I can undergo the initiation ceremony and become a true servant of the Lord!"


    This was the last entry in the diary, and the title indicated that the captain was a follower of the Futan Church. It was easy to guess that the church had sent its own followers here before seeking out Charles.


    Charles instructed the crew to check the other ships, and they found similar situations. The captains'' diaries all recorded their excited feelings in their final moments.


    Just as Charles was trying to piece together what had happened, the thin cook, Frey, handed him another diary.


    "Captain, take a look at this. It¡¯s a bit different."


    Charles took it and opened it, his pupils instantly constricting. The beige diary was filled with chaotic words.


    "Be careful! Don¡¯t go to the island! They are one of us!! They are not human!! They want to eat us! I don''t want to be eaten! I want to go back to the island, safe! The island!"


    The disjointed phrases indicated that the writer''s mind was unraveling, sending chills down the spines of everyone reading it. They all wondered what this captain had experienced.


    Deep swallowed hard, pulling his head back and cautiously looking at his fellow crew members. The diary suggested danger from within, implying that monsters might be lurking among them.


    Charles understood what he was thinking. He smacked the diary against Deep''s head. "Stop overthinking! We haven''t even set foot on the island yet."


    "Captain, are we still going?" Deep asked hesitantly.


    "Of course we are," Charles said with sudden determination. No matter what dangers lay on that island, they wouldn¡¯t deter him from his path home. Even if it meant dying, he would die on the way.


    The Mouse slowly approached the beach, its rusty anchor plunging into the water as the black smoke from the stack gradually dissipated.


    A wooden boat was lowered, and everyone moved toward the island together.


    As they neared the dark island, Charles opened a wooden crate and began distributing flintlock guns and revolvers. At the bottom were bundles of tightly packed explosives.


    He had specially procured a lot of supplies for this mission.


    With weapons in hand, everyone felt a bit more at ease.


    Seven sturdy men, armed and ready, jumped from the boat and walked across the beach toward the distant forest.


    Though it was called a forest, there was not a single green tree in sight. The twisted branches seemed to be covered with a thick layer of rust, and the trunks appeared to be swollen with tumors¡ªsome bulging out, while others caved in.Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.


    Walking among them gave the unsettling sensation of traversing through a body.


    The crew knew their objective was a golden statue of the Futan deity. Under the flickering torchlight, they searched for anything that glimmered, but found nothing.


    After a short while, a set of scattered footprints appeared on the ground. Seeing the footprints, the crew felt slightly relieved; at least it proved that others had walked this path, suggesting it might be safer.


    Perhaps they guessed right; after nearly two hours of walking, nothing unusual occurred.


    When they gathered a pile of branches to start a campfire, the tense atmosphere eased a bit.


    The scent of toasted white bread filled the air as the crew ate and speculated about what had happened to the missing people.


    "Do you think monsters ate them? Like those things in the sea?"


    "Not likely. Some of those on the ships were Futan followers, you know. Sea creatures rarely attack them. I think there¡¯s something dangerous on the island."


    Charles didn¡¯t join the discussion; he remained vigilant, surveying the strange environment around them. This bizarre forest was unsettlingly quiet; aside from the sounds they made, there were no chirps of insects or calls of birds.


    The absence of danger on the island was undeniably bizarre. He had read many accounts from exploration captains, and none of the islands in the Sea of Mysteries were safe.


    The islands currently inhabited by humans had been occupied only after the dangers had been eliminated.


    For instance, the Coral Islands had been alive when humans first encountered them. Over twenty exploration ships had formed a fleet to battle the giant coral, and it was said that many lives were lost before they finally subdued it.


    "Stop chatting. Finish eating and let¡¯s get moving. The longer we stay here, the more dangerous it becomes."


    Hearing Charles¡¯s words, the crew stopped their idle chatter and began to hasten their chewing, quickly regaining their strength as they prepared to continue.


    "Captain, I heard that when we go back, we¡¯ll be on a big ship, right?" Deep leaned in and whispered.


    "Yes."


    "Great! Then I¡¯ll be able to manage a dozen sailors like the first mates on the larger ships, instead of having no crew like I do now."


    Charles glanced at the excited young man, a smile curling his lips. Youth was truly wonderful; everything was seen in a positive light.


    However, they did need to recruit more sailors upon returning. Although the Mouse was small, it was a bit ridiculous to have no crew at all.


    As Charles and the others continued along the path, it felt like it had no end, stretching endlessly ahead.


    If it weren¡¯t for the scattered footprints on the ground constantly changing, Charles would have thought they were just treading in place.


    After walking for nearly three hours, their feet aching, the trees suddenly parted ahead, revealing a stone structure entangled with brown vines.


    The building appeared somewhat dilapidated; it was unclear if it was a temple or a church. Where a wooden door should have been, only a dark hole remained.


    Charles pulled the bandaged man closer, gravely asking, "Is it in there?"


    The bandaged man hesitated but nodded, ¡°It should be¡­ I¡¯m not too sure¡­ Sorry¡­ my memory isn¡¯t great¡­¡±


    Regardless of whether it was there or not, Charles decided to check it out. The footprints on the ground consistently led to the entrance, and they showed no signs of chaos, indicating that danger had not yet arrived.


    He turned to his first mate and the cook. ¡°Let¡¯s go. The four of us will take a look inside.¡±


    James and Frey nodded in agreement, following Charles as they stepped inside.


    The torchlight illuminated the interior of the building. Compared to its dilapidated exterior, the inside was surprisingly clean and spacious. The smooth red floor was devoid of dust, but the things on the walls made those who entered feel a chill run down their spines.


    The walls were adorned with various bizarre reliefs, layers upon layers of grotesque creatures entwined with one another.


    They resembled hybrids of starfish and octopuses, their strange bodies embedded with a single eye at their centers.


    Through their body language, it was evident that they were worshipping something.


    However, the three men paid little attention to these strange reliefs; all their focus was drawn to the golden statue in the center. It was a bizarre figure resembling a human covered in tentacles¡ªthe Futan deity.

 **Chapter Eight: The Mysterious Island**

    "July 1, Year 8 of the Crossing.


    Exploring the island has proven to be far more difficult than I had imagined. I initially thought that uncharted territories would only harbor some formidable monsters, but yesterday¡¯s events taught me a harsh lesson.


    The dangers of the island are not just physical; they are far more bizarre than humans can fathom. I never imagined that monsters could alter human memories.


    But I will not give up. No matter how hard it gets, I will see the sun again.


    Fortunately, I am not alone on this journey home¡ª"


    Just as Charles was about to continue writing, a delicate, pale foot landed on his back.


    ¡°I¡¯ve told you so many times not to disturb me when I¡¯m writing in my diary.¡± Charles naturally pushed the foot away.


    ¡°Tsk, back in elementary school during summer vacation, when the teacher asked you to write a diary every day, you copied mine! Now that we¡¯re in this godforsaken place, you¡¯re suddenly so diligent?¡±


    Charles turned around, looking helplessly at the woman lying on the bed.


    She was Dr. Anna, her curvaceous figure making her an absolute visual delight as she lay on her side, exuding a mature charm that could ignite a man¡¯s imagination.


    But to Charles, this was nothing new. ¡°What do you want now?¡±


    Hearing Charles''s inquiry, Anna''s smile grew even brighter. She tugged at the strap of her dress, letting it fall off her shoulder, while her left hand slowly slid up her smooth, pale thigh.


    ¡°Come on~ Let¡¯s have some fun~ We have~ plenty of time~~¡±


    Looking at his former companion, Charles couldn¡¯t help but smile wryly. ¡°Can you let me rest for a bit? We just escaped, and after running around that island, aren¡¯t you tired?¡±


    Anna¡¯s expression immediately turned sulky, and she lightly kicked Charles with her foot, complaining in a mournful tone, ¡°When we first came here, you were so eager to drag me into rooms whenever you had a chance. What¡¯s this? Is it the seven-year itch? Now you¡¯re starting to find me annoying? What a scumbag!¡±


    Charles sighed softly, walking over to embrace her gently. ¡°Come on, have some compassion. There¡¯s no such thing as a field that can¡¯t be cultivated, only cows that die from exhaustion.¡±


    ¡°If you don¡¯t pay your dues today, don¡¯t expect to touch me this month!¡±


    With Anna¡¯s complaints, the oil lamp in the room slowly dimmed.


    The diary on the table flipped over due to inertia, revealing the previous day¡¯s entry.


    ¡°They have companions, but what about me? Why was I the only one who crossed over? It¡¯s so lonely being alone; I wish I had a companion.¡±Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!


    The next day, as Charles woke up, he naturally leaned over to kiss Anna¡¯s smooth cheek. ¡°I¡¯m going to take the helm.¡±


    Without even opening her eyes, Anna impatiently pushed Charles''s face away. ¡°Go away, go away! Don¡¯t kiss me if you haven¡¯t shaved; it¡¯s prickly!¡±


    Charles chuckled, giving her another peck on the cheek before getting dressed.


    Once he was invigorated and made his way to the helm, he saw Bandage diligently steering the ship.


    He patted Bandage on the shoulder. ¡°How¡¯s it going? Any abnormalities?¡±


    After going through life-and-death experiences together, Charles had completely let his guard down around Bandage. If Bandage hadn¡¯t escaped from that monstrous tree, he might not have found the others.


    Bandage looked mysterious, but at least he didn¡¯t seem to have any bad intentions.


    ¡°None¡­¡± Bandage showed no reaction to Charles¡¯s friendly gesture.


    ¡°Alright, you can go rest. I¡¯ll take over.¡± Charles took the helm.


    As usual, Bandage offered a calm salute to Charles before leaving the cockpit.


    Charles felt good steering the ship. Although it was pitch black outside and there was no scenery to see, he felt happier than he had in a long time, his mood considerably lifted.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The door was pushed open, and a pouting Deep walked in, looking disgruntled.


    ¡°Captain! That guy Walter is totally unfit for the ship!! I propose we kick him off! He was in charge of the rats, and now they¡¯re gone!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s just a bunch of rats. Is it really worth arguing with a crewmate over that? Maybe they just ran away,¡± Charles said, feeling a bit of a headache. As captain, he had to deal with crew conflicts too.


    ¡°Impossible! I¡¯ve searched everywhere; the rats couldn¡¯t have just jumped into the sea!¡±


    Just then, the sailor named Walter rushed in, excitedly defending himself, claiming that the rats had indeed disappeared and it wasn¡¯t his fault.


    The two began to argue around Charles, and in the end, he had to bring out the reward for this voyage to divert their attention.


    Originally, Charles thought things would just blow over, but events took a turn for the worse¡ªthis time, it was a person.


    ¡°Captain, Walter is missing!!¡±


    Hearing this from his first mate, Charles frowned slightly. Crew members weren¡¯t rats; the ship was so small, how could someone just go missing without a trace?


    Charles ordered all crew members to start searching for the missing sailor, but they turned the entire Rat Ship upside down and still couldn¡¯t find him.


    The joy and relief from completing their earlier task had vanished, and during dinner at six that evening, a shadow loomed over everyone¡¯s faces as they ate their meals in silence.


    Seeing the crew¡¯s expressions, Charles understood that as captain, he had to come up with a plan. If some sea creature had dragged the sailor into the water, that would be the best outcome. What he feared was that this incident was just the beginning, and more crew members might go missing.


    ¡°From now on, everyone must pair up, even when going to the restroom. Also, everyone must carry their firearms at all times.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Captain.¡±


    ¡°Understood, Captain.¡±


    With a serious expression, Charles lowered his head to eat his food. Just then, a delicate hand reached over and gently tapped his arm.


    A soft voice whispered in his ear. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; we¡¯ve gotten through so much together. We¡¯ll be fine this time too.¡±


    Charles felt his anxious heart ease a bit, forcing a reluctant smile at Anna sitting beside him. ¡°No need to comfort me; this is just a small problem. You should stay close to me and not wander around.¡±


    ¡°Sure, just don¡¯t complain when I¡¯m around,¡± Anna said, playfully rubbing her finger along Charles¡¯s cheek before popping her finger, which had crumbs on it, into her mouth.


    After taking a couple of bites, Charles noticed Anna resting her chin on her hand, staring intently at him.


    ¡°Why aren¡¯t you eating?¡±


    ¡°I just had a snack, so I¡¯m not hungry at all right now.¡±


    ¡°Where did the snacks on the ship come from? You¡¯re not dieting again, are you? You¡¯re not even overweight; starving yourself isn¡¯t good for your health.¡±


    ¡°Alright, alright, just take care of your own business, big captain. If I¡¯m hungry, I¡¯ll find something to eat myself.¡±


    ---

 **Chapter Nine: The Tree Came to Life**

    Charles gripped the bandage tightly and pulled out the black knife embedded in his leg, using it as a machete to chop at the branches hanging with bandages ahead of him.


    The spiky branches were easily severed, but the cut ends were empty.


    The two ventured deeper into the forest, and soon Charles spotted others caught in the bandages, a scene that shocked him.


    Before him stood a bizarre, stunted tree, its long, spiny trunk entwined around a boy¡¯s body. The unconscious human dangled in mid-air like a piece of wax meat, swaying gently as if he were a fruit of this strange tree.


    There was not just one ¡°fruit¡±; the tree was laden with them.


    ¡°Get them down!¡± Charles tightened his grip on the black knife and charged forward.


    A boy fell to the ground with a pained grunt, slowly waking up. He looked at Charles, who was frantically chopping at the tree, his head spinning. ¡°Who are you? Have you seen my captain?¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t have time to answer. He swung the knife wildly, rescuing everyone, but this time, the hollow branches contained something¡ªshort, quivering pink tentacles fell from the cross-section.


    ¡°Crack, crack, crack¡­¡± The stunted tree suddenly moved, and everyone turned their gaze toward it.


    The rust-red trunk began to crack open, and several tangible gazes shot out from the crevices, sweeping over Charles.


    A thought flashed through Charles¡¯s mind: ¡°Is this thing alive?¡±


    The tree''s movements grew more pronounced, and Charles could see the twisted flesh and that yellow-brown eyeball inside the cracks, along with the raging fury within it.


    ¡°Run!!¡± The living people instantly sprang into action. Even if they couldn¡¯t grasp the situation, human instinct drove them to flee.


    They had barely taken a few steps when a loud crash erupted¡ªthe stunted tree exploded, and twisted, fleshy creatures crawled out.


    At first glance, they resembled black-haired starfish, but upon closer inspection, the ¡°hair¡± turned out to be dense, dark, elongated tentacles, with an orange-yellow single eye and a mouth full of fangs at the center of their bodies.


    The monsters opened their beastly mouths, writhing their tentacles as they madly pursued their fleeing prey.


    Fortunately, Charles had cleared a path, and the distance between them was still increasing.


    ¡°Crack, crack, crack~¡± All the surrounding trunks trembled and cracked open. It was as if Charles and the others had triggered some mechanism, awakening various grotesque creatures from their slumber, stretching their nauseating, fleshy appendages.


    They swayed, emitting piercing shrieks that turned the entire island into a hellish nightmare.


    Sinister gazes filled with malice swept over the group, sending chills down everyone¡¯s spines and stiffening their limbs.This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    ¡°Faster! Go faster!!¡± Charles urged as he helped the boy escape.


    They had been running for a while, but the situation was growing increasingly dire. It wasn¡¯t just the writhing flesh behind them; even the strange tree ahead began to shake.


    At that moment, the writhing tentacles formed a large net¡ªthey were surrounded!


    In a moment of desperation, Charles suddenly remembered something. He reached for his waist and felt a hard object¡ªit was the explosives he had brought!


    ¡°Boom!!¡± Flesh splattered, and the blocked path opened once again.


    The explosives helped clear a way for everyone, but as the explosives dwindled, the expressions of the group grew grim.


    Just as Charles had one last pack of explosives left, the sound of waves crashing against the shore reached them¡ªthe exit was just ahead!!


    Everyone understood what this meant, and their pace quickened further, desperately squeezing every ounce of potential from their bodies.


    The last pack of explosives was ignited and thrown. The hard ground was finally replaced by soft sand. They made it out.


    Seven people sprinted toward the wooden boat by the shore, with the monstrous flesh trailing closely behind.


    In his peripheral vision, Charles caught a glimpse of a golden flash¡ªit was the statue of Fortan he had previously thrown down.


    Charles took a few quick steps, picked up the statue, and jumped onto the boat. The others frantically paddled, finally returning to the sea before the flesh monsters could catch up.


    The monsters seemed afraid of the seawater, retreating as soon as they made contact.


    Once the group was safely back aboard the Rat, they finally exhaled in relief, collapsing to the ground, panting like exhausted dogs.


    Though every muscle in his body protested, Charles endured the pain and stood up. The danger wasn¡¯t over; they needed to leave the island.


    ¡°Chief engineer, fire up the boiler! Sailors, weigh anchor! First mate, take the helm! We¡¯re leaving this cursed place.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Captain.¡±


    Seeing the crew quickly following his orders, Charles felt a twinge of surprise, sensing something was off.


    He quickly sifted through his memories and was astonished to find that all the crew members had returned, and he could recall their names.


    It seemed that whether it was the island or those monsters, they had altered memories, but as long as they left the island, their memories could be restored.


    Bracing himself against the ship¡¯s railing, Charles gazed toward the distant island. In the darkness, the monstrous flesh appeared blurry.


    They extended their tentacles, swaying rhythmically, as if performing some ritual, looking eerily horrifying under the cover of darkness.


    As Charles watched, the Rat¡¯s smokestack belched out black smoke once more, and the group slowly drifted away from the bizarre island.


    It wasn¡¯t until mealtime that, under Charles¡¯s explanation, all the crew members learned what had happened, and they were all shocked by the situation.


    ¡°My God, is the uncharted island really that dangerous? No wonder the disappearance rate of exploration ships is so high.¡±


    ¡°I lost my memory and then got it back? Captain, you¡¯re not pulling my leg, are you?¡±


    After taking a sip of soup, Charles cleared his throat, and the chatter quieted down.


    After scanning each crew member¡¯s face, Charles said, ¡°Everyone, report your names and positions, and check each other¡¯s memories for any inconsistencies.¡±


    The eerie island made him wary; it stealthily caused crew members to disappear and could erase their memories. Such power made him feel deeply uneasy.


    ¡°Bandage, position¡­ First mate, assisting the captain and organizing various work plans¡­ responsible for drafting cargo loading plans, 12 to 24¡­ helmsman.¡±


    ¡°James, position: Chief engineer, responsible for maintaining the normal operation of the boiler; also maintaining the propulsion system and auxiliary equipment, boilers, lubrication, cooling, and fuel.¡±


    ¡°Freddy, position: Cook, responsible for the crew¡¯s meals.¡±


    ¡°Deep, position: Boatswain, responsible for guiding sailors in the maintenance and repair of anchors, cables, and loading equipment; leading sailors in painting, rigging, and high-altitude work.¡±


    ¡°Walter, position: First sailor, executing steering, navigation watch duties, and daily deck maintenance.¡±


    ¡°Jack, position: Second sailor, executing line handling, ladder operations, and various deck tasks.¡±


    ¡°Anna, position: Ship¡¯s doctor, responsible for treating crew illnesses and conducting routine check-ups.¡±


    After cross-referencing with his memories and finding no discrepancies, Charles finally sighed in relief. He had indeed overthought things; it was all finally over.

 **Chapter Ten: Ships Doctor Anna**

    **Date: July 2, 8 Years After Crossing**


    Exploring the island has proven to be more challenging than I imagined. I initially thought that uncharted territories would only harbor some formidable monsters, but yesterday''s events taught me a harsh lesson.


    The dangers of the island are not merely physical; they are far more bizarre and unfathomable than humans can comprehend. I never could have imagined that monsters could manipulate human memories.


    But I won¡¯t give up. No matter how difficult it gets, I will see the sun again.


    Fortunately, I am not alone on the way home¡ª


    Just as Charles was about to continue writing, a soft, pale foot stepped on his back.


    ¡°How many times have I told you not to disturb me while I¡¯m writing in my diary?¡± Charles casually nudged the foot aside.


    ¡°Tsk, back in elementary school during summer vacation, the teacher had you write in a diary every day, and you copied mine! Now that you¡¯re stuck in this wretched place, you¡¯ve suddenly become so eager to learn?¡±


    Charles turned around, looking helplessly at the woman lounging on the bed.


    That was Anna, the ship''s doctor. Her curvaceous figure made her lying sideways on the bed a striking visual, and her every move exuded a mature charm that could ignite endless fantasies in men.


    But to Charles, this was nothing new. ¡°What do you want now?¡±


    Hearing Charles''s question, Anna''s smile widened. She tugged at her shoulder strap, letting it slide down, and her left hand slowly glided up her porcelain thigh.


    ¡°Come on~ let¡¯s have some fun~ after all, we have~ plenty of time~~¡±


    Looking at his former partner, a faint smile appeared on Charles''s face. ¡°Can you let me catch a break? We just escaped! After running around on that island, aren''t you tired?¡±


    Anna¡¯s expression instantly dropped. She lightly kicked Charles with her foot and complained in a sulky tone, ¡°Back when we first arrived, you were always dragging me into the cabin whenever you had the chance. What¡¯s this? Is it the seven-year itch? Are you starting to find me annoying? You scoundrel!¡±


    Charles sighed softly and went over to hug her, gently patting her back. ¡°Come on, have some empathy. There¡¯s no field that hasn¡¯t been plowed, only cows that have died from exhaustion.¡±


    ¡°If you don¡¯t pay your dues today, don¡¯t even think about touching me this month!¡±


    As Anna continued her complaints, the oil lamp in the room slowly dimmed.


    The diary on the table turned a few pages due to inertia, revealing the previous day''s entry.Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.


    ¡°They have companions, but what about me? Why was I the only one who crossed over? Being alone is truly lonely. I wish I had a companion.¡±


    The next day, when Charles awoke, he naturally leaned over to plant a kiss on Anna¡¯s smooth cheek. ¡°I¡¯m going to take the helm.¡±


    Still half-asleep, Anna pushed Charles¡¯s face away impatiently. ¡°Go away, go away! Don¡¯t kiss me if you haven¡¯t shaved; it¡¯s prickly!¡±


    Charles chuckled and pecked her cheek again before getting out of bed and dressing.


    Once he was bright and alert, Charles entered the cockpit to find Bandage diligently steering the ship.


    He patted Bandage on the shoulder. ¡°How¡¯s it going? Any abnormalities?¡±


    After surviving together, Charles had completely lowered his guard against Bandage. If it weren¡¯t for Bandage escaping from that strange tree, he might not have found the others.


    Bandage appeared mysterious, but at least he didn¡¯t seem to harbor any ill intentions.


    ¡°None¡­¡± Bandage showed no reaction to Charles¡¯s friendly gesture.


    ¡°Alright, you can go rest. I¡¯ll take over.¡± Charles took the wheel.


    As usual, Bandage performed a gesture of respect from the Fortan faith before leaving the cockpit.


    Charles felt in good spirits as he steered the ship. Although the outside was pitch black with no scenery in sight, he hadn¡¯t felt this happy in a long time. His mood lifted considerably.


    Suddenly, the door swung open, and a pouting Deep stormed in, looking disgruntled.


    ¡°Captain! That guy Walter is totally unfit to be on the ship! I propose we kick him off! He was in charge of the rats, and now they¡¯re missing!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s just a bunch of rats. Do we really need to argue over this? Maybe they ran off on their own,¡± Charles replied, feeling a headache coming on. As captain, he had to mediate conflicts among the crew.


    ¡°Impossible! I searched everywhere; the rats couldn¡¯t have jumped overboard!¡±


    Just then, Walter, the sailor in question, rushed in, excitedly defending himself, insisting that the rats had indeed vanished and it wasn¡¯t his fault.


    The two began to bicker around Charles, and he finally pulled out the reward for this voyage to distract them.


    Charles thought the matter would end there, but things took a turn for the worse¡ªthis time, it was a person.


    ¡°Captain, Walter is missing!!¡±


    Hearing this from his first mate, Charles furrowed his brow. Sailors weren¡¯t rats; the ship was small enough that someone couldn¡¯t just disappear without a trace.


    Charles ordered all crew members to search for the missing sailor, but they turned the Rat upside down and still couldn¡¯t find him.


    The joy and relief they had felt after completing their tasks evaporated. At dinner that evening, a shadow hung over everyone¡¯s faces as they ate tasteless food.


    Watching the expressions of his crew, Charles knew he had to come up with a plan. If a sea creature had dragged the sailor overboard, that would be the best-case scenario. What worried him was that this could just be the beginning, and more crew members might vanish.


    ¡°From now on, everyone must act in pairs, even for the restroom. Also, everyone must carry firearms at all times.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Captain.¡±


    ¡°Understood, Captain.¡±


    With a serious expression, Charles lowered his head to eat, when suddenly a pale hand reached over and gently tapped his arm.


    A soft female voice whispered in his ear. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We¡¯ve made it through so much together; we¡¯ll be fine this time too.¡±


    Charles¡¯s anxious feelings eased slightly, and he forced a smile at Anna, who was sitting beside him. ¡°No need to comfort me; it¡¯s just a small issue. Just don¡¯t wander off, and always stay close to me.¡±


    ¡°Sure, just don¡¯t complain about me being annoying later.¡± Anna wiped her finger, which had crumbs from the bread, on Charles¡¯s face and then popped her finger into her mouth.


    After taking a few bites, Charles noticed Anna resting her chin on her hand, staring intently at him.


    ¡°Why aren¡¯t you eating?¡±


    ¡°I had some snacks earlier, so I¡¯m not hungry at all right now.¡±


    ¡°Where did the snacks come from on the ship? You¡¯re not trying to diet again, are you? You¡¯re not even overweight; starving yourself isn¡¯t good for your health.¡±


    ¡°Alright, alright, mind your own business, big captain. If I¡¯m hungry, I¡¯ll find something to eat myself.¡±

 **Chapter 11: The Attack on Bandage**

    After dinner, Charles began to patrol the Mouse, ensuring everyone''s safety.


    He didn''t know what had caused the sailors to disappear, and in a situation where the enemy was hidden and he was exposed, he could only use this clumsy method for now.


    The atmosphere on the ship had returned to what it was before; everyone was on edge, trying to keep themselves visible to others, fearing they might vanish without a sound.


    Charles wasn''t sure if his method had worked or if that thing had left, but the Mouse had been quite peaceful for the past few days.


    Four days later, Charles stood at the bow, gazing out at the dark sea in the distance. ¡°We¡¯ll be back on the marked shipping lane in three days at most; it should be safe then.¡±


    Estimating the time to return to the island, Charles turned to Anna, who was sitting on the anchor machine. ¡°Let¡¯s go check the turbine room.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not going,¡± Anna said impatiently. ¡°I feel like an idiot wandering around with you every day. What¡¯s there to see in this tiny place? If you want to go, go by yourself.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t let your guard down; it¡¯s dangerous for you to be alone.¡± Charles gently pulled her arm, but she shrugged him off.


    ¡°Oh, I¡¯ve said I¡¯m not going! Why are you so annoying? Besides, isn¡¯t that mummy up there watching? What danger could there be?¡±


    Charles looked up through the transparent glass and saw Bandage clearly at the helm.


    ¡°Fine, you stay here and rest. I¡¯ll be back soon.¡± Charles opened the hatch and headed for the turbine room at the lowest level.


    As the power core of the entire steamship, the turbine room was very hot. As soon as Charles entered, he saw the bare-chested chief engineer James adding fuel, with the sailor Deep panting beside him.


    ¡°Captain, I really can¡¯t take it anymore; let me go up, this place is too hot!¡± Deep complained with a frown.


    ¡°For the safety of our comrades, just endure a little longer.¡±


    ¡°Whatever man-eating monster there is won¡¯t come down here; it¡¯s so hot that only a big guy like me could stand it!¡±


    Charles walked over to James and patted his sturdy shoulder. ¡°Thanks for your hard work. The insulation on the new ship will be much better.¡±


    James smiled sheepishly, ¡°I¡¯m used to it; aside from the heat, working down here is pretty easy.¡±


    ¡°When we get the new ship, you won¡¯t be able to handle it alone down here. You¡¯ll be the chief engineer, managing the first, second, and third engineers.¡±


    To Charles''s surprise, James seemed to be frightened by his words and quickly stepped back, waving his hands like a fan. ¡°No, no, I can¡¯t manage people; let someone else do that. I¡¯ll just handle the firing, really!¡±Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    Just as Charles was about to reassure his crew, a loud crash echoed from the nearby pipes, followed by a mournful cry from the Mouse as everything tilted at a sharp angle of 75¡ã.


    Stumbling to the ground, Charles quickly realized that the sudden tilt of the ship must mean something had gone wrong with the helmsman. He crawled to the communication pipe and shouted, ¡°Bandage!! If you hear me, respond quickly!!¡±


    But all he heard in response was the sound of flesh being torn and Bandage¡¯s pained groans.


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles pulled out his revolver and, bracing himself against the swaying, crawled toward the staircase. ¡°You two, come with me! There¡¯s been an incident in the cockpit!!¡±


    As Charles rushed onto the deck, he saw a panicked Anna rushing toward him with tears in her eyes. ¡°That mummy¡­ that mummy!!¡±


    Charles and the others rushed into the cockpit and were met with a scene of chaos. Dark red blood splattered everywhere, turning the cockpit into a mess.


    Bandage, who should have been steering, lay on the ground like a rag doll, torn and battered. Aside from the numerous wounds on his body, his right leg was completely severed.


    Charles rushed to the injured Bandage, unsure where to place his hands for a moment. After two seconds, he tore away the bandages from Bandage''s face and checked for a pulse.


    Feeling a faint breath, Charles let out a slight sigh of relief. He quickly pulled out a black knife from his boot, hoping Bandage could draw on its healing power to cling to life.


    ¡°Anna! Don¡¯t just stand there, hurry and stop the bleeding!¡±


    Charles''s shout snapped the dazed ship''s doctor back to reality. With red-rimmed eyes, she nodded repeatedly and rushed out. ¡°I¡­ I¡¯ll go get the hemostatic clamps!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t give up, buddy, you can¡¯t leave us, don¡¯t give up,¡± Charles whispered urgently into Bandage¡¯s ear.


    Moments later, Anna returned, looking lost. ¡°Charles, my medical kit is missing!¡±


    Charles stared at her for a second, then quickly said, ¡°Go to the captain¡¯s room; it¡¯s in the bottom drawer. I stocked some supplies! Deep, go call everyone over! Quickly!¡±


    In the chaos, the cockpit was filled with six anxious crew members standing over the unconscious Bandage.


    Everyone¡¯s worried gazes turned to Charles, seeking reassurance. The pressure on him intensified, but this was the moment when the captain was needed; he couldn¡¯t lose his composure.


    ¡°Anna, did you see what attacked Bandage??¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t see anything; the ship suddenly tilted, and I fell.¡±


    ¡°That thing is still on board; it will definitely strike again.¡±


    ¡°But Captain, we¡¯ve searched everywhere; it¡¯s not here! Could it be invisible?¡± Deep asked, furrowing his brow.


    Monsters of the deep come in all shapes and sizes, and invisibility wasn¡¯t an uncommon trait.


    ¡°That¡¯s unlikely. If it could turn invisible, there would be no need to wait this long.¡±


    Charles knew he had to do something; he couldn¡¯t let his crew be attacked again. If this continued, the entire Mouse would become an iron coffin, burying everyone alive.


    But in this state of ignorance, what could he do?


    After a moment¡¯s thought, Charles pursed his lips and said, ¡°Full throttle to the turbines; we need to get back to Coral Island as quickly as possible, even if it means scrapping the Mouse.¡±


    ¡°Deep, lock all the hatches!¡±


    ¡°Freddy, move all the food from the kitchen that can be eaten raw to the turbine room and cockpit; everyone else should stay in these two places.¡±


    Since they couldn¡¯t find the monster, they would simply huddle together until they reached port.


    ¡°What about the bathroom?¡± Anna asked quietly.


    Charles tapped the transparent glass in front of him. ¡°Over the side.¡±


    As the crew began to gather in the two areas, the atmosphere on the Mouse grew increasingly oppressive.


    In the cockpit, Deep was at the helm, Anna was tending to Bandage on the hammock, and Charles sat on a stool, continuing to write in his journal.


    Inside the cabin, apart from the scratching sound of the pen on paper, there was no other noise.

 **Chapter 12: Its All a Lie**

    ¡°My first mate was attacked by some creature and is now unconscious. The situation is grim; the wounds all over him make it a miracle he¡¯s still alive. I¡¯m not sure if he¡¯ll wake up again.¡±


    Charles snapped the cap of his pen back on and sighed helplessly. He flipped through his journal casually, but when he saw a particular page, his breath quickened, and he suddenly regretted looking at it.


    He closed the journal and nervously chuckled, shaking his head.


    ¡°What¡¯s got you so happy?¡± Anna asked curiously from a distance.


    Charles stared at her for a few seconds, then walked over to Bandage, taking the black knife from his hand and gesturing for Anna to step outside.


    ¡°Aren¡¯t we supposed to stay together for safety? Why are you coming out again?¡± Anna asked as she stepped through the hatch.


    Charles cupped her pale face and gently kissed her. Anna¡¯s eyes widened slightly in surprise.


    When Charles released her, Anna, her cheeks flushed, lightly punched his chest. ¡°What¡¯s gotten into you?¡±


    ¡°Jiajia, we¡¯ve been childhood friends. All these years, have you only liked me?¡± Charles leaned back against the ship''s wall with a calm expression.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be ridiculous! Of course, I have. I decided on you the moment you handed me a shovel in the sandbox at kindergarten,¡± Anna said, moving closer affectionately.


    Charles gently wrapped his arms around her as they looked into the distant darkness. ¡°Jiajia, you are such a perfect wife¡ªbeautiful, refined, loyal.¡±


    Smiling, Anna wrapped her arms around Charles''s neck. ¡°I love hearing those cheesy lines; don¡¯t stop. Say more!¡±


    ¡°Do you remember what lipstick brands you had?¡±


    ¡°Why are you asking that? It was so long ago; how would I remember?¡±


    ¡°Exactly, you wouldn¡¯t remember, because I¡¯m a straight man with a brain full of nonsense.¡±


    Charles''s lips twitched slightly, and suddenly tears welled up. He quickly drew his revolver from his left hand, pointing the dark muzzle at Anna¡¯s calm abdomen.


    ¡°What are you doing, Gao Zhiming?¡± Anna¡¯s face showed a hint of displeasure.


    ¡°You even know my real name; why is yours fake? Why!!¡± Charles''s face twisted as he pulled the trigger.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!!¡± The impact of the bullets sent Anna staggering back, dark green blood splattering everywhere.


    Her eyes widened in disbelief.


    Anna slowly lowered her gaze, trembling slightly, and when she saw the tentacle writhing out of her abdomen, she broke down, frantically tugging at her hair as if she couldn¡¯t accept this reality.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    ¡°What is this? Why is there this thing in my stomach? Gao Zhiming, help me!¡±


    As soon as she finished speaking, her delicate features crumbled like a melting candle. A twisted, gooey, yellow-green tentacled monster appeared on the deck of the Mouse.


    It was just like its counterparts on the island¡ªtwisted and terrifying, with seven or eight tentacles thrashing uncontrollably, resembling a deformed octopus emerging from the water.


    Watching the monster before him, Charles, with tears streaming down his face, felt his hand tremble as he held the gun. Everything in his mind about Anna was a lie.


    In the next moment, the monster opened its gaping maw and lunged at Charles with a roar.


    Charles rolled to the side to dodge it, and his expression quickly hardened as he skillfully reloaded his weapon.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!!¡± Green blood splattered on the monster, but such wounds were insufficient to stop it. With a howl, a tentacle covered in suckers struck Charles''s arm, sending him flying.


    ¡°Why!¡± Gritting his teeth, Charles swiftly drew his black knife and struck down, severing the tentacle as it writhed on the deck.


    The creature howled in retreat, and Charles charged forward.


    As he and the monster reached the bow of the ship, the monster¡¯s tentacles, thin like hair, suddenly spread out, ensnaring Charles like a fishing net.


    The tentacles tightened around him, and he could hear the creaking of his bones.


    ¡°Crack!¡± His ribs began to break¡ªone, two¡ªintense pain made Charles grunt.


    At that critical moment, the cockpit glass shattered, and a bullet struck the monster¡¯s yellow eye, causing its eyeball to explode like a watermelon.


    The howling monster immediately released Charles and fled toward the edge of the ship.


    Gunfire erupted as the others from the turbine room rushed out with their weapons.


    No matter how powerful the flesh creature was, it was still made of flesh and blood. Under the assault of the bullets, its strange body was riddled with holes.


    As the gunfire ceased, the once-mighty monster lay in its own stinking blood, its tentacles trembling and moving slowly.


    Charles approached it, pressing a hand to his aching abdomen.


    Just as he raised his revolver toward the beast¡¯s maw, the front end of the creature coalesced into Anna¡¯s face.


    Anna smiled tragically, dark green blood trailing from the corners of her eyes. ¡°Gao Zhiming, I¡¯m sorry... I didn¡¯t know I was fake¡­¡±


    Those words pierced Charles¡¯s heart like a sharp knife, and his face contorted in pain. He would rather this monster curse him.


    The others gathered around, their expressions heavy as they stood behind Charles.


    ¡°I can¡¯t control it; I¡¯m just the bait it created. It¡¯s stalling for time. Shoot below its eyes; that¡¯s its weak point.¡±


    Looking at the partner he had shared his life with, Charles felt the revolver in his hand grow heavy as a mountain.


    ¡°Gao Zhiming! Hurry! It has strong regenerative abilities!¡±


    Seeing Charles hesitate, Anna turned to Deep beside her. ¡°Shorty, you do it.¡±


    As Deep hesitated, Charles gritted his teeth and raised the gun, pulling the trigger.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!!¡±


    As the bullets hit her, a sorrowful smile appeared on Anna¡¯s face. ¡°Thank you... I really wanted to go home with you¡­¡±


    As soon as she finished speaking, her face began to melt, merging with the completely still flesh monster.


    ¡°Ha... Ha... Hahaha!!¡± Charles suddenly laughed maniacally. He lunged forward, grabbing the monster''s corpse and threw it into the sea with all his might.


    ¡°Don¡¯t think you can trick me again!! I won¡¯t fall for it anymore! You memory-altering monsters! It¡¯s all a lie!! It¡¯s all fake!!¡±


    James looked at Charles, who seemed a bit unhinged, with concern. ¡°Captain, are you alright?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine, hahaha! What could possibly be wrong? The crisis is over; the man-eating monster is dead! This is great news! Chef! Make sure the food is good later; we need to celebrate. Deep, take the sailors and clean this up; I¡¯m going to take the helm!¡±


    For the rest of the day, the crew of the Mouse was cautious, afraid of upsetting their captain.


    But Charles appeared perfectly normal, steering the ship and eating normally, though his behavior was completely different¡ªalmost overly energetic.


    After finishing his meal, Charles returned to his quarters. In the dark cabin, he didn¡¯t turn on the lights. With a bitter expression, he took out a bottle of liquor from the bottom shelf and sat on the bed, drinking deeply.


    ¡°Anna, why did you have to eat people¡­¡±


    ¡°If you hadn¡¯t eaten my crew, I could have pretended I didn¡¯t know¡­¡±

 **Chapter 13: Returning to Port**

    On the pitch-black sea, the corpse of the monster floated with the waves. Just as it was about to sink to the bottom, a steamship, one and a half times larger than the Mouse, passed by.


    A large net with barbs was thrown from the deck, easily ensnaring the creature.


    ¡°Boss, look! I caught a big squid! Look! The tentacles are still moving!¡±


    ¡°Squid? Peter, are you blind? Boss, I think this is a starfish!¡±


    ¡°Everyone, calm down. A big octopus is nothing special. Hmm~ it looks delicious. Peter, take it to the kitchen and let the chefs prepare it.¡±


    ¡°Got it, boss!¡±


    When Charles woke up again, his head throbbed as if it had been pricked with needles. As he loosened his grip, an empty bottle shattered on the floor.


    Ignoring the shards of glass scattered around him, Charles pushed open the door and stepped outside.


    When the crew of the Mouse saw the expressionless Charles return, they all breathed a sigh of relief; it was comforting to see their captain in such a familiar demeanor.


    ¡°Captain, we¡¯ve returned to safe waters. At the current speed of 15 knots, we¡¯ll be in port soon,¡± reported the helmsman, Deep.


    ¡°How¡¯s the bandage?¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s healing quickly, and there¡¯s no persistent fever. Although he¡¯s still unconscious, he should pull through.¡±


    Hearing this news, Charles felt a slight lift in his mood.


    ¡°Don¡¯t let your guard down. I¡¯ll go check on him.¡±


    On the Mouse, only the captain had a private cabin; the first mate, Bandage, lived in the crew¡¯s quarters like everyone else.


    When Charles entered the cabin, he saw Bandage slowly opening his eyes. He hurried over.


    ¡°Don¡¯t move, lie still. Your wounds haven¡¯t healed yet,¡± Charles said, pressing him down as he struggled to sit up.


    ¡°Captain¡­ Anna is a monster¡­ she wants to eat me¡­¡±


    Hearing this, Charles felt a pang in his heart. He forced a shallow smile and reassured him, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, that thing is dead. It¡¯s all over.¡±


    ¡°Then¡­ that¡¯s good¡­¡± Bandage sighed with relief and lay back down.


    ¡°Rest well. We¡¯ll be home soon, and you can complete your mission.¡±


    Glancing at the empty pant leg of Bandage, Charles knew his sailing career was over. No matter how skilled he was at the helm, no ship would want a first mate with only one leg.


    ¡°Oh¡­¡± Bandage fell silent.


    Charles wanted to offer some comfort, but he wasn¡¯t very good at it. In the end, he patted Bandage on the shoulder and walked out.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    The rest of the journey went smoothly, and the Mouse safely returned to the Coral Islands.


    As if the followers of Fortan had some prophetic ability, before the Mouse even docked, Charles saw Hook waiting with a large group of followers.


    ¡°Captain Charles, did you get the holy relic?¡±


    When he saw the golden statue of Fortan emerge from the wooden crate, Hook was instantly overwhelmed with excitement, dancing and bowing before the statue with his followers.


    ¡°What about my payment?¡±


    Hook quickly stood up, trembling as he pulled out a piece of paper from his pocket.


    ¡°This is the original contract! Hurry! Give me the holy relic!¡±


    Charles took the paper, confirmed its authenticity, and tossed the golden statue over.


    Watching Hook, overjoyed and clutching the statue, prepare to leave, Charles frowned. ¡°Hey, did you forget something?¡±


    A tall and burly James approached, carrying Bandage.


    ¡°Assistant Priest¡­ I completed the mission¡­¡± the weak Bandage reported to Hook.


    As if he hadn¡¯t heard Bandage¡¯s words, Hook¡¯s gaze fell on his leg. ¡°What happened to your leg?¡±


    ¡°It¡­ was eaten by a monster¡­¡±


    Hook raised his chin, and two followers behind him approached Bandage, intending to take him away.


    ¡°Good job, Bandage. On the next day of prayer, you will have the honor of becoming a sacrifice.¡±


    ¡°Th¡­ thank you, Assistant Priest¡­¡±


    ¡°What? A sacrifice?!¡± The faces of all the crew members on the Mouse turned pale with fear.


    Charles suddenly raised a hand, stopping the two followers. He glared at Hook and asked, ¡°Is this how your Fortan cult treats its own people?¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t want to get involved in these madmen¡¯s affairs, but having fought alongside Bandage, he considered him a half-friend. He couldn¡¯t watch his friend be thrown into the sea to feed the fish.


    ¡°Captain Charles, being a sacrifice within our church is a great honor.¡±


    ¡°If it¡¯s such an honor, why don¡¯t you take it yourself? Bandage is my first mate; he can¡¯t leave just yet. We need to hand over some matters.¡± Charles exchanged a glance with James, who then stepped back, still holding Bandage.


    Hook appeared anxious, as if the statue was more important than anything else. After giving Charles a deep look, he hurried away.


    ¡°A cripple? If Captain Charles wants him, then he¡¯s yours.¡±


    As they left the dock, Deep rushed over to Bandage, exclaiming loudly.


    ¡°First Mate, what were you thinking? He was going to throw you into the sea to feed the fish, and you actually thanked him?!¡±


    Bandage remained silent.


    ¡°Do you know what it means to be sacrificed to Fortan? Why did you agree?¡± Charles asked as he stepped closer.


    If Bandage started spouting the nonsense from Fortan¡¯s doctrines, Charles planned to send him to a mental hospital for treatment.


    ¡°I¡­ I don¡¯t know. I think¡­ I long to be sacrificed. I¡¯ve forgotten many things¡­ I don¡¯t remember¡­¡± Bandage gave an unexpected response.


    After pacing back and forth for a moment, Charles stopped, looking into the eyes hidden behind Bandage. ¡°Don¡¯t say anything. I need a first mate for my new ship. Will you join me?¡±


    Bandage was silent for a few seconds. ¡°But I have no legs¡­¡±


    ¡°Just one less leg. It¡¯s not a big deal. You can still steer from a chair.¡±


    Seeing Bandage nod, a smile of relief spread across Charles¡¯s face.


    After recruiting his new first mate, he looked up at his crew and, after some consideration, said, ¡°I don¡¯t need to say it; we¡¯re getting an exploration ship! A ship much larger than the Mouse!¡±


    Hearing the captain¡¯s words, excitement spread across everyone¡¯s faces. Not to mention the benefits of discovering a new inhabited island, just in terms of salary, the difference between a cargo ship and an exploration ship was nearly threefold.


    As for the dangers that came with such great rewards, the men who made their living from the sea had never been afraid.


    ¡°Captain, are we going to the shipyard now?¡± Deep asked, but before he finished, he saw his captain shake his head.


    ¡°I¡¯ll handle the ship situation; you all have your own tasks. James, you¡¯re the chief engineer of the new ship. In the meantime, find a first and second assistant engineer.¡±


    The muscular man was so shocked that he shook his head repeatedly. ¡°No way, Captain! I can¡¯t¡­ I really¡ª¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t tell me you can¡¯t find anyone. The port has professional agencies; just go and pick them out. That¡¯s your task.¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t listen to James¡¯s explanation and turned to the eager young man. ¡°Deep, you¡¯re the bosun. Go recruit four sailors.¡±


    Hearing he would be in charge of so many sailors, the young man didn¡¯t hesitate at all; instead, he was very excited.


    ¡°Now I can manage five people! This is so exciting!¡±


    ¡°Freddy, with so many people, you can¡¯t handle the kitchen alone. Go find a cook¡¯s assistant.¡±


    ¡°Got it, my captain.¡±

 **Chapter 14: The Explorers Association**

    The group dispersed at the port, each busy with their own tasks.


    Charles first went to the bank to deposit one million Echoes into his account before rushing to the shipyard.


    His heart raced as he made his way there; it had been a long time since he felt such excitement, almost like the thrill of confessing to a girl for the first time.


    Inside the steel shipyard, Charles was greeted by an old man accompanied by two attendants; he was the owner of the shipyard.


    ¡°Hello, sir. What can I do for you?¡±


    ¡°I need an exploration ship.¡±


    Upon hearing that Charles wanted an exploration ship instead of a cargo or fishing vessel, the old man displayed a look of surprise.


    ¡°Are you sure you want an exploration ship? Have you applied to the Explorers'' Association?¡± he hesitated to confirm again.


    ¡°Not yet. Can¡¯t I buy a ship without applying?¡±


    Wood picked up on the customer''s slight displeasure and quickly explained, ¡°No, no, of course you can! I just wanted to confirm, as there are fewer and fewer adventurous souls like you these days.¡±


    Discovering a new island can be immensely profitable, but behind every success story are thousands of failures.


    The advent of turbines allowed humanity to venture into more unknown seas, making it easier to search for new homes. They once thought they were on the verge of conquering the ocean.


    Unfortunately, humanity is not the main character here; the islands that are easy to explore are few, while many others are fraught with danger, bizarre natives, and deep-sea mysteries that serve as harsh reminders.


    More and more exploration ships went missing, and countless people lost husbands and children. Death eventually cooled humanity''s fervor, and slowly, people stopped viewing exploration ships as heroes, instead referring to them in private as fools seeking death.


    Wood recalled that the last person to purchase an exploration ship did so five years ago, and that individual had predictably died at sea.


    ¡°Sir, what kind of ship do you need? Please, tell me.¡±


    ¡°Not too big, within 70 meters in length, powered by a Glorious turbine, and with a 125mm rifled cannon on the bow,¡± Charles rattled off his requirements.


    He had been preparing for this for a long time, and he had already memorized the configurations of various exploration ships.


    The transaction proceeded quickly. An hour later, Charles saw the exterior of his new ship.


    The streamlined white hull was lined with rivets, significantly thicker than that of the Mouse.


    A thicker smokestack indicated the powerful capabilities of the turbine.


    At first glance, it might seem like just a larger, refurbished version of the Mouse, but the industrial beauty of the cannon on the bow immediately distinguished it from a second-hand cargo ship.


    Length: 65 meters, width: 10 meters, draft: 5.5 meters.


    ¡°This ship was originally ordered by the governor''s navy, but they are not in a hurry. If you need it urgently, I can prioritize it for you.¡±If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take this one. When can it be launched?¡±


    ¡°The interior facilities you need are not yet ready. If you expedite it, it will take about half a month to launch. The total price is 3.5 million Echoes.¡±


    Charles silently calculated the amount. ¡°I have just enough in my account. Selling the Mouse will provide enough resources for the next exploration.¡±


    ¡°Alright, get it sorted out quickly. I¡¯ll come to pick up the ship in half a month.¡±


    After leaving the shipyard, Charles headed straight for the Explorers'' Association.


    Once he had the exploration ship, he would join the Explorers'' Association, a loose organization present on every human island. Its members are all captains of exploration ships.


    Of course, joining isn¡¯t mandatory; it¡¯s just something beneficial that Charles wouldn¡¯t refuse.


    Once he became an explorer, the vast array of nautical charts within the association would be available for free. These charts could cost a fortune outside, and there were additional benefits to being part of this organization; he had done his homework on it.


    However, becoming an explorer came with its drawbacks. Members must explore at least one island each year; failing to meet this requirement would result in losing their explorer status.


    But for Charles, this downside was negligible, as he was already here to explore islands.


    The Explorers'' Association was not far from the dock area, and its striking white stone building was hard to miss.


    Charles glanced at the ship insignia hanging at the top of the building and stepped inside.


    The interior was spacious and echoing; he could hear the sound of his own footsteps.


    Apart from a few counters in the distance, only a handful of men and women sat scattered on sofas to the left, triangular hats on the tables indicating their shared status with Charles.


    As he observed them, they also curiously scrutinized the unfamiliar face at the entrance.


    After quickly deciphering the words above the counters, Charles approached the leftmost one. Just as he was filling out the application form with a quill, a pale arm wrapped around his neck.


    ¡°Whoa.¡± Charles instinctively reached for his waist, the barrel of his revolver pressing against the belly of the person behind him.


    A slightly hoarse female voice whispered in his ear, ¡°Relax, newbie. This isn¡¯t the sea; there¡¯s no danger here.¡±


    The person released Charles¡¯s neck and pulled over a chair, crossing her legs as she sat beside him.


    The newcomer was a striking woman with bright white hair, long legs, and a deliberately revealing figure.


    If it weren¡¯t for her imposing height of nearly two meters, any man would have wanted to get closer to her.


    More than her beauty, Charles was concerned about the wooden staff at her waist, which seemed to be her weapon. Women at sea were rare, but those who survived were no ordinary individuals.


    ¡°Is there something you need?¡± Charles asked as he holstered his gun.


    ¡°I haven¡¯t seen a newbie in a while. Come, let me introduce myself. I¡¯m Elizabeth, captain of the Black Rose. What¡¯s your name, darling?¡± The towering beauty asked with a hint of a smile.


    Charles didn¡¯t respond, focusing instead on filling out the application form. The harsh conditions at sea had left him disinterested in interacting with strangers.


    However, the woman beside him didn¡¯t seem to take the hint and continued talking.


    A waft of fragrance surrounded him as Elizabeth leaned in closer, brazenly peering at Charles''s application form.


    ¡°Charles? What a nice name. Ah, that place isn¡¯t very important; just write something down.¡±


    From the sofa in the distance, a burly man laughed loudly, ¡°Elizabeth, when I came here for the first time, you weren¡¯t this friendly.¡±


    Elizabeth shot him a disdainful glance. ¡°You¡¯re not like him. I don¡¯t want to sleep with you, so why would I help you?¡±


    The burly man didn¡¯t get offended; instead, he laughed along with his companions.


    ¡°Scritch.¡± Charles accidentally punctured a hole in his application form.


    He had suspected the woman¡¯s motives were not pure, but he hadn¡¯t expected this; a woman who made her living at sea was indeed exceptional.


    Ignoring Elizabeth beside him, Charles quickly finished and handed it over.


    The staff member took the application and began operating the various gears of the machine with practiced ease.


    Elizabeth didn¡¯t care that the man next to her was ignoring her; she continued talking to herself.


    ¡°Charles, since it¡¯s your first time here, let me introduce you. The Explorers'' Association¡¯s role is actually quite simple: to assist us in finding new islands.¡±


    ¡°Of course, this isn¡¯t free. Once you join the association, any captain who becomes a governor must also establish a branch of the Explorers'' Association on their island.¡±


    Charles interrupted her, ¡°Thanks for the reminder; I already knew all of that. No need to remind me.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? It seems Mr. Charles did a lot of preparation before coming here. Do you have time later? Want to come aboard my ship for a visit?¡±

 **Chapter 15: The Explorers**

    ¡°Thanks, I¡¯ll come by when I have time.¡±


    As soon as Charles finished speaking, his expression soured¡ªnot because of Elizabeth beside him, but because the auditory hallucinations in his mind had started again.


    With a twisted face, Charles began to knock on his forehead with his wrist, each knock harder than the last.


    Elizabeth immediately noticed something was off with Charles, her eyes widening in surprise. ¡°My goddess, how long has it been since you last rested?¡±


    She pulled out a green, jelly-like substance from her chest and handed it to him. ¡°Hurry, eat this; it can effectively relieve your symptoms.¡±


    Charles hesitated for a moment but ultimately took it and swallowed.


    A refreshing sensation slid down his throat; the whispers in his ears persisted, but the irritation began to fade.


    ¡°Thank you, what is this?¡± Charles looked at Elizabeth with a friendlier gaze.


    Elizabeth chuckled lightly. ¡°No need to thank me; I don¡¯t really know what it is. I just know it can alleviate the whispers of the Furtan God. If you want more, you can dig some up on Redwood Island, but don¡¯t eat too much; it can be addictive.¡±


    Redwood Island¡­ Charles mentally noted this new location.


    The burly man from before had somehow moved behind them, giving Charles a pat on the shoulder. ¡°Newbie, if the whispers of the Furtan God are affecting you this much, you should take a break.¡±


    Charles felt much of his wariness dissipate. Though he didn¡¯t know why, he could sense the goodwill from these people. It had been a long time since he felt such obvious kindness.


    Elizabeth glanced at the staff member still operating the machinery and pulled Charles toward a nearby sofa. ¡°Come with me; I¡¯ll tell you some things that most people don¡¯t know.¡±


    Charles wanted to refuse, but the burly man wrapped his arm around Charles¡¯s shoulder, guiding him forward. ¡°Don¡¯t be shy; as the old saying goes, if you want to survive at sea, you need to make friends.¡±


    By the time Charles realized what was happening, he was already seated on the sofa, being curiously scrutinized by seven or eight oddly dressed captains.


    Their gazes held curiosity and confusion but no hostility.


    Elizabeth plopped down right next to Charles, her soft body leaning against him. ¡°Do you think we¡¯re a bit too enthusiastic? Hehe, the sea is dark enough; we should be friendly on land.¡±


    ¡°It is a bit unexpected; it¡¯s quite different from what I read in the museum,¡± Charles relaxed a bit.The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    Upon hearing Charles¡¯s words, a round-eyed fat man exclaimed loudly, ¡°What does the book say we are? A bunch of legal pirates? Money-crazed lunatics? People who say such things should be fed to the fish! If I become a governor, anyone who speaks like that will lose their tongue!¡±


    Elizabeth shot the fat man a glare and turned back to Charles with a smile. ¡°This place is a gathering spot for the explorers of Coral Island~. You can exchange information here in the future.¡±


    Charles understood; this was a salon for exploration ship captains to communicate.


    ¡°What kind of information can be traded? Island intel?¡±


    ¡°Anything and everything¡ªislands, routes, relics. Any useful information can be shared. Who knows, what you can¡¯t figure out, someone else might have a solution. If you have any questions, feel free to ask; we¡¯ll help you out,¡± she said.


    What she said hit the mark, and Charles had a question in mind.


    After pondering for a few seconds, he asked, ¡°Does anyone have any clues about the Northern Land of Light?¡±


    The weight of Charles¡¯s question was greater than he had anticipated. The sound of chairs scraping against the floor echoed as everyone instinctively distanced themselves from him, as if he were carrying a plague.


    Even Elizabeth moved to the other side of the sofa, her brows furrowing. ¡°You¡¯re not one of those Sun God cultists, are you?¡±


    Charles chuckled awkwardly. ¡°I¡¯m not; I don¡¯t worship any deities.¡±


    Elizabeth sighed in relief, patting her ample chest. ¡°That¡¯s true; you don¡¯t look like one of those lunatics.¡±


    The previously tense atmosphere relaxed immediately, and everyone began to chatter.


    ¡°You scared me! I don¡¯t want to deal with those lunatics. The Land of Light? Why are you asking about that?¡±


    ¡°If you¡¯re asking about that legendary song, I¡¯ve heard it before. Let me give you a line: ¡®On the Northern Island, there lies a ladder to light, eternal brightness and¡ª¡¯ Oh, sorry, I forgot the rest.¡±


    ¡°How could we possibly know about the legendary stuff? We¡¯re not gods.¡±


    ¡°Newbie, you¡¯re quite humorous.¡±


    A hint of disappointment crossed Charles¡¯s face. He had hoped that the well-traveled exploration captains might have some leads, but it seemed humanity had been at sea for so long that their true homeland had become a distant legend.


    Just as everyone was discussing, a woman from behind the counter approached, holding a stack of books.


    With a smile, she said, ¡°Mr. Charles, you are now a qualified explorer. Here¡¯s your certification; please take it. Now, let me introduce you to the task details.¡±


    As she opened the stack of books, Charles realized they were nautical charts filled with dense text.


    ¡°Any exploration task must be reported to the association, and food and fuel will be reimbursed. The danger levels vary, and so do the rewards.¡±


    Charles took the charts and began to examine them closely.


    He could see that along the explored edges, the uncharted dark areas were divided into smaller sections by white lines, each marked with a reward amount.


    To Charles¡¯s surprise, several scattered islands were marked in the unexplored waters, including the Golden Statue Island he had visited before.


    A slender, pale finger reached over, pointing at the sea area, and Elizabeth¡¯s sultry voice rang in his ear. ¡°Charles, since you just arrived, I advise you to explore the waters for a few years first; get familiar before venturing to the islands.¡±


    While she was right, Charles didn¡¯t think so. He pointed to the Golden Statue Island and asked, ¡°What does this number mean?¡±


    A bright red ¡°4¡± was marked on the island.


    The fat man interjected, ¡°That¡¯s the danger level. Explored islands are rated at 0. If a ship doesn¡¯t return after an exploration, the danger level increases by 1. For a level 4 island like this, you shouldn¡¯t even think about it as a newbie. Go explore the sea for two years first.¡±


    Elizabeth shot him a glance and leaned closer to Charles, whispering, ¡°Don¡¯t mind him. I think you have great potential; you could explore that island within a year.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve been there.¡± Charles¡¯s casual remark caused an immediate hush around him, and everyone stared wide-eyed at the young man before them.

 **Chapter 16: The Narwhal**

    "What did you say?! You¡¯ve been to that level 4 island?!" The fat man was so shocked that his voice cracked, his expression was quite something to behold.


    The other captains were equally astonished; just moments ago, they had been warning this newcomer not to go to the island, and now he claimed he had already explored it?


    "Why is there only a danger level for the island and no reward amount?" Charles asked the next question.


    "Don¡¯t change the subject! When did you go to that island? What was there?!"


    Charles furrowed his brow slightly and leaned back to avoid the fat man¡¯s spittle. "The Furtan God sent me there to retrieve something; is there a problem with that? Isn¡¯t that how everyone explores islands?"


    At this moment, Elizabeth also lost her composure, a slight flush appearing on her pale face, looking somewhat excited.


    "Charles, you might not understand the steps of exploring islands yet. The tasks for explorers are broken down into many categories: first, exploring routes; then assessing the danger levels of the natives; and finally, exploring and conquering the islands. Each type of task has different rewards in the association."


    "And you, a newcomer, have already completed several of the earlier steps. You just need to conquer the island next! The whole island will be yours! You¡¯re the next lucky one, the next governor!"


    So that¡¯s how it is. No wonder there was no reward listed on the map; it turns out the exploration of islands is so detailed, Charles thought to himself.


    "Enough about that. New¡­ Charles, what resources were on that island? Was it dangerous?"


    After considering for a few seconds, Charles decided the island had little value and shared the information about it.


    Upon hearing that the island had no food or fresh water and was filled with monsters that could erase human memories, everyone¡¯s faces showed regret.


    "Alas, another dead island. I thought I would witness history, see the fastest governor."


    "Yeah, without fresh water, there¡¯s no use in conquering it."


    "If there were even a little resource, we could form a conquering fleet for the next step."


    As others debated this topic, Charles pointed to the northernmost level 5 island on the map and said to the nearby female recorder, "In half a month, my ship will set sail; I need to explore this island."


    Elizabeth opened her mouth as if to advise against it but ultimately held her tongue. This guy was truly a bit unpredictable; he was no ordinary newcomer.


    Once the recorder registered the task, Charles surveyed the now-silent captains. "Excuse me, does anyone know where I can get weapons?"


    The last expedition had taught him a lesson; Charles needed to enhance the combat capability of the entire ship¡ªrelying solely on a revolver was insufficient.


    "If it¡¯s just regular weapons, ask them." The burly man gestured to the staff behind the counter. "The association also deals in weaponry; as long as the price is right, they can get anything."If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    The recorder kindly said, "Please wait a moment; I¡¯ll bring over the weapon list."


    Charles suddenly felt that the founders of the association were true business geniuses. The claim of doing it for all humanity was a facade; they were really in the explosive profit arms trade.


    Soon, several brochures were placed in front of Charles, detailing various models of firearms, with bullet prices clearly marked.


    The technology in the Sea of Earth was somewhat outdated; most firearms were relics from World War I, and it was unclear whether more advanced weapons were unavailable or simply not listed.


    "Charles, these things may look decent, but they¡¯re not very useful, especially since many things on the island can¡¯t be dealt with using bullets."


    The burly man¡¯s words brought Charles back to reality; indeed, given the island''s peculiarities, sheer violence would not be very effective.


    He didn¡¯t believe that switching his revolver for another type of firearm would make a fundamental difference when exploring the Golden Statue Island; firearms couldn¡¯t stop the alteration of memories.


    "Then what do you use?" Charles asked.


    "Human lives," a raspy voice interjected from the crowd, and the previously lively atmosphere began to cool.


    The speaker was a middle-aged man with a dark complexion and a hooked nose, leaning forward with gray pupils fixated on Charles.


    "I know what you want to ask. Expecting us to have any exploration tips? Sure, we all have different abilities." He raised one hand, and a flicker of blue flame danced in his palm.


    "But even if we have relics with unique powers, the death rate among explorers is still frighteningly high. A successful governor is backed by countless deaths. You didn¡¯t get hurt last time just by luck; don¡¯t blame me for speaking the truth; reality is that cruel."


    Hearing this, Charles felt a sense of reassurance. The Sea of Earth never showed mercy to humanity.


    He addressed the exploration captains before him, "Everyone, let¡¯s chat more another time; I need to prepare supplies for the voyage."


    As Charles walked out the door, the burly man wondered aloud, "What do you think he¡¯s going north for? He can¡¯t really be looking for that Land of Light, right?"


    No one answered his question, and the hall fell silent for a moment.


    In the following half month, Charles didn¡¯t idle away his time. Aside from preparing supplies, he focused on overall physical training and practicing marksmanship.


    Life on land passed quickly, and before he knew it, half a month had gone by.


    The brand-new exploration ship quietly docked in the harbor, its streamlined hull reflecting the light, the black deck cannons gleaming, and the sturdy body made Charles gaze at it with a hint of infatuation.


    "She¡¯s beautiful. Don¡¯t you think?" Charles spoke with a mix of excitement and anticipation.


    "Captain, what¡¯s her name? It¡¯s not going to be called the Rat, is it?" asked Deep, standing in front of five crew members.


    Looking at the 125-caliber iron cannon on the bow, Charles thought for a moment and replied, "Narwhal. Her name is Narwhal!"


    After naming the new ship, Charles turned to the unfamiliar faces. The Narwhal was not a cargo ship like the Rat; whether many or few, it was meant for exploration, and every crew member needed to be accounted for.


    One bosun, four sailors, one first mate, one second mate, one chief engineer, one first assistant engineer, one cook, one assistant cook, and one captain¡ª13 crew members in total.


    The crew included both young and old, tall and short, all male, with some local men having curled ears.


    As Charles observed them, the crew looked back at him with curiosity.


    Life on a ship was different from life on land; once at sea, the entire vessel became a closed environment, and the captain was the king of that ship, controlling the fate of everyone on board. If a captain was unreliable, he could endanger all lives.


    When they saw Charles¡¯s face, their worries eased slightly. This young captain with black eyes, although young, was known to many as an experienced sailor.


    "I believe everyone knows what we¡¯re here to do, so I won¡¯t deceive you. Currently, the death rate for exploration ships at sea is one in five. If anyone wants to back out, now¡¯s your chance."


    No one moved in the crowd. Those standing there were not first-time sailors; they all understood the risks of this journey, as well as the potential benefits of successfully exploring a new island.


    If the captain became the new island governor, they would all rise with him. Going to sea was a gamble, so why not gamble a little bigger?


    "Very well, everyone aboard!"

 **Chapter 17: The Island**

    Charles and his crew boarded the Narwhal. Compared to the dilapidated Rat, the Narwhal was undoubtedly much more spacious and clean; just looking at it was a delight.


    He ran through every cabin, inspecting thoroughly to ensure everything was in order. As captain, he needed to be as familiar with every part of the ship as he was with his own body.


    After confirming that everything was functioning properly, Charles returned to the cockpit and waved his hand lightly. The Narwhal''s smokestack began to emit thick black smoke, and the ship slowly sailed toward the deep sea.


    Glancing at the diminishing Coral Island through the glass, Charles approached the communication pipe and shouted, "Chief Engineer, how does the new ship feel?"


    After a few seconds, James¡¯s hearty voice came through the pipe. "Captain, the ship is great! The steam is coming out quickly! And it¡¯s only 39 degrees down here."


    "Crank the turbine to maximum; let¡¯s test its speed."


    "Yes, Captain."


    As the black smoke began to billow out of the smokestack, the Narwhal''s speed increased. When it reached its peak, Charles felt as if he were driving a speedboat.


    He estimated that the Narwhal was at least three times faster than the Rat.


    Just then, he caught sight of something white on the surface of the water. "Chief Engineer, slow down!"


    The speeding Narwhal decelerated, and Charles could see what it was¡ªa corpse, swollen and grotesque.


    Instead of lying in the water to be devoured by fish, it was eerily standing on the surface, motionless, staring at the Narwhal.


    Charles wasn¡¯t curious about this creature¡¯s origin; he had seen weirder things at sea. He just wanted to find a target for his new cannon.


    "Boom!" The recoil from the deck cannon jolted the ship.


    Although Charles had never fired a cannon before and his aim was likely poor, after firing a dozen rounds, the bloated corpse was instantly blown apart.


    Whatever force had brought it back to its feet had no power against cannonballs.


    Charles was certain that if he had been aboard this ship during the encounter with the marker monster, the outcome would have been entirely different.


    After testing the new ship''s performance, Charles turned his gaze to the sea chart on the wall.


    It was the map provided by the Explorer Association; with this and a compass, they could locate their target.


    "Let¡¯s follow Route 6. When we reach Marker 68, we¡¯ll turn south toward our destination." Charles traced his finger along the map.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    "Understood, Captain!" replied the helmsman, the red-haired second mate, who looked a bit excited and was glancing around.


    "I remember your name is... Krona?"


    "Yes, Captain, that¡¯s my name, given by my mother. Captain, is it true what Frey said? That you once explored an island? Can those monsters really create a nonexistent person in someone¡¯s memory? How did you find them back then?"


    Charles frowned slightly, as if recalling an unpleasant memory. "Just steer the ship well. When the time comes, the first mate will take over for you."


    Seeing his captain walk out, Krona felt puzzled. "Did I ask something I shouldn¡¯t have? I had some compliments prepared."


    Days passed at sea, and the old crew and new crew were gradually getting to know each other. Aside from Deep, who was too young and somewhat rebellious, the others were getting along quite well.


    The Narwhal was fast, and after just seven days, they arrived near their target area.


    Bright beams of light scanned the dark sea, searching for the target island.


    The sea chart and compass could only give a rough location; they would have to find the exact coordinates through tedious searching.


    In the cockpit, Krona looked at Charles. "Captain, I heard some people at sea have special ways to find islands that are much better than this method. It seems like some kind of magic. Do you know it?"


    "Stop talking nonsense and steer the ship," Charles thought the second mate was being overly chatty.


    "I... I have a method..." Bandage, who was seated, rarely interjected.


    Seeing both their gazes on him, Bandage slowly continued, "In the church... there¡¯s a ritual that can pray for the help of the Furtan God, but it requires... a human sacrifice."


    Charles looked at Bandage with mixed feelings; it seemed his first mate hadn¡¯t yet escaped from the Furtan Church. Hopefully, time would lessen the cult''s brainwashing effect on him.


    "Forget those disgusting things; we don¡¯t need them."


    "Captain, look! What¡¯s that?" Krona pointed ahead, and Charles turned his gaze to see a blurry island appearing in the distance¡ªthey had found it.


    Excited crew members gathered on the deck, gazing at the distant island.


    Learning from past experiences, Charles did not rush to land but had the Narwhal circle around the island for observation.


    The brightness of the lights was limited, revealing only the island''s periphery. The island was large; it took three hours for the Narwhal to make a complete circuit at its speed. Under the light, the island appeared extremely barren.


    The island was filled with oddly shaped rocks, some as tall as three or four stories, while others were half the size of a person. They were spaced apart, seemingly following some kind of pattern, giving Charles the impression of arriving at a quarry.


    "Can people live here?" Deep hesitantly asked, a question no one could answer.


    Charles knew that regardless of whether the island could support life, it certainly posed some danger. This was a level 5 danger island, and five exploration ships had disappeared after attempting to explore it.


    "Let¡¯s throw some live fish onto the island and see if there are any meat-eating creatures."


    At Charles''s command, some fish were tossed onto the beach, their bodies deliberately cut to release blood, the scent of it wafting through the air as everyone anxiously watched.


    The suffocated fish soon died, and after half an hour, Charles suddenly spotted a pair of eyes shining among the rocks. "Squeak, squeak, squeak~"


    With black fur, a long tail, and black eyes the size of green beans, it was an ordinary mouse.


    In front of everyone, the mouse scurried over to a dead fish and began to gnaw at it.


    Joy spread across the crew''s faces; the appearance of a normal creature was good news. If a mouse could survive on this island, then humans likely could too.


    But before they could celebrate, more greedy eyes emerged from the rocks. Groups of mice surged toward the dead fish like waves, and the white beach was suddenly covered in black-brown fur.


    The sound of chewing echoed from the shore, sending chills down the spines of those on the ship.


    "Uh... there seem to be a lot of mice..." Krona, the second mate, said with a strained smile as he looked at his captain.

 **Chapter 18: The Mice**

    At this moment, Charles was thinking even more. Mice are usually at the bottom of the ecological chain, and with so many of them, there must be other predators on the island. He didn¡¯t know what they were yet, but he was certain they weren¡¯t cats.


    While Charles was pondering, the mice had already retreated, leaving the yellowish-white sand devoid of even a fish bone.


    ¡°Crew, drop anchor, weapons and explosives ready, prepare to disembark,¡± Charles commanded, and the crew began to move.


    For this exploration, he had prepared more explosives; although gunpowder might not be useful, it was better to have it than not.


    If the only danger on the island was those mice, the explosives would surely come in handy.


    Two wooden boats were lowered into the sea. Except for the injured crew member who stayed behind to guard the ship, everyone else got on board, with a cloth strip tied around their shoulders.


    The strip bore each crew member''s name and position to ensure that no one would go missing or unnoticed when returning to the ship.


    The group slowly made their way between the rocks. The more experienced sailors remained relatively calm, while the newcomers were quite anxious, startled by every little sound.


    As they ventured deeper into the island, the rocks became looser, and animal bones began to appear scattered on the ground.


    A hint of disappointment crossed Charles''s face; it seemed that the passage to the surface was not here.


    Just as he hesitated about whether to go further, a red light suddenly flickered between the distant rocks.


    Charles quickly shrank back behind a large rock and whispered to the others, ¡°Put out the torches!¡±


    Although the other crew members didn¡¯t understand why, they followed the captain¡¯s orders.


    With the light of the torches extinguished, the red glow became clearer, shimmering between the rocks as it drifted closer.


    When it got nearer, everyone could see the true form of that creature.


    It resembled a swollen leech, measuring approximately five meters in length. The red glow emanated from spots beneath its translucent skin, flashing ominously.


    Despite lacking wings, this leech could glide through the air, seemingly searching for something, its six eye stalks writhing as they scanned the surroundings.


    The humans crouched behind the rocks, holding their breath; some of the timid ones even closed their eyes, trembling.


    Charles focused intently on those eye stalks, knowing just by looking that this was not a peaceful creature and that it was best to avoid provoking it.The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    Suddenly, someone¡¯s stomach growled softly, but in the silence of the environment, it sounded like thunder.


    ¡°Swish!¡± The leech¡¯s eye stalks instantly turned towards the humans, its spiny mouth emitting a terrifying growl, and its translucent body flickered before disappearing right before their eyes.


    ¡°Bad news! That thing can turn invisible; it¡¯s coming this way!!¡±


    Charles gripped the explosives at his waist, his body tense and his expression resolute, ready to fight the monster to the death.


    The other crew members also tightened their grips on their weapons, their heartbeats quickening.


    As Charles silently counted down the seconds and was about to throw the explosives, the dark environment was suddenly illuminated by red light. The leech appeared out of nowhere above a rock, its eye stalks scanning the distance.


    ¡°Eek! Eek! Eek~¡± The sound of mice squeaking came from that direction, growing louder as if deliberately created.


    The leech twisted its swollen body and swiftly swam towards the sound, the red glow vanishing.


    In the darkness, Charles, covered in cold sweat, exhaled; he never expected to be saved by the mice.


    He turned to speak to the person next to him, only to find a pair of glowing green eyes appearing on his left.


    But this was just the beginning; more and more eyes lit up, layer upon layer, sending shivers down Charles''s spine.


    He struck a match against the rock wall, lighting it up. The fire illuminated the surroundings, revealing countless mice piled around them, surrounding them!


    ¡°Hello! I¡¯m Lily, nice to meet you!¡±


    The sudden voice from a female mouse froze the crew¡¯s instinctive attack movements.


    After a moment of recognition, Charles saw that the speaker was a white mouse standing among the crowd. Unlike its peers, this white mouse moved with a certain grace, its eyes filled with intelligence.


    The mice seemed to recognize Charles as their leader and jumped in front of him, looking up. ¡°Hello, I¡¯m Lily. What¡¯s your name?¡±


    Charles glanced around at the mice and replied softly, ¡°Charles.¡±


    Just as the two finished their initial conversation, a roar suddenly echoed from the direction the leech had flown away.


    ¡°Oh no! Quick, come with me! My friend can only hold it off for a moment; that thing is coming back! I¡¯ll take you to my home.¡±


    After saying this, the white mouse led the other mice to retreat quickly.


    Seeing the red glow rise again in the distance, Charles dared not hesitate and hurriedly followed with the crew.


    Compared to that monster, at least these mice seemed to be capable of communication.


    In the darkness, Charles and his crew followed the mice through a chaotic scramble, eventually arriving at the entrance of a cave over a meter high.


    As they entered with torches in hand, a pair of eyes fixed intently on the humans entering their cave, and whispering sounds echoed around them.


    After lighting several torches and throwing them into the air, the light illuminated everything, revealing a cavern about the size of a football field, filled with brown mice staring at them.


    The sight of the mice wasn¡¯t surprising, but some of them held bone tools like humans, which was rather eerie.


    Among them were low, dome-shaped houses neatly arranged, and Charles even saw a large mouse teaching a little mouse to count! He felt as if he had stumbled into a land of little people.


    The white mouse hopped onto a toy-sized stool and said, ¡°Can you take me home? I miss my mom.¡±


    A swarm of mice rushed up to each human, offering a bowl of brown liquid, seemingly a gesture of hospitality.


    Home? Charles looked around at the peculiar mouse cave. ¡°Isn¡¯t this your home?¡±


    ¡°Of course not! I¡¯m not a mouse! I¡¯m a human!¡± The white mouse protested, puffing up in indignation.


    ¡°Human?¡± All the crew members stared wide-eyed at the little mouse, unable to see how it could possibly be a human.


    Seeing their disbelief, Lily the white mouse quickly began to explain.


    ¡°I really am a human! My parents took me on a boat to go to the Island of He Fang to see my grandpa, but we encountered a whirlpool, and I fell into the sea. When I woke up, I had turned into this. I don¡¯t know why.¡±


    Sure! Here¡¯s the translation of the passage into English:


    ---

 **Chapter 19: 096**

    Hearing the mouse say this, Deep still looked skeptical and asked again, ¡°Little guy, where do you live? How many people are in your family?¡±


    The white mouse straightened up. ¡°I live on Coral Island, East Zone 12, No. 158. My dad is named Oliver, and he¡¯s a doctor. My mom is named Olivia. I¡¯m 11 years old. I¡¯m a girl, hum! How about that? Now do you believe me?¡±


    The first mate Deep wanted to say something else, but Charles held him back. He didn¡¯t care where this little creature came from; at this moment, he was more concerned about the danger outside.


    ¡°Lily, I can take you home, but first you need to tell me what those things were.¡±


    The white mouse shook her head. ¡°I don¡¯t know, and neither do the uncles. I named them ¡®Big Fat Worms.¡¯ If you encounter them, you must escape separately! They¡¯re very powerful; not only can they become invisible, but they can also spit saliva. My friends who were caught by them never came back.¡±


    ¡°Are there many of them?¡±


    ¡°Many, many! If you go past the rocky area, there¡¯s a mountain, and inside that mountain, there are countless of them.¡± Lily gestured wildly with her little paws.


    After assessing the strength of both sides, Charles fell into deep thought. This island had no way to the surface, and with so many dangerous creatures, it seemed unnecessary to explore.


    ¡°Lily, we¡¯ll head back to Coral Island now. If you want to go home, you can follow us.¡±


    He could sense the friendliness of the white mouse, and he empathized with her desire to return home.


    Just as Charles turned to leave, a series of squeaks erupted, and a large group of mice bared their teeth, blocking their way back.


    ¡°Wait, uncles need your help! After we help him, can we leave?¡±


    Charles shook his head, not wanting to complicate matters. ¡°Sorry, we can¡¯t help with that. Let the mice clear the way.¡±


    The naive Lily didn¡¯t seem to understand Charles¡¯s intent and said in a coaxing tone, ¡°Oh come on, please! That thing is really important to the uncles! Look, the uncle is coming out!¡±


    Everyone turned to see a giant mouse, about the size of a small dog, crawling out of the shadows, its bright yellow eyes scanning the humans.


    This large mouse clearly wasn¡¯t as friendly as Lily; its eyes were filled with hostility.


    ¡°Chirp!¡± The giant mouse suddenly called out, and the surrounding mice surged forward, looking like they were about to swallow Charles and his companions whole.


    In an instant, Charles and the others drew their weapons, pointing them at the mouse king.


    Seeing the standoff, Lily¡¯s furry face showed anxiety as she rushed to the giant mouse, chattering away as if trying to communicate.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    After a while, it seemed that Lily and the giant mouse had reached an agreement. With a hint of apology, Lily said, ¡°I¡¯m sorry, uncle said he has already sent mice to seal off the beach. If you don¡¯t help him, he won¡¯t let you get on the boat¡­¡±


    Charles chuckled softly; he hadn¡¯t expected to be threatened by a mouse.


    ¡°Zzz~¡± The fuse of a small bomb was lit.


    Lily recognized what Charles was holding, and her fur stood on end as she shouted, ¡°Don¡¯t light it! Uncle will give you a reward! It¡¯s a treasure, a good treasure!¡±


    Charles pinched out the lit fuse. ¡°What kind of treasure?¡±


    He didn¡¯t want to escalate things with the mice; if the reward was right, he could consider it.


    Soon, he saw two mice dragging two items towards him: a mask and a piece of paper.


    When Charles picked up the paper and saw the text, his eyes widened in surprise. The content of the report was indeed unexpected.


    ¡°Project Number: 096¡±


    ¡°Project Name: ¡®Clown Mask¡¯¡±


    ¡°Containment Level: ¡®Level 3 item containment, currently contained in Laboratory No. 3.¡¯¡±


    ¡°Description: 096 appears as a clown mask with a red nose and a snow-white exterior, displaying a joyful expression. It was discovered at the circus on Red Tree Island [data deleted]. The previous owner of 096 had gone insane; after psychological evaluation, this 27-year-old woman exhibited significant personality changes and multiple personality disorders.¡±


    ¡°Experiment Record 1: Have test subject 654 wear 096.¡±


    ¡°Ten minutes after wearing it, the test subject¡¯s body became unusually soft and agile, with a significant increase in strength, reaching near human limits. Able to perform all acrobatic feats, including but not limited to: trapeze, blindfolded knife throwing, and contortion.¡±


    ¡°Thirty minutes after wearing it, the test subject¡¯s mood became somewhat euphoric, and began communicating with the doctor outside the blast-proof glass, attempting to tell poorly executed jokes to amuse the doctor.¡±


    ¡°One hour after wearing it, the test subject began talking to themselves, blaming another person inside their body, accompanied by neurotic laughter.¡±


    ¡°Three hours after wearing it, the subject attempted to cut their own trachea with their nails. Security personnel injected anesthetic gas to remove 096. Three days later, the subject¡¯s physical and mental abnormalities did not disappear, and the subject was deemed worthless and destroyed.¡±


    This seemed to be a report indicating that some people were trying to understand an artifact called the clown mask through scientific means.


    Charles shifted his gaze from the paper to the mask on the mice¡¯s back; that item was likely the clown mask described in the document.


    After hesitating for a moment, Charles picked up the mask and put it on his face. In an instant, he felt his body become half as light, as if he were walking on cotton.


    With a gentle push of his feet, he performed a perfect backflip, landing steadily.


    ¡°Wow, this thing is amazing! If I went back in time, I¡¯d definitely win a gold medal at the Olympics!¡±


    The next moment, Charles quickly removed the mask, staring at the pale, smiling face with trepidation.


    Although those words had come from his mouth, the tone and pitch didn¡¯t sound like himself at all; it was as if he had suddenly become a different person.


    ¡°How about it? Do you agree? I just convinced uncle for a long time,¡± Lily jumped to Charles¡¯s feet, tugging at his pants leg excitedly.


    After a moment of hesitation, Charles picked up Lily in his hands. ¡°Why do we have to help? I see that these mice have high intelligence; they should be more useful than us.¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t have hands! That thing is locked in a room, and uncle said you need hands to open it. Don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s really easy and not dangerous at all. I¡¯ve been there several times!¡±


    Charles thought for a moment and then said, ¡°Alright, I agree.¡±


    Although this artifact was quite strange, as long as he controlled the wearing time, it could be very useful, whether for escape or combat.


    Even if he didn¡¯t use it, he could sell it to other captains when he returned.


    Upon hearing Charles¡¯s agreement, Lily jumped up and down in excitement. ¡°Great! I knew you were a good person!¡±


    ---

 **Chapter 20: Laboratory No. 3**

    ¡°Come on, follow me! Once we find the treasure for Uncle, we can go home, hurry, hurry!¡± Lily jumped down from Charles''s hands and ran toward the cave entrance, a large group of brown mice following closely behind.


    Emerging from the mouse hole, Lily led Charles and the others swiftly through the rocks.


    Every now and then, a red glow from the flying leeches would appear in the distance, at which point Lily would send a mouse to distract those creatures.


    After dodging and weaving for about half an hour, the irregular rocks began to thin out, and a flat rock wall suddenly appeared before Charles.


    It was too dark for him to see what was above, making it hard to tell if it was a mountain or a giant wall.


    After walking along the base of the wall for a few more minutes, a high-tech iron door abruptly came into view.


    Before Charles could ask, the mice quickly stacked up, and a mouse named ¡°Mousey¡± pulled the doorknob with all its might. With a ¡°click,¡± the door opened.


    As Charles followed the mice through the doorway, he was stunned to find a straight, spacious corridor inside. Although thick dust covered everything and the place was in disarray, the minimalist design made him feel as if he had momentarily returned to a modern hospital.


    ¡°This architectural style isn¡¯t built by those people outside,¡± Charles quickly concluded in his mind.


    ¡°Lily, are you sure that thing is here?¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t think this building was the work of the flying leeches; he felt that the mice¡¯s mission was not that simple.


    The white mouse didn¡¯t answer. After glancing around, she dashed into a room and dragged out a large piece of paper.


    Charles touched it and found it was somewhat hard, resembling plastic. On it was a simple map marked with different areas in a strange script: control room, lounge, cafeteria, and so on.


    Lily jumped onto the map, first stepping on the eastern corner, then darting to a spot marked with a prohibition sign in the west. ¡°We¡¯re here, and the thing is over there! Let¡¯s go get it!¡±


    Looking at the map, Charles had an inkling of a guess, but now wasn¡¯t the time to think about that. This place didn¡¯t seem safe, so it was better to find the item and leave quickly.


    Suddenly, a shadow appeared at the end of the corridor, startling Deep, who was at the front, causing him to shout.


    Charles quickly pressed down on his gun. ¡°It¡¯s okay, just a corpse.¡±


    Everyone gathered around, and the light from the torches illuminated the figure. A dried-up corpse was kneeling on the ground, its mouth wide open and hands outstretched, as if it were screaming.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Charles noticed some details on the corpse. A metal badge hung from the right chest of what looked like a suit.


    He crouched down and picked it up. ¡°Dr. Dott, Deputy Director of Laboratory No. 3.¡±


    Charles''s pupils contracted as he realized something and immediately pulled out the paper from the clown mask.


    ¡°Containment Level: ¡®Level 3 item containment, currently contained in Laboratory No. 3.¡¯¡±


    So this was Laboratory No. 3, and the mask was stolen from here. Who built Laboratory No. 3? Who were they? One question was answered, but more emerged.


    Lily clung to Charles''s pant leg, urging them to move forward. ¡°Let¡¯s hurry! Once we help Uncle, we can go home!¡±


    Charles initially thought there would be many dangers along the way, but Lily hadn¡¯t lied; aside from the chaotic environment and the occasional corpse, there was truly no danger.


    They slowly approached their destination.


    ¡°Look, we¡¯re here! It¡¯s right here.¡± Lily stopped in front of an iron door, bouncing up and down excitedly at the entrance. ¡°There¡¯s a small square box at the door; just press your hand on it, and it will open!¡±


    Seeing something familiar on the door, Charles felt an ominous premonition.


    He pressed his hand against it, but unsurprisingly, the door didn¡¯t open. There was no electricity, and his fingerprint didn¡¯t match. How could it open? This was clearly a fingerprint-locked door!


    ¡°Hmm? Why didn¡¯t it open? Uncle said that as long as a human presses their hand on it, the door will open,¡± Lily tilted her head, looking confused.


    No matter how clever the mice were, they were still just mice. They must have seen humans open doors with fingerprints before, so they assumed that pressing a human hand would work, but that wasn¡¯t the case.


    Charles knocked on the door and found it wasn¡¯t very thick. He then took out some explosives, lit the fuse, and threw it at the doorway before retreating.


    ¡°Boom!!¡± A deafening explosion echoed, and the door was blown open.


    As Charles walked through the opening, he discovered a black flask quietly sitting on a table in the center.


    ¡°This is it! We can go home!¡± Lily¡¯s furry face beamed with joy.


    Charles didn¡¯t linger, grabbing the flask and rushing toward the exit. The earlier explosion had been quite loud, and he feared something might be attracted by the noise.


    But just as he thought that, a flying leech floated around the corner ahead, its bloated body blocking the path.


    ¡°Roar!!¡± The flying leech charged toward the group with a roar.


    Seeing there was no way to dodge, Charles instantly raised his revolver and started pulling the trigger. ¡°Fire!!¡±


    Bullets struck the leech, making a sound like leather being slapped, pushing it back step by step.


    With a roar, the flying leech twisted its body, and its glowing, translucent form disappeared.


    ¡°Don¡¯t stop! Everyone shoot forward! It can turn invisible; shoot all your bullets!¡±


    Bullets flew rapidly, hitting the distant wall and leaving it riddled with holes.


    As the gunfire subsided, just as Charles was about to say to hurry and leave, the leech¡¯s massive head suddenly reappeared right in front of him, its toothy maw less than ten centimeters from his head.


    The sharp teeth rotated open, and the leech¡¯s mouth came crashing down toward Charles¡¯s head like a blood-dripping blade.


    Just as he was about to be swallowed by the leech, he suddenly felt a tremendous force from his waist, pushing him back.


    Charles looked down to see Deep had pushed him aside, saving his life.


    Gunfire erupted again, and the leech retreated under the onslaught, but it twisted its body and vanished again.


    Charles quickly stood up, instinctively pulling out the mask and placing it over his face. In a moment of crisis, there was no time to hesitate.


    He reached for a knife at his leg, and the black blade appeared in his hand, revealing an excited smile behind the mask.


    He could feel that the moment the mask covered his face, his strength and reflexes had been greatly enhanced. Everything around him suddenly became bright; this wasn¡¯t just psychological¡ªhe could even see in the dark now.


    ¡°Guys, stop shooting! That thing doesn¡¯t take bullets. Today, your boss is going to show you something!¡±


    The sharp black knife danced in Charles¡¯s hand, leaving trails of shadows as it flew up and down.

 **Chapter 21: The Eccentric Charles**

    James and Frey exchanged strange glances, their expressions reflecting disbelief. This was the first time they had encountered a captain with such a tone.


    The dim corridor began to quiet down, and under the threat of the invisible leeches, the air around them seemed to freeze.


    Suddenly, Charles started to shake with laughter, first low, then growing louder.


    Lily timidly poked her head out from the pile of mice, ¡°Mr. Charles, what¡¯s wrong with you?¡±


    Charles struggled to contain his laughter, turning to Lily, ¡°Pfft, little mouse, I thought of a joke! Let me tell you. Once upon a time, there was a¡ª¡±


    Almost as he turned, a flying leech suddenly appeared on the wall to his left, opening its grotesque jaws and lunging at the back of Charles¡¯s head.


    Everyone¡¯s eyes widened in shock, but it was too late to warn him.


    What happened next was beyond anyone¡¯s expectations. Charles¡¯s body seemed to fold without bones, and he dodged the monster¡¯s bite just in time.


    His right hand, gripping the knife, suddenly exerted force, and the sharp blade plunged directly into the leech¡¯s abdomen. ¡°Haha! Finally caught you! You can even pass through walls!¡±


    With a spring-like bounce, Charles leaped onto the leech''s back, stabbing fiercely with the black knife.


    The leech writhed violently, but Charles seemed to have an internal gyroscope, unable to be thrown off.


    ¡°Think you can shake me off? No way!¡±


    Wounded, the leech quickly retracted its head and turned to spit a yellowish pus at the human who had hurt it.


    ¡°I¡¯ve had enough; goodbye, big bug!¡±


    Charles gripped the knife handle embedded in the leech and twisted it with force, the sound of tearing leather echoing as he sliced from the leech''s back down to its abdomen.


    The knife cut across half of its body, nearly slicing the leech in two.


    The leech let out a tremendous roar, its damaged body beginning to turn transparent as it attempted to flee.


    But with a surge of strength, Charles drove the knife deeper into the leech, and the bloated creature fell to the ground.


    As the leech hit the ground, Charles pushed off its skin, flipping in the air before landing gracefully in a victorious pose. ¡°How cool am I! Impressive, right? Where¡¯s my applause!!¡±If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    After striking a pose for a few seconds and realizing no one was paying attention, Charles turned around to find his crew staring at him with wide eyes, looking like they had seen a ghost.


    ¡°Hey, you guys really have no sense of teamwork. What are you standing there for? Hurry up and go!¡±


    Only then did the crowd react and start running, with Charles bringing up the rear.


    As they neared the exit, the crew occasionally glanced back at their captain.


    Deep looked down at the laughing captain, who was humming a tune, and whispered to the second mate, Knona, ¡°Should we take the mask off the captain? He seems a bit off.¡±


    Charles suddenly slid the white mask right up to Deep¡¯s face. ¡°Hey! What did you say? I can hear you! If I take off the mask, who will protect you?¡±


    Deep gritted his teeth, reaching for the grinning mask, but Charles slipped away like an eel.


    Then he stretched out his hand, shoving a flask into Deep¡¯s hands and pushing him forward. ¡°You all go first; wait for me on the ship.¡±


    Before anyone could respond, Charles fell backward into the darkness.


    ¡°Captain!! Captain! Come back!!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, where are you going?¡±


    As the others shouted, Charles, wearing the clown mask, walked further into the darkness.


    In the shadows, Charles began to talk to himself. ¡°Since this place is researching artifacts, there must be a lot of them here. Haha, I¡¯m going to make a fortune!¡±


    Humming a vaguely remembered tune, Charles once again entered the previous area.


    This time, he crashed through door after door, not hesitating to blow them open with explosives.


    Behind the first door was a medieval-style oil lamp. Just as Charles picked it up and started to leave, his keen vision caught sight of a record book hanging on the wall.


    ¡°Tsk tsk tsk, these guys are really thoughtful; they even prepared a manual.¡±


    Charles grabbed the record book and rushed into the next room.


    ¡°Haha, I¡¯m going to get rich!¡±


    With his clothes stuffed full of artifacts, Charles joyfully darted between rooms, looking like a farmer harvesting crops.


    Just as he put a silver tentacle ring on his ring finger, a red glow suddenly appeared at the door.


    ¡°Oh no, the snot worms dare to come again? If I don¡¯t show you some power today, you won¡¯t know how many eyes the King of Horses has!¡± With one hand clutching his loot, Charles swaggered toward the door.


    However, when he peeked out of the room, he froze in place. In front of him was not one monster, but a swarm.


    They were crammed together, some half-buried in the ceiling, others half-submerged in the floor. In the distance, a group of red lights flickered, resembling a wall adorned with neon lights.


    As Charles saw them, the monsters also spotted him, and all the flying leeches twisted their bodies, their red glow quickly vanishing.


    Darkness once again enveloped the empty corridor. Staring into the void, Charles could almost visualize the invisible leeches soaring toward him.


    Without a second thought, he turned and ran. But just as he took a few steps, a gaping maw appeared in front of him.


    Charles couldn¡¯t stop in time, and half of his body was already caught in the creature''s mouth.


    Summoning all his strength, he twisted his body and managed to escape just before the jaws closed, though his clothes were torn to shreds by the sharp teeth.


    ¡°That was close!¡± Still shaken, Charles didn¡¯t dare linger. Taking advantage of the leech¡¯s momentary surprise, he slipped past its slick body.


    But this was just the beginning; the invisible leeches were faster than Charles, and more and more of them revealed themselves to attack him.


    At that moment, Charles became like an acrobat, narrowly dodging each attack with incredible agility, dancing on the edge of life and death.


    Just as he evaded a spray of liquid from a leech, another massive mouth emerged to his right. Charles pushed off the ground, barely escaping.


    But before he could land, another gaping maw appeared. This time, with no leverage in mid-air, Charles could only watch helplessly as he was drawn into the creature''s mouth.

 **Chapter 22: 1068**

    As Charles watched the sharp teeth approach his head, he instinctively swung the large bundle in his hands, using the recoil to escape danger. However, the tug tore his clothes, scattering countless artifacts on the ground with a clattering sound. Among them, an ancient oil lamp trembled slightly before suddenly emitting a dazzling light, illuminating the entire corridor like daylight.


    The flying leeches, seemingly stimulated by something, began to shake as if electrocuted. Seizing the opportunity to escape, Charles dashed forward, clutching the remaining small bundle of items.


    He ran at the limit of human speed for nearly five minutes, and when he saw nothing pursuing him, he finally stopped, panting heavily. Looking down at the few artifacts left in his arms, he felt a pang of regret; only four items remained in his tattered clothes.


    ¡°Damn it! You snot worms better watch out! I¡¯ll remember this grudge! Once I get rich, I¡¯ll come back and boil you all alive!!¡±


    After venting his frustration, Charles straightened up and surveyed his dim surroundings. If the previous place resembled a hospital, this one was entirely a military base. The walls were no longer bright white tiles but thick steel plates.


    He hadn¡¯t been here before; it seemed he had wandered into another area.


    ¡°Hello? Is anyone there?¡± Charles¡¯s voice echoed in the air.


    He walked along the wall, and soon a nearly five-meter-tall circular iron door appeared before him. The door, almost half a meter thick, was not intact; a crack nearly split it in two.


    Charles cautiously leaned in to peek inside, discovering a vast space beyond.


    Suddenly, a distant, hoarse cough echoed from within, startling Charles. ¡°What¡¯s going on? Could there be someone alive in there?¡±


    After glancing back, Charles carefully stepped over the crack and entered.


    As soon as he stepped inside, he was stunned by the sight before him: a long tunnel resembling an air raid shelter. Every hundred meters, there was an iron door. The nearest door had come off its hinges, embedded in the ceiling.


    ¡°Cough... cough!¡± The cough came again from further inside, sounding like an elderly person.


    Charles slowed his pace and felt his way toward the source of the sound.


    Before long, he found the source of the coughing: broken intestines, congealed blood, lifeless eyeballs, withered limbs, and a decayed brain. A grotesque door made of these materials stood in the center of Door No. 4, with a writhing purple liquid inside.


    On the left side at the bottom of that door was the upper half of a bloody corpse; the earlier cough had come from it. The mangled figure opened its eyes and looked at Charles.Stolen novel; please report.


    ¡°Ah~ 096, have you finally found another host? Come here, come here! Since I was sent to this hellhole, I haven¡¯t seen you in a while. Let¡¯s have a good chat.¡±


    He knows me? No, he recognizes the mask on my face?


    Charles¡¯s gaze swept over the record book on the wall, noting the project number: ¡°1068.¡±


    ¡°Ha ha, I thought I recognized you; it¡¯s 1068! Good friend, long time no see! That¡¯s right, I am 096,¡± Charles said, approaching the flesh door with familiarity.


    The bloody corpse on the door stared at Charles for a few seconds before gently shaking its head. ¡°No, you are not 096; you have not become it.¡±


    Seeing that he couldn¡¯t trick this guy, Charles decided to be straightforward and asked, ¡°Hey, do you know where the exit is?¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it unrealistic to ask an immobile old man for directions? Has humanity really become that foolish over the years?¡±


    Over the years? Has this guy been around for a long time? Does he know anything about the surface?


    After pondering for a moment, Charles began to inquire about surface information.


    ¡°Ah~ the sun! Of course, I know what that is; it¡¯s that thing hanging in the sky. I haven¡¯t basked in the sun for a long time. Can you move me out so I can soak up some rays?¡±


    Hearing this thrilling news, Charles jumped up like a monkey, tightly holding the bloody corpse¡¯s head and excitedly shouting, ¡°When did you last see it? How long ago was that?¡±


    ¡°Damn! Don¡¯t pull my head!! I still have feeling!¡±


    ¡°Clang!¡± Charles pulled the black knife embedded in his calf and pressed it against the creature¡¯s face, threatening in a stern tone, ¡°Stop the nonsense! Just tell me!¡±


    A hint of anger appeared on 1068¡¯s bloodied face. ¡°The door on my body, pass through the door on my body to see the sun.¡±


    ¡°Door?¡± Charles thought of something and walked toward the entrance, looking at the record book hanging on the wall.


    A few seconds later, he stormed back, slashing the knife across its neck. ¡°You dare lie to me! It clearly states above that behind your door is another world! No living creature that entered has ever come out!¡±


    With a scream from 1068, the entire flesh door seemed to convulse in pain.


    ¡°You worthless trash meant to wipe butts! I curse you!¡± 1068 dropped its pretense and began to curse at Charles.


    ¡°Speak quickly! If you keep talking nonsense, I¡¯ll chop your head off!¡±


    Faced with the blade so close, 1068 finally relented.


    With a dispirited expression, it said, ¡°I forget how long it¡¯s been; the last time I saw the sun was when they put me on a ship. I sat on that ship for a long time.¡±


    ¡°Ha ha ha!¡± Charles, filled with joy, began to flip in the air, laughing maniacally.


    ¡°I knew someone came down from the surface! I knew it!! If they can come down, I can definitely go up!!¡±


    But before Charles could revel in his happiness for too long, a familiar red light flickered outside the door.


    ¡°Oh no! The snot worms are back!¡± Charles looked around for a place to hide, but soon realized that in the entire room, aside from the flesh door, there was not a single thing to take cover behind.


    Charles¡¯s mind raced, and suddenly he thought of a plan. He dashed to the corner of the room and, like a gecko, scampered up to the upper left corner.


    Charles pressed his limbs tightly against the walls, using his incredible body control to wedge himself in the corner.


    Just as he steadied himself, three flying leeches, glowing red, floated in.


    The leeches didn¡¯t notice Charles and swam directly to 1068, beginning to vomit, with half-rotten mice pouring into the door.


    ¡°They... are they feeding 1068? Why?¡±


    While Charles was puzzled, 1068 began to speak. ¡°Dr. Tina, you are still as beautiful as ever.¡±


    ¡°Who is it talking to?¡± Another question popped into Charles¡¯s mind.


    At that moment, he suddenly saw 1068 looking up at him, a smug smile spreading across its bloodied face. Charles¡¯s heart sank.


    ¡°Dr. Tina! 096 has come out!! It¡¯s hanging in the upper left corner of the room! Quickly contain it!!¡±

 **Chapter 23: Betrayal**

    Hearing 1068''s warning, the three-headed flying leeches quickly turned, their eighteen eyes fixing on Charles in the corner.


    ¡°You bastard!!¡±


    With a leap, Charles charged toward the door, just as he was about to exit. He pulled out his revolver with his left hand.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The grotesque head of 1068 exploded, half of its bloody mass blown away. Amidst its screams and curses, Charles dashed out of the door, sprinting for his life.


    This time, the leeches didn¡¯t engage him in close combat; instead, they gathered at a distance, continuously spewing corrosive liquid. Charles twisted his body, swiftly retreating through the "rain of bullets."


    This was just the beginning. More and more leeches followed behind him, and the long-silent Third Laboratory came alive for the first time in years.


    As Charles fled, he found the path he had taken earlier. When he finally burst out of the laboratory, a bright red light shone behind him. He turned in horror to see the entire wall illuminated, with leeches roaring as they emerged from the walls, their eyes blazing with fury.


    Hundreds, if not thousands, of flying leeches twisted their bodies, disappearing from sight.


    A chill ran from Charles''s tailbone straight to his brain as he turned and sprinted toward the coast at top speed.


    ¡°Am I stealing your wives or something? Why are you chasing me like this!¡±


    With a few quick steps, Charles leaped onto a three-meter-high rock, using his excellent agility to jump between the stones.


    Thanks to his dark vision, he was running fast, but he felt no sense of safety, his expression tense as he scanned the surroundings, wary of invisible leeches emerging from any direction.


    In the distance, he spotted the bright searchlight of the *Unicorn Whale* on the sea.


    ¡°The lights are on, which means the crew is already on board! If I can just make it back to the shore, I¡¯ve won!¡± With this thought, Charles quickened his pace.


    ¡°Buzz, buzz, buzz!¡± The flying leeches revealed themselves in the air, a vast expanse of red light blocking Charles''s path. They formed a pocket formation, closing in on him.


    ¡°Wow, you really think highly of me, huh? You¡¯re using tactics just to deal with one person,¡± Charles gasped, standing atop a rock.


    Looking at the sky filled with red light, he remarked, ¡°So beautiful! A drone show pales in comparison to this.¡±


    ¡°But you know, compared to you glowing bugs, I¡¯d rather see some drones right now.¡± Clutching the few remaining artifacts tightly, Charles pushed off the ground and charged toward the distant red wall without hesitation.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Puff, puff, puff!¡± All the flying leeches began to spit saliva, and the air illuminated by the red light suddenly rained down with acid.


    Charles dove back into the rocky forest, using the stones for cover as he continued forward.


    The sound of the acid corroding the stones above him crackled continuously. Charles sprinted on the few remaining safe spots, getting closer to the coastline.


    It seemed the leeches had anticipated Charles''s every move; countless sharp-toothed mouths emerged from the ground, biting fiercely at his feet.


    With no leverage, Charles pushed off the wall and returned to the top of the rock, only to be met by another wave of acid rain.


    No matter how agile his body was, twisting and turning in mid-air ultimately proved futile.


    Charles¡¯s collar was corroded with holes of various sizes, thick, phlegm-like acid dripping onto him, producing plumes of white smoke.


    ¡°Hiss~¡± The burning sensation on his body intensified, and realizing he was in a dire situation, Charles knew he couldn¡¯t hold on much longer.


    ¡°Am I going to die?¡±


    Suddenly, a loud explosion echoed from afar, creating a large opening in the sea of red light.


    Standing on one of the few remaining patches of ground, Charles''s face behind the mask broke into wild joy. ¡°That¡¯s the deck cannon of the *Unicorn Whale*! My crew is helping me!¡±


    No matter how many flying leeches there were, they were still flesh and blood, and against cannonballs, they were no different from paper.


    ¡°Boom!¡± Another large segment of the red curtain was torn away, and the leeches seemed to panic, unsure whether to flee or continue intercepting Charles.


    With the pressure lifted, Charles sprinted at full speed, finally reaching the shoreline.


    As he leaped into the icy sea, the cold water alleviated the burning sensation all over his body. His limbs flailed wildly as he swam toward the *Unicorn Whale*.


    As he climbed the soft ladder onto the deck, his first words were to get the ship moving.


    The *Unicorn Whale* was already prepared, powering up and quickly leaving the island.


    Lying exhausted on the deck, Charles spotted several damp artifacts nearby and immediately burst into laughter. ¡°Ha ha ha! You snot worms, see this? I stole your stuff! And I made it out alive! I win!¡±


    Nearby, Deep rushed over anxiously, helping Charles sit up. ¡°Captain, you need to take off that mask right now.¡±


    Charles¡¯s heart sank. ¡°How long have I been wearing this mask?¡±


    As this thought crossed his mind, a strange voice suddenly exploded in his head.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but it¡¯s probably been one or two hours at least.¡±


    Charles quickly yanked the mask off his face. The moment he removed it, everything around him darkened several shades, and the pain throughout his body surged to new heights.


    But at that moment, Charles focused all his attention on the voice in his head, repeatedly asking who it was.


    Seeing his captain frozen in place, Deep waved his hand in front of Charles. ¡°Captain, what¡¯s wrong? Are you okay?¡±


    Ignoring him, Charles sat on the ground as if waiting for something. When he realized the voice had stopped after he removed the mask, he let out a heavy sigh.


    Then, a wave of dread washed over him. ¡°Thank goodness! If I had worn it for a few more minutes, I might have had to fight my other personality for control of my body.¡±


    ¡°It seems I need to be cautious about wearing this mask in the future. The benefits are indeed significant, but the drawbacks are equally shocking. The me who wore the mask might not resist taking it off, but my personality becomes extremely impulsive.¡±


    As the captain returned to normal, the other crew members breathed a sigh of relief, rushing to carry Charles toward the captain''s cabin.


    After a flurry of activity, Charles¡¯s acid-corroded wounds were bandaged. At that moment, he resembled a mummy more than someone wrapped in bandages.


    Weak, he sat up and looked at the crew surrounding him. ¡°Who fired the cannon just now?¡±


    If it hadn¡¯t been for the help of the deck cannon, Charles knew he wouldn¡¯t have made it back.


    ¡°It was me! It was me!¡± Lily the white mouse climbed up the bedsheet to Charles¡¯s side.

 **Chapter 24: The Spoils of War**

    Looking at Lily the white mouse, who was beaming with pride, Charles felt quite surprised. ¡°You can operate the deck cannon?¡±


    He had assumed it was the chief engineer, James, who had manned the cannon, but it turned out to be Lily.


    ¡°I operated it with my friends! How about that? Aren¡¯t we impressive?¡± Lily squeaked, and a whole swarm of brown mice swarmed onto Charles''s bed.


    Seeing the bed covered with mice made Charles feel quite uneasy. ¡°Get them all off! Just you go back; why did you bring all these mice?¡±


    ¡°I promised them I¡¯d invite them over to my place for my mom¡¯s sweet fish soup. I can¡¯t go back on my word!¡± Lily insisted, standing her ground.


    Charles tried to appease Lily before turning to the second mate, Krona.


    The red-haired youth seemed to know what Charles was going to ask and spoke up, ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Captain. We¡¯ve compared notes; no one is over or under.¡±


    ¡°That''s good, that¡¯s good¡­¡±


    Once the danger had passed, a wave of intense drowsiness washed over him. The wounds on his body and the exhaustion from running made Charles''s body send out a warning.


    ¡°Don¡¯t let your guard down; get us back on a safe course as soon as possible. Everyone out, I¡¯m a bit tired.¡±


    Before anyone could leave the room, Charles¡¯s eyelids drooped, and he slipped into unconsciousness.


    When he awoke, he had no idea how much time had passed.


    ¡°I should get a pocket watch.¡±


    Now fully alert, Charles didn¡¯t get out of bed right away. Leaning against the pillow, a faint smile crept onto his face¡ªa long-lost expression.


    He had been worried about one thing: whether he was still on Earth. Even if he made it to the surface, would he ever return?


    But 1068''s words had confirmed one thing: the outside world had a sun, and where there¡¯s a sun, there must be Earth. There was a good chance his home was still there.


    Just as Charles was about to get out of bed, he noticed the artifacts he had retrieved from the Third Laboratory piled on the cabinet.


    Seeing these items stirred something in Charles.


    Though he had gone through everything there himself, he now felt strangely alienated from that version of himself. Back then, the thought of so many artifacts made him feel like a cat scratching at something. He had instinctively gone to steal them, completely unaware of how dangerous that act was.


    But looking at those artifacts now, Charles felt a sense of relief. He had been lucky to come away with so many items, having only paid for them with his injuries. It was undoubtedly a worthwhile trade.


    Charles began to carefully examine the few items he had brought back:You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    - A rusted knife covered in iron rust.


    - A feather quill as thick as a forearm.


    - A pyramid-shaped amethyst crystal.


    - Plus the silver ring in his hand, woven from tentacles.


    There were four artifacts in total. They all looked extraordinary, but Charles hesitated to test them. After all, he had lost some of the notebooks during his encounter with the leeches, and others had been ruined by seawater when he jumped into the sea.


    Now, only two items remained in the information booklet, one of which was the ring on his hand.


    ¡°Project No.: 168¡±


    ¡°Project Name: Tentacle Ring¡±


    ¡°Description: 168 is a ring made of 925 silver, shaped into three tentacles resembling those of an octopus. Discovered by Dr. Tina during her vacation in a jewelry store in New Jersey [Data Deleted].¡±


    ¡°Appendix 1: Due to Dr. Tina detecting its anomalies and reporting it immediately, the Foundation decided to contain 168 directly. The project¡¯s anomalous description will be included in Appendix 2 in interview record format.¡±


    ¡°Appendix 2:¡±


    ¡°Dr. Tina, could you tell us how you discovered 168?¡±


    ¡°My husband took me to pick out a wedding ring. The moment I saw it, I put it on. It wasn¡¯t until I returned to my apartment that I realized something was off. I started to develop a special ability.¡±


    ¡°What kind of special ability?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ my hand can turn into three tentacles that others can¡¯t see. It feels very strange, almost as if the tentacles are naturally a part of my hand.¡±


    ¡°I know what you¡¯re going to ask next: the grip strength of the tentacles is enormous, roughly equivalent to that of two adult males, and they are very elastic, extending up to 5 meters. As for the negative anomalies, the ring tends to tempt humans to put it on subconsciously, and it gets tighter over time, requiring periodic removal to loosen it.¡±


    ¡°Is it really that simple?¡±


    ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s really that simple. It¡¯s just a very simple little thing. If only other projects were as well-behaved as this one. As for 1068, it¡¯s manageable as long as there¡¯s enough food; it won¡¯t cause trouble. But 641 is a real headache.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Tina, I¡¯ve heard of that one; it¡¯s indeed tough to deal with. If it ever breaches containment, the entire island¡¯s population might be assimilated. But speaking of danger, it¡¯s still not as bad as 134 that I¡¯m in charge of¡ª¡±


    ¡°Ahem! Ladies, this is work time. Let¡¯s save the chit-chat for after hours, please mind the occasion.¡±


    ¡°Sorry, sorry.¡±


    22:41, interview concluded.


    ¡°Transform into tentacles?¡± Charles pondered for a moment, then raised his hand. To his astonishment, he felt his fingers rapidly elongating and thickening, yet to the naked eye, his hand remained unchanged.


    Suddenly, a drawer on the distant table opened, and a bottle of liquor floated out, hovering in mid-air, creating a rather eerie scene.


    Charles began experimenting with the new artifact in the room. Various small objects floated up and down in the air.


    After getting familiar with this artifact, Charles decided to keep it for himself. In terms of offensive capabilities, it may not compare to the clown mask or even the black knife, but this item could be used cleverly, offering unexpected advantages.


    What excited Charles even more was that this little thing had the least side effects of any artifact he had encountered.


    He touched the ring thoughtfully before turning to another piece of paper, which contained the record for the purple pyramid.


    ¡°Project No.: 434¡±


    ¡°Project Name: Purple Pyramid¡±


    ¡°Description: 434 is a crystal pyramid measuring 10 cm on each side. Due to the disturbances it caused, it was reported by the Shadow Island Police Department and transferred to the Foundation.¡±


    **Experiment 1:** ¡°Have Subject 13 hold 434 and command him to silently repeat ¡®I am powerful¡¯ twice.¡±


    **Experiment Result:** The subject underwent a mutation, his physique proportionally increased, reaching a height of 2.5 meters, but his communicative ability significantly diminished, with intelligence dropping to 80.


    **Experiment 2:** ¡°Have Subject 13 hold 434 and command him to silently repeat ¡®I am powerful¡¯ three times.¡±


    **Experiment Result:** The subject¡¯s height increased by three meters, but intelligence dropped to 60.


    **Experiment 3:** ¡°Have Subject 13 hold 434 and command him to silently repeat ¡®I am powerful¡¯ four times.¡±


    **Experiment Result:** The subject¡¯s height rose to 4 meters, while intelligence fell to 40. Due to the subject¡¯s low intelligence, he could not comprehend commands, and the experiment had to be terminated. The subject returned to normal 30 minutes after distancing himself from 434.

 **Chapter 25: The Mouse Goes Home**

    ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Charles frowned as he looked at the artifact in his hand.


    This artifact traded intelligence for size, making it hard to determine whether it was good or bad. If one lacked even basic cognition, then immense strength would be of no use. Moreover, after increasing in size, his three other artifacts would become unusable, and in the balance of things, his overall power might even decrease.


    Quickly, Charles realized the artifact''s greatest utility: ¡°I may not be able to use it, but I can give it to my crew.¡±


    The upcoming adventures would only grow more dangerous; relying solely on his own strength wouldn''t suffice. The crew aboard the Narwhal needed to enhance their abilities across the board to avoid dragging everyone down.


    A particular crew member¡¯s muscular build flashed through his mind, and Charles immediately found a new owner for the artifact. Ignoring the lingering pain in his body, he threw off the covers and made his way outside.


    Thirty minutes later, Charles stood on the deck, shouting at the four-meter-tall chief engineer, James: ¡°James, put the artifact down! On the ground!¡±


    Curious crew members gathered around, eager to see what was happening. James, now enormous, plopped down on the deck, causing the entire Narwhal to shake. After a few seconds, he finally released his grip, allowing the purple pyramid to fall to the deck.


    ¡°The drop in intelligence is greater than I imagined,¡± Charles muttered, observing the purple pyramid in his hand.


    After testing it, he realized that while the physical growth made one extraordinarily powerful, the significant drop in intelligence was deadly. Someone would need to constantly direct James, or else the dim-witted engineer would just stand there, idly playing with his fingers.


    ¡°Captain, can I try that?¡± a curious crew member named Deep asked, accompanied by a group of sailors.


    After a moment¡¯s thought, Charles tossed the pyramid over. ¡°You all try it and see who¡¯s most suited for it.¡±


    Suddenly, the deck was filled with cheers and laughter as the crew treated the artifact like a toy. Charles didn¡¯t stop them; moments like this were rare on the open sea.


    After giving a few instructions, he headed towards his cabin, feeling the familiar sting of pain in his wounds.


    Time passed quickly at sea, and Charles¡¯s corrosive wounds healed rapidly. Any minor mishaps were expertly handled by his crew. For once, he was able to enjoy the privileges of being captain.


    When the lighthouse of Coral Island came into view, the cheers from the crew nearly capsized the Narwhal. They had survived once again.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    As the ship docked, the crew rushed to collect their rewards before bolting off to release their pent-up excitement.


    Charles, holding the remaining two artifacts, intended to head towards the Explorer¡¯s Association. He wanted to see if any other captains had clues about their potential uses or dangers.


    Just as he was about to disembark, he spotted Lily surrounded by a group of brown mice on the dock.


    Walking over, he noticed she hadn¡¯t left, her ears drooping sadly.


    ¡°Why haven¡¯t you gone?¡± he asked.


    Lily jumped at his voice and turned around in a panic. ¡°Mr. Charles.¡±


    ¡°Why are you standing here? Don¡¯t you want to go home?¡± He lifted her by the tail.


    ¡°But I¡¯ve turned into a mouse. Will my mother recognize me? Will she chase me away with a broom?¡± Lily asked, looking pitiful.


    Charles understood her fear; after such a drastic change, it was normal for a child to feel scared. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. No parent would stop loving their daughter, even if she turned into a mouse. They wouldn¡¯t reject you.¡±


    ¡°Really??¡± Lily¡¯s ears perked up.


    ¡°Really, truly,¡± Charles said, looking at the little mouse and feeling a pang of affection, reminiscent of his own sister.


    Lily began to shake with excitement. ¡°Mr. Charles, you¡¯re right! My mother won¡¯t forget me. I¡¯ve been gone for so long; she must miss me terribly!¡±


    Charles set her down and prepared to leave, but Lily clung to his finger. ¡°Mr. Charles, can you take me home?¡±


    He was about to refuse when he saw the pleading look on her tiny face. Sighing, he relented. ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll take you home.¡±


    It was a small act of kindness for a girl who had turned into a mouse and didn¡¯t know if she could ever return to her original form.


    Soon, a peculiar scene unfolded at Coral Island¡¯s Pier 3: a man with black eyes was parading through the streets, accompanied by a large group of mice.


    After Charles paid four times the fare and assured the driver that the mice wouldn¡¯t chew on the seats, they finally found a steam car willing to take them.


    Lily¡¯s home was nearly an hour¡¯s drive from the port, and as they got closer, her excitement grew.


    She must be so happy now, Charles thought, a hint of envy in his eyes as he glanced at the little white mouse on his lap. Would I ever have a day like this?


    ¡°Sir, we¡¯ve arrived. Just around the corner to the left is Dr. Oliver¡¯s house. He has a lovely little girl, so you¡¯d better not bring these mice near her; they might scare her.¡±


    Lily, unable to contain her excitement, jumped from the car before it had even stopped, sprinting ahead with the mice in tow.


    As she reached the corner, her small body suddenly froze as if struck by lightning.


    ¡°Hmm?¡± Noticing something was off, Charles approached her.


    At the top left of the corner stood an elegant two-story villa. In the front yard, a gentle mother was having tea and chatting with her daughter.


    The girl looked about eleven or twelve and bore a resemblance to Hermione from the first Harry Potter movie. Yet, a spark of intelligence in her eyes hinted that she would grow into an even more enchanting beauty than her mother.


    ¡°Lily, do you have a sister or a younger sibling at home?¡± Charles hesitated to ask, noticing that the mother didn¡¯t seem to be grieving any loss.


    His question snapped Lily out of her stupor, and she screamed in despair. ¡°Ahhh!! That Lily is a fake! I¡¯m my mother¡¯s daughter! She must be a witch from a story! She turned me into a mouse and stole my mother¡¯s love! I¡¯m going to bite her to death!!¡±


    With that, Lily charged toward the distant figure, her claws bared.


    Charles raised his left hand, the one with the ring, and caught Lily mid-air. ¡°Calm down!¡±


    Seeing the white mouse trapped, the other mice turned and bared their teeth, their eyes gleaming with menace.


    Just as Charles¡¯s other hand moved toward the clown mask, Lily halted the mice¡¯s attack, suspended in the air, crying loudly. ¡°Waaah, Mr. Charles, I can¡¯t go home! My mother doesn¡¯t want me¡­ What should I do??¡±

 **Chapter 26: The False Lily**

    Charles''s unusual behavior had drawn the attention of others; a man with a swarm of mice was bound to be a spectacle, and the whispers and pointing fingers around him began to multiply.


    ¡°Don¡¯t panic,¡± Charles said, frowning as he led Lily down the street. ¡°Are you sure that¡¯s your home? Is that little girl really you?¡±


    ¡°Of course I¡¯m sure! That¡¯s exactly how I looked! And that¡¯s my mother!¡± Lily¡¯s voice was tinged with sadness.


    ¡°First, tell your friends to disperse; it¡¯ll be hard to move if they¡¯re all around.¡±


    Lily squeaked twice, and the surrounding mice quickly scattered, causing a chorus of startled female screams.


    After wandering the streets for a while, they returned to the small villa. Inside the yard, Lily¡¯s mother had already left, leaving the ¡°Lily¡± sitting there, engrossed in a book.


    ¡°Wait, don¡¯t say anything. Let me handle this,¡± Charles instructed.


    He glanced around to ensure there were no surprises before pushing open the wooden gate and walking straight toward her. ¡°Lily?¡±


    The little girl looked up, confusion etched on her face. But upon seeing Charles, her expression changed; she dropped the book and rushed inside in a panic.


    ¡°Hmm?¡± Charles raised his left hand, and three invisible tendrils quickly ensnared her.


    Just as he expected the girl to reveal her true form, ¡°Lily¡± struggled desperately, shouting, ¡°Mom! Mom!! Help me!!¡±


    Seeing this, a hint of confusion crossed Charles¡¯s face. He had encountered many shape-shifting creatures, but this reaction was new to him. He pulled ¡°Lily¡± closer and, drawing a black knife, made a swift cut on her arm. Crimson blood welled up.


    Licking the blade, Charles was surprised to find it was indeed human blood.


    At that moment, the door beside them swung open, and Lily¡¯s mother emerged, trembling as she held a flintlock pistol. ¡°Let my daughter go! I¡¯ve already called the police!¡±


    Ignoring the harmless weapon in the woman¡¯s hands, Charles calmly asked the girl, ¡°Why did you run when you saw me?¡±


    The girl looked terrified but quickly answered, ¡°Because you smell like the sea. Dad said that anyone who smells like the sea is a bad person.¡±


    ¡°Liar!! That¡¯s my dad!¡± White mouse Lily lunged toward the girl.


    Charles grabbed the mouse and, releasing the girl, began to walk away.


    ¡°Lily¡± appeared completely normal, showing no signs of disguise, which only deepened Charles''s confusion.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry; we¡¯ll investigate this first,¡± he said, holding the anxious mouse¡¯s head gently.


    Charles took Lily back to the port area, navigating through twists and turns until they arrived at a secluded storefront.


    After checking that no one else was around, he knocked softly and said, ¡°I¡¯m looking for your boss, Big Ear.¡±


    The door opened silently, and Charles led Lily inside.


    The interior was a messy warehouse, where a group of tattooed men were playing cards. When they saw Charles enter with a swarm of mice, a scrawny man with a scar on his face stood up.


    ¡°Captain Charles, long time no see. Want to move some goods again? I heard you got your hands on a big ship; you could carry a lot.¡±


    Charles was not in the mood for pleasantries. He pulled out a stack of echo coins and handed them over. ¡°I need some information about Dr. Oliver.¡±


    Since he couldn¡¯t discern the situation directly, he figured asking some local informants might yield other clues.


    The scarred man grinned, extending his hand, which was missing two fingers. ¡°No problem; there¡¯s nothing we can¡¯t find out on Coral Island.¡±


    Before long, a piece of paper filled with writing was pushed through the door¡¯s crack. Charles took it, reading it carefully before looking at the white mouse with a complex expression.


    ¡°Lily, you were turned into a mouse after getting caught in a whirlpool while visiting your grandfather?¡±


    ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ according to what I gathered from those guys, your parents have been on the island for the last few years and haven¡¯t gone to sea.¡±


    The room fell into a heavy silence.


    After three long seconds, disbelief filled Lily¡¯s eyes as she spoke, ¡°So¡­ that means¡­¡±


    ¡°It means that the other Lily is real. She is Dr. Oliver¡¯s true daughter, not someone impersonating her.¡±


    Since Dr. Oliver hadn¡¯t gone to sea, he couldn¡¯t have encountered a shipwreck, and their daughter certainly wouldn¡¯t have fallen into a whirlpool.


    ¡°She¡¯s real, then who am I?¡± Tears streamed down the white mouse¡¯s face.


    Charles chose his words carefully. ¡°Lily, as hard as it may be to accept, memories aren¡¯t always reliable.¡±


    ¡°No way!! I am Lily!! I¡¯m not a mouse!! I¡¯m the real Lily!!¡± The white mouse began to scream hysterically.


    Hearing her cries, the brown mice quickly surrounded her, chirping in concern.


    ¡°Get away from me! I¡¯m not one of you! I¡¯m human! I¡¯m human!!¡± The brown mice backed off slightly but remained close to the sobbing white mouse.


    Charles was at a loss for words. He had considered many outcomes, but never this one.


    Yet, upon reflection, it made sense; the world of the sea was indeed despairing.


    Half an hour later, surrounded by mice, Lily lay on the ground, motionless, as if her spirit had left her. ¡°Mr. Charles, do you really think I¡¯m just a mouse?¡±


    Sitting on a stool, Charles fell silent, unsure how to respond.


    The white mouse, devoid of answers, slowly got up and walked toward the door, the brown mice following closely behind.


    ¡°Where are you going?¡±


    Lily¡¯s voice was filled with a pitiful resignation. ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ but since I¡¯m a mouse, maybe I should just live in the sewers. Thank you for taking care of me these days, Mr. Charles. You¡¯re a good person.¡±


    The mice surged forward, easily opening the door handle and following the white mouse into the dim corridor.


    Watching them leave, a flicker of irritation crossed Charles¡¯s face. ¡°Are you really going to give up? Planning to live in the sewers eating garbage for the rest of your life?¡±


    Lily turned around, her ears drooping as she stared blankly at Charles.


    ¡°Since you believe you¡¯re human and that the sea transformed you into this, you should go back to the ocean and reclaim everything! Don¡¯t run away!¡± His voice rose.


    ¡°We can¡¯t control our fate, but we can choose how to face our challenges. Come back! My ship needs a gunner.¡±


    Tears welled up in Lily¡¯s eyes again, and the sobbing white mouse nodded repeatedly. ¡°Thank you, Mr. Charles. Why are you helping me so much?¡±


    Charles wasn¡¯t a particularly warm-hearted person, but seeing the desperate Lily walking away instinctively filled him with resistance. She was a fellow lost soul, and he feared that could be his future as well.

 **Chapter 27: Elizabeth**

    Charles walked alone toward the Explorer''s Association, leaving Lily behind at the inn. The little girl was still feeling down, hoping that time would heal her wounds.


    As he stepped into the Explorer''s Association, his gaze instinctively drifted to the corner sofa. This time, there were fewer captains present¡ªonly four, and among them was the towering beauty, Elizabeth.


    ¡°Darling Charles, I¡¯m over here!¡± Elizabeth waved her hand enthusiastically.


    Charles didn¡¯t approach her. Instead, he pointed toward the counter and made his way there.


    ¡°This is the information about that island,¡± he said, handing over the written report to the staff behind the counter.


    ¡°Did you really go there?¡± The woman behind the counter looked incredulous.


    ¡°Quickly, I don¡¯t have time to waste,¡± Charles replied impatiently.


    ¡°Sorry¡­ I just started today. Please wait a moment while I consult my supervisor.¡±


    Before long, a middle-aged man wearing round glasses and a suit approached. He smiled at Charles, picked up the paper for a detailed look, and pulled out several books, seemingly cross-referencing them.


    After a long pause, he sighed and spoke respectfully, ¡°Thank you for your significant contribution to the association. We¡¯ve cleared away some of the unknown fog of the Sea of Mist.¡±


    ¡°How much do I earn for this?¡±


    ¡°For exploring a Level 5 island and providing detailed information, your total reward is 1,600,000 echoes. After deducting the governor¡¯s tax, you¡¯ll receive 1,450,000 echo coins.¡±


    To be honest, Charles was surprised by the amount; he hadn¡¯t expected exploring an island to be so lucrative. That sum could buy a two-story house with a front yard on Coral Island. However, recalling the life-and-death crises he had faced on the island, it felt deserved; after all, he had risked his life for it.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, you filled out the bank account information on the previous application. We can transfer the reward directly into your account. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s do that.¡± Charles turned toward the sofa, as he had other matters to attend to.


    ¡°What happened to your eye?¡± Charles pointed at Elizabeth¡¯s left eye, which was covered by a pirate-like black eye patch.


    ¡°I lost an eyeball. Sigh, that island was too dangerous. Just making it back alive is a blessing; it was terrifying.¡± Elizabeth leaned closer, showing no signs of fear.This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    ¡°Why are there so few people today?¡± Charles observed the other three unfamiliar faces.


    ¡°Captains returning on Saturday afternoons all gather here. Usually, it¡¯s just a few of us. Huh? Why are you wearing a ring on your ring finger? Have you gotten married? My heart is breaking!¡± Elizabeth traced her finger over Charles''s ring.


    Charles raised his left hand and shook it. ¡°It¡¯s just a keepsake. By the way, Elizabeth, how are artifacts traded among explorers?¡±


    Upon hearing this, the curious gazes of the other three turned toward Charles.


    ¡°Typically, trading happens on Saturday afternoons, but you can show me now. If it¡¯s valuable, I can offer a reasonable price.¡±


    The speaker was a young man holding a bottle of alcohol, his expression lethargic. His clothes were filthy, stained with alcohol, and even from two meters away, Charles could smell his sour odor.


    Charles pulled out the remaining two artifacts and placed them on the table.


    The four of them, including Elizabeth, carefully examined the items. After a while, the drunken young man spoke up.


    ¡°Artifacts without identification usually don¡¯t have a fixed price, but let¡¯s be friends. Hic~ 300,000 for each; I¡¯ll take both.¡±


    This was a gamble, as no one knew what these artifacts truly did. If they had significant side effects, it would be like paying for trouble.


    ¡°The price is fair,¡± Elizabeth whispered into Charles¡¯s ear, her lips brushing against him.


    ¡°Alright, deal.¡± Charles shifted aside.


    ¡°I¡¯m William. If you have other artifacts in the future, feel free to work with me again.¡± The young man said, pouring a packet of red powder into his bottle and taking a swig.


    Watching William start to convulse, Charles gave Elizabeth a puzzled look.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing; just the powder of Joy Fruit. He¡¯s been using that stuff for half a year.¡±


    A highly addictive substance? As he observed William¡¯s runny nose and tears, a suspicion crossed Charles¡¯s mind.


    Not wanting to dwell on the other captains¡¯ affairs, he turned back to the towering beauty beside him.


    ¡°Do you still have that jelly that eliminates auditory hallucinations? I need to buy some.¡±


    Although auditory hallucinations didn¡¯t occur frequently, they were still bothersome when they did.


    ¡°I have some left. But you know, this stuff is really addictive. If you stop taking it, the withdrawal can be brutal.¡±


    ¡°Do you have any other ways to resolve this issue?¡±


    ¡°Sure,¡± Elizabeth replied quickly. ¡°Just get on land, and this problem will be solved quickly.¡±


    Charles immediately dismissed that idea; he would never set foot on land again.


    After chatting with the other captains for a while, Charles glanced at the clock and stood up. ¡°Miss Elizabeth, please bring some with you on Saturday; I¡¯ll buy them. It¡¯s getting late; we¡¯ll talk next time.¡±


    As soon as Charles left, Elizabeth stood up, a faint smile on her face, and followed him.


    At the dock, watching the laborers bustling about, moving cargo, Charles found himself at a loss for what to do.


    ¡°Oh right, I need to buy a pocket watch.¡±


    By the time Charles returned to his room, he had already acquired a shiny pocket watch in the inner pocket of his coat.


    As he opened the door to his room, he was greeted by a flurry of mice scurrying about.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, you¡¯re back¡­¡± The once sunny and cheerful Lily lay on the bed, her voice lifeless.


    After giving her head a gentle pat, Charles walked over to his desk and began writing in his journal.


    Lily, curious, came over to peek but quickly lost interest and wandered away, unable to make sense of the scrawled characters.


    ¡°Knock, knock, knock.¡± The sound of knocking echoed in the small room.


    With a glance at Lily, Charles signaled, and the mice instantly scurried into various corners. Within seconds, he was the only living being left in the room.


    As he opened the door, a generous bosom filled his view. He looked up to see the towering beauty, Elizabeth.


    ¡°Darling, why are you staying here? This place doesn¡¯t have good soundproofing.¡±

 **Chapter 28: Elizabeths Request**

    Charles seemed to ignore the underlying meaning of Elizabeth''s words and naturally sat back down. ¡°Miss Elizabeth, is there something you need?¡±


    ¡°I brought the gel you asked for since you seemed in such a hurry,¡± Elizabeth said, pulling out a small box from behind her.


    ¡°Thank you. How much is it?¡±


    Elizabeth pushed the box into Charles''s arms with both hands. ¡°Why are you being so formal? It¡¯s not worth much; consider it a gift.¡±


    After saying that, Elizabeth stepped into the room, surveying the dim space. ¡°Darling, don¡¯t you ever find someone to keep you company? It must be lonely being alone.¡±


    Before Charles could respond, Elizabeth closed the door behind her and sat down on the bed.


    Seeing her action made Charles''s heart skip a beat. He glanced at the pairs of eyes peeking out from under the bed, cleared his throat, and walked over to the desk to set down the box.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you tell me the price? I don¡¯t like being in debt to others.¡±


    A smirk appeared on Elizabeth''s lips, a hint of crimson flushing her cheeks, and desire sparkled in her eyes. ¡°In that case, why don¡¯t you give yourself to me?¡±


    ¡°W-what?¡±


    Before Charles could finish his sentence, Elizabeth raised a short wooden staff and pointed it at the oil lamp on the table, which exploded, plunging the room into darkness.


    In the next moment, Charles was enveloped by a fragrant breeze, and a soft body pressed against him.


    ¡°Relax, darling. You need to learn to unwind; the sea is oppressive enough.¡±


    Charles felt his breath quicken. Before he could utter a word, a soft form met his lips. Although he was confused by the situation, he knew that if he didn¡¯t respond, he wouldn¡¯t be a man. A surge of heat ignited within him, and he quickly reciprocated.


    Just as the suffocating softness finally pulled away, he heard hurried gasps nearby.


    At that moment, a squeak echoed from under the bed, like a bucket of cold water dousing his fervor. It was one thing to deal with other matters, but there was a whole bunch of mice in the room.


    With a swift motion, Charles raised his left hand, and transparent tendrils quickly wrapped around Elizabeth, pushing her away.


    ¡°Miss Elizabeth, I¡¯m sorry, but I¡¯m a bit indisposed today.¡±


    Her face in the dark looked displeased, and being so decisively rejected made her question her allure.


    Her voice turned cold. ¡°Charles, aren¡¯t you being a bit excessive? I¡¯m perfectly fine, yet you say you¡¯re not?¡±


    Taking a deep breath, Charles opened the door, letting light from the corridor spill in. ¡°I¡¯m really not available today.¡±This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    ¡°I¡¯ve helped you so much at the association, and you don¡¯t understand the concept of gratitude at all. How heartless!¡± Elizabeth straightened her disheveled clothes and walked toward the corridor.


    As the towering beauty left, she threw back one last comment, ¡°You¡¯re not like the governor, are you? You don¡¯t prefer men, do you?¡±


    Charles couldn¡¯t help but smile wryly. A friendship he had just formed seemed destined to dissolve, even if her motives were questionable.


    But Lily was still in the room. Although she was a mouse, she was essentially an 11-year-old girl.


    In the dark room, Charles rummaged for a candle and lit it. After a moment of contemplation, he spoke. ¡°Lily, actually, just now I¡ª¡±


    A voice came from under the bed. ¡°I know what you were doing. My dad is a doctor, and he taught me about these things. Mr. Charles, am I interrupting you?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    The next morning, Lily, curled up on the pillow, opened her eyes. Just as she was about to greet Charles, she noticed he was missing from the bed.


    ¡°Jumpy, is Mr. Charles in the bathroom?¡±


    A brown mouse squeezed under the door and quickly returned, squeaking at Lily on the pillow.


    ¡°Mr. Charles went out so early? He¡¯s really busy.¡± After stretching lazily on the pillow, Lily sat up.


    Tilting her head in thought, she said to the mice below, ¡°Shall we go out to play?¡±


    Hearing the enthusiastic responses from below, a smile spread across Lily¡¯s furry face as she leaped off the bed.


    Ignoring the chorus of squeaks that followed, Lily raced through the streets of the inner island with the mice.


    Women in dresses gasped, wild dogs barked, old ladies waved their brooms, and drivers slammed on their brakes. Everything seemed vast and full of novelty from the mice''s perspective.


    However, as more hostile gazes turned toward them, Lily quickly led the mice into a nearby alley.


    The secluded alley was less crowded than the main street, allowing Lily and the mice to stroll leisurely.


    ¡°Wow, look at that loaf of bread! It¡¯s so big I could sleep inside! Jumpy, don¡¯t go for it! That belongs to someone else!¡±


    ¡°No meat either! You¡¯ll get Mr. Charles into trouble!¡±


    As Lily wandered aimlessly, she suddenly spotted a familiar face in the distance¡ªit was the tall guy who worked in the turbine cabin.


    Just as she was about to rush over to greet him, she saw James, who was usually covered in grease, now dressed in a tight suit, holding a bouquet of expensive flowers. He looked extremely nervous, with sweat soaking the back of his suit.


    ¡°Let¡¯s follow him and see what he¡¯s up to.¡±


    James twisted and turned through the alley and finally stopped in front of a bakery.


    When a graceful woman in a dress walked out, James knelt down on one knee, pulling out a small box from his pocket. The customers inside began to applaud.


    ¡°Wow! A proposal!¡± Lily exclaimed excitedly.


    Seeing the woman tearfully nod and embrace James, a sweet smile spread across Lily¡¯s face. ¡°How wonderful!¡±


    Watching them enter the bakery, Lily continued on her way when suddenly, her stomach let out a loud growl.


    ¡°Since Mr. Charles said I¡¯m his crew member, he should pay me a salary! That way, I can buy food for everyone!¡±


    The surrounding mice squeaked in agreement.


    Looking around, she noticed a large clock tower in the distance. ¡°Everyone, this is close to my home. Let¡¯s go check on Mom, and then we¡¯ll return to find Mr. Charles for something to eat.¡±


    With that, Lily took off running, this time being careful to stick to the quieter corners, avoiding scaring anyone.


    Lily led the mice back to her family¡¯s house, where they skillfully stacked themselves to help the white mouse reach a window.


    Lily pressed her face against the glass, staring longingly at the family inside, who were happily eating their meal. ¡°Why is Dad home so early today?¡±


    Watching them chat and laugh, Lily¡¯s eyes began to well with tears.


    She stood at the window, watching until lunch ended. Only when she saw her mother come out to throw away the trash did she quickly hide.


    Reluctantly, she watched her mother return inside and then jumped into the trash can to scavenge for food scraps.


    She picked up a fishbone, licking the remaining meat off it, and the brown mice rushed in to clean up the leftovers.


    Just then, Lily heard a little girl¡¯s cheerful voice outside. ¡°Thank you, Mommy and Daddy, for my birthday gift! I love you!¡±


    Standing in the trash, the white mouse raised the fishbone tremblingly. Tears streamed down her face.


    ¡°You see, I told you, my mom¡¯s sweet fish soup is really delicious.¡±

 **Chapter 29: Eyes in the Sky**

    ¡°Where have you been?¡± Charles asked the mouse that had just opened the door, still focused on the nautical charts in front of him.


    ¡°I went out to play,¡± Lily replied, sounding dejected.


    ¡°Are you hungry? I have some food on the table.¡±


    ¡°Give it to the other mice; I¡¯ve already eaten.¡± With that, Lily climbed onto the pillow and lay down.


    Noticing her unusual mood, Charles felt puzzled. He couldn¡¯t understand why this little mouse seemed upset; hadn¡¯t everything settled down? However, he didn¡¯t want to indulge her bad mood, so he grabbed her tail and pulled her over to the table.


    ¡°I found some books about operating the cannon. You need to study them; I¡¯m taking you to the port for training tomorrow.¡±


    Lily looked at the stack of books that towered over her and instinctively felt resistant. ¡°I don¡¯t want to read them! I already know how to operate the cannon!¡±


    ¡°Enough with the nonsense. Becoming a qualified gunner isn¡¯t that simple. Since you¡¯re my crew member, you need to meet the standards. On the sea, any slight shortcoming could endanger everyone¡¯s lives.¡±


    Charles opened a book and tossed it at her.


    Under the captain¡¯s coercion, Lily was forced to digest material meant for someone much older than her. Yet, in this high-pressure environment, her earlier gloom and sadness quickly faded, and the cheerful Lily returned, complaining to Charles all day long.


    With the persistent chatter from the mouse, Charles, who usually spoke little, found himself talking more. For the first time, there was a hint of liveliness in the apartment.


    Half a month passed quickly, and Lily completed her initial training. Charles, with the crew well-rested, set out for a new mission. The previous exploration of the fifth-level island had been at the edge of known territories, and this time, he was tasked with navigating the northernmost sea.


    Typically, exploring open waters is safer than island expeditions. But when it comes to the sea, who can say for sure?


    The other crew members were surprised by Lily¡¯s return, but under Charles¡¯s subtle hints, no one pried too deeply into the matter. They only knew one thing: the Unicorn Whale now had a mouse gunner.


    As the Unicorn Whale¡¯s smokestack began to emit black smoke again, it slowly disappeared from the dock, watched by the laborers.


    Life at sea remained as calm and routine as ever, with any unknown threats quickly dealt with.


    Entering the unmarked waters for the second time, the crew was much calmer. Perhaps because there had been no casualties during the last mission, the crew was highly motivated for the new task. Even though they had only rested for half a month, confidence radiated from everyone¡¯s faces. Second Officer Knona was eager to introduce his cousin to join the crew and strike it rich together.Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    Behind closed doors, the crew whispered among themselves, speculating how soon they might discover a new island and prosper alongside their captain.


    In the cockpit, Charles held a pen, calculating the ship¡¯s current position based on speed and direction on the nautical chart. Normally, this would be the navigator¡¯s responsibility, but he took it upon himself. This task required precision; even a slight error in coordinates could lead to a significant miscalculation in actual positioning.


    After confirming that today¡¯s coordinates were accurate, Charles turned to head to the captain¡¯s cabin to write the navigation log. However, as he stepped out the door, he felt an inexplicable discomfort.


    Standing at the entrance, Charles turned back and scanned the cockpit. The Unicorn Whale¡¯s cockpit was much larger than that of the Mouse Ship, comparable to half a classroom.


    At that moment, the bosun, Deep, was at the helm, while the first mate, Bandage, sat nearby, engaged in conversation.


    ¡°First Mate Bandage, did you hear? James secretly got married! He didn¡¯t even invite us; isn¡¯t that a bit too ungrateful?¡± Deep complained.


    ¡°Left rudder 15... speed up to 5 knots...¡± Bandage directed, seemingly ignoring the bosun¡¯s grievances.


    As Charles¡¯s gaze swept the cabin, he finally pinpointed the source of his discomfort. He strode over to Bandage and yanked the bandage off his amputated leg.


    To his astonishment, a portion of the leg that had been consumed by Anna had regrown, the contrast between the tattooed dark skin and the newly grown bright white skin was striking.


    Deep clearly noticed this surprising development as well, his eyes widening. ¡°My goodness, your leg grew back after being amputated? Are you some kind of sea octopus?¡±


    ¡°Keep your eyes on the helm!¡± Charles barked, causing the curious Deep to quickly retract.


    Pointing at the regrown leg, Charles asked Bandage, ¡°Can you explain what happened? I¡¯ve never heard of Furtan followers having a special method for regrowing limbs.¡±


    ¡°I... I don¡¯t know... My memories are all jumbled... I¡¯ve been to many places... experienced many things, but my memories fade away...¡±


    Bandage clutched his head, a pained expression crossing his face. ¡°I don¡¯t think I¡¯m called Bandage... but I¡¯m not sure¡­¡±


    It seemed this guy had a story of his own. Charles sighed inwardly. He reached out and patted him on the shoulder. ¡°It¡¯s okay; if you can¡¯t remember the past, don¡¯t dwell on it. Just remember that you¡¯re the first mate of the Unicorn Whale now.¡±


    Bandage looked up, a strange smile spreading across his face. ¡°Thank you... Captain.¡±


    After saying this, he took a long black needle and began to skillfully poke it into the newly grown part of his leg, where small letters began to appear: ¡°Captain Charles can be trusted.¡±


    ¡°First Mate, you really don¡¯t have to¡ª¡±


    ¡°Captain! Something¡¯s happening! Look outside!¡± Deep¡¯s anxious voice interrupted him.


    Immediately, Charles turned his gaze to the window.


    Bright yellow flakes were falling, swaying in the air. This scene made Charles feel as if he were looking at snow on Earth, but in the Sea of the Dead, where even the sky was absent, how could there be snow?


    Faced with this anomaly, Captain Charles quickly issued orders. ¡°Everyone, get below deck! Full speed ahead to leave this area!¡±


    The bright yellow ¡°snow¡± continued to accumulate on the deck, and the atmosphere aboard the Unicorn Whale grew tense.


    With a muffled sound, the Unicorn Whale¡¯s engine roared to life, and black smoke billowed from the smokestack.


    Tension mounting, Charles fixed his gaze on the dark sea, not even daring to blink.


    ¡°Whoosh... Whoosh...¡± The sound of howling wind filled the air, and waves began to rise on the surface of the sea.


    ¡°What... is this? Is it wind? Is the Sea of the Dead experiencing wind? Are we approaching the entrance to the surface?¡± An absurd thought crossed his mind.


    Suddenly, Charles remembered something. His pupils constricted to pinpoints as he grasped the red lever and pulled it hard. The searchlight above the cockpit, which should have been aimed at the sea, rapidly tilted upward, shining toward the sky.


    Rushing outside, he looked up, and in an instant, he felt an unexplainable tremor coursing through him. A fear he had never experienced enveloped him completely.


    Above the Unicorn Whale, a massive eye covered half the sky, staring straight at him.

 **Chapter 30: The Deity**

    Charles stood frozen for a full three seconds, jolted back to reality by Bandage''s fervent prayers. He looked down to see the first mate kneeling beside him, repeatedly bowing towards the colossal eye in the sky.


    Grinding his teeth, Charles yanked Bandage by the arm and stumbled into the cockpit. His face was pale as he slammed the door shut, quickly manipulating the controls to extinguish all the lights on the Unicorn Whale, merging the ship with the darkness.


    Just then, the second mate''s voice crackled through the communication pipe. ¡°Captain, what¡¯s happening up there? Why did you¡ª¡±


    Before he could finish, panic seeped into his voice. ¡°My God, are we facing a ¡®deity¡¯ in the darkness? We¡¯re doomed! We¡¯re utterly doomed!!¡±


    ¡°Second mate! Shut up!¡± Charles roared, veins bulging on his forehead.


    Bandage trembled uncontrollably beside him, his bandaged body curling up on the floor, mumbling incoherently in prayer.


    Charles rushed over, covering Bandage¡¯s mouth with his hand, lowering his voice. ¡°That¡¯s not your Furtan god! Can¡¯t you see that thing is in the sky?¡±


    In the pitch-black cabin, a tense atmosphere settled in, broken only by the sound of rapid breathing.


    After a few minutes, Deep¡¯s low voice broke the silence, as if he were suppressing some intense emotion. ¡°Captain, what kind of deity did you just see? Should we pray to it? I¡¯ve heard that if you encounter a ¡®deity¡¯ and pray sincerely, it might spare us.¡±


    Charles remained silent. He didn¡¯t care what that thing was; he just wanted it to leave.


    A low, resonant hum echoed from above, sending chills down the spines of everyone on board. Moments later, strange noises began to emanate from the deck, growing louder.


    ¡°Damn it! Something¡¯s boarding the ship!¡±


    Charles¡¯s heart raced. He knew he couldn¡¯t remain passive any longer; if this continued, everyone on board would die.


    Resolutely, he dashed to the control panel and activated all the lights. Outside the glass, writhing red masses¡ªunknown creatures¡ªwere crawling on the deck, devouring the bright yellow ¡°snow.¡±


    ¡°Chief Engineer! The turbines are overloaded! We need to leave this cursed place at full speed!¡±


    The dormant Unicorn Whale emitted a low rumble as its speed rapidly increased.


    As Charles watched the grotesque creatures leap off the deck and into the sea, he felt no relief. The true danger lay above; he dared not look up, knowing that a single eye could obscure half the sky. He couldn¡¯t fathom how large the being behind that eye must be. All he could do was flee with all his might.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    Suddenly, the Unicorn Whale lurched violently, sending Bandage and Deep crashing against the wall. Moments later, chaotic noises and screams erupted from the turbine compartment.


    ¡°Captain!! Something¡¯s jammed in the turbine room! The second turbine is dead!¡±


    A metallic screech echoed outside as several giant, finger-like appendages reached down from the sky, grabbing hold of the ship.


    Then, Charles realized the ship had stopped moving and was slowly rising; something was grasping the Unicorn Whale.


    ¡°Damn it! This is my ship! You can¡¯t take it unless you step over my corpse!¡± Furious, Charles disregarded everything else and yanked the searchlight upward, racing to the deck.


    Upon reaching the deck, he looked up and finally saw the true form of the entity above: a moth-like creature, larger than the Unicorn Whale itself, with its grasping appendages clutching the ship. The eye he had seen was merely a spot on its wing, and as it flapped, glimmers of yellow scales fell from the sky.


    Despite the overwhelming presence of the creature, a smile crept onto Charles¡¯s face. This wasn¡¯t some divine being; he had almost been fooled. It was just a monster, and no matter how large it was, it was still just a beast.


    Another low-frequency hum resonated, and the creature¡¯s appendages lunged toward the searchlight, clearly annoyed by the bright light.


    ¡°Lily, load the cannon!¡± Charles shouted as he dashed toward the deck cannon.


    Once the cannon was loaded, the Unicorn Whale had risen about seven or eight meters above the sea.


    He couldn¡¯t let it cling to the ship any longer! Charles aimed the cannon at the massive appendage embedded in the side of the ship.


    ¡°Hold on!¡± With a deafening boom, the chitinous limb exploded, showering the area with red and green ichor.


    The Unicorn Whale crashed back into the water, creating waves that surged around it. If it had been a wooden ship, it would have splintered apart by now.


    Ignoring the blood streaming from his chin, Charles shouted excitedly into the cockpit, ¡°Set sail! Get us out of here!¡±


    ¡°Captain! Look behind you!¡± Deep exclaimed, flailing his arms in panic at the glass.


    Charles turned around just in time to see the giant moth¡¯s severed limb appearing directly in front of the ship. Its two antennae quivered, emitting increasingly loud low growls as if it were enraged.


    ¡°Want to come back for more? Fine! I¡¯ll take you on!¡± With a hint of madness in his eyes, Charles adjusted the cannon¡¯s aim toward the creature¡¯s grotesque head.


    Just as the tension in the air reached its peak, a massive water column, three times larger than the moth, erupted from the sea.


    The water exploded, revealing a gigantic, translucent hand adorned with sinister patterns, rising like a mountain from the depths.


    The moment he saw that hand, Charles was overwhelmed by a deafening whisper, and everything around him began to warp. His sense of self rapidly dissolved.


    With a furious wind, that colossal hand descended toward the giant moth. Upon contact with the water¡¯s surface, a massive wave surged upward, transforming into a violent tsunami that crashed toward the Unicorn Whale.


    In a daze, Charles glimpsed a giant walking between heaven and earth. It was green all over, its soft head covered in countless tentacles, and its forelimbs resembled limp claws, with a grotesque, slimy mouth stretching from its chin to its belly.


    ¡°Boom!¡± The overwhelming wave crashed onto the deck, sweeping Charles into the sea. Deep, witnessing the scene from the cockpit, leaped in after him.


    ¡°Captain! Wake up! Captain!!¡±


    Charles slowly opened his eyes, realizing he was back in the captain¡¯s cabin.


    ¡°Whew.¡± As soon as the crew saw Charles awake, they collectively sighed in relief, with Lily bursting into tears of joy.


    Ignoring the pain in his head, Charles turned to the second mate beside him. ¡°Are we safe now? Where are we?¡±


    The red-haired youth managed a wry smile. ¡°We¡¯re safe, but I¡¯m not sure where we are¡­¡±

 **Chapter 31: Fresh Water**

    Charles had just thrown off the covers and stepped out of bed when a piercing ringing filled his ears, followed by a tidal wave of whispers crashing over him.


    This time, the situation was far more severe than any he had faced before. Hallucinations began to cloud his vision, and he saw the crew¡¯s bodies rotting, grotesque tentacles bursting forth from them, transforming everyone into bloody monstrosities.


    Without a second thought, Charles grabbed the box Elizabeth had given him and pulled out a large chunk of green gel, swallowing it down.


    The whispers in his ears quickly diminished, and the crew¡¯s appearances returned to normal. Breathless and drenched in cold sweat, Charles stood at a distance, trying to regain his composure.


    Ignoring the concerned voices of the others, he said, ¡°Notify everyone, we need a meeting in the captain¡¯s cabin.¡±


    Soon, the rest of the crew gathered for an emergency meeting in the captain¡¯s quarters.


    ¡°What¡¯s our location?¡±


    ¡°Uh... we can¡¯t confirm yet. The giant wave seems to have tossed the Unicorn Whale far away, but thankfully the first mate¡¯s experience kept the ship from capsizing.¡±


    ¡°What about crew losses?¡±


    ¡°We lost two sailors, likely swept away by the sea. The second turbine was punctured by that butterfly¡¯s claw, and Chef Frey dislocated his left arm.¡±


    Just as the second mate, Krona, finished speaking, the chief engineer chimed in.


    ¡°Captain¡­ that monster¡¯s forelimb pierced the turbine room. The hole has been patched, but turbine power is compromised; the Unicorn Whale is only moving at one-fifth of its previous speed.¡±


    Bad news kept piling up, and Charles felt the weight on his shoulders growing heavier.


    Taking a deep breath, he spoke decisively, ¡°First mate, adjust the crew¡¯s watch schedule and fill the vacant roles. Cancel the previous mission; we¡¯ll head south first. There are more human islands to the south, increasing our chances of encountering help.¡±


    The crew nodded in agreement, and after what felt like an eternity, the Unicorn Whale finally began to move again.


    Once the crew had dispersed, Charles took a swig from a bottle he had retrieved from below decks. The composed captain from earlier had vanished, replaced by a man filled with deep-seated fear.


    That hand, larger than a mountain¡ªwas it truly a giant from his nightmares? What was it?


    He had heard of the deities of the deep sea, but whether they were real or not didn¡¯t matter to him. Today, seeing a deity for the first time made him acutely aware of humanity¡¯s insignificance.


    ¡°Is this really still Earth? There can¡¯t be such massive creatures here! The sheer gravity alone should crush it!¡±If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    For a fleeting moment, the thought of selling the ship and returning to the island to live out his days crossed his mind.


    But the blurry image of his family flashed in his mind, and Charles¡¯s gaze hardened. ¡°I can¡¯t give up; not even a god can stop me!¡±


    After taking another deep swig from the bottle, he tucked it away and walked back outside, his expression once again cold and impassive.


    Time passed slowly. Under Charles¡¯s command, the Unicorn Whale gradually regained its calm. Although they hadn¡¯t escaped danger, the morale among the crew stabilized.


    Some even had the leisure to collect the yellow snow, hoping to show off their finds to others upon their return.


    Yet, the enormous hand that had emerged from the depths was a taboo topic, one that everyone tacitly avoided discussing.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, Deep is bullying me!!¡±


    In the mess hall, the little mouse Lily stormed up to Charles, who was eating, to complain.


    ¡°That guy said if there¡¯s no food later, he¡¯ll eat my friends!¡±


    Hearing the accusation, Deep looked up, suppressing a laugh. ¡°Captain, I was just teasing her. Besides, mice aren¡¯t that tasty.¡±


    ¡°Can you be less childish? We¡¯re not out of danger yet.¡± After reprimanding the first mate, Charles turned to Lily.


    ¡°There¡¯s enough food; if we run low, we can fish. We won¡¯t need to eat your friends.¡±


    Upon hearing this, Lily finally relaxed and jumped in front of Deep, confronting him.


    Although Charles wore a calm expression, inside he was secretly anxious. There was enough food, but fresh water was running low.


    If they didn¡¯t find a new place to land before the fresh water ran out, the entire crew would die of thirst.


    As if sensing Charles¡¯s thoughts, Bandage, munching on bread nearby, approached. ¡°Captain¡­ I have a way out¡­¡±


    Charles¡¯s interest piqued. ¡°What method?¡±


    ¡°Sacrifice¡­ just three¡­ souls. The Furtan god will guide us¡­¡±


    A flicker of disgust crossed Charles¡¯s face. ¡°Forget those disgusting ideas.¡±


    After a moment of silence, Bandage looked at the sailors in the distance and said, ¡°The ship has enough fresh water for another month. If we draw lots for a sacrifice¡­ the survivors could drink the blood of the others¡­ the last three could last half a year¡­¡±


    Charles suddenly turned his head, narrowing his eyes at Bandage, as if seeing him for the first time. This guy was far from the harmless person he pretended to be.


    ¡°Sorry¡­ it¡¯s just an emergency plan¡­ I¡¯ve been in this situation before¡­ I ate my captain¡­¡±


    ¡°Enough!! Eat your meal!¡± Charles¡¯s sudden shout startled everyone.


    The next day, the crew discovered that the fresh water on the Unicorn Whale was being rationed. No one opposed it, but the smiles on their faces had significantly faded.


    The amount of fresh water dwindled day by day, and even Charles¡¯s liquor was rationed out.


    When each person could only receive a cup of water daily, someone finally snapped, desperate to jump overboard, only to be stopped by the other crew members.


    Bandage brought up the idea of sacrifice once more, and just as Charles began to waver, a blurred white beam of light sliced through the darkness above¡ªthe light of a lighthouse.


    Standing among the cheering crew, Charles let out a heavy sigh of relief. His heart, which had been in turmoil, finally settled. The hellish scenario had been averted.


    As the Unicorn Whale slowly approached, a strange island came into view. If other islands resembled pancakes, this one looked like an egg.


    At the bottom of the egg was an opening, with various steamships entering and exiting, adorned with red flags.


    Due to their lost bearings, Charles didn¡¯t know the name of this island; it didn¡¯t appear on any maps he remembered.


    However, since it was a human island, communication should be possible. The Unicorn Whale followed the other ships into the giant egg.


    Inside the egg was a colossal city, with various Gothic buildings arranged neatly. Perhaps because it was a cavern, bats frequently flew overhead.


    ¡°First mate, ask them if they have a shipyard. The Unicorn Whale needs a turbine replacement.¡±


    ¡°Got it!¡± Deep replied, holding up two green flags and quickly signaling from the bow.


    Before long, Deep returned with a peculiar expression. ¡°Captain, their flag signals are quite different; I can¡¯t understand them.¡±

 **Chapter 32: The Locals**

    As Charles looked at the crowd gathered at the dock, he licked his cracked lips. ¡°Let¡¯s dock first and ask the locals directly.¡±


    Once they disembarked from the ship, they were met by a throng of people, all staring at them with unblinking eyes.


    Just as Charles began to feel uneasy under their scrutiny, two middle-aged men in customs uniforms pushed through the crowd. One of them, a man with deep-set lines on his face, spoke up. ¡°Who is the captain? Where did your ship come from? You can¡¯t dock here; didn¡¯t you know?¡±


    Charles stepped forward and explained the situation in detail, inquiring about the presence of a shipyard on the island.


    After he finished speaking, there was a long pause. The two men stared at him, seemingly frozen, before finally snapping back to life, their expressions shifting to one of enthusiasm. ¡°Yes, sir! If you steer your ship east, you¡¯ll find a shipyard there.¡±


    The second mate, Krona, leaned closer to Charles and whispered, ¡°Captain, don¡¯t you think these islanders are a bit slow to react?¡±


    Charles wasn¡¯t sure but dismissed it as a minor issue¡ªperhaps it was just a quirk of the island.


    When he finally guided the Unicorn Whale into the shipyard, he was informed that replacing the turbine would take a month.


    Though it was a long wait, there was no other option; the turbine was the heart of a steamship, and without it, the Unicorn Whale couldn¡¯t return to Coral Island.


    After paying the deposit and stepping out of the dock, Charles noticed the islanders were still staring at them, unmoving.


    Ignoring their peculiar customs, he hurried his crew into a quiet inn for a hearty meal.


    Watching his crew eat with satisfied bellies, Charles said, ¡°Replacing the turbine will take a month, and these locals seem a bit unfriendly. Everyone, stay safe and avoid trouble.¡±


    The crew leaned back in their chairs, lazily agreeing in small groups.


    However, when Charles began distributing the pay for this mission, everyone perked up.


    James, holding his echo coin, hesitated. ¡°Captain, this mission failed, and with the Unicorn Whale needing a turbine, if it weren¡¯t for this paycheck¡ª¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine; you all deserve what you¡¯ve earned. Take this time to rest well.¡±


    Having been frugal to buy the ship, Charles was less concerned about money now. After such a disaster, if he could rally the crew¡¯s spirits with some paper currency, it would be a worthwhile investment.


    As soon as they received their pay, the crew couldn¡¯t sit still. With smiles on their faces, they shouldered each other and headed out. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Charles understood exactly where they were going. For men who made their living at sea, this was standard practice, while his frugality made him seem like an oddity among them.


    That night, Charles had a nightmare. He felt himself sinking into the water again, the enormous, terrifying creature turning to face him.


    He screamed, waking up in a cold sweat, finding no underwater horrors¡ªjust the peeling ceiling of the inn.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, did you have a nightmare last night?¡± Lily jumped onto his chest, her eyes wide.


    Sitting up, Charles pulled out his pocket watch, realizing he had slept for eleven hours¡ªsomething he had never done before.


    As he got up to wash up, he noticed an envelope at the door.


    Opening it, he found a beautifully penned note.


    ¡°Mr. Charles:


    The life of an exploration ship is just too dangerous. I can¡¯t take it anymore; I¡¯ve decided to return to shore. I¡¯m sorry I can¡¯t say goodbye in person.


    Former sailor, Sifler.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡± Charles crumpled the note and tossed it into the nearby trash.


    ¡°Looks like money alone can¡¯t keep people around. Some are just too scared.¡±


    Charles felt little emotional turmoil; it was only natural for some to leave after such an ordeal.


    After checking the time, he realized it was evening. He took Lily and stepped outside.


    The differences in the port area weren¡¯t too pronounced, but as soon as Charles entered what was known as the Crown District, he noticed the stark contrast between this island and Coral Island.


    Here, the attire and architectural style were entirely different. Every man on the street wore suits and carried canes, while the elegantly dressed women exuded grace.


    Whether it was a trick of his imagination, the islanders here appeared more refined, with handsome men and beautiful women far exceeding the average island.


    Yet, regardless of their looks, the habit of staring at strangers remained unchanged.


    Being watched like a spectacle wasn¡¯t a pleasant feeling. Charles stopped a man walking by and asked, ¡°Excuse me, where is the Explorers¡¯ Association? I couldn¡¯t find it in the port area.¡±


    ¡°The Explorers¡¯ Association? What¡¯s that? I¡¯ve never heard of it.¡±


    Never heard of it? Charles was taken aback. From what he knew, most islands in the Sea of the Deep were discovered by explorers.


    While the association was a loose organization, it had formed a symbiotic relationship with the governors of the islands, wielding considerable influence in human settlements.


    If this place didn¡¯t even have an Explorers¡¯ Association, could it be that this island was isolated from others, a true solitary isle?


    While Charles was lost in thought, the man he had questioned turned and walked away.


    After pondering for a moment, Charles entered a nearby library. Inside, he quickly found various sea charts. After comparing them, he soon pinpointed the location of the island.


    He traced a line on the map with his finger, relaxing as he said, ¡°Thankfully, while this place isn¡¯t recorded, it¡¯s not too far from Coral Island. Once the ship is repaired and we leave quickly, we should be back in a maximum of fifteen days.¡±


    After purchasing several new and old sea charts, Charles exited the library.


    Standing on the bustling street, he suddenly felt lost. The ship was under repair, and he had confirmed their current coordinates, but he didn¡¯t know what to do next.


    If it were the old Charles, he would have likely continued to train his physique and practice shooting in preparation for future adventures.


    But thinking of the increasingly severe hallucinations, he wondered if he had been too tense. He hadn¡¯t rested since arriving.


    ¡°Perhaps I should try to relax; it might help with the hallucinations.¡±


    With that thought, Charles turned to Lily on his shoulder. ¡°Let¡¯s explore this island.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡± Lily¡¯s ears perked up at the prospect of fun.


    Towering spires, vividly carved reliefs, and stained glass windows greeted them.


    Though Charles had little artistic sense, he could tell that the architecture here was exceptionally refined, far surpassing that of Coral Island, which had little historical depth.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, what¡¯s that? It looks delicious!¡± Lily exclaimed, pointing at a stall selling colorful pastries.

 **Chapter 33: The Blind Painter**

    Hearing Lily¡¯s voice from his shoulder, Charles turned to look in the direction she pointed. A few dozen meters ahead, a bustling square came into view, filled with lively chatter and numerous street vendors selling grilled food.


    ¡°Looks like the pedestrian street of the Sea of the Deep,¡± Charles said as he made his way over.


    After buying a bag of creamy oysters for Lily, he stepped into the lively square. This seemed to be the local market, with various foods and performances drawing the crowd. Lily¡¯s eyes sparkled with excitement.


    As Charles wandered unknowingly to the edge of the square, he spotted a disfigured blind man wearing sunglasses. His face was a grotesque mix of flesh and skin, resembling someone who had suffered severe burns. In stark contrast to the beautiful people around, he stood out disturbingly.


    At the blind man¡¯s feet lay a sign that read: ¡°Oil painting, 100 echoes each.¡±


    Noticing the tattered cloak draped over the blind man, Charles guessed his business wasn¡¯t thriving. Who would commission a blind man to paint?


    The blind man crouched next to his easel, looking pitiful amidst the surrounding revelry. Just then, three young men swaggered by, kicking the easel, and laughed boisterously as they watched the blind man scramble to pick up his fallen supplies.


    Seeing everyone around ignore the scene, Charles frowned slightly. ¡°These islanders are not only strange but also quite indifferent.¡±


    Lily, unable to stand by, scampered over with her little mouse and helped the blind man gather his papers.


    Feeling someone assist him, the blind man suddenly broke into tears. ¡°Why! Why must I be so unfortunate?!¡±


    Charles approached, contemplating for a moment, then said to the blind man, ¡°Stop crying; paint me a picture.¡±


    Seeing a potential customer, the blind man quickly composed himself, wiping his tears. ¡°Sir, please have a seat here.¡± He fumbled to pull out a folding chair from behind the easel.


    Watching the blind man deftly mix colors, Charles felt a flicker of curiosity. How could a blind man paint?


    As he pondered this, the blind man turned the palette toward him and reached out with both hands, feeling his way toward Charles¡¯s face.


    ¡°Is he going to paint by touch?¡± A thought crossed Charles¡¯s mind just as the blind man picked up a brush and began to work.


    This piqued Charles¡¯s interest; he was eager to see the blind man¡¯s skill.


    A few minutes later, the blind man paused, took the canvas from the easel, and respectfully presented it to Charles.The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Clang!¡± Startled, Charles knocked over the folding chair and instinctively stepped back, his hand reaching for the gun holster at his waist.


    The canvas didn¡¯t depict Charles at all but a vivid image of Anna!


    The sound of the chair crashing caught the blind artist¡¯s attention, and he turned toward Charles, his face filled with panic. ¡°Sir, is it not to your liking? Please don¡¯t go; I haven¡¯t eaten in three days. Have pity on me!¡±


    Charles, with a complex expression, took the painting and pulled out several hundred echo bills, placing them in the blind man¡¯s hand.


    Feeling the money, the blind man¡¯s terrifying face lit up with joy. He bowed deeply toward Charles. ¡°Thank you for your kindness, sir. May the Lady bless you.¡±


    ¡°Can you read minds?¡± Charles asked, still holding the painting.


    ¡°No, no! It¡¯s just a useless ability I developed after losing my sight,¡± the blind man said humbly, shrinking back slightly, his face eager to please.


    Charles¡¯s fingers traced Anna¡¯s face on the canvas, and a flood of fictional memories surged back into his mind.


    ¡°Gao Zhiming, I like you. Can I be your girlfriend?¡±


    ¡°Gao Zhiming, stop playing games. I¡¯m much more fun than a game.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine; it¡¯s just going underground. What¡¯s the big deal? With me by your side, we¡¯ll definitely get out!!¡±


    Charles¡¯s expression twisted slightly, his hands clenching the edges of the canvas in anger.


    Lily jumped onto Charles¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Mr. Charles, who is this sister? She¡¯s so beautiful!¡±


    As the mouse and the man conversed, the blind artist lifted his chin, sniffing the air intently.


    In the end, still hesitant to tear the painting, Charles slowly rolled it up and tucked it into his coat. With a hint of melancholy, he said, ¡°Let¡¯s go, Lily; we¡¯re heading back.¡±


    The blind man raised his hand as if to call out but hesitated, ultimately saying nothing.


    On the way back, Lily noticed that Charles seemed distracted, and the little mouse quickly deduced it had something to do with the painting.


    ¡°Could it be like in the play, where that sister had a tumultuous romance with Mr. Charles and then cruelly abandoned him??¡±


    When Charles returned to the inn, he found three envelopes at the door. This time, two sailors and a cook had left.


    With the recent death, nearly half of the crew of the Unicorn Whale was gone.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on? Why are so many resigning? Why not wait until we get back to Coral Island?¡± Charles decided to write in his journal and then call the crew together to ask; this was quite unusual.


    Lighting the oil lamp, Charles took out the painting and stared at it for a while before slipping it into his nautical journal.


    He pulled out his steel pen and began to write, but before he could jot down a few words, another envelope slid under the door.


    ¡°Come and tell me in person!¡±


    There was no response outside, and with a grim expression, Charles walked over, opened the envelope, and immediately became serious upon seeing the name ¡°Deep¡± written on it. ¡°Lily, let¡¯s go outside.¡±


    Lily jumped onto Charles¡¯s shoulder again, the brown mice following like a carpet.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, why are we going out again?¡±


    ¡°The situation feels off; that kid Deep is in danger.¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡± Lily¡¯s eyes widened.


    Charles waved the letter in front of her. ¡°This absolutely cannot be written by him. That kid is an orphan; he can¡¯t even spell properly. How could he write a resignation letter? This is forged by someone else!¡±


    Connecting this to the previous oddities, Charles was convinced something was wrong with his crew.


    If the crew wanted to leave, they would likely just walk away. Those with better relationships, like Old John, would at most say goodbye in person. Writing a resignation letter was a rarity.


    Moreover, the elegant cursive writing didn¡¯t resemble that of rough sailors at all.


    Once outside, he said to Lily, ¡°Send your mice out to gather everyone on the Unicorn Whale.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡± Lily squeaked, and the brown mice scattered like a carpet.

 **Chapter 34: The Vampire**

    ¡°Captain, what¡¯s going on??¡±


    The crew of the Unicorn Whale rushed in, following the little mice. Most of them looked disheveled, reeking of alcohol, with various lipstick marks on their collars.


    ¡°Does anyone know where Deep went last night?¡± Charles asked them.


    The skinny cook, Frey, quickly spoke up. ¡°Captain, I know! That kid was taken away by the second mate yesterday. He said he wanted to find a fancy place to become a real man. It¡¯s just ahead, not far from here.¡±


    ¡°Grab your gear and follow me!¡±


    Charles immediately thought of the possibility that they had offended the local gang. Such establishments often had specific groups controlling them. However, it didn¡¯t add up; if it were a gang, why would they send resignation letters after kidnapping? This behavior clearly indicated they wanted to keep the disappearances under wraps.


    Soon, they arrived at an inn draped in red curtains. Even approaching the entrance, they could smell the enticing scents that stirred the men¡¯s desires.


    ¡°Bang!¡± Charles kicked the door open and stormed inside, drawing the attention of the couples embracing in the hall.


    A nearly two-meter-tall brute stood up, his face dark with anger, flanked by dozens of subordinates.


    ¡°Who dares to cause trouble on our turf?¡± shouted a short man, only to be sent flying by a slap from the brute.


    The heavily built man approached Charles, looking down at him.


    ¡°I hear my crew is here,¡± Charles said, unwavering as he met the brute¡¯s gaze.


    The brute, surprisingly calm in the face of Charles¡¯s challenge, replied, ¡°Your two crew members aren¡¯t here. Perhaps they¡¯ve gone somewhere else.¡±


    Charles narrowed his eyes, his expression cold. ¡°Did I mention two crew members?¡±


    The brute¡¯s face darkened, realizing he had been caught in a lie. Unable to conceal it any longer, he waved his hand.


    The thugs around them began to usher out the remaining patrons, and within moments, the once lively establishment grew eerily quiet.


    ¡°I know you sea-faring types aren¡¯t easy to deal with, but since you¡¯re here, why not stay?¡± The brute licked his lips with a crimson tongue. ¡°By the Lady¡¯s grace, I, Durand, have struck it rich by capturing this batch of humans.¡±


    Hearing Durand¡¯s menacing words, Charles didn¡¯t hesitate. ¡°Swish!¡± He drew his revolver, aiming it directly at Durand. The other crew members followed suit, brandishing their weapons.This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    In an instant, everyone burst into laughter, as if Charles had just told the most ridiculous joke.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!¡± Bullets struck Durand¡¯s body, splattering blood everywhere.


    To everyone¡¯s shock, Durand¡¯s grotesque wounds began to heal rapidly, and within seconds, he was back to normal.


    ¡°Looks like you don¡¯t know what you¡¯re up against, humans,¡± Durand sneered, a terrifying smile spreading across his pale face.


    From beneath his upper lip, two sharp fangs emerged, and his eyes turned a blood-red hue.


    ¡°So, you¡¯re a vampire,¡± Charles said, his pupils constricting.


    ¡°Your blood is mine!¡± Durand lunged forward, kicking off the ground and crashing into Charles, sinking his fangs into Charles¡¯s neck.


    At that moment, the others sprang into action, shedding their disguises and revealing their fangs as they lunged at the crew.


    However, as Durand drank, he suddenly felt something was off. The man in front of him wasn¡¯t struggling at all, which was highly unusual.


    ¡°Is this guy paralyzed with fear?¡± Just as this thought crossed his mind, a white mask of ecstasy was placed over Charles¡¯s face.


    ¡°Swish!¡± A glint of cold steel flashed, and a black blade plunged into Durand¡¯s chest, forcing him backward.


    ¡°I thought you were something special, but you¡¯re just a pathetic vampire!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh!¡± Behind them, the nearly four-meter-tall James roared as he seized one of the vampires, ripping it in half.


    The mice squeaked and charged forward, overwhelming another vampire, who screamed in agony.


    The remaining crew members began to attack. Though they were timid in the face of the giant, vampires were nothing compared to those who had encountered ¡°the Divine.¡±


    ¡°You!¡± Durand glared angrily at the masked figure before him, realizing this was not what he had anticipated.


    With a swift movement, Durand¡¯s sharp claws slashed through the air toward Charles¡¯s face.


    Charles¡¯s neck muscles tensed, and the smooth mask narrowly avoided the razor-sharp claws.


    ¡°Like to bite, do you? Let me give you a taste!¡±


    The bloodied black blade rose swiftly and plunged into Durand¡¯s mouth, the blade piercing through to the back of his skull.


    Furious, Durand attempted to resist, but Charles pushed the hilt forward, cleaving the vampire¡¯s hideous face in half. In the next moment, he raised the black blade and drove it into Durand¡¯s heart.


    The once-mighty vampire convulsed and collapsed, lifeless.


    Focusing on reassembling the bloodied remains, Charles performed a backflip and joined the fray behind him.


    Seeing Charles slaughtering his kin with ease, the remaining vampires finally couldn¡¯t bear it any longer and fled, crashing through the windows to escape.


    ¡°What a joke, is that all there is? You¡¯ve got my blood boiling!¡± Charles sneered at their retreating figures.


    His ears perked up as he led the crew through the wrecked hall, arriving at a wooden door.


    As soon as he pushed it open, he saw Deep and Knona hanging on a cross like cured meat, their wrists slashed and blood dripping into a wooden basin below.


    Both were ashen-faced, and it was clear that if Charles hadn¡¯t arrived in time, they would have bled to death.


    Upon seeing Charles, the two men on the cross thrashed wildly.


    Charles didn¡¯t immediately free them. Instead, he approached Deep and tapped the black blade against his face. ¡°So, how does it feel to be at the mercy of a female vampire?¡±


    Gagged and unable to speak, the boy¡¯s eyes pleaded silently.


    With a flash of white light, the chains binding them snapped apart.


    Not bothering with the two miserable souls, Charles turned to examine the various blood-drawing instruments nearby.


    This appeared to be a place specifically for vampires to extract blood, and just from seeing the tall glass jars filled with blood, Charles knew there were more victims than just these two.


    The other missing crew members were likely not here, indicating that the vampires were not limited to just these few.


    ¡°What should we do next, Mr. Charles?¡± Lily asked curiously.


    ¡°What else? After killing so many vampires, it¡¯s time to call the authorities.¡±

 **Chapter 35: The Entire Island**

    Soon, a shocking scene unfolded on the streets of the dock. A nearly four-meter-tall giant dragged a vampire corpse wrapped in pink curtains through the town, dark red blood soaking the cobblestones beneath, leaving behind a gruesome "red carpet."


    The islanders hurriedly parted to make way, panic etched on their faces. Some in the crowd, witnessing the spectacle, turned to leave.


    Charles noticed their reactions and coldly smiled; those people were likely spies for the vampires. This was the intimidation he sought. No matter how formidable the vampires were, compared to the terror of the deep sea, they were nothing but child''s play.


    The crimson trail extended from the brothel all the way to the police booth at the dock.


    ¡°Hey, your island isn¡¯t being managed very well! How can so many of these creatures infiltrate without you noticing? What are you doing?¡± Charles reprimanded the two on-duty policemen, adopting an authoritative tone.


    The officers, sweating profusely at the sight of the chaotic scene, stammered.


    ¡°Are you hot?¡± Charles leaned in closer, his masked face inches from theirs.


    ¡°N-no!¡± one of the portly officers instinctively recoiled.


    ¡°I¡¯ve gone ahead and dealt with your problem. Shouldn¡¯t you show a little gratitude? I suspect there are still hidden vampires at the dock. You¡¯d better find them quickly; I still have crew members unaccounted for.¡±


    Faced with the pile of corpses at the entrance, the two officers dared not argue and quickly promised to notify their superiors.


    As soon as Charles left, the portly officer urgently turned to his partner. ¡°Quick! Notify the chief! The newcomers just killed Durand!!¡±


    ¡°Captain, will those black-skinned dogs help us find the others?¡± Knona, clutching his wrist, asked.


    Charles replied, ¡°If I were the ruler of this island, I wouldn¡¯t allow any foreign race to drain blood on my territory.¡±


    Removing his mask, Charles¡¯s expression turned serious. ¡°That¡¯s not the point. The fact that the vampires are so brazen indicates that this island isn¡¯t safe. We need to leave quickly. Let¡¯s head to the shipyard.¡±


    ¡°Sir, what are you doing here? Didn¡¯t I tell you it would take a month?¡± The factory manager rushed over, clutching blueprints amidst the noise of the shipyard.


    ¡°Can you speed it up? The echo coin isn¡¯t the issue.¡±If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Charles didn¡¯t want to complicate matters; he just needed the turbine to get back to Coral Island. Once on his own turf, he could safely replace the turbine.


    Hearing Charles¡¯s words, the manager¡¯s face showed hesitation. ¡°That¡¯s quite difficult¡­¡±


    As he spoke, a young worker approached and whispered something in his ear.


    The manager¡¯s expression changed instantly, fear flashing in his eyes as he looked at Charles. ¡°S-sir! I can have the best turbine replaced for you in three days. Just three days!¡±


    Though Charles didn¡¯t know what the worker had said, he could clearly sense the shift in the manager¡¯s demeanor.


    With his goal achieved, Charles didn¡¯t linger. He gave a few simple instructions before stepping outside.


    ¡°Prepare everything. As soon as the turbine is ready, we leave.¡±


    ¡°What about Jack and the others?¡± Deep inquired about the other missing crew members.


    ¡°Can¡¯t worry about that now. If the ship is ready and they haven¡¯t been found by the police, their situation will likely be dire.¡±


    Just as Charles was talking to the crew, Lily, perched on his shoulder, exclaimed, ¡°Mr. Charles, look! It¡¯s that painter!¡±


    Charles looked up to see the disfigured blind artist stumbling toward them, sniffing the air as he approached.


    Instinctively, Charles felt the artist was searching for him.


    ¡°Is there something you need?¡± Charles asked as he stepped in front of him.


    The artist jumped at the question, but soon a hint of joy spread across his grotesque face. ¡°Sir, I finally found you! I wanted to speak with you back at Helen Square, but there were too many people, and I¡ª¡±


    ¡°Spit it out,¡± Charles interrupted.


    The blind man lowered his voice, nervously retracting his neck. ¡°Sir, I have crucial information regarding your safety. I want to exchange this news for a ride on your ship to leave this cursed place. I can¡¯t stay here any longer; everyone bullies me.¡±


    Though unsure of the artist¡¯s motives, Charles agreed to the unequal exchange. He needed more local information. ¡°Go on.¡±


    ¡°I know you¡¯re strong, but you need to leave quickly. The news of Durand¡¯s death has reached the police. They¡¯ve sent two dukes to deal with the situation. If you wait for them to arrive, you¡¯ll be trapped!¡±


    ¡°Dukes? What are you talking about?¡± Charles frowned.


    The blind man grew agitated, gesturing rapidly. ¡°Not only were those you killed vampires! The entire island¡¯s population is made up of vampires. This place is their stronghold¡ªBlack Crystal Island!!¡±


    The revelation shocked everyone aboard the Unicorn Whale, their faces filled with disbelief as they widened their eyes, scanning the surrounding islanders.


    ¡°All of them?¡±


    ¡°Yes, all of them, including me.¡±


    The blind man opened his mouth wide, revealing sharp fangs that glinted ominously.


    Charles¡¯s expression darkened. If it were just a few vampires, it wouldn¡¯t be so terrifying, but if the entire island was composed of them, then they were undoubtedly sitting ducks.


    He had thought he had narrowly escaped, only to find himself in a den of wolves.


    ¡°If they¡¯re all in cahoots, then just now¡­¡±


    Charles¡¯s face changed as he realized something and hurriedly led the crew back to the shipyard.


    As soon as he entered, he collided with the factory manager.


    ¡°Didn¡¯t you say you¡¯d expedite the repairs? Why are you still here?¡± The crew members wore menacing expressions.


    ¡°Uh¡­ I¡­¡± the manager stammered.


    Charles, uninterested in explanations, ordered his crew to seal all exits and gather everyone inside.


    Facing the manager, whose expression shifted from fear to anger, Charles said, ¡°No need to pretend. That guy already told us the truth. You¡¯re all in league with those outside, aren¡¯t you? I¡¯m sure you haven¡¯t even touched my ship.¡±


    ¡°Traitor!¡± The enraged manager lunged at the blind man, but a blood-stained black blade blocked his path.

 **Chapter 36: The Dukes**

    Watching the vampire shipworkers stir restlessly, James, standing behind Charles, quickly grew in size. He hoisted a steel beam as thick as a bowl onto his shoulder, instantly quieting the commotion.


    Charles turned to the blind man beside him. ¡°When will those two dukes arrive?¡±


    ¡°They usually stay at the central tomb of the island. It might take them half a day to get here.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    Charles pointed to the Unicorn Whale and addressed the vampire factory manager. ¡°You have three hours to install the turbine for me. Otherwise, Durand will be your fate.¡±


    A bearded vampire stepped forward, agitated. ¡°That¡¯s impossible! Do you know how complicated it is to replace a turbine?¡±


    ¡°Chief Engineer.¡±


    As soon as Charles issued the command, the steel beam behind him swung down, smashing into the bearded vampire.


    His contorted body attempted to heal, but the steel beam struck again and again, turning him into a bloody pulp.


    Blood splattered onto the remaining vampires, fear etched on each of their faces.


    ¡°Do you think I¡¯m easy to talk to? You bloodsucking monsters? Now go change that turbine!¡± Charles''s voice suppressed his fury.


    The factory manager''s lips trembled as he wiped the flesh from his face, turning to lead the other vampires toward the Unicorn Whale.


    ¡°Chief Engineer, you know the turbine well. Keep an eye on them; be wary of any tricks.¡±


    ¡°Understood, Captain.¡± The chief engineer followed the manager.


    This kind of task should have been handled by the chief engineer, but he was currently too dim-witted to manage it. Meanwhile, James stood frozen in place, intimidating all the vampires.


    ¡°Creak~¡± The metal door of the shipyard opened slightly, and Deep cautiously peered outside.


    After a brief observation, he turned back to Charles, who was sitting on a crate. ¡°Captain, it seems the people outside have noticed us. A lot of them are looking this way.¡±


    ¡°Odrick, will they rush in?¡± Charles asked, wiping the black blade.


    The blind man shook his head. ¡°No, they won¡¯t dare touch the duke¡¯s prey. Besides, you¡¯re not just ordinary humans; they¡¯re a disorganized mob and may not dare to act without a leader.¡±


    Charles felt a sense of understanding. It seemed that his earlier intimidation still held sway. Even if the vampires outside knew they were trying to escape, without a leader, they wouldn¡¯t dare to act rashly.The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    ¡°How strong are the dukes?¡± Charles inquired about the approaching enemies.


    ¡°The strength of bloodsuckers is determined by their age. The older they are, the more experience and power they possess. To become a duke, one must be at least five hundred years old. They are fundamentally different from us; if they wish, they can easily kill thousands of ordinary bloodsuckers.¡±


    Five hundred years? Charles was taken aback. With such age, did they have knowledge of the Light Continent?


    Upon hearing Charles''s speculation, Odrick shook his head. ¡°You can only ask the Mistress about that. All the bloodsuckers on this island were created by her, and she is the only one who has been to that cursed place. It¡¯s said that light is everywhere there, and just a touch would turn one to ash. I really don¡¯t know how the Mistress survived.¡±


    ¡°Then why did your Mistress come to this place?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯ve heard about that. There¡¯s a legend that a being told the Mistress of a place where the sun never harms bloodsuckers, and where humans are plentiful.¡±


    Charles was momentarily stunned. He hadn¡¯t considered that the vampires had come for this reason.


    The blind Odrick, unable to see Charles¡¯s expression, continued. ¡°But that being deceived the Mistress. This place not only has humans but also various beings far stronger than us bloodsuckers. Even among bloodsuckers, surviving in such a place is extremely difficult, and the Mistress resents him for it.¡±


    Upon hearing about beings much stronger than the Mistress, Charles instinctively thought of that enormous hand that had risen from the sea, one that evoked no resistance whatsoever.


    ¡°How much do you know about the Mistress¡¯s previous world? Which country did she come from? How many suns are in the sky?¡± Charles fired off several questions, hoping to deduce the current surface era and environment from the details.


    Odrick wore a bitter smile. ¡°Mr. Charles, I¡¯m only 124 years old and still quite young. As for my status among the bloodsuckers, you¡¯ve seen it yourself; I have no way of knowing those things.¡±


    Charles let out a light sigh, feeling a bit melancholic as he walked toward the Unicorn Whale. This answer was expected.


    To find out the truth, he would have to confront the Mistress directly, but even that seemed impossible¡ªunless he was tired of living.


    Lily, who had been listening intently, approached Odrick with curiosity. ¡°So your Mistress came to this island to escape danger? How pitiful.¡±


    ¡°No, we came to escape humans. The strength of humans is growing, and the conflicts between bloodsuckers and humans are escalating. The Mistress foresaw the impending war and left with her offspring. In fact, we have a symbiotic relationship with humans; if you die, we won¡¯t have food and will also perish.¡±


    ¡°What about your food? Do you eat rats?¡±


    ¡°In the northern part of Dark Crystal Island, we keep a group of humans who provide a certain amount of blood each week, but it¡¯s really too expensive¡­ Usually, we can only endure the disgust and eat some human food.¡±


    Time ticked by, and the number of bloodsuckers loitering outside the shipyard increased.


    At this point, they no longer hid, baring their fangs and revealing their bloodthirsty gazes.


    Although they didn¡¯t rush in, the sight of the encircling vampires still weighed heavily on Charles.


    ¡°How much longer? If you don¡¯t want to die, hurry up!¡± Charles¡¯s roar echoed through the shipyard.


    ¡°Almost done! We¡¯re just riveting!¡± The factory manager, sweating profusely, urged his subordinates frantically.


    Just then, the sound of flapping wings outside reached everyone''s ears.


    Charles rushed to a window and looked outside, spotting a large swarm of black bats flying toward them. The vampires outside cheered at the sight of the bats in the air.


    The bats swiftly descended, transforming into a man and woman draped in red-lined black cloaks.


    ¡°Damn!¡± An irritated Charles didn¡¯t need anyone to explain to guess the identities of these two.


    ¡°Didn¡¯t they say it would take half a day? Why are they here in just two hours?¡±

 **Chapter 37: Battle**

    Hearing Charles''s question, the blind vampire became flustered, stammering and unsure of what to say.


    Charles waved his hand at the other crew members. ¡°No time to waste. Everyone, get on the ship!¡±


    Akasha watched the tightly closed shipyard door with great interest, a smirk on her face that revealed her sharp fangs. ¡°How interesting. It seems these humans have some strength. Armand, I¡¯d love to taste their blood; it¡¯s been a while since I¡¯ve had blood from the outside.¡±


    The male vampire duke beside her shook his head. ¡°Dear, that won¡¯t do. We must stick to the agreement.¡±


    ¡°Just like family, you¡¯re as stingy as your sister,¡± Akasha scoffed, striding toward the large door.


    The petite vampire, only 1.5 meters tall, extended her pale hands and forcefully pulled at the thick door¡¯s seam.


    The screeching sound of metal grinding filled the air as the half-foot-thick steel door was effortlessly torn open like paper.


    The sight before the two vampire dukes left them momentarily stunned. A small pile of explosives lay on the open ground, with a nearly burnt-out fuse on top.


    Before they could react, a loud bang erupted, and the entire shipyard exploded, engulfing the two dukes in a fiery blaze.


    From the billowing smoke, a charred blackened corpse emerged from the inferno, gazing at the rapidly fleeing Unicorn Whale.


    The charred body quickly began to heal, and soon a naked Akasha appeared in its place.


    ¡°Not bad. Strong food tastes delicious.¡±


    As her words fell, black hair sprouted from her body, and her pale form rapidly transformed. In no time, a three-meter-tall half-human, half-bat monstrosity stood before them.


    With a rustle, the monstrosity¡¯s body dispersed into small bats, which swarmed toward the Unicorn Whale.


    From the smoke behind, another group of bats followed closely.


    Watching the bats rapidly approach, Charles turned to the deck cannon and shouted, ¡°Lily! Shoot them down!¡±


    ¡°Boom! Boom! Boom!¡± The cannon fire echoed continuously, with bat fragments raining down into the water. But there were simply too many bats; the cannon couldn¡¯t keep up.


    They drew nearer, the sound of flapping wings like a death knell, tightening the hearts of everyone on board.


    Before long, the bats reached the ship, coalescing into a half-human, half-bat creature that landed heavily on the deck.


    Its sharp claws swiped viciously at the brown rat on the cannon, sending blood and flesh flying. Lily screamed in terror.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    Akasha, with her crimson eyes, looked at the fleeing rats, flames igniting in her palm.


    Just as she was about to hurl the flames at the rats, Charles, wearing a mask, appeared beneath her.


    With a swift motion, he slashed his sharp black blade across her arm, severing the one that held the flames.


    ¡°Hello there, beautiful~ Did you lose this hand?¡±


    ¡°Your smile is really annoying,¡± Akasha replied, pushing off the ground and quickly engaging in a struggle with Charles.


    At the same time, another half-bat creature charged onto the deck¡ªJames, standing at four meters tall with snot running from his nose, led the charge with steel in hand.


    The other crew members stood at a distance, ready to support him with various weapons.


    Charles performed a backflip, dodging the sharp claws, while his right hand slashed at the monstrous appendage.


    As they crossed paths, Charles jumped back, landing firmly on the ship''s edge.


    Akasha, however, did not pursue, standing her ground and fixing her crimson gaze on her opponent.


    Seeing the monster¡¯s arm fully restored, Charles cursed inwardly, ¡°This is ridiculous! Is she cheating?¡±


    ¡°Young man, that thing on your face looks nice. Where did you get it? Too bad it¡¯s with the wrong owner.¡±


    Charles, feeling playful, quickly responded, ¡°How about I give it to you, and you let us go?¡±


    Akasha covered her mouth, giggling. ¡°Do you really think that¡¯s possible? I¡¯m not in a hurry; we can chat slowly.¡±


    ¡°Ah! Ah! It hurts! It hurts so much!¡± Hearing James''s cries from behind, Charles felt a surge of urgency; the situation there was dire. If they kept talking, it would soon be two against one.


    He turned to Odrick, who was huddled in the cockpit. ¡°Hey! Blind man! Do you have any weaknesses for these monsters?!¡±


    The timid Odrick quickly reminded him, ¡°The duke¡¯s only weakness is her heart. You must completely crush it to prevent her from regenerating.¡±


    ¡°Hmph!¡± Anger flashed across Akasha¡¯s terrifying face for the first time. She spread her wings and charged toward the cockpit. A traitorous ally is always hated more than an enemy.


    With a crash, the cockpit¡¯s glass shattered, and Akasha easily grabbed the fleeing Odrick. With her razor-sharp teeth, she bit down, and a heart-wrenching scream filled the air as half of the blind artist¡¯s neck disappeared.


    Just as she was about to swallow the traitor whole, Charles appeared behind her, his gleaming blade piercing through her chest.


    The bat-monster flapped her wings, pushing Charles back, and glanced down at the wound in her chest. Her terrifying face turned cold. ¡°I¡¯ve changed my mind. You humans should just drown in the sea!¡±


    She reached behind her with her left hand, producing a palm-sized round mirror. As soon as the mirror appeared, the air filled with the sweet, metallic scent of blood, growing stronger by the second.


    ¡°Damn! She has a relic too!¡± Charles¡¯s eyes widened, and he prepared to rush forward to stop her, but Akasha spread her wings and flew into the air.


    Under the glaring spotlight, her horrific form transformed again, completely morphing into a five-meter-long pig-nosed bat.


    The pig-nosed bat opened its beastly mouth, emitting a piercing shriek that sounded like a soul-harrowing song from hell, echoing in everyone¡¯s ears.


    Everyone instinctively covered their ears, including the other half-bat creature. Within seconds, blood began to seep from everyone¡¯s ears.


    Then Charles saw something that sent a chill down his spine: a crack appeared along the edge of the Unicorn Whale and spread downward.


    That was steel! This sound wave attack was not only effective against flesh but also severely damaging to the ship. If she kept this up, the entire Unicorn Whale would likely disintegrate!


    As chaos reigned around him, Charles quickly jumped onto the injured James¡¯s chest, pointing at the bats above and then at his own hand.


    James stood frozen, and Charles slapped him hard across the face. Finally, the giant moved, grabbing Charles by the legs and tossing him.


    Charles crashed into the bats like a cannonball, and the piercing shriek finally ceased.


    With a knife embedded in the bat creature, Charles shouted with all his might, ¡°Lily! Fire the cannons!¡±

 **Chapter 38: Clue of Sunshine**

    As Charles saw the dark cannon on the deck moving toward him, Akasha¡¯s demeanor shifted to panic. She wanted to flee, but Charles wouldn¡¯t give her that chance.


    Raising his left hand, the tendril ring activated instantly, ensnaring the bat creature in invisible tendrils. Although the creature broke free in less than a second, that was enough time.


    ¡°Boom!!¡±


    In the blink of an eye, much of the giant bat¡¯s body was obliterated, its flesh scattering everywhere, leaving a look of disbelief on its grotesque face.


    As Charles fell toward the sea, he noticed a flash of white light before him. Instinctively, he reached out and grasped it¡ªit was the mirror of the bat monster.


    With a splash, the cold seawater enveloped Charles completely.


    When he emerged from the water, he saw another half-human, half-bat creature clumsily fleeing toward the harbor. Clearly, it had no intention of avenging its fallen comrade.


    ¡°Coward! Don¡¯t run if you have guts!¡± Charles shouted from the water.


    The death of a duke seemed to have genuinely frightened the other vampires. The crew waited, but the dark crystal island remained out of sight, and no bats approached.


    Soaked, Charles lay on the deck in a starfish position, utterly exhausted. Though the mask allowed him to reach human limits, the fatigue in his body was undeniable; he didn¡¯t want to move a single finger.


    The crew, reborn from the chaos, rushed over in jubilation, lifting him high and cheering.


    The next day, Charles awoke, feeling slightly more energized. Ignoring his sore muscles, he stood up and walked toward the deck.


    Seeing the first mate bandaging the ship, he sighed softly. The losses this time were significant. In the encounter with the giant butterfly, they had lost two sailors and a second engineer; now, on the dark crystal island, they had lost two more sailors and a cook.


    Coupled with the battered state of the Unicorn Whale, this exploration mission had been a complete failure.


    The only thing Charles had gained was a mirror and a blind vampire.


    He took out the circular mirror, holding it up to his face, but found the surface too blurry to see clearly.


    An idea struck him, and he headed toward the crew¡¯s resting area. If anyone could shed light on this relic, it would undoubtedly be the only local on board.


    As soon as Charles entered the resting area, a strong smell of blood hit him. The blind vampire Odrick was sucking on a blood-soaked bandage, while James, the producer of that bandage, lay snoring on a hanging rope.If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Odrick¡¯s neck was writhing, fresh red flesh intertwining, indicating he would heal soon.


    Hearing familiar footsteps, Odrick quickly stood up. ¡°Captain Charles, you¡¯re here!¡±


    Charles unsheathed his black blade and placed it in James¡¯s hand. The giant had taken severe damage while facing the bat creature.


    However, as he grew larger, his skin, fat, and muscle all expanded, and most of the injuries were superficial, leaving his internal organs unharmed.


    After checking James''s forehead and confirming he didn¡¯t have a fever, Charles turned and handed the mirror to Odrick.


    ¡°This is the duke¡¯s relic. Her ability to transform into a giant bat seems related to this. Do you know how to use it?¡±


    Odrick¡¯s blind hands explored the mirror. ¡°This... this should be Duke Akasha¡¯s item, the Bat Mirror. It¡¯s said that if blood is smeared on it, one can transform into a powerful giant bat.¡±


    Charles recalled the giant bat in the air, and thinking of its formidable sonic power made his heart race. However, he didn¡¯t forget the relic¡¯s drawbacks. ¡°Are there any side effects?¡±


    ¡°Yes, using this mirror will exacerbate the bloodlust of the vampire. If used frequently, the user will ultimately be controlled by this power and completely turn into a beast. Its last owner, Viscount Lance, is still hanging upside down on Dark Crystal Island.¡±


    Looking at the mirror in his hand, Charles thought, ¡°The side effects are quite severe. It seems this relic can only be used in critical moments, not like the Joker¡¯s mask, which can be used anytime.¡±


    Suddenly, Odrick had a thought and quickly held the mirror up. He was very familiar with his own condition.


    At this point, Odrick¡¯s neck had fully healed, and Charles couldn¡¯t help but feel envious of such powerful regenerative abilities.


    Taking the mirror back and placing it in his pocket, Charles casually asked, ¡°Your regenerative ability is impressive. What happened to your face? Some special thing?¡±


    A hint of fear crossed Odrick¡¯s terrifying face. ¡°That was an accident.¡±


    ¡°I and my companions raided a pirate ship. We found a box in a hidden compartment, thinking it was some treasure, but it turned out to contain sunlight.¡±


    Hearing the word ¡°sunlight,¡± Charles¡¯s heart skipped a beat, almost stopping. However, he quickly sensed something off in Odrick¡¯s words.


    ¡°Are you sure? Sunlight? Sunlight contained in a box?¡±


    ¡°Yes, sunlight. The moment I saw that brilliance, my kind turned to ash in an instant. I barely managed to survive because I was standing far away, but even so, I paid a heavy price.¡±


    As he spoke, Odrick removed his black sunglasses, revealing two bulging eyes that looked like soft-boiled eggs, accentuated by the surrounding red blood vessels, making him appear particularly horrifying.


    ¡°Do you see? My eyes still hurt. This kind of torment can only be inflicted by sunlight.¡±


    Charles paced back and forth in the cabin, feeling a bit anxious. Yesterday, he had been chased by the duke vampire without losing his composure, but now he felt unsettled.


    ¡°Maybe¡­ maybe it was some other light weapon?¡±


    He found it absurd that sunlight could be contained in a box. Could light without a physical object really be captured?


    Odrick shook his head. ¡°At that time, there were still living pirates nearby. When the incident occurred, they showed no signs of distress. If it were some kind of weapon, they wouldn¡¯t be untouched.¡±


    Charles¡¯s heartbeat quickened, his expression becoming excited. This could be the key clue to returning to the surface. ¡°Where did those pirates get the sunlight?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not sure, but those pirates were from the chaotic city of Sodom. It¡¯s very likely they obtained it from there. Mr. Charles, do you need sunlight?¡±


    ¡°Chaotic city of Sodom¡­¡± Charles, rarely smiling, patted Odrick on the shoulder and turned to leave.


    Regardless of whether the box truly contained sunlight, Charles was determined to investigate.


    Once he heard Charles¡¯s footsteps fade away, Odrick secretly retrieved a half-eaten human corpse from a nearby barrel. If Charles were there, he would immediately recognize that this corpse belonged to the female duke he had just fought against.


    The blind vampire greedily began to gnaw on the corpse, the sound of chewing blending with the snoring in the dimly lit cabin.

 **Chapter 39: The Joining of the Vampire**

    By the time the Unicorn Whale returned to Coral Island, a month had passed. With new clues from the surface, Charles was eager to head to the chaotic city of Sodom, but his crew was utterly exhausted.


    Giant butterflies, deities, vampires¡ªeveryone¡¯s faces were etched with fatigue from their harrowing experiences. Charles didn¡¯t push them; he understood that no one was invincible. The crew needed rest, and the Unicorn Whale did too.


    The makeshift turbine was barely holding up, and the sonic waves had damaged the ship¡¯s structure. A complete overhaul was necessary.


    Standing on the deck, Charles gently ran his fingers along the ship¡¯s railing, murmuring, ¡°Thank you for your hard work, my companion.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, it looks like your journey hasn¡¯t gone smoothly. What kind of dangers have you encountered? The damage is quite severe,¡± said Wood, the man who had sold Charles the ship.


    Wood was surprised to see the ship again; he had thought it had sunk long ago. He felt a premonition that this young man might actually have a chance to become the island''s governor.


    ¡°How much will it cost?¡± Charles asked, not in the mood for idle chit-chat.


    Wood quickly handed over the bill. ¡°Replacing the turbine and rearmoring the hull will cost a total of 1.21 million Echoes.¡±


    After signing the bill, Charles mentally calculated his remaining funds. With 1.6 million Echoes deducted for repairs and crew wages, he was left with only 150,000.


    While it seemed like a lot, it was a precarious amount for an exploration ship. If the next expedition yielded no income, the Unicorn Whale would be grounded.


    His next voyage was planned for Sodom, a trip that promised no reward, leaving him in a difficult position.


    As he pondered, he stepped outside the shipyard and spotted Odrick, the blind vampire, waiting for him by the roadside. ¡°What are you doing standing here?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, do you need more crew members? Please allow me to join your ship,¡± Odrick said, his excitement evident as he bowed his head.


    ¡°Sorry, my crew is already full,¡± Charles firmly rejected him and brushed past, heading toward the distant dock.


    It wasn¡¯t that he discriminated against vampires; it was just that no ship would want a blind man on board. What could a blind painter do? Draw portraits of the crew?


    Before he could take a few more steps, Odrick hurried after him, desperation in his voice. ¡°Captain Charles, I¡¯m not a burden! I¡¯ve leveled up and gained new abilities!¡±Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    With a black cloak draped over him, Odrick transformed into a small black bat that flitted around Charles.


    ¡°Captain Charles, I¡¯m now a baron! I can transform into a bat and see without using my eyes!¡±


    Looking at the tiny bat, no bigger than his forearm, Charles shook his head. He drew his revolver with a swift motion.


    With a loud crack, the bat fell to the ground and transformed back into the blind vampire, who clutched his injured shoulder in pain.


    ¡°If you want to live, you should stick to being a painter.¡±


    As Charles¡¯s footsteps faded, Odrick hesitated for a moment before calling out, ¡°Captain! Aren¡¯t you looking for sunlight in Sodom? I was there 40 years ago; I can guide you!¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t need your help; I have my own ways.¡±


    Odrick¡¯s face showed urgency as he pressed on, ¡°Mr. Charles! I can be a powerful asset! Even though I¡¯m blind, my combat ability is at least on par with your crew!¡±


    After a long pause, Charles¡¯s voice finally broke the silence. ¡°Aren¡¯t you afraid of sunlight? Why do you want to follow me?¡±


    Odrick managed a bitter smile. ¡°You might not believe it, but the pay for one of your crew¡¯s missions is something I could never earn in years. I¡¯m envious. I don¡¯t want much anymore; I just want a steady job and a peaceful life.¡±


    Looking at the vampire before him, Charles felt a mix of emotions. It was the first time he had seen a vampire in such dire straits.


    ¡°Captain Charles? Are you still there?¡±


    ¡°The Unicorn Whale needs a sailor. You¡¯re in.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Captain!!¡±


    ---


    **Eight Years, August 3rd**


    Three days ago, my crew and I safely arrived at Coral Island. The blind vampire has joined my team. His personality is somewhat timid, which I¡¯m not entirely pleased with, but he should be fine as a sailor. His ability to transform into a bat could be useful for scouting.


    Vampires possess remarkable healing abilities. Since my previous crew perished, I need to find some who are harder to kill.


    Next, I plan to head to Sodom to search for that sunlight in a box. If it truly is sunlight, it could lead us back to the surface.


    ¡°Creak.¡± The door swung open.


    As Charles was writing in his journal, he turned to see Lily, her ears drooping, entering with a few mice in tow.


    ¡°Where have you been?¡± Charles asked.


    A dejected Lily climbed onto the pillow, flopping down as if life had lost its meaning. ¡°I¡¯m not telling you¡­¡±


    Charles shook his head, closing his journal. He stood up. ¡°I¡¯m heading out; watch the house.¡±


    The mouse buried in the soft pillow raised its head. ¡°Mr. Charles, where are you going?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s Saturday; all the captains should be gathering at the Explorer¡¯s Association. I¡¯m going to see what news there is.¡±


    ¡°That sounds fun! Take me along!¡±


    ¡°Stay and watch the house.¡± Charles pushed the door open and stepped outside.


    As the door closed behind him, Lily pouted, pounding the pillow in frustration. ¡°Mr. Charles, you¡¯re so annoying!¡±


    After a few more frustrated thumps, she flopped back onto the pillow. ¡°Hmph, if you won¡¯t take me, I¡¯ll just sleep. I¡¯ll bother you when you¡¯re asleep tonight.¡±


    Time passed slowly, and Lily, drowsy, was startled awake by a loud knock on the door.


    Looking at the banging door, she appeared flustered. ¡°Who? Who¡¯s there? No one¡¯s home!¡±


    With a loud ¡°crack,¡± the door lock was forcefully broken, and a terrifying tentacled creature appeared in the doorway.


    Seeing the twisted tentacles and the furious giant eye, Lily screamed, while the brown mice quickly surrounded her, baring their teeth at the intruder.


    The monstrous tentacle creature, startled by the screaming mice, rapidly transformed into a stunningly attractive woman.


    Lily¡¯s eyes widened as she recognized the woman¡ªthe one drawn by the blind painter.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s just a mouse. You scared me! I thought Gao Zhiming was sneaking around behind my back!¡±

 **Chapter 40: The Church of Light**

    As Charles stepped into the Explorer''s Association, he was taken aback by the unexpected scene. The usually quiet hall was now bustling with activity. Sofas and coffee tables were scattered about, and groups of men and women in various nautical attire were chatting animatedly.


    Among the crowd, he noticed several individuals who clearly weren''t seasoned sailors, whispering among themselves about the captains. As he made his way through the throng, the sounds around him revealed that these newcomers were here to commission tasks.


    ¡°Hey! Charles! Over here!¡± William, looking unusually exuberant, waved a bottle of liquor in the air, surrounded by a few familiar captains.


    When Charles glanced over, Elizabeth huffed and turned her head away.


    As Charles approached, William enthusiastically threw an arm around his shoulder. ¡°My friend, that knife of yours is amazing!¡±


    The pungent stench emanating from William made Charles uncomfortable, prompting him to shrug off William¡¯s arm. ¡°Is it a powerful relic?¡±


    He recalled selling William two unidentified relics previously. It seemed that William had struck it rich.


    ¡°Absolutely powerful! It couldn''t be better! I pretended to gift that knife to my enemy, and guess what? He ended up killing his entire crew! Hahaha!!!¡±


    Watching William laugh uncontrollably, Charles felt a sense of absurdity. Was that really how relics could be used?


    A nearby rotund man bumped into Charles with his elbow. ¡°I heard you went back to sea again? Did you encounter anything interesting? Spill the beans.¡±


    Charles instinctively recalled the hand that had reached up from the depths, forcing a strained smile. ¡°Nothing much to say; some crew members died, and the mission failed.¡±


    ¡°Come on, come on! You came all the way here and won¡¯t share? Why not just go to the casino and win big instead?¡±


    Unable to resist their curiosity, Charles eventually recounted his recent adventures: the giant butterfly, the hand, and the Dark Crystal Island.


    As he spoke, the other captains expressed their astonishment at his luck in surviving such perilous encounters.


    ¡°Ah~ Stark wasn¡¯t so lucky,¡± the rotund man remarked casually.


    ¡°Who¡¯s Stark?¡±


    ¡°If that kid knew you didn¡¯t even know his name, he¡¯d probably be furious. He¡¯s the one who helped Elizabeth tie you up. Don¡¯t you remember?¡±This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Charles suddenly recalled the cheerful, burly man, his pupils dilating. ¡°He¡¯s dead?¡±


    The man nodded, taking a bite of a blue fruit. ¡°Death is just a part of life, isn¡¯t it? This month hasn¡¯t been too bad; only seven died.¡±


    Scanning the faces around him, Charles noted the lack of sorrow. They chatted as if discussing the weather.


    He understood the grim reality behind their casualness¡ªlife was cheap in this world.


    After a moment of silence, Charles addressed the other captains. ¡°Everyone, what do you know about the city of Sodom?¡±


    This was his main purpose for coming today; he had only heard the name before and needed more information.


    As soon as he finished speaking, all eyes turned toward a dark-skinned man in the corner, his face adorned with an eagle-like hooked nose.


    ¡°Charlie used to be a pirate; you can ask him,¡± William said, tilting his head back to drink.


    ¡°I can only tell you that place is chaotic. If you¡¯re weak, you¡¯ll be looking for death if you go there,¡± Charlie¡¯s voice was as low and gravelly as ever.


    ¡°Have you heard anything about someone selling sunlight there?¡±


    At Charles¡¯s inquiry, Charlie shook his head.


    ¡°No?¡± Charles felt a twinge of anxiety.


    ¡°Not sure; maybe yes, maybe no. In that place, if you have money, you can buy anything. When you get to Sodom, ask the bartender at the Anchor Tavern. Just tell him you were sent by Sea Dog; he¡¯s my friend.¡±


    ¡°Thank you,¡± Charles replied, grateful for the information. Most wouldn¡¯t know such details, and Charlie¡¯s willingness to share was a favor.


    The rotund man nudged Charles with his elbow, whispering, ¡°He¡¯s got his eye on you. Anyone who can encounter a ¡®deity¡¯ and come back alive has a bright future ahead.¡±


    Charles chuckled dryly. Who could say for certain? In this treacherous place, no one could guarantee they¡¯d survive to the end. He was just an ordinary man trying to scrape by.


    The lively atmosphere returned as Charles joined the others in drinking and snacking, feeling closer to them.


    He picked up a round cake from the table and took a bite. The soft bread combined with sweet cream was surprisingly delightful. After years in this world, it was his first time tasting such exquisite food.


    Just as he finished his snack and considered leaving, a nondescript young man approached. ¡°Captain Charles?¡±


    Charles turned to assess the newcomer. The man wore a red robe, and a bright white triangle was painted on his forehead, his attire starkly different from the other captains.


    ¡°Who are you?¡±


    ¡°My name is Sonny, and I¡¯m an explorer like you.¡±


    Elizabeth, who had been ignoring Charles, cleared her throat and dipped her finger into her drink, drawing a few lines on the table.


    Upon seeing the signal indicating danger, Charles¡¯s alertness skyrocketed.


    ¡°I heard you¡¯re searching for the Land of Light, Mr. Charles? Why haven¡¯t I seen you at the church services?¡±


    The Church of Light? Charles lost interest immediately and stood up to leave.


    In the next instant, Sonny¡¯s body flickered, blocking Charles¡¯s path.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, are you a radical Protestant? You¡¯ve misunderstood the sun god¡¯s oracle. The original doctrine is the truth. The Land of Light is a void that cannot be found. We must sincerely pray and hold frequent ceremonies for the sun god to return.¡±


    Listening to such absurd claims, Charles was at a loss for words. He had no idea where these people got their so-called oracles, but he was certain they didn¡¯t come from that big fireball in the sky.


    ¡°Sorry, I¡¯m not part of your church. Please step aside.¡±


    Sonny looked surprised. ¡°If you¡¯re not a member of the Church of the Sun God, why are you searching for the Land of Light?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not looking anymore. Goodbye.¡± Charles replied, trying to sidestep Sonny toward the exit.


    Sonny¡¯s forehead marking glowed, and a semi-transparent, bluish fluid rapidly enveloped Charles. ¡°How about we chat somewhere else?¡±


    Charles¡¯s expression hardened, his revolver already pointed at Sonny¡¯s head.

 **Chapter 41: Zhao Jiajia**

    As the tension mounted, a small circle quickly formed around Charles and Sonny, with onlookers eagerly watching the unfolding drama. Just then, a staff member in a suit rushed over.


    ¡°Gentlemen, you both have signed contracts. Please think carefully before acting. If you engage in violence within the Association, not only will you be expelled, but you will also be wanted by the Governor.¡±


    Sonny smiled and nodded, while the translucent fluid around Charles shrank back into his clothing. ¡°Mr. Charles, I truly mean no harm.¡±


    ¡°What do you want?¡± Charles asked, his brow furrowed. He had a feeling that if this situation wasn¡¯t resolved today, Sonny would haunt him indefinitely.


    Sonny gestured toward a quieter corner of the hall.


    Once they were away from the noise, Sonny smiled at Charles. ¡°Captain Charles, how much do you know about us?¡±


    ¡°Not much, but I¡¯ve heard some rumors. For instance, to join your church, one has to undergo an initiation ritual where needles are inserted directly into the brain through the eye. You claim this grants blessings from the sun god.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, don¡¯t you think such a ritual is practical? In these cursed seas, the greatest danger is the fear in our minds. Once blessed within our church, one will no longer feel fear. That¡¯s why the survival rate among our sun god¡¯s explorers is the highest.¡±


    ¡°Then why not mention how high the death rate is for those who undergo such rituals? Is it a blessing or a curse? And let me ask you, do you even know what the sun looks like?¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡± Sonny pointed to the triangle on his forehead. ¡°This is the image of our lord.¡±


    Charles nearly burst out laughing. ¡°The sun is triangular?¡±


    ¡°Why not? That¡¯s the answer given by the oracle.¡±


    ¡°The sun is round, you idiot!¡± Charles¡¯s voice rose sharply.


    ¡°Have you seen it? How can you be so sure?¡±


    ¡°I¡­¡± Charles struggled to suppress his words.


    Sonny raised his hands in a gesture of peace. ¡°Fine, since you¡¯re not part of our church, I won¡¯t argue doctrine with you. I¡¯m here to offer you a commission.¡±


    ¡°A commission?¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t take much of your time. Since you¡¯re going to Sodom, could you help me deal with some people? They¡¯re also from the Church of the Sun God, but their beliefs differ from ours.¡±Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    ¡°How do you know I¡¯m going to Sodom?¡± Charles felt an unsettling invasion of privacy.


    Sonny chuckled. ¡°Unique individuals like you naturally attract attention. If you show good faith, there will be more opportunities for collaboration. I believe your funds might be running low?¡±


    ¡°What if I refuse?¡± Charles sneered.


    ¡°I believe you¡¯ll agree. You¡¯ve worked with the freaks from the Futan Church; why wouldn¡¯t you consider this mutually beneficial arrangement?¡±


    ¡°Ha.¡± Charles rubbed his nose. ¡°At least the Futan Church is a bit more polite than you.¡±


    With that, Charles turned on his heel and walked away. Logically, he should have accepted the deal; he needed the funding. But first, he disliked Sonny¡¯s tone, and second, he wanted no part in the cult''s internal conflicts.


    Upon returning to his lodgings, Charles immediately sensed someone had been there. He rushed to the drawer and opened it, finding that his diary had indeed been tampered with.


    ¡°Lily? What happened after I left?¡± he asked, a hint of anxiety creeping into his voice.


    ¡°She came in not long after you left¡­¡± a tearful voice emerged from under the bed.


    ¡°What did she look like? Did she have an inverted triangle on her forehead?¡±


    Lily timidly crawled out, her fur disheveled. ¡°It was the sister you know.¡±


    ¡°Which sister?¡±


    ¡°The one from the drawing in your diary.¡±


    ¡°Anna?!¡± Charles¡¯s pupils constricted as he rushed to Lily, grabbing her by the shoulders.


    ¡°Are you sure it was her? Or just someone who looks similar?¡±


    ¡°It was definitely her. She even wrote something on the back of the drawing. Mr. Charles, why didn¡¯t you mention that she¡¯s not human but a monster?¡±


    Charles dropped the mouse he was holding and quickly pulled out the drawing from his diary. Flipping it over, he saw neat Chinese characters written on the back.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you drew this for me. You said I was fake, yet you still thought of me.¡±


    ¡°Actually, when I saw that drawing, I felt quite happy. Even if I¡¯m dead, my beloved man still thinks of me.¡±


    ¡°Gao Zhiming, I¡¯m fake. My feelings for you are fake; everything was created by the Diwa tribe.¡±


    ¡°I know what you¡¯re thinking. You want to help me escape from the monster¡¯s control, right?¡±


    ¡°But you¡¯re wrong. I am the monster; the monster is me. We are inseparable.¡±


    ¡°The Diwa tribe doesn¡¯t have a brain; survival relies on instinct. When we need to think, we create a consciousness, and I am that consciousness created by myself.¡±


    ¡°I miss you so much, wanting to be by your side all the time. I believe you miss me too, but we both know that even our longing is fake.¡±


    ¡°I came here today to have a breakup talk, but since you¡¯re not here, forget it.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to be controlled by false feelings. I plan to go to the Sea of Earth to find my purpose. Don¡¯t come looking for me. Just focus on your surface world.¡±


    Zhao Jiajia.


    P.S. (By the way, if you find another woman, don¡¯t let me catch wind of it, or I might just eat them.)


    Charles¡¯s mind became a chaotic mess as he threw the drawing aside, his eyes reddening as he turned to the white mouse beside him. ¡°How long has she been gone?¡±


    ¡°About half an hour.¡±


    Without another word, Charles dashed out. He bit down hard on his thumb and, with a swift motion, smeared it against the mirror. His body rapidly transformed, and a massive bat took to the air, gliding low.


    In a dark alley, Anna, wearing a stunning red dress, gazed up at the bat, yellow-green tears glistening in her eyes.


    Just then, a burly arm draped over her pale shoulder. ¡°Hey, girl, how much for a night?¡±


    Anna gently wiped her tears and turned to face the drunken man. ¡°Two hundred for a quickie, eight hundred for the night.¡±


    Stunned by Anna¡¯s angelic face, the drunkard quickly regained his composure and excitedly unbuckled his belt. ¡°Eight hundred it is! I¡¯ll take it!¡±


    With a radiant smile, Anna approached him, but behind her, her pale skin began to crack, revealing black, root-like tendrils slowly emerging.

 **Chapter 42: The Relic of Deep**

    ¡°Look! There¡¯s a bat flying in the sky!¡± The exclamation from outside the bar caught Deep''s attention.


    He followed the other drunken sailors as they rushed out to see what was happening.


    ¡°Hmm, that bat looks familiar,¡± Deep scratched his neck while holding a bottle of alcohol.


    As he watched the bat swiftly fly away, the sailors gradually returned to the bar, except for Deep. Suddenly, he remembered what the vampire had mentioned about the captain acquiring a new relic that allowed him to transform into a giant bat. It was likely that the one flying above was Captain Charles.


    ¡°Is the captain testing out a new relic? That¡¯s awesome! If only I had a relic too,¡± Deep said, his words laced with envy. Watching the captain wield various abilities through his relics was hard not to admire.


    Then an idea struck him, and he clapped his hands excitedly. ¡°I¡¯ve saved up some Echo Coins! I can buy a relic too!¡±


    Glancing back at the noisy tavern, Deep dashed inside again. A wave of warmth hit him as drunken crew members laughed and boasted, while scantily clad women moved about. Everything felt so lively.


    He jumped onto a wooden table and shouted, ¡°Everyone! Does anyone know where I can buy relics on Coral Island?¡±


    Laughter died down as a fat old man with a red nose and only a few teeth in his mouth exclaimed, ¡°Look at this little guy! He hasn¡¯t even grown hair yet and dares to buy relics. He must be tired of living! Hahaha!¡±


    The bar erupted in laughter, the atmosphere growing lively again. At a corner table, the other members of the *Unicorn* stood up with a clatter.


    The laughter faded as sailors averted their eyes to their drinks; they knew better than to provoke those from the exploration ship.


    Sensing the mood shift, Deep snapped his fingers toward the bar. ¡°Hey, everyone! Let¡¯s have a round on me!¡±


    The atmosphere reignited as sailors raised their glasses, loudly toasting to the boy who had just been mocked.


    A shirtless sailor took a swig and shouted, ¡°Buddy, check out Black Robe Alley! They throw away things that can¡¯t see the light and sell them there. Just don¡¯t get caught by the Black Skin Dogs; their trades are illegal.¡±


    ¡°Thanks!¡± Deep excitedly jumped off the table, waved at his comrades in the corner, and bolted out.


    ¡°Should we follow that kid? He¡¯s not going to get into trouble again, is he?¡± Krona remarked to the others.


    ¡°Relax, he made it back from Dark Crystal Island. What¡¯s there to fear? If anyone causes trouble, we¡¯ll just toss them into the sea,¡± Frey said, giving a playful squeeze to a waitress''s backside.


    The other crew members nodded in agreement.


    In the harbor area of Coral Island, Deep was quite familiar with the surroundings. He passed through the fishy drying area and arrived at the desolate Black Robe Alley.The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    As the name suggested, everyone in the alley wore dark, hooded cloaks. Deep, dressed in sailor attire, stood out awkwardly in the center of the road.


    He squeezed into the crowd, curiously observing as some figures lifted their cloaks, revealing their wares and whispering to one another.


    ¡°Hey! Does anyone have relics? Is anyone selling relics?¡± Deep called out, immediately attracting attention.


    A short figure in a black robe approached him, lowering their voice. ¡°Kid, how much do you have?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ 30,000 Echo Coins?¡± Deep replied, stating his savings.


    The cloaked figure turned to leave, scoffing, ¡°You think 30,000 Echo Coins is enough for a relic? Do you think they¡¯re fish from the sea?¡±


    Feeling dejected, Deep scratched his neck. He had saved more, but during the Dark Crystal Island incident, the vampire had robbed him.


    ¡°Do you want a relic?¡± A voice suddenly came from behind Deep, startling him.


    He quickly turned to see a stout figure in a black robe standing behind him.


    ¡°I do want one, but I only have 30,000 Echo Coins.¡±


    ¡°Deal. 30,000 it is.¡± The cloaked figure pulled out a silver bracelet covered in a thick layer of grime.


    ¡°Really? You¡¯ll sell it to me for 30,000?¡± Deep was surprised, especially since the previous seller had said it wasn¡¯t enough.


    ¡°Want it or not? I¡¯ll leave if you don¡¯t.¡±


    Seeing the figure pretend to walk away, the 16-year-old Deep didn¡¯t think twice and quickly agreed. ¡°I¡¯ll take it! But first, what does this relic do?¡±


    ¡°Once worn, it increases your strength, but the downside is you¡¯ll get thirsty easily.¡±


    After testing the relic and finding it genuinely useful, Deep happily paid the money, feeling like he had struck a great bargain.


    The cloaked figure took the money and quickly left. Deep wandered a bit before kneeling in front of a door. ¡°Pastor, I¡¯ve delivered the item. It¡¯s confirmed to be one of Charles¡¯s crew.¡±


    The wooden door opened, revealing a smiling Sonny. ¡°Once they set sail, give that boy the other bracelet. If he won¡¯t serve me, then neither will Kede get that advantage!¡±


    ¡°Captain! Captain! Are you in there?¡± an excited Deep knocked on Charles¡¯s door.


    With a creak, the door opened, revealing Lily¡¯s mouse.


    Deep¡¯s eyes quickly fell on Charles, who sat silently, trembling slightly, his face contorted in pain as he clenched his fists, seemingly holding back something.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡± Charles¡¯s voice was unusually hoarse.


    Although Deep was young, he was no fool. The scene clearly wasn¡¯t the right time to flaunt his new relic.


    ¡°Nothing¡­ Just take care of yourself,¡± Deep said, turning to leave when a bat flew in through the door.


    The bat quickly transformed into Audrick, who nervously held a blood bag in front of Charles. ¡°Captain, this is from the hospital.¡±


    Charles¡¯s trembling hands quickly took the bag, biting into it with his sharp teeth, greedily sucking the blood. Crimson liquid dripped from the corners of his mouth, giving him a more terrifying appearance than Audrick beside him.


    Deep walked over to Lily, curiosity bubbling within him. ¡°What happened to the captain?¡±


    Lily¡¯s voice was filled with fear. ¡°The captain went to find his sister¡­ He came back like this, and he almost bit me just now.¡±


    At that moment, Deep noticed Charles suddenly contort in pain, his lips trembling as he muttered something.


    He hurriedly pushed away Audrick, who was trying to support him, and stumbled to the desk, pulling out a green gel and forcefully stuffing it into his mouth.


    After a moment, Charles¡¯s breathing gradually calmed, though his face remained pale and exhausted. He waved at his crew. ¡°I need to rest. You all can leave.¡±


    Deep quickly followed Audrick out, glancing back at the door. ¡°Why is the captain always so tense? He¡¯s already got his own exploration ship at his age; what could possibly make him unhappy? If I had my own ship, I¡¯d be laughing in my dreams.¡±


    Audrick shook his head as he leaned against the wall. ¡°Who knows? But if he continues like this, he might not last long. Don¡¯t you think he¡¯s starting to resemble the madmen on the streets?¡±


    Deep shot him a disapproving glare. ¡°What nonsense are you talking about! Captain Charles is so powerful; how could that be? If you keep talking like this, don¡¯t blame me for being rude!¡±


    With that, Deep turned and strode toward the staircase.

 **Chapter 43: The Wooden Ship**

    A month passed quickly, and soon it was time to set sail again. The *Unicorn*¡¯s smokestack belched black smoke as Charles led the newly recruited crew onto the deck.


    ¡°Bandage, you go assign tasks and schedules to the new crew members,¡± Charles instructed the silent first mate beside him.


    The first mate nodded, his newly grown legs striding toward the deck with the new recruits in tow. Meanwhile, Charles and Audrick entered the captain''s quarters, where the newly acquired large nautical chart was spread out on the table, clearly marking islands, danger zones, and dark areas.


    ¡°Where is Sodom? Mark it for me,¡± Charles said to the vampire.


    ¡°Um, I can¡¯t see it. Please tell me the location of Dark Crystal Island,¡± Audrick replied.


    Charles placed his hand on a pin, indicating Dark Crystal Island. Audrick traced a line from there on the chart, his sharp claw lightly puncturing the paper. ¡°Here.¡±


    To Charles¡¯s surprise, the location wasn¡¯t as far as he had imagined. ¡°Sodom is right here? So close?¡±


    ¡°It appears here sometimes, on the 6th and 25th of each month,¡± Audrick explained.


    Charles was taken aback. ¡°Appear? Isn¡¯t it an island? It moves?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Captain. To be precise, it¡¯s a ship¡ªan enormous vessel made from the wreckage of pirate ships.¡±


    Looking at the marked spot, Charles quickly calculated the sailing time and supplies in his mind. Although Audrick spoke with certainty, the information was 40 years old; if nothing was there, they still needed enough supplies to return.


    ¡°Do we have enough blood packs?¡± he asked.


    Audrick nodded quickly. ¡°Yes, I¡¯ve prepared enough for 60 days.¡±


    ¡°Save some. If we encounter intense combat, I might need it.¡±


    ¡°Understood. But Captain Charles, since it¡¯s a relic of the blood clan, you should try to use it sparingly.¡±


    ¡°Got it. You can go now.¡±


    Audrick bowed and transformed into a bat, swiftly flying out.


    In the coastal waters, Charles deliberately slowed down the ship to allow the new crew members to bond. Most of the new crew were locals from Coral Island, some of whom had met Charles before, making for a relatively harmonious atmosphere.


    On the eighth day after leaving port, the *Unicorn* slowly approached its destination, and the dark sea began to change.


    ¡°Captain, there¡¯s a ship ahead!!¡± Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    ¡°I see it.¡± Charles peered through the glass at the distant vessel.


    It was clearly not Sodom; the ship was too small, only half the size of the *Unicorn*, and it was made of wood. Wooden ships were rare in the Geosea, as most areas capable of growing trees had been cleared for agricultural crops.


    As the ships drew closer, more details became apparent. Unlike the *Unicorn*¡¯s turbine propulsion, this wooden ship was powered by sails.


    Given that the Geosea rarely had wind, relying solely on sails for navigation seemed like a death wish.


    ¡°What should we do, Captain?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll take the helm. You go out and signal them. Tell them, per custom, left helm to left helm.¡±


    This was basic maritime protocol to prevent collisions due to a lack of communication.


    ¡°Understood!¡± Deep, wearing his bracelet, rushed out with the flags.


    Waving the red flag quickly, the wooden ship began to turn, as if it understood the signal.


    As the two ships passed each other, Charles glanced at the old wooden ship, a flicker of doubt crossing his mind: Was that ship also headed to Sodom?


    Suddenly, a crisis erupted. The cannon ports on the left side of the wooden ship swung open, and a black cannon muzzle aimed directly at the *Unicorn*.


    With his body tense, Charles reacted instantly, spinning the wheel to minimize the ship''s profile against the incoming cannon fire.


    Despite his quick response, several cannonballs struck the deck. However, the expected explosions didn¡¯t occur; the cannonballs seemed soft, sticking wherever they landed and releasing black-purple smoke. Before long, the *Unicorn* was enveloped in the thick mist.


    ¡°Lily! Counterattack!!¡± Hearing Charles¡¯s voice, the mice on deck quickly rushed to the cannon stations, and the 125mm cannon turned toward the wooden ship.


    At the same time, shadowy figures began to drift out of the black-purple mist. Their bodies were thin as paper, with no facial features where their heads should be, wielding weapons made from the same material.


    The eerie paper figures quickly positioned themselves and charged toward the deck cannons, frantically slashing at the mice, forcing the cannon¡¯s movement to halt.


    The crew opened fire on the strange figures, but the bullets passed through them, having no effect on their movement.


    Furrowing his brow, Charles dared not hesitate. He pulled out a mirror, ready to smear blood on it.


    The ghostly tricks of the divine wouldn¡¯t scare him; the wooden ship was the real threat, and he needed to stop it.


    Just as he was about to bite his finger, a sudden pain shot through his abdomen. Shocked, Charles looked down to see a bloody blade protruding from his chest.


    Without a second thought, he drew his pistol and aimed at the assailant behind him, only to halt mid-trigger.


    The attacker was First Mate Deep, wearing a strange smile. A chilling voice escaped his lips, ¡°Go on¡­ shoot¡­¡±


    In the next moment, Charles took a deep breath, forcing himself to endure the pain as he donned the clown mask.


    With the mask on, he pulled the trigger, and Deep fell to the ground, hit by the bullet.


    Controlling his muscles to hold the blade inside him, Charles staggered out of the cockpit.


    Outside, the crew was already engaged in battle with the paper figures, clearly at a disadvantage. Aside from the enlarged James, their attacks seemed ineffective.


    Clutching his wound, Charles grasped the bat mirror and hurled it into the air. ¡°Blind one! Shake that ship for me!¡±


    The bat caught the mirror and flew swiftly toward the wooden ship.


    Just as he finished speaking, a paper figure appeared behind Charles, raising a gleaming weapon to strike at his head.


    Charles quickly retreated, crashing into the figure, his black blade dancing through the air as he cut the paper figure into shreds.


    ¡°Is that all?¡± Charles sneered, ready to charge into battle when his body suddenly stiffened, blood seeping from his wound again.


    He realized he couldn¡¯t act recklessly; his condition was precarious, and any sudden movement could lead to fatal blood loss.


    Quickly, he sought another solution. He crouched down, retrieving a steel nail from a nearby barrel.


    He threw the nails with precision, pinning the paper figures to the ground, but it was only a temporary measure.


    More and more paper figures appeared, seemingly endless, and Charles¡¯s consciousness began to blur.

 **Chapter 44: The Counterattack of Death**

    Just as the *Unicorn* was about to be overwhelmed by the paper figures, a piercing shriek suddenly echoed from afar, causing the paper figures on the *Unicorn* to freeze in their tracks.


    Struggling to look into the distance, Charles saw Audrick, transformed into a giant bat, hovering above the wooden ship. The waxy yellow sails trembled violently under the power of the sonic waves, and the entire wooden ship began to shake.


    Seeing his crew regain some ground, Charles could no longer hold on. His body brushed against the ship''s side and slowly began to fall to the deck.


    The crew immediately noticed their captain''s condition and rushed to his side, each face etched with concern.


    ¡°Captain! Who did this?¡± The first mate stared at the protruding blade from Charles''s chest, his expression filled with despair.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me¡­ Quickly¡­ deal with those paper figures¡­¡± Charles managed to say, his vision growing dim.


    The first mate nodded vigorously and led the sailors toward the trembling enemies.


    As darkness closed in around him, Charles could no longer hear the sounds of battle. He watched as torches were lit on the deck, and a thought flashed through his mind: ¡°Am I going to die?¡±


    Charles felt everything grow brighter, and the pain in his body began to fade rapidly. Strangely calm about the impending death, he thought, ¡°So this is it... I wonder if I¡¯ll be able to traverse back¡­¡±


    Just then, the previously absent first mate squeezed through the crowd around Charles, dragging two people with him.


    One was a new sailor with a deep gash on his neck, and the other was Deep, who had been shot. The sailor¡¯s injury was not fatal, and Deep''s gunshot wounds had missed vital areas; both were still alive.


    Charles could see the two men speaking in terror to Bandage, but he could hear nothing.


    Bandage laid the two men side by side on the deck, gave Charles a deep look, and took the black blade from his hand.


    Charles wanted to ask what Bandage was doing, but his bloodless lips trembled and could not form words.


    With the blade in hand, Bandage swiftly drew a blood sigil on the deck, filling the gaps of the array with twisted runes.


    ¡°Pfft!¡± The sharp blade pierced the sailor¡¯s chest, and disbelief filled Charles and the surrounding crew.


    Bandage positioned the sailor¡¯s corpse within the array and then turned to Deep, raising the blade.


    ¡°Shh.¡± A ship nail pinned the first mate¡¯s hand that held the knife.


    Seeing the rage in Charles¡¯s eyes, Bandage silently lowered the blade, crawling on the ground and softly chanting something.The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    The blood from the sailor¡¯s corpse seeped into the sigil on the deck as Bandage¡¯s chant grew louder.


    A transparent octopus tentacle formed from seawater emerged from the edge of the ship, and Bandage¡¯s voice rose in intensity.


    The tentacle pointed toward the sailor in the array, and the corpse, with wide-open eyes, quickly slid into the tentacle.


    The blood-stained tentacle rapidly swung toward Charles, drenching him in blood.


    With this, Charles, who had just been on the brink of death, let out a horrific scream.


    Smoke rose from his body as he writhed and twisted like a snake; the blade inside him was rapidly expelled, and his wounds began to heal.


    In mere seconds, Charles lay in the seawater, fully healed.


    Bandage calmly approached and helped the drenched Charles to his feet. ¡°Captain¡­ the sacrifice was only half completed¡­ your wounds are not fully healed.¡±


    Gasping for breath, Charles shot a complex look at his first mate, said nothing, and turned his gaze toward the battle ahead.


    At this moment, the shrieking had ceased, and Audrick, covered in blood, was being besieged by a group of black paper figures.


    Charles dashed to the deck cannon and fired directly at the wooden ship in the distance.


    However, due to the distance, several shots went wide.


    Turning to the crew on deck, Charles commanded, ¡°Bandage, take the helm! James, overload the turbine! Everyone else, prepare your weapons; we must catch up to it!¡±


    Everyone immediately sprang into action, and the *Unicorn*, which had been idle for too long, began to move again.


    The wind whipped through Charles¡¯s black hair as he stood resolute, his face cold as frost, but the hatred in his eyes was unmistakable.


    Seeing the *Unicorn* close in, the wooden ship attempted to flee, but it was no match for the speed of the *Unicorn*, and the distance between the two vessels rapidly decreased.


    Under Charles¡¯s command, the deck cannon tilted again, sending up splashes of water around the wooden ship.


    ¡°Crack!¡± The wooden ship''s mast was shattered, sending the sail crashing onto the deck, causing its speed to plummet.


    ¡°Don¡¯t slow down! Charge straight in!¡± Charles roared in fury.


    The *Unicorn* accelerated further, and before everyone¡¯s eyes, its bow plunged deep into the belly of the wooden ship.


    Seeing the figures on the ship, Charles didn¡¯t hesitate; he turned the cannon toward the opposing deck and unleashed a barrage. The cannon roared, and the wooden ship was instantly riddled with holes, bloody corpses flying everywhere.


    A few more shots, and the ship would surely sink, but Charles held back; he needed to know who had sent this ship.


    ¡°Jump aboard!¡± Charles shouted, leading the crew toward the other side.


    Crossing the battered deck, Charles and his crew descended into the wooden ship''s cabin.


    Just as they reached the bottom of the stairs, a glint of cold light swung toward Charles¡¯s face. He shrank back, swiftly cutting the paper figure in front of him with his black blade.


    But this was just the beginning; a continuous wave of black paper figures surged forward, frantically attacking the crew.


    ¡°This thing seems to be controlled by someone! Hold them off! I¡¯ll go take care of their master!¡±


    After saying this, Charles charged toward the paper figures, his body slipping through them like an eel.


    The paper figures, seemingly panicked, surged forward, trying to block Charles¡¯s path.


    He was like a small boat in a storm, precarious yet always upright.


    However, the more there were, the more Charles''s human agility could shine through; their dense formation caused them to accidentally strike their own kind.


    After a few seconds, a clearing appeared before him. In the dimly lit cabin, a figure dressed in a black captain¡¯s coat was muttering to himself, with four sky-blue candles flickering beside him.


    Upon seeing the masked Charles, the man¡¯s face turned pale with fear. He quickly blew out the candles, plunging the room into darkness, and hurriedly ran toward a nearby window.


    This little trick was useless against Charles, who possessed dark vision. He raised his pistol and pulled the trigger.


    Blood blossomed on the man¡¯s limbs. Before he could react, Charles pressed the black blade against his throat.

 **Chapter 45: The Little Man**

    ¡°Kid, if you don¡¯t want your head to roll, don¡¯t move. Who sent you to kill me? Don¡¯t try to fool me by claiming you¡¯re a pirate; I¡¯ve encountered plenty of pirates, and the pirates of the Deep Sea don¡¯t rob like you do,¡± Charles said, his tone flippant, but the gaze behind the mask was icy.


    ¡°I¡­ if I tell you, will you not kill me?¡± The man, threatened by Charles, was filled with fear.


    ¡°I might consider it.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s¡­ it¡¯s¡­¡±


    Just when Charles thought he was about to speak, the man suddenly thrust his neck forward, and an exceptionally sharp blade easily severed his head.


    Hot blood sprayed onto Charles¡¯s mask, staining the bright white surface red.


    After a moment of shock, Charles cursed and stood up, turning to leave the cabin.


    As his footsteps faded into the distance, the head on the ground slowly opened its eyes.


    A smug smile crept across his lips, creating an eerie atmosphere in the dark cabin.


    The head puckered its lips and began to roll toward a nearby corpse.


    ¡°Thud!¡± A black dagger embedded itself in the ground, blocking its path. The head turned in terror, realizing that the masked man had returned, standing there with his head tilted, staring at it.


    ¡°Since I know you¡¯re from the mysterious side, how could I not be prepared?¡± Charles charged forward and kicked the head, sending it flying against the wall before it bounced back to his feet.


    ¡°Surviving even after being decapitated, huh? Alright, let¡¯s have some fun. Just seeing you like this inspires me! Tell me, if I toss you into a cauldron and boil you, could you still live?¡± Charles said, stepping on the head.


    ¡°Sir, I was wrong! Don¡¯t boil me! I¡¯ll say anything¡­¡± The head, with a mournful expression, suddenly had its right eye pop out and fall to the ground, from which a curled-up little man crawled out.


    The little man looked like an undeveloped infant, with a semi-transparent pink body and grotesquely deformed limbs, creating an unsettling sight.


    Its voice was thin like a mosquito¡¯s, trembling as it lay on the ground and shouted, ¡°It was Priest Sonny who ordered me to control your crew to ambush you, and he sent me to kill you!¡±


    Charles¡¯s lips curled into an exaggerated smile behind the mask. ¡°So it¡¯s that little brat. This grudge is settled now.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles! I¡¯m innocent! Sonny has taken over our island and forced me to work for him! I¡¯ve told you everything! Please spare me!¡±


    ¡°Spare you? You killed my men and now expect to be let go? You¡¯re dreaming.¡±


    The panicking little man suddenly remembered something, quickly standing up and pointing at a cabinet in the corner, shouting, ¡°There¡¯s a stash inside! Sonny¡¯s reward for me is in there! It¡¯s all yours¡ª!¡±The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    ¡°Smack!¡± Charles¡¯s boot came down, silencing the little man¡¯s voice.


    ¡°Just said you were being forced, and now there¡¯s a reward?¡± Charles wiped the sticky sole of his boot and walked toward the cabinet.


    Pushing the cabinet aside revealed a keyhole in the floor. Charles swiftly slid the black blade through the hole, unlocking the hidden door.


    Gold bricks gleamed in the dim light, neatly arranged and filling the small space. A rough estimate suggested there were several pounds of gold here, worth a fortune both on the surface and in the Deep Sea.


    ¡°Wow, I didn¡¯t realize I was worth this much!¡± Charles picked up a brick, intending to bite it to test its authenticity, but the mask obstructed him.


    Irritated, he stood up and walked toward the staircase.


    As he emerged, Charles saw the crew members who were about to enter. The paper figures that had previously attacked were now lying motionless on the ground, clearly under the control of the little man.


    ¡°How are the casualties?¡± Charles removed his mask.


    The first mate, Knon, did not answer the question but excitedly said to Charles, ¡°Captain, Sodom has appeared!¡±


    When they rushed back onto the deck, the sight before them left everyone utterly shocked.


    A small mountain formed from various disheveled ships loomed ahead, flickering lights dancing between the ¡°peaks,¡± with shadowy figures moving in the dim surroundings, resembling ghostly silhouettes.


    The ¡°mountain¡± was not stationary; it slowly but steadily drifted forward. This was the stronghold of the Deep Sea pirates¡ªSodom.


    ¡°Captain, Sodom is coming! Shall we go?¡± the first mate asked Charles.


    But Charles stood there, silent. Knon, puzzled, gently patted him on the shoulder.


    In that instant, it was as if he had touched some switch; the wounds on Charles¡¯s body, which had just healed, suddenly split open again, and bright red blood splattered several meters away.


    As he heard the crew¡¯s gasps quickly fade, Charles¡¯s consciousness plunged into darkness.


    When he regained consciousness, Charles found himself no longer on the ship. He looked around, engulfed in darkness.


    Suddenly, a light appeared below him. He saw a younger version of himself standing in a wooden boat, holding a lantern and gazing around in confusion.


    This was when he had just arrived in this part of the Deep Sea. Charles anticipated what would happen next, and his breathing quickened.


    At that moment, the young Charles leaned over to look into the water, and deep in the pitch-black sea, he saw something the size of a ping-pong ball emitting a green glow, slowly moving.


    The ping-pong ball suddenly halted and shot upward at high speed. In an instant, it grew enormous, pressing tightly against the water¡¯s surface, illuminating a vast area with its eerie glow.


    If the ping-pong ball on the water¡¯s surface was a football field, then Charles was the football placed in the center of the field.


    In the center of the green glow was a black dot. That was not a ping-pong ball; it was the eye of some creature!


    Under the gaze of that eye, Charles watched in horror as the young version of himself began to distort.


    Wriggling tentacles, trembling innards, a face filled with fear and despair, sharp nails or teeth¡ªvarious repulsive organs proliferated on his body.


    Charles watched helplessly as his younger self transformed into a grotesque mass of flesh and blood.


    An indescribable, extreme fear enveloped Charles. At that moment, he wanted to close his eyes but found he could not.


    The eye in the water suddenly shifted to look at Charles in the air. ¡°It sees me! It sees me!!¡±


    ¡°Ahhhh!¡± Charles jolted awake, drenched in cold sweat.


    James, who had been dozing nearby, rushed over, worriedly asking, ¡°Captain? Are you alright??¡±


    Regaining his composure, Charles looked around. He found himself lying on a filthy wooden bed, surrounded by bottles and jars filled with various substances, the air thick with a mix of rotten and herbal odors.


    ¡°Where is this?¡± Charles opened his clothes and discovered his wounds were wrapped in bandages.


    ¡°Captain, we¡¯re in Sodom! That last moment almost scared us to death! We thought you really died! Thankfully, there¡¯s a doctor here.¡± A burly man handed him a cup of water.

 **Chapter 46: The Doctor**

    Charles, drenched in cold sweat, took a sip of water and looked at his crew. ¡°Thanks, James.¡±


    The burly James wore his usual hearty smile. ¡°It¡¯s nothing. You¡¯re our captain, after all.¡±


    ¡°Gather everyone. We need to discuss our next plan.¡±


    ¡°Understood.¡± James walked out.


    ¡°Finally made it to Sodom¡­¡± Charles lay back slowly, a hint of relief crossing his tired face. No matter how difficult the journey was, he was one step closer to going home.


    ¡°Cough!¡± A sudden fit of coughing made Charles instinctively reach for his weapon.


    Propping himself up, he turned to see an elderly man in a dirty white coat standing at the door, holding a wooden cup in his iron left hand. Yet, compared to his appearance, his bizarre look seemed almost normal.


    His wrinkled face was marred with various scars, resembling a shattered mirror hastily pieced back together. On this nightmarish visage, two yellowing eyeballs twitched uncontrollably, their gaze somewhat neurotic.


    The old man seemed oblivious to Charles''s hand on his weapon, limping over. It was then that Charles noticed his left foot was also made of iron.


    ¡°Drink this, don¡¯t chew,¡± the old man said in a hoarse, curt voice, placing the cup on the table beside the bed.


    Charles picked up the cup and saw a dark liquid inside, with something alive swimming in it.


    ¡°Are you the one who saved me? Thank you. I thought I was done for with such severe injuries,¡± Charles said, raising the cup to his lips and tilting it back.


    In an instant, a bitter taste worse than gall filled his mouth. The liquid¡¯s surface felt prickly, scraping against his throat like swallowing a stone wrapped in gauze.


    ¡°This injury is nothing. Your mind is far worse off than your body,¡± the old man replied, turning to crouch down and rummage through bottles and jars.


    ¡°Are you talking about the auditory hallucinations?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°Ha! Hallucinations? If it were just that, I¡¯d cut off my other hand right now!¡± The old man¡¯s voice dripped with sarcasm.


    He was right. The auditory hallucinations had morphed into visual ones; everything around him appeared distorted and grotesque. Charles had no idea what else was coming, but he knew it wasn¡¯t good.


    Though the words were harsh, Charles detected another layer of meaning. ¡°Do you have a way to fix it? Money isn¡¯t an issue.¡±


    The old man turned and approached Charles, his trembling eyeballs fixed on him. ¡°What¡¯s your name?¡±This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    ¡°Charles.¡±


    ¡°Last name?¡±


    Charles slightly recoiled, creating distance between himself and the old man. ¡°Just call me Charles.¡±


    The old man extended his iron arm. ¡°Rasto Hermann. I don¡¯t like younger people calling me Rasto; you can just call me ¡®Doctor.¡¯¡±


    Charles reached out and shook the cold metal hand. ¡°Thank you. About my hallucinations¡ª¡±


    Before Charles could finish, the doctor interrupted, ¡°I can treat this syndrome. In all of Sodom, my treatment is the best. As for payment, I don¡¯t want echoes; I want the black mirror in your possession.¡±


    Charles instantly understood what he meant, pulling the powerless phone from his pocket. ¡°You want this?¡±


    As soon as Rasto saw the phone, his eyes gleamed with an unmistakable desire. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s it! Such a well-preserved item is rare; I want it!¡±


    Charles looked down at the phone and the black screen reflecting his image. ¡°Why do you want it? Do you know what it is?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t know, but my instincts tell me it¡¯s special. My instincts have always been accurate.¡±


    Charles hesitated. This was the only item he had brought from the surface, containing pictures of his family. It wasn¡¯t that he was unwilling to part with it; he had heard rumors that some individuals from the mysterious side could curse the original owner through objects. Who knew what this man would do with his phone?


    Just as Charles was contemplating, the door swung open, and the crew of the *Narwhal* burst in excitedly, with Lily jumping directly onto him.


    ¡°Captain! You¡¯re finally awake!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles!¡±


    ¡°Captain, it¡¯s so good to see you alive!¡±


    Charles glanced at Rasto Hermann, who was retreating from the crowd.


    ¡°Doctor, let me think it over. I¡¯ll notify you once I decide,¡± Charles said, putting the phone back in his pocket.


    Rasto cast a glance at the crowd and then limped out. ¡°You¡¯d better hurry. I don¡¯t mind, but your head won¡¯t last long.¡±


    Charles turned his attention to the first mate. ¡°How are the crew¡¯s casualties?¡±


    ¡°Two sailors dead¡­ one sacrificed¡­ one leg amputated¡­ the others have varying degrees of injury, and you were on the brink of death¡­¡±


    Better than Charles had imagined; he had feared he would lose half the crew this time.


    Looking around, Charles asked with some confusion, ¡°Where¡¯s that kid Deep? He shouldn¡¯t be dead, right?¡±


    The crew members looked toward the wooden door, where a shadow could be seen on the floor outside.


    ¡°Deep, come here.¡±


    A bruised and battered Deep walked in, his own body wrapped in bandages.


    ¡°What happened to your face?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°I got in a fight; that kid needed a beating,¡± the chef, Frey, said, waving his arm.


    With bloodshot eyes, Deep knelt on the ground, filled with shame.


    In Deep''s mind, Charles was almost like a father figure to him, and the thought of nearly stabbing him to death filled him with sorrow and guilt. If Charles had died because of him, he would never be able to forgive himself.


    ¡°You won¡¯t get paid for this mission. This matter ends here.¡±


    Deep looked up in shock. He had expected to be kicked off the *Narwhal* and sent back to the streets. Yet, he was let off so lightly?


    ¡°Remember this loss; don¡¯t let anyone play you again.¡±


    Charles had his own plans. Although Deep was somewhat naive, he had been trained by him and trusted him. With crew members dying so easily, he needed to ensure that those on board were loyal.


    Having untrustworthy crew members was terrifying. In such situations, disloyal crew members would undoubtedly throw a dying captain overboard and sell the ship, splitting the profits.


    Tears streamed from Deep''s eyes as he fervently nodded, silently vowing never to let such a thing happen again.


    Charles shifted his gaze from Deep to the first mate. ¡°Did we get the gold from that wooden ship?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sodom has a ship recycling service. The ship was sold. After settling everything, we have 1.54 million echoes. That old man took 300,000 for treatment. By the way, there¡¯s not just gold in the ship; I found some other items too.¡±

 **Chapter 47: The Anchor Bar**

    Kronari pulled out a few old books he had prepared long ago. The covers were red and worn to the point where the titles were barely legible, and the pages were yellowed with age.


    Charles took the books and opened one, discovering various strange writings in bold crimson ink. They resembled cuneiform but were interconnected in a way that made them difficult to decipher. Next to the text were simple drawings of magical circles and monsters.


    Even though he couldn''t understand them, the arrangement suggested that these books recorded something significant.


    "Could this be the spellbook for summoning those little paper people?" The thought took root in Charles''s mind and wouldn¡¯t let go.


    If it were true, these books would be worth far more than gold. Once learned, such abilities would greatly enhance the *Narwhal*''s combat power.


    After pondering for a moment, Charles returned the books to Kronari. ¡°Let¡¯s hold onto these for now. We¡¯ll look for clues in Sodom. If someone can translate them, we can find someone to learn from.¡±


    ¡°Got it!¡±


    ¡°Then it¡¯s settled.¡± Charles sat up from the bed and put on his coat.


    James¡¯s eyes widened in alarm. ¡°Captain, what are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Do you think I brought you all to Sodom for a vacation? I have important matters to attend to here.¡±


    James, panicking, quickly stepped forward with his arms outstretched to block Charles. ¡°No, you can¡¯t! Your injuries aren¡¯t healed yet; you can¡¯t get up!¡±


    Lily, nearby, summoned the rats to swarm over Charles, trying to pin him back down. The others joined in, urging him to stay put.


    Charles insisted that he felt fine and wasn¡¯t in any pain, but no one seemed to believe him.


    The crew¡¯s concern only added to Charles''s frustration. The whispers in his ears returned, distorting the faces of his crew into grotesque forms.


    ¡°Enough!!¡± he shouted, his voice low but commanding, startling everyone into silence. The rats retreated at his command.


    He pulled a spare gel from his clothing and popped it into his mouth. Everything around him began to stabilize.


    ¡°First mate, go procure fresh water, food, and fuel. Second mate and Audrick, come with me. The rest of you, back to the ship!¡±


    With his authority as captain asserted, the crew quickly complied, not daring to defy him.


    Watching them leave, Charles sighed. He knew they meant well, but they couldn¡¯t understand his current state of mind. If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    The clues to going home were right in front of him, and every second felt like torture. He couldn¡¯t wait any longer.


    Stepping out of the doctor¡¯s chaotic room, he found himself on a bustling street.


    Human creativity was remarkable; everything around him was constructed from ships, with various hulls and decks forming a street. Gas lamps and oil lamps cast an eerie glow, giving the place a ghostly market feel.


    Pirates in various garbs walked back and forth, each with a wary look in their eyes, and the air was thick with tension.


    Charles moved forward, asking the second mate behind him, ¡°Where did you find that doctor?¡±


    ¡°When we first arrived in Sodom, you were barely breathing. The guys at the port told us there was a great doctor here, so we took you to him.¡±


    After pondering for a moment, Charles looked up and said, ¡°Scout around a bit. I want to know more about him and see if he has any skeletons in his closet.¡±


    ¡°Understood. I¡¯ll take care of it,¡± the second mate replied quickly before leaving.


    ¡°What about me, Captain?¡± Audrick asked.


    ¡°You¡¯ve been here before, right? Do you know the Anchor Bar? Take me there.¡±


    Audrick nodded, spreading his cloak and transforming into a bat, soaring into the air.


    Once airborne, he quickly oriented himself and flew eastward. Charles hurried to keep up.


    Outside the street was a junkyard piled high with various ships, leaving no place to land.


    Watching Audrick fly further away, Charles donned his mask and moved like a gymnast, leaping swiftly between the rusted vessels.


    As he followed Audrick, Charles witnessed the myriad lives in Sodom. The city lived up to its title as the City of Sin; not only were there various stolen goods, but also ragged men and women being sold openly on the streets.


    In the shadows where the light didn¡¯t reach, unspeakable human depravity occurred. The notorious port district seemed like a model community in comparison.


    After running for what felt like half of Sodom, Audrick finally landed in front of a bar illuminated by neon lights.


    As Charles stood there, a sheen of sweat on his forehead, he reached into his clothing and felt his wound beginning to bleed again.


    The clues to going home were tantalizingly close, but he couldn¡¯t afford to hesitate. He and Audrick stepped inside.


    Upon entering the bar, the dim environment brightened instantly; the place was lit by electric lights not even Coral Island had adopted yet.


    Several women dressed in nearly transparent fabrics danced at the bar, moving to the rhythm of the music. The dance floor was alive with noise, making it feel more like a nightclub than a bar.


    Navigating through the crowd, Charles reached the edge of the bar. A heavily made-up bartender with a skull tattoo approached. ¡°Hey there, handsome. What can I get you?¡±


    ¡°I was sent by the Sea Dog; I need to ask some questions,¡± Charles replied, leaning on the bar.


    The bartender continued mixing drinks. ¡°Even if you were sent by the Sea Dog, it¡¯ll cost you. 5,000 echoes per question.¡±


    ¡°Not a problem. Do you know where I can find sunlight in Sodom?¡± Charles¡¯s heart raced.


    ¡°Sunlight? What¡¯s that? Never heard of it.¡±


    Charles¡¯s heart sank. He suddenly had a thought and turned to Audrick. ¡°Draw that box that holds sunlight.¡±


    Audrick nodded quickly, pulling out paper and a pen. He sketched rapidly, and before long, a lifelike box with mirrors on all six sides appeared on the page.


    As Audrick added more details, the bartender snatched the paper from him.


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re looking for this? I know what it is. It¡¯s a weapon that can counter dark monsters. But here, we don¡¯t call it sunlight; we call it the Mirror Box. Who came up with that ridiculous name?¡±


    ¡°Where can I buy one?¡±


    ¡°The Mirror Box is the king¡¯s business. Every two weeks, he sends a batch from the island for sale. But let me warn you, bring plenty of echoes; there¡¯s a lot of competition, and these things fetch a high price on other islands.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t need that many; I just need one.¡±


    ¡°One? You think this is a toy store?¡± The bartender looked at Charles with a strange expression.

 **Chapter 48: Opening the Sunlight**

    ¡°Do you know that thing is like a bullet? Once used, it¡¯s gone?¡±


    ¡°I just need one. Can you get it?¡± Charles''s urgency was palpable.


    The skull-faced bartender crossed her arms, contemplating. ¡°Hmm... just one? Let me think¡­¡±


    A few seconds later, she clapped her hands. ¡°Right! I heard the Shark intercepted a shipment recently, and it had a Mirror Box in it. If you need it urgently, I can offer you 40,000 echoes for one. Don¡¯t say I¡¯m trying to rip you off; this stuff isn¡¯t cheap.¡±


    ¡°Deal! Please get me one right away.¡±


    Seeing Charles agree so quickly, the bartender felt a twinge of regret for not asking for a higher price.


    ¡°Luna, take good care of this friend while I¡¯m gone. I¡¯ll be right back.¡± As she turned to leave, a girl in sheer fabric crawled over to Charles like a cat.


    The temptation of the girl was nothing compared to the urgency in Charles¡¯s heart; he felt anxious and restless.


    Generally, sunlight was the only thing that could turn a vampire to ashes, but sunlight shouldn¡¯t be bottled up. This illogical sea had already thrown too many surprises at Charles, and he couldn¡¯t be sure.


    ¡°Hey, why are your legs shaking so much? Are you holding back something?¡± the girl in sheer fabric said, inching closer.


    Irritated, Charles raised his hand with the tentacle ring and pushed her away.


    Audrick, gleeful, swooped in, covering her with his cloak. He clamped his hand over her mouth, revealing his sharp fangs as he lunged for her pale neck, her bare feet trembling outside the cloak.


    The next period felt like an eternity for Charles.


    The skull-faced bartender returned half an hour later, holding a Mirror Box identical to the one drawn on the paper.


    Charles was eager to open it.


    ¡°Wait! Captain!! Let me get out first!!¡± Audrick, bloodied, dashed towards the door.


    Charles trembled as he pressed down on the lid, his breathing quickening.


    ¡°Are you really going to open it now? You think a 40,000 echo item is a toy?¡± The bartender¡¯s eyes widened.


    ¡°Whoosh!!!¡± As the box opened, a blinding light instantly illuminated the entire bar.


    The light from the box wasn¡¯t like the scorching summer sun; it felt more like the gentle warmth of winter sunlight, wrapping around him and inducing a slight drowsiness.This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    At that moment, all of Charles''s previous anxiety transformed into tranquility as he felt the sunlight brush against his skin. He had never felt so close to home.


    The blinding light came and went quickly; in just three seconds, the brightness in the bar returned to normal.


    After a brief silence, the patrons resumed their noisy chatter.


    Sensing the smell of dust mites being annihilated on his clothes, Charles smiled faintly, tears streaming down his cheeks.


    The box truly contained genuine sunlight, a beacon from the sun, marking his path back home.


    ¡°Your friend from the Sea Dog must be wealthy to treat a Mirror Box like a toy. Hey, do you need a woman? How about me?¡± The bartender returned to the bar, mixing cocktails.


    Holding the Mirror Box, Charles sniffed and asked, ¡°Where does this come from?¡±


    ¡°Didn¡¯t I tell you? The king sends a batch every two weeks.¡±


    ¡°No, I mean where does the stuff inside come from?¡±


    The bartender paused, her shaking cocktail shaker stopping as a serious expression crossed her face. ¡°What are you planning? The last guy who tried to steal business from the king ended up skewered and fed to the sharks.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not trying to steal his business; I just want to know the source of this sunlight.¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t that the same thing? If you were in my shoes, would you tell anyone? Do you know how much money this business makes for the king? For the sake of the Sea Dog, I advise you not to go looking for trouble.¡±


    But Charles was undeterred, asking again, ¡°When does he usually show up?¡±


    The bartender sighed. ¡°He typically shows up for the auction every two weeks.¡±


    Charles¡¯s fingers tapped nervously on the bar. ¡°He¡¯s the king of Sodom? Does the entire Sodom belong to him??¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Not just Sodom; his influence is vast. He has a dozen ships over a hundred meters long, and all the pirates in the North Sea must obey him. Even the governors of those islands have to tread carefully around him.¡±


    Charles sat there, his expression grave, lost in thought.


    ¡°Stop dawdling and pay up,¡± the bartender said, hands on her hips.


    Audrick helped Charles back to the bed, but the pain from his wounds couldn¡¯t overshadow his curiosity.


    If this so-called king had a way to the surface, why didn¡¯t he go up instead of staying in this sunless underground?


    Was he using the resources from the surface to easily become an upper-class figure down here?


    Or was this sunlight not from the sun at all?


    Whatever the reason, Charles decided he needed to investigate. This was the only lead he had.


    Just as he was lost in thought, the second mate, Kronari, burst in. ¡°Captain! I got some intel on that old man from the local snakes!¡±


    ¡°What did you find out?¡± Charles propped himself up in bed.


    After a moment of hesitation, Kronari spoke. ¡°Captain, I spent quite a bit to dig up this info. Can you reimburse me?¡±


    ¡°Sure, just tell me quickly.¡±


    ¡°Um, people around here say that old man has been here for a long time. No one can say when he arrived. Most pirates find him here treating injuries. No matter how severe the wounds, he can heal them. That¡¯s about it; he¡¯s a doctor, and no other pirates have bothered him since, because who knows when they might need treatment themselves?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Charles pondered.


    ¡°Captain, why are you digging into his background? He¡¯s just a doctor, right?¡± Kronari asked curiously.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you think the *Narwhal* is missing a ship¡¯s doctor?¡±


    Kronari¡¯s mouth fell open in surprise. ¡°So you mean¡ª¡±


    Just then, the door swung open, and the doctor limped in. ¡°Take off your shirt and change the bandages.¡±


    Seeing Charles give him a look, Kronari quickly exited.


    The doctor used his iron hand to pinch the bandage on Charles''s chest, exposing the wound that was supposed to be healing but was now oozing blood again.


    ¡°Running around with such a serious injury? Are you trying to die slowly?¡±


    After applying a layer of black powder to the wound, he produced a mechanical device resembling a stapler, pressing it against Charles¡¯s injury and fastening it with a series of ¡°pops.¡±


    Charles felt no pain, but the sensation of his flesh being stitched together with metal was strangely fascinating.

 **Chapter 49: The Ships Doctor**

    ¡°I agree to the deal,¡± Charles said to the doctor who was stitching up his wounds.


    The doctor paused, a scarred smile creeping across his face. ¡°Really? That¡¯s wonderful! I¡¯ll definitely use the best medicines to restore your mind to health.¡±


    ¡°But the terms of the deal need to change. I can give you the ¡®Black Mirror,¡¯ but you must become my ship¡¯s doctor.¡±


    If there was one lesson Charles learned from his previous battles, it was that having a skilled doctor on board could significantly reduce casualties. If only he had had one last time, the outcome would have been much better.


    The doctor lowered his head and continued to staple Charles''s flesh. ¡°You¡¯re not the first to ask me to be their ship¡¯s doctor. Their ships are bigger, and they¡¯re stronger. Why should I choose you?¡±


    ¡°Because I have something you want. You value the Black Mirror highly; you must want to know more about its origins, right?¡±


    ¡°Coincidentally, I know everything about it. If you become my ship¡¯s doctor, I can tell you all about it, provided you believe what I say.¡±


    After finishing the stitches, the doctor stepped back and scrutinized Charles, as if trying to read his thoughts. ¡°Let me see the Black Mirror again.¡±


    Charles tossed his phone to him. Watching the doctor gently caress the black screen, a tenderness crossed his face that seemed entirely out of place.


    Curious, Charles wondered what memories were flooding back. ¡°Did he once have a phone too?¡±


    With a loud thud, the doctor slammed his iron hand against the edge of the bed. ¡°Two years! I¡¯ll stay on your ship for two years. You¡¯ll tell me everything.¡±


    ¡°Deal. That thing is yours now, and you can ask me anything about it once you¡¯re on board.¡±


    As long as he became the *Narwhal*¡¯s ship¡¯s doctor, Charles was confident he could prevent the phone from falling into the wrong hands. Two years would be enough for him to understand the doctor¡¯s character before making further plans.


    ¡°Ng''lui mglw¡­ nafh¡­¡±


    Whispers echoed in Charles''s ears as he watched the doctor morph into a grotesque monster, this time even more severe. His consciousness felt like clothes tossed in a washing machine, constantly tumbling, on the verge of unraveling.


    Shaking, Charles reached for the gel in his clothing, but before he could grab it, the grotesque figure struck it away with a tentacle, offering him a vial of medicine instead.


    Faced with the ever-shifting form of the monster, Charles knew it was still the doctor. With trembling hands, he accepted the potion and drank it down.This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    The monster departed, only to return moments later with more vials¡ªnot just potions but various pills and ointments. The bizarre flavors assaulted Charles''s taste buds repeatedly, nearly numbing his sense of taste.


    ¡°Doctor! How much longer?¡± Charles cried, clutching his head in pain. The effects of the potion were not immediate.


    The grotesque creature¡¯s six mouths on its belly opened to say something, but the whispers drowned out all other sounds.


    At that moment, the distortion began to shrink, and the ugly face of Rasto Herman reappeared before Charles.


    ¡°Is it cured?¡±


    The doctor appeared anxious, scratching his half-white hair, flakes flying everywhere. ¡°Impossible! How could the Silent Salt have no effect?!¡±


    Seeing his distress, Charles realized that his auditory hallucinations weren¡¯t going to be easy to cure.


    Suddenly, Rasto lunged at Charles, staring intensely into his eyes.


    Charles instinctively tried to pull away, but the doctor held his head firmly. ¡°Don¡¯t move!¡±


    After several tense seconds, the doctor released him and asked frantically, ¡°Did you see something extraordinary at sea?¡±


    ¡°Gods? I¡¯ve seen them twice¡ªonce eight years ago, and once not long ago.¡±


    This answer seemed to trigger Rasto, who trembled, angrily stomping his steel leg on the floor. ¡°I knew it! I should have guessed it! My medicine is fine! It¡¯s definitely fine!¡±


    ¡°Is this illness related to the gods?¡±


    ¡°The gods?¡±


    The doctor sneered. ¡°I don¡¯t care what kind of nonsense gods they are. I just know that anyone who gets involved with them ends up suffering.¡±


    ¡°Can you treat this condition?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not an illness, do you understand? It¡¯s a curse! A damned thing! Just looking at it can be fatal, and they call them gods! Hmph!¡±


    The doctor¡¯s grotesque face leaned closer, his trembling eyes fixed on Charles.


    ¡°I can suppress the symptoms, but it¡¯s only temporary. If you want to survive, you must find a way to break the curse yourself. That¡¯s not my specialty.¡±


    Remembering the auction in two weeks, Charles made a decision. ¡°Then help me suppress it for now. I need to handle some personal matters first.¡±


    As he sought a way to the surface, he didn¡¯t want any distractions; getting back to the surface was paramount.


    The doctor grabbed a fist-sized sea spider from under the bed and walked to the table to prepare a potion. ¡°Just so you know, Captain, if you die before two years are up, I¡¯ll consider it fulfilling my end of the bargain.¡±


    ¡°Fine, just don¡¯t poison me to finish your task early.¡±


    ¡°Poison!? That¡¯s an insult to a doctor!¡±


    In the following days, Charles continued to taste the strange concoctions the old man prepared. Although the flavors were less than desirable, Charles¡¯s mental state improved noticeably. The whispers, even when they appeared, were now merely a distant buzz, and the visual hallucinations had vanished.


    With the enhanced healing from the Black Blade, Charles¡¯s wounds healed significantly within just a few days, restoring him to peak condition.


    ¡°Captain, are you sure that guy is our ship¡¯s doctor? I saw him secretly adding gunpowder to the pills he gave you the other day,¡± Second Mate Kronari asked, concern etched on his face.


    Charles paused in his journaling, then resumed writing. ¡°Mind your own business. How are the crew feeling?¡±


    ¡°They¡¯re okay. They know the reputation of this place and don¡¯t dare wander around. Captain, how much longer do we have to stay here?¡±


    ¡°Not much longer.¡± As soon as he finished speaking, a bat burst through the door, transforming into Audrick. ¡°Captain, the auction in Sodom is about to start!¡±


    Charles donned his captain''s coat and stepped out of the captain¡¯s quarters.


    Under Audrick¡¯s guidance, Charles quickly arrived at a wooden ship, which lay horizontally, its keel hollowed out to create an entrance. This was now the venue for the Sodom auction.

 **Chapter 50: The King**

    Charles pulled out the invitation he had purchased from the skeleton woman and stepped inside.


    The wooden ship was spacious but sparsely decorated. In front of the chairs where guests sat was a simple stage covered with a blood-red carpet. The pirates, lacking any sense of decorum, drank and feasted on comfort fruits, while some greedily inhaled various powders. The air in the auction house was thick with a mix of odors.


    Amidst the murmurs of the pirate leaders, Charles felt somewhat out of place, standing alone. He had not allowed Audrick to enter; the pirates here had significant backgrounds, and he feared that someone might recognize him as a vampire and cause trouble.


    As the crowd gradually gathered, the bright oil lamps dimmed to their lowest setting. Suddenly, a bright spotlight illuminated the stage.


    A flamboyantly dressed dwarf leaped onto the stage. ¡°Welcome, esteemed captains, to the 157th auction in Sodom! We have plenty of good items today! Are your pockets ready for the echoes of wealth??¡±


    The crowd remained largely unresponsive, with few pirates even bothering to look at him.


    Unfazed, the dwarf clapped his hands cheerfully. ¡°Now, let¡¯s welcome our noble, respected, and unrivaled King!¡±


    As soon as the dwarf finished speaking, the spotlight shifted to the side door.


    A grotesquely overweight man, weighing at least a ton, was pushed out on a wooden cart. His excessively greasy face was covered in boils, and his belly nearly touched the floor. This was the King of Sodom, and he was surprisingly repulsive.


    The King ignored the audience, his attention completely fixated on the mountains of meat piled beside the cart. Watching him stuff food into his mouth with rotten teeth made Charles feel nauseated; honestly, this King was far from what he had imagined.


    However, the other pirates didn¡¯t share his sentiment. Just moments ago, they had been unruly, but now they stood up to pay their respects to the King.


    The King remained silent, waving his greasy hand dismissively, prompting the dwarf to continue.


    The spotlight returned to the dwarf, who bowed deeply towards the King before announcing, ¡°The auction now begins! Our first item is a woman!¡±


    The curtain behind the dwarf was drawn back, revealing a hesitant girl in an extravagant dress.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ¡°Ladies and gentlemen, this is no ordinary plaything; she is the daughter of the recently missing governor of Hefang Island! Whoever buys her can demand a ransom daily, threatening the governor! This isn¡¯t just a woman; it¡¯s a money tree!! Starting bid: 500,000! Increment: 100,000! Now, let¡¯s start!! This captain bids 1 million! 2 million! Good! 6 million!!¡±


    While the bidding ensued, Charles¡¯s focus remained on the King, who held the key to the surface¡¯s clues. He pondered how to obtain the map from him.


    As the governor¡¯s daughter was bought by a pirate, she walked down from the stage with a sorrowful expression. Unbeknownst to anyone, she was moving closer to the King.


    Just three meters away from him, her tear-streaked face suddenly contorted into a snarl. She swiftly drew a handgun from beneath her frilly skirt and began firing at the King.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!!¡± The bullets ricocheted off the King¡¯s blubber, splattering blood mixed with yellowish fat everywhere.


    One of the King¡¯s boils burst, and a creature the size of a palm leaped from it, lunging at the woman. In the next moment, the sound of tearing flesh echoed, and the headless corpse fell to the ground.


    The King remained seated, stunned, shoving bloody chunks of meat into his mouth as if he hadn¡¯t just been shot.


    After several seconds, the dwarf hurriedly tried to regain control of the situation. ¡°Haha, another brave fool daring to dream! Praise our King! Our King is unrivaled! Now, let¡¯s continue with the second item for auction!!¡±


    Charles watched as the creature retreated back into the King¡¯s boil, understanding that someone who could rule Sodom couldn¡¯t possibly be a fool.


    He was certain that the King hadn¡¯t even begun to display his true power; his real capabilities must be terrifying.


    As the auction neared its end, Charles still hadn¡¯t figured out how to extract information from the King. He felt increasingly anxious as he observed the gluttonous figure in the distance.


    ¡°Cough, cough.¡± A clear cough interrupted Charles¡¯s gaze. ¡°Don¡¯t stare so intently at the King; he might think you¡¯re provoking him.¡±


    Turning, Charles was startled to see a white triangle on the man¡¯s forehead.


    Seeing the follower of the Sun God, Charles¡¯s eyes filled with hostility. ¡°I¡¯m not dead; surprised to see me, Sonny?¡±


    To his surprise, the follower looked genuinely surprised. ¡°Sonny? Sorry, I¡¯m not familiar with him; he¡¯s an originalist, while I¡¯m a new believer.¡±


    Charles was skeptical, unsure of this man¡¯s intentions.


    ¡°Don¡¯t doubt my honesty. You know, we followers of the Sun God never lie.¡±


    With that, Charles relaxed his suspicions. Indeed, as far as he knew, Sun God followers who had undergone the ritual lost their fear along with their ability to hide the truth.


    He scrutinized the follower¡¯s appearance. The man looked to be nearly sixty, with graying hair and wearing round glasses, dressed in a yellow robe. He seemed somewhat amiable at first glance.


    ¡°I am Kade, a saint of the Sun God. Captain Charles, it¡¯s a pleasure to meet you.¡±


    Charles¡¯s mind raced as he recalled that Sonny had come to Sodom to eliminate other sect followers. Was Kade one of the targets?


    ¡°You know me?¡±


    Kade smiled slightly. ¡°Of course, I do. When you mentioned seeking the Land of Light at the Explorers¡¯ Society, we received word. Captain Charles, can we talk?¡±


    Charles felt a shift in perspective; the enemy of my enemy is my friend. This man might be of use. ¡°Sure, come aboard my ship.¡±

 **Chapter 51: The Radiance of the Sun God**

    "Why are you paying attention to me?" Charles looked at Kede across the table, with a row of Sun God cultists standing behind him.


    "We''re not just paying attention to you. Anyone searching for the Land of Light is of concern to us; it proves that you are called by the Sun God," Kede replied.


    Listening to this peculiar fanatic, Charles held back the urge to scoff.


    "Mr. Charles, I sincerely invite you to join our faith. The fact that you survived the previous adventures is entirely due to the Sun God''s protection. In this dark sea, there are not many blessed by the Sun God like you."


    Charles chuckled lightly and waved his hand. "Let''s put aside this absolutely impossible matter for now. I have a question for you so-called followers of the Sun God."


    Kede extended his left hand. "Please, go ahead."


    "The mirror box from Sodom¡ªI''m sure you know about it?"


    "Of course, some of the captains in my faith have asked me to purchase a few."


    Leaning slightly forward, Charles fixed his gaze on the old man. "Don''t you think the light inside the mirror box resembles the light of your Sun God?"


    Kede chuckled, patting the table, his aged face radiating confidence. "Captain Charles, since you haven''t joined the faith, you might not understand. In our scriptures, everything about the Sun God is detailed. The light of the Sun God is colorful and healing, while the light in the mirror box is too singular and glaring¡ªcompletely different."


    "Are you so sure?" Charles leaned forward, narrowing his eyes.


    "Captain Charles, having the intention to seek the brilliance of the Sun God is good, but speaking carelessly without understanding only reveals ignorance. I am a sanctified person of the Sun God faith; I know much more about the Sun God than you do. If the light of the Sun God appeared before me, I would not be unaware."


    Charles rarely burst into laughter. "Thank you for the joke; I haven''t laughed like that in a long time."


    A hint of anger appeared on Kede''s face as he stood up, seemingly about to leave, but then sat back down.


    "Mr. Charles, I know you''re somewhat resistant. No worries; we can start with preliminary cooperation. You have shown great talent as an explorer captain. I can provide you with the coordinates of islands most likely to have a ladder to the heavens. You can search those islands, and the church will reimburse all expenses."


    If it were the old Charles, he would have agreed without hesitation. Although it meant being used as a pawn, the offer was quite generous. However, he had already found clues to return to the surface, so how could he agree?


    Looking at the man before him, Charles silently pondered his own situation. The route to the surface was controlled by the "King," and his current strength was too weak. He needed additional support, and this man might be useful.Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Mr. Charles, what are you considering?"


    "What if I told you I already have clues to the Land of Light?"


    A hint of impatience crossed Kede''s face. "Captain Charles keeps discussing unrelated topics; it shows a lack of sincerity."


    "What is your standard for judging divine light? Is it colorful?" Charles snapped his fingers, and a group of rats dragged a mirror box inside.


    Charles opened the box slightly and placed a prism on top, refracting colorful light onto Kede''s astonished face.


    "Colorful light, it''s here now." Charles handed the prism to him.


    Kede held the prism, stunned. He brought it close to try it himself. With each attempt, his expression grew more shocked, until the sunlight in the box was completely exhausted.


    The prism effect was something even elementary school students in later generations understood, but in this dark sea, there was no sunlight available for experimentation, so no one knew that sunlight was made up of various monochromatic lights.


    "Charles, what... what is going on?" Kede''s expression was a mix of excitement and joy, as if he had touched upon some forbidden existence.


    Seeing that he had been impressed, Charles seized the opportunity and stood up.


    "The light inside the box is indeed the divine light of your Sun God. The ''King'' of Sodom knows the location of the Land of Light. If we can get him to hand over the sea chart, we can find the Land of Light!"


    After much discussion, Kede did not provide a clear answer. He left, looking somewhat lost.


    The Sun God cult was a large organization in the dark sea. Charles''s goal was to have Kede convey this information to all the followers. As long as he could gather all the followers, even the "King" of Sodom wouldn''t be able to hold out.


    What could even the fiercest pirate do against these fearless cultists?


    Three days later, a visibly troubled Kede returned. "Sorry, Captain Charles. The archbishop''s telegram has arrived; they believe this is nonsense."


    Leaning back in his chair, Charles sighed. As expected, just a single statement could not persuade such a large organization. He had to find another way.


    After a moment of silence, Charles looked at Kede. "What about you? Do you believe it?"


    "I..." Kede''s face showed struggle. He could understand the archbishop''s feelings; who would believe a stranger claiming that something sought after for centuries was right in front of them?


    But thinking of that colorful light made him waver. What if it was true?


    "But what good would it do if I believe? Unless the archbishop sends warriors from the North Sea, we can''t defeat the King with just a few hundred of us."


    "We don''t need to defeat him." Charles''s words startled Kede.


    Charles did not elaborate, glancing at the people behind Kede.


    "You all go outside and stand guard; no one is allowed to come near!"


    Once they had left, Charles continued, "Our goal is not to occupy Sodom. We just need to know where the sunlight in the mirror box comes from. As long as we have that clue, we can search for the Land of Light."


    "Do you have a plan?" Kede''s voice trembled slightly.


    "The King usually resides in the central palace of Sodom. There must be a sea chart of the Land of Light inside. You just need to lure the King and his guards away, and I can sneak in to take a look. I don''t even need to steal it; just a glance at the sea chart will suffice, so we won''t have to confront him directly."


    Kede did not respond directly, his expression conflicted. He said he needed to think about it.


    Days passed, but Kede did not respond. Charles felt a growing sense of disappointment.


    If this plan didn''t work, he would have to return to being an explorer captain, methodically occupying islands to become a governor and expand his influence, ultimately forcing the "King" to reveal the location of the Land of Light.


    However, that would take too long¡ªso long that Charles doubted he would live to see it.


    "Captain, that cult''s old man is back! This time he brought a tall guy with him!"

 **Chapter 52: The Plan**

    ¡°Gerald.¡± The burly man spoke up before Kede could introduce him. ¡°I heard you¡¯re planning to team up against that fat pig? That takes guts.¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t respond, turning his gaze to Kede.


    ¡°Ha ha, we¡¯re a bit outnumbered against the ¡®King,¡¯ so I brought Captain Gerald here. His strength can help us,¡± Kede explained.


    ¡°He swallowed my cargo! He even took my ship! I¡¯ll never forget that bastard!¡± Gerald''s face, full of muscle, was tinged with anger.


    Charles nodded knowingly; it seemed Kede had brought in an enemy of the ¡°King¡± to assist them, which was a good thing¡ªmore people meant more strength.


    ¡°Let¡¯s skip the small talk. I know this place better than you do, so I¡¯ll make the plan,¡± Gerald asserted, taking control of the conversation.


    ¡°Five days from now, Sodom will approach a new island. Most of the King¡¯s ships will head out to raid the docks. This is our opportunity. My men will lure the King out, Kede will have the followers intercept his subordinates, and as for you¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go to the King¡¯s residence and distract some of his subordinates while searching for the items that Kede and I need.¡±


    ¡°But I¡¯m a bit skeptical about your strength. Are you really useful for this? You don¡¯t even have the smell of blood on you; I doubt you¡¯ve killed anyone,¡± Gerald said, crossing his arms with skepticism in his eyes.


    Charles calmly looked at him. ¡°Even if I¡¯m just going to die, it will still serve our purpose.¡±


    Gerald shrugged. ¡°That¡¯s a fair point. It doesn¡¯t matter; you¡¯re just a sidekick. Kede¡¯s men are what I really need. That pig has been sitting on his throne for too long.¡±


    Kede, ever the peacemaker, stood up and laughed. ¡°Great, everyone gets what they need. It couldn¡¯t be better.¡±


    However, as soon as Gerald left, Kede¡¯s expression changed, turning serious as he looked at Charles. ¡°That guy isn¡¯t the King¡¯s match; you¡¯d better find the sea chart before he gets killed.¡±


    Charles internally scoffed; even if he was missing a few marbles, this old fox wasn¡¯t easy to deal with. He was sending others into danger while he reaped the benefits.


    ¡°Do you have any help for the infiltration? For example, a map of the King¡¯s residence? Or the locations of important items?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, I can¡¯t help much with that. No one truly understands the King, and no one who has sneaked into his residence has ever come back alive. All I can tell you is that it¡¯s very dangerous inside.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡± Charles frowned. Charging in like this was akin to searching for a needle in a haystack.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    ¡°You have a few days to prepare and gather intelligence. I hope you succeed, and I genuinely hope what you said is true. The followers of Sodom will pay a heavy price for this operation.¡±


    Three days later, fully equipped, Charles stood on the deck, speaking to the first mate. ¡°I¡¯ll be back in two hours at most. If I¡¯m not¡­¡±


    ¡°Then¡­ we¡¯ll¡­ come looking for you¡­¡± the bandaged man said, handing over a backpack.


    Charles smiled and said nothing more, taking the backpack and giving the bandaged man¡¯s shoulder a pat as he walked off the ship. At the same time, a bat shot up from the deck of the Narwhal.


    Today, Sodom was bustling. Walking through the crowd, Charles overheard pirates discussing how much loot the King¡¯s ship would bring back. They were like jackals feeding on the remains left by lions.


    Charles walked leisurely. When he reached the massive ship, he saw the ¡°King¡± being pushed out from within.


    Checking his pocket watch, Charles waited, repeatedly checking the artifacts on him. These were all he could rely on now.


    ¡°Boom!!¡± As the explosion lit up in the distance, Charles closed his eyes and took a deep breath. When he opened them again, the clown mask was already covering his face.


    Charles moved through the crowd drawn in by the explosion, making his way to the back of the giant ship. He quickly pulled out a grappling hook and threw it upwards.


    The moment he climbed onto the deck, he was stunned by the lavish decor. The deck had been transformed into a small garden, with exquisite flowers contrasting sharply with the chaos outside.


    Carefully observing and finding no one in the garden, he quickly made his way to the nearby cabin door.


    The interior was even more exquisite, with crystal chandeliers illuminating everything. The dominant colors were gold and red, accented with silver and jade decorations. Every corridor and room showcased a sense of understated luxury.


    ¡°Wow, this pirate leader lives better than nobility. Does that fat guy have such high taste?¡±


    After his sarcastic remark, Charles climbed the stairs to the lower levels of the ship, clearly the kitchen and living areas. He didn¡¯t bother to check those; if there was any chance of finding the sea chart, it would likely be in the captain¡¯s quarters.


    At first, he was cautious, fearing he might be caught, but after prying open several doors and finding no one, Charles let loose. He rummaged through boxes and cabinets quickly.


    In stark contrast to the quiet rooms, Charles¡¯s keen hearing picked up on the increasing chaos outside. He knew this was a critical moment; things were getting out of hand outside, and he had to find the sea chart before the ¡°King¡± returned.


    Just as Charles opened a drawer, he suddenly felt warmth on his neck, as if someone was leaning over him, blowing air.


    ¡°Swish!¡± He reflexively drew his knife and flipped backward, landing on the table.


    The disheveled room was empty.


    Confused, Charles slowly turned around and continued searching through the drawers.


    ¡°Creak~¡± A nearby wooden chair moved for no apparent reason.


    This time, Charles acted as if he hadn¡¯t heard, focusing on his task.


    Without warning, the door slammed shut, and the lock clicked loudly, trapping Charles inside the room.


    ¡°Oh? Is it haunted? In such a dangerous place, even ghosts dare to join in the fun??¡±


    Holding a drawer, Charles turned to look at the tightly closed door. He pulled out some explosives from his bag, lit the fuse, and threw it over.


    The explosives flew halfway before inexplicably curving back.


    With a swift motion, Charles sliced the bomb in half. In that instant, every sharp object in the room floated into the air, rapidly flying toward him.


    ¡°Thud thud thud!¡± These objects were blocked by the upturned wooden table. Charles pushed the table aside and lunged toward the door, quickly twisting his black blade around the lock. He burst through the door and into the opulent hallway.


    In that moment, the lavish ceramics in the corridor shattered, and sharp shards floated up.

 **Chapter 53: The Living Inside the Ship**

    Charles, feeling somewhat disheveled, was darting around inside the giant ship, sensing that the vessel had come alive. Everything seemed to be working against him, and any object with an aggressive intent seemed to want him dead. He finally understood why there were no guards around.


    He could feel that there were things he couldn¡¯t see, watching him indifferently from the shadows.


    In a moment of desperate flight, he thought to himself, ¡°This isn¡¯t going to work. No matter what those things are, I have to get rid of them.¡±


    After a sharp turn, he used the same trick again, leaping onto the wall and stabbing his knife into the surface, hanging like a fly in the corner. The floating shards below turned a corner and continued down the hallway.


    He waited until the fragments completely disappeared before jumping down, beads of sweat forming on his forehead. ¡°Good grief, that fat bastard not only keeps bugs but ghosts as well?¡±


    Just as he turned around, his body suddenly stiffened. In front of him stood a little girl in a gothic black dress.


    With silver hair and plump, rosy skin, along with a teardrop mole above her eye, she looked exceptionally cute. But encountering such a little girl in this environment only sent shivers down Charles''s spine.


    The eyes of the two, one big and one small, met. In an instant, Charles charged forward, pressing his black blade against her neck.


    When his hand covered the little girl¡¯s mouth, he felt a slight relief; it was warm¡ªshe was alive.


    ¡°Drip, drip.¡± Tears from the little girl fell onto Charles''s hand, her long eyelashes drooping, looking pitiful.


    ¡°Little sister, come here. Just tell me where your family¡¯s sea chart is, and I¡¯ll let you go.¡±


    Charles loosened his grip slightly, but the little girl remained silent, her expression sorrowful.


    After a brief moment of contemplation, he decided to hold her and continue moving forward. Judging by the girl¡¯s appearance, she was likely someone important to the ¡°King.¡± If he encountered those ghosts again, he might use her to threaten them.


    Just after Charles took a couple of steps, the girl began to wiggle her little feet in her shoes, seemingly wanting to get down.


    As Charles loosened his grip, the little girl jumped down and skipped ahead like a little deer.


    After passing through two flights of stairs, the girl opened a door and rushed inside. Just as Charles was about to follow, he saw her come back out, her little dress holding some red fruits.


    Was she trying to bribe him with food to let her go?This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    When Charles got a good look at the fruits, his pupils shrank to tiny dots. They weren¡¯t any fruits from the sea; they looked exactly like cherry tomatoes.


    He picked one up and asked the little girl, ¡°Do you eat these often?¡±


    Seeing her nod adorably made Charles¡¯s heart skip a beat.


    ¡°Bang!¡± A loud crash and a human scream came from below.


    After listening for a moment, the little girl put her finger to her lips and grabbed Charles¡¯s hand, pulling him forward quickly.


    Where is this girl taking me? Watching the back of her head, Charles slipped the cherry tomato into his pocket and bent slightly to follow her.


    The ship was enormous, with rooms stacked upon rooms, and Charles felt like he was getting dizzy from the twists and turns.


    ¡°Boom!!¡± Suddenly, the wall in front of them shattered, and the blood-soaked ¡°King¡± burst in, holding a human head¡ªGerald¡¯s head!


    The moment Charles saw the head, his face turned ashen. It was clear that his ally¡¯s plan had not only failed but had also taken too long.


    Just as Charles drew his weapon, ready to fight to the death, the ¡°King¡± showed a look of fear on his pudgy face. He collapsed to the ground, covering his face and letting out a beast-like wail.


    The little girl let go of Charles¡¯s hand and walked over. For the first time, her previously silent cherry-red lips slowly opened, revealing shark-like serrated teeth. ¡°You worthless fool! What are you doing? Someone has already broken in!!¡±


    A chandelier from above fell onto the ¡°King¡¯s¡± head, followed by a rusty rebar that shot out from the wall, piercing him completely. His wails grew even louder.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe this!¡± Charles turned and ran for his life. If he didn¡¯t, they might both end up dead.


    The girl¡¯s delicate fingers lifted slightly, and the rebar floated out of the ¡°King,¡± hovering in the air before striking his head. With a ¡°thud,¡± the ¡°King¡¯s¡± left eye was knocked out and fell to the ground.


    ¡°Grab him! I want him alive! If he escapes, you won¡¯t eat anything this month!!¡±


    Charles sprinted down the corridor, unable to believe that the little girl was even more ruthless than the ¡°King.¡±


    But he didn¡¯t have time to ponder this, as the ¡°King¡¯s¡± various bugs were already chasing after him from behind.


    Although Charles exerted all his strength, the insects were closing in rapidly. They were much faster than him, surpassing the limits of human speed.


    ¡°Creepy crawly.¡± Charles could already hear the sound of their joints twisting and their mandibles extending.


    Just as the insects prepared to leap, Charles¡¯s mind raced. He pulled a rivet from his chest, embedded in his flesh, and shot it toward the nearest light source.


    ¡°Clink, clink, clink!¡± The bulbs in the corridor shattered, plunging everything into darkness. The insects immediately became disoriented, unsure of where to attack.


    They couldn¡¯t see clearly, but Charles, with his night vision, could. He quickly drew his pistol and fired rapidly, blasting the grotesque heads of the insects, green ichor splattering everywhere.


    After temporarily escaping danger, Charles didn¡¯t dare linger. The ¡°King¡± was back, and the mission had failed. He needed to leave quickly.


    At every turn, Charles smashed the light bulbs, feeling safer in the darkness as he searched for an exit.


    Gradually, he heard a soft singing voice in his ear. The melody was beautiful, and Charles felt as if his bones had become lighter.


    But soon, the situation changed. He began to feel his hair growing longer, and the bones beneath his skin started to swell.


    Then, a more serious issue arose¡ªhis stomach suddenly twisted in pain. Charles shoved his fingers into his throat and gagged, vomiting.


    What came out wasn¡¯t the food he had eaten that morning, but writhing brown plant tendrils and mushrooms that were both wilting and sprouting.


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles stumbled to his feet, suddenly feeling an itch on the back of his hand. When he lifted it, dark green moss was growing rapidly.


    This singing seemed to have some kind of magical power, reviving everything around it. Charles knew that if he didn¡¯t find a way to stop this, his body would be completely consumed by whatever was growing inside him.

 **Chapter 54: The Sea Chart**

    The singing in his ears continued, and no matter how hard Charles pressed his hands against them, it was futile. His body was undergoing continuous changes; his hands had become deformed and swollen, resembling those of a gout patient.


    Struggling to stand, Charles looked around and rushed to a nearby cabinet in the corridor. He picked up two pieces of silverware and, using his black blade, quickly fashioned them into sharp silver spikes.


    Taking a deep breath, he gripped the two sharp spikes and forcefully pierced them into his ear canals.


    The unbearable pain of puncturing his eardrum caused Charles to kneel, but a hint of relief showed on his masked face. The singing ceased, and the transformation of his body stopped.


    After removing the moss that had grown from his skin, Charles continued moving forward.


    The immediate crisis had been averted, but navigating this giant ship was proving to be a challenge. The various corridors and rooms had completely disoriented him.


    ¡°Should I just blow a hole in the wall? But would the explosion attract those two?¡±


    As he hesitated, his feet suddenly stopped. His gaze fixated on a door sign that read: Captain¡¯s Quarters.


    Without a second thought, Charles pushed the door open. If there was any place likely to have the sea chart, it had to be here!


    The door swung open to reveal a massive wooden table, where the little girl was sitting, swinging her legs and singing something with a sinister smile.


    Extreme danger couldn''t stop Charles from glancing at the wall. There it was¡ªa sea chart, one that showed not only the usual areas but also a vast new territory!


    With a flick of his hand, he hurled the black blade at the little girl and dashed toward the sea chart.


    As he closed the distance, he could see more details on the chart. Just as he was trying to memorize it quickly, the black blade flew back and struck his face.


    Blood obscured Charles¡¯s vision, forcing him to halt his observations.


    After pulling the blade from his face and wiping away the blood, he found the little girl smiling brightly in front of him, her mouth moving as if she were saying something. But at this point, Charles was completely deaf.


    The corners of Charles¡¯s mouth turned up behind his mask. ¡°Actually, that fat guy isn¡¯t the King; you¡¯re the real controller of Sodom, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    With powers akin to telekinesis and that song that could animate everything, Charles didn¡¯t believe she was just a six or seven-year-old girl.Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    The little girl raised her hands, and Charles¡¯s body floated into the air.


    ¡°Crack!¡± Charles¡¯s left forearm twisted into a spiral form.


    The excruciating pain didn¡¯t distract Charles from the sea chart; he continued to record everything he could.


    A hint of anger crossed the little girl¡¯s face as she clenched her hands, twisting Charles¡¯s body into an exaggerated shape. It felt as if his bones had shattered, and he collapsed to the ground like a puddle of mud.


    At that moment, the blood-soaked ¡°King¡± burst in, panting heavily.


    Seeing Charles on the floor, the ¡°King¡± wore a look of brutality as he stomped toward him.


    But just as he bent down to grab Charles, the latter suddenly sprang up and dashed out the door like a cheetah.


    ¡°Roar! Didn¡¯t expect that, did you? I brought my mask and know jiu-jitsu! Come catch me, idiot!¡±


    After bursting out of the room, Charles immediately pulled out explosives, ignited them, and threw them behind him. The shockwave propelled him forward.


    Without looking back at the aftermath, Charles quickly emptied all the explosives from his pack and placed them in a corner of the wall.


    He had already memorized the sea chart! Now, all he had to do was escape, and the mission would be complete!


    ¡°Boom!¡± In an instant, the world spun as a huge hole was blown open in the ¡°King¡¯s¡± lair, revealing the slum-like metal buildings of Sodom.


    Ignoring the towering buildings, Charles leaped into the air.


    In mid-flight, his body rapidly expanded, transforming into a five-meter-tall giant bat that soared toward the harbor.


    From the gaping hole created by the explosion, the little girl¡¯s face turned ashen as she shouted, ¡°Go give the orders! Notify all pirates! Whoever kills him will earn 10 million echoes!¡±


    The disheveled ¡°King¡± nodded quickly and leaped out of the opening.


    Soon, Charles realized that the air was not safe. Halfway through his flight, all the cannons near Sodom turned to aim at him.


    ¡°Boom!¡± A cannonball shot toward him, and Charles narrowly dodged it, feeling the blast wave push him three meters away.


    With his wings folded, he flew low, skimming rooftops and ship decks to evade cannon fire.


    Although the cannon fire had ceased, other dangers soon followed.


    ¡°Rat-a-tat-tat!¡± A barrage of bullets rained down, puncturing several holes in Charles¡¯s left wing membrane.


    Looking down, he saw the pirates going wild, armed with various weapons, launching a frenzied assault on him.


    Seeing their faces flushed with excitement, Charles quickly deduced that the ¡°King¡± must have placed a massive bounty on his head.


    In addition to ordinary gunfire, unimaginable attacks rained down upon him.


    Fireballs, lightning bolts, and even some pirates who somehow managed to fly up were all targeting Charles.


    Under such relentless attacks, even with his agility, Charles began to accumulate injuries.


    A dum-dum bullet exploded in his lower body, creating a gaping wound, and an unprecedented fatigue washed over him. He felt he could barely hold on.


    Just seconds later, the chaos cleared, and all the pirates vanished, revealing a dock filled with ships.


    But before Charles could rejoice, a yellow blur leaped from the ground, crashing into him with a tremendous force.


    The impact was too much for his battered body, and he plummeted straight into the icy sea.


    In the dark water, Charles struggled to break free from the ¡°King¡¯s¡± grasp.


    Just as he began to make progress, dozens of centipede-like parasites burst from the ¡°King¡¯s¡± body, their barbed legs clinging to Charles and binding them together, staining the water red with their blood.


    In a frenzy of biting, the ¡°King¡¯s¡± decayed teeth shattered, revealing sharp black fangs. He resembled a ravenous beast, tearing off chunks of flesh as if he intended to swallow Charles whole.

 **Chapter 55: Escape**

    ¡°No! I¡¯m almost back to the surface! I absolutely will not die here!¡± Charles, in bat form, opened his gaping mouth, emitting a piercing sound wave that rippled through the water.


    The ¡°King¡± showed a hint of pain as his chubby hands reached toward Charles¡¯s mouth.


    In that instant, Charles transformed back into human form, causing the ¡°King¡¯s¡± parasites to detach.


    But at that moment, the ¡°King¡¯s¡± belly exploded open, and various grotesque parasites surged forth, plunging Charles back into danger.


    With no other choice, Charles transformed into a bat again and unleashed another sonic attack, freezing the waterborne parasites in place.


    There was an opportunity! Charles transformed back into human form and dove down into the water, attempting to escape.


    However, as soon as he dove, a massive mouth awaited him¡ªit was the ¡°King,¡± whose mouth was grotesquely stretched wide, distorting his face into a monstrous visage.


    This time, Charles did not flee. He had lost too much blood, and his head was starting to spin. He was out of strength.


    With a swing of his legs, Charles dove straight into the ¡°King¡¯s¡± mouth, and the tentacle ring activated, propping open the gaping maw.


    ¡°Die!¡± Violent bubbles erupted from Charles¡¯s mouth. He raised the black blade in his hand and executed a slicing motion.


    The blade pierced through the greasy skin, swiftly moving along the texture, and half of the ¡°King¡¯s¡± head was severed.


    Watching the bloated body sink into the dark seabed, Charles felt darkness closing in, his body succumbing to exhaustion. He was gravely injured.


    ¡°Whoosh!¡± A shadow shot out of the water¡ªa shark! It had been drawn by the scent of blood!


    The shark opened its fearsome jaws, its three rows of serrated teeth sinking into Charles¡¯s body, dragging him down into the depths of the sea.


    ¡°Captain! Captain!¡± Seeing the sea surface stained blood-red, Deep was anxiously pacing the deck.


    But the surface of the sea remained silent. After a few seconds, some dead parasites floated to the surface. Unable to wait any longer, Deep stripped off his shirt, clutched a dagger in his mouth, and prepared to jump into the water.


    Nearby, the silent bandage stopped him. He opened a bag on the deck, revealing a dozen faces filled with confusion and terror. Their mouths were tightly bound with gauze, and regardless of gender, they were all gaunt and ragged.


    After counting the number of people, the bandage pulled out a dagger and aimed it at his chest, slowly pressing the blade in. Crimson blood soaked through his bandages.If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    The other crew members of the Unicorn stood in silence, seemingly aware of what the first mate was about to do, but no one dared to intervene.


    The ship''s doctor, with his ugly face, displayed a hint of disgust, taking a swig from a metal flask before turning away.


    Suddenly, a series of knocks startled everyone. The second mate, Knona, rushed to the ship''s edge, poking his head over to look down, his face lighting up with joy.


    ¡°It¡¯s the captain! The captain is back! Doctor, hurry! He¡¯s badly injured!¡±


    As the crew members hurriedly pulled Charles from the water, the timid Lily was so frightened by the sight that she burst into tears.


    At this moment, Charles was a mess; his body was covered in gruesome wounds, his flesh washed pale by the seawater, and a gaping wound on his abdomen revealed his innards.


    Deep trembled as he tried to remove the mask from Charles¡¯s face, but his twisted forearm blocked him. ¡°Don¡¯t¡­ don¡¯t take it off¡­ I won¡¯t hold on¡­ just set sail first¡­¡±


    Excited, Knona nodded vigorously and quickly ran toward the cockpit.


    Ignoring the concerned voices of the surrounding crew, Charles turned to the sobbing Lily. ¡°Lily¡­ the journal¡­¡±


    By the time Lily¡¯s rat delivered the journal to Charles, he was already lying on the ship doctor¡¯s operating table.


    Charles took out a pen and, using the last of his strength, meticulously sketched the sea chart from memory. The moment he put down the pen, he lost consciousness.


    When Charles awoke again, he found himself wrapped like a mummy in his bed, and his previously deaf ears could faintly hear some sounds.


    Seeing the journal on the table beside him, a smile crept onto Charles¡¯s face as he thought, ¡°The sea chart is found. Next, I just need to find the island with the sky ladder to go home.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it really wasn¡¯t easy. I risked my life for this,¡± a teasing voice echoed in his mind.


    A chill ran from his tailbone to his brain, and Charles¡¯s trembling hand reached to his face, realizing he was not wearing the mask. He fell silent, and the room was eerily quiet.


    ¡°Why haven¡¯t you disappeared?¡± Charles managed to ask.


    Then his mouth opened again, but this time the tone was entirely different. ¡°Hey! Isn¡¯t this a coincidence? I was wondering why too!¡±


    Just then, the door swung open, and the ship¡¯s doctor entered. Charles quickly asked, ¡°How long have I been wearing the mask?¡±


    ¡°Since the surgery. It worked well; wearing it reduced your blood loss significantly.¡±


    A hint of pain crossed Charles¡¯s face beneath the bandages. Despite all his precautions, he ultimately failed to prevent 096 from generating a personality in his mind. 096 was far too dangerous.


    ¡°Buddy, you should thank me. If I hadn¡¯t taken off the mask while you were unconscious, our minds wouldn¡¯t just be playing mahjong¡ªwe might be playing basketball too.¡±


    ¡°Is it a good thing to have another person inside my body?¡±


    ¡°Look at what you¡¯re saying! What do you mean ¡®your body¡¯? We¡¯re just different personalities; we¡¯re both Gao Zhiming!¡±


    As Charles watched himself arguing with himself, the doctor¡¯s face showed confusion. Is this guy having a mental breakdown? He seems to only have external injuries, right?


    As their argument intensified, the doctor approached Charles with a metal syringe and injected it into his arm.


    ¡°Old man, what¡¯s in this?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°A sedative. First, you need to recover from your physical injuries; we¡¯ll deal with the mental issues later.¡±


    The next moment, Charles rolled his eyes, and both personalities in his mind lost consciousness simultaneously.


    When he awoke again, he had no idea how much time had passed, but the wounds on his body began to itch.


    Taking a slow breath, Charles fell silent for a few seconds before speaking in his mind, ¡°Hey, let¡¯s have a discussion.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not ¡®Hey¡¯; I¡¯m Chu Yuxuan.¡±


    ¡°How long are you going to keep this up!¡±


    ¡°Oh, come on, just a little joke! Why are you so anxious? You go ahead, you go ahead.¡±

 **Chapter 56: Richard**

    Hearing the nonchalant tone from the other side, Charles struggled to suppress his rising irritation. Without saying another word, he picked up his revolver and fired a shot at the window.


    ¡°What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Call the doctor. Let¡¯s see if he has any solutions for this situation.¡±


    Upon hearing this, Richard¡¯s tone immediately turned tense. ¡°I¡¯m telling you, don¡¯t even think about erasing me. I have your memories too! If you try any tricks, we¡¯ll both go down together.¡±


    Charles suddenly pressed the gun against his chin, just as the doctor walked in.


    Faced with a captain contemplating suicide, the doctor remained remarkably indifferent. ¡°If you want to kill yourself, at least tell me what you promised before you go.¡±


    ¡°That can wait. I have a problem here,¡± Charles explained the emergence of another personality within him in detail.


    ¡°Split personalities, how fascinating,¡± the doctor said, observing Charles with the keen eyes of a researcher.


    ¡°Is there a solution?¡±


    ¡°Doctor, I think this is fine. You can leave now.¡±


    The two personalities spoke in conflicting tones.


    After a few seconds, the seemingly excited doctor pulled a clown mask from his coat pocket. ¡°Is this what you mean?¡±


    Seeing Charles nod, the doctor said nothing and turned to leave.


    As the door closed, Richard chimed in, ¡°Forget it. The old man doesn¡¯t seem reliable; this is a dead end.¡±


    Taking a deep breath, Charles realized that there was no point in discussing anything further. Since he couldn''t shake Richard off for now, they would have to negotiate.


    ¡°First, our goals are the same: we both want to return to the surface. In critical moments, I¡¯ll take the lead. Don¡¯t hold me back.¡±


    ¡°Why should you take the lead? I¡¯m Gao Zhiming too.¡±


    ¡°Because you¡¯re too impulsive. If it weren¡¯t for you, we might not have made it back from the third lab.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s rich! If I hadn¡¯t gone in and grabbed so many relics, our strength wouldn¡¯t have increased so quickly! That¡¯s all my doing!¡±


    ¡°You were created by 096! I¡¯m the original!¡±


    ¡°Spare me! I have your memories too. You¡¯re just a slightly more frequent twin!¡±


    The two personalities began to argue again, escalating to the point of physical confrontation. Eventually, they reached a long-awaited agreement for peaceful coexistence.


    They not only established a division for controlling the body but also set rules for other matters so that they wouldn¡¯t fall into crisis due to disagreements during critical moments.Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there.


    Looking at the dense list of regulations in the notebook, the Charles controlled by Richard pouted.


    ¡°Why write so much useless stuff? You didn¡¯t even mention the most important thing. What if Anna decides to come back one day? Are we supposed to let her wear a mask and duplicate it? Can she even wear a mask in that state?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t mention her. She¡¯s not coming back,¡± Charles said, closing the notebook and starting to unwrap the bandages from his face.


    ¡°Cut it out, stop pretending with yourself.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s my time now. Be quiet.¡±


    ¡°Wait, we haven¡¯t even decided on names yet. We can¡¯t both be called Charles. Let¡¯s sort that out first. I refuse to be called ¡®Number Two.¡¯¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Number One, you¡¯re Number Two.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s so lame! Hold on, let me think of a cool name for myself... How about Richard?¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t respond. He picked up the notebook and tossed it toward the table, and it landed perfectly upright.


    Surprised, Charles stared at his hands. How did I do that?


    Suddenly, an idea struck him. He pulled a rivet from his skin and flicked it at the wall, hitting a small bug with precision.


    When he quickly extinguished the oil lamp on the table, he found that he could see clearly in the pitch-black environment.


    Charles didn¡¯t know if this was a good or bad thing. Because of his split personality, he could now maintain 096¡¯s physical abilities around the clock.


    ¡°Wow! This is definitely a good thing, buddy! We¡¯re unstoppable now!¡±


    Hearing the voice in his head again, Charles thought that if he had a choice, he would rather not have this ¡°good thing.¡±


    ¡°Bang!¡± The door swung open, and the doctor returned shortly after, taking down an empty IV bag and replacing it with a new one. ¡°Lie down. Time for your medication.¡±


    ¡°What about my relics?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t rush. Let me experiment for a while. Psychology is a complex field; maybe I can find a solution.¡±


    ¡°When will my injuries fully heal?¡±


    ¡°Two months.¡±


    ¡°Can¡¯t you speed it up?¡±


    ¡°No! Do you have any idea how severe your injuries are? Two months is already a significant reduction. Just so you know, to save your life, I used some strong drugs, and because of the side effects, you might not live past 40.¡±


    Upon hearing this shocking news, Richard immediately took over the conversation. ¡°Are you insane? Just for some injuries, you¡¯re sacrificing half my lifespan?¡±


    ¡°Half a lifespan? If I hadn¡¯t saved you, would you even have half a lifespan left? If someone else were your doctor, you¡¯d be dead by now!¡±


    Charles accepted this news much faster than he had accepted the presence of another personality.


    He seized Richard¡¯s chance to speak. ¡°Doctor, how long have we been away from Sodom?¡±


    ¡°About ten days. To avoid pirates, we¡¯re taking a detour back to Coral Island,¡± the doctor said before turning to leave.


    Feeling the dull ache from his wounds, Charles knew his body needed rest, but there was still one thing he needed to resolve.


    He shakily jumped off the bed and opened the notebook, staring at the sea chart he had drawn. He compared it with the previous chart.


    ¡°This point is England, and this is where? The angle between the two islands leads straight to that sunlit sea. Comparing them, the long-held song of the Deep Sea is wrong; the land of light isn¡¯t in the north; it¡¯s in the south.¡± Charles¡¯s voice was filled with determination.


    On the chart, he had completely filled in the dark sea area to the south, accurately placing pins to symbolize the islands.


    In the newly added sea area, the islands dotted the landscape like stars in the sky, with significant gaps between them.


    ¡°Buddy, we¡¯ve got a problem. Look at the distance between those farthest islands and the human habitats of the Deep Sea. Given the capacity of the Unicorn, we¡¯ll run out of fuel halfway there.¡±


    ¡°The pirates from Sodom can go, so can we. There must be supply points between the islands; we just need to find them, and then we can explore the other islands.¡±


    ¡°Alright, finally a way home! Once we get out, I¡¯ll write a book about this. I¡¯ve even thought of a title: ¡®Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Deep Sea.¡¯ It¡¯s bound to be a hit!¡±


    Charles lay back down, and even simple movements caused the bandages on him to start seeping blood again.


    ¡°None of this matters. I just want to go home.¡±


    ¡°Yeah, home... It¡¯s been eight years. You think my sister has grown up by now?¡±


    As Richard continued to ramble on, Charles slowly closed his eyes.

 **Chapter 57: Margaret**

    Margaret woke up frozen, her disheveled hair framing her face as she opened her eyes to the unchanged surroundings of the unfamiliar deck.


    At the helm, a figure wrapped in bandages was steering the ship. The sight of that person sent a shiver of fear through her; he was the one who had bought them.


    She had thought she had finally escaped hell and would return home, only to realize that he had purchased them for sacrifice. If their captain hadn¡¯t returned on his own, she might have already been sunk to the depths of the sea.


    Her father was right; there were no good people at sea. They had no sense of law, treating human lives like fish.


    ¡°Father, where are you? Please save me! If you can get me out of here, I promise I¡¯ll stay on the island forever and never leave!¡± Tears streamed down Margaret¡¯s face as she thought of her father.


    Just then, she heard a commotion; the sailors began washing the deck, their voices drifting into her ears.


    ¡°Are they just going to leave them here? Coral Island doesn¡¯t allow slave trading. Why are we bringing them back? We might as well throw them overboard.¡±


    At this, the slaves huddled together in fear.


    ¡°The first mate bought them himself. They¡¯re his property. Do you dare throw them away?¡±


    ¡°Who would dare? Now, besides the captain, who would risk angering him? If he¡¯s not happy, he might sacrifice me instead.¡±


    ¡°Enough chatter! Can¡¯t you see he¡¯s up there steering? If he hears you, you won¡¯t have a good end.¡±


    As the sailors¡¯ boots approached, Margaret quickly shrank her head into the filthy sack.


    ¡°Bang!¡± A wet mop hit the slaves. ¡°Are you blind? Can¡¯t you see the master is cleaning? Get to the other side!¡±


    The slaves at the bow scrambled to their feet, scurrying away like mice.


    Just as Margaret stood up to follow the others, a tall sailor stopped her out of curiosity. His thick fingers pinched her chin, lifting her face.


    ¡°Look at this one; she¡¯s not bad-looking.¡±


    As three sailors surrounded her, Margaret trembled all over, her eyes filled with fear as she desperately tried to retreat, but there was nowhere to hide against the ship''s edge.


    A bucket of water was splashed over her, washing away the mud on her face.


    With skin as white as milk, a delicate face, and large eyes framed by long lashes, Margaret¡¯s hidden beauty was suddenly revealed.


    The sailors'' breaths quickened at the sight of her. They had been at sea too long, pent-up with desire.


    Under the aggressive gazes of the three pairs of eyes, terrified, Margaret screamed and struggled. She had seen what happened to other girls in Sodom.Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.


    ¡°Get away from me! I¡¯m the daughter of the governor of He Fang! You can¡¯t treat me like this! Father, help me! Waaaah!¡±


    ¡°What are you doing?¡± A weary voice came from behind. The three sailors shivered and quickly picked up the mop, standing in a line. ¡°Reporting to the captain! We¡¯re cleaning the deck!¡±


    ¡°How did slaves get on my ship?¡±


    ¡°Reporting to the captain, the first mate bought them for 4000 echoes each, intending to use them for a sacrifice to save you!¡±


    Margaret looked at the newcomer¡ªa young man in a deep blue captain¡¯s uniform, with a scar running diagonally across his face, adding a fierce look to his features.


    Seeing the trembling sailors beside him, Margaret rushed toward the young man, tears in her eyes. ¡°Please save me! I want to go home! I¡¯ll never come back to the sea!¡±


    Before she could finish, she felt an invisible force wrap around her, pushing her to the ground.


    As she struggled to sit up, she found herself face to face with the young man. Something stirred within her as she looked into his eyes.


    ¡°You say you¡¯re the daughter of the governor of He Fang? What proof do you have?¡±


    His question jolted Margaret back to reality. She fumbled in her pocket and pulled out a fishbone token. ¡°This was given to me by my father. If you give this to him, he¡¯ll know I¡¯m here!¡±


    Watching the young man take the token, Margaret anxiously awaited his response; her life hung in the balance.


    At that moment, she noticed something chilling¡ªthe young man was looking at her with one eye while the other was focused on the token.


    Terrified, Margaret hugged herself tightly, biting her lip.


    ¡°How did you escape?¡± The sudden question startled her.


    ¡°I was captured and held for a long time, but one night, a sister saved me. I don¡¯t know who she was; she wore clothes like mine and looked like me.¡±


    As she spoke, she noticed the young man frowning, seemingly lost in thought.


    Desperately, she pleaded again, ¡°Sir, can you take me back? If you return me, my father will reward you handsomely.¡±


    ¡°Sure, I¡¯ve been waiting for you to say that. Now I have funding for my adventure.¡±


    Confused, Margaret was taken to wash and change into loose clothing.


    When she emerged from the bathing area, her true beauty was on display, and she felt the dark gazes of the men on the ship.


    Instinctively, she quickened her pace back to the young man. No matter how cold he was, being near him made her feel safe.


    ¡°Can you write?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Good, write a letter to your father.¡±


    Joy blossomed on Margaret¡¯s face; she thought she had found a good person. But the second half of the young man¡¯s statement sent a chill down her spine.


    ¡°Just tell him a kind-hearted person saved you, and you promised to give me 500,000 echoes as a reward.¡±


    Margaret took the pen and began to write. No matter what, she was going home, back to that place filled with light.


    After writing, she respectfully handed the letter to the young man. When he told her to leave, a sense of fear crept over her.


    ¡°Sir¡­ can I stay by your side?¡± She didn¡¯t know who he was, but she felt safe with him.


    At that moment, her stomach growled in protest. Embarrassed, she lowered her head at the young man¡¯s glance.


    In the mess hall, faced with various simple foods, Margaret almost cried. Since her capture, she hadn¡¯t eaten this well.


    Suddenly, an idea struck her. She glanced at the young man beside her and discreetly stuffed some bread into her pocket.


    After the meal, Margaret sneaked onto the deck and quickly pulled out the food from her pocket. The starving slaves rushed to grab what they could.


    Don¡¯t expect the sailors to have treated them well; surviving was a blessing.


    ¡°Why are you giving them food?¡± A voice suddenly appeared behind her. She turned around to see the captain.


    ¡°Because being hungry feels terrible. I¡¯m full, but they¡¯re still starving.¡±


    ¡°If you ask your father for more money, I can make sure they eat better.¡±


    ¡°Really? Sir, you¡¯re such a good person!¡± Margaret exclaimed, jumping with excitement.


    ¡°A good person? Ha, maybe.¡±


    Just as Margaret felt a surge of happiness, thinking no one would go hungry again, she suddenly saw a bright spot on the sea.


    The light approached rapidly; it was a massive ship nearly a hundred meters long, adorned with a huge white triangle on its hull.

 ** Chapter 58: Another Deal**

    The sound of a horn echoed as a steamship, slightly larger than the Unicorn, approached.


    Seeing the white triangle insignia on the ship, Charles immediately recognized the identity of the newcomers.


    Before long, a plank was laid between the two vessels, and a nervous Kader hurried across it. ¡°Where¡¯s the sea chart? Did you find it?¡±


    When Charles nodded, Kader¡¯s face lit up with joy. ¡°By the sun god¡¯s blessing! After all these years, we¡¯ve finally found the Land of Light! Show it to me!¡±


    Charles remained silent, watching the excited old man with no intention of retrieving the chart.


    ¡°Captain Charles! What are you waiting for? Hurry and get the chart!¡± Kader grew increasingly anxious.


    ¡°What right do you have to see it? That night, it was because your people didn¡¯t act that Gerald fell so quickly. Everything you said was a lie, wasn¡¯t it? Your goal was to have us do your bidding while you risked nothing. A clever scheme.¡±


    Kader¡¯s expression shifted rapidly before he sighed in resignation. ¡°I really did send people; you have to believe me.¡±


    ¡°Do you think I¡¯m a fool? I have a vampire among my crew, and I specifically instructed him to turn into a bat and stay above Sodom until the plan was over. He never saw any followers of the Light emerge!¡±


    Charles looked at Kader with disdain. He had considered that Gerald might face unexpected challenges, but he never imagined Kader would be the one to hold back. Truly, one should not judge by appearances.


    ¡°Are you going to give it to me or not?¡± Kader¡¯s previously amiable demeanor vanished, replaced by a menacing glare.


    ¡°Oh? Do you want to make a move?¡± Charles raised a finger, and the bandaged helmsman immediately sounded the horn. The crew of the Unicorn poured out, weapons in hand.


    The atmosphere became tense, with cannons on both ships turning to face each other, and the followers of the sun god also brandishing their weapons.


    ¡°Even though I¡¯m still heavily injured, I can still kill you,¡± Charles declared, removing his captain¡¯s coat and revealing a black blade that had somehow appeared in his hand.


    Kader¡¯s expression changed, but he sighed in resignation. ¡°Of course my followers were disguised! If they went out openly, would I still be in Sodom? What do you want in exchange for the chart?¡±


    ¡°Simple. You must compensate me for my losses. Because of you, I nearly died in Sodom.¡±


    Kader waved his hand, and the cannons slowly turned away. ¡°What do you want? Relics? Echoes? Or special skills that can enhance power?¡±This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ¡°Help me kill Sonny.¡±


    ¡°Are you crazy? He¡¯s one of our own! How can you ask me to do that?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t act so familiar. You said yourself you¡¯re from the New Church and he¡¯s from the Old Church. You don¡¯t know him at all. Besides, he wanted to hire me to kill you back on Coral Island.¡±


    ¡°Fine! I agree! Just show me the chart!¡± Kader¡¯s face flushed with excitement.


    Charles remained silent, a knowing smile on his face. He had been fooled once; he wouldn¡¯t be fooled again.


    ¡°If you don¡¯t show it to me now, how do I know you¡¯re not lying? Maybe you never even found the chart!¡± Kader shouted in anger.


    Charles was too lazy to argue further and turned to walk toward the cabin. ¡°Bring me Sonny¡¯s head, or you won¡¯t get the chart. Of course, you could also try to seize it by force and see if you can take it faster than I can destroy it.¡±


    As he entered the cabin, listening to the sound of the waves fading away, a smirk appeared on Charles¡¯s lips. Kader had tacitly accepted this deal.


    Charles had been haunted by Sonny¡¯s ambush. Since they dared to set a trap for him, he wouldn¡¯t hesitate to return the favor when the opportunity arose.


    ¡°Buddy, this is a great opportunity; we could extort a hefty sum from him. This deal is a massive loss.¡±


    Hearing the voice in his mind, Charles shook his head. ¡°No, Sonny must die. The upcoming period is crucial for finding the surface entrance. If he¡¯s alive, he¡¯ll eventually ruin our plans.¡±


    ¡°And¡­¡± Charles paused, turning to look at the girl who had just entered. ¡°And as long as it¡¯s real, funding won¡¯t be an issue.¡±


    After saying this, Charles began to undress, startling Margaret, who instinctively wanted to flee. But remembering the sailors¡¯ gazes outside, she hesitated, her hand gripping the door latch.


    ¡°Don¡¯t just stand there; come over and apply the medicine.¡±


    Hearing this, Margaret trembled as she moved closer. When she saw the wide, gaping wounds on his back, she gasped.


    The wounds, forcibly pulled together by metal, were seeping blood, and the grotesque scars covered almost his entire body, looking horrifying.


    Margaret couldn¡¯t imagine how painful such severe injuries must be. She felt that even one of those scars could take her life.


    ¡°Don¡¯t just stand there; wipe the blood off first, then apply the medicine along the wounds,¡± Charles said, handing her a bottle of potion.


    Such tasks were usually for a doctor, but his rough hands were anything but gentle; applying the medicine felt like torture.


    As her hands touched his firm back, Margaret¡¯s face flushed, her heart racing like a startled deer.


    ¡°You¡¯re the daughter of the governor of He Fang. How did you end up captured by pirates?¡±


    The girl¡¯s hand trembled slightly. ¡°I read some novels¡­ They say adventures at sea are fun and exciting, so I sneaked out. It turns out it¡¯s all a lie¡­¡±


    ¡°You had a life that others could only dream of, yet you threw it away.¡±


    ¡°Now I know the sea is too dangerous. I just want to go back and never return. There are no good people at sea! Sir, I¡¯m not talking about you; you¡¯re a good person.¡±


    A bitter smile appeared on Charles¡¯s face. ¡°You¡¯re right; there are no good people at sea. Don¡¯t come back again. Keep applying the medicine.¡±


    Time passed quickly at sea. When Charles and the others returned to Coral Island, a month had already passed. By then, his injuries had mostly healed, and he could move without bleeding profusely.


    The port area of Coral Island remained the same¡ªchaotic and dark. Walking through the muddy, foul-smelling streets, Margaret instinctively leaned closer to him.


    Her soft body pressed against him, but Charles remained unmoved. Compared to the 500,000 echoes, he found the latter far more enticing.


    After settling the girl in a room next to his inn, Charles had just returned to his room when he heard a heavy knock on the door.


    Standing outside was the doctor, his ugly face unusually devoid of the usual madness and flamboyance. His lips were tightly pressed together, looking somewhat nervous, and he held a dead phone in his hand.

 **Chapter 59: The Doctors Device**

    ¡°Can you tell me everything about this device now?¡± the doctor asked, his voice low.


    Charles nodded and stepped aside to let him in. ¡°Please, come in.¡±


    Facing the doctor, Charles slowly began to explain everything he knew about the phone. The doctor listened in silence, rubbing the surface of the device with his good hand.


    ¡°This thing allows communication, entertainment, and work. On the surface, I can¡¯t live a day without it¡­¡±


    As he spoke, Charles felt as if he was transported back to a peaceful environment. He hadn¡¯t realized how beautiful his previous life was until he arrived in this chaotic sea of turmoil.


    ¡°So, this device is used for communication, right? Like a telegraph?¡± the doctor asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s one way to think about it.¡±


    After a pause, the doctor said, ¡°Actually, I used to have something like that.¡±


    Charles nearly choked on his drink at this unexpected revelation. He had guessed correctly¡ªthis man really did have a phone!


    The doctor pulled aside his filthy white coat, which was so dirty it was almost unrecognizable, and produced a square object wrapped in cloth.


    When Charles saw what was inside, he stood up in shock. It was a black device resembling a tablet. The back cover was open, exposing a green circuit board.


    Seeing this object that looked completely out of place in the sea world, he hurriedly asked, ¡°Is this yours? Are you also from the surface? When did you come down?¡±


    Charles¡¯s first reaction was that this man had fallen like he did.


    ¡°This isn¡¯t mine; it belonged to my great-grandfather,¡± the doctor replied, gazing at the tablet with a look of nostalgia on his ugly face. ¡°I know nothing about him. He died when I was young, and all he left me was this.¡±


    ¡°My father told me to take good care of it, but he never explained what it was. It¡¯s been a mystery to me; I¡¯ve asked many people, but no one knows.¡±


    ¡°Could it be that his great-grandfather came through like I did?¡± Charles quickly dismissed that thought. The doctor was old, and his great-grandfather must be even older. The invention of tablets and phones was relatively recent; it was impossible for them to have arrived at the same time.


    With that in mind, Charles took the tablet and examined it closely. He soon noticed the differences: compared to modern devices, this tablet was clearly bulky and heavy.


    Weighing two pounds, Charles could tell this device was definitely not from the surface. Any manufacturer that produced such a tablet would go bankrupt in no time.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    ¡°Can you fix this?¡± the doctor asked, his gaze fixed on the tablet. ¡°I doubt I¡¯ll have descendants to pass it on to. I just want to know what my great-grandfather wanted his descendants to keep safe.¡±


    ¡°Sorry, I can¡¯t help you with that,¡± Charles replied. He had no expertise in repairing electronic devices.


    ¡°You said that as long as it has power, this black mirror can light up. Does that mean if we give it power, it will work?¡±


    ¡°While I don¡¯t know the voltage used on Coral Island, I can guarantee it won¡¯t match your tablet. A reckless attempt could easily damage it.¡±


    The doctor¡¯s face showed a hint of frustration.


    At this moment, Charles was thinking even deeper. If this device wasn¡¯t from the surface, it was evidently created by humans from the sea. If their past technology could produce tablets, why was the current technology in the sea still at an 18th-19th century level? It didn¡¯t add up.


    This thought led him to recall the island with the third laboratory. If anyone in the sea had the capability to create tablets, it would be the people from the third laboratory, especially since they had even implemented fingerprint recognition.


    Could the doctor¡¯s great-grandfather have been a worker at that laboratory?


    But then the same question loomed over Charles: those humans possessed advanced technology and numerous powerful relics. Where had they all gone? The mysteries in Charles''s mind multiplied.


    ¡°Regardless, I must thank you. I finally understand what my great-grandfather left behind. I will try to make it light up. Our agreement still stands,¡± the doctor said, taking the tablet and heading for the door.


    As the doctor opened the door, he startled Margaret, who had been eavesdropping. She quickly ran behind Charles, peeking out timidly.


    The doctor turned back to Charles. ¡°Do you want me to make her forget what she just heard? I can do that.¡±


    ¡°Forget it; it doesn¡¯t matter.¡±


    Charles had shared his story about coming from the surface with everyone he met, but no one believed him. When he saw that the Sun God¡¯s followers imagined the sun as a triangle, he understood completely: unless he presented the facts, they would never believe him. Humans could be incredibly foolish; they only believed what they wanted to believe.


    The doctor turned and limped down the dim corridor toward the stairs.


    Margaret, looking a bit uneasy, said, ¡°I¡¯m sorry. I didn¡¯t mean to eavesdrop; I thought it was my father coming.¡±


    ¡°Not yet. Your belongings and your letter have been sent to the right place. They won¡¯t arrive for at least half a month.¡±


    After hesitating for a moment, Margaret lowered her head and tapped her toes against the floor. ¡°Sir, can I stay in this room? It¡¯s so dark in the other one, and I¡¯m a bit scared¡­¡±


    ¡°Do as you wish, but stay quiet,¡± Charles replied, pulling out his journal to begin writing his sailing diary.


    Watching the young man write, Margaret¡¯s face gradually flushed.


    Compared to his return to the island, Charles preferred life at sea. Although it was dangerous and tough, he felt he was making progress toward his goals. Staying on the island felt like wasting time.


    Now that he had the sea chart and a ship, he still couldn¡¯t leave. First, his injuries hadn¡¯t fully healed, and second, he needed Sonny¡¯s head and the 500,000 echoes.


    In the following days, Margaret spent a brief time with Charles. She lived next door, and any attempt to escape would be reported by the mice.


    However, the girl didn¡¯t try to escape. Instead, as time passed, she began to enjoy this life and subtly sought to stay by Charles¡¯s side.


    Yet, this peaceful time wouldn¡¯t last long. One morning, when Charles saw the governor¡¯s patrol ship driving fishing boats away from the sea, he knew something was about to happen.


    The gates between the port area and the inner city rarely opened, but today, a luxurious convoy emerged.


    With his keen eyesight, Charles recognized the exceptionally flamboyantly made-up man inside one of the carriages. He had seen that face in the newspapers; it was Governor Nico of Coral Island.

 **Chapter 60: The Governor**

    Even Charles, who didn''t often keep up with current events, had heard plenty of gossip about the new governor. Overall, this governor was a man who preferred the company of other men. While that wasn''t particularly scandalous, his brazen decision to marry six husbands was pushing it a bit too far.


    Fortunately, aside from his peculiarities, he seemed to take his responsibilities for Coral Island¡¯s administration and the welfare of its citizens seriously, leading to a relatively positive reputation among the islanders.


    The golden car pulled up beside the dock, and the governor did not exit, as if he were waiting for something.


    At that moment, a line of police officers in black uniforms poured out, numbering nearly a thousand. They swiftly began to disperse the crowd at the dock.


    Laborers moving cargo and fish merchants were quickly driven away, leaving the once-bustling dock eerily quiet.


    When the dark coastline suddenly lit up with a bright light, Charles realized who the governor had been waiting for.


    One ship, two ships, three ships¡ªthree massive steamships, each nearly the size of the Titanic, approached the shore, blaring their deafening horns, creating an overwhelming sense of pressure.


    Margaret, standing by the window, became ecstatic upon seeing the crossed flags of rifles and cannons on the ships. ¡°Mr. Charles! That¡¯s my father¡¯s ship! He¡¯s come to get me! I can go home!!¡±


    Nico, draped in a fluffy white cloak, stepped out of the car and smiled as he watched the colossal ships draw closer. He clapped his hands, and nearly ten armed warships positioned their cannons toward the three giant vessels.


    The massive steamships were stuck outside the harbor, unable to approach further, while the sailors aboard signaled frantically with flags, but the warships remained unyielding, using their show of force to prevent passage.


    ¡°Boom!¡± A cannon fired in the distance, and a dark shape shot toward the dock.


    As the object drew near, Charles¡¯s eyes widened in shock. It wasn¡¯t a cannonball; it was a man¡ªa stout figure with a big belly and a pair of bushy mustaches.


    He was slammed to the ground by the tremendous impact, only to bounce back up and stand firm as if nothing had happened.


    ¡°Indeed, no governor is an easy opponent; he uses his body as a cannonball,¡± Charles thought, astonished.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go. We need to get closer,¡± he said, grabbing the girl beside him and leaping down from the window onto the adjacent rooftop, sprinting toward the dock over chimneys and tiles.


    ¡°Nico! What do you mean by this?!¡± Daniel shouted angrily at the governor of Coral Island, completely ignoring the guns raised around him.


    Hearing the furious shout of the island¡¯s governor, Nico casually trimmed his long nails with a shiny golden nail file.


    ¡°You brought three Royal Giants to someone else''s island. What do you think it means?¡±


    ¡°I told you in the telegram!! I¡¯m here to find my daughter!¡± Daniel¡¯s expression was that of an enraged lion.The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    ¡°Hmph~ Six years ago, you said the same thing to young Arthur, and look what happened to his island.¡±


    The urgent whistle of the police interrupted their argument, causing both men to turn their heads toward the sound.


    A young man with a diagonal scar on his face and black hair was leaping between rooftops like a monkey, accompanied by a girl, swiftly reaching the two men.


    Seeing the suspicious figure approaching the governor, the nearby police began to draw their guns.


    ¡°Father!¡± Margaret exclaimed, wanting to rush toward the distance, but Charles held her back.


    Nico blinked his heavily made-up eyes. ¡°Everyone, lower your weapons. I seem to have a faint recollection of this handsome young man.¡±


    ¡°You bastard! You¡¯re the one who kidnapped my daughter!¡± Daniel, the island governor, clenched his fists in anger, ready to charge.


    ¡°Father, it¡¯s not what you think! Mr. Charles is a good person; he saved me,¡± Margaret quickly explained.


    After hearing his daughter¡¯s account, Daniel shot a cold glance at Charles. ¡°If it¡¯s a misunderstanding, then hurry and let my daughter go!¡±


    Before Charles could respond, Margaret reminded him, ¡°Father, don¡¯t forget! You promised Mr. Charles the reward of 500,000 echoes!¡±


    Faced with his daughter¡¯s reminder, Daniel¡¯s thick lips quivered, and he ultimately said nothing. He pulled out a check from his pocket, quickly filled it out, and threw it down on the ground.


    As the check fell, Charles raised his hand, and it flew straight to him.


    ¡°Father!¡± Margaret rushed forward, hugging Daniel¡¯s belly, creating a comical scene with their contrasting sizes.


    ¡°How is it? Did you suffer any grievances? Tell your father, and I¡¯ll take revenge for you!¡± The governor anxiously examined his daughter.


    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine. It¡¯s all thanks to Mr. Charles; he saved me,¡± she replied.


    Daniel shot Charles a hostile look, then yanked his daughter¡¯s hand and walked toward the sea. ¡°Let¡¯s go home. Your mother has been crying her eyes out for you.¡±


    ¡°Wait, I want to say a few words to Mr. Charles.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s there to say to that kind of person? Let¡¯s go home!¡± Without waiting for his daughter to protest further, Daniel turned and walked away, dragging her along.


    Under everyone¡¯s gaze, the governor stepped onto the water¡¯s surface, heading toward the distant giant ship.


    Margaret, resting on her father¡¯s shoulder, looked back longingly at the young man on the dock. She had hoped he would say something to her, but he remained silent.


    Watching his calm expression, memories of their time together flooded her mind.


    She suddenly thought of persuading her father to let her stay a little longer, but she ultimately kept quiet.


    ¡°Mr. Charles! Goodbye! I will send you a telegram!¡± Tears streamed down the girl¡¯s cheeks.


    Upon hearing this, Daniel¡¯s expression darkened, and he quickened his pace.


    ¡°Smart move, managing to extort Daniel¡¯s money, but your heart isn¡¯t dark enough. If I had his daughter, the price would be much higher,¡± Nico leaned closer to the young man, the strong scent of his perfume wafting toward Charles.


    Charles silently took a step back. ¡°Your Excellency, you jest. For someone like me, 500,000 echoes is more than enough.¡±


    The 500,000 echoes were merely a way to irritate him; if he were to ask for a higher price, it could easily cost him his life.


    Nico gazed at the young man with interest. ¡°So you¡¯re the one who caused a stir in Sodom? Made the ¡®King¡¯ suffer a bit?¡±


    Charles¡¯s heart stirred. The governor was well-informed; he had learned about that incident quickly. ¡°Yes, I killed the ¡®King.¡¯¡±


    But Nico¡¯s next words caught Charles off guard.


    ¡°No, you couldn¡¯t have killed him. If he could be killed so easily, he wouldn¡¯t be the ¡®King¡¯ of Sodom. As far as I know, no one in the entire sea can kill him.¡±


    Charles recalled the body sinking to the seabed, his heart racing. ¡°Half of his head was severed, and he still didn¡¯t die? What on earth is that man?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re quite impressive. If you have time, come visit me at the center of my island. We can get to know each other better,¡± Nico said, turning toward his golden car.


    Charles firmly rejected the idea in his mind. He had no intention of becoming this man¡¯s seventh husband.


    Looking at the 500,000 echo check in his hand, Charles let out a sigh. This matter seemed to have come to a close. With this money, he wouldn¡¯t have to worry about funding for the time being.


    He tucked the check into his pocket, glanced around, and called out to a nearby white rat watching the spectacle. ¡°Lily, gather the crew. The vacation is over; it¡¯s time to set sail.¡±

 **Chapter 61: "Stars"**

    ¡°Damn it, this guy is such a scammer! I can''t even control it! I¡¯m dead again!¡± The boy angrily threw his phone onto the couch.


    The girl watching TV beside him scoffed, ¡°You¡¯re the one who¡¯s a scammer, you noob.¡±


    Just then, the television showed a large gorilla pounding its chest, prompting the boy to pout at the screen. ¡°Look, you¡¯re on TV again.¡±


    The girl furiously grabbed a nearby cushion and hurled it at him. ¡°Gao Zhiming!! Go die!!¡± The two siblings immediately began to wrestle.


    ¡°Enough already! Come eat!¡± A woman¡¯s voice from the adjacent room interrupted their playful brawl.


    At the dining table, the woman, wearing an apron, turned to her son and said, ¡°You¡¯re old enough now; can¡¯t you give your sister a break?¡±


    ¡°Why should I? When we were kids, she could beat me up. She didn¡¯t give me a break!¡± Gao Zhiming retorted.


    The girl, infuriated, lifted her right foot and kicked toward him, and he quickly retaliated.


    Seeing the commotion under the table escalate, the woman shook her head and stopped trying to mediate. Her two children had been fighting since they were little; she was used to it.


    After taking a few bites, she addressed her son again, ¡°Why did you insist on taking a boat to hang out with your classmates instead of the train? Boats are dangerous!¡±


    ¡°Mom, what era are we in? Boats aren¡¯t dangerous, especially since it¡¯s Liu De¡¯s dad¡¯s boat. It¡¯ll be fine.¡± Gao Zhiming said, shoveling food into his mouth.


    ¡°Remember a few years ago when a ship sank in Korea? If it weren¡¯t for the high-speed rail, it would have been a disaster.¡±


    ¡°I already bought the tickets, so relax. Nothing¡¯s going to happen,¡± he assured her confidently.


    At that moment, he suddenly felt a chill around his ankles. Looking down, he saw a layer of black water covering the floor, and it was rising rapidly.


    Just as Gao Zhiming panicked and started to stand up, the water quickly submerged him, going over his head. A single thought flashed through his mind: his sister couldn¡¯t swim.


    He struggled to reach for his sister in the water, but she seemed to be pulled away by something, drifting further from him. He turned to look for his mother, only to find she had vanished.


    Desperately searching underwater, he found nothing. As the air in his lungs dwindled, the sensation of suffocation grew stronger. In his final moments, he saw a monstrous, toothy maw ready to swallow him whole.


    ¡°Whew!¡± Charles jolted awake, gasping for air.This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.


    Hearing the sound of waves and feeling the rocking of the ship, he realized it had all been a dream.


    ¡°Dude, did you have a nightmare? What was it about? Share it so I can get a laugh,¡± a voice teased from another persona.


    Ignoring the jibe, Charles looked around and found he wasn¡¯t in the captain¡¯s quarters but lying on the deck in shorts, holding a transparent cup, with sunglasses perched on his nose. He looked like he was on a beach vacation.


    ¡°How did I end up here?¡± he muttered.


    ¡°It¡¯s my time now; I¡¯m soaking up the sun,¡± the other persona replied.


    Charles rolled his eyes at the dark surroundings. ¡°You¡¯re crazy. Sunbathing here?¡±


    ¡°You wouldn¡¯t understand. As long as there¡¯s sand in my heart, anywhere can be the Maldives. It¡¯s a lifestyle choice.¡±


    ¡°How¡¯s the navigation?¡± Charles asked, regaining control of his body and standing up.


    ¡°It¡¯s the same as before. The island on the map is nowhere in sight. Before I started sunbathing, I checked the supplies. If we can¡¯t find that island in ten days, we¡¯ll have to turn back.¡±


    Charles leaned against the ship¡¯s railing, staring at the pitch-black sea in silence. He was confident the map was correct, but during that crisis, he had relied solely on his memory. He couldn¡¯t be sure there weren¡¯t any errors.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be so gloomy. If we can¡¯t find it this time, we can always come back later. You seem to live life so seriously. Want to hear a joke to lighten the mood?¡±


    As Charles walked back, raising his cup to drink, he suddenly noticed several distant white dots flickering in the sky.


    ¡°Stars? Are there stars underground? Are we back on the surface?¡±


    Moments later, the stars flickered more frequently, then suddenly went dark again, plunging Charles into an even deeper darkness.


    ¡°Thud!¡± A small rock struck his face from above without warning.


    With his night vision, Charles¡¯s pupils contracted as he realized something. His expression turned grave as he shouted frantically to the second mate, Krona, behind the ship¡¯s glass, ¡°Second mate! Hard to starboard! Full throttle!!¡±


    As the **Unicorn** quickly turned, more small rocks began to rain down from the sky, as if a shower of stones had begun.


    With a rumble of thunder, a massive stalactite, the size of a mountain, plummeted from above, crashing down where the **Unicorn** had just been.


    The deafening roar of the impact sent tidal waves crashing against the ship, rocking it violently.


    On the deck, Charles secured himself with ropes to avoid being thrown overboard by the waves.


    ¡°Seriously? Are the stars so temperamental now? Just a glance, and they come crashing down on us?¡± Richard exclaimed, bewildered.


    Spitting out the salty seawater, Charles replied, ¡°Those aren¡¯t stars. Whatever those things are, they must have seen us. They knocked those rocks down.¡±


    ¡°Damn, there are more things above us? How are they not falling? Are they like geckos?¡±


    ¡°That''s not what we should be worrying about right now. Look! The stars lit up again!¡±


    Above them, the hazy white dots glimmered once more, only to extinguish shortly after, followed by another wave of stalactites descending. The **Unicorn** was in a frantic escape.


    Another massive wave crashed over, and Richard shouted, ¡°This isn¡¯t working! They¡¯re chasing us!¡±


    Watching the stars flicker again, Charles quickly made a decision and ordered, ¡°Turn off the lights!¡±


    In the darkness, the only sound was his own rapid breathing. Once he confirmed that no more rocks were falling, he released a heavy sigh.


    Whatever was up there was using the **Unicorn**¡¯s lights to lock onto them. As long as they turned off the lights, they wouldn¡¯t be able to track the ship''s location.


    In the dark, Charles communicated with the crew. ¡°Second mate, don¡¯t stop. Keep moving. We¡¯re not safe yet.¡±


    ¡°Captain, I can¡¯t see anything!¡±


    ¡°I can see. I¡¯ll guide you.¡±


    In the pitch black, the **Unicorn** continued its journey. Charles stood on the deck, anxiously studying the map to ensure they didn¡¯t lose their way.


    After half an hour, when Charles lifted his head to check the sea again, he heard Richard¡¯s excited shout.


    ¡°Island! That¡¯s an island! We found it!¡±

 **Chapter 62: Alive**

    As the spotlight of the **Unicorn** illuminated the area, an island brimming with lush greenery appeared before the crew. This good news helped alleviate the recent tension, and an excited Charles quickly pulled out the map to recalibrate their coordinates.


    Finding the coordinates of the first island would make identifying the other islands in the chain much easier, and it also confirmed the authenticity of the map.


    The **Unicorn** began to circle the island for initial reconnaissance. After a quick survey, Charles noted that the island wasn''t very large¡ªabout half the size of a typical coral island. He assessed that the likelihood of finding a surface entrance was slim, but he was determined to investigate regardless.


    Following his previous procedure, Charles tossed some fish onto the island. Seeing no immediate signs of life, he sent the first group of crew members ashore. He was increasingly cautious as they were getting closer to home; he wanted to avoid any unforeseen dangers.


    Two hours later, the first group of crew members emerged from the forest, signaling from the beach.


    ¡°There¡¯s no threat,¡± Charles deciphered their signals.


    ¡°Drop anchor! Extinguish the furnace!¡± Two small boats were lowered, and all crew members moved toward the island.


    The eager Deep called out, ¡°Captain, come quickly! I found a broken house here!¡±


    Without hesitation, Charles followed him into the forest, navigating through a narrow path carved by a blade. They arrived at a small, three-story house, entangled in vines.


    The building was so dilapidated that Charles wondered if it was still standing due to the vines clinging to its exterior.


    ¡°Captain, there¡¯s no one inside¡ªnot even a corpse,¡± Deep reported.


    Cautiously, Charles led the group into the building, where everything was covered in dust, as if the place had been forgotten by time.


    ¡°Search everywhere for any written information and report back to me,¡± he ordered. The crew spread out, stirring up dust and coughing as they did so.


    Charles picked up a cup made of an unknown material, but as he touched it, it shattered into pieces.


    ¡°Ahhh!!¡± ¡°Bang bang bang!!¡± The terrified screams and gunfire jolted Charles back to reality. He rushed toward the source of the noise.


    Upon entering the room, he saw four sailors huddled together, nervously aiming their firearms in different directions.Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    ¡°What did you see? Why did you fire?¡± Charles demanded.


    ¡°Captain! Over there! We saw something small run by!¡± one sailor pointed deep into the cluttered room.


    Charles drew his black blade and rushed over, tossing aside various objects but finding no signs of life.


    His gaze fell upon a crack in the wall, where he noticed a row of tiny footprints on the ground.


    Crouching down, he peered into the fissure and caught a glimpse of a human eye with blue pupils flashing by. ¡°There¡¯s something in there!¡±


    Charles immediately stood up and dashed to the adjacent room, but upon arrival, he found no trace of the eye¡¯s owner.


    Returning to the original room, he examined the footprints closely. They were only half a centimeter wide¡ªremarkably small. He deduced that their owner was no more than five centimeters tall.


    ¡°Island natives?¡± Charles recalled the tiny figure that had emerged from the head.


    But he quickly dismissed that thought; the eye he had seen was clearly the size of a normal human¡¯s. It didn¡¯t make sense¡ªhow could a regular person fit through a crack barely wide enough for a finger?


    ¡°Captain! What happened? I heard gunfire!¡± another crew member shouted as they rushed in.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on here?¡±


    ¡°What just happened?¡±


    The other crew members of the **Unicorn** arrived, bombarding Charles with questions.


    He stood up and recounted the situation. ¡°There¡¯s something alive on this island. Everyone, be cautious.¡±


    Seeing the tension on their faces, Charles added, ¡°But don¡¯t worry too much. Whatever that thing is, it¡¯s hiding from us, not the other way around.¡±


    He then asked, ¡°Did anyone find any clues in the other rooms?¡±


    Everyone shook their heads, and a flicker of disappointment crossed Charles¡¯s face, though it was somewhat expected. His luck had never been great; it was unlikely he would find a way home on the first island.


    Leading the group out of the building, they continued their exploration deeper into the island. The path through the forest was challenging, filled with vines and branches that required cutting through.


    After two hours of trekking, Charles estimated they hadn¡¯t even covered a mile. Seeing the exhausted crew, he ordered a break.


    ¡°Doctor, do you recognize any of these plants?¡± Charles asked the elderly man who was nibbling on some bread.


    ¡°Do you think I¡¯m omniscient? How could I possibly know the plants on a deserted island? I can only judge that these plants probably won¡¯t eat us,¡± the doctor replied.


    Richard chimed in, ¡°Dude, with so many trees around, it means the soil must be good. If we can find fresh water, this island could be habitable!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not that simple. There are only plants¡ªno animals at all.¡±


    Just then, the doctor suddenly collapsed to the ground, his face twisted in pain. Charles rushed over to support him. ¡°Doctor, what¡¯s wrong? Speak!¡±


    The doctor, grimacing, clawed at his chest with his metal hand. ¡°Damn it! Something is biting me! Help me pull it off!¡±


    Charles lifted the doctor¡¯s coat and discovered a round, pancake-like creature writhing beneath his blood-soaked shirt.


    Without hesitation, he raised his black blade and swiftly cut through the upper part of the creature, sending it flying several meters away with the doctor¡¯s pained grunt.


    Looking down at the doctor¡¯s chest, Charles was horrified to see a large patch of skin missing, exposing the doctor¡¯s ribs.


    ¡°My God, what did you have in your clothing?¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t put anything in there!! The creature inside your mask!¡± the doctor exclaimed, trembling as he sprinkled powder over the wound.


    ¡°096?¡± Charles glanced down, spotting a pale figure resembling a clown¡¯s mouth emerging from the shredded fabric.


    ¡°The mask is alive?¡± Everyone stared in disbelief at the absurd scene.


    Before anyone could react, the 096 figure flashed a terrifying grin at the group and rolled off into the woods like a wheel.

 **Chapter 63: The Revenge of 096**

    The moment the clown mask rolled into the woods, chaos erupted in the camp.


    ¡°Oh my God, the captain¡¯s mask is alive!¡±


    ¡°Should... should we retreat?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, can I crawl into your pocket? I¡¯m a bit scared.¡±


    ¡°Silence!!¡± Charles¡¯s voice cut through the panic. He furrowed his brow, glaring at his crew. ¡°What are you all shouting about? It¡¯s just a moving mask! After everything we¡¯ve been through, you let this little scene frighten you like this?¡±


    Seeing the chatter die down, Charles glanced at his watch and declared, ¡°Break¡¯s over! Let¡¯s move out!¡±


    The crew, now quiet, followed their captain deeper into the woods. Though they didn¡¯t voice their concerns, their expressions betrayed their anxiety, and their grips on their weapons tightened.


    Meanwhile, Charles was grappling with the same question as his crew: why had 096 suddenly come to life? It had been near him for a while, and he had worn it countless times without any sign of life.


    ¡°Could it be related to this island? Does it have some connection to it?¡± As he pondered this, he peered into the darkness between the trees but saw nothing.


    ¡°I¡¯d say this is a good sign. It means we¡¯re in the right place. The stranger the place, the greater the benefits. Conversely, places without danger yield no rewards,¡± Richard chimed in.


    Charles didn¡¯t respond. Instead, he turned to the doctor, who was being supported by Deep and Frey. ¡°How¡¯s your wound, doctor?¡±


    ¡°Humph! If you really cared about me, you¡¯d let me stay on the ship. You didn¡¯t say I¡¯d have to explore the island when we made our agreement,¡± the doctor grumbled, taking a swig from his metal flask.


    Seeing his bravado, Charles figured the injury wasn¡¯t too serious.


    As the group moved forward, the environment began to change. The trees grew shorter, giving way to a vast area of overgrown ruins.


    This wasteland was enormous, comparable to a small town, filled with crumbling walls covered in vines, exuding an eerie desolation.


    While the crew could only see part of the ruins illuminated by their torches, Charles, with his night vision, could see much more. In the darkness, the collapsed buildings resembled spiders crouching, watching them.


    No matter how glorious they once were, time had slowly eroded all traces of humanity, leaving only remnants behind.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    Charles paused for a moment before continuing forward. Regardless of who the ruins belonged to, time had taken everything away.


    ¡°It sounds like there¡¯s water. Can you hear it?¡± Charles suddenly spoke up. Noticing the puzzled looks on his crew, he decided not to elaborate and pressed on.


    ¡°Mr. Charles! There really is water! My friend and I can smell it!¡± Lily exclaimed, bounding up to Charles¡¯s shoulder, her little nose twitching. ¡°And it¡¯s fresh water!¡±


    At the mention of fresh water, the crew erupted in excitement, understanding the significance of this discovery.


    Following the increasingly loud sound of water, Charles soon found himself at the center of the ruins, where a heap of rusty, old machinery lay, and the sound of flowing water emanated from beneath it.


    ¡°Give me the explosives.¡±


    With a loud bang, the decayed machinery was blown apart, and everyone leaned in to peer into the dark hole beneath.


    Torches were tossed into the abyss, revealing a flowing underground river.


    After eagerly tasting the water, Deep exclaimed, ¡°Captain! It¡¯s fresh water! This island is habitable!¡±


    The crew cheered wildly, their enthusiasm dispelling the surrounding darkness.


    They had risked their lives to join this exploratory voyage, all for this moment.


    A newly discovered island meant the captain could become a governor, and every crew member would rise in rank. They would no longer have to go to sea but instead live like the nobles at the island¡¯s center.


    Charles, however, wasn¡¯t as excited. His goals differed from those of his crew; finding a habitable island was merely a side quest.


    Watching their exhilaration, he decided to let them rest and calm down before continuing.


    While high morale was beneficial, overly excited crew members could lead to trouble.


    In a corner between two partially intact walls, a campfire was lit.


    The excited crew could hardly sleep, reveling in visions of a glorious future. Eventually, Charles had to order the doctor to sedate them to ensure they got some rest.


    Charles himself struggled to sleep. After taking a bit of the doctor¡¯s medicine, he finally slipped into slumber.


    He didn¡¯t know how long he had been asleep when a strange sound jolted him awake¡ªa hissing noise, reminiscent of a gas canister releasing air.


    ¡°Shhh¡­¡± The sound came again.


    Fully alert, Charles tensed up. That sound was unmistakable¡ªit was the sound of a human trachea being sliced.


    He sprang to his feet and immediately spotted a small figure raising a rusty blade toward James.


    Hearing the commotion behind him, the figure suddenly turned. In the flickering firelight, 096¡¯s pale face with its red nose loomed before Charles.


    In a reflexive action, Charles raised his gun and fired, unleashing a barrage of bullets at 096¡¯s host.


    The small body was knocked backward by the impact of the bullets, but as soon as the gunfire ceased, it dropped to all fours and darted away like a cheetah.


    ¡°Deep! Get the doctor to help him quickly!¡± Charles shouted, kicking the dazed sailor and charging after the fleeing figure.


    Watching its retreating silhouette, Charles¡¯s expression hardened. Whatever had caused 096 to come alive, it clearly harbored a grudge against them. It had to be eliminated, or it would return.


    Amidst the overgrown ruins, two figures raced through the darkness, moving with agility and speed. To an onlooker, it would appear as if they were performing an intricate parkour routine.


    ¡°Richard, whose body is 096 using right now? How can it run so fast even after being shot in the chest?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t ask me! That old man¡¯s medicine knocked me out too!¡±


    Both of them matched each other¡¯s speed, neither able to gain the upper hand. 096 quickly reached the edge of the woods and dashed straight in without hesitation.


    Clenching his teeth, Charles followed closely behind.

 **Chapter 64: The Shell**

    Branches whipped against Charles''s face, but his eyes remained fixed on the retreating figure of 096. The tangled limbs of the trees couldn''t hinder their enhanced bodies as they leaped and maneuvered between the trunks.


    ¡°HAHAHAHA!!!¡± 096''s maniacal laughter echoed through the woods.


    ¡°Hey, this isn¡¯t working! We¡¯re matching speeds; who knows where he¡¯ll lead us!¡± Richard¡¯s voice rang in Charles''s mind.


    ¡°I know that already! Just stay focused!¡±


    With a powerful push off a fallen log, Charles cocked his revolver, now loaded with fresh bullets. This time, he aimed not for 096''s vital points but directly at its legs.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The shot rang out, splintering bark as a chunk of wood flew off next to 096''s right leg.


    The rapid pace and the thick trees made aiming difficult, even for Charles, whose vision was usually sharp.


    ¡°I¡¯ll run; you shoot,¡± Richard suggested, taking partial control of their body.


    Gunfire erupted again. After several missed shots, suddenly, blood burst from 096''s left leg as it was hit.


    The body continued to run, but its speed was noticeably slowing.


    With a predator''s instinct, Charles lunged forward, drawing his blade in one fluid motion. In a swift strike, he severed the head cleanly from the body.


    Ignoring the blood that splattered, Charles activated his tentacle ring, and the transparent appendages quickly wrapped around the severed head.


    As he gazed at the face, his dark pupils constricted in shock. This body did not belong to any of his crew. The clown mask that should have been there had vanished, replaced by a horrifying visage.


    The head was devoid of eyes, nose, and mouth, leaving only four perfectly round black holes. It resembled a skull but with an unsettling twist.


    Charles scanned the surrounding woods, searching for any sign of the mask. It was evident that during the chase, it had slipped away unnoticed.


    ¡°Did that mask just pull a new trick? Can it consume its host¡¯s features?¡± Richard pondered.


    ¡°Not sure. Let¡¯s get back first; we can¡¯t let it lead us into a trap.¡±


    Not wasting any time, Charles used the tentacles to secure the body and hurried back.


    Upon returning to the ruins, he found James¡¯s massive form by the campfire, and all the crew members were awake.


    Seeing their captain return, they rushed over. Charles quickly counted heads, confirming that none of his crew were missing. The body he carried was not one of theirs.Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    ¡°Could this corpse be from the island¡¯s natives?¡±


    The island''s inhabitants were known for their bizarre appearances, and Charles couldn¡¯t be sure.


    After a brief moment of thought, he approached the doctor, who was tending to the injured.


    Hearing the footsteps behind him, the doctor didn¡¯t turn as he continued to suture wounds. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; most of them choke on their own blood when their trachea is ruptured. As long as I¡¯m here, they won¡¯t die.¡±


    Charles glanced at the second mate, Knona, who had a thin tube inserted into his throat, emitting a faint whistling sound with each breath.


    The doctor finally turned to face Charles. ¡°How did it go? Did you catch that thing?¡±


    ¡°It got away, but I brought back its host. See if there are any clues on it.¡±


    ¡°Ugh, being your ship¡¯s doctor is no easy task.¡±


    As the doctor examined the body, he twisted his metal pinky, causing a sharp surgical knife to spring out.


    While the doctor dissected the corpse, Charles ran his fingers over its smooth, black clothing. The material resembled a wetsuit but appeared aged and began to tear under his gentle tug.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing on the clothing,¡± Charles remarked, glancing at the doctor, who looked like a ghoul in his focus.


    ¡°Huh? That¡¯s impossible!¡± the doctor exclaimed.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡±


    ¡°You should take a look for yourself. There are no internal organs in this thing¡¯s belly. Are you sure it was moving just now?¡±


    Charles crouched down, peering into the incision the doctor had made. Indeed, the chest and abdominal cavities were completely empty.


    He was certain that this thing had been alive when he severed its head.


    ¡°I¡¯m more concerned about who created this thing. Feel this,¡± the doctor said, probing inside the head¡¯s black void.


    ¡°There are no scars inside; it¡¯s perfectly healed. Even I couldn¡¯t achieve such a thing. If this shell was artificially created, it¡¯s a perfect piece of art.¡±


    Finding nothing further, Charles felt disappointment wash over him. This corpse only deepened his confusion without providing any answers.


    The crew, now wide awake, stared at him, waiting for their captain¡¯s next command.


    ¡°Can¡¯t sleep, huh? Then let¡¯s move out.¡±


    Lily, clutching half a piece of bread, approached him anxiously. ¡°Mr. Charles, what if that thing comes back?¡±


    A cold glint flashed in Charles''s eyes. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; there won¡¯t be a next time.¡±


    Upon hearing their captain¡¯s orders, the crew began preparing their gear, the camp bustling with noise.


    ¡°Big guy, keep your socks in check! How did they end up in my pack?¡±


    ¡°Damn it, who¡¯s seen my flask?¡±


    Though the ruins were treacherous, they were still easier to navigate than the woods. Charles and his crew stood up and continued onward.


    As they moved, Charles busily sketched a rough map of the island in his notebook.


    He led his crew swiftly toward the island''s center, reasoning that if there were signs of human habitation, that area was most likely to yield valuable information.


    A white shadow flickered behind the ruins, as 096, lurking in the darkness, once again controlled a new body, maliciously fixated on Charles''s retreating form.


    By the next evening, Charles had explored a significant portion of the island. Other than 096¡¯s sudden activation, everything seemed normal, as if it were just an ordinary island.


    In a cleared area, aside from the sentry, the rest of the crew was asleep.


    The watchman, Deep, gazed into the campfire, dreaming of his future. ¡°If I become one of the island¡¯s elite, I¡¯ll marry ten wives! One of them has to be a vampire.¡±


    ¡°Can you handle that?¡± chimed in the cook, Frey.


    ¡°Why not?¡±


    ¡°Forget it; once we get off this boat, I¡¯ll take you to a place, and you¡¯ll understand.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not going; it was your fault I got caught by a vampire last time.¡±


    Deep¡¯s shadow stretched long in the firelight, merging with the darkness beyond.


    Meanwhile, 096, clutching a rusty blade, crawled like a spider, silently approaching along the shadows.

 **Chapter 65: Other Facilities**

    Just as 096 was two meters away from Deep, a sharp screech echoed through the air. The bright white clown mask suddenly looked up to see a giant bat hanging from a tree branch like a grim reaper.


    Before it could flee, the massive bat spread its wings and swooped down like a missile.


    ¡°Crack! Crack!¡± The sound of bones breaking echoed as 096''s host was crushed beneath Charles''s weight.


    Realizing it couldn''t win, 096 swiftly detached its face and attempted to escape.


    At that moment, Deep quickly spun around and threw a large net at 096. The crew members, who had been pretending to sleep, sprang into action, grabbing various items and rushing toward the netted 096.


    This was a trap, a carefully laid ambush for 096.


    As Charles approached, his body transformed back into human form, revealing four sharp fangs that had grown in his mouth. His once handsome face began to twist into a terrifying bat-like appearance.


    Nearby, the blind vampire quickly handed over a blood bag. As Charles drank from it, the mutations on his body rapidly faded.


    ¡°Captain, that artifact is part of our bloodline. You should refrain from using it. Look, your fangs have already grown,¡± the blind vampire reminded him kindly.


    Charles probed his mouth with his finger and felt the sharper fangs. However, he had more pressing matters to attend to. He turned his gaze toward the captured 096.


    The clown mask was now firmly nailed to a thick wooden board, unable to move.


    ¡°What caused you to activate?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°Humans! You disgusting, lowly creatures! I will kill you all!¡± 096 roared from the board, cursing.


    ¡°Where did you find your hosts?¡± Charles pressed, but all he received were more insults.


    Seeing that 096 wouldn¡¯t cooperate, Charles grew impatient and raised his gun to shoot.


    ¡°Clang!¡± The bullet struck the mask, producing a metallic sound.


    A manic grin spread across 096''s grotesque face. ¡°I am the hardest object in the world! Your little tricks cannot harm me! You cannot imagine the greatness of the being that created me!¡±


    ¡°Really? The hardest mask, you say? I happen to have a knife here that can easily cut through steel. I¡¯m curious to see whether your mask is harder or my knife,¡± Charles replied, drawing the black blade from his boot.


    At the sight of the blade, 096''s arrogance instantly evaporated, and a rare expression of fear crossed its ceramic-like face.Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    ¡°Zzzz~~!¡± The black blade scraped across 096¡¯s surface, sending white powder drifting down like dust.


    ¡°Human, you win. I found those shells underground in the eastern woods,¡± 096 admitted, its fear evident.


    Without hesitation, Charles led it toward the east, with the crew following closely behind.


    As they traveled, Charles continued to question 096 about why it had activated, but once again, it refused to provide an answer. Even the threat of the black blade couldn¡¯t extract any more information. It merely claimed it suddenly began to think and harbored an intense hatred for humans.


    Charles remained skeptical. Perhaps 096 had always been alive, just lying in wait.


    As they spoke, they arrived at the eastern woods. Under 096''s guidance, they found a small tree hollow, from which an eerie red light emanated steadily.


    Richard jumped out and asked, ¡°Are you sure this is the place? You¡¯re not trying to set a trap for me, are you?¡±


    ¡°You can doubt it, but those two shells were definitely found inside,¡± Charles replied.


    After a moment of thought, he turned to the white mouse and said, ¡°Lily, call your friends in to take a look.¡±


    There was no need to explore this dangerous place himself; the mice were better suited for such tight spaces.


    ¡°Eek! Eek! Eek!¡± Lily squeaked a few times, and four brown mice quickly scurried inside.


    The wait wasn¡¯t long. Soon, the mice returned, surrounding Lily and chattering excitedly.


    The white mouse waved its tiny paws to translate: ¡°They say it¡¯s very red, very big, and very long!¡±


    ¡°What kind of description is that? Can¡¯t you get them to be more detailed?¡± Charles asked.


    Lily scratched her head and continued to discuss with the mice. After a few seconds, she turned back and said, ¡°They said it looks like the place where the big worms that like to eat them live.¡±


    ¡°A place where the big worms live? The Third Laboratory!¡± Charles exclaimed, surprise flickering across his face.


    ¡°Could it be that there are other facilities inside this hollow?¡± Charles suddenly thought. If there was a Third Laboratory, there had to be a First and Second as well. Such an organization wouldn¡¯t occupy just one island.


    Regardless, Charles decided to investigate. Aside from searching for clues about an exit, he was also curious about the doctor¡¯s tablet and wondered where the humans who built these things had gone.


    ¡°This place is narrow; Lily and I will go in. You all stay here and wait. While I¡¯m gone, the first mate will be in charge,¡± he instructed.


    As Charles and the mice entered the hollow, 096, nailed to the wood, revealed a sinister smile.


    Charles descended through the twisted tunnel, following the tangled roots. He soon found a corridor that had been warped and cracked by the roots.


    The familiar decor and setting confirmed his suspicions: this place resembled a facility similar to the Third Laboratory.


    As for the source of the red light, it came from the crooked square lights on the ceiling, flickering ominously as if issuing a dangerous warning.


    ¡°Oh man, this is it! If the Third Laboratory has so many relics, this place must have plenty too,¡± he thought.


    Ignoring the voice in his head, Charles continued down the corridor.


    The once-straight path was now obstructed by roots, forcing him to climb up and down.


    Just as he climbed over one of the roots, he came face-to-face with a head featuring four black holes.


    In a reflexive motion, his left hand moved on its own, swinging the blade toward the head.


    But just one centimeter from the blade''s edge, he suddenly halted.


    ¡°Don¡¯t attack; this thing means no harm,¡± Charles said to his other self before slowly pulling back.


    Another new shell appeared before him¡ªa human body made only of flesh and bone, standing still and unresponsive.


    Charles waved his hand in front of its face, but there was no reaction. When he pressed his finger against its face, he found it was warm.


    Though it was hard to believe, this shell, devoid of any organs, was still alive.

 **Chapter 66: The Light Gray Mass**

    ¡°Mr. Charles, let¡¯s hurry and get out of here. I¡¯m a bit scared of this thing¡­¡± Lily, with drooping ears, curled up in Charles''s pocket.


    ¡°Shh.¡±


    Suddenly, the still body in front of them jerked upright, startling Lily into a squeak.


    ¡°Tap, tap, tap.¡± It turned and began walking deeper into the corridor.


    After a moment of thought, Charles decided to follow. Whatever this being was, it had lived here and likely knew the place better than he did. Following it might lead to more clues.


    ¡°Hey, do you think this thing was here to receive some kind of reward?¡± one voice in his head pondered.


    ¡°No idea. Looking at the ruins outside, this place has been abandoned for at least hundreds of years. If this thing was an employee here, how old would it be?¡±


    ¡°Who knows in this hellhole? Maybe it swapped its organs for longevity or something.¡±


    Just then, Charles noticed a movement in the corner. He instinctively pointed his revolver in that direction. A long, white creature was wriggling in the shadows.


    This snake-like being ignored Charles''s threat and slowly crawled forward.


    Cautiously, he approached and lifted it with his black blade, but the agile creature darted away, far quicker than the body.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, it¡¯s getting away!¡± Lily squeaked from the pocket.


    Glancing at the moving body in the distance, Charles quickly stood up and followed.


    His mind raced, trying to recall details about the long creature. He knew it wasn¡¯t native to Earth, yet it felt strangely familiar, though he couldn¡¯t quite place it.


    As they ventured deeper into the corridor, the roots began to thin out. Turning a corner, a spacious circular hall appeared before Charles.


    Looking at the cracked patterned floor, he could imagine the grandeur this place once held.


    However, the hall was eerily devoid of furniture or any other adornments; it was completely empty, as if the humans had left in a hurry, clearing everything out.


    Following the body through the hall, Charles suddenly slipped, as if stepping on something.The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    He brushed away the thick dust on the ground, revealing a shiny metal plaque. It appeared to be an identification tag, but the front only displayed part of the text, while the back had been worn away for some unknown reason.


    ¡°E4 Level Project Interaction¡ª¡±


    ¡°Project interaction? Were they experimenting with relics?¡± Charles''s mind filled with more questions.


    Holding onto this confusion, he tossed the plaque aside and stood up, ready to leave. But the next moment, a shocking scene unfolded: the discarded plaque stood upright on its own.


    It wobbled, using its two pointed edges to move forward.


    Watching the plaque slowly advance, Charles hurried to catch up; this little thing didn¡¯t scare him.


    As they moved deeper, more strange objects began to gather from other passages.


    Among them were various unknown flesh-like masses and completely inert objects, including a wallet and a shoe.


    Their movements mirrored that of the body, and Charles felt as if these things were like pilgrims heading to a sacred place.


    They completely ignored Charles, and he didn¡¯t attack them either; for a moment, the scene felt oddly harmonious.


    But when a pair of human lungs scuttled past his feet, he slowed his pace.


    Suddenly, realization struck him: he recognized the long creature from before¡ªit was human intestines!


    He quickly connected the dots: the reason the body had no organs was that they had all escaped.


    His body began to tremble, not out of fear, but for reasons he couldn¡¯t comprehend. Despite the apparent lack of danger, his eight years of sailing experience warned him that this place was perilous, and it was time to leave. Yet, he felt a deep reluctance to exit now.


    At that moment, all the activated objects moved toward a room, and faint voices drifted from within.


    ¡°Hey, we¡¯re here now. At least let¡¯s take a look; we might find something good,¡± Richard urged.


    After a moment of hesitation, Charles decided to proceed.


    At least, from what he could see, these activated entities didn¡¯t seem hostile. What if there was an entrance to the surface inside this facility?


    Following the various organs, Charles turned into the room, and what he saw left him stunned.


    Inside was an enormous space the size of a football field, with a tank occupying two-thirds of it. The creatures that had entered from all directions swayed rhythmically toward the tank, as if participating in some kind of religious ritual.


    Charles''s gaze fixed on the tank, where a light gray mass pulsated and expanded. Deformed creatures crawled out of it, only to be quickly swallowed back as they tried to escape.


    ¡°Gulp.¡± Charles swallowed hard, slowly stepping back. Whatever that tank contained, it certainly wasn¡¯t the exit to the surface.


    Suddenly, the light gray mass coalesced into a human male head, its features twisted in fear. It screamed at Charles, ¡°Help me! Please kill me! I¡¯m in so much pain! I can¡¯t take it anymore!¡±


    Charles froze, having considered many possibilities, but he never expected this.


    ¡°Hey, this thing looks a bit daft. Why don¡¯t you try to trick it and see if there¡¯s anything to gain?¡± one voice suggested.


    Charles was reluctant; he felt completely out of control in this place, and that sensation was unsettling.


    Just as he was about to leave, Richard interrupted, asking the unknown entity in the tank, ¡°Who are you?¡±


    As soon as he spoke, all the activated beings around the tank turned to face them, sending chills down Charles¡¯s spine.


    ¡°I can¡¯t take it anymore! I¡¯m in so much pain! Please, for the sake of our humanity, kill me!¡± The head screamed again before collapsing back into the light gray mass.

 **Chapter 67: 1002**

    "How can I help you? What do I get in return?" Richard continued to inquire.


    The mass coalesced again into a human head, its expression one of agony. "Over there, on that table, is 487. Use it on me, and I can finally die. Hurry, I¡¯ve endured this pain for too long."


    The various creatures near the tank quickly cleared a path, and a table with four legs began to walk toward him.


    "487?! Sounds like a relic," Richard said, reaching out to grab it, but Charles seized control of his body.


    "Are you willing to risk your life for a relic?! We need to get out of here¡ªthis place isn''t right!"


    "Hey, why are you running? This guy seems reasonable. What¡¯s wrong with helping him?"


    "This is my time to decide!"


    "How about I lend you my body? You can pay me back with interest tomorrow."


    In the lab, a bizarre scene unfolded: a young man moved erratically, sometimes advancing and sometimes retreating, while the giant head in the tank continued to wail in despair.


    "Ah! Hurry up!" the head screamed, and the surrounding organs surged forward, blocking their escape. Despite most lacking eyes, Charles could clearly feel their anger.


    Realizing their path was blocked, the two stopped arguing and turned their attention to the chaotic table filled with crawling objects. Among them, Charles spotted a short staff that resembled a lightning bolt.


    "Is this 487? Is this relic powerful?" Richard asked, curiously examining the object.


    The staff¡¯s head bent slightly, seemingly gazing at the human who held it.


    Charles scanned the table with his eyes, controlling another arm to pick up a quivering notebook.


    **Experiment Name:** Activation (Dawn Experiment Subproject 1/3)


    **Date:** July 12, 74


    **Objective:** To test the retention of rationality in product 041-1 under the activation radiation of project 074.


    **Materials:** Project 074, Project 041, D-Class Super Large Tank.


    **Method:** Cut a portion of 074 and command 041-1 to touch it with its forefin for ten minutes.


    **Results:** Due to a mistake by researcher Foss, he accidentally fell into the tank, and the experiment succeeded in a unique way. The unknown substance perfectly absorbed Foss''s cognitive perception and emotions, but unfortunately, it also carried the activation radiation from project 074, necessitating further optimization of the experiment. Currently, this experimental product is designated as number 1002.


    **Summary:** The theory proposed by Dr. [REDACTED] is correct; we are one step closer to success.


    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.Although this place is very strange, we will one day dominate this marvelous sea like our human predecessors did on the surface.


    I have a premonition that the various knowledge in this sea will elevate human development by an entire dimension. This will be the second technological explosion in human history.


    (The proposal to use humans as experimental materials has been submitted to the Washington Foundation headquarters by Dr. [REDACTED].)


    Reading the contents of the notebook made Charles''s heart race with excitement; he suddenly realized much of the information he had previously lacked.


    First, the organization called the Foundation aimed to analyze everything here scientifically and use it to aid human civilization''s development.


    Second, their headquarters is on the surface, proving they also came from above and often communicate with the surface. They know where the exits are, or perhaps this place is the entrance they dug out!


    "Will you help me or not?!" The booming roar shook the entire tank, and 1002 inside began to coalesce and dissolve.


    "Here it comes! I think I¡¯ve figured out how to use this thing," Richard said, raising the staff.


    A bright arc of electricity shot from the staff¡¯s head, striking the tank.


    But in sync with this action, Charles''s body jerked as if electrocuted, his hair standing on end from the high-voltage shock.


    When Richard stopped, the new relic in his hand was smoking, and he felt an overwhelming pain throughout his body.


    "Wow, this relic has quite the side effect!" Richard remarked, ignoring the other personality¡¯s complaints.


    Charles caught a whiff of a nauseating burnt flesh smell.


    Looking up, he saw the water in the tank boiling violently, the pale gray masses turning white and floating on the surface.


    "Is this... a task completed? Usually, others chase us, but for the first time, someone is asking us to kill it. So this little stick must be our reward!"


    As he surveyed the motionless creatures around, Charles slowly maneuvered his numb body toward the exit. "Let¡¯s head back to Coral Island, gather a fleet, and clear this place out. Once we occupy the island, we can explore it slowly."


    But just as they had moved halfway, the white masses floating on the water turned gray again, coalescing into the massive head that appeared before Charles once more.


    The lab echoed with its wails. "Who are you? No matter who you are, please help me! Kill me! I¡¯m in so much pain! I can¡¯t take it anymore!"


    "I can sense its memories have been reset to before we arrived," Charles realized sharply.


    "What do we do? Shock it again? This thing can really take a beating; if it doesn¡¯t die from the shock, I¡¯ll be done for."


    "Let¡¯s give it a shot. This time, once we¡¯re done, we bolt for the exit." Charles raised the trembling staff again.


    Just as he was about to unleash the electric arc from 487, he suddenly heard a squeaking sound beneath him. Looking down, he saw Lily¡¯s mouse convulsing on the ground.


    With a couple of pops, the mouse''s eyes shot out from its head, followed closely by its other organs.


    In no time, only a mouse carcass remained on the floor.


    Watching the lifeless body rise like a zombie, Charles felt a chill run down his spine.


    "Is this the activation radiation mentioned in the experiment record? Being near it causes constant activation? Does that mean I¡­"


    As Charles pondered this, he suddenly felt a change in his vision; his right eye was bulging outward.


    A wave of cold dread washed over him¡ªhe was right!


    He forced his right eye shut and sprinted through the carcasses and activated organs toward the exit.


    "Where are you going?! Come back! Kill me!" the roar of 1002 echoed behind him.


    Charles dared not return; if he lingered even a second longer, all his organs might gain self-awareness.


    "Go get him back! My suffering must come to an end!"

 **Chapter 68: Elizabeth**

    Hearing the voice behind him, Charles quickened his pace. No matter what 1002 was commanding, it was bad news for him.


    The scenery around him changed rapidly as he retraced his steps. When he returned to the empty hall, a mass of grotesque, writhing organs and activated creatures surged from the corridor, blocking his path.


    Just as he prepared to retreat, he noticed the creatures behind him were closing in too.


    "Hey, let¡¯s fight! I¡¯ll control my left hand to use 487!" Richard''s voice rang in his head.


    Charles''s face was grim; it was too late for words. He withdrew the black blade and gripped it tightly, the mice on the ground baring their teeth in unison.


    Just as he was about to make a stand, a door suddenly opened in the wall to his left. A pale, large hand grabbed his shirt and pulled him inside.


    The owner of the hand was someone Charles never expected: a tall, voluptuous woman¡ªElizabeth!


    "Don''t just stand there! Run! The creatures know about this secret passage; they''ll be on us soon!" Elizabeth urged, expertly navigating the labyrinthine tunnels.


    "What are you doing here?" Charles asked, trying to keep pace with the striking woman.


    "Now''s not the time for questions! You need to get back to your ship! You don''t have much time; the longer you stay here, the more they''ll assimilate you!" Elizabeth spoke quickly, her expression grave.


    Charles stopped asking questions. At least this person was helping him; he could figure out the details once they were back on the Uniquorn.


    Elizabeth seemed very familiar with the place, deftly finding escape routes no matter where the activated beings emerged from.


    As they raced toward the exit, Charles felt a tug at his collar, which then flopped down toward his face.


    His pupils narrowed; his clothes had been activated too. When the collar sensed his lack of reaction, it poked him again and pointed downward.


    Charles looked down, his heart racing. The pocket that should have held Lily was bulging ominously.


    He swallowed hard and trembled as he opened the pocket. Instead of the white mouse, it was filled with writhing organs, desperately trying to escape. Lily''s entire body had been completely activated.


    Charles opened his mouth to say something, but his right ear¡ªconnected to the cochlea¡ªdetached from his body.Stolen story; please report.


    A pale hand caught it. Elizabeth returned the ear, explaining, "Don''t worry, Charles. As long as you leave the radiation range of that living relic, it will restore itself."


    "Any living thing can?" he asked, hope rising.


    "Yes, as long as they don¡¯t stray too far."


    "Thank you!" Charles felt a weight lift from his heart upon hearing this. He pressed down on the bulging pocket; if Elizabeth was right, then Lily could still be saved.


    Suddenly, the mice following him began to activate as well, their organs detaching.


    Ignoring whether they understood him, Charles shouted to the mice, "Bring those organs! Back to the ship! They¡¯ll find their way back!"


    The mice seemed to understand; those with less activation helped drag the organs of the more activated ones. However, even with their efforts, some mice collapsed, their organs disintegrating on the spot.


    Charles couldn''t worry about others anymore; he felt an itch in his throat, as if something was trying to escape. He stopped talking and followed Elizabeth at full speed.


    When they emerged from a tunnel, the oppressive red light of the building vanished.


    Charles quickly scanned the area, realizing this was not the tree hole he had entered.


    "Where''s your ship? We need to get back!" Elizabeth urged urgently.


    "Wait, I need to find my crew first." Charles pulled out his compass, quickly determining the direction. He pricked his fingertip with the blade and smeared the blood on the mirror.


    A massive bat soared into the sky, and Charles, along with Elizabeth and the mice, took flight.


    As they ascended rapidly, Charles felt his body stop trembling; he knew he was now outside the radiation range of 1002.


    Transformed into a bat, Charles opened his fearsome mouth, emitting inaudible subsonic waves that quickly spread and bounced off the ground, allowing him to pinpoint his crew''s location.


    As he approached, he saw the situation was grim: explosions and gunfire echoed, while various creatures poured from the hole, charging toward his crew under heavy fire.


    Charles swiftly descended, transforming back into human form just a couple of meters above the ground.


    He pointed 487 at the creatures, and a bright arc of electricity illuminated the dark island, causing the touched organs to tremble and char.


    As the tingling sensation subsided, Charles stood up to see his crew rushing toward him, excitement on their faces.


    He spotted the chef, Frey, at the front, and in a moment of instinct, Charles lunged at him, sinking his sharp teeth into Frey¡¯s neck and drinking deeply.


    The crew froze in shock, and Elizabeth quickly tugged at Charles. "Hey! What are you doing?! Let go!"


    Charles''s eyes cleared rapidly, and in a panic, he released Frey, glancing at Elizabeth''s horrified expression. Without explaining, he turned to the nearby crew members and shouted, "Get back to the ship! Hurry!"


    He supported the weak-looking Frey and dashed toward the distant ruins, while the other crew members exchanged worried glances before following.


    "Captain, who is this lady?" the second mate asked, eyeing Elizabeth curiously.


    "Enough chatter! Move!" Charles''s serious tone silenced the second mate''s curiosity.


    With furrowed brows and tightly pressed lips, Charles couldn''t understand why he had bitten Frey; it felt like an instinctive reaction.


    "Buddy, you should really use that mirror less. If we turn into vampires, we won''t be able to return to the surface," Richard''s voice echoed in his mind.


    Charles nodded silently, glancing at the confused Frey, about to apologize when he felt his body tremble again. A realization hit him: 1002 didn¡¯t necessarily have to remain in the tank.


    "Look! They¡¯re coming again!" Deep''s voice made everyone turn in unison to see the writhing creatures erupting from the tree hole like water being released from a reservoir.

 **Chapter 69: The Uniquorn**

    As the crew of the Uniquorn faced the endless stream of grotesque creatures, they finally realized the severity of the situation and sprinted with all their might alongside their captain.


    In the next moment, a haunting plea echoed from behind them.


    "Don''t leave me! Just kill me! Please! My body is in constant agony, like being cut with knives! Why must I suffer like this?"


    As the voice rang out, Charles felt his recently reattached left ear twitch again.


    Glancing back as they ran, he saw that 1002 had emerged from the tank. It had coalesced into a spherical shape, rolling toward them, devouring any living thing that came into contact with it. With each consumption, the pale gray orb grew larger.


    Without a second thought, Charles grabbed a bundle of explosives from Deep''s pack, lit it, and hurled it behind him. However, the lit explosive tumbled on the ground, extinguishing its fuse, and then stood upright, having been activated by 1002!


    This was just the beginning. The lifeless objects on the crew began to tremble and act of their own accord.


    Realizing they couldn¡¯t continue like this, Charles gritted his teeth and turned back, charging directly at 1002.


    "Charles! Come back!"


    "Captain! What are you doing?"


    Amid the crew''s cries, Charles closed the distance to 1002, now only a few meters away. His features began to distort, resembling the very shells of the creatures around him.


    Summoning all his strength, Charles pointed the lightning staff at 1002, unleashing arcs of electricity that illuminated the dark island. The creature transformed into a charred mass, halting in place.


    Shaking uncontrollably, Charles collapsed to the ground, having endured three successive shocks; his body could take no more.


    Several hands reached out to help him up¡ªhis crew had not fled but returned to assist their captain.


    "Captain, you were amazing! Why didn''t you use such a powerful artifact earlier?" the second mate exclaimed excitedly.


    "Move! It can''t be killed! It will wake up again soon!" Charles managed to say through gritted teeth.


    Hearing this, the second mate glanced fearfully at the darkened mass and quickly helped the dazed Charles retreat.


    Fortunately, the ruins weren''t vast, and they managed to escape into the forest before 1002 revived.Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    They hurried down the path toward the shore, not stopping for a moment, pouring every ounce of their strength into their escape.


    To quicken their flight, the crew discarded anything they could spare.


    "Thud!" The doctor collapsed, panting heavily, blood seeping from his iron leg where it met flesh.


    Charles rushed over, lifting him. "Don''t give up! We''re almost there!"


    The doctor shot a glance at the young man supporting him, pulled a pill from his pocket, swallowed it, and pushed Charles away, quickly rejoining the group. "I''m not old yet!"


    The narrow forest path seemed endless, and they pushed their bodies to the limit. Just as they felt they had exhausted every ounce of energy, the sound of waves reached their ears like a heavenly chorus.


    With joy on their faces, the crew stumbled to their ship, preparing to leave the cursed island.


    Gasping for breath, Charles felt the strain of the continuous exertion; even his enhanced body was struggling.


    "Who are you? No matter who you are, just kill me! I¡¯m in so much pain!"


    Turning his pale face, Charles saw a massive flying creature composed of various flesh and blood rapidly approaching from above the treetops.


    It was 1002, but not entirely; eyes, mouths, organs¡ªvarious human parts floated on its pale gray body, making anyone who glanced at it feel nauseous.


    At this point, 1002 had expanded to nearly five times its original size, flying overhead like a giant aircraft.


    Feeling his body tremble more violently, a flicker of despair crept into Charles¡¯s heart; the activation radius of 1002 had grown larger.


    He felt something rising in his throat, his body on the verge of activation, and the other crew members were now collapsing in agony.


    Just as they stood on the brink of disaster, an explosion suddenly rang out, and 1002''s grotesque body was blown apart, crashing into the forest. The despairing tremor of its form diminished significantly.


    "Quick! Move!"


    Seizing the opportunity, Charles and his crew hastily paddled their wooden boat toward the ship, gunfire echoing above them, providing cover.


    "Captain, did we leave anyone on the ship? Who fired that cannon? What a shot!" the excited second mate asked.


    "Whoo~~!!" The steamship''s whistle sounded as the Uniquorn approached the shore, its deck cannon firing.


    Charles paused, then slowly replied, "No one is on board..."


    The second mate froze. "No one on board? Then who fired the cannon?"


    As the Uniquorn drew nearer, Charles smiled and patted its smooth hull. "The ship fired itself; it¡¯s one of our companions too."


    As if responding to Charles''s words, the Uniquorn emitted a deep whistle, having also been activated by 1002.


    Standing on the deck and watching the writhing 1002 crawl out of the forest, Charles felt the tension in his heart slowly ease; it seemed everything was finally over.


    "No, it¡¯s not over yet." Charles¡¯s gaze fell on the motionless pocket.


    He hesitated, fearful of what he might see if he opened it.


    The pocket stirred slightly, and a cute little white mouse poked its head out, looking somewhat confused. "Mr. Charles, how did we end up on the ship? What just happened?"


    Relieved, Charles gently patted her head. "It¡¯s okay; everything is over now."


    Just as Charles was about to comfort his little gunner, Elizabeth nervously approached. "After our first meeting, did we... sleep together?"


    Caught off guard by the question, Charles watched as Lily instinctively retreated into the pocket.


    Avoiding Elizabeth''s piercing gaze, Charles turned away. "Why are you asking this? You still haven¡¯t explained why you were alone on that island."


    Elizabeth remained silent, seemingly suppressing some emotion. Her expression was far from relaxed, appearing even more tense than when they were on the island.

 **Chapter 70: The Eyeball**

    "Did something happen on the island?" Charles asked, puzzled. They had just escaped, so why did Elizabeth look so distressed?


    "Answer my question," Elizabeth pressed again.


    "No," Charles''s hand subtly moved to his gun.


    Elizabeth''s expression turned to disappointment, and she self-mockingly whispered, "How useless. Why don¡¯t you just act already?"


    "What are you talking about¡ª"


    Before Charles could finish, Elizabeth suddenly lunged forward, and his gun instinctively aimed at her abdomen.


    In a surprising turn, Elizabeth kissed him deeply, causing Charles to hesitate, his finger poised on the trigger.


    The other crew members on deck exchanged glances before quickly retreating.


    Feeling the sweet softness enveloping him, Charles finally pushed Elizabeth away after a few minutes, looking at her with a strange expression. "What¡¯s going on?"


    He was aware of Elizabeth''s feelings for him, but was this really the right moment for such things?


    "Charles, do you know? From the first moment I saw you, I was interested," she confessed.


    "Don¡¯t let my calm demeanor fool you; I¡¯m really not good with emotions. I might come off as a bit blunt."


    "Why is this girl suddenly saying all this? It feels like a farewell," Richard thought, sensing something was off.


    Furrowing his brow, Charles pulled Lily out of his pocket. "Lily, go get the doctor."


    Watching the little white mouse scurry across the deck towards the cabin, Charles turned back to Elizabeth. "If there¡¯s trouble, tell me. I¡¯ll help you."


    Elizabeth shook her head, glancing at the rapidly disappearing island. Her eyes conveyed a mix of urgency and resignation, and her voice was unusually frantic.


    "I don¡¯t have time to explain. When you return, remember to give me back my artifact. If you don¡¯t mind, try to find me and spend time with me when you¡¯re back. Life at sea is too dangerous; I don¡¯t know how much longer I have. I want someone by my side before I die. Charles¡­ goodbye."


    As she finished speaking, Elizabeth¡¯s tall figure began to fade, becoming transparent and collapsing onto the deck.


    Seeing this, Charles instinctively reached out, arms wide open.


    In a flurry of sparkles, Elizabeth vanished from his embrace. From the spot where she had disappeared, two small objects fell to the ground.The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    Charles quickly caught them¡ªone was a delicate earring, and the other was a small human eyeball with tiny hands and feet.


    Staring at the blue pupil, memories flooded back to the eye he had seen peering through the cracks of the wall when they first arrived on the island.


    Then he recalled Elizabeth¡¯s words when she had been wearing the eye patch: "One eyeball is missing. Phew, that island is too dangerous. Just making it out alive is a blessing. So terrifying."


    The luster of the eyeball quickly faded. The tiny white hand gently stroked Charles¡¯s palm before it shriveled and dried up. Soon, the eyeball became lifeless.


    Charles stared blankly at the eyeball, as if understanding something profound.


    "Captain, did you call for me?" the doctor approached.


    After a moment of silence, Charles handed the eyeball to him. "Can it be put back into its original socket?"


    The doctor examined the eyeball with his iron hand. "No, it¡¯s been inactive for a long time."


    With a sigh of disappointment, Charles carefully closed his palm. "It¡¯s nothing. Let¡¯s head back."


    ---


    Margaret opened her eyes, nestled in a soft, fluffy blanket, staring blankly at the ornate crystal chandelier on the ceiling.


    It had been some time since she returned home, yet she still felt a sense of unreality, as if she were truly back.


    "Miss Margaret, your clothes for today are here."


    Seeing her awake, a maid approached, holding a silk gown.


    Margaret squinted and stretched lazily before jumping lightly off the bed.


    The waiting maids respectfully stepped forward, eager to help her out of her nightgown.


    "It¡¯s fine, I can manage myself," Margaret declined their assistance.


    The head maid waved her hand gently, signaling the hesitant maids to step back.


    This had happened several times since Margaret returned; her attitude towards the household staff had dramatically changed.


    Previously, while she was kind-hearted, it was mostly towards small animals, ignoring the servants entirely. Now, however, she was completely different¡ªshe cared for them and even inquired about their well-being.


    With her graceful figure, pretty face, and just the right amount of makeup, the silver silk gown shone under the light, exuding an air of elegance and nobility. The pearl of the island had returned.


    Her exquisite features left even the female maids nearby momentarily entranced.


    Margaret looked at herself in the mirror, playfully twirling around with a faint smile. "If Mr. Charles saw me like this, he would be so surprised his jaw would drop, hehe."


    The maids exchanged glances; ever since her return, Margaret had often mentioned someone named Charles. They wondered who was so lucky to catch her attention. If the island¡¯s many suitors found out, they would surely be envious.


    "Gina, how did you hurt your hand? You should take the day off. If the butler asks, just say it was my idea," Margaret said, lifting her skirt and trotting towards the living room.


    "Good morning, Mother!" Margaret gently embraced a beautiful woman.


    Carita affectionately stroked her daughter¡¯s smooth long hair. "In three months, you¡¯ll be seventeen. Why are you still sleeping in?"


    "Age doesn¡¯t matter; I¡¯m still your daughter!" Margaret smiled, playfully pouting at her mother.


    "Hurry and eat breakfast; I made it myself," Carita said, pulling Margaret down to sit beside her.


    Margaret smiled at her mother, elegantly taking a silver spoon and sipping a spoonful of milk.


    The sweetened milk was delicious, causing Margaret to squint her eyes in delight. After a few sips, she began to attack the other delicacies on the table.


    Baked beans in tomato sauce, sausage sandwiches, warm fried eggs¡ªeach bite filled Margaret with happiness.


    Seeing her previously picky daughter enjoy her meal so heartily brought tears to Carita''s eyes. How much had her poor daughter suffered that she could savor such a simple breakfast so much?


    Noticing her mother¡¯s sadness, Margaret swallowed her food and took her hand, saying, "Mother, don¡¯t be sad. Look, I¡¯m back safe and sound."

 **Chapter 71: Margarets Morning**

    "Right, let''s not think about unhappy things. Come on, you keep eating; I''ll keep you company," Margaret said with a sweet smile, continuing to enjoy her meal. After a few bites, she paused and asked, "Mother, where''s Father?"


    "He and your brother are dealing with some matters on the island; they''ll be here soon."


    "Is it really necessary to handle things this early? I''ll go call them," Margaret said, wiping her mouth with a napkin. Ignoring her mother''s protests, she dashed toward the governor''s office.


    As she passed through the corridor adorned with crystal chandeliers, she made her way to the garden, where her father''s workspace was located on the other side.


    There were few flowers that could thrive underground, but here, various valuable blooms vied for attention. The fragrant scent lifted Margaret''s spirits as she reached the edge of the garden and was drawn to the lights outside the fence.


    The governor''s residence was built atop the highest peak in the island''s center, offering a panoramic view of the lights from the homes of the islanders below.


    As the third-largest island in the Sea of Earth, the landmass was vast, nearly the size of half a continent. Margaret squinted into the distance, barely making out the blurry lights of the port area.


    "Father''s island has a port area too. Maybe I could send a telegram to Mr. Charles to come here; that way, I might get a chance to see him."


    Margaret''s mind wandered to the young man with black eyes, and a faint blush crept onto her cheeks. Their time together hadn¡¯t been particularly harmonious; he preferred discussing various ship and cannon knowledge with that talking mouse rather than paying her any attention. The few times he did call on her were merely to help him with bandaging. Just thinking about it made her furious¡ªshe was the governor''s daughter, yet she felt like a servant.


    But for some reason, she couldn''t stop thinking about him lately.


    Leaning against the railing, Margaret sighed, staring into the distance, lost in thought, her expression shifting between happiness and sadness.


    Ten minutes later, a middle-aged man in a suit approached her from behind, slightly bowing. "Miss, it¡¯s a bit dangerous here; please be careful."


    Startled by the voice, Margaret turned around and realized it was the butler.


    Feeling a bit embarrassed, she stuck out her tongue. "Sorry, Mr. York, I was a bit distracted."


    "Miss, are you here to admire the flowers? Don¡¯t stay too long; you have etiquette class this morning."If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    Suddenly remembering, Margaret''s expression changed to one of panic as she lifted her skirt and hurriedly ran toward the garden exit. "Oh no, I came to call Father for breakfast!"


    When Margaret reached the door of the governor''s office, she saw a line of armed guards standing at attention on either side.


    Taking a moment to calm her racing heart, she raised her hand to knock when a loud crash erupted from inside.


    "Worthless! Worthless! Worthless! How could you mess this up? If you can¡¯t do it, then get out!"


    Hearing her father''s furious voice, Margaret hesitated, pulling her hand back. "Father sounds really angry. What happened?"


    After a moment of careful consideration, she pressed her ear against the door.


    The guards stood still, seemingly unfazed by the commotion inside.


    "You¡¯re the head of the police department for the entire island! You¡¯re telling me a living person has just vanished? I¡¯m telling you! He¡¯s the grandson of Peter, the finance minister! Not some garbage from the port area!"


    Daniel''s roar made Margaret''s ears ring.


    "I¡¯ve tried everything, Governor! I even hired those madmen from Fortan, but he¡¯s just gone! It¡¯s like he disappeared into thin air."


    "I don¡¯t want excuses! My family lives on this island; I can¡¯t let them be in danger! You have three days to solve this problem! If anything happens to my daughter, I¡¯ll crush your skull! Now get out!"


    The heavy wooden door swung open, and a sweaty, balding man rushed out. Upon seeing Margaret standing outside, he bowed respectfully and hurried away.


    Margaret cautiously stepped inside, looking at Daniel, who was sitting behind a large desk. "Father, what¡¯s going on?"


    Seeing his daughter, Daniel''s anger immediately dissipated. "It¡¯s nothing, just a minor issue. What brings our precious gem here?"


    "Mother said to call you for breakfast," Margaret replied, moving closer to the massive desk.


    In the next moment, her gaze fell upon several photographs scattered across the disordered desk. One photo caught her attention¡ªa stunning woman with the same black eyes as Mr. Charles.


    "Father, who is this lady? She¡¯s so beautiful," she asked, picking up the photo.


    "She¡¯s the new wife of that dead guy. What a shame; such a beautiful wife, and she died right after they married. Who knows if they even shared a night together?"


    A young man who bore some resemblance to Daniel walked over and snatched the photo from Margaret''s hands.


    Daniel shot his son a disapproving glare. "Is that appropriate to say in front of your sister?"


    The young man shrugged, unbothered by his father''s reprimand. "That guy is dead; half of his estate goes to this widow."


    "It¡¯s not that simple. Peter is a miser; he won¡¯t let an outsider easily take his inheritance."


    "Father, the marriage law was personally signed by the founder of our family."


    "That applies to commoners! Peter can make someone disappear without breaking a sweat."


    "Ha, that doesn¡¯t sound like something a ruler of an island should say."


    "Whether it sounds right or not, that¡¯s the reality."


    Margaret stared blankly at her father and brother, confused by their conversation.


    Noticing her bewilderment, Daniel gently patted her head. "Why don¡¯t you head back? I¡¯ll have a word with Jack and then join you."


    "Okay, but please hurry," Margaret nodded obediently and turned to leave.


    As she left, Daniel¡¯s expression darkened as he looked at his son. "So, did you find him?"


    "I did. A group of pirates operating near the Paradise Whirlpool has been targeting fishing and cargo ships. Margaret was taken by them."


    "Good. Send the Royal Titan over. Leave no one behind; we must make those who provoke Hefa pay the price!"

 **Chapter 72: Returning to the Island for Rest**

    In the captain''s cabin of the Narwhal, Charles was intently studying the nautical charts spread out before him. He had marked the Project Experiment Interactive Island and the Third Laboratory, noting the anomalies associated with both locations, trying to discern a connection between them.


    "Do you think the people from the Sea of Earth brought them down in the first place?" one of his crew members suggested.


    Charles shook his head. "Then why is there no trace of them in the Sea of Earth? Historical records, myths¡ª even the Sun God Cult''s revelations only mention the exalted Sun God, not even a messenger."


    "Who knows? If it were me, I¡¯d say just forget about them. Let them do what they want; they¡¯re all dead now anyway."


    "That doesn¡¯t make sense. The Foundation not only possesses advanced technology but also has a vast collection of relics. Their existence can''t be so quiet. I feel like our search for the surface entrance is somehow tied to them."


    "If you really want to think that way, why not think bigger? What if there was a cataclysm on the surface, and they brought the remaining humans underground to survive? I feel like I¡¯ve read something like that in the Bible¡ªNoah''s Ark!"


    Charles felt a surge of irritation as the long-forgotten whispers in his ears grew louder.


    "Creek~" The door opened, and Deep cautiously poked his head in, holding a plate.


    "Captain, the sailors and I caught a glowing giant crab, and I brought you the best meat from its claws."


    On the plate were long strips of white meat that looked incredibly tender.


    "Put it on the table; next time, knock before coming in," Charles replied, his eyes never leaving the charts.


    Deep quietly set the plate down, preparing to leave, but Charles called him back. When Deep saw Charles holding a mask out to him, his breath quickened.


    "You wanted a relic, right? Here," Charles said, handing over the unmoving clown mask.


    Deep''s face lit up with joy; he had seen the power of this item before and couldn''t believe the captain was giving it to him.


    Just as the excited Deep reached out to take it, Charles pulled it back. He looked seriously at his first mate, explaining the rules of using the item. He wanted a capable assistant, not someone whose mind was filled with various personalities.


    Hesitating at Charles''s words, Deep ultimately reached out to accept it. Holding the mask, he said, "Captain, I¡¯ll be careful."


    "Now go. Oh, and bring the doctor over," Charles said, rubbing his forehead.Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    "Hey, just like that, you gave it to that kid?" Richard''s voice chimed in, and he grabbed a piece of crab meat, shoving it into his mouth.


    "We won''t be using that thing anyway; giving it to him can enhance our overall strength," Charles replied, swallowing the crab meat and returning to the charts.


    Before long, the doctor hobbled in on his iron leg. "You called for me?"


    "I need more medicine; the auditory hallucinations are getting worse," Charles looked up at him.


    "Worse again?" The doctor examined Charles with a puzzled expression.


    After a while, he placed his iron hand on the table and said, "You know I can only suppress the curse of the gods, right?"


    "Of course, you mentioned that before."


    The doctor continued, "I do have another medication that can eliminate your hallucinations, but if you use that, your life won''t last long."


    "Is there no other way?"


    "You either return to the island to rest for a few months while I help you adjust with other medications, or you find someone else to remove the curse of the gods."


    Before Charles could respond, the doctor added, "I suggest you choose the former. In all my years at sea, I¡¯ve never seen anyone treat a divine curse, and your current condition is a combination of the curse and the mental pollution from the sea. The simplest way to alleviate it is to rest on the island."


    Looking at the islands on the chart, a hint of hesitation crossed Charles''s face. The entrance to the surface was among those islands, and stopping now felt worse than death.


    The doctor seemed to understand Charles''s thoughts, leaning in closer with a terrifying expression. "I know you¡¯re not afraid of death; you¡¯d sacrifice your life for your goals. But can¡¯t you think about your crew? The chief engineer came to me for help the other day; his hallucinations are severe. He¡¯s been afraid to tell you, worried it would delay your plans."


    Charles''s heart sank. "Besides James, who else has hallucinations?"


    "Aside from a few newcomers, most of the others have some degree of it. I can treat their hallucinations, but I can¡¯t help with their mental strain. Don¡¯t you think you¡¯ve been pushing too hard lately? I¡¯ve never seen a captain so diligent in exploration."


    Charles''s fingers rhythmically tapped the table as he fell silent.


    After a few seconds, he lifted his head. "Got it. After this trip back, I¡¯ll take some time off."


    The doctor forced a grim smile, patting Charles on the shoulder. "Remember, I mean a thorough rest. You¡¯re still young; don¡¯t overexert yourself."


    With that, he lifted his iron leg and limped out.


    The journey back to the island was uneventful. Days later, the light from the Coral Island lighthouse swept over the Narwhal as they returned home.


    As they approached the brightly lit port, every crew member''s face beamed with excitement¡ªeveryone except Charles.


    Once at the dock, Charles gathered everyone on deck to announce the temporary halt of operations.


    "Everyone, take this time to rest well. I¡¯ll have Lily¡¯s mouse notify you when we¡¯re resuming. You¡¯re dismissed."


    At this news, the crew members wore happy expressions. Though they¡¯d earned plenty of money on the ship, their time on land had been far too short. Now they could finally take a proper break.


    Once the crew dispersed, Charles took the Narwhal into the shipyard for maintenance. Just as people need rest, so did the ship.


    Watching the layers of barnacles being scraped off the hull, Charles waved goodbye to the suspended Narwhal and turned to leave.


    Exiting the shipyard, he headed straight to the Explorer''s Association; he still had one more task to complete.


    Upon entering the bustling hall of the Explorer''s Association, Charles found it lively, with various captains chatting in groups, exchanging relics and information.


    Life at sea had blurred the dates for him, and he realized today was Saturday.


    Navigating through the crowd, his eyes quickly scanned for familiar faces, and he soon spotted Elizabeth, who was chatting happily with a few well-known captains while embracing a young lady.

 **Chapter 73: The Price of Assistance**

    "Hey, Charles! Long time no see. Where have you been?" William, looking a bit disheveled, raised his drink.


    Charles glanced at the ordinary-looking girl beside Elizabeth. "Who is this...?"


    "This is Charlie''s daughter. Charlie''s passed away, and she''s taken over as captain of his exploration ship," a nearby chubby man answered enthusiastically.


    Charlie? Richard immediately recalled the dark-faced middle-aged man with a hooked nose.


    "What happened to him?" Charles asked, a bit taken aback. After all this time as an explorer, he still struggled to adapt to the frequent deaths around him.


    William let out a burp and chuckled. "He¡¯s dead, so what? Doesn¡¯t matter how he died."


    A wave of sadness washed over Charles. It was Charlie who had helped him gain vital information about the Sunlight in Sodom, and he had wanted to thank him. Now, it turned out that was their last meeting.


    Turning to the girl, Charles carefully chose his words. "I was a friend of your father''s. If you ever face difficulties, feel free to come to me."


    Since others had helped him without asking for anything in return, he felt it was only right to look after Charlie''s daughter.


    The chubby man winked at the girl. "Hey, little one, Charles here is quite impressive. If you ask him for a living island, he might just pull it off."


    The daughter of Charlie smiled shyly at Charles. "Thank you. Dad mentioned you."


    Seeing her innocent smile made Charles want to dissuade her from getting involved in this dangerous world. Who knew what the treacherous seas would do to her? But it was not his place to interfere.


    Charles then shifted his gaze to the voluptuous woman lounging on the sofa. This was the reason he had come. "Can you step out for a moment?"


    Elizabeth managed a slight smirk before forcing it away, feigning indifference. "Not today. I''m a bit tied up."


    Nearby, William and a few familiar faces burst into laughter, clearly recognizing the awkward tension between them.


    Charles waved the feminine earring in front of him and walked toward the door.


    Seeing the earring, Elizabeth''s expression turned serious. She released the girl and quickly followed Charles.


    As the two left, the other captains began to murmur among themselves.


    "What do you think their relationship is?"


    "What else could it be? That kind of relationship."This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    "I thought Elizabeth only liked women. Is she switching things up now? I thought she was just experimenting."


    "Who knows? Maybe she just wants to try something new."


    "With a woman like that, Charles must be exhausted every night."


    "Yeah, one could easily be worth two."


    At the entrance, the two stopped. "My illusion earring¡ªhow did it end up with you?" Elizabeth''s expression was grave.


    Charles remained silent, handing the earring back to her. He then reached out to pull off her eye patch, revealing a black void identical to the shells on the island.


    Elizabeth impatiently pushed his hand away. "Answer my question. I lost this relic on a highly dangerous island. How did you get it?"


    Charles looked out at the bustling port, pausing for a few seconds before calmly recounting everything that had happened on the island.


    After a moment of silence, he slowly said, "I don''t dislike you. Honestly, it''s flattering to have a beautiful woman so interested in me. But I''m sorry; I have important matters to attend to, and I can''t agree to anything."


    Elizabeth brushed a stray white hair from her face and let out a dry laugh. "So that''s it. You feel obligated because my other eye helped you?"


    Her expression suddenly turned cold as she turned to walk back into the hall. "There''s no need for that. That was my other eye''s intention, not mine. Just pretend nothing happened."


    Charles activated his ring to block her path and then pulled out a stack of papers, handing them to her.


    Elizabeth looked at him in confusion, then opened the papers. As she read, her eyes widened in disbelief.


    "There¡¯s freshwater on the island?!" Her voice rose in pitch from sheer astonishment.


    "I''ve explored most of the island. The most dangerous part is 1002; the details are all written here. If you can figure out how to deal with it, that place could become a new island."


    Elizabeth''s hands trembled as she held the papers. She couldn''t believe that this young man was giving her such valuable information.


    "If... if this is my eye''s way of repaying you, then I can''t accept this!" Elizabeth struggled to return the papers, but her hands wouldn''t move.


    "Take it. This information isn''t of much use to me. Our goals are different, and since you were the first to explore that island, it should belong to you," Charles said, turning to head toward the lively port area.


    Elizabeth stood there, watching Charles walk away, her expression complex.


    "That''s right, we¡¯re that generous. A living island? We can give it away without batting an eye."


    Charles caught the sarcasm in Richard''s voice. "Elizabeth saved us on that island. I don''t want to owe anyone. Plus, for us, one ship is enough for exploring islands."


    "If you want to repay her, you could offer yourself! Do you think you''re some kind of domineering CEO? Just hand over a living island like that? A living island!"


    "1002 isn''t that easy to deal with. We can''t waste time in a place like that. Remember, our goal is to return to the surface, not to reign over this cursed place."


    "That seems a bit reckless."


    "What do you want to do? Ask for it back?"


    Richard fell silent for a moment. "Well, it¡¯s already given away. Asking for it back would be embarrassing..."


    Just then, Charles felt something unusual. He reached out his left hand and tossed a shifty-looking thief into the muddy ground.


    Transparent tendrils snaked out to retrieve the thief''s wallet, and then he grabbed the thief''s right hand, lifting it and then stomping down hard on his forearm.


    "Crack!" A chilling scream echoed as the thief''s bone bent at an awkward angle.


    Watching the unfortunate thief, the nearby crowd quickly backed away in fear.


    Throwing the unlucky thief aside, Charles wandered aimlessly through the streets.


    Fishermen with nets, brazen gang members, and groups of sailors were all busy with their own affairs. Among them, Charles felt like a rock in a raging current, completely out of place.


    The doctor had told him to rest, but he had no idea what that meant. Truly relaxing was something he hadn''t experienced in a long time.


    It seemed more challenging than exploring islands.

 **Chapter 74: Milk Oysters**

    "How about you let me take over for a while? You have nothing to do, but I have plenty on my plate," Richard''s voice suddenly echoed in Charles''s mind.


    After a moment of contemplation, Charles readily relinquished control of his body. He was curious to see what the other version of himself would do in this situation.


    The confused expression on Charles''s face was instantly replaced by exaggerated joy. He pushed off the ground and soared into the air, using the shoulder of a nearby laborer to propel himself onto the rooftop.


    With swift movements, Richard hopped across rooftops, eventually diving into a bar flashing with neon lights¡ªthe largest bar in the port district, "Carnival Night."


    He danced his way to the bar counter and lightly tapped a small metal bell with his black blade. "Ding!"


    Everyone in the bar turned to look, curiosity lighting up their faces. The regulars knew what that sound meant.


    "Hey, everyone! Today, I¡¯m buying drinks for everyone!! Let¡¯s get this party started!!"


    Cheers erupted from the crew members in the bar, nearly shaking the roof.


    Richard laughed heartily, pulling a scantily clad waitress into an embrace and downing a drink from her tray.


    In contrast to the aloof Charles, the vivacious Richard was a natural at making friends. Although they had just met, he quickly mingled with nearly everyone in the bar.


    His jokes had everyone rolling with laughter, and his coin tricks left people amazed.


    To show off, he casually handed various relics to patrons to play with, and the atmosphere in the bar shifted to center around him.


    Charles, controlling his left eye, watched the reflection of his laughing self in the glass of a drink.


    To his eyes, that distorted smiling face looked more like a cry. For the first time, Charles felt a resonance with Richard; after all, they were both just high-spirited individuals longing for home, albeit reacting differently.


    "Hahaha!!" Charles suddenly thought of something amusing and began to laugh uncontrollably, slapping his thigh until tears streamed down his face.


    The reflection of the distorted Charles in the glass was raised and poured into his darkened mouth.


    As drink after drink went down, Charles''s consciousness gradually faded under the influence of alcohol.


    Time passed, and when he finally regained consciousness, a splitting headache greeted him. The scenery before him was still a bit dizzying. He tapped his head on the left side, and his vision finally cleared.


    At that moment, he realized he was lying on a rope, with drunken patrons and tilted chairs below him.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    Pushing himself off the rope with his hands, he stepped on the ground and walked out of the bar.


    Charles moistened his dry mouth and mentally asked, "So, how was that? Did it help?"


    "Quit the chatter; I¡¯m tired. I need to rest!"


    It seemed Richard''s method wasn''t very effective. A slight smile crept onto Charles''s face as he blended into the crowd, his thoughts expanding.


    "How did I used to relax on the surface? Playing on my phone, video games? Arguing with my sister?"


    "When I first arrived in the Sea of Earth, I remember often going to bars with other sailors to drink and chat. At that time, everything here felt fresh and intriguing. When did I start to become so impatient?"


    Charles raised his gaze to the dark ceiling above.


    "It seems like it was when I realized I wasn''t the chosen one, when I understood I could die here at any moment, and when I recognized that my hopes of going home were fading. That inner torment made my heart grow increasingly anxious."


    "But now it¡¯s different. I¡¯ve finally found my way home; I just don¡¯t know if the outside world is still mine."


    He shook his head vigorously, trying to clear his mind of such thoughts. He was out to relax today; he didn''t want to think about these things.


    When Charles came back to his senses, he realized he had drifted away from the port area and into the lively interior of the island.


    Noticing the bonfires on the streets, he suddenly remembered that today was the Coral Island Landing Festival. Every island celebrated the day they claimed their territory as a significant holiday, and today happened to be Coral Island''s day.


    It was a joyous festival. The islanders donned their finest clothes to celebrate, and the cheerful atmosphere infected everyone, their steps light with happiness.


    Musicians on the roadside played violins, trumpets, and drums. Islanders surrounded them, dancing with fervor, while those who couldn¡¯t dance cheered on the performers with extraordinary enthusiasm.


    Charles strolled along with the crowd, soaking in the laughter and festive spirit, feeling himself being drawn into their joy.


    This festival oddly reminded him of the Spring Festival back home, though it lacked the firecrackers and red decorations.


    "Gurgle..." The sound of his stomach broke his reverie. After a night of heavy drinking, he was feeling a bit hungry.


    He approached a street vendor, pulled out four coins, and bought a spider crab leg, cracking the shell open to eat.


    The grilled crab meat was incredibly chewy. As he bit into the snow-white meat, the fresh flavor burst in his mouth.


    Though a single crab leg didn¡¯t contain much meat, it opened up his appetite. His eyes scanned the surroundings, searching for his next target.


    Soon, the sweet aroma of milk caught his attention. Following the scent, he arrived at a small stall where a portly old man with a white beard was quickly stirring fresh milk and oysters on a griddle with two spatulas.


    Seeing the familiar face, Charles called out, "I¡¯ll have a serving, please."


    "Sure! Just a moment, it¡¯ll be ready soon." Old John worked swiftly, but after a few seconds, he suddenly felt the voice was familiar. He looked up, and excitement lit up his face. "Ha! Captain! Long time no see!"


    Looking at his former first mate, Charles pointed at the stall. "Aren''t you supposed to be retired onshore?"


    "Ah, you know my character. Before the money even warms in my hand, it¡¯s already gone to the casino and the ladies'' beds. But don¡¯t underestimate my little stall; I¡¯ve calculated, and I earn more than when I was at sea!!"


    Glancing at the patches on his pants, Charles pretended not to notice and nodded. "That¡¯s good. At least there¡¯s no danger to your life."


    Old John chuckled heartily and continued, "I heard you really bought an exploration ship? Is there still a crew position available? Not that I¡¯m short on money, but I just feel the sea is more interesting. Staying on this island is so dull. The locals look down on me as soon as they hear I¡¯ve been to sea. Damn it, I went to be a crew member, not a pirate!"


    Charles paused for a second and shook his head. "Sorry, the ship''s crew is full."


    He didn¡¯t want Old John to take any risks. Life on the island might be poor, but at least he could live to an old age.


    Old John¡¯s face fell in disappointment but quickly masked it with indifference. "Oh, no problem. I was just asking. Your milk oysters will be ready soon."

 **Chapter 75: Rest**

    The sound of oyster shells clinking against the iron griddle filled the air as a steaming cup of milk oysters was placed before Charles.


    Just as he was about to reach for his wallet, Old John waved his hand, stopping him. "This time, it¡¯s on me. It¡¯s the Landing Festival today, and business is booming; I don¡¯t need this little bit."


    Charles pinched a bill from his wallet, gave it a quick shake, and the money flew into the cash box. "Next time, then. I just happened to have some change."


    Without waiting for a response, Charles grabbed the milk oysters and swiftly disappeared into the crowd.


    "Ah, that kid''s doing well now. If only I hadn¡¯t gotten off the ship back then," Old John mused, rifling through the cash box. To his surprise, he found a half-gold coin wrapped inside the bill that had just flown in.


    As he savored the creamy oysters, Charles looked around at the street performances. Nearby, the theater had set up a stage on the street, and actors in various costumes were energetically performing a new play.


    The story seemed to revolve around a love affair involving the governor of Coral Island. After watching for a while, the audience began to shake their heads; everyone on the island knew Governor Nico was fickle, falling in love with anyone he met, making such a romantic tragedy utterly implausible.


    Wandering through the celebrating crowd, Charles gradually melded into the joyful islanders.


    ¡°Daddy, look! That¡¯s the uncle who stabbed me with a knife the other day!¡±


    Hearing the child¡¯s voice, Charles quickly turned around, only to see Lily¡¯s family across the street, looking at him in horror.


    ¡°What a coincidence, running into them here,¡± Charles thought pleasantly, nodding in their direction.


    The Oliver couple seemed startled and quickly scooped up their daughter, rushing toward a makeshift police station nearby.


    Chuckling softly, Charles continued on his way, encountering a circus where a rare lion roared in its cage, causing the islanders to scream in surprise.


    With aerialists, clowns on unicycles, and lions jumping through hoops, various performances unfolded before Charles, revealing the vibrant entertainment scene on the island.


    Though unsure of the effect, participating in the festival celebrations lifted his spirits significantly.


    After wandering outside all day, he headed home with an assortment of foods, including cheap grilled spider crab legs and expensive roasted beef shanks.


    These were all for Lily; although he was full, he still needed to feed the little mouse at home.Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    ¡°Lily, I brought you some¡ª¡± Charles pushed open the door, only to stop short at the unexpected sight inside.


    Elizabeth, dressed up beautifully, rushed toward him with excitement.


    Before Charles could say anything, his mouth was covered. Elizabeth¡¯s enthusiasm was beyond his expectations.


    ¡°Wait... the mouse,¡± he mumbled through her hand.


    ¡°I¡¯ve chased them away.¡±


    They were so close that Elizabeth¡¯s sweet scent wafted over to Charles, making him feel light-headed as if he had drunk fine wine.


    Suddenly, with a swift motion, Elizabeth pushed the back door closed with a loud bang.


    After a long while, lying on the bed, Charles stared at the ceiling, feeling the softness of Elizabeth beside him, and his head began to throb again.


    He had thought everything with this woman was over, yet here they were tangled up again.


    ¡°Elizabeth, I actually¡ª¡± Charles started to say, but his words were silenced by her soft hand.


    Elizabeth gazed deeply into his eyes. ¡°This doesn¡¯t mean anything. I¡¯m not trying to tie you down. You go about your business. Whenever you¡¯re tired, come back; my position as the governor of this island will always have a place for you.¡±


    At that moment, Elizabeth was not her usual assertive self; instead, she radiated a gentle, youthful warmth.


    With such words hanging in the air, Charles felt it inappropriate to say anything further. If he rejected her again, he wouldn¡¯t be able to face himself.


    After giving him a lingering kiss, Elizabeth reluctantly left, needing to assemble a fleet for her new role as governor.


    Sighing, Charles got up from the bed and headed toward the bathroom.


    Just as he emerged feeling refreshed, he noticed Lily, the white mouse, anxiously pacing around the room.


    ¡°Will she smell something?¡± Charles thought, quickly moving to the window and opening it. As he turned around to speak, his eye caught a glimpse of a torn red corset on the floor, causing his heart to skip a beat.


    But Lily didn¡¯t notice it at all. She rushed up to Charles, exclaiming, ¡°Mr. Charles! The big guy has been arrested by the police!¡±


    Charles¡¯s expression turned serious. ¡°James has been arrested? What happened?¡±


    ¡°That tall lady gave me a lot of echo coins and told me to go buy food. I went to get grilled fish, but that big fat guy wouldn¡¯t sell it to me and hit me with a broom, and then I¡ª¡±


    ¡°Get to the point!¡± Charles threw on his coat, grabbing Lily as he jumped out the window.


    ¡°I went to find the big guy¡¯s wife to buy bread, and when I got there, I saw a lot of blood in the store. That lady was crying on the floor. I asked her, and she told me that the big guy had been arrested by the police.¡±


    ¡°Do you know which district?¡±


    ¡°Yes! The seventh district. A friend of mine snuck into the detention center and saw the big guy inside. They were beating him with sticks.¡±


    Riding the steam car, Charles soon arrived at the precinct in the seventh district. The small four-story building, painted black, stood out starkly, with uniformed officers coming in and out.


    Charles entered, quickly assessed the situation, and headed straight for the chief¡¯s office.


    Pushing the door open, he found an elderly man in uniform writing something with his head down.


    Charles pulled out a chair and sat directly in front of him. ¡°Did you just arrest someone named James?¡±


    The chief, Director Reno, looked up at the young man in front of him, his expression changing as he caught a whiff of the sea.


    He had a strong aversion to anything related to the sea; to him, anyone from the ocean was a danger. No matter their identity, they treated life recklessly. They wouldn¡¯t care about the police, and if they killed someone, they would just escape to another island.


    Reno waved his hand, and the officers at the door, who had been ready with their guns, stepped back.


    ¡°May I ask who you are?¡±


    ¡°Charles. You¡¯ve arrested my crew member; how much to get him released?¡±


    ¡°Your crew member has killed someone; how could we possibly release him?¡± Reno''s eyes widened in disbelief.


    ¡°Do you think this is my first time on Coral Island? How many times has the Sea Serpent Gang¡¯s little ears been caught by you? How much? If you don¡¯t agree, I can use my own methods to resolve this.¡±

 **Chapter 76: The Dagger Gang**

    ¡°May I ask your identity?¡± Reno¡¯s voice was cautious.


    ¡°My ship is an exploration vessel. You¡¯ve arrested my chief engineer,¡± Charles said, gently patting Lily¡¯s back to calm the anxious young gunner.


    ¡°Uh, an exploration vessel¡­¡± Reno¡¯s hand, which had been gripping a gun under the table, relaxed, but his expression turned troubled. People from the sea were already hard to deal with, and those from exploration ships were even more so. Each of them possessed considerable skills, having ventured to dangerous islands. He wondered why he, a mere administrator of civilian crimes, had to get involved in such trouble.


    Usually, it was the governor¡¯s navy that dealt with troublesome characters like these.


    After hesitating for a moment, Reno hurried to close the door, his expression bitter. ¡°If it were just a random person without backing, I could let him go for your sake. But your crew member killed the brother of the Dagger Gang¡¯s boss. If I release him, we¡¯ll be in huge trouble.¡±


    ¡°Where is my crew member? I need to see him,¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s in the detention room. I¡¯ll take you there right away.¡± Reno stood up and quickly opened the door.


    Entering the holding area under the watchful eyes of armed, dark-skinned guards, Charles felt the tension in the air.


    When James, suspended from the ceiling, saw Charles enter, he instantly began to struggle excitedly.


    Charles swiftly pulled the dirty rag from James''s mouth. ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡±


    ¡°Captain! That guy was undressing Mosika in front of me! I... I just couldn¡¯t hold back!¡± James¡¯s eyes were bloodshot.


    Charles drew his black blade and cut the handcuffs off James¡¯s wrists, causing the big man to drop to the ground.


    ¡°Sir, you can¡¯t¡ª!¡± Reno exclaimed, panic evident on his face.


    ¡°If anyone gives you trouble, just mention my name. I¡¯m staying on the third floor of the Bat Hotel in the port district.¡±


    As Charles led James out, he sensed the eyes watching them from behind. Clearly, the Dagger Gang had people keeping tabs on them.


    ¡°Take your wife and come to my place,¡± Charles said calmly to James.


    ¡°Captain, I... I killed someone... What should I do? I don¡¯t want to go to jail; Mosika needs me.¡± The big man¡¯s face was filled with despair.


    ¡°Do as I say, don¡¯t panic. This will blow over quickly.¡± Charles patted him on the shoulder.If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    James nodded, forcing himself to calm down, and rushed toward Mosika¡¯s bakery.


    Soon, Charles¡¯s room felt a bit crowded. Deep was squatting on the floor, gnawing on a cold beef shank.


    Audrick stood in the corner, shaking a glass filled with red liquid.


    ¡°Captain, this place is too small. Why not buy a bigger house?¡± Deep said after swallowing a mouthful of beef.


    Charles ignored the first mate¡¯s complaints and turned to Lily. ¡°Why did you call them over?¡±


    ¡°I was worried about danger! More people means more strength! I had my friends come too; they should be on their way.¡±


    ¡°No need; send them all back. This is just a small matter and will be resolved soon.¡±


    Holding his wife¡¯s hand, James deeply bowed to Charles. ¡°Captain, I¡¯m sorry. It was my impulsiveness.¡±


    ¡°You weren¡¯t impulsive. If you can¡¯t even protect your own woman, I would truly look down on you,¡± Charles replied, glancing at Mosika.


    She wasn¡¯t a stunning beauty but had a pleasant, simple appearance that was comforting to behold.


    At that moment, a commotion erupted outside the window. Deep stood up and pushed it open. ¡°Captain, some guys are clearing the streets.¡±


    Charles walked over and saw a group of menacing-looking individuals brandishing various firearms, driving people off the streets. Each of them had the same dagger tattoo on their necks.


    From the crowd emerged a burly man with tattoos on his face. As he opened his mouth, revealing a mouthful of rotten teeth, he shouted, ¡°You motherf***ers! You dare come to the port district after messing with my people? Today, I¡¯ll let my brothers have their way with your women right in front of you! Get your asses out here!¡±


    Seeing the gang¡¯s arrogance, Charles felt somewhat uninterested; they were far less intimidating than the creatures of the sea.


    Raising his revolver, he fired several shots, extinguishing the oil and gas lamps on the street.


    Deep donned his mask and jumped out the window, screams erupting from below.


    Audrick swiftly transformed into a bat and flew down.


    Inside, Mosika was terrified by the outside noise, her face pale as she clutched her husband tightly, eyes shut tight.


    James gently comforted his wife, his tenderness contrasting sharply with his imposing exterior.


    Standing by, Charles felt oddly out of place. He pushed himself off the window and flipped down.


    Seeing his captain leap out, James felt anxious and wanted to help, but he couldn¡¯t let go of his wife.


    ¡°What... what do you do? You said you were just an ordinary sailor on a fishing boat. Does your captain look like a fisherman?¡± Mosika cried, her eyes red.


    James sighed, a hint of bitterness on his face. He gently embraced his wife. ¡°Dear, I¡¯m sorry for lying to you, but if it weren¡¯t for the captain¡¯s help today, we wouldn¡¯t have made it back. We should be grateful to him.¡±


    With his dark vision, Charles could see everything clearly. Under Deep and Audrick¡¯s coordinated attacks, the so-called Dagger Gang quickly fell apart. Just moments ago, those gang members, who had been so arrogant, now shot in fear at the empty darkness.


    Deep confidently maneuvered through the hail of bullets, arriving right in front of their leader. With a flash of his dagger, the man¡¯s gun-hand fell to the ground.


    The Dagger Gang¡¯s leader clutched his wrist, retreating while screaming in agony.


    ¡°You island trash, do you not understand the situation? You dare to provoke the crew of an exploration vessel?¡± The masked youth tilted his head, questioning him with a hint of pride.


    Sensing danger, the leader stammered, ¡°I... I didn¡¯t know! This isn¡¯t my fault! That big guy never said he worked on an exploration vessel! If my brother knew he worked on an exploration vessel, he would never have dared to mess with him¡ª¡±


    Before he could finish, a black blade flew through the air, embedding itself in his neck, spraying crimson blood everywhere. The man¡¯s eyes were wide with disbelief as he died.


    ¡°Captain, can we wait for him to finish?¡± Deep complained before executing a backflip away.

 **Chapter 77: The People on the Exploration Ship**

    Just as Charles was about to pull the black blade from the corpse, an elderly voice interrupted him. ¡°Does killing relieve your symptoms? How interesting.¡±


    Charles turned to see the ship¡¯s doctor, who had appeared out of nowhere, jotting down notes with a pen in hand.


    ¡°What are you doing here?¡±


    ¡°Your pet mouse dragged me over. I thought something serious had happened, and it turns out to be this?¡± The doctor stepped into the pool of blood with his iron leg.


    He sprinkled some powder over the corpse, and with a gurgling sound, the body began to rapidly decompose.


    Soon, Deep and the others returned to the room, their faces alight with excitement. Deep was playing with his mask, as if the lives they had just taken held no value in his eyes.


    James stood up, bowing deeply to everyone. ¡°Thank you all for your help.¡±


    Charles¡¯s transparent tendrils supported him back up. Curiously, he asked, ¡°Couldn¡¯t you handle those people yourself?¡±


    The abilities of the purple pyramid were more than sufficient to deal with the Dagger Gang and the police who had pursued him. He was curious why his chief engineer had waited for them to act.


    ¡°I¡­¡± James¡¯s face turned red, unable to find the words.


    Charles understood the big guy¡¯s nature. To put it nicely, he was too kind-hearted; to put it bluntly, he was a bit dense. While the other crew members drank and sought women, he had saved all his money according to his deceased mother¡¯s wishes, intending to use it for marriage and buying a house.


    Working on an exploration ship, he treated it like a nine-to-five job.


    ¡°While we don¡¯t bully others, it doesn¡¯t mean we allow them to stand over us and urinate. Remember, we aren¡¯t the common folk of Coral Island; the governor¡¯s laws don¡¯t bind us.¡±


    Those who didn¡¯t care for their own lives were even less likely to care for others¡¯ lives. This was why the islanders held a mix of fear and disdain for those from the sea.


    Hearing the captain¡¯s profound words, James¡¯s expression turned complex. He had thought his job was no different from those on the island, merely exchanging labor for money, but it was now clear it was entirely different.


    ¡°Captain, killing so many people¡­ won¡¯t it cause you trouble?¡± James hesitated to ask.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine; this is the port district, and those who died were all worthless. This small matter won¡¯t disturb the island¡¯s heart. Once this is over, take your wife back,¡± Charles said, patting him on the shoulder.


    James awkwardly bid farewell to his companions and walked out with his wife.


    ¡°Wait.¡± At Charles¡¯s call, James stopped immediately.


    ¡°Go find a blacksmith and have them make you a set of armor and weapons that you can use when you grow larger. This will greatly enhance your combat power and defense.¡±Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    ¡°Okay¡­ okay.¡± James nodded with a forced smile.


    On the quiet street, Mosika and James walked in silence, both holding their thoughts. What had just happened was a significant shock to them.


    Mosika glanced at her husband and softly said, ¡°Can you get off the ship? My bakery is enough for us to live on; you can¡ª¡±


    James¡¯s face showed hesitation before he shook his head vigorously. ¡°The captain saved my life; unless he stops going to sea, I can¡¯t leave the ship.¡±


    Seeing her usually obedient husband refuse her request, Mosika lowered her head in disappointment. After spending so much time together, she knew her husband was gentle but also stubborn; once he made a decision, it wouldn¡¯t change easily.


    ¡°Then¡­ is your job dangerous?¡±


    Hearing the wavering in his wife¡¯s voice, James quickly reassured her, ¡°It¡¯s not dangerous at all; I¡¯m just a turbine operator. What danger could there be?¡±


    After speaking, James pulled her into his embrace. Mosika didn¡¯t resist, slowly wrapping her arms around his sturdy body.


    ¡°I don¡¯t care what you do; I just hope you can always come back safely. Our child can¡¯t grow up without a father¡­¡± Tears streamed from Mosika¡¯s eyes.


    ¡°Mm, I promise you.¡± Their faces drew closer.


    ¡°Bang!¡± James stumbled as someone bumped into him.


    ¡°Go home and kiss; what are you doing in the street?¡± The doctor, holding a wine jug, glared at them as he limped past, heading toward the island¡¯s entrance.


    The incident with the Dagger Gang seemed like a mere interlude, making no significant waves on Coral Island.


    Charles didn¡¯t care. If anything did happen, he could always change islands.


    However, there was a change: every time Charles stepped outside, he felt the fearful gazes around him. People instinctively kept their distance as he walked through the streets.


    With the storm passing, Charles found himself troubled by the previous question: how to rest. The island festival wasn¡¯t an everyday occurrence.


    Finally, he relinquished control of his body, letting Richard take over.


    At first, Richard was ecstatic, exploring various entertainment venues. But after a week, he grew bored, rolling on the bed and shouting about how dull it was.


    In the end, both were high-spirited individuals; despite their differing personalities, they shared a similar inner desire to return home and not waste time in such places.


    After thinking it over, Charles suddenly remembered a few acquaintances at the Explorers¡¯ Association. He turned and headed toward the association, hoping to find a way to lift the curse of the deity among them.


    ¡°What did you say? They all went to sea?¡±


    Seeing Charles¡¯s shocked expression, the association staff nodded. ¡°Captain Elizabeth of the Black Rose found a living island. She invited all the captains she knew to form a fleet and went out to sea.¡±


    Frustrated, Charles walked out of the association, feeling helpless.


    ¡°Hey, do you have any ideas?¡± he mentally asked his other persona.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go find the old man. He said rest is the best remedy for hallucinations. Since he¡¯s a doctor, he should explain how to treat it.¡±


    Realizing this was a valid point, Charles turned and walked toward the island.


    The doctor had given him an address, and Charles soon found the doctor¡¯s location: an old inn.


    The doctor seemed impatient with Charles¡¯s arrival, fiddling with a few wires. ¡°What do you want now?¡±


    ¡°Are you trying to charge the black mirror?¡±


    ¡°None of your business. What do you want?¡± The doctor threw the wires behind him.


    ¡°How much longer do I need to rest? I feel like I¡¯ve rested enough.¡±


    The doctor leaned in, inspecting Charles¡¯s eyes for a moment before pulling out a chunk of foul-smelling slime from his pocket. ¡°Eat this.¡±


    Taking a deep breath, Charles tilted his head back and swallowed it whole. Instantly, the whispers around him grew loud, ringing in his ears, and everything before his eyes began to twist and warp.


    This state lasted a full three minutes before slowly returning to normal. The doctor shook his head at Charles, who was breathing heavily.


    ¡°Not enough time; continue. In a week, I¡¯ll bring the conditioning potion to you.¡±


    ¡°Old man, what counts as rest? I can¡¯t find a way to rest! I need to go to sea!¡± Richard, now in control of the body, exclaimed in frustration.


    ¡°As an exploration captain, you don¡¯t know how to have fun? Joy fruit, alcohol, gambling, women, psychedelic mushrooms¡ªanything, even painting like that blind man every day will do. Don¡¯t bother me; I¡¯m busy!¡±


    With a loud bang, the doctor slammed the door shut.

 **Chapter 78: Painting**

    Charles sat on the dock, watching a cargo ship unloading in the distance, and began to put brush to canvas.


    He sketched outlines, laid down color blocks, pressed shadows, and added reflections. Gradually, a uniquely styled watercolor landscape emerged on the canvas.


    Charles had never anticipated that the enhancements from 096 would also benefit his painting skills.


    ¡°How do you feel?¡± he asked his other persona in his mind.


    ¡°Not bad. Aren¡¯t the ambient colors a bit dark?¡± His hand, holding the brush, moved on its own, adding details.


    Initially, the doctor had merely suggested painting in passing, but Charles considered his options carefully and ultimately chose painting as a way to relieve stress.


    At first, he was just playing around, but as he began to depict scenes from his mind, he became increasingly absorbed. Family members, landscapes, various buildings¡ªeach watercolor painting, whether beautiful or not, brought him a sense of accomplishment.


    Regardless, Charles had achieved his goal. With this new hobby, he no longer thought about going to sea all day; he could quietly stay on the island, waiting for the island to wash away the pollution brought by the sea.


    Three months passed, and as Charles¡¯s painting skills improved, the fatigue and weariness on his face faded significantly.


    While he and his other persona were discussing their work, a group of sailors approached, casually draping their arms over each other¡¯s shoulders.


    One middle-aged man with a mole on his forehead noticed Charles painting.


    He leaned in for a closer look, exclaiming, ¡°Hey, look! This gentleman is painting our ship! It looks just like it!¡±


    A crowd of sailors gathered around, excitedly joining in.


    Charles wasn¡¯t fond of such attention and was about to leave with his canvas when the man with the mole approached him with a friendly smile. ¡°Sir, could you paint a picture for me?¡±


    Charles raised an eyebrow. ¡°What do you want me to paint?¡±


    ¡°Do you know the Spider Islands governed by Governor He? The cargo we¡¯re transporting is spider silk from there. My son has always wanted to know what it looks like. Could you paint a picture for him? He has never been to another island.¡±


    Seeing the man¡¯s hopeful expression, Charles thought for a moment before sitting back down and skillfully laying down color blocks on the canvas. ¡°Alright.¡±


    ¡°Great! Let me tell you about the islands. They¡¯re really scary! The trees and roofs are all covered in white spider silk, and the spiders there are huge¡ªmuch bigger than people!¡±This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    ¡°No need for details,¡± Charles interrupted, his brush moving skillfully across the paper.


    As the details filled in, a white, misty island harbor appeared on the canvas.


    Behind the dense human buildings, thick spider silk hung everywhere, with red glimmers hidden within¡ªthe eyes of the spiders. If one looked closely, they could even see the outlines of spiders larger than houses.


    ¡°Wow, this looks just like it! Have you been to that island before, painter?¡±


    The Spider Islands provided a vast amount of clothing materials for the humans of the sea. Having been a cargo ship captain for several years, Charles had indeed traveled that route.


    ¡°Thank you! With this, my son will be so happy,¡± the sailor said, taking the painting and running toward the dock exit.


    Seeing this, the other sailors eagerly approached Charles.


    ¡°Painter, could you paint a picture of He Fang Island? I¡¯ve never been there, but I¡¯ve heard it¡¯s the most prosperous island in the northern seas. I want to know what it looks like.¡±


    ¡°Sir painter, could you do a portrait? I¡¯m afraid if I die at sea, my daughter will forget what I look like.¡±


    A low, mournful foghorn cut through the chatter of the sailors.


    Charles¡¯s indifferent expression turned serious as he spotted a ship in the distance. Its hull bore the standard white triangle, identifying it as a ship of the Sun God Sect.


    He walked past the sailors toward the dock, his keen eyesight quickly spotting Kede standing at the bow. The once-friendly expression on Kede¡¯s face had vanished, replaced by the look of a gambler lost in a red haze of excitement and exhaustion.


    Before the ship had even anchored, Kede stumbled down the swaying gangplank, carrying a watermelon-sized box.


    ¡°Here! Give me the sea chart! Hurry!¡± The box was thrown over roughly.


    Inside the box was the head of a Sunni, wrapped in lime. His eyes were wide open, and even in death, Charles could see the malice and madness in them.


    ¡°You must have put in a lot of effort to kill him, huh?¡± Charles gripped the Sunni¡¯s hair, lifting it up.


    ¡°Give! Me! The! Sea! Chart!¡± Kede¡¯s teeth were clenched, his expression twisted as if he would swallow Charles whole if he didn¡¯t comply.


    ¡°Calm down.¡± Charles turned, holding the head, and walked toward his inn, a grim-faced Kede and his followers trailing behind.


    ¡°There are no signs of disguise, the skin is only a layer thick, and there are divine needles in the brain. It seems this thing is real,¡± Charles confirmed, tossing the head into a nearby foul-smelling garbage heap.


    Seeing the Sunni dead didn¡¯t stir much emotion in Charles. If he wanted to kill him, then Charles would naturally retaliate. This was merely using Kede¡¯s hand to eliminate an obstacle on the way home.


    With a creak, the door to Charles¡¯s lodging opened. Lily, who had been sketching at the table, jumped to the ground. ¡°Mr. Charles, you¡¯re back from your sketching so early today?¡±


    Charles picked her up, running his fingers through her smooth fur. Glancing at Kede, he said, ¡°Gather the crew. The rest time has been long enough.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡± Lily glanced back at Kede and quickly dashed out, the brown mice in the room following closely behind.


    ¡°Snap.¡± The page of the diary with the sea chart was displayed in front of Kede. The Sun God Sect¡¯s holy man trembled as he reached out with both hands to take it, but then hesitated, waving his hands at his subordinates.


    One of the Sun God Sect followers quickly brought over a metal square box.


    With a series of clicks and adjustments, Charles realized it was an old-fashioned camera.


    After taking a photo, Kede finally took the diary, leaning over it intently to read.


    After a long while, he looked up at Charles. ¡°Have the coordinates been verified?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve been to this island before.¡± Charles pointed to the island where 1002 existed. ¡°Based on its coordinates, we can easily deduce the locations of other islands.¡±


    ¡°Good! Very good! Excellent!! I¡¯m about to find the Land of Light!! Hahahaha!!!¡± Kede exclaimed, clapping his hands on the table like a child in glee.

 **Chapter 79: Cooperation**

    Kede''s ecstatic expression slowly twisted into a snarl as he turned to fix his gaze on Charles.


    "Captain Charles, thank you for so readily handing over the sea chart..."


    The followers of the Sun God Sect, expressionless, walked into the room, their eyes locked on Charles.


    Faced with the threat, Charles remained unfazed, looking at Kede with indifference.


    "What? You plan to tackle the remaining thirty-three islands all by yourself?"


    "As long as I have the sea chart, I can collaborate with other captains! The Land of Light must be discovered by me first," Kede replied, and at that moment, the followers revealed various firearms hidden beneath their robes.


    Charles''s left hand suddenly moved on its own, reaching for the lightning rod concealed in his coat.


    "Don''t move; he''s just bluffing," Charles suppressed the action of his other persona.


    Looking at Kede again, he continued, "Are you afraid that I might discover the Land of Light first and steal your precious Sun God?"


    Kede''s eyes narrowed with a hint of panic.


    Charles smirked and abruptly changed the topic. "At this moment, don¡¯t you need an experienced exploration captain even more? In fact, we don¡¯t have any real conflict, do we? You screw me over, I screw you over; that would just even things out."


    Kede''s face twitched as he released Charles¡¯s collar, redirecting his gaze to the sea chart in the diary.


    "I currently have three exploration ships. With your one, we¡¯ll have four. Each ship can explore an island every two months; we could find the ladder to the Land of Light in as little as two years!"


    Seeing the firearms of the Sun God followers slowly lower, Charles moved to sit at the opposite side of the table.


    "No, it¡¯s not that simple. Exploring unknown islands is fraught with danger. Can you guarantee that your three exploration ships will survive until the end? Besides, the King of Sodom knows about that place too."


    "It has to work! I¡¯m putting everything on the line! I must die in the Land of Light; only by dying there can I enter the kingdom of the Sun God!"


    Hearing this, Charles felt a twinge of pity; this guy was clearly a madman.


    "Don¡¯t you have anyone else in your church? Perhaps you could ask them for help."


    "Didn¡¯t you hear me? If they find out what I¡¯m doing, I¡¯m dead! And the old fogies at the cathedral won¡¯t believe a word you say!"


    Charles sighed, leaning forward to tap the sea chart with his finger.


    "Regardless, let¡¯s start the exploration. Tell me the targets for your three ships; we don¡¯t want to collide." This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    Kede pulled out a quill from an ink bottle and circled three islands on the chart. "We¡¯ll meet here in two months to exchange information."


    With that, he turned and walked straight toward the door.


    "Haha, this fool seems to be in for a tough time," Richard commented in Charles''s mind.


    "Don¡¯t mind him; the more devout these cultists are, the easier they are to manipulate," Charles remarked, drawing a circle on another island on the chart. "Our next target is here."


    With the help of Lily the mouse, the crew quickly gathered, and the repaired unicorn ship was ready to set sail once more.


    This time, what made the departure different was that James''s wife, Mosika, came personally to see her husband off. Once her true identity was revealed, James no longer hid anything.


    Watching them bid farewell on the dock, the single men on board felt a wave of jealousy.


    The doctor hobbled over to Charles, producing a gel. "Let¡¯s see how things have been going."


    Frowning, Charles swallowed it down. The ringing in his ears returned, but it was much better than before; at least the doctor still looked somewhat human and hadn¡¯t completely morphed into a monster.


    Three minutes later, the anomaly disappeared again. The doctor nodded with satisfaction, jotting down notes. "Whatever you¡¯ve been doing, keep it up. It¡¯s very effective in alleviating your mental pollution. As long as you continue, even with the curse of a god, I can guarantee you¡¯ll live to thirty."


    Charles ignored the old man¡¯s curse-like assurance. "How¡¯s the black mirror coming along? Just don¡¯t use electricity directly; that thing is delicate."


    The doctor didn¡¯t look up. "That thing is mine now; I have my own methods. You don¡¯t need to worry."


    "If you get it open, let me know," Charles said, curious about the contents of the tablet.


    The doctor didn¡¯t respond and turned to leave.


    Life at sea was as monotonous as usual, with no anomalies in sight.


    "Clack." Charles opened the door to the cockpit, where the second mate, Crona, was at the helm.


    "Captain, don¡¯t worry; we¡¯re still on a safe route. What could possibly go wrong?"


    "Don¡¯t let your guard down; safe routes can sometimes lead to trouble," Charles replied, glancing at the distant, blurry navigational marker. Fortunately, this time, the marker appeared normal, steadily approaching as the unicorn ship moved forward.


    "Captain, do you know about the volcanic islands in the southern seas? I was born there," Crona initiated small talk.


    "Oh," Charles replied nonchalantly, still checking the sea chart on the wall. The second mate was a bit chatty.


    "Do you know what they¡¯re famous for? Besides iron and copper, the oil from Levi whales is the most renowned. It can be used for lubricants, fuel, candles, and soap. The leftover residue can even be used as fuel; perhaps the fuel we use in the turbine room comes from my hometown."


    Charles was somewhat aware of this; during the early stages of the Industrial Revolution, whale oil from the Pacific was a crucial industrial material before oil was developed.


    "So how did you end up in the northern seas? It takes half a year just to get to Coral Island from the volcanic island by ship."


    Crona looked a bit helpless. "Actually, my father was the captain of a whaling ship. He wanted me to inherit his ship. But I didn¡¯t want to; Levi whales are at least a hundred meters long, and every year, ships get overturned by them, sinking to the depths."


    "So you left to avoid danger? To be honest, coming aboard my ship isn¡¯t the best choice."


    Crona shook his head. "I¡¯m not afraid of danger, but I¡¯m afraid my children will have to do this dangerous work. I want to change that."


    With a glimmer of hope in his voice, Crona continued, "Captain, you know, on my tenth birthday, my father took me to the heart of the island to celebrate. That visit completely changed my perspective. I found that some people there are truly happy; each of them has their own land and doesn¡¯t have to do anything. The renters send them echoes every month. They can be so happy just because they served as sailors on the governor¡¯s ship when they first arrived."


    "Don¡¯t worry; one day, you¡¯ll have your own land."


    "When that time comes, I¡¯ll bring my whole family over and let them all become islanders," Crona said, a flash of pain crossing his eyes as he seemed to recall something.

 **Chapter 80: The Swamp**

    "January 2, Year 9 of the Journey.


    It has been over twenty days since we set sail. The island we are exploring this time is quite far, and the resources on the Unicorn Ship are running low.


    If Island 1002 can be established as a new island, resupplying from there would be much easier.


    When I passed by that island, the devastation on its surface indicated that Elizabeth and 1002 were not faring well in their battle. It may take some time for this island to develop.


    However, that strange power from 1002 is indeed not easy to deal with. I hope everything goes smoothly for them.


    Kede has also begun his actions. Regardless, everything is moving in a positive direction. I wonder where Anna is now; perhaps I can... [crossed out]"


    After waiting for the ink to dry, Charles closed the diary and headed to the deck to begin his daily inspection of the ship.


    Just as he was about to push open the kitchen door, an excited Deep ran past him, holding a fishing rod with a jellyfish-like creature hanging from the hook.


    "Freddy! Come quick! I caught a crystal jellyfish! Can you make soup with it?"


    From the kitchen came the furious shout of Chef Freddy.


    "Get out of here! Stop hauling in all this nonsense! You can cook it yourself! I won¡¯t do it!"


    Charles walked into the kitchen, bypassing the two, and confirmed that there were no abnormalities inside.


    "Chef, the hardtack is starting to get infested with bugs; please pay attention," Charles interrupted their exchange.


    Freddy rushed over, assuring him that he would take care of it immediately, explaining that the infested ones were for the sailors, and the captain''s food was definitely fine.


    "What do you mean ''for the sailors''? Are sailors not human?" Deep argued back for the sake of his comrades.


    Charles didn¡¯t stop them; compared to the fear the crew had shown when entering unknown waters, they now had the leisure to argue. Indeed, humans adapt quickly.


    Exiting the kitchen, Charles walked toward other cabins. The inspection wasn¡¯t just about checking for anything crawling into the ship; other factors were equally important.


    Whether it was food, fuel, or the crew''s mental state, any small mistake could turn a ship into an iron coffin, endangering the lives of everyone on board.


    On the deck, in the cockpit, the turbine room, the crew''s lounge, kitchen, cargo hold, and water tank¡ªCharles meticulously checked every area. Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    Other captains might have different practices, but on his ship, Charles always conducted the inspections himself.


    Details determine success or failure; it was this attention to detail that had allowed him to survive at sea for so long.


    In fact, these tasks comprised most of a captain''s work¡ªsimple, monotonous, yet extremely important.


    "Captain! An island!" Hearing this news, Charles was momentarily stunned; according to the actual situation, they should still have three days until the target point.


    He hurried to the deck and saw the blurry outline of an island under the searchlight in the distance.


    Unlike the previous islands, this one was quite "tall." It resembled a flat-topped mountain more than an island; the surrounding cliffs were barren, and the platform above was so high that it was completely out of sight.


    Looking up at the imposing island, Charles waved his hand to signal the sailors to drop anchor, then turned to his vampire crew member. "Odric, fly up and take a look."


    Odric nodded and transformed into a bat, soaring into the sky.


    While waiting for his return, a puzzled Deep approached. "Captain, the anchor isn''t touching the bottom."


    "How can it not touch the bottom? We''re right next to the island!"


    Charles led him to the winch, discovering that the chain was indeed fully deployed. The Unicorn Ship''s anchor chain was over a hundred meters long, and yet it still couldn''t reach the bottom. What kind of structure was this island? A vertical telephone pole?


    After thinking for a moment, he said, "Then we won''t drop anchor. When we go ashore, Freddy and the sailors will stay on the ship to keep watch."


    Odric soon returned, his expression somewhat strange. "Captain, it''s a swamp up there."


    "A swamp?" Charles was taken aback by this answer; he hadn¡¯t expected a swampy terrain to appear on an island.


    "Regardless, let''s go up and take a look. Perhaps this island is a supply point for the ''King.''"


    With Odric''s help, a rope ladder was quickly laid out against the cliff. As Charles and the other crew members climbed up, they discovered that Odric was indeed correct: it was a swamp.


    This swamp was different from forest swamps; there were no trees, no flowers, no life¡ªonly wet mud, foul water, and thick fog.


    However, the swamp was not entirely devoid of features; various rocks, large and small, lay scattered in the muck.


    When fish meat was tossed into the mud, no creatures emerged to feed on it.


    Carefully stepping into the mud, Charles found that it wasn¡¯t very deep; the deepest part only reached his thighs. When he stepped with his right foot, he discovered that the ground beneath was solid.


    "Hey, buddy, doesn¡¯t this place look like a hot pot? Look at those stones; they resemble the white tofu in a lamb hot pot."


    Charles ignored the teasing voice in his head, scooping up some muddy water and bringing it to his nose. The distinctive scent of seawater mixed with the stench of decay filled his nostrils.


    The water in this swamp was seawater, of no use whatsoever.


    Charles waved his hand, signaling the others to follow.


    Everyone frowned at the harsh environment; no one liked filth, and walking through the swamp felt like stepping into a cesspool.


    Lily''s mice jumped into the water but quickly turned into black coal balls. Seeing this, the white mouse Lily clung tightly to Charles''s neck, refusing to let go.


    Although Charles had dark vision, the thick white fog obscured his sight, and in this place, he could see nothing.


    This environment reminded Charles of the first island he explored; he didn¡¯t want to make the same mistakes again. Periodically, he compared the number of crew members to the tally on his arm to ensure no one had mysteriously disappeared or appeared.


    The torches in the hands of the crowd pushed back the fog as they slowly made their way toward the center of the island.


    The muddy water of the swamp carried a certain chill; after only half an hour, Charles could barely feel his toes.


    Not daring to be careless, he had all the crew members stand on the rocks, waiting for their feet to regain sensation before continuing.


    Taking advantage of this opportunity, the crew stuffed food into their mouths; even if they weren¡¯t hungry, they needed to eat something to provide energy for their bodies.

 **Chapter 81: Disappearance**

    The atmosphere was somewhat oppressive, but the crew''s spirits remained stable. Compared to previous islands, this environment was merely unsettling and not the worst situation they had encountered.


    Sitting on a rock, Charles was engaged in a mental conversation with Richard.


    "This island doesn''t seem promising; it doesn''t look like it gets any sunlight," he remarked.


    "Exactly! It stinks here. If I were a repairman, I wouldn''t fix anything in this place," Richard replied.


    "Let''s explore first. Maybe the ''King'' intentionally disguised a supply island like this," Charles suggested.


    "Oh? If they really have been here, does that mean there could be relics?" Richard''s curiosity piqued.


    "Stop it! Haven''t we learned enough from the last time?" Charles admonished.


    "What am I joking about? Aren''t relics what have kept us alive? We owe our survival to their powers!" Richard countered.


    "The side effects of relics are extremely potent. Simply having more relics won''t make us stronger," Charles insisted.


    Just then, Deep''s voice interrupted their discussion. They both turned to see their bosun pulling a cylindrical object from his backpack.


    "Ha! I brought this too! I thought I had forgotten it," Deep exclaimed.


    Seeing the curious looks from his companions, he proudly displayed the item. "This is a new gadget from Britannia Island. Check it out!"


    He pressed a red button on the device, and a blinding white light shot into the fog. "This is a flashlight¡ªa portable electric light. How cool is that? Captain, why are you laughing? Look, it can even adjust the beam size."


    As Deep twisted the flashlight, the beam of light quickly focused, resembling a glowing sword in his hand. The boy, full of playful energy, waved the flashlight around, sweeping the light through the mist.


    Watching the light, Charles''s smile gradually faded. This device might actually be useful; it was more durable than torches, easier to store, and had excellent penetration in this thick fog. He mentally noted it as a potential item for their next adventure.


    "Ahhh!!" Lily, standing behind Charles, suddenly screamed in terror.


    "What¡¯s wrong?" Charles quickly brought her in front of him.


    "Over there... there¡¯s a face! When the beam swept by, I saw a face!" she stammered.


    Charles''s heart raced as he stomped on the rock and charged toward the direction Lily pointed. The sound of bullets being chambered echoed behind him as the crew followed closely.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    They quickly navigated through the fog and found the "face" Lily had mentioned, only to discover it wasn¡¯t a person but a drawing on the wall.


    It was more like a child''s crude doodle than a proper painting. Although the technique was sloppy, the emotion it conveyed was palpable. It depicted a naked human desperately clutching its own throat, the expression of agony vividly apparent. This grotesque image, combined with the hasty doodling, created an eerie atmosphere.


    "Mr. Charles, who painted this?" Lily asked, her head tucked into his clothing.


    "Honestly, I¡¯m more curious about who built this wall," Charles replied, running his hand along the sturdy surface. The thick fog obscured his view, making it impossible to determine the wall''s height or width.


    He tested it with his black blade, finding it incredibly solid, almost as hard as concrete. What kind of person would construct a wall in such a foul swamp? From the pale yellow color, it didn¡¯t resemble the Foundation¡¯s style. Could it be the ''King''?


    "Let¡¯s walk along the wall and see what we find," Charles decided, leading the crew onward.


    As they moved away from the drawing, the light from their torches slowly faded. Suddenly, the terrifying image began to twist and contort, and more tragic doodles emerged from the wall, their mouths agape in silent screams, intertwining until the entire wall was filled, merging with the darkness.


    After nearly two hours of following the wall, Charles finally reached an abrupt opening, shrouded in fog, obscuring whatever lay within.


    Fortunately, Charles had packed several new tools that would come in handy at this moment. He pulled out a mirror box from his backpack and instructed the vampire to fly away. Then he opened the box.


    Blinding sunlight instantly dispelled the fog, leaving everyone present in awe at the scene before them.


    Inside the opening, multiple walls intersected in the distance, creating an immense maze shrouded in damp mist. Each wall was towering and wide, as if the maze had been built for giants over a hundred meters tall. Just standing beside it sent chills down their spines.


    As the warm light gradually faded, those walls disappeared back into the fog.


    After a long pause, a harsh scratching sound echoed. Charles raised his black blade and drew an arrow on the wall.


    "Let¡¯s go!" he declared, stepping into the mist.


    The atmosphere grew increasingly oppressive; it was clear to everyone that this place was dangerous, and no one wanted to die. Every crew member was on high alert.


    Though they were all prepared, they had been in the maze for some time without any incidents. The absence of danger only heightened Charles''s unease. His mind was taut with tension.


    There were no stone resting places within the maze, and Charles''s feet gradually lost sensation from the cold. He pulled out his pocket watch and checked the time, realizing they had been in the maze for almost two hours.


    Looking at the murky water below, he drew another arrow on the wall and turned to the crew. "Let¡¯s explore for another half hour. If we find nothing, we¡¯ll head back to the ship to rest and come back later."


    Upon hearing this, everyone, including the doctor, breathed a sigh of relief; this place was truly unsettling.


    Time ticked by, and just as they were nearing the half-hour mark, Charles suddenly flicked his black blade, sending it slicing through the water. He immediately followed up, grabbing the hilt but finding nothing on the blade.


    This action hadn¡¯t been his but Richard¡¯s.


    "What did you see?" Charles asked in his mind.


    "I saw ripples suddenly appear on the water''s surface. I thought something was there. Strange, was it just my imagination?" Richard replied.


    Charles probed the water with his black blade, finding nothing but muck.


    Standing up, he checked the time again. "Let¡¯s head back; half an hour is up. We¡¯ll rest and return."


    Everyone felt a wave of relief and turned to leave. However, when Charles double-checked the headcount, a cold sweat dripped down his face.


    "Everyone wait!! The first officer is missing!"

 **Chapter 82: The Nasal Indigenous**

    Upon hearing Charles''s words, the other crew members began to look around anxiously, realizing that the bandaged figure was indeed missing. A shadow of fear crossed each face¡ªhow could a companion just vanish without a trace?


    "When was the last time anyone saw the bandaged one?" Charles asked, suppressing his own unease.


    "I did," James said, raising his hand hesitantly. "He was right in front of me five minutes ago."


    "No, I think I haven''t seen him for about ten minutes," Lily chimed in.


    The crew''s accounts were inconsistent, but it was clear that the bandaged figure had disappeared within the last ten minutes.


    Charles furrowed his brow as he surveyed the thick fog surrounding them, then turned to Audrick. "Transform into a bat and follow the arrow I carved. See if the bandaged one got lost somewhere else."


    Audrick nodded, unfurling his cloak and transforming into a bat, flying off into the mist. Bats could use echolocation, so the fog wouldn''t hinder his search.


    Before long, Audrick returned, shaking his head in disappointment. Charles knew that the disappearance of the bandaged figure was undoubtedly linked to this island.


    Leaning against the wall, Charles pondered his next move. Compared to terrifying monsters, he found this situation far more frustrating. At least with monsters, there was a chance to fight back; here, no matter how powerful one might be, there was no way to respond.


    Suddenly, a loud bang echoed through the mist, startling everyone. Charles quickly opened a mirror box, allowing light to pierce the fog, but the source of the sound revealed nothing.


    Then, the dense fog began to thin. Charles sensed that something ominous was unfolding.


    He slowly spoke, "We need to leave here."


    Freighton immediately protested, "Captain! But we haven¡¯t found the first officer yet!"


    "Do as I say. We¡¯ll talk about it outside," Charles replied, taking the lead.


    Though he felt guilty for abandoning the bandaged figure, as captain, he had to prioritize the safety of the remaining crew. It was his duty.


    If one could vanish, so could another. Without knowing what had caused the bandaged figure''s disappearance, staying here was not a rational choice. He couldn¡¯t risk the lives of others for one crew member. Besides, as a follower of the Futan god with strong regenerative abilities, the bandaged one should be able to survive. They could figure out how to rescue him once they were outside.


    With the captain''s order, everyone began to move quickly along the maze''s walls, following the arrow markings.The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    The thick fog parted before their torches, and aside from the sound of muddy water being disturbed, there was no other noise.


    However, when the group switched to a second torch, Charles''s expression soured. They had been running for a while; they should have reached the maze''s exit by now, yet they hadn¡¯t arrived.


    "Wait," Charles called, halting the crew. He examined the arrow on the wall closely.


    After a thorough inspection, he realized that the hidden markings he had deliberately left within the arrow were all intact; it was indeed his carving, not something altered by another.


    But despite the markings, they couldn¡¯t seem to find their way out. Charles felt puzzled. What was going on with this maze? Could it be moving?


    However, before entering, he had considered this possibility. He sliced his fingertip with the black blade, quickly smearing the blood on the bat mirror. Black fur began to sprout on his face, and membranes quickly formed under his arms.


    With his increasingly fierce visage, he addressed the crew, "Stay put. Once I find the entrance, I¡¯ll come back to get you out."


    No matter how confusing the maze was, it was still two-dimensional. As long as he could fly above the crew, he could find the exit.


    A few seconds later, his transformation was complete. The wind from his bat wings stirred the mud into waves as Charles propelled himself upward.


    The massive bat opened its gaping maw, emitting ultrasonic waves inaudible to human ears. These waves bounced off objects, allowing him to visualize everything around him.


    Even though he had seen the structure of the giant maze once before, he was still struck by its complexity. The myriad of intricate intersections was dizzying.


    Ignoring the intersections, Charles flew straight up.


    As he rapidly flapped his wings, he noticed something strange: no matter how high he ascended, the walls beside him seemed to rise in tandem.


    Three minutes later, he hovered in mid-air and sent out a sound wave, but he received no echo. He was at least a thousand meters above the ground.


    This was clearly illogical. Charles remembered the island''s appearance; even with the fog obscuring it, he knew it couldn¡¯t be that high.


    Realizing that flying higher wouldn¡¯t yield any results, Charles made a decisive descent.


    "Captain, what¡¯s going on?" Deep asked anxiously as he watched Charles drink from a blood bag.


    "It''s no use. I flew up over a thousand meters, and the walls keep rising with me."


    Hearing their captain''s response, the crew''s faces fell. They couldn''t escape following the arrows, and with the walls soaring over a thousand meters, it meant they were all trapped here.


    "Don''t panic; we have other options," Charles said, retrieving some explosives from James''s backpack.


    "Boom!!" Debris flew everywhere as the maze''s walls were blasted open, revealing the mist beyond.


    Since they couldn¡¯t find a way around, they¡¯d blow their way out. After all, a straight line was always the shortest route.


    The explosions continued, and the crew quickly moved through the openings.


    Charles had thought they would soon return to the swamp, but things didn¡¯t unfold as he imagined. When they emerged from another hole, they were greeted by the sound of water droplets hitting the surface.


    Before long, the dripping intensified, sounding almost like rain. Charles cautiously turned toward the source of the sound. Gradually, he saw a group of strange creatures approaching.


    These beings resembled upside-down, hairless rats, their elongated and deformed organs making them look bizarre. Their elephantine noses dipped into the water, creating the dripping sounds as they walked on their trunks.


    These nasal creatures stood nearly a meter tall and were numerous, densely packed atop the black, muddy water, resembling corn stalks in a field. Encountering such beings in this place would unsettle anyone.


    Deep drew a dagger, shaped similarly to the black blade, swallowing hard as he glanced at his captain.


    "Hold off on attacking; let¡¯s see what they want," Charles said, lowering the guns raised by the crew beside him.

 **Chapter 83: Humanity**

    The creatures before them appeared to be the island''s natives. Charles had read in the library that not all indigenous people on wild islands were malicious; some could communicate or even trade.


    "We mean no harm. Can you let us go?" Charles spoke slowly in the local dialect.


    The nasal creatures remained motionless, as if they could not understand, standing at a distance like lifeless objects.


    Seeing the bizarre scene before him, Charles waved his hand behind him, signaling the others to step back. If they couldn¡¯t understand, it was best to retreat for now.


    As soon as Charles lifted his foot, all the nasal creatures twitched their noses and leaped forward, their black claws extending from their withered limbs.


    "Attack!!"


    Gunfire erupted in an instant, and the nasal creatures were quickly hit, falling into the water. They seemed to come in endless waves, swarming toward the group.


    The area was a chaos of mud and water, stained purple with the creatures'' blood. No matter how many were injured or killed, they showed no signs of retreating.


    As the strange beings drew closer, Charles decided to take out the lightning-shaped short staff from his pocket.


    "Zzap!!" A surge of electricity swept across, causing the nasal creatures to convulse and fall into the water.


    They died, but Charles and his crew were not unscathed. The powerful electric current traveled through the muddy water, affecting everyone. Though they were at a distance, the crew was still severely injured, convulsing uncontrollably.


    Charles was the first to recover. He looked up and saw all the nasal creatures floating on the water''s surface; they were finally all dead.


    Leaning against the wall, he gasped for breath. The relic was powerful, but the side effects were unbearable.


    No matter what those monsters intended, at least the immediate problem was resolved.


    "Rest for three minutes, then continue blowing the walls," Charles''s deep voice echoed in the empty maze.


    God knew if there were more of these creatures nearby; they had to leave this place quickly.


    Just then, a nearly horizontal tube silently floated toward them.


    The underwater entity seemed intent on not disturbing anyone, slowly moving toward the corpses of the nasal creatures. But with Charles''s night vision, he could see it clearly and raised his hand to fire a shot at the tube.


    The tube sank rapidly, and crimson blood bubbled up from the water. The pool of blood quickly turned and swam away.


    Whatever it was, Charles couldn''t let it escape. He lifted his right foot from the muddy water and pushed off the wall, propelling his body into the air, his black blade aimed directly at the blood.If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    "Thud!" The black blade plunged into the underwater entity, causing more red blood to mix with the mud.


    With a powerful upward motion of his wrist, he lifted whatever was beneath the water.


    It was a person¡ªa blind old man with milky-white eyes. His naked body was covered in wounds, and his expression showed immense pain. Yet, despite this, he made no sound, trembling hands gripping Charles''s blade and pushing outward.


    Seeing it was a fellow human, Charles refrained from attacking and turned to shout at his companions, "Doctor, come help him! Don¡¯t let him die!"


    Everyone gathered around, staring curiously at the old man. No one expected to find a living person in such a place.


    "Can you understand me?" Charles asked the old man, who was being treated by the doctor.


    The old man, seemingly startled, quickly placed a finger to his lips. "Shh~!! Keep your voice down; the Tormentor will hear!"


    Charles closely examined the peculiar old man. He was extremely thin, resembling a skeleton draped in human skin, with a hunched neck that made him appear fearful, as if always ready to flee.


    Richard''s voice echoed in his mind. "Dude, doesn¡¯t this guy look like Gollum from The Lord of the Rings, the one who bites the protagonist''s finger off at the end?"


    "Be quiet."


    At that moment, the doctor finished treating the old man''s wounds, who limped over to Charles.


    "I just checked his body. He¡¯s definitely human. Judging by his teeth, he¡¯s only in his forties, but he¡¯s severely malnourished. His skin shows signs of prolonged exposure to water; he must have lived in such harsh conditions for a long time."


    Charles''s heart raced. So, this meant there were natives on the island?


    "Do you know where the exit is?" Charles asked the old man, getting to the main point.


    Upon hearing the question, the old man''s filthy face lit up with joy. "You just arrived, right? Do you have food from the outside?"


    Charles didn¡¯t want to waste time. He pressed the black blade against the old man''s throat, threateningly stating, "You answer my questions, understand?"


    Feeling the murderous intent in Charles''s tone, the old man stiffened and quickly nodded.


    "Who are you? Why are you here?"


    "My name is Blake. I came here because I heard the sounds of your battle with the Tormentor and wanted to steal some food. Don¡¯t worry; the Tormentor is all yours; I don¡¯t want any."


    Charles glanced at the corpses of the nasal creatures nearby. It seemed this was the "Tormentor" he mentioned.


    "Where is the exit to this maze?"


    "There is no exit. No one who comes in has ever left."


    "No one has ever left?"


    "I don¡¯t know; I¡¯ve been here for over twenty years and haven¡¯t seen anyone leave."


    "What did you mean by ''Tormentor''?"


    "It''s a monster, the strongest one here, and it can never be killed. If it catches us, it will burrow into our mouths and torment us from within. It feeds on our screams of pain."


    "How big is this maze?"


    "It¡¯s vast. No one has touched the boundaries; it¡¯s at least larger than England Island."


    Hearing this, Charles frowned. He had checked the size of the island before approaching; it was clearly smaller than Coral Island. How could the maze be larger than England Island, which is the largest island in the North Sea with a permanent population of nearly seven million?


    Adding to that the walls rising over a thousand meters, Charles increasingly felt that something was off about this maze.


    Looking at the trembling blind old man, Charles didn¡¯t believe he would lie to him.


    "How many others like you are trapped here?"


    "Thousands, no, tens of thousands; I¡¯m not sure. Most have been captured by the Tormentor, while a small portion managed to escape. There are over a hundred people in the place where I live."


    "Have you seen a person wrapped in bandages around here?" Charles inquired, hoping to find information about his missing first officer, suspecting that his disappearance might be related to the people here.


    "Bandages? I can¡¯t see, so I don¡¯t know what you mean by bandages, but about half an hour ago, I think I heard something moving toward my living area."


    Charles looked around the empty surroundings and gently turned Blake around, giving him a slight push. "Let¡¯s go. Take me to where you live."

 **Chapter 84: The Scarred Man**

    Under the guidance of the peculiar old man, Charles and his crew made their way toward the distant, intricate entrance of the maze.


    Just as they left, a figure wrapped in bandages slowly materialized on the wall, reaching out as if trying to stop something.


    Although Blake was blind, he seemed to navigate using some other sense, bending his neck and hunching over, moving quickly on his feet.


    "Mr. Charles, that grandfather looks so pitiful. Shouldn''t we give him some cookies?" Lily whispered in Charles''s ear.


    Charles shook his head, rejecting the request. It wasn''t a good idea to expose food without knowing the other party''s intentions.


    As they trudged through the muddy water in silence, about half an hour later, a human settlement hanging on the wall came into view.


    To avoid the filthy mud, the inhabitants had carved out various-sized hollows in the rock face, where dozens of humans sat, either resting or chatting.


    They looked just as emaciated as Blake, with a similar layer of white mist covering their eyes. However, when Charles spotted various human bones hanging on the wall, his heart sank; there were indeed human remains, and quite a few at that.


    Quickly scanning the settlement, Charles did not see any signs of bandages.


    Hearing the murmurs of the crowd, Blake excitedly moved closer to them. Once he touched the wall, he turned to Charles with a sinister smile.


    "Boss! Look! I¡¯ve brought you some newcomers, and I just heard a woman¡¯s voice saying they have cookies!"


    At Blake''s words, a human from the highest level of the wall stood up and jumped directly into the muddy water, showing no concern for the height.


    His scarred face twisted in excitement. "A woman? Finally, another woman has arrived! Haha! This time, I will cherish her!"


    Blake approached with a fawning smile. "Boss, once you''re done, can I have a turn?"


    Seeing the blind individuals quickly surrounding them, Charles raised his revolver and fired a shot into the air, warning them that he was armed.


    After the gunshot, the scarred man was momentarily stunned but then burst into laughter. "Hahaha, interesting! Looks like the newcomers have a gun! I''m so scared~! Hahaha!"


    Not wanting to engage in conversation, Charles aimed directly at the scarred man and fired.If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    As soon as the captain attacked, the crew quickly followed suit.


    However, at the moment the gunshot rang out, everyone in front of them dove into the water, disappearing into the murky depths.


    Bullets struck the water''s surface, but apart from splashing a bit of mud, no blood emerged.


    Once the gunfire ceased and the water settled, the figures were nowhere to be seen; this was their territory.


    "Watch the water¡ª" Charles''s warning was cut short as the surface of the water before him broke apart, and sharp, foul-smelling nails shot toward his neck.


    Charles performed a backflip, narrowly dodging the attack. He fired several shots at the emerging enemies, blood splattering on their bare chests.


    Suddenly, danger appeared from behind him. The scarred man had somehow gotten behind Charles, grinning maliciously as he lunged at him with sharp claws.


    Just as things seemed dire, a large hand swung in from the side, sending the scarred man flying; it was James''s hand.


    Charles quickly regained his footing and leapt onto James''s knee, then up to his shoulder.


    From his elevated position, Charles saw the creatures attacking his crew, creating chaos in the muddy water.


    He couldn''t afford to hesitate. He fired his revolver, taking down those who broke the surface.


    Initially, the surprise attack from the creatures caused some confusion among the crew, but they quickly stabilized and began to fight back.


    After all, they were all human; no one was afraid of anyone else.


    James swatted at the creatures like flies, sending them flying.


    Lily''s rat swiftly dove underwater, crimson blood surfacing.


    Deep''s dagger sliced through their throats with precision.


    To Charles''s surprise, Second Officer Knona was holding a blue candle, mumbling something while two paper figures stood protectively on the water''s surface.


    As the black muddy water turned red with blood, the fierce battle gradually quieted down.


    Glancing at the number of bodies on the surface, Charles realized this wasn¡¯t over; there were only a dozen corpses, far fewer than the previous seventy or eighty.


    "Your aim is decent, but that¡¯s about it," the scarred man''s voice suddenly came from the left.


    Charles quickly turned his gun toward the sound and fired, but the bullet disappeared into the water without a trace.


    Then, the scarred man''s voice appeared on the right. "Too bad that¡¯s all you¡¯ve got. You probably won¡¯t even reach the second tier; you can¡¯t possibly compete with me. Hand over the women and food, and I might consider letting you join us."


    Seeing that bullets were ineffective, Charles stopped firing and asked warily, "Second tier? What is that?"


    "Hahaha, looks like you¡¯re not just new here; you¡¯re also new outside, not even knowing the ranking of power levels."


    Hearing this, fragments of memory flashed through Charles''s mind from his time in the library. He quickly recalled that the man was referring to the ranking among combat members on warships.


    Governors and their ships did not coexist peacefully; they used these rankings when they turned against each other.


    From this, Charles deduced that this man was likely a combat member on a warship outside.


    "I¡¯m the captain of an exploration ship. I don¡¯t care about your warship hierarchy."


    After saying this, Charles waved his hand, then pulled out the lightning short staff from his clothing.


    The crew of the Narwhal gasped in shock and quickly moved closer to the giant James. They remembered their last experience vividly and would not forget it.


    "Exploration ship? Hmph, only those who can¡¯t get on a warship would foolishly sail a broken ship to the island to die."


    "Is that so? Then why is such a powerful being like you trapped in this place?"


    "Don¡¯t talk tough; just wait until I catch you. I¡¯ll make sure you die a slow death¡ª"


    Now! Charles thrust the short staff forward, and a brilliant arc of electricity shot toward the source of the voice.

 **Chapter 85: The Position of the Bandage**

    Lightning swept across the scene, and amidst the steaming mud, bodies convulsing with spasms slowly began to rise.


    Charles, who was also numb from the electric shock, trembled as he tucked his short staff into his clothing. At that moment, he noticed an upward arrow and an exclamation mark appear on the wall in front of him.


    A sudden surge of killing intent washed over him, and he struggled to move left with all his might, but his numbed body was utterly uncooperative.


    Listening to the urgent breaths coming from below, the scarred man smirked slightly. He had been provoking this kid to talk just to pinpoint his exact location. He knew that this guy was the leader of the new arrivals; if he killed him, they would be a scattered mess. Then, all the women and food in the crew would belong to him.


    Just as the scarred man felt his nails digging into flesh, three massive tentacles suddenly wrapped around him, yanking him away. Charles''s ring had activated.


    ¡°Damn it! What is this thing?¡±


    The scarred man swung his nails, fiercely slashing at the short tentacles. But a second had already passed, and in that time, Deep had charged forward with a dagger, closing in on the scarred man.


    The two quickly engaged in combat, but the scarred man, having lost the initiative, was clearly no match for the crew members who outnumbered him.


    In a flash, his forearms were severed, and with a scream, the scarred man plummeted into the muddy water below.


    Masked Deep was about to dive down to behead him but was stopped by Charles.


    ¡°Wait, don¡¯t kill him. He¡¯s still useful to us.¡±


    Seeing his leader captured, Blake, who was underwater, turned and swam away in fear. He never expected these guys to be so powerful; he had run into a hard wall this time.


    However, halfway through his escape, he suddenly felt something furry crawling up his body. Panicking, he tried to surface, but pain shot through him as Lily''s rats bit into his flesh with renewed vigor.


    With his body returning to normal, Charles pulled the scarred man out of the water.


    Even with his hands severed, the scarred man showed no signs of submission. He wore a cold smirk, his pale eyes looking down on Charles.


    ¡°Not bad for a relic. With it, you might barely reach the third tier, but that¡¯s it. If you faced me at my peak, you¡¯d be dead!¡±


    Charles was too lazy to argue with him. He grabbed a nearby rope and firmly bound him before turning to the wall.This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    If it hadn¡¯t been for the sudden clue that appeared on the wall, he might not have figured it out.


    As Charles approached the wall, a graffiti of a person wrapped in bandages emerged.


    Even though it was quite crude, Charles immediately recognized it as his first mate, Bandage.


    His first mate was trapped in the wall; no wonder he couldn¡¯t find him.


    Charles dragged the scarred man over and pointed at the graffiti. ¡°You¡¯ve been here long enough; you should know this place well. My crew member is sealed in the wall. Is there any way to get him out?¡±


    The scarred man chuckled coldly, showing no intention of speaking.


    Charles glared, driving his black blade into the stump of the scarred man¡¯s right arm. ¡°Speak now!¡±


    With a scream, the scarred man cursed, ¡°Trash! If you can, just kill me!¡±


    At that moment, the bandage on the wall shook its head, and a string of garbled words appeared beside it. ¡°Hurry, come before the monster has left.¡±


    Charles was baffled by the jumbled text, but he quickly realized the bandage was warning him.


    Though he didn¡¯t know what was coming, he decided to trust his first mate. Charles turned around immediately. ¡°Run! Something is coming!¡±


    Everyone quickly followed Charles as they ran, the bandage appearing intermittently to guide them.


    The maze was a convoluted mess, but the bandage seemed to know the way, leading them at a frantic pace.


    After about five minutes of running, even the scarred man, who feared nothing, showed a look of terror. ¡°What are you doing? Stop! You can¡¯t go that way!¡±


    Charles glanced at the bandage on the wall and quickened his pace. He trusted his first mate more than this man who was prepared to kill him.


    Just as they rounded a corner, a chilling scream echoed from afar, piercing and heart-wrenching, freezing everyone in place.


    ¡°What¡¯s ahead?¡± Charles carved into the wall.


    ¡°An exit.¡± A simple answer appeared.


    ¡°That¡¯s impossible! That way isn¡¯t an exit! You can¡¯t trust his lies! That¡¯s the domain of torture! If humans are caught, they¡¯ll wish they were dead!¡±


    As he finished speaking, he struggled to run back, but Charles raised his revolver, aiming at the back of his head. ¡°Stop! Or I won¡¯t hesitate to shoot!¡±


    However, the fleeing scarred man suddenly jerked his head and slammed it against the wall. In an instant, the yellow wall was stained red and white; he would rather die than go that way.


    Looking at his silent crew, Charles furrowed his brow, caught in a dilemma. There was definitely danger ahead, but the bandage said it was an exit. If he made the wrong choice, everyone¡¯s lives would be at stake.


    After a second of hesitation, Charles carved a line into the wall with his black blade. ¡°Which arm did Anna eat before?¡±


    ¡°Right leg.¡±


    Seeing the words appear on the wall, Charles immediately understood that this wall was indeed his first mate.


    ¡°Then how do you know that it¡¯s an exit ahead?¡± Charles carved again.


    ¡°No time left!!!¡±


    Looking at the three exclamation marks, Charles felt increasingly puzzled. ¡°What do you mean there¡¯s no time?¡±


    ¡°The island is sinking! If you don¡¯t get out now, you¡¯ll never escape!¡±


    As those words appeared on the wall, Charles¡¯s head buzzed. He slowly raised his gaze to the endless wall above, suddenly understanding something.


    It wasn¡¯t the bandage that was trapped in the wall; it was they who were trapped inside it.


    The spotlight from the Unicorn shone into the water, illuminating the maze below and the graffiti on the walls that resembled Charles and his crew.


    Chef Frey anxiously watched the bandage dive up and down.


    ¡°First mate! Has the captain not come out yet? I just measured; the island is sinking faster and faster!¡±


    The bandage shook its head, taking a deep breath before diving back into the maze below.


    Watching the graffiti of his companions move again, the breathless bandage kicked its legs to catch up quickly.

 **Chapter 86: Torment**

    In the damp maze, Charles ran fiercely with his crew.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, my friend can¡¯t keep up!¡± Lily shouted anxiously from Charles¡¯s shoulder.


    ¡°Tell them to climb onto James¡¯s back! Hurry!¡±


    The rats quickly scrambled onto the shrinking giant¡¯s back, making James look like he was draped in a black cloak.


    ¡°Ahhh!!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh!!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh!!¡±


    The wretched screams ahead grew louder and more numerous, but they could not hinder Charles¡¯s pace.


    According to the bandage, the island outside had already sunk below the water''s surface. If everyone couldn¡¯t escape quickly, they would sink into the deep sea along with the island. No matter what lay beneath the depths, it was not a place for humans to tread.


    The damp air was suffocating, and everyone wore a grave expression. However, seeing Charles leading the way like a pillar of strength, no one panicked.


    The crew followed the bandage, darting through the maze, and the screams grew ever closer. Suddenly, Charles turned a corner sharply, and a wide area opened up before them.


    To their surprise, there was light in front of them, but what was happening in that light was truly horrifying.


    In a space the size of a football field, there were naked humans of all ages¡ªmen, women, and children. They clawed at their throats, screaming in agony, rolling in the muddy water, just like the graffiti they had seen on the wall earlier.


    Surrounding them were countless black tormentors, the size of a human palm, resembling centipedes with spider legs. They stood on the water''s surface like water spiders, encircling the screaming humans, their bodies trembling rhythmically with the volume of the cries, as if they were relishing the humans'' suffering.


    Seeing this scene, Charles immediately understood: these were the tormentors. The scarred man had been right; this was the lair of torment.


    As soon as Charles saw them, the tormentors noticed him as well. In addition to those on the water¡¯s surface, some began to crawl out of the mouths of the screaming victims. The tormentors started moving, advancing towards Charles, intending to merge him into the cacophony of screams.


    They came in swarms, resembling a black carpet.


    Faced with this scene, fear crept onto everyone¡¯s faces. Charles quickly carved into the wall with his knife. ¡°Bandage, the tormentors are coming! Where¡¯s the exit you mentioned??¡±


    But at that moment, the bandage vanished from the wall again.If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles exhaled sharply and pulled out the Thunder Staff. It was the only relic capable of dealing with such a massive number of enemies.


    ¡°Zzz!¡± A bright arc of electricity shot into the swarm of tormentors, jumping between them.


    However, the despairing scene that followed shocked everyone. Despite the power capable of killing a hundred tormentors, they showed no reaction, as if they were insulated.


    ¡°Tap tap tap~¡± The tormentors surged forward, crawling up Charles¡¯s clothes and into his mouth. In an instant, a bone-deep pain spread throughout his body, nearly causing him to faint. His throat involuntarily emitted a scream.


    The other crew members were similarly affected, convulsing and screaming in agony.


    Just then, Charles saw the bandage reappear on the wall. It drew a box and made a motion as if opening it.


    ¡°A box? The mirror box!!¡±


    Charles trembled as he reached for his backpack, but the intense pain made it hard to think. His hands instinctively clutched his throat, as if that would provide some relief.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, I¡¯ll help you!¡± Lily¡¯s rats quickly jumped onto James¡¯s back and pulled out a mirror box from within.


    The tormentors seemed to only attack humans; the nearby small rodents didn¡¯t even glance their way.


    The screaming vampires, witnessing this, overcame their fear of sunlight, desperately burying themselves in the mud.


    With a ¡°snap,¡± the mirror box was opened by the rats, and a dazzling light instantly filled the entire space.


    Under the sunlight, all the tormentors around them melted away like snowmen, leaving no trace behind, and the excruciating pain vanished swiftly.


    Exhausted, Charles gasped for breath and looked at the bandage on the wall. A thought crossed his mind: how did this guy know that sunlight was effective against the tormentors?


    But at that moment, the bandage graffiti disappeared again, and its real figure emerged from a muddy spot in the distance. ¡°Captain¡­ over here!¡±


    Next to the bandage, in the muddy water, there was a hazy white light that was the searchlight of the Unicorn! That was the exit!


    As Charles crawled out of the muddy hole, the icy cold seawater enveloped him, instantly washing away the muck from his body.


    Charles looked around and saw that the previous flat-topped island was submerged beneath the sea, already seven or eight meters below the surface.


    He didn¡¯t immediately surface but paused at the exit point, quickly counting the crew members coming out.


    Lily, Krona, Deep, the crew members emerged one after another from the hole, rising toward the surface.


    Charles soon realized that one person was missing; his chief engineer, James, hadn¡¯t come out yet.


    When Charles dove back in, he found James standing there with a very pale face.


    ¡°What¡¯s going on? Hurry up and come!¡±


    ¡°Captain, I¡¯m too big¡­ I can¡¯t get through.¡± James¡¯s face was filled with despair.


    Charles¡¯s heart sank. He realized that James¡¯s body hadn¡¯t fully shrunk yet; at three meters tall, he simply couldn¡¯t fit through the exit.


    James trembled as he handed the purple crystal to Charles, struggling to say, ¡°Captain, please tell my wife that I¡­ I will always love her.¡±


    Seeing James¡¯s expression as if he were delivering his last words, Charles irritably pushed the purple crystal back. ¡°If you want to tell her, you can do it yourself. How long until you shrink back to normal?¡±


    ¡°I¡­ I estimate about five minutes, Captain. There¡¯s not enough time.¡± James said painfully.


    ¡°Then we¡¯ll wait five minutes. Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll stay with you.¡± Charles pulled out his pocket watch and calmed down to wait.


    Time passed slowly, and more and more seawater surged into the hole. Watching the muddy water rise, Charles finally understood how the swamp had formed.


    Just as James shrank to two and a half meters, Charles noticed that the edge of the strange exit began to undulate unstably; it was going to close.


    ¡°We can¡¯t wait any longer, hurry up!!¡± Charles pushed the giant towards the exit.


    As expected, James got stuck; the edge of the exit slowly constricted, pressing inward against his skin.

 **Chapter 87: The Arm**

    Charles used all his strength to step on James''s foot, pushing him toward the exit, but he remained stuck.


    ¡°Get out of the way!!¡± Charles leaped high, putting all his weight down on James''s foot. The sound of flesh tearing echoed as a large chunk of skin was scraped off James¡¯s waist, and he shot out of the exit.


    Charles followed James out, but just as he emerged, the exit suddenly closed, trapping his left arm tightly.


    Grinding his teeth, Charles pushed against the wall, pulling desperately, but he couldn¡¯t break free.


    James floated nearby, gripping Charles¡¯s waist and pulling with all his might.


    Charles patted him, pointing to the surface, but the giant shook his head vigorously, continuing to pull.


    Charles felt the water around them begin to swirl violently; the island was sinking faster.


    Feeling the increasing pressure surrounding him, Charles knew that if he didn¡¯t make a choice soon, the water pressure alone could cost him his life.


    Resolutely, he drew his black blade and swung it along the edge of the wall.


    Crimson blood sprayed from the severed end, and the two of them finally stopped descending.


    As Charles instinctively glanced into the dark water below, he was shocked to discover that it wasn¡¯t just one island sinking.


    Dozens of identical islands were also descending rapidly.


    And beneath them, Charles vaguely saw a massive, writhing darkness. The island they had been trapped on was tiny compared to it¡ªlike a fingertip. No, perhaps it could be said that the island was merely its fingertip?


    He suddenly understood: these islands were all part of one entity; they were all part of that darkness.


    ¡°Swish!¡± A giant crimson eye appeared in the writhing darkness, followed by two, then three more.


    The whispering in his ears resumed, and Charles immediately closed his eyes, using all his strength to swim upward with James.


    On the deck, the drenched and shivering crew anxiously watched the water¡¯s surface, worried that their captain and chief engineer had not yet surfaced.


    Lily ran back and forth along the ship¡¯s edge, tears welling in her eyes.


    ¡°What if something happens to Mr. Charles? Where should I go? No, Mr. Charles will be fine! He¡¯s so strong! He won¡¯t be hurt!¡±


    Just as she was about to cry, she suddenly saw Charles and James helping each other to float to the surface. Excited, Lily jumped in.If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    Using the soft ladder, the two men, looking extremely pale, finally returned to the deck.


    ¡°Captain, your hand¡ª¡± All the crew immediately noticed Charles¡¯s empty left arm.


    Looking at his crew, Charles¡¯s face was grim as he opened his mouth to say something, but a large spurt of crimson blood erupted from his mouth.


    At the same time, James also knelt on one knee, exhibiting the same symptoms.


    Seeing this, everyone was instantly alarmed and hurried to fetch the doctor.


    The doctor quickly examined both men and sighed in relief. ¡°It¡¯s fine; you just ascended too quickly from underwater and got decompression sickness. You all, take them to the medical room I¡¯ve prepared. I need to treat them.¡±


    In a white medical room, various bitter potions were forced down their throats, and Charles felt the suffocating sensation in his lungs improve significantly.


    James, receiving the same treatment, lay beside him.


    Looking at Charles¡¯s empty left arm, James¡¯s face showed pain.


    ¡°Captain, I¡¯m sorry. If it weren¡¯t for me¡ª¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to apologize. The relic was given to you by me, and I asked you to use it. You didn¡¯t do anything wrong,¡± Charles interrupted him.


    Looking at his severed arm, Charles pondered deeply: is a life more important than an arm?


    He quickly found his answer: if he wanted to achieve his goals, he couldn¡¯t do it alone; he needed a crew to share in the hardships.


    As for an arm, as long as he could get out of this place, that price was worth it.


    Moreover, thinking about the possibility of James dying and him having to deliver the news to his wife, Charles felt his choice had been the right one.


    ¡°It¡¯s okay; it¡¯s just an arm. It¡¯s not like I¡¯ve lost love,¡± Richard¡¯s voice mocked in his mind.


    Charles shook his head, slowly closing his eyes to rest; his mind was a bit weary.


    With a bang, the doctor pushed open the door and walked straight to Charles, looking very impatient. ¡°Did you see something? Why is your mental contamination worse?¡±


    ¡°I accidentally glanced at it. That island seems to be a limb of something.¡±


    ¡°Do you not understand the rules of the Sea of the Earth? Even as a captain, you¡¯re not supposed to look around carelessly. One day, you¡¯ll end up harming yourself,¡± the doctor said disdainfully, handing him a cup of bubbling black potion.


    Charles took it, tilting his head back to drink. The metallic taste instantly filled his mouth, but the dizzy sensation in his head improved significantly.


    Feeling much better, Charles wasn¡¯t in a hurry to rest. He placed the iron cup on the nearby wooden cabinet and said to the doctor, ¡°Could you please call the first mate? I have some questions for him.¡±


    All signs indicated that the bandage was very familiar with this place. He not only knew the location of the exit but also how to restrain the tormentors and was immune to the maze''s effects, preventing him from being pulled into the walls.


    However, this raised contradictions: if he knew this place was dangerous, why didn¡¯t he warn everyone in advance? If he wanted to trap the crew, why go through so much trouble to save them in the end?


    The silent first mate soon appeared at the door. When faced with Charles¡¯s inquiry, he slowly shook his head.


    ¡°I¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­ I think I¡¯ve been here before¡­ and I lived inside for a long time¡­ When I saw all of you appearing on the wall¡­ that¡¯s when I remembered¡­¡±


    ¡°Can you remember why you were able to resist being pulled into the wall? Also, I¡¯m curious, back on the first island, those monsters that devour memories clearly caught you; why did they let you go?¡±


    This time, the bandage finally answered.


    He untied the bandage on his back, revealing a complex array of dark purple characters tattooed all over his skin.


    The twisted characters seemed to move, and after just a brief glance, Charles felt dizzy.


    ¡°It should have the protection of this thing¡­ Don¡¯t ask me¡­ where it came from¡­ I forgot¡­¡±


    Charles decided not to press further; asking anything would probably lead to ¡°I don¡¯t remember.¡±


    ¡°Do you think his tattoos hold any clues?¡± Richard suggested.


    Charles¡¯s gaze turned to the tattoos on the bandage¡¯s body.

 **Chapter 88: Anna**

    Charles climbed out of bed and ordered his first mate to unwrap all the bandages on his body.


    Facing the dense tattoos, Charles leaned in to scrutinize them closely.


    ¡°Help! I¡¯m trapped in this body and can¡¯t get out! A demon has taken my place! Don¡¯t believe what he says!!¡±


    As he read the first line, a jolt ran through Charles, and a flood of thoughts surged into his mind. But glancing at the silent bandage next to him, he chose to remain quiet and continued reading.


    ¡°Don¡¯t trust Ginny! She¡¯s not your daughter!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t go searching for anything; your current life is what you once could only dream of.¡±


    ¡°You are called Freud; you have women, wealth, and honor. You have everything now; you¡¯re happy¡ªdon¡¯t think of anything else!¡±


    ¡°Never go to sea; there are no answers there.¡±


    ¡°Remember, your lifelong goal is to kill Sika! It was it who killed my wife, Ginny!¡±


    ¡°Go find the black crystal; it¡¯s said to be poisonous. Eat it and see if it helps.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m tired; I want to sacrifice everything to the omnipotent and omniscient god Vutan.¡±


    ¡°Find the light of the sea! It cursed us!!¡±


    The bandages were filled with contradictory ramblings, each segment unrelated to the next. Useful information was scarce; aside from the fact that he was once called Freud, there were only a collection of meaningless terms.


    ¡°I¡¯ve looked at what¡¯s on my body¡­ but it¡¯s useless¡­ I don¡¯t remember¡­ when I got these tattoos¡­¡±


    Charles sighed. If the tattoos contained useful information, the bandage wouldn¡¯t be in this state.


    ¡°Alright, you can go now. If you remember anything, let me know.¡±


    No matter who the bandage was before, his identity now was simply the first mate of the Narwhal.


    Charles pulled out his diary and marked an X over the coordinates of the island they had just visited.


    Regardless of whether that island was part of the underwater entity, it clearly had no useful resources. The islands used by the "King" for material compensation were definitely not this one.


    Charles¡¯s pen traced over the remaining islands. Excluding the three that could be explored by Kede, there were only a few left that could be reached by the current steamship.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.


    As long as he found a supply point, they could explore the distant islands afterward.


    ¡°Father!! Why did you intercept my telegrams?! No wonder Mr. Charles never replies to me. It turns out he never received them!!¡±


    Margaret, dressed in an exquisite white gown, argued heatedly with Daniel, who sat behind the long table.


    The fearless governor of the island felt a headache coming on. He patiently tried to persuade her, ¡°Do you really have to ask this question at your birthday party? Everyone is waiting for you. Why don¡¯t you go out and play with your friends? We can discuss this tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°No! This matter is more important than any birthday party. You must have seen the telegrams I sent, right??¡±


    ¡°Daughter, I¡¯m doing this for your own good. I can¡¯t let you fall into danger again.¡±


    ¡°How can you say that! Mr. Charles is my friend! He¡¯s not dangerous!¡±


    Daniel¡¯s forehead bulged with veins as he slammed his left hand on the long table, which was made from a single log, instantly shattering it in two.


    His roar was so loud that even the guards outside could hear it clearly.


    ¡°Enough!! I¡¯ve already said, I won¡¯t allow you to associate with him anymore! You live in different worlds! If you keep this up, don¡¯t blame me for sending someone to kill that greedy madman!!¡±


    Margaret stared blankly at her father for three seconds, tears streaming down her fair face as she bit her lip and ran out. ¡°Father! I hate you!!¡±


    Daniel watched his daughter¡¯s retreating figure, trembling with anger. He looked around, grabbed a bronze statue from a nearby cabinet, and crushed it in his hands, turning it into a ball. Yet his fury remained undiminished.


    Margaret found herself alone in the quiet garden, sitting on a bench and silently wiping her tears.


    A lady slowly approached her; it was her mother, Kalita.


    Understanding her husband and daughter¡¯s tempers well, Kalita had anticipated this outcome. Dressed in a lavish evening gown, she sat down beside her daughter.


    ¡°Your father is just like that. Wait until he cools down, and then talk to him. We¡¯re family; why make things so unpleasant?¡±


    ¡°I hate him.¡± Margaret sulked, tugging at the petals of a flower in her hand.


    ¡°Dear, today is your birthday; let¡¯s go cut the cake. Everyone is waiting for you.¡±


    ¡°Mother, I don¡¯t want to go. Just let me be alone for a while.¡± The girl stubbornly turned her head away.


    ¡°Is that Charles really that important to you?¡±


    Margaret¡¯s face flushed as she looked down and replied, ¡°No¡­ I just want to thank him again. If it weren¡¯t for his help, I wouldn¡¯t have made it back.¡±


    Seeing her daughter¡¯s expression, Kalita shook her head helplessly. Having been a girl herself, she knew well the thoughts of young women.


    ¡°Daughter, I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re thinking, but you know he¡¯s an exploration ship captain. You two are not suited for each other.¡±


    ¡°So what? Our ancestors were exploration ship captains too! If it weren¡¯t for them exploring the unknown seas, there would be no Hereafter Island today.¡±


    ¡°Sigh, that¡¯s not what I¡¯m saying. You know how dangerous such things are. Do you want to become a widow at such a young age? Just like Anna?¡±


    Just as Margaret was about to retort, a gentle cough suddenly came from behind them.


    Both mother and daughter turned to see a beautiful woman wearing a black hat and veil standing behind them.


    In a high-slit, low-cut black silk gown that hugged her curves, this stunning beauty exuded a captivating charm.


    Kalita felt a flush rise to her cheeks, realizing that she had been speaking ill of someone who was now right behind her. It was incredibly awkward.


    She quickly stood up, saying, ¡°Miss Anna, I didn¡¯t mean it that way. I was just trying to comfort my daughter.¡±


    ¡°Mrs. Kalita, I understand. I¡¯m not upset. Why don¡¯t you let me talk to Miss Margaret? We¡¯re closer in age and will have more to discuss.¡±


    Seeing her daughter¡¯s sulky expression, Kalita gently nodded and turned to leave.


    Perhaps she understood how painful it was for a woman who had just lost her husband.


    With the woman¡¯s departure, the garden fell silent again. Anna gently sat down beside Margaret.

 **Chapter 89: The Prosthetic Limb**

    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t pressure you to give up like your parents. Can you tell me the story about that guy named Charles? How did you two meet?¡±


    Margaret initially hesitated to share, but after holding back for a long time, she couldn¡¯t resist any longer. Once she opened up, she couldn¡¯t stop talking, recounting everything about how she met Charles.


    As she spoke, her face shifted between joy and sadness, completely oblivious to the coldness in Anna¡¯s dark eyes beside her.


    After a long while, Margaret slowly came to a stop. She smiled at Anna and said, ¡°Sister Anna, thank you for listening. I feel much better after sharing so much. By the way, have you found your missing husband yet?¡±


    Anna turned her gaze away, a hint of sorrow on her face. ¡°He hasn¡¯t returned after all this time; he¡¯s probably lost¡­ sigh¡­¡±


    Seeing Anna¡¯s sad expression, Margaret quickly placed her hand on Anna¡¯s shoulder, apologizing, ¡°I¡¯m sorry if I touched on a sore spot.¡±


    Anna shook her head, wiping away a tear from her eye, seemingly suppressing her inner pain as she said, ¡°It¡¯s alright; I¡¯ve gotten used to it.¡±


    Beneath her black skirt, two tentacles with dark roots slowly extended, reaching toward the hem of the girl¡¯s white dress.


    ¡°Sister Anna, can you tell me what it feels like when someone you love leaves your side? Does it hurt your heart?¡±


    The tentacles beneath the wooden chair paused as Anna quietly observed the innocent girl before her.


    She suddenly looked up into the darkness. ¡°It¡¯s hard to describe¡­ it just feels very uncomfortable inside. Are you sure you really like him? Or is it just gratitude for saving you?¡±


    Margaret, frowning, twisted the lace of her skirt with her pale fingers. ¡°I don¡¯t know if I like Mr. Charles; I just really want to see him again¡­ very, very much. Sister Anna, you should understand this feeling, right?¡±


    Anna¡¯s eyes showed a hint of struggle.


    Margaret, unaware of this, continued to focus on her own thoughts. ¡°Once I come of age, my father will give me a large estate and other assets. Maybe I could give all that to Mr. Charles, so he wouldn¡¯t have to risk going to sea anymore.¡±


    Anna listened to the girl¡¯s suggestion, the corners of her mouth curling up slightly. ¡°You could write him a letter first, asking if he agrees. Who knows, he might be happy to come to Hereafter Island.¡±


    Margaret¡¯s brows lifted momentarily before drooping again. ¡°No¡­ my father wouldn¡¯t allow me to contact Mr. Charles again.¡±If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine; just give the letter to me, and I¡¯ll send it for you. Mr. Peter hasn¡¯t been feeling well lately, and I¡¯ve been managing some of his affairs. Coincidentally, there¡¯s a shipment heading to Coral Island soon.¡±


    Margaret¡¯s beautiful face momentarily froze, then she excitedly hugged Anna. ¡°Sister Anna, you¡¯re so kind! I have so much to tell Mr. Charles. Oh, I also want to send him a photo of myself now. And there¡¯s¡­¡±


    Anna¡¯s slender arms wrapped around the girl, gently patting her back, while the tentacles beneath her skirt retracted.


    Charles sat on the deck by the anchor machine, silently watching the marker on the water slowly drift away.


    Though it was still dark ahead, he could already sense a change in the air. When he saw a fly land on the deck, he knew Coral Island was close.


    Suddenly, his severed arm lifted on its own and moved slightly. Richard¡¯s voice echoed in his mind. ¡°If we go back now, shouldn¡¯t we get a sculpture to match?¡±


    ¡°Stop joking. Losing an arm has significantly weakened us; we need to find a way to compensate.¡±


    ¡°What can we do? The arm is gone, and the severed hand is still stuck in the wall. Are we supposed to wait for the island to resurface and then go retrieve it?¡±


    ¡°Of course not. I mean, we need to find another way to compensate.¡±


    Just then, angry shouts from the ship¡¯s cabin reached them, sounding like someone had been caught sneaking the doctor¡¯s alcohol.


    Charles stood up and walked toward the cabin door, thinking of a good strategy; the doctor just happened to have what he needed.


    ¡°What? You want to know where I got this prosthetic limb? Do you want one too?¡±


    Charles nodded. ¡°I see you¡¯re using it quite well.¡±


    The doctor opened his iron hand and flexed it. ¡°It works well enough, but it¡¯s expensive. Can you afford it?¡±


    ¡°How much?¡±


    ¡°Just for this hand, it¡¯s three million.¡±


    Charles¡¯s eyes widened in surprise. He hadn¡¯t expected a prosthetic limb to be so expensive. After all, he had bought the Narwhal for only three hundred fifty thousand. This small item was worth a ship!


    Richard pondered another issue. ¡°Wow, this old man might look shabby, but he¡¯s actually richer than us! Black doctor!¡±


    ¡°Three million is worth it; this isn¡¯t an ordinary prosthetic. I¡¯ve heard those guys use some enchanted materials,¡± the doctor explained, peeling back the outer shell of the iron hand to reveal a complex arrangement of gears.


    Each gear fit together perfectly, rotating in sync with the doctor¡¯s movements, clicking and whirring at different speeds.


    Charles noticed that as the gears turned, they faintly glowed with purple runes.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know how they did it, but once you install it, it functions like a real hand, except you won¡¯t have any sensation. If you need, they can even add more features inside.¡±


    Charles was intrigued. If he had this, his severed arm would no longer be a hindrance.


    ¡°When we return to port, help me get in touch with them. If possible, I need to install one.¡±


    The doctor nodded and replied, ¡°Sure, as long as the money is in place, they¡¯re easy to negotiate with. They usually operate in the West Sea, but I remember they have a contact point on Coral Island.¡±


    ¡°Try to get them to hurry; I¡¯m on a tight schedule.¡±


    ¡°Tight schedule? How long do you plan to rest when we get back?¡±


    ¡°Not sure; it depends on the situation with Kede. If they¡¯re back and we exchange information, we¡¯ll set sail as soon as possible.¡±


    ¡°If you want to stay alive, you should linger on land a bit longer. Losing an arm this time is lucky; if you¡¯re not careful next time, it could cost you your life.¡±


    Just then, cheers erupted from the deck as sailors celebrated. Charles and the doctor opened the door and stepped outside.


    The lighthouse beam of Coral Island slowly swept over the Narwhal. They had returned alive once again.

 **Chapter 90: The Letter**

    The port area of Coral Island was as chaotic and noisy as ever. After parting ways with the crew, Charles headed straight for the Bat Hotel with Lily perched on his shoulder. Although he now had enough echoes to buy a house in the port area, he felt he wouldn¡¯t be staying long enough to waste money on such things.


    As soon as he entered the hotel, he noticed something was off. The scruffy man who usually sat behind the front desk was gone, replaced by a middle-aged man whose attire was completely mismatched with the surroundings. Dressed in a white shirt and a black waistcoat, with a neat hairstyle, he looked nothing like someone who worked in a port.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, has the Bat Hotel changed owners?¡± Lily asked, curiously observing the man.


    After a moment of thought, Charles approached him. ¡°I need a room for a month, room 303 on the third floor, and send two meals to my room.¡±


    ¡°Of course, sir. Your room is ready.¡±


    Just as Charles was about to pull out his echo coins, the man waved his hand, signaling that it wasn¡¯t necessary.


    With a respectful smile, he said, ¡°Mr. Charles, you don¡¯t need to pay; this hotel now belongs to you.¡±


    ¡°My hotel?¡± Charles scrutinized the man¡¯s face but found no information there.


    ¡°Who are you? Who sent you?¡±


    ¡°The owner left a letter for you in your room. You¡¯ll understand once you read it.¡±


    Taking the key the man offered, Charles walked to his room, puzzled. Upon opening the door, he found the interior had changed dramatically. The peeling walls had been repainted and adorned with classical wallpaper, and all the old furniture had been replaced with new classical-style pieces.


    Thick wool carpets covered the floor, and art pieces hung on the walls, making the room feel completely unfamiliar. The biggest change was a fireplace that had been constructed on the left wall, with a roaring fire casting warmth and light throughout the room, banishing the damp chill that had once lingered.


    Charles stepped back outside to check the room number; it was indeed the same room he had stayed in before. The new decor gave him the impression of stepping into a governor¡¯s bedroom.


    ¡°Wow!!¡± Excited, Lily jumped off Charles¡¯s shoulder and onto the bed, rolling around. ¡°Mr. Charles! Come quickly, this bed is so soft and comfortable!¡±


    Ignoring Lily¡¯s enthusiastic shouts, Charles recalled the man¡¯s words and scanned the table.


    A square envelope was placed squarely in the center.This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    ¡°Who would write me a letter in the Sea of Earth?¡± A thought crossed his mind, causing his heart to race.


    He rushed over, tore open the envelope, and a folded piece of drawing paper fell out. It was a caricature of Anna, making a funny face.


    Charles stared at the drawing for a few seconds before flipping it over, discovering some handwritten characters on the back.


    ¡°Gao Zhiming, how¡¯s your search for the exit going? Any clues? I have some good news: I got married! Don¡¯t worry, I didn¡¯t cheat on you; the guy has a nice scent.¡±


    ¡°I came to check on you guys temporarily. You men are really rough; you can live in such a place. I tidied it up a bit; no need to thank me, don¡¯t overthink it; this doesn¡¯t mean anything.¡±


    Charles read the characters over and over, feeling more confused as time passed. He couldn¡¯t understand why Anna would do this.


    ¡°Maybe we should tie up that guy downstairs; we might get a clue about Anna. Should we go look for her?¡± Richard, unusually serious, spoke in his mind.


    ¡°You want to go?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t put this on me; you¡¯re thinking the same thing, right? Wanting to find her but not wanting to at the same time.¡±


    ¡°What would happen if we found her? Don¡¯t forget her identity. Keeping her close while watching her devour people¡ªcan you accept that?¡±


    ¡°Hey, you¡¯re Gao Zhiming, and so am I. If you can accept it, I can too.¡±


    Frowning, Charles took a deep breath and placed the drawing back on the table. He sank into the leather sofa in front of the fireplace, instinctively rubbing his temple with his right hand. The soft leather and the warmth from the fire relaxed his tired body but couldn¡¯t ease the turmoil in his heart.


    Anna was his childhood friend, and even though he now knew those beautiful memories were false, he still couldn¡¯t forget them. Yet, no matter how deep his feelings were, they couldn¡¯t negate the fact that Anna was a man-eating monster.


    After watching the flickering flames for a while, Charles finally spoke, ¡°In this illogical Sea of Earth, is there any way¡ª¡±


    Richard interrupted, ¡°You¡¯re thinking of a way to turn Anna back into a human? Dude, that¡¯s a tall order. Not to mention whether that tentacle monster would agree, if we shifted our focus to help it, what happens to our search for the surface exit? Is a woman more important than going home?¡±


    Charles remained silent. Just as he was feeling increasingly unsettled, he noticed a small box on the floor that seemed to contain something.


    He walked over and discovered a torn letter inside. Bending down, he pieced it together.


    **Margaret Jane Cavendish (Sender)**


    **Mr. Charles (Recipient)**


    Margaret? Charles recalled the timid girl who was as nervous as a rabbit.


    He looked at the drawing of Anna on the table, then back at the torn envelope in his hand.


    Since Anna had torn this letter up, why had she left it here for me to find?


    After pondering for a moment, he folded the envelope back together, bit down on one end, and with a swift tug, tore it into four pieces.


    He tossed the scraps into the wastebasket and stood up, heading for the washroom.


    The girl had shown kindness by secretly feeding food to slaves. No matter what she wrote in the letter, Charles didn¡¯t want any further ties with her.


    He had enough entanglements in the Sea of Earth; he didn¡¯t want to add another.


    Charles¡¯s peaceful island life didn¡¯t last long. Just half a month after he had resumed painting to clear his mental pollution, he spotted the battered exploration ship of the Church of Light at the dock.


    ¡°How did it go? Did you find a supply point island?¡±


    Inside room 303 of the Bat Hotel, Charles asked Kede, who looked worse for wear. As for the exit to the Land of Light, he didn¡¯t even bother to ask. Given Kede¡¯s fervent devotion to the Church of Light, if he had found it, his expression would never be like this.

 **Chapter 91: Kedes Return to Port**

    Kede, sporting two dark circles under his eyes, shook his head vigorously. "No, they were all dead islands. My crew suffered significant losses. How about you?"


    Charles raised his empty left sleeve. "The island I explored wasn¡¯t any better."


    Frustrated, Kede turned his gaze back to the sea chart on the table. "That leaves only these few islands. There must be a ladder to the Land of Light or an island where the ''King'' replenishes resources."


    Lily jumped onto the map, playfully stomping on the furthest island chain. "Mr. Charles, do you think they might have a really big ship that doesn¡¯t need supplies to reach those islands?"


    Kede pushed Lily aside irritably. "What do you know? That''s impossible! Look at the distance here and here. No steamship from the Sea can make such a long journey. Even the Royal Giant can¡¯t do it; they definitely have supply points."


    Soothing the pouting Lily, Charles handed Kede a pen. "Enough of that. Let¡¯s choose islands again. You go first, as usual."


    Kede crossed out the two previously circled islands and drew two new ones, then handed the pen back to Charles.


    "What about this island?" Charles pointed to one he hadn¡¯t marked before.


    "That island is suspicious; my ship hasn¡¯t returned. Let¡¯s focus on the easier islands for now."


    After thinking for a moment, Charles circled the unmarked island with the pen.


    Kede was taken aback; he hadn¡¯t expected Charles to choose that island. A smile crept onto his wrinkled face. "Alright, I admire Captain Charles''s courage."


    "Danger and reward are relative; the most dangerous places are often where the clues lie."


    "Then it¡¯s settled. Depart as soon as you can, and don¡¯t die again."


    Just as Kede was about to leave, Charles stopped him, this time with Richard¡¯s intervention. "Wait, old man, do you have any relics left? Share some with me."


    The upcoming islands would only get more dangerous, and the stronger his crew became, the higher their survival rate on the islands. With a sheep nearby, why not shear it?


    "I don¡¯t have any. My crew needs relics too. If I give you mine, what will they use?"


    "Doesn¡¯t the Church of Light have any methods to enhance strength besides relics?" Richard pressed, indifferent to the means as long as they could grow stronger.


    Kede hesitated, seemingly weighing his options.


    Richard leaned in with a cheeky grin, placing his hand on Kede''s shoulder. "Come on, at this point, you still want to keep secrets? Don¡¯t forget, we¡¯re all in the same boat now. My strength increases benefits everyone!"Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    Kede shook his head. "That¡¯s not the reason. The Church of Light does have ways for an ordinary person to enhance their strength, but there¡¯s a prerequisite: you must be a believer. If you¡¯re not, undergoing the ritual could lead to being consumed by the Sacred Fire."


    Richard wasn¡¯t quite ready to give up. "Isn¡¯t there any other way?"


    After a moment of silence, Kede replied, "Your crew is made up of ordinary people; they haven¡¯t used any other strength-enhancing items, right?"


    "No."


    "Alright, I remember I have a batch of items that might be useful for you. I¡¯ll go get them."


    A smug smile spread across Richard''s face as he thought to Charles, "How¡¯s that? I¡¯m really good at shearing sheep. A deal like this is a steal!"


    Soon, Charles saw Kede return with the items: a batch of wriggling, egg yolk-like substances in bottles.


    "This batch is from the Church, purchased from Sodom¡¯s auction. If ordinary people consume it, they can enhance their physique. I lied and said the cargo ship was lost to keep this batch hidden. I intended to sell it for supplies for future exploration, but now it¡¯s yours."


    "Are there any side effects?" Charles asked cautiously.


    "It¡¯s not a relic; how could there be side effects? If you don¡¯t believe me, you can ask others. Many have eaten this at sea."


    With such a good opportunity, Charles quickly called all the crew members back, and everyone, including Lily''s rat, got a taste.


    "Whoa! Whoa!" Dep, with excitement, raised his fists and waved them in the air, creating a slight gust of wind.


    The other crew members also tested their enhanced bodies.


    After trying a few times, Krona looked up at Charles in surprise. "Captain, this stuff really works! You should try it too."


    Charles clenched his fists and struck the air. "Smack!" The sound he created was different from the others, and as he swung his fists, he even began to see a faint afterimage. He felt a slight warmth emanating from his fists.


    With the enhancement from 096 and Kede''s items, his strength had increased another level.


    "Not bad, barely at tier three," Kede assessed from the side.


    "What determines the combat personnel''s levels on the warship?"


    "It¡¯s not about what determines it; it¡¯s just a rough standard among members of warships in the Sea. The fastest way to increase your tier is to defeat someone of a higher tier."


    "What tier is the ''King'' of Sodom?" Charles immediately thought of that rotund figure, the strongest enemy he had faced.


    Kede shook his head. "Hard to say. Generally, his strength is tier four, but he became the ''King'' through other means."


    Other means? Was he referring to that little girl or that seemingly indestructible ability? If the physical strength of the ''King'' is tier four, does that mean I¡¯ve defeated him, and my strength is now tier four?


    With that thought, Charles felt a surge of interest. He had previously focused only on exploration, but he hadn¡¯t paid much attention to the battle system in the Sea.


    "Who is the strongest person at sea right now?"


    "The governor of Cat Island in the East Sea, Julio. His strength is tier fifteen; it¡¯s said he alone can defeat a fleet of over a thousand men."


    Upon hearing this, a question flashed through Charles''s mind. "If he¡¯s that powerful, why doesn¡¯t he explore islands?"


    Kede looked at Charles with an odd expression. "Why explore? Julio already possesses the largest island in the Sea. Why would he risk his life, and when it comes to exploring unknown islands, he might not be able to match you or me."


    Charles quickly recalled the islands he had explored and realized that this was indeed the case. Strength, while powerful among humans, didn¡¯t necessarily confer advantages against the various bizarre entities in the sea.


    "Don¡¯t pay attention to those fools; they are ignorant mortals. No matter how strong they are, they are merely lowly creatures driven by desire. Only by finding the Land of Light and entering the Kingdom of the God of Light can humanity attain eternal happiness and peace."

 **Chapter 92: The Puppet**

    "Don''t pay attention to those fools. They are ignorant mortals; no matter how strong they are, they are merely lowly creatures driven by desire. Only by finding the Land of Light and entering the Kingdom of the God of Light can humanity attain eternal happiness and peace."


    Charles rarely found himself agreeing with Kede.


    What good is strength if one is still trapped on islands that could sink at any moment? Their endurance of darkness was merely due to their ignorance of the light.


    After exchanging information with Kede, he quickly set sail again. Watching Kede''s anxious back, Charles felt a flash of recognition, seeing a reflection of his former self.


    As the hope of going home grew closer, he found himself less anxious than at the beginning.


    The next morning, Charles opened his eyes to find himself once again in an unknown bar, two scantily clad bunny girls nestled in his arms.


    Shaking his dizzy head, he stumbled out of the bar.


    "Don''t waste echoes in places like this. Remember, we still need 3 million echoes for the new arm," Charles thought to his other persona.


    "How much could it cost to buy this cheap place? Leave me alone; I¡¯m tired."


    Looking around, Charles headed towards the Bat Inn, which now belonged to him. He needed to grab his sketchpad and continue drawing to reduce mental pollution.


    Upon arriving home, he was surprised to find an unexpected visitor sitting on his sofa: the doctor.


    "How did you get in? I don¡¯t remember giving you a key."


    "Your rat let me in."


    Lily, perched on the pillow, nodded enthusiastically, as if to say "Look at me!"


    "What brings you here?"


    The doctor jumped off the sofa and limped toward the door. "Come with me; I''ve contacted those prosthetic sellers. They want to meet you."


    Upon hearing this, Charles immediately set down his sketchpad. No one liked missing an arm, and he was no exception.


    Charles followed the doctor into a car, heading deeper into the island.


    Coral Island was neither too big nor too small. After winding through various streets for over an hour, they finally arrived at the bustling heart of the island.


    In contrast to the chaotic port area, the central district was a different world altogether.


    Expensive electric lights boldly adorned the streets, while the beggars, lunatics, and street urchins of the port had transformed into polite gentlemen, women walking small dogs, and a steady stream of private cars.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    Melodious singing floated from nearby high-end shops, and Charles caught a glimpse of a pair of sky-blue leather shoes behind the glass. "Shark Piano brand men¡¯s high-heeled shoes, priced at 35,000 echoes."


    The filthy doctor and one-armed Charles walked down the street, looking completely out of place. This mismatch quickly drew attention.


    "Beep¡ª! Beep-beep¡ª!" Two tall enforcers in black uniforms strutted over, whistling confidently.


    "Hey!! You two, stop right there! No entry for the poorly dressed in the central district! What if a big shot sees you and gets offended?"


    The doctor, holding a flask, stepped back to let Charles through.


    Charles couldn''t be bothered to respond; he pulled out the explorer''s certification he had applied for earlier.


    At the sight of the explorer association''s anchor emblem, the expressions of the enforcers shifted from disdain to a mix of apprehension and fear.


    "I... I¡¯m telling you, don¡¯t cause trouble here. The governor¡¯s warship is nearby."


    As soon as he finished speaking, the two turned and hurried away, their anxious voices drifting back to Charles''s sharp ears.


    "Why is that sea lunatic here? Damn it! Why did it have to be my shift today?"


    "Stop talking; hurry up and get someone to keep an eye on them. If they stir up trouble, we¡¯re all in for it!"


    With the minor trouble averted, the doctor continued walking. After about fifteen minutes on the bustling street, they finally stopped in front of a high-end caf¨¦ in the heart of the island.


    The colorful glass wind chimes jingled as the doctor and Charles entered the bright, clean interior.


    Ignoring the astonished patrons in suits, the doctor headed straight for the kitchen at the back.


    Inside the kitchen, a baker was intently decorating small cakes, seemingly oblivious to the two newcomers.


    "Why do the prosthetics people set up shop here?" Charles asked.


    "Hmph, that¡¯s just a part of their business. They can do much more than this."


    Behind the hot kitchen was an empty room. In the center sat an elderly woman in a rocking chair, wearing reading glasses and perusing a newspaper.


    With half-rimmed glasses and a floral-patterned dress, she appeared to be a kind, grandmotherly figure at first glance.


    "Hey, Uren called us," the doctor said bluntly to the old woman.


    She eyed Charles''s empty left sleeve and nodded, slowly rising from her chair. She shuffled toward the kitchen.


    "Is she the one making my prosthetic?"


    Without turning back, the doctor pulled out his metal flask and took a swig. "No, it¡¯s Uren from Blackleaf Island who¡¯s making it for you."


    "Blackleaf Island? It takes at least three months to get here from there. I can¡¯t wait that long."


    "I know you¡¯re impatient. Don¡¯t worry; just watch. They have the capability to handle business all over Haize, so they have their own ways."


    Hearing this, Charles fell silent, curious about how someone who wasn¡¯t present could help him install a prosthetic.


    The kitchen door opened again, and the elderly woman returned, carrying a simple cloth bag.


    "Step back a bit," she said, revealing a toothless grin.


    Once she saw Charles and the doctor standing against the wall, she slowly squatted down and began rummaging through the bag with her wrinkled right hand, pulling out a blob of black, viscous substance to start drawing on the floor.


    Various complex, unknown black symbols emerged from her fingers, tightly arranged, ultimately forming a mysterious circle with an outer ring and an inverted triangle in the center.


    A tattered teddy bear was placed in the center of the formation, and the old woman produced several black candles, arranging them around the puppet in a specific pattern.


    A strange, chilling chant escaped her lips, enveloping the entire room in an eerie sensation.


    The chant began slowly, then picked up speed, with her voice rising higher. Finally, it reached a crescendo and abruptly stopped.


    The candle flames flickered and suddenly extinguished, causing the teddy bear on the floor to wobble and stand upright.


    Its eyes, made of black fruit pits, scanned the room¡¯s occupants.

 **Chapter 93: The Novice**

    "Rasto, thank you for introducing me to the business," the teddy bear puppet said, weaving through the candles and nodding its cotton-filled head at the drinking doctor.


    "Cut the chatter and hurry up," the doctor replied impatiently, lying down next to the old woman''s rocking chair.


    The teddy bear turned its head toward Charles. "Can you crouch down? I can''t take your measurements while you''re standing like that."


    This was a first-time experience for Charles; he hadn¡¯t expected that the mysterious arts could be applied in such a way. No wonder the doctor had mentioned that this puppet could craft prosthetics on Blackleaf Island.


    The teddy bear first pulled out a pair of scissors from its belly and cut open the empty sleeve of Charles''s left arm, then retrieved a flexible measuring tape.


    "I heard you managed to get Rasto on board the ship? How did you do it? He doesn¡¯t seem like the type to move easily," the teddy bear asked while measuring the stump of Charles''s arm.


    "Do you know him?"


    "Of course! Did you see his face? I drew it! You want to know anything about him, just ask me. I know him well."


    "Cough, cough!" The doctor cleared his throat.


    Charles glanced at him and chose not to engage further with the teddy bear''s chatter.


    After about ten minutes, the teddy bear stopped, put the measuring tape back into its belly, and said to Charles, "Since you''re the captain of an exploration ship, do you need any weapons added to your prosthetic?"


    Charles recalled the various medical instruments on the doctor¡¯s prosthetic.


    "What can be added without affecting sensitivity?"


    "Oh, plenty! Guns, gas, universal lockpicks¡ªwhatever you want! Of course, these modifications come at an extra cost, and your pockets need to be heavy with echoes."


    After learning about the various modifications and their prices, Charles ultimately decided to add a chainsaw and a grappling hook to his prosthetic. These were the most basic options but suited him best for now.


    As for other options, it wasn''t that Charles didn''t want them; it was just that the base arm alone cost 3 million echoes. If he didn¡¯t save some of his 5 million echoes, he might not have enough for fuel for the next voyage of the *Unicorn Whale*.


    Taking the check with its frayed edges from the teddy bear''s paw, the puppet counted the zeros carefully before tucking it back into its belly. "Very well, your prosthetic will arrive soon."


    "How long will it take?"


    "I have your data now. I still have some stock for the left arm, so I¡¯ll adjust it and send it over immediately. Rasto told me about you; since you¡¯re his friend, you¡¯re my friend too. I can¡¯t neglect a friend¡¯s matters."Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.


    Just as the teddy bear finished speaking, its body went limp and it collapsed to the ground, motionless.


    The old woman shuffled over and picked up the puppet, placing it into a cloth bag.


    Then, she knelt down and began meticulously cleaning the magical circle on the floor with a short mop made of ragged cloth.


    Once the circle was cleaned, the old woman began to draw a new, larger, and more complex magical formation, this time placing a box in the center.


    Reflecting on what the teddy bear had said, Charles settled his thoughts and patiently waited. He had already figured out how his prosthetic would be delivered.


    The old woman began chanting the previously incomprehensible incantations again, and the magical circle on the ground started to emit a faint glow, writhing as if alive.


    When the incantation ended, all the strange phenomena in the room vanished. The box opened, and the old woman walked toward Charles, holding a silver arm.


    Just like how boys love guns and cannons, Charles was instantly enamored with the prosthetic at first sight.


    Compared to the doctor''s prosthetic, this one had no outer shell, exposing the large gears and glimmering pistons. Rather than being unattractive, it exuded a captivating steampunk aesthetic.


    The end of the prosthetic had several metal-tipped cones, which appeared to be hollow.


    "Extend your hand! What are you waiting for? This thing is heavy!" the old woman complained.


    "Hang in there," the doctor suddenly lifted his head to remind him.


    Charles took a deep breath and aligned the stump of his arm with the prosthetic. The metal cones on the prosthetic began to spin rapidly, and flesh splattered as they burrowed into his blood and muscle, sending a jolt of intense pain through him.


    When the prosthetic stopped moving, Charles, sweating from the effort, lifted his new left arm and found that it was completely still.


    "You¡¯re in a hurry, aren¡¯t you? We still need a couple more things," the old woman said leisurely as she pulled out two glass jars from her cloth bag.


    Inside the jars swirled a greenish smoke, constantly shifting.


    Noticing the confusion on Charles''s face, the old woman smiled and shook one of the jars. As she did, the smoke inside transformed, revealing a faint, screaming green face.


    "Hehehe, you¡¯ve never seen this before, have you? This is a human soul, used to connect your soul with this hand."


    With a "thud," the jar was opened, and the green smoke quickly drifted into the prosthetic.


    Once the smoke fully integrated, the gears inside the prosthetic began to whir, and the purple inscriptions on the gears glowed faintly. Charles felt his left hand again.


    He opened and clenched his fist, and the prosthetic moved swiftly in response to his thoughts.


    The old woman handed him a small booklet, her demeanor as warm as a grandmother handing candy to a child. "Take this! It¡¯s the instruction manual. Remember to drip whale oil according to the schedule. If there are any issues with your hand, you can come back to me, and I¡¯ll help you send it back for repairs."


    Charles accepted the booklet with a complex expression, glancing at the empty glass jars as he stood up with the doctor and headed for the exit.


    In the streets of the port area, Charles began testing his new left arm.


    "Clang!" The vicious chainsaw blade shot out from his wrist, spinning rapidly at his mental command.


    Just by observing the astonishing speed of the chains, he could tell the power of this thing was formidable; he even felt its cutting strength surpass that of the Black Blade.


    "Click, click, click." Charles watched as his left palm opened up, and a grappling hook with a chain shot out, latching onto the chimney of a building across the street.


    With another mental command, the gears in the prosthetic whirred, and the chain retracted, pulling him rapidly toward the rooftop.


    With this addition, even in places where he couldn¡¯t leverage himself, he now had a way to move.


    But the most astonishing part was the sensitivity of the prosthetic. As he reached out, the Black Blade danced in response to his fingers, leaving trails in the air.


    No wonder it cost 3 million echoes; this prosthetic was even more sensitive than his original hand.

 **Chapter 94: Lilys Food**

    The doctor glanced at Charles, who was adjusting to his new prosthetic, and reminded him in a low voice, "Don¡¯t get too attached to that thing. As a doctor, let me tell you, no matter how good the new is, it can¡¯t compare to the old."


    Charles lowered his prosthetic and pondered for a moment before asking the doctor, "This thing seems to be more than just mechanical."


    "Hmph, that kid would do anything to turn his body into machinery. You¡¯d best stay away from him. Just because I know him doesn¡¯t mean I¡¯m close with him."


    Before Charles could respond, Richard suddenly interjected. "These prosthetics involve souls, so those who use magic must be very familiar with the spiritual realm, right?"


    "Most of those tricksters are in the West Sea. I don¡¯t know much about them. Why do you ask?"


    Charles echoed Richard''s confusion, "Yeah, why do you ask?"


    "Come on, it¡¯s magic! Isn¡¯t it fascinating? Shouldn¡¯t we give it a try?" Richard¡¯s tone was filled with excitement.


    The doctor shook his head. "Forget about it. Those folks are very exclusive; they mostly teach only their own family members. Besides, if they were that powerful, they¡¯d have already conquered the seas instead of hiding on a few islands."


    "Is that so? What a pity. I thought it would be a new skill to learn," Richard said, sounding disappointed before retreating.


    At that moment, Charles''s expression became somewhat grim as he pressed his hands against his head, freezing in place.


    His strange behavior caught the attention of the islanders around him.


    The doctor set down his jug of wine and examined Charles closely, then stood by, doing nothing.


    A few minutes later, the whispering in Charles''s ears faded, and he turned his gaze toward an old man nearby.


    "Just endure this level of auditory hallucination for now. If you start seeing things, then come find me. Like I said, if you don¡¯t want to suffer, just stay off the island."


    Charles lowered his hands, said nothing, and continued toward the Bat Inn.


    With a "creak," he pushed open the door to room 303. As soon as he entered, he saw several plates of indescribable dishes on the table, with Lily''s white mouse darting among them.


    "Mr. Charles, you¡¯re back! Wow! Did you get a new arm?" the white mouse Lily jumped in front of him, climbing up his pant leg.


    "Where did you get all this?" Charles asked, picking her up and pointing at the dishes on the table.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    Lily stood in his palm, raising her little head. "I made these! You should try them; they¡¯re really delicious!"


    Seeing the mice scurrying around the plates, Charles felt a bit queasy, but when he saw Lily¡¯s eager expression, he ultimately walked over.


    "What made you think to cook for me?"


    "Mom was home today, teaching another me how to cook. She said a girl must have good culinary skills, so I learned a lot while hiding nearby. You should try this; it¡¯s my mom¡¯s specialty, sweet fish soup."


    Lily hopped from his hand to the table, excitedly wagging her tail in front of a bowl of soup.


    Charles looked at the white mouse and scooped a spoonful of the soup into his mouth. Instantly, an overwhelming sweetness exploded in his mouth, as if there were no water in the soup, just liquid sugar.


    "How much sugar did you put in this?" Charles managed to swallow hard and set the spoon down.


    "Is it not good? But the others said it was really tasty!" Lily''s little ears drooped sadly.


    Seeing her like this, Charles hesitated for a moment, then picked up a knife and fork to cut into a black chunk of meat on another plate.


    After chewing a bit, he said to Lily, "The fish soup might not be great, but this meat is pretty good."


    "Really? That¡¯s awesome! I made that too!" Lily¡¯s ears perked up, and she joyfully bounced on the table.


    At that moment, Richard¡¯s voice echoed in Charles¡¯s mind, "Hurry and spit it out! If you¡¯re going to poison yourself, don¡¯t drag me down with you."


    "Shut up," Charles thought resolutely, swallowing the food in his mouth and continuing to eat without changing his expression.


    "Mr. Charles, are you going to leave me too?" Lily suddenly asked, making Charles pause mid-chew.


    "Why do you say that?"


    "I just feel like you don¡¯t like it here, like you¡¯re ready to leave at any moment." The white mouse sat on the table, resting her chin on her little paws.


    "Maybe, but you can¡¯t follow me forever. You¡¯ll have to go home someday."


    "But I¡¯m a mouse now, and my family doesn¡¯t want me anymore. Charles, can you not leave?" Lily leaned closer, snuggling against him.


    Charles stopped using his knife and fork and gently patted her furry head, a flicker of warmth in his eyes.


    Lily wasn¡¯t just his crew member; after months of companionship, they had become more like family, two lonely souls relying on each other.


    "I do plan to leave here, but if you want to come with me, I can take you to my place. It¡¯s quite big; a mouse won¡¯t take up much space."


    "Where are you going, Charles? What¡¯s it like there?"


    "It¡¯s my home, and there¡¯s a lot of food you can¡¯t even imagine. Just point your finger, and it¡¯ll fly to your home. Plus, there are all sorts of fun things¡­"


    As Charles described the incredible things, Lily¡¯s eyes sparkled, and she listened intently, perched on the table.


    This time, the break at the port didn¡¯t last long. Once he fully mastered his new prosthetic, Charles eagerly notified the crew to gather at the dock to replenish supplies and prepare for departure.


    Breathing in the sea breeze revitalized Charles; he felt that only when he was moving forward on the ship did he truly feel alive.


    "Captain, is that arm useful?" the first mate asked curiously, eyeing Charles''s prosthetic.


    Charles pointed at the nearby ropes and replied, "When working, don¡¯t think about anything else. Hurry and have the crew change the ropes."


    After saying that, Charles turned and walked toward the captain''s cabin. He opened his diary, and the tip of his pen glided across the paper, leaving behind lines of Chinese characters.


    "February 24, Year 9 of the Crossing


    The new arm exceeded my expectations; it¡¯s very useful. I¡¯m glad my abilities haven¡¯t diminished with the loss of my arm.


    The *Unicorn Whale* has set sail once again. This time, our destination is another island in the chain.


    Once someone goes to this island, they never return. It¡¯s definitely dangerous there, and there are very few islands left that can be reached by steamship. I have a feeling this journey will yield some discoveries."

 **Chapter 95: Footprints on the Ship**

    The island loomed before Charles and his crew, larger than Coral Island. Each member wore a grave expression as they gazed at the distant land, knowing that the most dangerous part of their journey lay ahead.


    This island was unlike the others; a towering wall encircled it, sealing off the interior and obscuring any view of what lay beyond. The wall was a grayish-white, constructed from a material resembling cement, devoid of any markings that might suggest it was a human-made structure.


    "Captain! Look, there¡¯s a ship over there!" someone exclaimed.


    "I see it," Charles replied, his focus sharpening.


    A bright searchlight illuminated a steamship, larger than the *Unicorn Whale*. The white triangular emblem next to it confirmed its identity; it was the ship belonging to the Cult of the Radiant God, the one that had not returned.


    "Prepare the weapons and bring the ship closer," Charles ordered. If there were clues on board, they might avoid meeting the same fate.


    As they drew nearer, more details became apparent. The ship''s anchor was still submerged, indicating it had been left there by its crew. The deck was eerily tidy; it seemed the cultists had not suffered any physical attacks.


    Upon stepping onto the deck, Charles noticed a layer of dust had settled, suggesting the ship had been abandoned for nearly two months. The unkempt steamship bore the marks of decay, the sea breeze eroding its structure.


    "Let¡¯s head to the captain¡¯s cabin," Charles said. If they wanted to understand what had happened aboard, the captain¡¯s log would be the quickest source.


    The group cautiously made their way through the ship¡¯s entrance, which resembled a narrow corridor similar to that of the *Unicorn Whale*. Just as Deep was about to take the lead, a metallic hand stopped him.


    "Captain, what¡ª?"


    Charles lowered his voice and crouched down. "Shh, look at the ground."


    As their gazes dropped, they saw a line of six-toed footprints clearly imprinted in the dust. Something had indeed come through here.


    They slowed their pace, carefully following the footprints deeper into the ship. One door after another was gently pushed open, flashlights and gun barrels probing into the darkness.


    Inside, the ship was quiet, revealing nothing alive apart from the usual items scattered about.


    Finally, they reached the last door. Charles¡¯s ears perked up; his keen hearing detected movement inside.Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Be careful, there¡¯s something in there."


    Kronar swallowed hard and pulled out a blue candle.


    With a forceful shove, the door burst open, and several gun barrels aimed at the interior. But disappointment washed over their faces as they discovered the source of the noise.


    Inside was a kitchen, where a group of mice were nibbling on moldy biscuits. Startled by the sudden intrusion, the mice dropped their snacks and scurried away.


    The kitchen was in disarray, much like the outside, with only remnants of food that had been gnawed by the mice. The crew quickly dispersed to search for clues, while Charles pondered thoughtfully.


    "How could no one be here? If there¡¯s no one, then where did those footprints come from?"


    As he walked past a silver water jug, its reflection caught his eye. Suddenly, his pupils constricted, and he looked up sharply.


    Hanging from the ceiling was a grotesque purple creature resembling a toad. As soon as it spotted Charles, it used its powerful hind legs to leap, its toothy maw opening wide as it lunged at him.


    In a split second, Charles raised his left hand. With a "thunk," a chain-linked harpoon shot out, pinning the creature back to the ceiling.


    With a strong pull, he yanked it down, sending the monster crashing to the floor. The other crew members quickly reacted, firing their weapons at the creature.


    When the gunfire ceased, the creature was nothing more than a mass of flesh.


    Charles crouched to examine the remains. "This thing looks like it came from the sea. It must have come up here looking for food."


    Deep exhaled in relief. "I thought it was something more serious. Turns out it was just this creature that made the footprints."


    Charles shook his head, focusing on the creature¡¯s fin-like limbs. "No, it couldn¡¯t have made those footprints. They belong to something else."


    As his words hung in the air, the crew''s previously relaxed demeanor grew tense again.


    "Let¡¯s check elsewhere," Charles said, leading them to continue their search.


    They quickly scoured the ship but found no further clues, not even the captain¡¯s log.


    "Maybe the cultists don¡¯t keep logs. Who writes a diary anyway?" Richard chimed in.


    Charles ignored him, still deep in thought. He felt as though he had overlooked something crucial, but the details eluded him.


    Just then, a mouse scurried past him, prompting a sudden idea. "Lily, can you gather the mice on this ship and ask them what happened?"


    "Sure! Just wait a moment." With a command, Lily sent the brown mice scattering.


    Soon, a trembling gray mouse was pushed to the front of the group, with Lily standing beside it, squeaking.


    "Mr. Charles, it says that occasionally, things come aboard to take supplies and then return to the island."


    "What kind of things? Are they people or something else?"


    Lily turned to converse with the mouse and, sounding frustrated, replied, "These guys are too dumb to explain clearly."


    Charles didn¡¯t expect much from a mouse, but he gleaned that there were living beings on the island that occasionally came to the ship to take supplies.


    Considering the massive wall, a thought flickered in Charles¡¯s mind: could the creatures the mice saw be the pirates of Sodom?


    However, he quickly dismissed that notion. If they were pirates, they wouldn¡¯t leave such a fine exploration vessel untouched; that was not their style.


    When Charles snapped back to reality, he found the crew staring at him expectantly.


    "Captain, what¡¯s our next move?"


    He gazed at the towering wall of the island. "Drop anchor, lower the small boat, and prepare to go ashore."


    They had to explore the island; something significant lay behind those massive walls.


    As they approached the towering structure, an overwhelming sense of pressure enveloped them, as if they were standing next to a slumbering giant. The crew¡¯s voices dropped to hushed whispers, fearful of waking whatever lay beyond.

 **Chapter 96: The False City**

    Charles had thought that climbing over this thick wall would take some effort, but after a brief search, he spotted numerous small doors at the base of the wall, suggesting that it wasn¡¯t designed to defend against humans.


    With a gentle wave of his hand, he led the group slowly into this fortress-like island.


    As soon as they passed through the thick-walled tunnel, Charles was stunned by the scene before him. If he hadn¡¯t just been at sea, he would have thought he had returned to the surface.


    Inside the wall was a row of modern buildings neatly arranged. In addition to ordinary high-rise buildings, there were fast-food restaurants, mobile phone stores, clothing shops¡ªeverything one would expect from a city.


    This was a city, a modern city devoid of human presence. Time had left no mark on these buildings; everything appeared so clean and tidy that there wasn¡¯t a speck of dust on the ground.


    Under normal circumstances, this would be impossible. The ship had only been docked for two months and was already covered in dust, while this city had presumably been built for many years and should not look this new.


    ¡°Hey, don¡¯t you think this architectural style looks familiar?¡± Richard leaned close to a supermarket, pressing his face against the transparent glass.


    ¡°Foundation.¡± Charles thought of the ruins on Island 1002. If those ruins were intact, they should resemble this place.


    The Foundation came from the surface, and it was possible that the exit could also lead to this city.


    Even Charles was surprised by this city, and the crew of the *Unicorn* was even more astonished; since entering, their mouths had been agape.


    Everyone stared wide-eyed at the bizarre buildings in the darkness, their hands gripping their weapons, sometimes tightening, sometimes relaxing.


    Charles grasped the doorknob of a supermarket, pushed the door open, and stepped inside.


    The layout inside was almost identical to a Walmart, but compared to the bustling supermarket, this place felt eerily empty.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, is this the kind of computer you mentioned that can play animations?¡± Lily jumped onto the cash register curiously.


    Charles didn¡¯t respond; he quickly walked over to check the cash register behind the counter.


    He soon realized something was off. Although it looked like a supermarket cash register, there were no data cables connected underneath.


    ¡°Buzz~!¡± A chainsaw shot out from Charles¡¯s prosthetic arm and sliced through the cash register.


    He quickly discovered that there were no computer chips inside; it was merely an empty shell.This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    ¡°What do you think?¡± Charles scanned the other cash registers, suspecting they were all mere decorations like the one he had just cut open.


    ¡°You¡¯re asking me? Who would be so bored as to create a fake supermarket?¡± Richard yanked at the money slot, and various unfamiliar bills and coins sprang out.


    Charles picked one up with his right hand, noticing that while it looked like currency, it felt very rough to the touch. Just like the machine, this money was also fake.


    Suddenly, Charles thought of something and dashed deeper into the supermarket, quickly inspecting various goods. As expected, everything, whether daily necessities or clothing, looked similar but was not functional.


    Moreover, all the areas that should have had text were just a blurred, twisted mess.


    ¡°I feel like I¡¯ve stepped into a 1:1 scale model of a supermarket made by some big shot. Could it be the ¡®deity¡¯ in the water? I didn¡¯t expect the ¡®deity¡¯ to have such a geeky hobby.¡±


    Hearing Richard¡¯s guess, Charles shook his head. ¡°No, think about the footprints on the ship. There are creatures here, and it¡¯s possible these things were created by them.¡±


    ¡°Then why would they make a fake supermarket? Just to show off their skills?¡±


    Charles set down the items in his hand and gazed out the glass door, muttering, ¡°I¡¯m afraid there¡¯s more than just a fake supermarket¡­¡±


    Under Charles¡¯s lead, everyone rushed into the grand high-rise buildings.


    Looking at the interior, which was identical to reality, Charles felt as if he had returned to modern times; the building even had elevators.


    However, a quick inspection revealed that the elevator was also fake. He used his prosthetic arm to cut open the elevator door, only to find it solid inside¡ªthere wasn¡¯t even an elevator shaft.


    Charles led everyone up the stairs to the second floor.


    ¡°Everyone, search the rooms for clues. Hand me anything with text or images immediately. Let¡¯s regroup in half an hour, and if you encounter danger, alert everyone immediately.¡±


    Charles was with the doctor¡¯s group, and they entered a room that resembled an office, beginning to rummage through everything.


    Five minutes later, he emerged with a disappointed expression and walked to the next room. Seeing the crew members coming in and out of the room, Charles knew they had likely found nothing either.


    After clearing another room, Charles, feeling somewhat impatient, was about to lead the crew out of there.


    But just as he stood up, clutching his head and squatting down, a painful expression crossed his face as the whispering sound echoed again, louder than before.


    He pressed his hands to his head and stumbled toward the adjacent room where the doctor was.


    After taking a few steps, Charles saw a humanoid, flesh-covered monster with grotesque limbs approaching him.


    The monster, noticing Charles¡¯s condition, walked over on its blood-soaked legs and offered support with its limbs.


    Glancing at the monster¡¯s blood-soaked robe, a pained Charles said, ¡°Doctor, something is wrong. My hallucinations are starting again. Do you have any medication to suppress them?¡±


    The monster¡¯s deformed lips moved as if trying to speak, and then it pulled out a writhing white mass from its blood-soaked robe and handed it to Charles.


    Charles took the mass, bit into it, and an overwhelming stench of blood filled his mouth. He forced himself to swallow the disgusting mass.


    At that moment, he saw a figure walking in through the door. It was none other than his ship¡¯s doctor.


    ¡°Clatter!¡± The terrified doctor dropped the flask he was holding.


    ¡°Oh my god!! Charles, what are you eating¡ªwait! What the hell is that thing standing next to you?!¡±


    Startled, Charles looked up, locking eyes with the monster¡¯s cross-shaped pupils.


    The chainsaw from his prosthetic arm shot out, whirring rapidly.


    Just as he prepared to swing at the monster beside him, a strong wave of dizziness washed over him.


    The dizziness quickly drained Charles of his strength and will.


    As he collapsed to the ground, the last thing he saw was a six-fingered, grotesquely scaled foot that perfectly matched the footprints found on the ship.

 **Chapter 97: Imprisonment**

    Charles slowly regained consciousness, unsure of how much time had passed. The first thing he did was to cautiously scan his surroundings.


    The humanoid monster was gone, and his position had changed; he found himself confined in a small cell that appeared to be only about ten square meters. Apart from a heavy iron door in the distance, there was nothing else in the room.


    Everything on him had been taken¡ªhis wallet, belongings, and clothes were all gone, leaving Charles completely naked.


    He could see that the connection point between his prosthetic limb and body was slightly oozing blood, suggesting that someone had tried to remove the prosthetic while he was unconscious but had failed.


    From this information, Charles quickly understood his current situation: he had been captured by those strange creatures.


    Though he didn''t want to admit it, this was somewhat good news. The fact that they had imprisoned him and not killed him indicated that they could be reasoned with.


    Having come to this realization, Charles stood up and called out to the empty room, ¡°Is anyone there? What do you want? Where are my crew members?¡±


    However, the only sound in the room was his own breathing; no one responded.


    He approached the iron door and peered through the bars, trying to glimpse outside. He noticed that directly opposite him seemed to be another cell.


    Just as he was about to ask who was in that cell, a deformed face blocked his view, yellow cross-shaped pupils staring back at him.


    The cramped space between the bars made it difficult for Charles to discern the creature''s exact appearance, but he felt that this one was part of the same group as the monster that had disguised itself as a doctor.


    ¡°Perhaps there¡¯s been a misunderstanding. I mean no harm; I just want to talk,¡± Charles said slowly, trying to explain to those eyes.


    ¡°Clang!¡± A metal plate suddenly obscured his view, and whatever it was had no intention of communicating with him.


    Looking at the not-so-thick iron door before him, Charles raised his prosthetic limb but then lowered it again. If he truly wanted to escape, he could, but in this uncertain situation, acting recklessly would only alert the enemy.


    Charles leaned against the wall and slowly sat down. All he could do now was wait.


    Six hours later, a window at the bottom of the iron door opened, and a half-meter-wide metal disk was pushed in, containing a pile of bloody, indistinguishable matter.


    Charles was confused about whether this was meant to be food or something else, but looking at the appearance of the substance, he preferred to starve rather than eat it.


    An hour later, another metal plate was sent in, this time containing a dead fish. Judging by the brightness of its eyes, the fish had only recently died.This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    Charles concluded that the monsters had noticed he hadn¡¯t eaten the previous offering and had switched to a different type of food.


    From this detail, he gathered more information: since they were aware that he hadn¡¯t eaten, there must be surveillance in the cell.


    Faced with the dead fish, Charles remained still, and soon another dish was brought in.


    However, this time, when Charles saw what was on the plate, his heart sank. It contained half a human face attached to a lung connected by a trachea.


    He rushed over and picked up the face; he recognized it¡ªit was the assistant of Chef Frey, one of his crew members.


    Charles¡¯s anger burned within him. Not only had they killed his crew member, but they were also sending the remains to him as food!


    He couldn''t help but want to rush out and kill all the deformed monsters waiting outside the door.


    But he knew he couldn¡¯t do that; such an action would be a foolish suicide. He had to learn to endure. Only by surviving could he find a chance to rescue the others and escape this hellish place.


    Grinding his teeth, Charles picked up the dead fish beside him and bit into it fiercely, his gaze filled with hatred as he stared at the door.


    Once he finished eating the fish, no other strange offerings were sent in.


    Soon, a hand resembling that of a mummified corpse came to collect the plates. While they were busy taking the dishes away, Charles attempted to communicate with the creatures outside, but it was futile; they still showed no willingness to converse.


    The first day of imprisonment passed like this. Throughout the day, Charles noted other details. His keen hearing allowed him to easily distinguish the shifts of the monsters outside; they changed every half day.


    This indicated that the monsters were highly social creatures. However, this was not good news; if these creatures were communal, who knew how many more were outside his cell? Escaping from this place would be nearly impossible.


    Yet, no matter how difficult it was, Charles did not give up on the idea of escape.


    On the second day, hearing footsteps quickly fade away, he picked up a fishbone that he had prepared earlier and flicked it towards the opposite cell.


    ¡°Hey, I¡¯m Charles! Respond quickly if you can hear me. Who¡¯s in there?¡±


    Soon, there was a reaction from the other cell. A translucent tentacle, filled with green slime and resembling a jellyfish, extended towards Charles, crossing a wide gap to reach his cell.


    Charles hesitated for a moment before placing his prosthetic limb on the tentacle.


    However, at the moment of contact, the tentacle split in two, transforming into a large, transparent mouth filled with sharp teeth, biting down on Charles¡¯s prosthetic and pulling forcefully.


    The strength of the tentacle was immense, almost equivalent to that of several adult men, pulling Charles¡¯s entire body against the door.


    The chains of his prosthetic activated instantly, slicing through the translucent tentacle. A beastly roar echoed from the opposite cell as the severed tentacle desperately retreated.


    Charles looked at the writhing tentacle in his hand, deep in thought. This place didn¡¯t just imprison them.


    Before long, the watchful deformed monsters returned, and Charles dared not act recklessly; he had to wait for the right moment.


    On the third day, the iron door opened, and this time, instead of food, several deformed monsters entered. Charles could clearly sense that they were of the same kind as those who had previously imprisoned him.


    Having not looked closely before, Charles finally got a good look at the appearance of the creatures holding him captive.


    Their fish-like eyes had yellow cross-shaped pupils, and their melted faces were adorned with long, soft lips measuring at least twenty centimeters. Their bodies were a grotesque mix of flesh and blood, as if they had forcibly peeled off their own skin and were trying to put it back on.


    Despite their terrifying appearance, each was draped in a filthy leather robe.


    ¡°Who are you? What do you want?¡± Charles asked cautiously.


    The monsters before him began to shake their long lips rapidly, producing a noise reminiscent of a radio tuning in and out. They seemed to be trying to communicate with Charles, but unfortunately, the language barrier was too great.

 **Chapter 98: Mihe**

    ¡°How many times do I have to say it? I can¡¯t understand what you¡¯re saying!¡± Charles repeated to the humanoid monster in front of him.


    In response to Charles''s subtly angry words, the three-headed creature remained indifferent, seemingly unable to comprehend his speech.


    ¡°Damn! Why are we wasting time talking to these dumb beasts? Let¡¯s just charge out!¡± Richard was restless, eager to take action.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be impulsive!¡± Charles forcefully restrained his chainsaw prosthetic, realizing it was clearly not the right time to act.


    ¡°What do you mean don¡¯t be impulsive? Do these things look like they can communicate? If it weren¡¯t for the drugs they gave us, we wouldn¡¯t have been caught like this!¡±


    ¡°They managed to capture us despite our crew¡¯s interference. Their strength should not be underestimated; acting rashly will only endanger everyone.¡±


    As Charles and Richard argued internally, the monsters retreated, closing the heavy metal door behind them.


    ¡°See? It¡¯s all your fault! We had a great chance to escape, and now it¡¯s gone!¡± Richard continued to complain in Charles''s mind.


    ¡°Shut up! It¡¯s my turn now!¡± Charles snapped back, finally silencing the internal chatter.


    He sighed and crouched down, wishing to escape, but without any information, a reckless move would yield nothing good.


    There was only one chance; if he failed, death would be the only outcome. He couldn¡¯t afford to die here.


    He thought the day would pass quickly, but half an hour later, the iron door suddenly opened again.


    A creature was brought in this time, similar to the previous ones, but it wasn¡¯t wearing the bloody flesh robe.


    Charles stood up, staring at it, confused as to why they would send one of their kind in at this moment.


    Quickly, the creature displayed an unexpected expression; despite its distorted features, Charles could clearly sense its fear.


    ¡°Is it afraid of me?¡± Charles wondered, puzzled.


    ¡°Hey, who are you?¡± Upon hearing Charles''s inquiry, the humanoid monster jumped in fright, frantically pounding on the iron door, showing no intention of communicating.


    It emitted a series of urgent, short sounds, seemingly trying to talk to its companions outside.


    Seeing that this creature bore no hostility towards him, Charles approached cautiously.


    However, just as he got halfway, the creature let out a wail and collapsed to the ground.Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Charles couldn¡¯t understand: who was imprisoning whom?


    ¡°Maybe they¡¯re not all on the same side as the ones outside,¡± Richard interjected.


    Charles didn¡¯t dismiss this possibility. After a moment of thought, he pointed to his chest and slowly said, ¡°Charles.¡±


    He was trying to communicate; regardless of the species, the enemy of my enemy is my friend. Maybe he could find a breakthrough through this creature.


    ¡°Charles. Charles.¡±


    His repeated attempts finally elicited a reaction. The creature warily regarded the human for a few seconds, then tapped its bloodied chest with its twisted, emaciated limb.


    ¡°%*££&#¡­¡­¡± A series of rapid, difficult-to-replicate sounds emerged from its long lips.


    ¡°Mihe¡­ Losge¡­ Klei?¡± Charles struggled to mimic the creature''s pronunciation, but his attempt sounded far from the original.


    ¡°Buddy, let me handle this communication,¡± Richard asserted, taking control of the body.


    He leaned in closer, squatting down with a smile at the trembling humanoid monster. ¡°Friend~ Can I call you Mihe? You, Mi-He~¡±


    ¡°%*¡± Mihe pressed its limb against its own chest.


    ¡°Hey! Yes, smart move! So you¡¯re Mihe! Do you know what those things outside are? Outside~¡±


    As Richard pointed toward the door, Mihe emitted the same rapid sounds again. ¡°%*££&#.¡±


    ¡°No way, dude, your name is Mihe, and they¡¯re also called Mihe? Your parents must have made naming you super easy. By the way, do you even have parents?¡±


    ¡°Enough! Let me take over,¡± Charles reclaimed his voice, starting to probe again. But no matter what he asked, the creature only responded with that same rapid, incomprehensible phrase.


    Charles suddenly felt that what the creature had just said might not even be its name.


    ¡°Dude, I feel like this guy is a bit slow. Could it be that he¡¯s the dimwit of their species?¡±


    ¡°This is too inefficient for communication,¡± Charles said, quickly drawing on the ground with his prosthetic.


    His drawing skills came into play, and soon several simple images appeared on the ground.


    First, he quickly sketched a stick figure of himself and Mihe, then enclosed them in a square to represent their current confinement.


    Next, he pointed to the area where the crew members were, inquiring about their situation.


    ¡°%*££&#¡­¡­¡± Mihe repeated its usual phrase, then used its emaciated limb to draw a square around each crew member.


    ¡°Our crew isn¡¯t dead; they¡¯ve also been captured.¡± Charles felt a weight lift from his heart.


    Just as he was about to ask for more details, a long, deep red needle suddenly shot through the iron bars, piercing Mihe.


    Mihe¡¯s long lips trembled rapidly, its cross-shaped pupils turned bright red, and with a crack of bones, its body began to swell.


    Frowning, Charles stepped back, sensing that the needle wasn¡¯t right.


    ¡°%*££&#£¡£¡¡± The previously timid Mihe lunged at Charles, roaring.


    ¡°Thud!¡± Charles kicked it away, but it seemed impervious to pain, rising again to pounce.


    Dodging Mihe''s attack, Charles noticed eyes peering through the bars of the iron door.


    ¡°Are they treating us like circus monkeys?¡± A surge of anger rose within him.


    At that moment, Mihe charged again, and seeing its completely irrational state, Charles decided not to hold back.


    ¡°Whoosh!¡± The hook of his prosthetic spear pierced Mihe¡¯s head, and with a swift pull, they were drawn close together.


    ¡°Buzzing~¡± The chainsaw roared to life, blood and flesh splattering across the room as Mihe¡¯s head was cleaved in two, its body collapsing lifelessly.


    Covered in blood, Charles coldly stared at the eyes outside the door.


    The owner of those eyes showed no emotional response to the killing of its kind, pulling out a notebook as if to record something.


    Once it finished writing, it slammed shut a metal plate, blocking their view.


    ¡°Well, it seems the creatures outside aren¡¯t too keen on interacting with us. By the way, let¡¯s just call all these monsters Mihe from now on. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°What do you think those guys were just doing?¡±


    ¡°What were they doing? Sending someone to kill us, what else could it be?¡±


    ¡°No, they had plenty of time to kill us while we were unconscious.¡±


    ¡°Then what do you think they were doing?¡±


    ¡°They were conducting experiments.¡±

 **Chapter 99: Relics**

    ¡°Experiments? What kind of experiments?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not sure, but their earlier actions were clearly documenting the killing of Mihe. Whatever experiments they¡¯re conducting, we¡¯re now their test subjects.¡±


    At this point, the image of the chef with half a face flashed in Charles''s mind. Had that guy died because he didn¡¯t pass the experiment?


    ¡°Do you think¡­ these creatures are transformed Foundation personnel?¡±


    Richard¡¯s suggestion sparked a realization in Charles. Memories of the SCP-096 experiment records surfaced in his mind. The Foundation had made a test subject interact with SCP-096 and observed the changes.


    If he layered that scenario onto their current situation, the recently deceased Mihe was the test subject, while they were playing the role of SCP-096. Everything suddenly connected.


    Why send their kind in? Why were other monsters locked away? This also explained why they hadn¡¯t killed Charles and Richard yet.


    ¡°Damn! Are these idiots outside treating us like relics? Are they out of their minds? Can¡¯t they see I¡¯m a living person? What kind of experiment is this?¡± Richard raged.


    ¡°Stop shouting! Do you think they can understand? Whatever they¡¯ve been through, they¡¯re no longer human.¡±


    ¡°So what do we do next?¡±


    ¡°Wait. Since they see us as relics, they won¡¯t conduct the next experiment for a while. We can gather more information from the next test subject.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s too slow! I have another plan. Want to hear it?¡±


    ¡°I know what you¡¯re thinking! Just stay put and don¡¯t move!¡±


    ¡°Fine, fine, I¡¯ll listen to you. This is so boring.¡± Richard¡¯s complaining faded from Charles¡¯s mind.


    The second day of captivity passed quickly. Charles planned to continue probing on the third day, but something disrupted his plans.


    In a daze, Charles was jolted awake. He realized his body was moving; he was sprinting down a narrow corridor. He had escaped!


    ¡°Richard! What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! What else? Of course, I¡¯m running away! Are you planning to retire here? Buddy, hesitation leads to defeat!¡±


    ¡°What intel do we have? Why are you running? Do you even know where this is?¡± Charles¡¯s voice was laced with suppressed fury.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but since we know those things are transformed humans, what¡¯s there to fear? I took care of the ones blocking the door; they were weak.¡± This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Charles felt a wave of frustration. He hadn¡¯t expected Richard to act while he was asleep.


    But in this situation, he didn¡¯t want to argue. Since action had been taken, they had to see it through.


    ¡°What about the crew? Did you check those cells?¡±


    ¡°Do I need to tell you? Of course, I checked! They were all a bunch of random things. They¡¯re probably locked up elsewhere. Let¡¯s get out first, then we¡¯ll figure out how to rescue them.¡±


    Charles sighed, focusing his mind as he quickly scanned his surroundings.


    This was a corridor with various doors neatly lined up. His peripheral vision caught sight of computers and fax machines.


    Seeing those modern devices gave Charles a strange premonition.


    ¡°Woo~ Woo~ Woo~¡± Suddenly, an alarm blared from somewhere, and red lights began to flash overhead.


    Charles gritted his teeth and quickened his pace; the Mihe had noticed their escape.


    ¡°Look! There¡¯s a map here!¡± Richard pulled down a map from the wall.


    That familiar texture and layout of various facilities made Charles¡¯s fingers trace the text on the map: ¡°Second Laboratory.¡±


    His earlier premonition was correct. If those creatures were Foundation personnel, then the place they were held must be within the laboratory.


    But there was no time to think about that now. After quickly confirming the location of the exit, Charles tossed the map aside and ran.


    The second laboratory was vast, with layers of corridors and passageways. Thankfully, Charles¡¯s enhanced body allowed for impressive speed.


    After swiftly dealing with any Mihe they encountered, they soon approached the exit.


    However, luck seemed to have abandoned Charles. Just as they were about to escape, dozens of Mihe charged in from the exit, armed with various firearms and melee weapons, their yellow cross-shaped pupils glaring at Charles.


    In this situation, there was no need for words. Charles gritted his teeth, his bare feet pushing off the ground as he charged at the Mihe.


    Gunfire erupted instantly. Charles dodged a bullet with a quick sidestep and raised his prosthetic arm at the foremost Mihe.


    ¡°Clang, clang, clang!¡± The sound of chains whirring echoed as the grappling hook shot out, piercing its chest. The injured Mihe let out a bone-chilling scream.


    With a powerful tug, the chain retracted, and their bodies collided.


    Using the dead Mihe as a shield, Charles advanced toward the enemies.


    As he roared, he hurled the corpse away and swung his chainsaw down onto the next creature.


    The other Mihe attempted to attack with firearms, but in this close-quarters environment, Charles¡¯s agility was maximized.


    Whenever a gun was aimed at him, he swiftly dodged to the side, making them hesitant to fire.


    And when they switched to melee weapons, Charles welcomed it; he had never feared anyone in close combat with his enhanced body.


    He weaved through the Mihe like an eel, and they couldn¡¯t handle him at all.


    Richard was right; these creatures didn¡¯t possess exceptional physical capabilities. Even in their monstrous forms, their strength was comparable to that of an adult human.


    In no time, the Mihe began to fall, while Charles remained unharmed.


    Charles thought these monsters would be quickly defeated, but suddenly, a Mihe in a black robe emerged from the crowd, holding a miniature hourglass in its shriveled hand.


    As it flipped the hourglass, sand began to flow downward, and Charles instantly felt his body slow down.


    ¡°That¡¯s a relic! These Mihe are using relics too!¡±


    ¡°Bang!¡± A gunshot rang out from the left, and blood spattered from Charles¡¯s left thigh; he had been hit.


    Charles quickly rolled on the ground, and when he stood up, he was already holding a revolver.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!!¡± Charles rapidly fired at the black-robed Mihe, but it seemed to be more agile than the ordinary Mihe, dodging his shots.


    Fortunately, he had achieved his goal; his sluggish body began to return to normal.

 **Chapter 100: 134**

    Taking advantage of the moment, Charles charged at the black Mihe, determined to prevent it from using the relic again.


    ¡°@&££@£¡£¡¡± The black Mihe shouted something quickly, and its companions rushed to block Charles, trying to create distance between them.


    Seeing the black Mihe in the back raise the hourglass again, Charles gritted his teeth, stomped hard on the monster in front of him, and propelled himself into the air.


    His vision cleared, and he spotted the distant black Mihe, but at the same time, he felt exposed to gunfire.


    Dozens of gun barrels were raised, and if they fired, Charles would be turned into a sieve in an instant.


    In that critical moment, a grappling hook shot out from Charles''s prosthetic limb, piercing the distant black Mihe''s palm. The hourglass fell to the ground, clattering.


    With a sharp tug, Charles was pulled toward the black Mihe in mid-air, gunfire ringing out as bullets hit the ceiling behind him.


    With a swift motion, Charles swung his chainsaw down, severing the black Mihe¡¯s neck.


    Amidst the rain of blood, Charles slowly turned to face the stunned Mihe around him.


    These monsters, staring at the human before them, showed signs of fear in their cross-shaped pupils.


    ¡°Buzz~!¡± The chainsaw roared back to life as Charles lunged at them like a fierce tiger.


    There was no need to elaborate; without using relics, the remaining Mihe fell before Charles like chickens before a hawk.


    Ten minutes later, drenched in blood, Charles panted heavily, surrounded by the corpses of Mihe.


    He glanced at the gunshot wound on his leg, gritted his teeth, and dug his fingers into the wound to pull out the bullet.


    ¡°Wait, this thing might still be useful.¡± Richard, controlling his body, picked up the fallen hourglass from the pool of blood.


    Charles stepped forward, leaving bloody footprints as he approached the exit¡ªa staircase leading up, indicating that the second laboratory was underground.


    Outside, it seemed bright, with faint sounds reminiscent of a bustling square on a summer evening at seven.


    As they slowly emerged, despair washed over their faces at the sight before them.


    Richard, exasperated, raised the hourglass and threw it to the ground. ¡°Damn! So many of them! If you had told us there were this many, we would have just stayed in the cell!¡±


    Before them lay a square nearly the size of four football fields, filled with almost ten thousand Mihe engaged in various human activities, while hundreds of black Mihe stood guard around them, each wielding relics of varying sizes. This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    At that moment, all the creatures in the square turned their attention toward Charles and Richard, their emotionless gazes creating an overwhelming pressure that left Charles breathless.


    Richard forced a smile. ¡°Buddy, do you think if we go back now and lock the door from the inside, they¡¯d let us off?¡±


    ¡°What good is that now? This is all your fault!¡±


    ¡°Hey, I know I messed up! If we survive this, I¡¯ll definitely listen to you next time.¡±


    Charles suppressed his anger and looked into the distance, where the city they had come from lay. Hope was slim, but if they could reach the city, there might be a chance to escape the creatures¡¯ pursuit.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go for it!¡± Ignoring the Mihe¡¯s stares, Charles dragged his injured leg and sprinted toward the city.


    In the next moment, the Mihe in the square sprang into action, chaos erupting as they scattered.


    Charles was momentarily stunned, then filled with elation as he ran toward the city, but just as one of the black Mihe raised its relic, his body stiffened, as if turned to stone, collapsing to the ground.


    He watched helplessly as the black Mihe closed in, a bloody mass being shoved into his mouth.


    In a daze, he lost consciousness again.


    When Charles woke up, the overhead lights were blinding, causing him to squint instinctively.


    As he adjusted to the brightness, he realized he was trapped in a spacious white room. This time, his ¡°treatment¡± was much harsher; he was bound to a steel frame, with shackles on all four limbs and chains wrapped tightly around his body.


    In front of him was a massive glass wall, behind which several Mihe stood, operating electronic devices that seemed to be monitoring Charles.


    Richard let out a sigh of relief. ¡°Well, at least we made it out alive.¡±


    Charles¡¯s eyes flashed with anger; his other persona had been too reckless, but he didn¡¯t want to argue at this moment.


    Just then, a door opened, and a robed Mihe walked in, holding a spiked whip in one hand and a bucket filled with black water in the other.


    The whip was first soaked in the bucket, then swiftly swung at Charles.


    ¡°Crack!¡± The whip struck Charles¡¯s body, and the searing pain made him grunt in agony.


    After more than ten lashes that left him bloodied, the Mihe left the room.


    Charles thought the punishment was over, but the pain was just beginning. As time passed, it felt like countless ants were crawling over his wounds, gnawing at his flesh.


    The pain made his muscles tremble, and even his strong will faltered as he let out cries of anguish.


    The room echoed with his screams, interspersed with Richard¡¯s curses.


    This torturous agony receded after two hours, leaving Charles gasping and trembling.


    ¡°Clang!¡± The iron door opened again, and another Mihe entered, this time without any instruments of torture, but carrying a bowl of mushrooms, which it placed in front of Charles before stepping back.


    Charles could understand punishment, but what was the meaning of placing a bowl of mushrooms here?


    Time ticked by, and Charles endured the pain while reflecting on the information he had gathered. Despite the overwhelming number of Mihe, he refused to abandon hope for escape.


    Two hours later, two Mihe entered¡ªone clad in a white robe and the other holding a notebook.


    ¡°£¦*@¡ê¡­¡­¡± A rapid series of garbled sounds emerged from the lips of the white-robed Mihe.


    ¡°How many times do I have to say it? I don¡¯t understand what you¡¯re saying!¡± Charles weakly protested.


    The white-robed Mihe ignored Charles and continued speaking, while the one behind it quickly took notes.


    Charles glanced over and realized that the writing in the notebook was incomprehensible, resembling the jumbled symbols on goods from the fake cities¡ªjust a series of chaotic black dots.


    As he pondered what the Mihe were doing, a familiar low, rumbling voice echoed in his ear.


    Charles''s face contorted in pain; in this situation, he could do nothing but bear it.


    But at that moment, he suddenly sensed something unusual¡ªthe murmuring intertwined with the Mihe''s speech, and a familiar low human voice emerged in his ear. He suddenly understood what they were saying.


    ¡°134, I hope you will refrain from any more reckless escapes. We have found your previous records; you are the planner behind the 517 uprising. If you continue like this, we will take extreme measures.¡±

 **Chapter 101: Imitation**

    As Charles listened to the Mihe''s words, a whirlwind of thoughts raced through his mind. How could he suddenly understand their speech? What was the connection between the murmurs in his ears and their conversation? And what did "134" mean in his mouth?


    Richard, ever the impulsive one, didn¡¯t ponder these questions long. He quickly interjected, ¡°Wait, I don¡¯t mean to resist. The misunderstanding earlier was just due to the communication barrier. And what do you mean by ¡®uprising¡¯? We¡¯ve never met before!¡±


    Richard thought he had finally found a way to communicate with these creatures, but the white-robed Mihe remained indifferent, continuing to speak as if to itself.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to pretend to be a pitiful little girl. Your disguise is completely ineffective. Do you know how many people died because of the project uprising you caused? It was because of you that the third laboratory went completely out of control and had to be abandoned.¡±


    ¡°Dude, what is this guy talking about? We¡¯re not crying! What pitiful little girl? We¡¯re huge down here; can¡¯t he see?¡±


    ¡°Shh, quiet. He doesn¡¯t seem to be communicating with us; it sounds like he¡¯s stating something.¡± Charles sensed something was off from the Mihe''s words.


    ¡°134, your singing has a catalytic effect on flora and fauna and is very useful for genetic modification.¡±


    ¡°If you agree to assist us, not only will you avoid the pain you just experienced, but the Foundation will provide you with everything you need, including the opportunity to see your parents again, along with plenty of toys and sweets.¡±


    ¡°Rest assured, my authority within the Foundation is D3. As long as you cooperate with us, I can make good on my promises. There are many projects in collaboration with the Foundation; you¡¯re not the first. Think it over; I¡¯ll come back in a while.¡±


    With that, the white-robed Mihe slowly turned and left, leaving the stunned humans behind.


    ¡°Dude, I feel like this ¡®134¡¯ sounds familiar. A little girl who can sing and has a catalytic effect on plants? Isn¡¯t that the scheming little girl from Sodom? So all along, she was a relic of the Foundation! How old is she now?¡±


    ¡°No, wait. This isn¡¯t the time to think about that. The reactions of these Mihe are off.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s off? Isn¡¯t this what we suspected? You said they were transformed Foundation members, and now they¡¯re just doing the Foundation''s work.¡±


    ¡°No, we guessed wrong.¡±Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    Charles furrowed his brow, looking at the Mihe behind the glass. They operated the machinery with practiced ease, and his frown deepened.


    ¡°Look at that guy on the left. He seems to be operating something, but his actions are repetitive.¡±


    Richard focused his gaze, quickly realizing something was amiss. ¡°Hey! You¡¯re right! Those things aren¡¯t even connected to any wires!¡±


    Recalling the various false items in the fake city and the Mihe that had fled in chaos earlier, a lightbulb went off in Charles''s mind. He understood what kind of existence would need a fake city.


    ¡°They¡¯re not Foundation employees that have been altered; they¡¯re simply imitating! Imitating tools, imitating houses, even imitating behaviors!¡±


    ¡°That means¡­¡±


    ¡°That means everything we thought was wrong! They weren¡¯t trying to communicate with us! They weren¡¯t experimenting on us; they were merely mimicking the conversations between Foundation members and relics from the previous era. To them, we¡¯re just props for their little game of house!¡±


    The realization sent chills down Charles''s spine. Thousands of monsters diligently mimicking humans from centuries ago in a fake city¡ªwhy were they doing this? Were these creatures merely the playthings of some god?


    Just as Charles''s thoughts spiraled into chaos, the white-robed Mihe returned.


    ¡°134, your resistance is quite disappointing. I had no intention of letting the bugs from 704 gnaw at your flesh, but since you continue to refuse, I regret to inform you that it must happen.¡±


    The white-robed Mihe turned to the recording Mihe and commanded, ¡°Take him to Experiment Site 42 for the interactive execution experiment between 134 and 704.¡±


    Two black-robed Mihe entered, dragging Charles off the frame and toward the door.


    Overwhelmed by nearly ten black-robed Mihe, Charles was thrown into a room.


    Lying on the ground, he ignored the pain in his body and quickly began to draw with his own blood.


    ¡°What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Stop talking and help me recall the map information. I need to know our current location.¡±


    With the aid of his other persona, a rough map of the second laboratory appeared on the ground. ¡°We¡¯re here; this is where we were previously imprisoned.¡±


    Using the map, Charles quickly confirmed his current position.


    ¡°The exit leads to their square, where there are many Mihe, regardless of what they¡¯re doing. To escape, we must find another way out.¡±


    As Charles pondered his escape route, another door in the room swung open, revealing a shadowy figure.


    It was a bald man with a white triangle on his forehead¡ªone of the Kede.


    Recalling previous information, Charles knew this one was likely impersonating the relic numbered 704.


    The bald man¡¯s face lit up with surprise upon seeing Charles. He rushed over. ¡°Captain Charles, what are you doing here?¡±


    In the next moment, his expression shifted from joy to concern. ¡°Have you been captured too?¡±


    Seeing the bald man¡¯s expression, a glimmer of joy crossed Charles¡¯s face. It seemed the previous expedition crew hadn¡¯t all perished, adding another potential ally to his escape plan.


    ¡°How many of your crew are left?¡± Charles quickly inquired.


    ¡°Not many. The others have already been taken away. They torture my crew with boiling water and fire; now only three of us remain.¡±


    Suddenly, the bald man seemed to remember something, clutching his throat and retching repeatedly.


    Charles quickly supported him. ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Are you okay?¡±


    The bald man continued to retch until he finally expelled a piece of flesh with several holes in it.


    With a serious expression, he pointed at the holes. ¡°Captain Charles, you must take this to the Holy Person. We found the map! Look, here¡¯s the Supply Island, and here is the location of the Land of Light!!¡±

 **Chapter 102: The Sea Chart**

    ¡°Captain Charles, you must take this to the Holy Person. We found the map! Look, here¡¯s the Supply Island, and here is the location of the Land of Light!!¡±


    Hearing this, Charles felt his breath catch in his throat. He quickly snatched the piece of flesh from the bald man, excitement flooding over him as he examined it closely.


    Upon careful inspection, he could see that the holes on the flesh indicated the locations of the islands. This was a sea chart even more detailed than the one marked "King." He noticed that two of the holes had been deliberately enlarged.


    The bald man pointed at those two holes with urgency. ¡°You see, the farthest one is the location of the Land of Light, and the closer one is the Supply Point. If we fill up supplies here, we can sail directly to the realm of the Light God!¡±


    Charles swallowed hard, his fingers trembling as they traced the circular holes on the flesh. ¡°Are¡­ are you sure?¡±


    The bald man nodded vigorously. ¡°We can¡¯t understand the monsters¡¯ writing, but the sea chart is clear. The island around it is obviously marked brighter, and there are many annotations nearby. This is definitely the entrance to the Land of Light.¡±


    Charles¡¯s mind raced. ¡°This place is the Foundation''s second laboratory. The real sea chart must have vanished into history long ago. The chart they found must have been copied by the Mihe. This map is highly reliable.¡±


    His heart raced with newfound hope. They had found their target.


    Suddenly, a loud bang echoed as someone knocked on the iron door, reminding both men that they were still prisoners.


    Outside, the Mihe were making a ruckus, but this time, the whispers in Charles''s ears had vanished; he couldn¡¯t discern what they were saying.


    Turning his gaze from the iron door back to the bald man, he asked, ¡°What¡¯s your name?¡±


    ¡°Salin. My name is Salin.¡±


    ¡°Salin, is the scale of this sea chart accurate?¡± Charles asked, knowing that even a slight error in such a chart could lead to disastrous consequences.


    ¡°Captain Charles, don¡¯t worry. Anyone who can explore on a ship in the Light God¡¯s faith has learned some cartography skills at the Navigation Academy. Look, we¡¯ve marked the scale on the edges here; the ratio is definitely correct.¡±


    Hearing the increasingly frantic noises from outside, Charles activated the harpoon from his prosthetic limb and handed it to Salin. He then exposed his uninjured back. ¡°Quickly, carve this map onto my back! Hurry!!¡±


    Without hesitation, Salin raised his elbow as a ruler and swiftly began carving with the sharp tip of the harpoon.The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    Charles felt a sharp pain in his back, but this pain brought him joy; it was the marker of his path home.


    The banging on the door grew louder, and the pain in Charles¡¯s back intensified.


    ¡°Don¡¯t rush it; make sure it¡¯s accurate. They won¡¯t get in that fast,¡± he urged.


    ¡°Got it! I know.¡± Sweat dripped down their faces, but they had no time to worry about it.


    ¡°How did you find this sea chart?¡± Charles asked, trying to distract himself from the pain.


    ¡°My crew and I attempted to escape from prison. Although we were recaptured, the bosun found this sea chart in a room filled with books. We each copied the chart, and it didn¡¯t matter if the others died; as long as one person could escape, our mission would be a success.¡±


    Charles was taken aback by Salin¡¯s resolute words. Indeed, these fearless cultists spoke of life and death so lightly.


    ¡°Escape? How did you manage that?¡±


    ¡°There were various sea creatures imprisoned with us. We released them to create chaos and try to escape, but there were too many humanoid monsters on this island. Our plan failed.¡±


    ¡°Dude, that¡¯s a great idea! Why didn¡¯t I think of that when I was escaping? If we had released those creatures, the entire laboratory would have been in chaos.¡± Richard¡¯s voice echoed in Charles¡¯s mind.


    Beads of sweat dripped from Charles¡¯s brow as he nodded. The Mihe were numerous; this was indeed a viable plan.


    Suddenly, the iron door burst open, and the white-robed Mihe stormed in with a group of black-robed Mihe.


    ¡°%@££*!!¡± The white-robed Mihe sounded agitated.


    ¡°They¡¯re in! How long until you¡¯re done?¡± Charles asked anxiously, frozen in place.


    ¡°Almost there, almost!¡± The pain in Charles¡¯s back intensified.


    After the white-robed Mihe spoke, he raised a withered finger, signaling one of the black-robed Mihe to approach Charles, seemingly to pull them apart.


    ¡°Puff!¡± A semi-transparent, clay-like substance leaped out from behind, enveloping one of the black Mihe.


    Charles recognized this substance; Sonny had used it before. It seemed to be a tool used by the followers of the Light God for combat.


    ¡°@&@**!¡± The white Mihe shouted in frustration.


    A large group of black Mihe charged in from outside, wielding various strange artifacts. The clay-like substance quickly morphed back into a puddle on the ground.


    As they approached Charles with menacing intent, he let out a sigh of relief; the pain in his back had ceased. The sea chart was now etched onto his skin.


    ¡°Captain Charles, may the Light God bless you!¡± Salin said, and then he picked up the piece of flesh from the ground and swallowed it with determination.


    ¡°If you manage to get out alive, come to my ship; I need crew members.¡± Charles smiled as he patted Salin on the shoulder.


    For the first time, Charles had a new perspective on the followers of the Light God. Though their faith was fanatical and crazy, some among them were genuinely good people.


    Just as Salin nodded with a smile, the black Mihe surrounded Charles, dragging him toward the door.


    ¡°Rip!¡± The sound of flesh tearing and bones cracking echoed behind Charles.


    His pupils dilated as he quickly turned around, only to see Salin¡¯s lower half left on the ground while the upper half of his body flew through the air, his eyes filled with disbelief.


    ¡°Thud!¡± Salin¡¯s bloodied upper body landed on the ground like a broken sack. A piece of the sea chart remained unconsumed in his mouth, and his eyes fixed on Charles.


    There seemed to be a lingering sentiment in his gaze, but as his pupils widened slowly, that sentiment faded away.


    The one who killed Salin was the white-robed Mihe, wielding a sharp-toothed artifact. With a forceful swing, Salin¡¯s body was further torn apart.


    ¡°@££*£££¦!!¡± The white-robed Mihe stood beside the bloody remains, shouting in frustration, kicking the corpse vigorously.


    If this connected with the previous information, then in the last era, the relic known as 704 had similarly not harmed 134.

 **Chapter 103: Suffering**

    In the bright corridor, the black Mihe pressed Charles forward, the captain of the Unicorn showing a calm expression tinged with sadness. He never expected that they would so ruthlessly kill Salin. What saddened him wasn¡¯t Salin¡¯s death, but rather the Mihe¡¯s utter disregard for their lives.


    In a place like this, survival depended entirely on the outcome of the roles they played in the last era.


    ¡°Phew~ Luckily, we got the script for 134. If we had gotten 704, we¡¯d be the ones getting dismembered,¡± Richard¡¯s voice echoed in Charles¡¯s mind, relief evident in his tone.


    Charles smirked coldly. ¡°You think that¡¯s a good thing?¡±


    ¡°What good could it be? We have to find a way out of here! If this continues, we¡¯ll be dead for sure!¡±


    Charles glanced at the two black Mihe holding him. He could take them out, but that would only attract more trouble. He needed to find another way to escape.


    ¡°Focus on remembering our location. I¡¯ll determine where we are on the map and see if I can identify all the places where the Foundation holds the test subjects,¡± Charles instructed.


    If Salin could escape using this method, so could he. Unlike Salin, he had experience from visiting the third laboratory and now possessed the map of the second laboratory. This was his chance.


    ¡°Got it, you do your thing.¡±


    One, two, three. Based on his memory of the map, Charles slowly confirmed the locations of the imprisoned subjects in his mind.


    He wanted to continue marking them, but reality didn¡¯t give him the time. With a clang, his limbs were locked back onto the rack, cold iron chains wrapping around him once more.


    Watching the Mihe behind the glass, Charles sighed. Although he had a preliminary plan, he had no way to implement it now.


    At least for the short term, his life was not in immediate danger. Since the real 134 was in Sodom, and she had survived from the last era to now, the Foundation must not have killed her.


    A white-robed Mihe, stained with blood, entered the empty room and began rambling beside Charles.


    Without needing to guess, Charles knew these were threats directed at 134. He coldly observed the silent drama unfolding from the last era.


    ¡°@*%&!!¡± It seemed 134 said something that angered him, and the white-robed Mihe¡¯s tone suddenly became agitated as he spoke to his subordinate.


    Then, a Mihe wielding a whip charged toward Charles once more. Understanding what awaited him, Charles gritted his teeth and took a deep breath.Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    ¡°Crack!!¡± The whip, soaked in black liquid, struck Charles¡¯s partially healed wounds, and crimson blood dripped anew.


    After dozens of lashes, Charles¡¯s body was a bloody mess, barely recognizable as human. The ensuing pain made him involuntarily groan.


    The pain intensified, but after the first round, the second was slightly easier to bear.


    However, the white-robed Mihe seemed determined not to let Charles off so easily. Dazed and dizzy, Charles soon saw a black Mihe approaching with a giant worm, as thick as a forearm, covered in black fur.


    The worm was placed on Charles¡¯s body, and as it began to crawl slowly, its fur fell onto his wounds. The moment the fur touched the blood, it seemed to come alive, writhing and trembling as it burrowed into the flesh.


    Charles felt what should have been excruciating pain morph into an unbearable itch. It started as a slight tingling but quickly escalated into an all-consuming itch that drove him to madness.


    ¡°Ahhhh!!¡± Veins bulged on Charles¡¯s face as he struggled desperately, trying to scratch at his body, but the chains held him fast. The itch was more unbearable than the pain, a sensation worse than death itself.


    At that moment, the surrounding Mihe suddenly staggered, clutching their ears as they collapsed to the ground.


    Suddenly, the white-robed Mihe shoved a ball into Charles¡¯s mouth. As his screams turned into muffled sounds, they all froze in place.


    They showed no fear of Charles¡¯s cries; they were merely mimicking the effects of 134¡¯s song, all of them trapped in the last era.


    This maddening torment continued for two hours, leaving Charles¡¯s mind and body in a state of utter devastation. His limbs were worn raw from struggling, exposing white bone.


    Even after such torture, the Mihe showed no signs of letting up. A capsule was shoved into Charles¡¯s mouth, and his grotesque wounds began to heal rapidly.


    ¡°Crack!¡± A new lash mark appeared on Charles¡¯s body, and the cycle of torment began anew.


    Charles lost track of time, the pain and itching clouding his mind. The only thought that remained was his unwavering belief: he would not die here; he absolutely had to escape.


    After a day and a night, the white Mihe finally couldn¡¯t take it anymore. With a reluctant wave of his hand, Charles was released. Another capsule was forced into his mouth, and he was dragged away by the black Mihe.


    In a daze, Charles was jolted awake by the sound of slapping.


    ¡°Hey! Are you awake? Stop sleeping and get up; they¡¯re not torturing us anymore!¡± Richard was slapping his own face to stay alert.


    ¡°Where¡­ is this¡­¡± Charles looked around, discovering he was lying on a soft, pink little bed surrounded by various fluffy toys.


    On a small table in front of him lay a brand-new little princess dress.


    ¡°It seems they realized that beating 134 was useless and have started a policy of appeasement.¡±


    Charles touched his body, finding that the wounds had completely vanished. Clearly, the Mihe had healed him with some kind of substance.


    Despite the fact that 134 had once hunted them, for a brief moment, Charles felt a twinge of sympathy for the little girl. If he, as an adult, found it so hard to endure, what about her?


    Quickly gathering his thoughts, Charles sat up. ¡°Do you know where we are now?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve already figured it out. I was awake the whole time they moved us. Look over here.¡±


    Richard yanked the bedspread, revealing a soft blanket that he tore aside, exposing a clear map of the second laboratory drawn underneath.


    ¡°We¡¯re here, not far from where we were previously held. If no one stops us, we can reach it in five minutes at full speed.¡± Richard pointed at a corner of the map.


    Charles scanned the map. He couldn¡¯t wait any longer. Who knew what the white-robed Mihe had prepared to force 134 into submission? This temporary freedom was a rare opportunity.


    ¡°Here, here, and here. According to the map, these points are where the test subjects are held. To escape, we must release them all.¡±

 **Chapter 104: Escape**

    ¡°Are you sure the test subjects can create enough chaos? There must be more Mihe than just those in the square; the entire island is likely their territory,¡± Richard said, concern evident in his voice.


    ¡°Did you see the Mihe in the square? A large portion of them were mimicking civilians, and those didn¡¯t seem to possess any combat capability. If we release all the test subjects, it might just be enough,¡± Charles replied.


    Just then, the sound of a door creaking open made Charles tense up. He quickly retreated and climbed back onto the bed.


    The white-robed Mihe walked in slowly, murmuring something as it did.


    Charles¡¯s expression hardened. He knew this creature was merely mimicking human behavior from the last era, but its actions¡ªkilling Salin and torturing him¡ªmade him wish he could crush it into dust.


    ¡°Let¡¯s find a chance to take this guy out,¡± Richard said through gritted teeth in Charles¡¯s mind.


    ¡°There will be a chance. We need to escape first.¡±


    The white-robed Mihe picked up the pink dress from the table and shook it in front of Charles, making his eye twitch.


    Charles clenched his prosthetic hand tightly, resisting the urge to smash it in the Mihe''s face.


    With a flick, the Mihe produced a small photograph.


    It was a picture of a silver-haired little girl happily lying in her mother¡¯s arms, making a peace sign for the camera.


    As Charles had suspected, 134 was the little girl from Sodom. The girl in the photo bore no trace of her past horrors; her sweet smile was utterly adorable.


    The white-robed Mihe¡¯s tone softened considerably as it placed the photo in Charles¡¯s palm.


    Touching the smooth surface of the photo, Richard whispered, ¡°This looks like a comfort, but it¡¯s actually a threat. It indicates that 134¡¯s parents have been captured by them.¡±


    Charles remained silent, his expression grave as he looked at the white-robed Mihe.


    He had always maintained a neutral stance toward the Foundation, but witnessing the actions of this creature made it hard for him to feel anything but disdain, even knowing they had long since vanished.


    After a moment of persuasion, the white-robed Mihe gently patted Charles¡¯s head with its dry hand before turning and leaving the room.


    Seizing this opportunity, Charles noticed a row of fully armed black Mihe standing outside the door. Clearly, rushing out would be futile; he needed a different plan.Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    As soon as the door clicked shut, Charles sprang to his feet. Regardless of 134¡¯s fate, he had to leave. He scanned the cozy little girl¡¯s bedroom, searching for an exit.


    However, the room had no windows, and apart from the door, there was no other way out.


    ¡°Don¡¯t move too obviously; they must be monitoring us,¡± Richard cautioned.


    Charles picked up a small white comb from the table and threw it at the ceiling, plunging the room into darkness.


    At that moment, he noticed the beautiful crystal chandelier above him. An idea sparked in his mind. He raised his prosthetic arm and activated the harpoon, which easily pierced through the ceiling.


    ¡°There¡¯s a gap above! Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Pushing off the walls, Charles broke through the thin ceiling and climbed up.


    The ceiling was dusty, but he couldn¡¯t afford to care. He crawled forward like a gecko, quickly finding a ventilation duct and crawling inside.


    But before he could get far, an ear-piercing alarm blared, echoing through the duct.


    ¡°Dude, they¡¯ve discovered we¡¯re gone! That room definitely had surveillance!¡± Richard shouted.


    ¡°Stay focused! You report the map location, and I¡¯ll control my movements. We can¡¯t let them catch us again! This is our only chance!¡± Charles urged, scrambling through the ventilation duct.


    With determination, he drew closer to the first holding point.


    Suddenly, the sound of fluttering wings echoed behind him. He turned to see a colorful dragonfly clinging to him, its tail glowing red.


    The flickering red light drew the attention of more of its kind in the distance. Although Charles didn¡¯t know what they were, it was clear they meant trouble.


    ¡°How much longer?¡± Charles yelled.


    ¡°Go straight for 100 meters, and take a left at the first junction! If there¡¯s no junction, make one!¡± Richard directed.


    The strange buzzing of wings grew louder, and as their numbers increased, they began to swarm around Charles, trying to attach their glowing tails to him.


    ¡°Here! It¡¯s just below!¡±


    Hearing Richard''s call, Charles raised his chainsaw prosthetic and struck downward with all his might. The ceiling shattered, and he fell through, landing alongside the swarm of bugs.


    Suspended in mid-air, Charles quickly noticed two black Mihe looking up, preparing to respond.


    ¡°Thud!¡± The harpoon shot out, piercing one black Mihe¡¯s head.


    The chain pulled tight, and Charles plummeted toward the remaining Mihe.


    As the other black Mihe raised its weapon, Charles swung his prosthetic arm down, severing its arm with a swift motion, causing it to drop the weapon with a panicked scream.


    With one swift action, he dispatched the creature and turned his gaze toward the test subjects behind the iron bars.


    Behind the thick bars, a dozen or so humans, shackled and naked, stared wide-eyed at the chaos outside, seemingly in shock at what was happening.


    Among them, Charles spotted his first mate and the cook. Without pausing to speak, he revved the chainsaw, the screech of metal against metal filling the air as sparks flew.


    With a loud clang, the bars were cut through, and the prisoners rushed out.


    ¡°Captain! I knew you¡¯d come to save me!¡± the cook, Frey, exclaimed, joy radiating from his face.


    Seeing their condition, Charles didn¡¯t waste time with words. He charged toward the exit; he needed more help.


    The Mihe seemed unaware that Charles had made it to this area. Compared to where he had been, the security here was noticeably lax.


    Leading the freed prisoners, Charles cleared out any stray Mihe and made his way to the second holding point.


    There, he found his other crew members and two surviving followers of the Light Church.


    However, the numbers were even fewer than before¡ªonly nine people in total. Charles¡¯s expression darkened, but he said nothing as he pushed onward to the next holding point.

 **Chapter 105: The Living Project Containment Point**

    Lily trembled in her glass jar, tears streaming down her face as she pressed her tiny paws against her ears, trying to block out the horrifying screams of her companions.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, it¡¯s my fault; I couldn¡¯t save you¡­ Wuwu¡­¡±


    As the cries of the mice outside suddenly ceased, the lid above Lily¡¯s head was wrenched open.


    ¡°Help!!! Let me go! Help!!!¡± she cried desperately, struggling against the grip of a white-robed Mihe.


    Nearby, her subordinates inside their own transparent jars banged against the walls, but no matter how hard they tried, the sturdy jars remained unyielding.


    Forced into a spread-eagle position on a small platform, Lily watched in horror as a Mihe, wearing a blue mask, approached her with a writhing black leech.


    Her chest heaved rapidly, and tears fell from her eyes. ¡°I¡­ I don¡¯t want to die. I want to go home¡­¡±


    Just as the creature drew closer, the door slammed open with a crash. Charles burst in with a large group of people.


    The harpoon fired instantly, piercing the white-robed Mihe''s head and yanking it to the ground.


    ¡°Lily, are you okay? Are you hurt?¡± Charles asked, carefully lowering his cannon from its stand.


    Lily couldn¡¯t find her voice; she clung to Charles¡¯s finger, sobbing uncontrollably from fear.


    As he comforted her, Charles scanned the room. It looked like a holding area for animals, filled with various mice, lizards, and even bats trapped in glass jars.


    ¡°Release them all,¡± he commanded.


    The crowd began to pound on the glass jars, and one by one, the animals were freed.


    With Lily¡¯s mice joining the ranks, Charles¡¯s group grew significantly, but he knew it wasn¡¯t enough; he needed more allies.


    Just as he was about to move on to the next holding point, Lily sniffled and jumped onto Charles¡¯s shoulder, her voice trembling. ¡°Mr. Charles, everyone¡¯s belongings are in the room next door.¡±


    Charles felt a surge of joy. He kissed the little mouse on the head and hurried toward the room.


    When Charles reappeared in the corridor glowing with red light, everyone had retrieved their gear and clothing. Excitement lit their faces.


    With their weapons back in hand, their strength surged, and the scattered Mihe were no match for them. Charles cleared through the holding points one after another.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    He released monsters directly and handed over confiscated Mihe weapons to the humans, inviting them to join the fight.


    By the time they broke through the last holding point, the spacious corridor had begun to feel crowded.


    Aside from two crew members and a cook from the Unicorn, everyone else was unfamiliar.


    ¡°Captain! Should we charge out now??¡±


    ¡°Sir, you¡¯re the one who rescued us. What¡¯s our next move? We¡¯re all ears.¡±


    ¡°Can we go home soon? My ship sank; how do we get back??¡±


    Each person looked at their savior with excitement, but none understood the immense pressure Charles felt.


    His expression darkened. All the monsters had been released, and every communicable human had joined his ranks.


    Yet, with only around two hundred people, even with the chaos from the released monsters, it was nothing compared to the thousands of Mihe outside.


    ¡°Dude, even if we gather all the Mihe test subjects, we¡¯re still outnumbered. No wonder Salin¡¯s rebellion failed,¡± Charles said, sketching a map of the second laboratory on the ground with his harpoon, his brow furrowed in concentration.


    Suddenly, gunfire erupted from outside; the Mihe had begun to move.


    Charles turned to his first mate. ¡°Bandage, take some people outside to hold them off.¡±


    Bandage nodded silently and stepped out.


    Time ticked by, and as the gunfire intensified, Charles¡¯s gaze swept across a section of the map, and his eyes lit up.


    He pointed to a corner on the eastern side of the map. ¡°Richard, does this area look familiar?¡±


    ¡°Enough with the suspense; just say it already.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t you remember? This is the place in the third laboratory where they kept the living relics. If there¡¯s a place for that in the third lab, there must be one in the second lab too, right? Our allies aren¡¯t just these creatures; the living relics inside are allies too!¡±


    Richard¡¯s voice brimmed with excitement. ¡°If we can release all the monsters in there, the entire second lab is done for!¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s do it!¡± Charles declared, drawing a heavy circle around that area before rising and heading out into the open.


    He swiftly cleared out the Mihe blocking their path, leading everyone toward the living relic containment point.


    The journey was perilous; more and more Mihe swarmed toward them, each one stronger than the last.


    Their various special abilities rendered the group defenseless, and casualties began to appear among them.


    ¡°Thud!¡± Charles, bloodied and battered, drove his black blade into a black Mihe¡¯s neck.


    After a long battle, he felt a wave of exhaustion, but when he spotted the familiar heavy steel door, he knew he had arrived.


    ¡°Captain, I have explosives here!¡± Dipp, wearing a mask, shouted as he rushed forward with the explosives.


    But a female follower of the Light Church stepped in to stop him. Leaning against the wall, she began to vomit¡ªnot just any vomit, but a jet-like spray.


    The dark green liquid that erupted from her mouth sizzled against the steel, releasing a noxious odor as it began to corrode the door.


    In no time, the corrosive liquid had eaten through the steel door, and the Light Church follower stepped inside first.


    The steel door was easy to open from the inside. Charles ordered his crew to swing the heavy door wide open, knowing what he had to do next.


    He didn¡¯t let everyone rush in; he instructed the others to wait in the nearest room.


    Once the creatures were released, there was a high chance they would be indiscriminate in their attacks. He didn¡¯t want to risk a fight breaking out between allies.


    Approaching the first door, just as Charles was about to open it, Dipp bolted ahead.


    He placed the bomb on the doorframe and quickly retreated.


    ¡°Boom!!¡± A deafening explosion rocked the area, followed by a monstrous roar from behind the door.


    From the smoke of the explosion, a long, green creature covered in slender arms crawled out.


    The green monster locked its gaze on Charles for a few seconds before swiftly crawling out along the ceiling.

 **Chapter 106: Project 157**

    Watching the greenish creature scuttle away, a smile crept onto Charles''s face. It seemed that for these living relics, their hatred for the Mihe was far greater than his own.


    "Keep going, hurry!" With Charles''s command, explosives were placed on the door frames one after another.


    Various monsters were released, some of which were so grotesque that Charles struggled to find the words to describe them. Yet, he didn¡¯t care about their appearances or unique traits; as long as they could cause trouble for the Mihe, they were temporary allies.


    Of course, not every living relic was as friendly as that green creature. Many attacked Charles and his team upon their release. Fortunately, the nearly two hundred armed humans were a formidable presence; any creature with a bit of intelligence would avoid confrontation.


    As Charles noticed that the expected Mihe had yet to arrive, he understood that his plan was working. Chaos must have erupted elsewhere.


    He approached the third-to-last door, ready to place explosives, when he was startled to see it swing open from the inside.


    A human¡ªa completely naked child¡ªstood there, his skin notably less pale than Charles''s.


    "Who are you?" Charles asked, his face wary. The child, however, collapsed to the ground, screaming in terror.


    As the child''s cries echoed, his fragile body began to change rapidly. His skin seemed to peel away, his body shriveling, and his light-colored lips elongated like a bird''s beak. Before long, the boy was gone, replaced by a new Mihe that crawled up from the ground.


    It opened its long mouth and spoke hurriedly to Charles, raising its right leg, which had six toes, and began to move outside.


    "Is this how Mihe are born?" Charles wondered, looking at the iron door before him. He carefully pried it open with his black blade, revealing a large, grayish, slimy mass that appeared before him.


    The mass expanded and contracted irregularly, resembling an amorphous toad.


    ¡°Pfft~¡± A naked woman was ejected onto the ground before Charles. She calmly pulled at the slime on her body and stood up.


    With a sorrowful expression, she spoke clearly to Charles. ¡°157, please stop begging me. I wish I could help, but your matters are always under Dr. Pide''s jurisdiction, and I can¡¯t interfere.¡±


    Charles¡¯s eyes widened in shock. He understood her words!


    But before he could respond, just like the previous child, the woman began to transform, screaming in anguish as she morphed into a new Mihe. When this Mihe opened its mouth again, the melodic female voice turned into a chaotic, hurried noise.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    ¡°It seems these Mihe were once human. Why did they end up like this?¡±


    With a swift strike, Charles silenced the chattering Mihe before reaching to the left side of the room, quickly locating a record book.


    **Project Code: 157**


    **Project Name: Yesterday''s Theater.**


    **Project Description:** The appearance of 157 is that of a miniature theater stage, scaled down five times. Due to casualties caused by 157-1 on August 14, 1875, it was brought to the attention of Foundation members and was eventually found in a loft in Edinburgh.


    **Testing revealed:** Whenever the position of 157 is moved, it replicates all information from the surrounding environment within a fixed time period. When physical changes occur that do not align with the replicated information, 157 will produce 157-1 from behind its red curtain.


    **157-1¡¯s physical characteristics:** It resembles a human from the replicated area and possesses human intelligence but has obvious cognitive distortions. 157-1 will spontaneously utilize all surrounding materials to restore the environment to the moment it replicated.


    **If obstructed or attacked,** 157-1 will retaliate against the obstructor. It possesses all abilities of the replicated human, including but not limited to firearms handling, combat skills, and item-level project utilization.


    **If the environment is completely restored,** 157-1 will cyclically repeat the actions of the replicated individual. This cycle has been determined to be six days.


    **If an intelligent being invades the control radius of 157,** 157-1 will perceive them as part of the area and compel them to play a role. If the actor resists, they will be captured and forced to comply. Excessive resistance will lead to punitive beatings, which will escalate with each act of defiance, potentially resulting in death. If the actor dies, 157-1 will collect their flesh, bones, and hair as materials for the environment.


    **Special Containment Procedures:** 157 must be contained in a 4m x 4m H-level containment chamber. Due to the unique nature of 157-1, a special task force must be on standby 24/7. Whenever 157-1 is produced, the task force will immediately neutralize it.


    **Appendix 1:** A proposal to use 157-1 as food for other projects, submitted by Dr. Pide to Foundation headquarters for approval.


    Reading the records on the wall, Charles finally understood why there was such a complete false city outside and why the Mihe acted out scenes from the Foundation''s past. It turned out these Mihe were simply another type of relic held by the Foundation.


    "Wait a minute, it clearly says it''s a theater stage, but this doesn¡¯t look like a stage at all," Richard remarked, pointing at the disgusting mass in front of them.


    ¡°Remember how we had to hear the Mihe speak under the influence of auditory hallucinations?¡±


    ¡°You mean¡­¡± Just then, a human was expelled from 157, only to swiftly transform into a Mihe once more.


    ¡°It seems the sounds from the depths of the ocean affect not just humans, but even these living relics,¡± Charles said, his brow furrowed.


    This explained why 157 had become what it was; it was supposed to replicate humans but instead produced humanoid monsters.


    ¡°Hey, if 157 could talk, it would definitely feel wronged. It¡¯s already bizarre enough, and to encounter something even weirder here is unexpected.¡±


    ¡°Captain? Are you alright?¡± Dipp cautiously poked his head through the door.


    Glancing at the writhing 157, Charles shut the door behind him. Knowing the island''s secrets hadn¡¯t changed his situation, he realized he needed to leave quickly.


    ¡°How many doors are left?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°Just two, but the last one seems different from the others.¡±


    Charles soon arrived at the final iron door, which was red and secured with chains adorned with glowing, intricate inscriptions.


    ¡°Quick, set the explosives! Once we blow this open, we¡¯re out of here.¡±

 **Chapter 107: Leeches**

    ¡°Boom!!¡± A deafening sound echoed, and when the smoke cleared, Charles was astonished to find the entire door completely unyielding. The strength of the chains exceeded his imagination.


    ¡°Regardless of whether it blows open or not, we don¡¯t have time to waste! Put all the explosives we have on it, light the fuse, and let¡¯s go!¡± Charles''s tone was urgent.


    On the cold floor, a deliberately elongated fuse was ignited. Without waiting for the explosion, Charles led everyone to rush outside.


    The crowd moved quickly through the laboratory. With the chaos created by the various monsters, their retreat speed increased significantly. However, as they approached the exit, the number of Mihe pouring in from the exit grew, making even the seemingly ordinary Mihe difficult to handle.


    At that moment, Charles and his team felt like a small boat navigating through a stormy sea, in constant danger of capsizing.


    Gunfire, roars, screams, and the chaotic sounds of the Mihe converged into one overwhelming cacophony.


    Suddenly, the sound of crashing waves joined this chaotic symphony.


    After dispatching a nearby Mihe, Charles turned to look behind him. It was leeches¡ªdark as ink, a relentless tide of black water mixed with countless leeches surged toward them. Any living thing covered by them would cease to exist.


    Seeing the black wave rushing toward them, Charles''s heart sank. It seemed he had unleashed something catastrophic from the red door.


    ¡°Chief Engineer! Don¡¯t get entangled with them! Charge straight ahead!!¡± Charles shouted at the towering James.


    The hulking giant roared, growing even larger, and charged like a tank toward the Mihe ahead.


    Charles and his team followed closely. The Mihe that were pushed aside attempted to attack them from behind, but they were quickly overwhelmed by the tide of leeches.


    The Mihe in front, oblivious to the danger, blindly charged forward. At this moment, Charles and his team felt like a boat rowing upstream against a fierce current, struggling to move forward.


    Weaker members of the group quickly fell behind, either dragged away by the Mihe or engulfed by the black sea of leeches. The crowd around Charles began to thin.


    As the black tide threatened to swallow them, the familiar stairs appeared before them¡ªthe exit.


    In that critical moment, Charles stopped calculating losses and swiftly raised his Thunder Staff.


    In this crowded environment, the effectiveness of the group attack relic was maximized. Electric arcs jumped between the Mihe, and those at the front fell one after another.A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.


    Seizing the opportunity, the crew helped the incapacitated Charles rush up the stairs. At the top was a glass hall, packed with Mihe rushing toward them.


    With trembling hands, Charles grabbed Dipp, who was about to charge forward, pointing at the clock tower outside the left glass wall. ¡°Don¡¯t engage them! Take the side route!¡±


    Just as they left the exit, the next second, the exit transformed into a swirling black mass, spewing forth black water like a fountain.


    Once the leeches in the black water made contact with the Mihe, they opened their ghastly mouths, biting and burrowing into their bodies. The hosts collapsed, their bodies quickly turning black and liquefying.


    ¡°Ahhh!!¡± The gigantic James slammed into the glass wall with all his might. With a crash, the entire wall shattered, and they burst out.


    Outside the hall was a road. Regaining some sense, Charles quickly oriented himself and sprinted toward his ship.


    There were Mihe on the road as well, but their density was much looser than before, no longer posing a threat to Charles and his team.


    At that moment, Charles spotted a white-robed Mihe leading a group of black-robed ones rushing toward them.


    Even though they all looked the same, Charles immediately recognized the one that had tormented him before. Seeing his enemy, he gritted his teeth and charged forward with his team.


    As the crowd charged toward them, the black Mihe raised their relics. However, this time, Charles was not alone; nearly a hundred armed individuals pulled their triggers simultaneously.


    Although the ground suddenly heaved, forming a mound that blocked most of the bullets, several black Mihe still fell to the ground, hit.


    The crowd surged forward, and in the face of their numerical advantage, the Mihe quickly fell back.


    Just as the white-robed Mihe raised its toothy relic and tore a burly man in half, Charles threw his black blade with precision, the blade leaving a blur as it embedded itself in its arm.


    With a fierce glare, Charles charged forward, yanking the black blade from the Mihe''s arm and plunging it into its chest, snarling, ¡°This is for Salin!¡±


    As he faced the Mihe up close, its long lips trembled as it tried to say something. Finally, its head tilted, and it fell lifelessly.


    Charles let out a slow breath, finally releasing the pent-up anger in his heart.


    Suddenly, the sound of shattering glass echoed behind Charles.


    When he turned to look, he was horrified to see that the massive glass hall, the size of half a football field, was crawling with writhing leeches, beginning to break through the glass and expand outward.


    The sheer number was alarming; the leeches were multiplying at a geometric rate.


    Richard''s voice trembled as he exclaimed, ¡°Oh my God¡­ what on earth is this?!¡±


    ¡°Forget about it! Run!¡± Charles urged his crew, and they sprinted for their lives.


    Soon, they burst into the city, which appeared eerily quiet. It seemed safe, but everyone knew the gravity of the situation, and no one dared to slow their pace.


    They passed imposing banks, barbershops adorned with red, white, and blue awnings, and brightly colored accessory shops. Once again, they found themselves in front of the supermarket they had visited before.


    ¡°Hang in there! We¡¯re almost there!¡± Charles shouted to his crew. The stamina boost he had given them earlier was showing its effects; while others gasped for breath, the crew of the *Unicorn* still had some energy left.


    ¡°Pfft~!¡± A strange sound echoed from above. Richard turned back in confusion, his mouth agape in shock.


    Behind them, a black mountain was rising, writhing with countless leeches.


    With a loud bang, the entire black mountain erupted like an active volcano, and the already dark sky was shrouded in an even deadlier darkness as a rain of leeches began to fall from above.

 **Chapter 108: Boarding the Ship**

    A leech, dripping with black water, fell onto the hull of the *Unicorn*. The crew member staggered and collapsed, desperately reaching out his right hand toward Charles, but it was futile; his body quickly liquefied into a dark substance.


    This terrifying scene sent chills down everyone''s spine. Driven by primal instinct, they rushed into the nearby supermarket. At the same time, the rain of leeches began to pour down.


    Watching the outside world turn black, with writhing leeches crawling across the streets, Charles knew they couldn¡¯t afford to wait. The reproductive speed of those creatures was beyond his imagination; they had to leave this cursed place as quickly as possible.


    Inside the supermarket, Charles scanned his surroundings and headed to the clothing section. He touched the garments, which looked like clothes but felt more like plastic.


    ¡°Put these on! Grab extra hats! Hurry!!¡±


    With a loud crash, the crowd donned various outfits and pushed against the supermarket''s glass doors, charging toward the distant giant wall.


    Even with this layered protection, people occasionally fell, overwhelmed by the leeches on the ground.


    At this moment, no one dared to stop. Stopping meant death.


    Three hundred meters, two hundred meters, one hundred meters!


    The sound of dripping above them ceased as Charles led the exhausted group into the breach of the massive wall.


    The towering structure shielded them from the black rain, and they were finally safe. Without pausing to rest, everyone quickly stripped off their protective gear to prevent any leeches from slipping through the seams and into their bodies.


    ¡°You take half the people to your ship, and I¡¯ll take half to mine. Hurry!¡± Charles instructed a female Luminary follower.


    Despite their exhaustion, everyone moved swiftly to the boats.


    The small boat, filled to capacity, slowly approached the *Unicorn*. With the ship''s horn blaring once again, it finally began to move after a long period of stillness.


    Panting heavily, Charles stood on the deck, leaning against the ship''s railing, gazing at the distant giant island.


    Under the bright spotlight, he saw the black leeches starting to crawl up the massive wall, like demonic hands consuming everything in their path.


    Scenes from the island flashed through Charles''s mind like a movie. Although he had only spent a few days there, it felt like he had been trapped on that island for ages.


    ¡°This island is done for. The Mihe inside are finished too. They¡¯ll never catch humans for their live stage shows again,¡± Richard remarked.This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    Charles ignored him; he still had something important to accomplish. He grabbed Dipp and pulled him toward his captain''s quarters.


    With a snap, the oil lamp was lit. Charles thrust his notebook, ruler, and pen into the bewildered Dipp¡¯s hands and began to tremble as he took off his outer coat.


    ¡°Draw a map marking the wounds on my back, quickly!¡± Charles instructed, exposing his bare upper body to his first mate.


    ¡°But Captain, you don¡¯t have any wounds on your back.¡±


    ¡°What?!¡± Charles¡¯s heart sank. He excitedly touched his back, realizing that the wounds Salin had carved into him had healed.


    He immediately recalled the capsule the white-robed Mihe had given him. That medication seemed to have healing properties.


    ¡°Did I really waste my time?¡± Charles felt a wave of despair wash over him, his body nearly collapsing.


    ¡°Captain, although you don¡¯t have wounds, there are some scars,¡± Dipp¡¯s comment made Charles want to strangle him.


    He shot Dipp a glare and turned away. ¡°Then draw based on the scars. Hurry up.¡±


    Soon, a copied sea chart was handed to Charles¡¯s trembling hands.


    After carefully comparing it with the mental map in his mind, Charles suddenly broke into laughter. His laughter grew louder, making Dipp feel a bit uneasy.


    ¡°Captain, are you okay?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine, I¡¯m fine.¡± With a smile, Charles hugged him tightly before shoving him out the door with force.


    ¡°We found the exit! We¡¯re going home soon!¡± Charles stared intently at the sea chart in his hands, muttering to himself.


    No matter the hardships and despair he faced during this exploration of the island, the moment he saw the map made it all worthwhile.


    ¡°Oh no, I haven¡¯t even started writing my *Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea*! I need to get to work quickly; otherwise, it¡¯ll be too late once I get out.¡±


    Listening to Richard¡¯s voice in his mind, Charles¡¯s smile slowly faded. He carefully tucked the sea chart away, slipping it into his journal.


    ¡°Things are coming to a close. We can finally have a good talk about the trouble you caused earlier.¡±


    In her soft bed, Anna lay on her side, humming along to the latest popular song playing on the gramophone.


    Naked, she propped her head up with her elbow, flipping through an art book filled with illustrations of grotesque monsters.


    ¡°Creak.¡± The bathroom door opened, and a muscular young man, wrapped in a towel, stepped out excitedly. ¡°Miss Anna, I¡­ I¡¯m all cleaned up.¡±


    Anna absentmindedly glanced at him. ¡°Did you wash thoroughly?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m spotless! You can see for yourself.¡± The young man, a mere petty thug from the port, felt elated to have caught the attention of a famous socialite from the island. He could hardly believe his luck. Tomorrow, he would boast to his friends, who would undoubtedly be envious.


    He excitedly reached out a hand toward her soft skin, while his other hand loosened the towel around his waist.


    But soon, the lust on his face transformed into sheer terror. His scream filled the room as a tentacled monster emerged from a pool of blood, devouring its meal and quickly transforming back into the beautiful woman.


    She lightly clapped her hands, and three maids dressed in black and white entered, respectfully cleaning up the mess in the room.


    Anna slowly lay back on the ship, continuing to absentmindedly flip through the art book. ¡°Any news from Coral Island?¡±


    ¡°Respectful Mistress, there is none,¡± one of the maids replied, bowing slightly.


    ¡°Ugh¡­¡± Anna twirled her hair with her fingers, rolling over to the other side of the bed, where a portrait of Charles rested on the cabinet.


    Her left hand transformed into a tentacle, gently pulling the portrait closer.


    ¡°Who is this?¡± one of the maids asked.


    ¡°Oh? Him?¡± Anna¡¯s lips curled into a smile, her eyes filled with a hint of struggle as she caressed the glass with her tendrils. ¡°He¡¯s my man.¡±


    ¡°Ding-dong.¡± The doorbell rang, but Anna didn¡¯t move, simply lifting her chin toward the entrance.


    The maid quickly laid down a new carpet and rushed to open the door. ¡°Mistress, it¡¯s the governor¡¯s daughter.¡±


    Before the maid could finish, a flustered Margaret rushed in, her long dress trailing behind her. ¡°Sister Anna, has Mr. Charles replied to his letter??¡±

 **Chapter 109: Dispute**

    Inside the *Unicorn*, Dipp tiptoed alongside Lily toward the captain''s quarters.


    "What do you think Mr. Charles is doing? Why has he been holed up in his room since we boarded?" Lily whispered.


    "You¡¯re closer to the captain than anyone else. If you don¡¯t know, how would I?" Dipp replied, a bit irritated.


    "He hasn¡¯t let me sleep with him lately, so how would I know? Stop talking; Mr. Charles has sharp ears. He¡¯ll hear us," Lily cautioned.


    As they approached the captain''s quarters, they could hear muffled voices from inside. They leaned in to listen, catching snippets of a heated argument.


    "Why are you so impulsive! Your body must... listen to me..."


    "Why should I! Just because you say so doesn¡¯t mean I have to...¡±


    "This isn¡¯t a game! You need to think before acting!"


    "Fine, I have a pig brain! And you think you¡¯re...?¡±


    "Do you really think I¡¯m joking with you...?"


    "You do have a way! Go ahead, kill me... let¡¯s see who... who will care!?"


    As they listened to the chaotic exchange, Dipp and Lily exchanged worried glances.


    Lily lowered her voice, "Mr. Charles seems to be arguing with himself again."


    "Has he done this before?" Dipp instinctively touched the jester mask in his pocket.


    Charles''s erratic behavior aboard the *Unicorn* was no secret; everyone had noticed that he had developed another persona. Though he hadn¡¯t explained anything, the crew had come to understand that their captain was not quite himself.


    Lily shook her head. "Not like this. He used to talk to himself sometimes, but this level of argument is new."


    "What should we do? Should we intervene?" Dipp¡¯s tone was uncertain.


    "How can we intervene? They¡¯re both Mr. Charles! Which side should we help?"


    Suddenly, the door swung open, revealing a grim-faced Charles staring at the pair. "What are you two doing here?"


    "Uh... well... I was looking for Lily. Right, Lily?" Dipp quickly nodded in agreement.


    Before Charles could respond, Dipp grabbed the mouse and dashed toward the deck.This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    Once on the crowded deck, they exchanged glances and let out heavy sighs.


    "That was scary," Lily said, patting her chest.


    Seeing them emerge, Krona, who was sitting on the ship¡¯s railing smoking, leaned over. "How¡¯s the captain doing?"


    "Ugh, still the same," Dipp replied, stretching lazily.


    "Should we get a doctor to take a look?" Krona asked, taking a deep drag and tossing the cigarette butt into the sea.


    "No can do. I asked the ship''s doctor before, and he said he had no solutions for this," Lily said, looking up at them.


    "It¡¯s fine, it¡¯s fine. We¡¯ve overcome so many difficulties; the captain won¡¯t be brought down by something like this!"


    "Yeah, Mr. Charles is the best!"


    Despite their reassurances, during mealtime, everyone could see that something was off with the captain. His body seemed uncoordinated, and his hands appeared to twitch uncontrollably.


    He muttered to himself, his facial expressions contorting as if someone were pulling at both sides of his face, looking quite frightening.


    Finally, the doctor could no longer bear to watch. Limping over, he gave Charles a strong pat on the back with his prosthetic. "Hey, you two, quiet down. Everyone on this ship is counting on you."


    Feeling the uneasy gazes from those around him, Charles finally stopped his strange behavior, gulping down his food.


    After stuffing his face, Charles set down his spoon and prepared to return to the captain''s quarters. He still had unfinished business with Richard.


    But just as he stood up, a sailor rushed down from the deck, urgency written all over his face. "Captain, the first mate wants you to come quickly. Those Luminary fanatics seem to be fighting!"


    The *Unicorn* was not far from the Luminary ship, and Charles could see the commotion from the deck.


    As soon as his foot touched the other ship''s deck, he saw a Luminary follower named Linda lying on the ground, with several people tugging at her robe.


    When they had escaped the island, everyone had worked together, united in purpose. But now that they had relaxed, personal grievances began to surface.


    "What¡¯s going on here?!" Charles''s presence immediately calmed the chaotic scene.


    A massive man, towering at 2.2 meters, stood up from Linda, his chest heaving with agitation. "I¡¯m a big guy, and we only get this little water? Is this woman feeding cats?"


    "I gave that order. This is the only way everyone can avoid dying of thirst. Do you have a problem with that?" Charles replied, coldly assessing him.


    The giant hesitated, taking a step back, aware of Charles''s strength. But feeling the eyes of his comrades behind him, his expression hardened.


    "Charles, I¡¯m not trying to defy your orders, but people need water to survive. You have to ensure my survival. We¡¯re all captains here; don¡¯t be so rigid. My last ship was much bigger than yours."


    "Oh? And what was your position before?" Charles asked as he helped Linda up, noticing the bruises forming on her skin. Clearly, their needs were not just about water.


    The giant, with a hint of pride, replied, "I was a pirate. Of course, we¡¯re all friends here, having escaped together. I won¡¯t harm you."


    "And those behind you? Are they your crew?" Charles inquired, eyeing the unruly faces of the men behind him.


    "Not exactly, but they listen to me now."


    "Very well." Charles pointed toward the dark water below. "Jump in."


    "What... what?!" The giant''s smug smile froze in place.


    "I said jump!" Charles¡¯s crew stepped forward in unison, and the atmosphere grew tense.


    The giant¡¯s face turned pale, and he frantically waved his hands. "No, no, no, Mr. Charles, you might have misunderstood. I¡¯m not challenging your authority; I just wanted another cup of water!"


    With a loud bang, Charles fired his gun, the bullet piercing the giant¡¯s chest.


    In front of everyone, Charles dragged the man¡¯s body and tossed it overboard, then turned to face the others.

 **Chapter 110: The Sinking Island**

    Seeing their leader thrown into the sea, the remaining survivors panicked and began to explain themselves in a flurry of voices.


    However, Charles remained unmoved, ignoring their pleas and insisting that they jump into the water. As captain, he had to maintain absolute control over the ship. This was both a privilege and a responsibility. In such a confined environment, the darker sides of human nature could multiply exponentially.


    He recognized that this incident was merely a test of limits by these individuals. If he didn¡¯t suppress them now, the onlookers would surely join in, pushing their demands further. Soon, it wouldn''t just be about water.


    One tall man on the edge, seeing Charles¡¯s unwavering stance, twisted his face in anger and aimed his gun at him.


    Before he could pull the trigger, gunfire erupted from behind Charles, and the troublemakers fell to the ground in spasms.


    The other survivors watched in horror, shocked by Charles¡¯s brutal response.


    Charles coldly observed as his crew disposed of the bodies. "If you think you can kill my men, go ahead. Otherwise, you¡¯ll follow my orders on my ship. Test me again, and I won¡¯t hesitate to feed the fish with your bodies."


    Under Charles¡¯s declaration, the others instinctively averted their gazes. Whether it was the impact of his words or the deaths that increased the fresh water rations, the journey ahead was surprisingly calm. No one dared to stir up trouble again, and the two ships sailed peacefully toward Coral Island.


    **February 31, Year 9: Sunny**


    Ah~ Today is a clear, sunny day, perfect for another lively day of bickering. However, Charles and I decided not to stir things up today. After so many days of arguing, we¡¯re both exhausted¡ªour mouths and throats are tired. Since neither of us can outmaneuver the other, we¡¯ve come up with a begrudging compromise.


    From now on, he will make all major decisions, but to compensate for my losses, he must give me half an hour of his time each day. We¡¯ll try to act when the other is sleeping.


    Sigh~ I¡¯ve realized he¡¯s just looking for trouble. Finding the map should be a good thing, but he insists on making it complicated. No wonder he hasn¡¯t made a single close friend in this godforsaken place after all these years; sharing a body with him is truly a torment.


    *Bang!*


    The sudden jolt caused Richard¡¯s pen to draw a long line across his diary.Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.


    "Damn it!" Richard cursed, slamming the diary shut. Grabbing his black blade, he stormed out. "Who the hell is bothering me at a time like this? I¡¯ll chop them up!"


    Upon reaching the deck, he saw everyone leaning over the side of the ship, peering down.


    "Captain! There¡¯s a small boat below us!" the first mate reported urgently.


    "Really? Is there someone trying to scam us here?" Richard inserted his black blade into his boot and leaned over the railing to look down.


    The boat below was an old vessel¡ªnot exactly small, but about the same size as the previous *Mouse*. The crew was busy retrieving a comrade from the water, clearly having been hit hard by the *Unicorn*.


    Charles jumped directly onto their boat, pushing his finger hard against the bald head of a middle-aged man who looked like the captain. "What¡¯s going on? How could you not see such a large ship? Are you blind and still dare to sail?"


    Faced with Richard''s aggression, the middle-aged man appeared meek and smiled nervously, holding out a crate of fruit. "Captain, you¡¯ve worked hard at sea. Look, our black vine fruit is fresh and cheap¡ªonly 800 echoes a crate. Would you like to buy some?"


    "You think I¡¯m an idiot? Move your lousy boat out of the way, or I¡¯ll run right over you."


    Seeing that Richard was merely a merchant, he lost interest, grabbing the rope to return to his ship. He had no time to waste before Charles''s half-hour was up.


    But the middle-aged man, seeing this, fell to his knees, wailing. "Captain, please buy something! My island has sunk, and I rented this boat! My wife and children depend on me. If I don¡¯t make some money, I¡¯ll have to jump into the sea with them!"


    Charles loosened his grip on the rope, surveying the captain and his three crew members. Their ears were normal¡ªnone were natives of Coral Island.


    "The island has sunk? Wasn¡¯t the last island sinking over a hundred years ago? You can¡¯t even come up with a good lie," Charles replied skeptically.


    The bald man wiped his tears and snot, quickly explaining, "It¡¯s true, Captain! You might not know, but Shadow Island has sunk recently!"


    "Shadow Island..." Richard¡¯s mind raced through the sea charts, recalling it as an old island not far from Coral Island.


    Seeing Richard deep in thought, the bald man continued to plead. "Captain, you don¡¯t know how terrible it was. Thousands screamed as they were dragged into the sea. Creatures from the water came in swarms, pulling people under. It was like the end of the world! I spent all my money just to get a ticket back. Please, have mercy on me!"


    Richard stroked his chin, then waved his hand. "Fine, let¡¯s call it aiding the refugees. Bring five crates on board for my crew to quench their thirst."


    Hearing this, the bald man jumped up, ecstatic. "Thank you! Thank you! May the goddess bless you!"


    "Don¡¯t mention your goddess to me. I don¡¯t care what nonsense you believe in. If you bring her up again, I won¡¯t buy anything," Richard retorted, pulling the rope back onto the ship.


    As the *Unicorn* slowly approached Coral Island, more and more small boats appeared, all eager to sell their goods.


    They competed fiercely, trying to sell various items to every incoming ship, turning the sea into a chaotic mess.


    The faces of those on the small boats were filled with anxiety as they begged the ships to stop and buy their wares.


    This behavior was incredibly dangerous, especially for the larger vessels that couldn¡¯t see the small boats. Yet, they didn¡¯t care, seemingly willing to risk their lives for a few extra echoes.

 **Chapter 111: All Beings Suffer**

    The chaotic scene confirmed that Shadow Island had indeed sunk. This was just a glimpse of those who managed to escape by boat; those without vessels were left to feed the fish along with their island.


    This was not merely the death of a few individuals, but the disappearance of millions. Although Charles never considered himself one of them, the thought of so many lives lost weighed heavily on his heart.


    The arrival of Shadow Island refugees had broader implications. As the *Unicorn* finally docked, Charles noticed a significant increase in laborers in the port area, most of whom were outsiders¡ªrefugees from Shadow Island.


    When they saw the *Unicorn* arrive, hope lit up their faces, and they rushed forward, only to leave in disappointment upon realizing it was not a cargo ship.


    But Charles had his own responsibilities. He gathered all the people who had escaped from the island.


    Looking at their anxious faces, he said, "Now that we¡¯ve reached the shore, may we meet again in the future."


    The crowd erupted with excitement, and as soon as he finished speaking, they dashed toward the island, finally back in the land of the living.


    Among them was a polite little man in a cap who approached Charles and bowed respectfully. "Mr. Charles, you are a great captain. I wish you find a new island soon."


    Charles chuckled lightly. "Am I still great after throwing people into the sea?"


    The little man shook his head. "As long as you can safely bring your crew back to port, that makes you a great captain. Those troublemakers brought it upon themselves."


    As the crowd dispersed, only the crew of the *Unicorn*, Linda, and another follower of the Light remained¡ªthese were his own people.


    "Linda, go check if Kede has returned. If he¡¯s back, let me know immediately."


    "As you wish," Linda replied, crossing her hands over her chest in a gesture of the Light before turning to head toward the dock exit.


    Watching their departing figures, Charles turned to his crew, each face beaming with excitement.


    Without wasting words¡ªhe knew they didn¡¯t want to hear him talk at this moment¡ªhe began distributing their wages.


    Stacks of echo coins were handed out, and the crew¡¯s faces lit up with joy; there was nothing better than receiving wages while still alive.


    While Charles was busy distributing the money on the deck, a man on the dock, puffing on a pipe, waved his hat toward the ship.The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    A sailor named Jack rushed down the ladder with a stack of coins. Their excited chatter reached Charles¡¯s ears.


    "Hey, Jack, my friend! You¡¯re finally back! Let¡¯s celebrate!"


    "Cut the act; you want me to treat you again, don¡¯t you? It¡¯s always like this."


    "My cousin, don¡¯t say that. I¡¯ve got good news¡ªlots of new stock has come in from Shadow Island, all beautiful and cheap. If you¡¯re lucky, you might even meet someone from the heart of the island. Just think, those who used to look down on us are now lying in bed waiting for us. How great is that?"


    "Is it really that good??"


    "Absolutely! These women from Shadow Island are desperate¡ªthey have nothing."


    "Oh my god, I must go take care of these poor girls¡¯ business."


    "Buddy, I¡¯m a bit short on cash today. Can you...?"


    "Alright, alright, I¡¯ll cover this time."


    "Oh, my cousin, your heart is as generous as the sea."


    Charles paused in distributing the coins, choosing to ignore them and instead calculate the compensation for the deceased crew members. This was beyond his control; the suffering of all beings in the sea was a harsh reality.


    After paying the necessary fees to the harbor authorities, the *Unicorn* and the *Divine Melody* were secured at the dock.


    Feeling a mix of exhaustion and relief, Charles headed toward the Bat Hotel, which now belonged to him.


    On the streets, the number of dirty, homeless children had increased, and every adult¡¯s face was marked with anxiety.


    The port area, already a place where the impoverished struggled to survive, had become even more difficult due to the influx of Shadow Island refugees.


    Yet not everyone was unhappy; various religious followers stood by the roadside distributing flyers. In times of hardship, people instinctively sought a spiritual refuge.


    "Mr. Charles!! Long time no see."


    Hearing the call from behind, Charles turned to see Little Ear from the Sea Serpent Gang.


    "What have you been up to lately? We haven¡¯t seen you in ages," Little Ear, with a bandaged left hand, approached along with a few subordinates.


    For some reason, Little Ear¡¯s attitude toward Charles was noticeably more favorable this time, almost sycophantic.


    "I¡¯ve been busy with some trivial matters. What happened to your hand?"


    Upon hearing this, a grimace crossed Little Ear¡¯s face, and he spat on the ground. "Those trash from Shadow Island cut me with a knife! They dare to encroach on my territory! They¡¯re asking for death."


    Changing the subject, Little Ear leaned in closer and whispered, "Forget that. Someone asked me to invite you to do some dirty work. Are you interested? There¡¯s a decent profit in it, and I won¡¯t take a cut."


    Charles shook his head, refusing outright. "Sorry, I¡¯m not interested in that kind of work."


    One of the tall, thin subordinates took issue with Charles¡¯s response. "Charles, give our boss some face! Our boss is a rare¡ª"


    Before he could finish, Little Ear pulled out a revolver, swinging the barrel forcefully against the subordinate''s face. "Who asked you to speak here? Shut up!!"


    After reprimanding his subordinate, Little Ear turned back to Charles with a smile. "No worries, if you don¡¯t want to, that¡¯s fine. I was just asking. I thought you might come by my territory more often. You¡¯re always welcome."


    Charles calmly regarded him for a moment before leaving with his group of sailors.


    Once Charles was out of sight, Little Ear turned to the disgruntled subordinate. "Are you stupid? You think you can provoke a guy like him? Haven¡¯t you heard he wiped out the Dagger Gang?"


    "He¡¯s just Charles, the guy who was shipping goods with a small boat a year ago. He even brought us cargo before," the reprimanded subordinate protested.


    Little Ear looked enviously in the direction where Charles had disappeared.


    "Don¡¯t you know? He¡¯s not the same as before. He¡¯s no longer one of us..."

 **Chapter 112: Help from the Western Seas**

    ¡°Mr. Charles, will our island sink too?¡±


    Upon hearing Lily''s question, Charles remained silent. He gently patted her fluffy head and pushed open the door to the Bat Hotel, heading toward his room.


    Clearly, he couldn¡¯t answer that question. This place defied logic; even if humans wanted to survive, it seemed impossible. To live with dignity, they had to find the entrance to the surface. Once that was found, all problems could be solved.


    Charles sank into the soft sofa, his tense mind finally relaxing. As the warmth of the fireplace enveloped him, he drifted into sleep.


    Time passed, and he was jolted awake by a nightmare.


    He noticed Linda standing quietly beside him, her presence unexpected. Glancing at his pocket watch, he realized four hours had gone by.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, this lady arrived two hours ago. I wanted to wake you, but she wouldn¡¯t let me,¡± Lily said, gazing out the window.


    Charles put away his watch and asked the woman beside him, ¡°So, how is it? Has Kede returned?¡±


    Linda shook her head. ¡°The saintly one hasn¡¯t returned to the chapel.¡±


    A flicker of disappointment crossed Charles''s face, though he had anticipated it. It seemed they would have to endure yet another round of excruciating waiting, a task he despised.


    ¡°Does Salin have any family?¡± Charles inquired again, hoping to help if he could.


    ¡°Yes, I am his wife,¡± Linda replied calmly, surprising him.


    ¡°You¡¯re his wife? Then why do you seem so unaffected by his death?¡± Charles questioned, skepticism in his voice.


    Linda¡¯s tone was eerily detached. ¡°Why should I be sad? The partners of the followers of the Light are paired by fate. My feelings for him are quite shallow, and his for me are the same.¡±


    Charles studied the bald woman before him and said, ¡°Then you should go back. If Kede returns, let me know immediately.¡±


    Linda nodded silently and turned to leave.


    In the remaining time, Charles anxiously waited, feeling as if the hours stretched into years. He attempted to alleviate his anxiety through drawing, but it didn¡¯t work well.


    He already had the sea charts in hand but was forced to wait for others, a tormenting situation. If not for the doctor advising him that he needed to relieve his mental strain on land, he might have set sail himself, abandoning Kede entirely.


    Soon, however, the arrival of someone eased his anxiety slightly.This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    Bare and relaxed, Charles lay back on the bed and exhaled slowly. ¡°Aren¡¯t you supposed to be gathering a fleet to attack? Why are you back?¡±


    Blushing, Elizabeth emerged from the covers, crawling onto Charles''s chest, her smile radiating as she listened to his racing heartbeat.


    ¡°There are some issues on that island.¡±


    ¡°Is 1002 still unresolved?¡±


    Elizabeth¡¯s long hair swayed as she shook her head.


    ¡°Yes, that thing is incredibly difficult to deal with. Explosives, strong acids, freezing¡ªit can heal rapidly, even if reduced to the size of a fingernail. My men are starting to question if it¡¯s even a living creature.¡±


    Charles recalled the creature that could revitalize anything; it was indeed a formidable opponent. However, he hadn¡¯t expected it to remain unresolved after months.


    ¡°So, does that mean the island is useless?¡±


    ¡°No, the Gante family from the Western Seas contacted me recently. They claim they can deal with it.¡±


    ¡°The Western Seas? Those magic users can handle 1002?¡±


    ¡°Yes, the Gante family is a well-known wizard family from the Western Seas. I¡¯ve heard their patriarch can easily alter a person¡¯s soul, modifying memory, consciousness, and perception.¡±


    ¡°That might not work. No matter how powerful they are, if they can¡¯t even approach 1002, how can they modify it? Plus, it¡¯s debatable whether that thing even has a soul.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know the specifics, but they assured me they could handle 1002. However, they want twenty percent of the island¡¯s land as payment. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°Why are you asking me? It¡¯s your island; you can decide for yourself.¡±


    Elizabeth gazed deeply into his eyes with her sapphire-blue pupils. ¡°Did you forget? I said the island is half yours. Such a significant matter, of course, I need to discuss it with you.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind; it¡¯s all up to you.¡± To Charles, the island held no value.


    ¡°Good, then I¡¯ll agree to it shortly.¡±


    Just then, Charles suddenly sat up, alert, looking at Elizabeth. ¡°You haven¡¯t had your memory altered by them, have you?¡±


    Since Anna had modified his memory, he had become exceptionally wary of such things.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I haven¡¯t. Although they did control a few governors before, once those people regained their senses, the Gante family faced severe retaliation. They wouldn¡¯t want to repeat that experience in the Northern Seas, especially with so many eyes on them.¡±


    Elizabeth¡¯s delicate fingers traced the scar on Charles¡¯s chest, and she murmured, ¡°Darling, you have more scars now.¡±


    ¡°Just some minor injuries; I accidentally got touched by something in the water.¡± Charles began to dress.


    Two slender white arms slid over his shoulders, gently wrapping around his neck.


    ¡°Charles, can¡¯t you reconsider? If the Gante family deals with 1002, then the island will be ours. Our new home can be built soon, and the entire island will belong to us.¡±


    Charles gently pushed her arms away as he continued to put on his shirt. ¡°I have my own matters to attend to. Once I¡¯m done, if you still wish to follow me then, you can come along.¡±


    Watching his broad back, Elizabeth¡¯s eyes shimmered with a hint of sadness. Was the legendary Land of Light truly more important than the Living Island?


    Charles stood by the window, watching Elizabeth leave, accompanied by a group of people.


    Though Elizabeth had not yet become a governor, her aura of authority had already begun to manifest.


    Gone was her earlier gentleness; her delicate features were now filled with confidence and determination. The captain of the *Black Rose* had returned.


    ¡°Click!¡± The door behind Charles opened on its own, and Lily rushed in with a swarm of mice.


    Charles quickly scanned the room for anything unusual. Finding nothing, he approached his gunner. ¡°Why are you back so soon? Didn¡¯t you go out to play?¡±


    Lily climbed up his pant leg to his shoulder. The expression on the white mouse¡¯s face was hesitant. ¡°Mr. Charles, can I discuss something with you?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡± Charles gently grabbed the fluffy white mouse in his hand.


    ¡°Other crew members received their wages, right? As the gunner, shouldn¡¯t I get mine too?¡±

 **Chapter 113: Noble Lily**

    Charles was taken aback. After all this time with him, it was the first time Lily had asked for a salary.


    ¡°You used to just drag me along whenever you wanted to buy something,¡± he remarked.


    Lily drooped her ears and explained, ¡°I saw James¡¯s wife giving stale bread to those poor refugees from Shadow Island, and I want to do the same.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Charles, let¡¯s help them! They¡¯re so pitiful! I saw some of them so hungry they were digging through garbage for scraps that even rats wouldn¡¯t eat. It¡¯s so sad!¡± Lily tugged on Charles¡¯s fingers, her voice pleading.


    ¡°Can you really help that many people?¡±


    ¡°Well... even if I can help just one, it¡¯s better than nothing! It¡¯s really hard to be hungry, and I heard there have been many dead bodies in the sewers lately.¡±


    Charles thought for a moment and wrote a check, handing it to Lily. ¡°Here¡¯s your money. Don¡¯t take it all out at once; have that brat Deep help you open a bank account.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Charles! You¡¯re so kind!¡± Lily exclaimed, excitedly grabbing the check and quickly scampering off with her mouse friends.


    ¡°Is our money enough? Just giving it away to that little troublemaker?¡± Richard¡¯s voice echoed in Charles¡¯s mind.


    ¡°That¡¯s her rightful pay. What she does with it is her business. Echoes won¡¯t benefit us, and besides, we won¡¯t be here much longer,¡± Charles replied, pulling out his sketchpad to start drawing.


    As Richard¡¯s voice faded from his mind, Charles¡¯s prosthetic limb suddenly moved on its own, picking up another brush and starting to paint with both hands.


    Two brushes filled the canvas, gradually revealing a joyful family of four. However, except for one young man, the faces of the other three remained blurred.


    Charles thought Lily¡¯s matter was settled, but that night, his gunner returned in tears.


    ¡°What happened?¡± Charles set down his brush and asked the weeping white mouse.


    ¡°Waaah... they... they stole my bread! I told them to come one by one, but they wouldn¡¯t listen and tried to take my money too!¡±


    ¡°Is everyone alright?¡± Charles lifted Lily, checking her for injuries.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine! My friends bit them! But Mr. Charles, why did this happen? I was just trying to help them,¡± the upside-down Lily questioned.


    Seeing she was unharmed, Charles set her down. ¡°There¡¯s no point in questioning it. Just don¡¯t go back next time. Save that money for snacks instead.¡±


    Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    Lily frowned, sitting on the carpet and playing with her tail. She couldn¡¯t understand why, when she was only trying to help, they would steal her bread.


    As time passed, the brown mice nearby curled up together on the carpet and fell asleep, yet Lily remained puzzled.


    Watching her troubled expression, Charles shook his head, set down his brush, and picked her up again, walking to the window.


    ¡°Do you think that because you see them as pitiful and help them, they should be grateful to you?¡±


    ¡°Yes! They¡¯re hungry, and I gave them food! They should say thank you, right? That¡¯s what good people do.¡±


    ¡°Who told you that just because someone is pitiful, they¡¯re a good person? Some people are so desperate to survive that they don¡¯t care about good or bad anymore. Just staying alive is a struggle for them.¡±


    Charles watched a seven or eight-year-old beggar using a blade to cut the clothes of a sailor, his bright eyes devoid of innocence, filled instead with greed for money.


    The next moment, the sailor noticed the beggar and picked him up, throwing him harshly to the ground, showing no regard for the child¡¯s age as he kicked him hard in the chest.


    The surrounding crowd remained indifferent, merely parting slightly to avoid the blood that might splatter from the thief.


    The bleeding boy trembled as he crawled toward an old man smoking a cigarette, his bloodied lips seeming to plead for something.


    The old man glanced at him coldly, tossing his cigarette butt into the filthy water in front of the boy, then stood up and walked away.


    ¡°In this world, we can only protect ourselves, and at most, those close to us. We can¡¯t handle others¡¯ affairs. They may seem pitiful, but who isn¡¯t pitiful in this world? Just living is a form of suffering.¡±


    Charles stroked Lily¡¯s smooth fur along her back.


    The little white mouse in his hand clutched tightly, staring at the unnoticed thief on the ground.


    Just as Charles thought he had convinced his gunner, Lily squeaked a few times, and the brown mice lying on the carpet sprang into action.


    Soon, Charles saw them dragging the small boy into a corner by the street.


    Lily pushed Charles¡¯s hand away, looking up at him and shaking her head vigorously. ¡°Mr. Charles, you¡¯re wrong! Daddy told me that a person lives in this world not just for themselves; people must help each other to make the world better!¡±


    Lily jumped from Charles¡¯s hand to the ground, her emotions flaring. ¡°Even if they don¡¯t say thank you, I still want to help them! Mr. Charles, don¡¯t stop me!¡±


    Seeing the little mouse so riled up, Charles chuckled softly. ¡°I won¡¯t stop you. If that¡¯s what you want to do, go ahead. Just remember to buy some fish and mushrooms for those people; that¡¯ll help everyone. Bread is too expensive, and even the cheapest black flour is grown in fresh water.¡±


    Lily¡¯s expression shifted from surprise to determination as she nodded vigorously and dashed out the door.


    Watching the bustling street outside the window, Charles let out a slow breath. Lily¡¯s character was nobler than his.


    That day¡¯s events quickly faded from Charles¡¯s mind. No matter how Lily¡¯s charity work turned out, as long as she was happy, that was enough.


    However, as time passed, a legend began to circulate in the port district.


    A tale about the ¡°Mouse Angels,¡± who were said to be the guardians of street children and beggars, distributing food to the hungriest of children.


    ¡°Well done this time,¡± Charles remarked to the white mouse next to him, who was gnawing on an oyster in the warm room.


    Lily giggled. ¡°I took advantage of their sleeping time, giving food to each one so that no one would go hungry!¡±


    Charles continued his artwork, feeling that as long as Lily was happy, the money was well spent.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, what do you do at the beach while you¡¯re sleeping?¡±


    Lily¡¯s question made Charles pause his brush. ¡°You saw me at the beach? When?¡±


    ¡°Uh-huh.¡± Lily nodded her little head. ¡°My friends saw you several times, jumping across the rooftops!¡±

 **Chapter 114: The Elixir**

    ¡°Where did you go last night?¡± Charles inquired in his mind.


    Since Lily had seen someone, it must have been Richard.


    ¡°Hey, I¡¯ve been into fishing lately. I figured I¡¯d use my own time to try out a new hobby. What¡¯s it to you?¡± Richard replied.


    Hearing Richard¡¯s response, Charles fell silent and continued working on his new painting.


    Time passed slowly, and when the last details were added to the canvas, Charles checked his pocket watch and relinquished control of his body, allowing another personality to take over.


    Richard hummed a tune as he pulled out a new notebook, beginning to draft his work titled *Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea*.


    The scratch of the pen glided over the dry pages, leaving behind smooth lines of text. The content told a lighthearted story about a boy named Mire exploring the sea, filled with humorous anecdotes and absurd jokes. Each time he reached a punchline, Richard would burst into a fit of manic laughter.


    Although only four hours had passed, Richard had already completed more than half of his whimsical novel.


    ¡°Hey, buddy, what do you think of this joke? Let me tell you! One day, Mire accidentally let out a series of loud farts at home, and his grandma, who was knitting, jumped up and said, ¡®Quick, go open the door! Your second uncle is coming back with a tractor!¡¯¡ªhahaha!¡±


    Before he could finish the joke, Richard collapsed onto the table, laughing uncontrollably.


    After a while, as his mind quieted, Richard¡¯s wild laughter turned into a smug smile. He tossed his pen aside, pushed open the window, and jumped out.


    Dressed in a deep blue captain¡¯s coat, he leaped across the rooftops like an acrobat, landing swiftly on the dock crowded with various ships.


    Spotting a black and red steamship that was twice the size of the Unicorn, he took a few steps forward but quickly pulled back his foot. ¡°No, no, that guy wouldn¡¯t do that.¡±


    Richard rubbed his hands over his face. After a few seconds, the brash, disdainful Richard disappeared, replaced by Charles¡¯s long-standing expression of resolve tinged with fatigue.


    ¡°Cough, cough¡­¡± Richard cleared his throat, stepping forward toward the ship.


    As soon as he boarded, he was greeted by Elizabeth, who wore a crisp white captain¡¯s coat, linking her arm with his. ¡°Charles, why are you so late today?¡±


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    ¡°Um¡­ I got held up with some matters. How did that thing go?¡± Charles replied coldly.


    ¡°It¡¯s in the cabin. I heard there¡¯s been progress with what you asked. What are you two up to, being all mysterious, keeping to yourselves?¡±


    ¡°Nothing. I¡¯ll tell you once it¡¯s resolved.¡± Charles led her toward the adjacent cabin.


    The ship was enormous, with three levels, each boasting a different style. The people inside weren¡¯t dressed like typical sailors; most wore purple robes and pointed soft hats.


    Their expressions toward Richard were a mix of respect and curiosity. This guy had been working on something with their leader for days, but no one knew what it was.


    Under their watchful eyes, Richard and Elizabeth reached the top level.


    The entire level was filled with books, haphazardly piled in heaps everywhere.


    An elderly man with deep lines etched into his face sat behind a desk cluttered with books, seemingly engrossed in reading.


    As he noticed their footsteps approaching, he looked up over his reading glasses, a smile spreading across his wrinkled face. ¡°Ah, it¡¯s Mr. Charles. I have good news for you regarding the other¡ª¡±


    ¡°Cough, cough!¡± Richard suddenly interrupted with a few coughs.


    The old man glanced at Elizabeth beside him and quickly retracted what he was about to say.


    ¡°You should step outside for a moment,¡± Richard said, pulling his arm from Elizabeth¡¯s embrace.


    Elizabeth exchanged curious glances between the two men before nodding. ¡°Alright, you two handle it. I¡¯ll wait outside.¡±


    As Elizabeth¡¯s distinctive high-heeled boots faded away, Richard eagerly approached the old man. ¡°So, what¡¯s the progress?¡±


    The old man nodded and turned to a stack of books. With a wave of his left hand, the disordered books began to flutter open like birds, revealing a hidden door behind them.


    With a clatter, Charles followed the old man through the door.


    Inside was a small room, no bigger than half a bedroom, filled with jars and bottles, and it also held a man¡ªa figure wearing a mask reminiscent of the infamous 096.


    His limbs were tightly bound by chains, and no matter how he shook his head, the mask remained in place.


    ¡°Look,¡± the old man gestured with his left hand, and a translucent blue figure detached itself from the masked man. ¡°This artifact you provided, I¡¯ve studied it for quite some time and discovered that it alters the rotation of the soul¡¯s star chakras, and it¡ª¡±


    ¡°Wait, wait, I don¡¯t want to know all that. I just want to know how to get rid of the other personality without affecting the primary one.¡±


    The old man regarded Richard meaningfully. ¡°Has Mr. Charles used this artifact as well? Then which personality is speaking to me?¡±


    ¡°Whether he has or not is none of your concern. What you need to know is that if you solve my problem, Elizabeth will give you an additional five percent of the island,¡± Richard said, grinning.


    The old man studied the young man before him for a moment, then began to chuckle.


    ¡°I¡¯ve already deciphered how the artifact alters the soul. Next, I can concoct the elixir. Don¡¯t worry; in the field of soul knowledge, no one in the Sea Realm is more adept than the head of the Gant family.¡±


    ¡°Great! How long will it take?¡± Charles¡¯s eyes gleamed with urgency.


    ¡°In fact, to demonstrate my sincerity in our collaboration, I¡¯ve already prepared the Soul Binding Elixir. I know you need this very much.¡± The old man raised his gnarled left hand, and a palm-sized glass vial floated slowly from his robe¡¯s sleeve into Richard¡¯s hands.


    Inside the vial, a dark copper liquid mixed with strands of black fluid swirled gently.

 **Chapter 115: Pulling the Trigger**

    Looking at the vial in front of him, Richard couldn''t help but break into laughter. ¡°Mr. Finn, you truly live up to your status as the head of the Gant family. Your prowess in matters of the soul is truly admirable.¡±


    The old man beside him wore a proud smile. ¡°You flatter me, Mr. Charles. It¡¯s merely a matter of cooperation.¡±


    But just as Richard forcefully pulled out the cork and prepared to drink, his fingers suddenly relaxed, and the glass vial shattered on the floor, spilling its contents everywhere.


    Both men froze, staring at the dark liquid spreading across the ground.


    Hearing the commotion, Elizabeth walked in. ¡°Charles, what happened?¡±


    Richard suddenly moved, scratching the back of his head with a confused expression as he looked around. ¡°Huh? Has anyone seen my fishing rod? It was right here! I need to go fishing; if I¡¯m late, there won¡¯t be any space left.¡±


    Charles¡¯s expression twisted in disbelief as he roared in the cabin, ¡°You want me to disappear?!¡±


    Realizing that Charles had truly awakened, Richard dropped the act and lunged toward the spilled liquid on the floor.


    Before his head could reach it, a tremendous force gripped his neck, slamming his forehead into the liquid.


    ¡°Bastard! I must be blind to share my body with you! You¡¯re just a copy created by 096!¡± Charles¡¯s body began to convulse violently on the ground.


    ¡°I¡¯m Gao Zhimin, and you¡¯re Gao Zhimin too! If I can do this, can you honestly say you¡¯ve never thought about it? I can take the initiative; I just pay more attention to details when you¡¯re busy with women!¡±


    The two personalities inside the body fought for control, their combined strength twisting the body into unnatural positions.


    Elizabeth watched anxiously, wanting to help but unsure how to intervene. She turned to Finn. ¡°What¡¯s going on? What¡¯s happening to him?¡±


    As Charles¡¯s body twisted violently, his revolver slipped from its holster and fell to the ground.


    Richard picked up the revolver and pointed it at his own temple. ¡°If you move again, we¡¯re all done for!¡±


    ¡°Ha! You think I¡¯m scared of you?¡± Charles¡¯s face twisted into a sinister grin as he decisively pulled the trigger.


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The gunshot rang out, but the bullet didn¡¯t blow Charles¡¯s head apart. Instead, as it left the barrel, it entered a void-like state, only to re-materialize on the other side of Charles¡¯s head, striking the steel wall and sparking.


    This change was due to Elizabeth¡¯s intervention; her short staff glimmered faintly in her hand.


    Taking advantage of the moment when both personalities were stunned by their continued existence, Elizabeth dashed forward, kicking the gun away from Richard¡¯s grasp.


    Finn stepped in to help as well. With a wave of his hands, Charles¡¯s body floated into the air, and they suddenly felt their limbs go numb. The standoff finally ceased.


    Elizabeth cupped Charles¡¯s face in her hands, her eyes reddening as she looked at him. ¡°Why are you doing this?¡±


    Two distinct voices emanated from Charles¡¯s mouth.


    ¡°This is none of your business; just let me down.¡±


    ¡°Men¡¯s affairs are not for women to meddle in.¡±


    ¡°Smack!¡± Elizabeth¡¯s large hand gripped Charles¡¯s collar, and she slapped him hard across the face, revealing a side of her he had never seen before.


    Her white hair flared out like a lion¡¯s mane, and her remaining blue eye glared at him with fury. ¡°None of my business? What do you think your life is? Just some trash you can throw away?! Charles!!¡±


    As he met Elizabeth¡¯s gaze, Charles¡¯s twisted expression gradually returned to normal. He opened his mouth but ultimately said nothing.


    Elizabeth released her grip and walked coldly toward Finn. ¡°What¡¯s going on? You better not hide anything from me, or our cooperation is over!¡±


    Finn looked nervous, quickly explaining everything to Elizabeth.


    The new island¡¯s twenty-five percent stake was a chosen settlement for the Gant family; if the cooperation fell through, it would be a significant problem.


    Meanwhile, Richard and Charles continued their mental exchange. ¡°You madman, are you really going to commit suicide? Have you forgotten our goal? We¡¯ve overcome so many hardships. If we die by our own hands, what was the point of the last nine years?¡±


    ¡°So what? Even if it means dying, I won¡¯t let you control my body again!¡± Charles¡¯s voice dripped with hatred.


    ¡°Fine, I admit I was wrong. I betrayed even myself; I deserve to be punished. But I want to return with a complete mind. We can¡¯t go home and let our mother see her son with a missing arm, not to mention being a lunatic!¡±


    Charles retorted, ¡°Oh, so I should thank you for that.¡±


    ¡°We need to resolve this. Are we just going to waste time? Our goal is to get home, back to the surface. Can we set this aside for now?¡±


    ¡°You tried to kill me, and now you expect me to set it aside? You¡¯re something else.¡±


    ¡°Then how about this: to punish me, I¡¯ll let you have full control of the body except when I¡¯m sleeping. How does that sound? No matter what happens afterward, let¡¯s get back to the surface first.¡±


    Charles shook his head, glancing at Finn, who was quickly relaying information to Elizabeth. ¡°Have him make me a potion that can make you disappear. Then we¡¯ll call it even.¡±


    Now it was Richard¡¯s turn to protest. ¡°Why should I? If you get that and pour it down my throat while I¡¯m asleep, I¡¯d be done for!¡±


    Just as they continued to argue, Elizabeth approached with Finn, having learned what was happening with Charles.


    Gently stroking Charles¡¯s face, her expression was filled with sorrow.


    She had never known that Charles had another personality. Did she not understand him well enough?


    Seeing Elizabeth¡¯s expression, the two personalities in Charles ceased their argument.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing; just a minor issue. Don¡¯t worry too much.¡±


    ¡°Why the long face? Smile! He¡¯s right; it¡¯s just a small matter. You¡¯ve just never seen it before; we do this all the time.¡±

 **Chapter 116: Anomaly**

    ¡°Do you think I¡¯m an idiot? If I hadn¡¯t intervened, you would¡¯ve died just now. Is that a minor issue?¡± Elizabeth¡¯s words left both men speechless.


    At that moment, Finn stepped forward, saying, ¡°Mr. Charles, I think I have a solution. Perhaps we can resolve your conflict.¡±


    With both Charles and Elizabeth¡¯s eyes on him, Finn continued, ¡°I can create two potions, each capable of making one of you disappear. You just need to randomly choose one to drink. Problem solved.¡±


    ¡°Betting our lives? Why would I gamble with this guy? This body is mine!¡± Charles retorted.


    ¡°Come on, let¡¯s just take the potions and get out of this hellhole first. Maybe a psychologist outside can help us merge. That way, no one has to die.¡±


    ¡°Ha! What you¡¯re saying now is completely different from what you did earlier.¡±


    ¡°Because I¡¯m hypocritical and shameless. Is it fun to argue in front of your woman? I¡¯ll ask you one question: do we want to go back to the surface, or do we just want to keep entangled here?¡±


    Seeing the concern on Elizabeth¡¯s face, Charles suppressed his anger.


    Sensing Charles¡¯s shift, Richard quickly added, ¡°You make those potions as fast as you can.¡±


    Finn immediately complied, not caring who lived or died; he just wanted his five percent.


    As Finn began to chant an incantation, his hands moved rhythmically, and various bottles around them began to stir. Colorful liquids intertwined in the glass containers, creating a strangely beautiful sight.


    Meanwhile, Charles had regained control and dropped to the ground, his expression serious as he bent down to pick up the revolver.


    ¡°Buddy, I still feel something¡¯s off. You don¡¯t seem like the type to easily commit suicide. Why were you so impulsive just now?¡±


    ¡°Shut up!¡±


    ¡°Alright, alright, I won¡¯t say anything. You¡¯re in charge now.¡±


    With a cold expression, Charles approached Elizabeth, watching as Finn prepared the potions.


    After a few seconds of silence, he tore off the clown mask from the struggling figure nearby, swiftly drew the black blade from his boot, and wrapped it in the man¡¯s coat.


    The bronze liquid began to swirl in a circular vessel as Finn pulled out a golden page from his pocket. A white magic circle emanated from it, hovering in midair.


    This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.


    Finn¡¯s incantation deepened, and the white circle enveloped the liquid in the vessel. A piercing sound echoed as the round glass container twisted into shards like the one that had shattered earlier.


    Charles pocketed the two identical potions floating towards him without saying a word and turned to leave.


    As he descended from the crimson ship, Elizabeth followed him in silence, both of them walking forward without speaking, the atmosphere heavy.


    After a moment of hesitation, Elizabeth finally asked, ¡°Which version of you have I been interacting with?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s always been me. That other guy is just a counterfeit created by the remnants.¡±


    ¡°How can I tell you two apart?¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to. It¡¯s not your concern. If one of us survives, it will definitely be me.¡± Charles¡¯s tone was resolute, and Richard remained unusually quiet.


    They continued walking along the dimly lit dock, and just as they neared the exit, Charles asked, ¡°When are you and Finn leaving for that island?¡±


    ¡°Tomorrow. We were supposed to leave earlier, but your other personality made us stop.¡±


    ¡°If the island is established, let the refugees from Shadow Island move there.¡±


    Charles¡¯s statement caught Elizabeth off guard. Was this related to what had happened before?


    ¡°Safe travels. I¡¯m leaving.¡± Charles pushed off the wall with his feet, leaping onto the rooftop toward the Bat Inn.


    In the following days, Charles resumed his usual routine, but things had changed. Even Lily, who was oblivious to everything, sensed a shift in the atmosphere of the room.


    This betrayal had completely severed ties between the two personalities. If they had previously been annoyed with each other due to their different natures, now they were outright enemies, despite being the same person.


    Richard seemed to feel guilty and rarely emerged, truly adhering to his word to compensate for Charles¡¯s losses.


    However, Charles didn¡¯t view it that way. Now, besides wanting to return home, he added a new goal: finding a way to eliminate the other version of himself and reclaim full ownership of his body.


    Initially, Charles thought this would be a monumental issue, one he would need time to fully digest. But the arrival of something else made him push this matter aside¡ªKade had finally returned.


    The once amiable old man looked disheveled this time, deep dark circles under his eyes that even his reading glasses couldn¡¯t hide, his gaze appearing dazed and obsessive.


    Facing the nautical chart on the table, he was visibly agitated, trembling hands brushing over it before he suddenly looked up at Charles. ¡°Is it¡­ really true? The ladder to the realm of the Light God is on this island?¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s a ninety percent chance it¡¯s this island.¡±


    Upon hearing Charles¡¯s words, Kade burst into tears like a child, embracing the nautical chart tightly.


    Though Charles understood Kade¡¯s excitement, seeing him wipe his nose on the chart was somewhat disgusting.


    ¡°Alright, stop crying. We need an exploration ship to check out the supply island. Should your people go, or should I?¡±


    ¡°No, no, no! We must go together this time. The more people, the better. We¡¯ll set off from here.¡± Kade pointed emphatically at the supply island on the map.


    ¡°Are you sure? The pirates from Sodom likely get supplies from here too. Acting rashly could lead to trouble.¡±


    Kade¡¯s expression turned fierce as he pounded the chart. ¡°I don¡¯t want to either! But the Archbishop of the Western Sea has already noticed something¡¯s off here. I suspect he¡¯s already sent a ship. If he discovers what I¡¯ve done to the Coral Island base, I¡¯ll be finished!¡±


    ¡°Stop being paranoid; calm down.¡± Charles regarded Kade as if he were a madman.


    Kade lunged forward, gripping Charles¡¯s collar tightly. ¡°Do you think I¡¯ll be fine if you die? The Archbishops are always harsher on enemies than on their own! If they capture you, you won¡¯t have time to regret it!¡±

 **Chapter 117: Setting Sail**

    Kade, in a fit of anxiety, suddenly released Charles¡¯s collar and lunged back toward the nautical chart, fixating on the island marked as the Land of Light.


    ¡°The Sodom pirates have no time for us; Shadow Island has sunk, and they¡¯re busy plundering the refugees searching for a home at sea,¡± Kade explained.


    Charles felt a surge of hope at this timely information. If what Kade said was true, it presented a significant opportunity. ¡°Are you sure about this?¡±


    ¡°As a follower of the Light God, how could I lie? So, are you coming or not? If not, I¡¯ll take my people.¡±


    ¡°How many exploration ships do you have now?¡±


    ¡°With the one you reclaimed, we have three in total. But don¡¯t worry; I can sell off all the properties of the Coral Island Light Church and order all the followers to donate their assets. That should allow us to gather more ships. We¡¯ll have plenty!¡±


    Hearing Kade¡¯s reckless determination, Charles asked, ¡°Have you considered what you¡¯ll do when you come back?¡±


    Kade suddenly burst into laughter. ¡°Come back? Hahaha! Are you crazy? If I reach the Land of Light, why would I want to return?¡±


    Charles realized Kade¡¯s obsession with the surface was even more intense than his own.


    ¡°Do you want to join this voyage, or are you planning to back out now?¡± Kade¡¯s eyes bore into Charles, demanding an answer.


    ¡°I¡¯m in.¡± Charles was resolute; he had spent nine long years in this hellhole and finally reached this moment. There was no way he would back out now.


    ¡°Excellent! Truly fearless Captain Charles! Even though you¡¯re not a follower of our faith, once we reach the Land of Light, I will beseech the Light God to allow you into His kingdom!¡±


    A slight smile crept across Charles¡¯s face as he placed a reassuring hand on Kade¡¯s shoulder. ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Once we¡¯re out, I¡¯ll make sure you and your crew get the best medical care. I¡¯ll cover the expenses.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    Without explaining, Charles stomped his foot on the ground, and a brown rat scurried out from under the bed. ¡°Have Lily gather all the crew. The Unicorn Whale is setting sail again.¡±


    With Charles¡¯s agreement, Kade wasted no time, stating they would meet at the port in six hours before quickly leaving with his subordinates.


    Charles tidied up his belongings and was about to head to the dock when another thought struck him. He tore a page from his notebook and quickly wrote something down with his pen.


    Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author.


    Soon, he went downstairs and handed an envelope to the well-mannered bartender at the Bat Inn. ¡°Please give this to Anna.¡±


    ¡°Sure, Mr. Charles. How long will you be gone this time?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s hard to say. I might not come back.¡±


    The bartender was taken aback, watching the young man walk out the door.


    As the rats gathered the crew, the sailors responded quickly, assembling on the deck of the Unicorn Whale. Each face bore a hint of confusion; it was unusual to set sail so soon after returning.


    ¡°I understand your concerns about the short rest period. Rest assured, to compensate for your losses, this mission will offer double pay, and I¡¯ll distribute it in advance!¡± Charles announced.


    Nearby, the rats brought over a large chest. When Charles opened it, it was filled with stacks of green echo coins.


    He swiftly began distributing the money.


    This amount of echo coins alone was beyond Charles¡¯s savings; he had mortgaged the Bat Inn to the British Bank for part of the loan. Since they were leaving, it didn¡¯t matter if he had a place to stay anymore.


    His words transformed the crew¡¯s puzzled expressions into sheer joy. If there was anything more delightful than receiving a paycheck, it was getting double.


    ¡°This is just the beginning! I, Charles, personally guarantee that if you complete this voyage, you will receive much more than this!¡±


    His speech ignited a fervor among the sailors, who praised Charles¡¯s generosity, and their morale soared.


    The ship¡¯s doctor hobbled over, his face devoid of joy.


    ¡°Do you think I¡¯m joking? I told you to rest on shore, and you¡¯re pushing your luck? Are you trying to get yourself killed?¡±


    ¡°This truly is the last time. Please help me. If I can achieve this goal, I will comply with any treatment you suggest, and I can also unlock the secret of that thing you want.¡±


    Hearing this, the doctor¡¯s face twisted in disdain. He had given up on persuading Charles. ¡°You¡¯re going to kill yourself one day.¡±


    Charles¡¯s gaze returned to the cheering crew. ¡°Six hours! We set sail in six hours! Whether you plan to send this money to your families or squander it, make sure to finish everything in that time!¡±


    His words spurred the crew into action. Ecstatic, they rushed toward the dock, clutching their echo coins.


    The sight of the stacks of bills made the laborers¡¯ eyes turn red, but the sailors¡¯ weapons at their waists reminded them to remain calm.


    So much money was earned through others¡¯ lives; they were never truly from the same world.


    In contrast to Charles¡¯s reaction, Kade¡¯s actions caused a much bigger stir.


    The followers of the Light God on Coral Island quickly sold off all their assets, leaving even the money for breakfast behind, donating everything to the holy cause.


    In an instant, all factions began speculating about what was happening.


    But Kade didn¡¯t care about any of that; he focused on converting all resources into echo coins and hiring exploration ships.


    For this goal, he was even willing to collaborate with his former enemy, the Flatan Church.


    ¡°Good! Cash on the spot! As long as you pay, this church will be yours,¡± the Flatan Church¡¯s high priest, cloaked in red, said to Kade.


    A henchman quickly handed over a prepared check.


    ¡°Heretic, are you planning to leave Coral Island?¡± The high priest¡¯s voice was as unpleasant as ever.


    Kade looked at the Flatan Church followers with contempt, as if regarding them as fools. ¡°You pathetic creatures, repent in your lowliness. I will enjoy eternal life in the Light God¡¯s kingdom while you scum live forever in this cursed sea!¡±


    Kade eagerly accepted the check and left with his subordinates.


    Watching Kade¡¯s retreating figure, the henchman¡¯s eyes burned with hostility. ¡°High Priest, why are we making deals with this kind of person?¡±


    ¡°Why not? This church is worth half the price we usually pay. And you needn¡¯t worry; haven¡¯t you noticed? He¡¯s nearly gone mad from the voice of my lord; he¡¯s not far from death.¡±

 **Chapter 118: Discomfort**

    Soon, the time agreed upon by Charles and Kade arrived. Nearly fourteen exploration ships, large and small, crowded the dock.


    With so many vessels, it seemed the Explorers'' Association had been emptied. Most of the captains were unfamiliar to Charles, as many of the familiar faces had gone with Elizabeth to seize islands.


    The sight of so many ships piqued the curiosity of the Coral Island residents. Some crew members stood at a distance, speculating and discussing who might have discovered a new island.


    ¡°There are enough people here to take an island; exploring one should be a piece of cake. We can definitely do this!¡± Kade, standing next to Charles, appeared to be encouraging both Charles and himself.


    Looking at the ships before him, Charles posed a crucial question. ¡°First, we need to determine who will command all these ships. I don¡¯t want any disputes over control out at sea.¡±


    ¡°I hired them, so of course, I¡¯ll manage it. What¡¯s there to discuss?¡± Kade replied as if it were obvious.


    ¡°Are you sure? Can you really lead us to the Land of Light in your current state? I remember you haven¡¯t been on solid ground for a while; don¡¯t you hear anything in your ears?¡± Charles regarded Kade¡¯s haggard face with suspicion. He wasn¡¯t keen on entrusting his life to this man.


    Kade glared at Charles. ¡°What do you want to do? Are you going to command the whole fleet?¡±


    ¡°Thanks for your input; since you¡¯ve said it, I¡¯ll accept it.¡± Without waiting for Kade to change his mind, Charles began to issue commands. ¡°Deep, signal the flags! Let all the ships set sail!¡±


    With a loud horn, the Unicorn Whale moved forward, heading straight into the dark depths of the sea, under the watchful eyes of the other crew members.


    Seeing a ship in motion, the other exploration vessels instinctively believed the employer was on that ship, and the sailing order came from him, so they revved their engines to follow closely.


    In a beautifully blooming garden, Anna sat on a swing, her legs curled up, smiling as she gazed at a wrinkled piece of paper in her hands.


    ¡°I never expected Gao Zhiming to have so little romantic experience and yet be so good at charming women. It warms my heart. Oh, if only I were a real woman,¡± she mused.


    After indulging her eyes, Anna carefully folded the paper and tucked it into her bosom.


    ¡°How are the preparations coming along?¡± she asked a nearby maid.


    The maid replied respectfully, ¡°Recently, there have been many refugees in the port area from Shadow Island. A few disappear each day, but it doesn¡¯t matter. The offerings are almost sufficient, but mistress, are you really sure about this? If it causes such a commotion, the islanders will definitely suspect you. There are some formidable characters on the island.¡±


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    ¡°If I don¡¯t hold a sacrificial ceremony, won¡¯t they still suspect me? Ever since old Peter fell ill, I¡¯ve had more eyes on me. It doesn¡¯t matter; I¡¯m tired of this island anyway. I plan to explore other places. Charles is setting sail again, and I must ensure my safety.¡±


    Just as Anna stood up from the swing, she heard light footsteps swiftly approaching.


    Recognizing the sound, the stunning beauty displayed a hint of impatience but quickly adjusted her expression, smiling as she turned around. ¡°Darling, what brings you here so early today?¡±


    ¡°Sister Anna, do you have any news about Mr. Charles?¡± Margaret rushed over, her skirt held up.


    ¡°Not yet. If I do, I¡¯ll let you know.¡±


    Margaret¡¯s expression shifted from anticipation to disappointment. ¡°Why not again? Has Mr. Charles really received my letter?¡±


    ¡°Maybe your Mr. Charles is too busy to reply. Where did you go so early today?¡±


    Upon hearing Anna¡¯s question, Margaret quickly concealed her disappointment. ¡°I went to the dock area to distribute food. There are many people starving there now.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? How pitiful,¡± Anna said, placing a hand on her ample chest, feigning concern.


    ¡°Then you should come with me to distribute food! That way, fewer people will go hungry.¡±


    Anna gently shook her head. ¡°Dear, while I sympathize with them, that chaotic and dangerous place is best avoided, especially for someone like you¡­¡±


    As she spoke, Anna extended her right hand, lightly caressing the delicate collarbone of Margaret.


    ¡°So soft, so delicate, and so fragrant, even those ugly men would want to devour you,¡± Anna said, swallowing hard afterward.


    Margaret blushed and pushed Anna¡¯s finger away, her shyness evident.


    Seeing her reaction, Anna suddenly smiled mischievously and leaned in to plant a gentle kiss on her cheek.


    ¡°Sister Anna, stop making such strange jokes! I¡­ I¡¯ll come back to find you tomorrow,¡± Margaret stammered, jumping away like a startled deer.


    As Margaret left, Anna¡¯s smile gradually faded.


    Charles opened his eyes, finding himself in the pitch-black depths of the sea, unable to see anything. He struggled to swim upward but couldn¡¯t reach the surface.


    The increasingly intense feeling of suffocation made his lungs feel like two burning coals.


    Bubbles floated up in front of him, and drawn by them, he mechanically turned his head to look below.


    In an instant, a wave of despair enveloped him from his ankles to the rest of his body. Below him stood a massive creature, its body covered in octopus-like tentacles, resembling a giant peak.


    Its scales turned outward, and its body was covered in eyes, making anyone who glanced at it feel utterly uncomfortable.


    As Charles beheld the creature, it noticed him too. All its eyes snapped open, staring directly at him. In that moment, Charles¡¯s consciousness faded away.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, are you okay? Mr. Charles, do you need help? Should I call Grandpa the doctor?¡±


    Lily¡¯s tender voice pierced through the haze of pain, jolting Charles awake. He opened his eyes to find everything spinning rapidly, but he could barely discern that he was in his captain¡¯s quarters.


    He rolled off the bed and collapsed to the floor, trembling as he crawled to the ship¡¯s window, where he began to vomit uncontrollably.


    As the little food left in his stomach was expelled, the fainting sensation finally eased a bit.


    ¡°Lily, go get the doctor. I think I¡¯m sick.¡±


    ¡°Got it!¡± The white rat quickly scurried toward the door.


    Before long, the limping doctor arrived in the captain¡¯s quarters and conducted a series of rough examinations on Charles.


    ¡°How do you feel?¡±


    ¡°Dizzy, nauseous, weak, and cold.¡±


    ¡°What did you eat before?¡±


    ¡°The same food as the crew: five pieces of salted crackers, two black teng fruits, and a bowl of mushroom soup.¡±


    ¡°Did you dream about anything just now?¡±


    Charles covered his forehead with his hand, recalling for a few seconds before shaking his head. ¡°No, I didn¡¯t dream of anything.¡±

 **Chapter 119: The Mark**

    ¡°What did you find out?¡± Charles asked the doctor.


    ¡°I¡¯m not sure. At the moment, your body seems normal.¡±


    ¡°But my head still hurts.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t come to me with this trouble; you brought it upon yourself. Frequent sailing, and a headache is mild. If anything unusual happens again, notify me immediately. I can¡¯t see any problems right now. By the way, nice new tattoo.¡±


    The doctor stood up, preparing to head for the door.


    Charles shivered at the doctor¡¯s last remark. ¡°I have a tattoo? Where?¡±


    The puzzled doctor pointed to the junction of Charles¡¯s neck and collarbone. ¡°Isn¡¯t this something you just got?¡±


    Charles quickly grabbed a mirror from the drawer and, upon inspection, discovered the strange new addition on his body.


    It was black, shaped like a curled-up dead spider, but the ¡°spider¡¯s¡± legs bore spiral patterns and were somewhat twisted. It looked less like a tattoo and more like some sort of corrosive mark, feeling akin to pockmarked fine gauze.


    ¡°Are you sure you didn¡¯t get this done?¡± The doctor pulled out a small dagger and scraped at it. The black mark appeared to be part of his skin, with no color flaking off.


    ¡°Why would I get this? Could it be some kind of skin disease?¡±


    ¡°Doesn¡¯t seem like it. Is it itchy or painful?¡±


    ¡°Not really, just my head hurts a bit.¡±


    ¡°The¡­ Great One¡­ has already noticed you¡­¡±


    Both Charles and the doctor turned toward the door, where a damp figure wrapped in bandages stood, staring directly into the cabin.


    ¡°Do you recognize this thing? Why are you wet?¡± Charles, regaining some strength, sat up.


    The bandaged figure nodded silently and slowly walked in. ¡°This is¡­ the mark of the Great One. I just¡­ noticed Him looking this way¡­ I thought He was coming to take me, but He is not¡­ He is drawn to you¡­¡±


    ¡°Furtan? Why do I have His mark? Has someone cursed me?¡± Charles¡¯s face paled as he looked at the bizarre thing in the mirror.


    ¡°No¡­ this is¡­ a blessing¡­ Captain¡­ Do you also believe in the Great One?¡±


    ¡°Impossible.¡± Charles never imagined he would have any connection to such a disgusting cult.


    Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Then why¡­ do you have¡­ this blessing? In my teachings¡­ this ritual is a great¡­ honor¡­ only those who are anointed have the opportunity¡­ to receive such a blessing.¡±


    ¡°What is the use of this?¡± Charles touched the scar on his neck. If this was a blessing, it should come with some benefits, right?


    ¡°Your soul¡­ now belongs to Furtan¡­¡±


    ¡°What does that mean? Can you be more specific?¡± In response to Charles¡¯s questioning, the bandaged figure remained silent, standing still.


    Charles suddenly had a thought and reached out to pull away the bandage around the figure''s neck, discovering that he bore none of these marks.


    ¡°This blessing¡­ is precious. I do not have it¡­ but I have seen the ritual. The high priest¡­ must not only sacrifice a large part of their own body but also offer many¡­ offerings to please our God¡­¡±


    ¡°Do you know anyone from this cult? Why would someone give you this mark?¡± The doctor raised his head to take a sip of water.


    Charles shook his head. ¡°That can¡¯t be. I have no connections with them. The only interaction I had was a long time ago on a very strange island, when I found something for them¡­¡±


    At this point, Charles''s pupils constricted. He suddenly recalled the temple murals depicting the monstrous, tentacled creatures worshipping Furtan. A thought flashed in his mind: ¡°Do mindless monsters have faith too?¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Did you think of something?¡± the doctor asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing; you can leave now.¡±


    Charles¡¯s abrupt shift surprised both of them, but they said nothing and turned to leave.


    The flickering light of the oil lamp cast shadows across Charles¡¯s face as the ship swayed gently.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, what¡¯s wrong?¡± Lily jumped onto his lap, looking up at him.


    Charles remained silent, stroking Lily¡¯s fur, his gaze lost in the portrait of Anna from his journal.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, are you thinking about that monster lady?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Then why don¡¯t you go find her? Be with her?¡±


    ¡°Because I can¡¯t.¡±


    ¡°Why can¡¯t you? That lady likes you too. Why can¡¯t two people who like each other be together? Is it because she¡¯s a monster? Do you only want to be with humans?¡±


    ¡°Yes, why can¡¯t it be so?¡± Charles gently set Lily aside and lifted the bedspread, heading toward the deck.


    The cool sea breeze refreshed Charles, clearing his mind.


    ¡°Is it you? Are you still concerned about me?¡± he quietly asked the darkness ahead.


    Of course, the environment offered no reply, only the sound of waves breaking against the bow of the ship echoed back to him.


    Touching the tattoo on his neck, many images flashed through his mind, and gradually, Charles¡¯s expression grew resolute.


    ¡°Why not? Maybe it¡¯s possible. Wait for me; I¡¯ll come back for you once I find a way out!¡±


    As soon as he voiced this decision, Charles felt a weight lift off his shoulders, the troubles that had haunted him for so long dissipating.


    Lily was right; since they both cared for each other, there was no need to be entangled in doubts. His journey at sea was nearing its end, and he didn¡¯t want to leave with regrets.


    As for Anna¡¯s physical issues, Charles decided to think of a solution once he got out. Even if he couldn¡¯t find a remedy, changing her diet wouldn¡¯t be a big problem.


    Imagining a bright future, Charles¡¯s mood gradually improved, a slight smile forming on his lips, even feeling like humming a tune.


    Suddenly, a strange sound from beneath the bow made Charles quickly draw his revolver.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, it¡¯s me, the captain of the Razor Wave behind you!¡±


    A damp figure climbed up the side of the ship, a dark object clutched in his mouth. Upon closer inspection, Charles realized it was a sea turtle.


    This newcomer, just emerging from the water, sported a head of dark green hair resembling seaweed, paired with sunken features that were far from attractive.


    ¡°Hello, hello! I¡¯m Feilbaha. I introduced myself before; I¡¯m glad to join this voyage. So, you are our captain? You look quite young!¡±


    Before Charles could respond, Feilbaha pulled out a dagger and began to clean barnacles off the turtle¡¯s shell.

 **Chapter 120: Feilbaha**

    The sound of the blade scraping against the barnacle shell was grating, yet Feilbaha seemed unfazed, growing more enthusiastic with each scrape.


    ¡°Captain Charles, do you want to give it a try? It¡¯s quite exhilarating!¡± Feilbaha offered the bloodied turtle to Charles.


    ¡°No thanks. What brings you here?¡± Charles holstered his revolver. He recognized Feilbaha from the dock; he was indeed one of Kode¡¯s hired captains.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s like this: the guy from the Church of the Light told us that our mission is to find the legendary Land of Light.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Do you suspect he¡¯s deceiving you?¡±


    ¡°Ha! He really has no reason to lie. Since we¡¯ve taken the payment, we¡¯ll see this mission through, no matter how dangerous it is. Just tell us what our task really is.¡±


    Charles felt a twinge of frustration for Kode; he had been honest, yet no one believed him.


    ¡°Is this also the opinion of the other captains?¡±


    ¡°They didn¡¯t say, but I can tell they have their concerns. Since they were reluctant to ask, I stepped up to inquire for everyone.¡±


    ¡°If there are concerns, why come at all?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s because the pay is too good. Once this mission is complete, I could take a long break for several years!¡± Feilbaha replied with a serious expression.


    ¡°Our mission is to explore two islands. One of them might be a stronghold for the Sodom pirates, which could be dangerous. But don¡¯t worry, we¡¯re not there to conquer; we just need to gather enough supplies before heading to the other island. Once we reach it, your task will be complete.¡±


    Feilbaha nodded in understanding. ¡°I see. If you had told us what the employer said, we would have felt much more uncertain.¡±


    As he spoke, Feilbaha tossed the cleaned turtle into the sea, twirled the dagger in his hand, and looked at Charles with curiosity.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, I¡¯ve heard you know Governor Elizabeth. Could you introduce me to her? The lads on my ship are all quite capable; we could easily handle the island capture mission.¡±


    Charles regarded him with suspicion. It felt as though this question was his true motive, hiding behind the earlier inquiries.


    ¡°Elizabeth is gone. If I¡¯m not mistaken, her island has already been taken.¡±


    If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Upon hearing this, Feilbaha sighed and squatted on the deck. ¡°If I had known, I would have come here sooner. The edge of the archipelago offers more opportunities!¡±


    Charles glanced at his ears, noticing no signs of obsession. ¡°Aren¡¯t you an explorer from Coral Island?¡±


    ¡°Exactly! I was originally an explorer from the Island of the Law Ring, but that island is too old. The nearby islands have all been explored, and the remaining ones are far too dangerous. Venturing there to find a living island is tantamount to suicide, so I came to the farthest Coral Island in the Northern Sea to try my luck.¡±


    Feilbaha seemed quite talkative, spilling out information even without Charles asking.


    ¡°Why not just go back to live on the island if there are no islands left to explore? Why are you so focused on exploring?¡± Charles leaned against the ship¡¯s railing, gazing into the distant darkness.


    Feilbaha chuckled. ¡°Then why did you become an explorer, Charles?¡±


    Charles narrowed his eyes slightly, remaining silent. A few years ago, he might have eagerly shared his aspirations, but now, nearing home, he didn¡¯t want to discuss it anymore, especially since no one would believe him.


    Noticing Charles¡¯s silence, Feilbaha continued, ¡°I share your dream; I aspire to become a governor of an entire island one day. Why should others succeed while I cannot? I will succeed! I want those who look down on me to see that I, Feilbaha Claude, will rise above!¡±


    By the end, Feilbaha clenched his fist, his tone resolute.


    Seeing his enthusiasm, Charles asked, ¡°How many islands have you explored?¡±


    At this question, a hint of embarrassment crossed Feilbaha¡¯s face. ¡°Only one.¡±


    Sensing the awkward atmosphere, Feilbaha quickly changed the subject. ¡°Mr. Charles, although this is our first meeting, I¡¯ve heard about you from the Explorers¡¯ Association. They say you¡¯re a madman, but you don¡¯t seem like one.¡±


    ¡°What do they say? Reckless? Shouldn¡¯t an explorer be fearless?¡±


    ¡°Not quite. They say your recklessness feels more like you¡¯re deliberately courting death. They¡¯ve never seen an explorer so driven. By the way, Mr. Charles, there are rumors that Governor Elizabeth¡¯s island was a gift from you. Is that true?¡±


    Charles frowned at the man beside him, sensing a persistent motive to connect him with Elizabeth. What was his aim?


    With no fondness for those with ulterior motives, Charles offered a few vague replies and turned to head back to the cabin.


    With a smile, Feilbaha scratched his deep green hair, stood on the empty deck for a moment, then waved to Krona, who was steering in the cockpit, before jumping straight into the sea.


    Time passed, and the fleet gradually entered unexplored waters. Compared to the usual lonely crew of just a dozen, this time they were much more numerous. The lively atmosphere dispelled much of the oppressive fear that often lingered at sea, even the newly joined crew felt no hint of fear.


    However, the sea was always unforgiving. Soon, subtle changes in the water made the previously jovial crew tense up.


    The sea began to flow in a rhythmic pattern, as if something beneath the ocean was dragging them forward.


    ¡°Notify the other ships to follow the Unicorn and leave this area quickly. Something feels off about this sea,¡± Charles instructed the first mate beside him.


    A rhythmic horn sounded, and soon all the ships began to accelerate, following the Unicorn.


    Things didn¡¯t worsen; they managed to escape that area as if what had just happened was not dangerous at all.


    After carefully examining the nautical charts, Charles began to turn the helm, aiming to navigate around and avoid unnecessary trouble.


    Just as he was making a wide turn, his keen eyesight caught sight of something approaching the surface. Was that¡­ a fin?

 **Chapter 121: Not a Fish Fin**

    ¡°Captain, is that a shark?¡± Dipp, curious, leaned halfway out of the doorway, straining to see the illuminated surface of the sea.


    Estimating the distance, Charles judged that the fin was nearly two meters long. He couldn¡¯t discern the size of the creature beneath the water due to its concealment.


    ¡°Just keep an eye on it. If nothing seems off, ignore it,¡± Charles tightened his grip on the helm. If it was merely a giant man-eating shark, it wouldn¡¯t be too frightening; after all, natural creatures were far less daunting than other things lurking in the sea.


    Just as Charles thought they would pass by without incident, more fins emerged from the water, gathering together like a flock of sheep swimming towards the ship.


    As they approached, the sheer number of fins began to unsettle the crew standing on the iron ship. The fins circled around the vessel, and the towering ship''s edge blocked Charles¡¯s view.


    ¡°Dipp, come take the helm,¡± Charles quickly moved to the edge of the ship to get a better look.


    The fins didn¡¯t swim past; instead, they began to encircle the ship.


    It wasn¡¯t just the Unicorn; glancing to the left at another exploration ship, Charles noticed fins swirling around it as well.


    ¡°Why are the sharks swimming in packs? Shouldn¡¯t it be dolphins that follow the ship?¡± Richard¡¯s voice unexpectedly echoed in his mind.


    Nothing was more unsettling than a thought of something wanting to kill him lurking in his head.


    ¡°Get out of my head! You promised!¡± Charles roared, startling Dipp, who was nervously at the helm.


    ¡°T-That¡¯s not what I meant! Captain, what¡¯s going on?¡± Dipp stammered.


    With the voice in his head now silent, Charles grimaced at Dipp. ¡°Tell the engineer to crank the turbines to maximum. We¡¯re breaking free; we don¡¯t have time to play with whatever these things are.¡±


    Thick black smoke billowed from the Unicorn¡¯s smokestack as its speed surged, the sea breeze causing Charles¡¯s sleeves to flutter.


    The fins seemed eager to keep up, but they couldn¡¯t match the Unicorn¡¯s speed. The steel hull crashed into them.


    The ear-piercing screech of nails on a chalkboard echoed from beneath the water, causing everyone on the ship to instinctively cover their ears.


    This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Rather than a gruesome scene of flesh being crushed, the Unicorn jolted violently.


    Despite the chaotic moment, Charles¡¯s objective was achieved; the Unicorn finally broke through the ring of fins.


    ¡°What the hell! How can the fins be this tough? What on earth are we dealing with?¡±


    Charles rushed to the stern, looking back at the pursuing fins. As he spotted glimmers of silver metal attached to them, a horrifying realization struck him.


    Meanwhile, the fins surrounding another exploration ship began to rise, revealing a massive dark body beneath.


    A pure black mass covered in barnacles connected rows of fins. As the flesh quivered, the fins moved in unison.


    Charles¡¯s mind raced. Those weren¡¯t fins; they were teeth of some sea monster!


    The waves parted as a gaping maw, larger than an exploration ship, emerged before him.


    ¡°Clang!¡± The massive teeth snapped shut, embedding themselves into the ship¡¯s hull, the monstrous mouth preparing to drag the steel vessel into the dark depths.


    ¡°Damn it! They¡¯re trying to swallow that ship!¡±


    Charles dashed back to the cockpit, steering the Unicorn towards the other vessel.


    ¡°Lily, prepare the cannon! Fire at whatever¡¯s in the water!¡±


    ¡°Got it! I¡¯m on it!¡±


    With a swift command, the crew began firing cannonballs at the monstrous mouth, which was now fully exposed.


    As the cannonballs struck, dark purple blood quickly spread through the water.


    Despite facing a meal, the creature seemed reluctant to give up, pulling the ship with all its might. But Lily¡¯s cannon fire left it with no chance to relent.


    Explosions tore through the beast¡¯s flesh, and soon its massive, gaping mouth lay limp on the water¡¯s surface.


    Charles blasted the horn, signaling the freed ship to follow him, aiming to rescue more vessels. The orange-hulled exploration ship quickly complied.


    With the rescued vessel in tow, Charles continued to assist other captains, more ships gathering alongside him.


    Of course, not every ship required his help; those daring enough to explore islands had their own skills.


    Several exploration ships managed to kill the monstrous mouth by various means, including Feilbaha¡¯s Razor Wave.


    In total, seventeen ships successfully escaped the blood-stained black-purple waters and continued their journey.


    The crew on board cheered, relieved to have survived such a perilous encounter.


    While the crew celebrated, the captains were more contemplative. They hadn¡¯t expected to encounter such a significant threat before even reaching their destination.


    Although no ships sank, some suffered severe damage from the creature¡¯s assault, losing considerable cargo in the process.


    Charles gazed at the distant vessels, pondering for a moment before turning to the vampire sailor beside him. ¡°Audric, go inform the other captains to gather on my ship. I need to assess their losses.¡±


    The vampire sailor nodded, unfurling his cloak and leaping off the ship, transforming into a bat as he flew away.


    One by one, exploration ships drew near, and captains of various appearances entered Charles¡¯s captain¡¯s chamber.


    As they settled onto the prepared benches, the captain¡¯s room felt somewhat cramped.


    Charles wasn¡¯t just idly seeking conversation; the resources of others at sea significantly impacted his own.


    In the harsh reality of the ocean, when supplies ran low, turning against fellow sailors was often a necessary choice for survival.


    If they could do that to their comrades, it was even more likely they¡¯d turn on a temporary fleet like theirs.


    ¡°Let¡¯s start with you, kid. What were your losses in freshwater and fuel?¡± Charles pointed with his pen at the largest and most intimidating captain among them.


    ¡°Charles, be polite! I¡¯m twice your age!¡±

 **Chapter 122: Command Authority**

    The speaker, a burly man with a golden hook for a hand and a scowl on his face, stood up.


    ¡°Bang!¡± Charles slammed his prosthetic hand on the table, his eyes filled with provocation as he glared at the man. ¡°I don¡¯t like talking to people who are standing. Please sit down.¡±


    The man¡¯s eyes widened, and his mustache quivered as the atmosphere in the cabin grew tense. Yet, Charles showed no signs of backing down, maintaining his confrontational gaze. This was intentional; he needed to assert his control over the fleet.


    On paper, Charles was the commander of the fleet, but the other captains still viewed him merely as an employer. He didn¡¯t want to be their employer; he aimed to lead the entire fleet. An employer could easily be abandoned in times of crisis, but if he became their true leader, those captains would be his real allies. Otherwise, he would rather not have them at all.


    It was like choosing a lion king; humans, too, are animals, and some of their instincts are not so different from those of other creatures. Perhaps in other contexts, this would be handled more delicately, but at sea, things were often blunt.


    Beside him, the weary-looking Kode understood Charles¡¯s intentions. As an ally, he didn¡¯t want to undermine Charles at this critical moment.


    ¡°You don¡¯t like standing while talking? Well, I despise sitting down to talk with others!¡± The man with the hook stepped closer, looking down at Charles. ¡°Charles, right? I¡¯ve heard of you. You¡¯ve explored quite a few islands, but as a senior, I¡¯d like to remind you that my previous acceptance of your command was simply out of laziness. After all, the employer¡¯s word is law. But if you think¡ª¡±


    As he spoke dismissively, he noticed the strange black tattoo peeking out from Charles¡¯s collar. His expression shifted instantly, as if he had seen something terrifying. He abruptly sat back down in his chair, visibly shaken.


    ¡°Report... Captain Charles, the freshwater tends to spoil easily. My ship is stocked with mushroom wine, and I have one tank of water. Those creatures didn¡¯t cause any losses to my ship. As for the crew¡­¡±


    Listening to the hook-handed captain¡¯s report, not only were the other captains surprised, but Kode was equally astonished. They had all expected a confrontation, yet this man had backed down so quickly.


    As Charles jotted down the information, he was unsure why the man suddenly yielded, but his goal had been achieved.


    After recording the details, Charles turned to a gloomy-looking young man beside him. ¡°You¡¯re next. Speak up.¡±


    Faced with Charles¡¯s intense gaze, the young man instinctively looked away, reporting in a soft voice.


    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    With the initial aggressor subdued, the rest of the proceedings went much smoother. Charles noted the various data from the sixteen ships aside from the Unicorn.


    ¡°Amig, you have the most freshwater. Allocate some to Monzi; he¡¯s lost a bit.¡±


    Although the captain singled out looked displeased, he nodded in agreement.


    ¡°Good. That¡¯ll be all. Everyone, return to your vessels and stay vigilant. I hope to see all of you return alive.¡±


    As the captains departed, Feilbaha lingered, a smile on his face. ¡°Mr. Charles, don¡¯t worry. If anything unusual happens, I¡¯ll be the first to report it to you.¡±


    Charles glanced at the green-haired man. ¡°Are you close with them? How would you know immediately if something¡¯s off?¡±


    ¡°Ha ha, I like making friends. My father always said that having one more friend means one less enemy. I¡¯ve gotten quite familiar with them during this time, but rest assured, I¡¯m on your side,¡± Feilbaha explained casually.


    Charles met his gaze steadily. ¡°Are you really just here to explore an island? You seem quite capable. If I remember correctly, your ship managed to rescue itself during that last crisis.¡±


    ¡°Ha ha ha, just luck, just luck! By the way, Mr. Charles, when I swam over just now, I noticed your ship¡¯s hull has some damage. I happen to have a skilled shipwright among my crew. Would you like¡ª¡±


    ¡°No, that¡¯s a minor issue. My crew can handle it themselves,¡± Charles replied curtly.


    Sensing Charles¡¯s wariness, Feilbaha fell silent, bowing with a smile before walking away.


    This matter quickly passed, and the fleet continued its journey, but some changes were noticed within the group.


    Since that incident, the previously scattered ships began to line up behind the Unicorn in formation.


    Moreover, a rumor began circulating among the ships: Captain Charles was a significant figure in the Cult of Vurtan.


    The alliance between the Cult of Light and the Cult of Vurtan had formed this fleet, and if they didn¡¯t want to be sacrificed, they should obediently follow orders.


    Charles paid little attention to these beneficial rumors; his focus remained on Feilbaha. The man was overly enthusiastic, frequently visiting Charles¡¯s ship, providing various intelligence from the other vessels.


    One morning, a note was delivered to Charles¡¯s desk, stating that a sea monster had climbed aboard Kode¡¯s ship the previous day. Although they managed to handle it in time, a follower of the Cult of Light lost an arm.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, does he like you? Why does he write to you every day?¡± Lily asked, clutching a piece of broken biscuit with her tiny paws.


    Pausing his writing, Charles looked at his gunner oddly. ¡°Why would you think that? Where did you learn such a thing?¡±


    ¡°I secretly watched a play at the theater, and that¡¯s how they acted,¡± she replied.


    Charles flicked her on the head gently. ¡°Go eat your biscuits in the mess hall; don¡¯t scatter crumbs everywhere.¡±


    He didn¡¯t believe Feilbaha was so trivial; the man likely had other motives. However, for now, he seemed unlikely to jeopardize his own interests.


    ¡°I don¡¯t eat biscuits; I just use them to grind my teeth, or else they¡¯ll grow long,¡± Lily said, opening her mouth to show her tiny, white teeth.


    Ignoring her antics, Charles pulled out the nautical chart and began calculating the remaining journey to their supply island.


    As they drew closer to their destination, it would be a lie to say he wasn¡¯t anxious, but he couldn¡¯t show that anxiety. If he panicked, the crew would only become more unsettled.


    Charles¡¯s thumb and forefinger traced the chart, marking their position in relation to the land of light ahead. His gaze hardened with determination.

 **Chapter 123: Kevin**

    **April 2, Year 9 of the Journey**


    Today marks the twenty-ninth day at sea. We are getting closer to the supply island, and aside from the recent fin incident, no major crises have occurred.


    As the journey progresses, I find myself sleepless, as expected. The doctor¡¯s medication can help me lie down, but it doesn¡¯t solve the problem of my dreams.


    These dreams are not ordinary nightmares; they are beautiful dreams. I dream of returning to the surface, back to that place of light, where I find my family. They embrace me joyfully, believing I had long since perished.


    I lounge on the sofa, eating various fruits from the surface, sharing strange tales of the ocean with them. Anna is beside me, and Elizabeth is there too, having come out with me.


    ¡°Knock, knock, knock.¡± Someone is rapping on the door of the captain¡¯s quarters.


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°I¡­ found¡­ something¡­ you¡­ should see¡­¡± A slow, muffled voice comes from outside.


    Charles doesn¡¯t rush out, quickly finishing his writing with a steel pen.


    ¡°My first mate seems to have something to discuss; I hope it¡¯s good news.¡±


    He closes the diary and walks over to open the door.


    ¡°Speak as we walk. What did you find? Is there any danger?¡± Charles asks, pulling his mate toward the deck.


    ¡°A ship¡­ a very strange ship¡­¡±


    Upon reaching the deck, Charles sees the ship his mate mentioned¡ªa dilapidated iron vessel drifting toward them.


    The absence of gunports on the fore and aft decks indicates it is neither an exploration ship nor a warship.


    With his keen eyesight, Charles vaguely spots fishing nets on the deck. ¡°Who would be bold enough to fish in unexplored waters?¡±


    Typically, fishing vessels operate only in well-explored safe areas. Fishing in unexplored regions is strictly forbidden; otherwise, it¡¯s hard to tell who¡¯s hunting whom.


    ¡°Captain, why don¡¯t we just ignore it and keep going? What if it¡¯s a ghost ship?¡± the second mate advises.


    ¡°Not necessarily. We¡¯re already close to the supply island; this ship might belong to the island¡¯s fishermen. Odric, fly over and take a look.¡±


    If this ship belongs to the supply island, they might gain some valuable information instead of blindly charging ahead.


    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    The vampire transforms into a bat and flies toward the small fishing boat, circling it quickly before returning.


    ¡°Captain, there¡¯s a living person on that ship.¡±


    ¡°A living person? Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes, quite certain. I¡¯m a vampire; I can¡¯t mistake my food.¡±


    ¡°Bring the ship closer and alert the other exploration vessels to be on guard.¡±


    Soon, the Unicorn approaches the small fishing boat. The deck is cluttered with tangled fishing nets and ropes, and a thick layer of rust on the winch indicates it hasn¡¯t been maintained by sailors for a long time.


    However, from the outside, it looks like an ordinary human fishing boat¡ªone that many might frequent the Coral Island docks.


    ¡°Where¡¯s the living person you mentioned?¡±


    ¡°In the cabin. Just now, I used sonar to detect him peeking at me from behind the door.¡±


    Charles leads the crew directly toward the cabin door.


    With a swift kick, he bursts the door open and sees a trembling figure scrambling toward the distant exit.


    ¡°Bang!¡± A gunshot rings out, and the man collapses.


    Deep and the sailors rush in, capturing the disheveled middle-aged man, gaunt and dirty, appearing to be in his forties.


    ¡°Don¡¯t kill me! I didn¡¯t kill them! It was the other slaves! It¡¯s not my fault!¡±


    He shields his eyes from the flashlight, desperately denying any wrongdoing.


    ¡°Clear things up. Who are you?¡±


    Hearing the deep voice, Kevin Carr slowly lowers his hands. When he sees the crowd¡¯s attire, he trembles even more, tears streaming down his face as he lets out a low, echoing cry, like a sound reverberating in a valley.


    ¡°Wuwu~ You¡¯re not pirates! You¡¯re not those pirates! I can go home! I can go home!¡±


    ¡°Stop crying for now. Who are you? Where did this ship come from?¡±


    Upon hearing the question from the youth with peculiar black pupils, Kevin wipes his nose and stands still, his nerves at their peak as he stutters, ¡°You can take me home, right? I used to be a very wealthy jeweler. I had a big house; if you take me back, that house will be yours.¡±


    ¡°First, answer my question. What¡¯s your role on this ship, and where did it come from?¡±


    Recalling his experiences on the ship, Kevin¡¯s sorrow overwhelms him. He fights back tears and begins to explain.


    ¡°I was a slave on this fishing boat. The pirates beat me every day, making me work 18 hours or even 40 hours without rest. I¡¯m so tired, so tired.¡±


    As he recounts his tale, Deep moves forward to give him a lesson, but Charles stops him. ¡°Let him speak.¡±


    In the dimly lit room, everyone listens to the slave share his tragic story.


    ¡°Do you know? The ropes at sea soak up saltwater, swelling to the size of a wrist and stretching hundreds of meters long. To prevent them from tangling, we have to manually coil these hundreds of meters of rope onto the winch, using our hands to haul in the fish.¡±


    ¡°Many people became dizzy and fell overboard, disappearing into the sea.¡±


    ¡°Enduring fatigue and danger is one thing; they also joked about slapping my face and kicked me for no reason. They kicked me on the ground, specifically targeting my head, making the voices in my head grow louder. They didn¡¯t treat us like humans; they treated us like livestock!¡±


    ¡°Later, a group of slaves couldn¡¯t take it anymore and started to resist, but the pirates had firearms while we only had squid knives. Many died¡ªreally, many died. I was the only one left.¡±


    As he speaks, Kevin breaks down again, collapsing on the ground, appearing utterly helpless.


    ¡°Were they pirates from Sodom?¡± Charles asks, his brow furrowing.


    Once, the Foundation tormented them; now they are tormenting others. When will this cycle end?


    Kevin nods vigorously. ¡°Yes, that¡¯s them. They send unsellable slaves to Water Heaven Island to make us catch fish. Captain, you can definitely take me home, right?¡±


    ¡°Where do you live? As long as you tell me all the information you know, I can take you back.¡±


    ¡°No problem! Ask away, and I¡¯ll tell you everything. My home is on Shadow Island.¡±

 **Chapter 124: Water Heaven Island**

    "Water Heaven Island, that''s the name of the supply island," Charles said, studying the crude map of the island drawn by Kevin.


    Due to his status as a slave, Kevin had been kept in a cage on Water Heaven Island and hadn¡¯t gathered much information. However, any information was better than being completely in the dark.


    He now knew that this island, only half the size of Coral Island, had been entirely occupied by pirates. Its overall shape resembled a crab, with the pirates'' dock located between its two claws. The island was named Water Heaven because fresh water flowed down from the sky above.


    There were many pirates, and Kevin had seen thousands of them during his transport to the cage. They were not ordinary civilians but specialized ship robbers, each one a formidable fighter. Charles didn¡¯t believe for a second that there weren¡¯t any among them stronger than himself.


    This would be a hard battle. Yet, despite the looming crisis, Charles felt a calmness within that surprised him. At least the enemies on this island were fellow humans, and even the strongest adversaries were preferable to the unpredictable dangers of unknown islands. There was the potential for communication.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The first mate walked in without knocking again, scratching his neck awkwardly. ¡°Captain, the slave suddenly committed suicide¡­¡±


    ¡°What?! Didn¡¯t I tell you not to let him know about Shadow Island¡¯s sinking?¡±


    Deep looked aggrieved. ¡°How was I supposed to know who let it slip? If I find out who it was, I¡¯ll make them scrub toilets for a month!¡±


    Charles sighed helplessly. ¡°Let the doctor see if he can be saved.¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s definitely beyond saving; his brains are splattered everywhere. He suddenly grabbed a large caliber flintlock from Carrey and shot himself in the head. It happened too fast; he was clearly intent on dying,¡± Deep shrugged.


    ¡°In that case, let the sailors hold a simple funeral for him and send his body to sea,¡± Charles waved his hand, signaling Deep to leave.


    Charles didn¡¯t feel particularly sad about Kevin¡¯s death, having just met him, but there was a tinge of regret. Especially when he thought about how excited Kevin had been to talk about reuniting with his children after so many years.


    This was Kevin¡¯s choice, and Charles had no right to say anything more. Clearing his thoughts, he looked at the crude map before him.


    Although the island was dangerous, Charles also saw opportunities. After all, he didn¡¯t aim to conquer the island but merely to find enough fresh water and fuel.


    Food was indeed scarce, but it wasn¡¯t essential; as exploration ships, they could handle most things from the sea, and they could catch fish. Even if they suffered from scurvy due to vitamin deficiency, they could manage for a short while, as long as they reached the Land of Light.


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Fresh water and fuel seemed simple to find but were challenging to locate. The quantity needed for seventeen ships was no small amount. Charging blindly to the dock at Water Heaven Island was out of the question; they needed to find the storage locations for fresh water and fuel.


    Looking at the rudimentary map, Charles felt a headache coming on. It would be difficult to locate anything based on this map.


    ¡°It seems we need to send someone to infiltrate the island for intelligence¡­¡± Charles muttered to himself.


    Half an hour later, the captains gathered again on the Unicorn to hear Charles outline his further plans.


    ¡°The situation is as follows: we need to form a small team to enter the so-called Water Heaven Island and find fresh water and fuel. Do any of your crew members have recommendations for this mission?¡±


    ¡°I! I¡¯ll join!¡± Fairbach was the first to step forward, as expected.


    ¡°I¡¯m a great swimmer and can perform some water manipulation tricks. If you take me, I can help everyone sneak into the island from underwater.¡±


    Though Charles was unsure why Fairbach was so eager, he accepted him into the team.


    ¡°Alright, you¡¯re in. Who else wants to join?¡±


    ¡°I have a sharpshooter among my crew who never misses. Need him?¡±


    ¡°I can join as well. My abilities are hard to describe, but in terms of battleship classification, I¡¯m a fourth-tier.¡±


    ¡°My woman can charm others and extract information from the pirates.¡±


    The captains were eager to volunteer, knowing that everyone¡¯s lives were at stake. Having their own people involved gave them a sense of security.


    Quickly, Charles finalized the infiltration team: himself, Lily, a follower of the Light with a relic that granted temporary invisibility, a woman capable of charming others, and Fairbach.


    Since it was merely for intelligence gathering, the fewer people, the better. Each of their abilities would be useful for the mission.


    They certainly couldn¡¯t just sail all seventeen ships directly to the island.


    As a lighthouse beam swept overhead, Charles ordered the selected members to board a small wooden boat.


    ¡°According to plan, I¡¯ll return in a day. Keep an eye on things here.¡±


    ¡°Go ahead; I¡¯ll hold down the fort here,¡± Kade said seriously, looking at Charles on the deck.


    At that moment, their alliance felt more solid than ever.


    As the wooden boat carrying four people and a bunch of rats was lowered into the water, Richard, the follower of the Light, expertly operated a gear-filled machine at the back of the boat.


    The bow of the wooden boat tilted slightly upward, and the rapidly spinning propeller propelled them toward the lighthouse.


    Charles wore a grave expression, while Fairbach seemed entirely unfazed, grinning as he leaned closer.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, may I ask a question? Which island are you from? Is it from the Northern Sea region?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re probing for, but now is not the time!¡± Charles snapped.


    Fairbach chuckled awkwardly and turned to the woman in black leather nearby. ¡°Oh, you¡¯re quite lovely. If possible, I¡¯d like to wake up next to you.¡±


    Charles ignored them, his eyes fixed on the distant, hazy lighthouse.


    As they drew closer, a shadowy island emerged before them, with sporadic boats coming in and out of the dock.


    Apart from the scattered lights on the island, what caught Charles¡¯s attention were the white lines cascading down from above¡ªfresh water flowing from the sky.


    ¡°Look at the volume of water; there must be a large lake up there,¡± Richard piped up again.


    Just as Charles was about to respond impatiently, a blinding beam of light suddenly swept toward them¡ªthat was the searchlight from another ship!

 **Chapter 125: Fresh Water and Fuel**

    ¡°Get down! Cover with the canvas!¡± With Charles''s command, the dark green canvas matching the sea completely covered the boat, and they huddled behind it, remaining still.


    The bright searchlight swept overhead but did not detect anything unusual before moving on to other areas.


    Letting out a sigh of relief, Charles lifted the canvas and caught a glimpse of the ship wielding the searchlight. It was a heavily armed warship, equipped with decks at both the front and back, and cannon ports along its sides. It moved quickly and silently; had it discovered them just now, their mission would have been a total failure.


    The propeller whirred to life, pushing the small boat slowly toward the island''s edge. They were illuminated by searchlights from other ships a few times, but thanks to their prepared canvas and the boat''s compact size, they went undetected.


    As they approached the island, the appearance of Water Heaven Island slowly revealed itself.


    If one were to describe Water Heaven Island in terms of geography, it would be hilly terrain. Apart from the dark rocks that formed low hills, rising no more than a hundred meters, there were no plants on the slopes. The island''s crab-like shape, viewed from above, resembled a crab carrying several low peaks on its back.


    Multiple waterfalls cascaded down, continuously washing over the crab''s back, while several small rivers meandered between the hills.


    Instead of heading directly to the dock situated between the crab''s claws, they quietly docked on the left side of the crab, where there were no signs of life.


    ¡°Hide the boat well; the dock is just ahead. We¡¯ll walk slowly to avoid being detected,¡± Charles instructed his companions upon reaching the shore.


    ¡°No problem, you¡¯re the captain; you call the shots,¡± Fairbach responded eagerly, as always.


    Charles led them along the rocky shoreline, and soon a small river appeared before them, a tributary flowing from the distant waterfall.


    Charles crouched down, dipped his hand into the water, and sniffed it. There was no odor. After letting Lily¡¯s rat taste it, they confirmed that it was indeed fresh water.


    Not only was it fresh water, but it was also of excellent quality; the river was crystal clear.


    Fairbach excitedly leaped into the river and floated on his back. ¡°Captain Charles, this is easy! Our fresh water problem is solved. I¡¯ve never seen so much fresh water before!¡±


    Charles looked up at the waterfall above. Even with his excellent vision and night vision ability, he couldn¡¯t see where the water was coming from.


    ¡°It could be a large lake or underground water, but considering the size of the space below, underground water seems more plausible,¡± Richard chimed in again.


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°Get lost!¡±


    ¡°Come on, buddy, it¡¯s been a while, and you¡¯re still not over it? Holding a grudge won¡¯t do you any good. I wanted to kill you, but don¡¯t you want to kill me now? We¡¯re even, right?¡± Richard¡¯s voice was laced with nonchalance.


    Charles didn¡¯t want to argue with him now; he frowned and continued walking with his crew.


    After crossing the freshwater river and walking for another hour, Charles finally approached the center of Water Heaven Island.


    Unlike Coral Island, where the center was located in the middle of the island, the pirates on Water Heaven Island were mostly clustered along the crowded seaside.


    Opposite the claw-shaped water pools was a densely packed hillside city, with flickering lights illuminating the entire ridge. From below, it resembled a tiered coastal city.


    At the base of the hillside city was the dock of Water Heaven Island, which wasn¡¯t particularly special. The pirates clearly used local materials; the buildings in the hillside city and dock were made of various black rocks, giving everything an exotic flair.


    However, no matter how unique the architectural style, it couldn¡¯t change the fact that they were a group of ruthless pirates.


    On the bustling streets of the dock, rows of ragged slaves were tied with ropes, being led around like cattle. Various banned items and firearms were openly sold on the ground.


    ¡°Don¡¯t let their rough appearances fool you; the city is well-planned. Look at these streetlights, how bright they are! And the streets are so clean, not a single crazy beggar in sight! Look at those diligent prostitutes, they even had time to get dressed before coming to work!¡±


    Ignoring Richard¡¯s ramblings, Charles led the others along the dock¡¯s streets.


    As they moved closer to the dock, they became less conspicuous. The fierce-looking pirates paid little attention to Charles and his companions, only glancing at Lily¡¯s group of rats.


    Most of the fuel sales on other islands were handled by customs, but there seemed to be no such organization among the gathered pirates.


    ¡°It¡¯s your turn; ask them where they get their fuel,¡± Charles instructed the beautiful woman named Lainis beside him.


    Lainis tossed her gray-white hair and smiled alluringly. ¡°No problem. There¡¯s no man I can¡¯t get information from.¡±


    She glanced around, swayed her slim waist, and approached a drunken pirate.


    After a brief conversation, the tipsy pirate was soon led away by Lainis into a nearby alley.


    Before long, Lainis emerged with a triumphant expression. ¡°Follow me.¡±


    Navigating through the bustling street, Charles and the others soon arrived at the side of a three-story black building that towered above the surrounding structures.


    Feigning interest in the view of the dock, Lainis whispered to Charles, ¡°That guy said the fuel business at the dock is controlled by the ¡®King.¡¯ If you want to buy fuel, you can only get it from here.¡±


    ¡°Mission accomplished easily; we can head back now,¡± Fairbach said, looking pleased.


    Charles shook his head, glancing at the several gun emplacements on the ¡°claws¡± nearby.


    ¡°No, trying to steal fuel from here would be suicide.¡±


    Not to mention the gun emplacements, even the dozens of warships docked there would prevent them from entering or exiting.


    ¡°What should we do then?¡±


    ¡°They probably don¡¯t conduct transactions here. Richard, go in and find out where they store the fuel, and check the security there.¡±


    The follower of the Light, wearing a black hood, silently nodded. He held a tuning fork-like object to the white triangle on his forehead, and within seconds, his body became transparent and vanished.


    Charles rhythmically tapped his fingers on the rough wall, patiently waiting for Richard¡¯s report.


    Since fuel was at the dock, this barren island must have a fuel production line; so many ships couldn¡¯t rely solely on imports.


    If they couldn¡¯t acquire finished fuel, perhaps they could consider half-finished products, as long as it could burn.


    ¡°Bang! Bang!¡± The sound of gunfire disrupted Charles''s thoughts, causing everyone on the street to turn their attention toward the black building.

 **Chapter 126: Tuba**

    A commotion erupted as a group of tall, muscular pirates in black-and-white striped shirts dragged a bloodied Richard out from within. Charles, his expression darkening, slammed his fist against the rocky wall. His man had been discovered.


    ¡°What do we do? Should we go rescue him?¡± Fairbach asked, looking to Charles for guidance.


    Before Charles could decide, Richard, looking like a corpse, suddenly threw his head back and screamed in a hoarse voice, ¡°Run! It¡¯s a trap! They found us!¡±


    At the sound of his voice, Charles¡¯s body tensed, and his eyes darted around the crowd.


    ¡°There are two on the left. How about you?¡± Richard¡¯s voice came quickly.


    ¡°Run!¡± Charles propelled himself forward, sprinting away from the crowd, with the others quickly following.


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!¡± Gunfire erupted around them.


    With bullets flying, Charles and his crew made a hasty retreat.


    ¡°Clang!¡± A bullet struck Charles¡¯s prosthetic arm, sparking as it ricocheted off.


    Charles spun around, his left hand flipping the revolver, firing at the pirates with deadly accuracy. Blood sprayed from their foreheads, and the pirates¡¯ assault momentarily halted.


    However, this did not resolve the situation. Charles''s actions alerted other pirates on the street, who were not deterred by the gunfire. Snarling, they pulled out various weapons and began attacking, making Charles and his crew''s predicament even more dire.


    ¡°Clang! Clang!¡± Charles¡¯s grappling hook shot through a nearby rooftop, catching onto the rocky wall of the hillside city. ¡°Pull me!¡±


    He quickly reeled in the grappling hook, dragging everyone forward at speed.


    They found themselves in a narrow street, and despite the surprised looks from those around them, Charles led the two others into a series of tight alleys, hoping to shake off their pursuers.


    But for some reason, the pirates seemed to track them effortlessly, sticking closely to their tails, no matter how hard Charles tried to lose them. Their pursuers multiplied, including some who looked particularly formidable.


    ¡°Crack!¡± Suddenly, several spiked rocks jutted out from the side, shooting toward them.


    Charles twisted his body like a snake, dodging the long spikes.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    But Lainis wasn¡¯t so lucky; a sharp stone pierced her alluring body, and in her final moments, disbelief filled her seductive eyes.


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles¡¯s face darkened. He couldn¡¯t afford to mourn his fallen companion now; he pushed on.


    However, ahead, more pirates wielding weapons awaited them in the alley.


    They were surrounded! Just then, a filthy old man burst out from a small stone hut nearby. ¡°Fairbach! Get in here!¡±


    Recognizing the name of the green-haired youth, Charles didn¡¯t hesitate and rushed inside.


    The room was nearly a garbage dump, with layers of filthy, greasy debris scattered across the floor.


    Charles had expected an escape route, but the old man simply handed him several yellowing paper crosses, his filthy fingers trembling as he offered them.


    ¡°Take these, one for each of you. Stick them on your faces like this. Hurry, once you do, they won¡¯t see you!¡±


    The old man demonstrated by pressing a cross to his own face, looking utterly deranged.


    Seeing his bizarre behavior, Charles turned to Fairbach and asked, ¡°What¡¯s wrong with this guy? Can we trust him?¡±


    Fairbach looked confused. ¡°How should I know? I don¡¯t know him.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t know him, but how does he know your name?¡± Charles¡¯s heart raced.


    Just then, the rickety wooden door was kicked open. A horde of fierce pirates stormed in.


    ¡°Stop dawdling! We¡¯ll have to take our chances!¡± Richard said, taking a paper cross and pressing it to his face.


    Even the rats nearby huddled together behind the crosses.


    The pirates froze, and Charles could feel their piercing gazes directed at them.


    They can see me! This thing doesn¡¯t make us invisible!!


    Just as Charles prepared to fight for their lives, the snarls on the pirates¡¯ faces slowly faded. They lowered their weapons and, as if nothing had happened, turned and left.


    A few seconds later, the once-crowded alley outside was empty, as if everything that had just occurred was a mirage.


    ¡°This thing really works! Heh, nice, we¡¯ve got a new relic,¡± Richard said, reaching to pocket the cross.


    Charles stopped him, quickly flipping it over. It was just a tattered piece of paper crudely pieced together.


    ¡°It¡¯s not this thing that¡¯s useful; it¡¯s this guy,¡± Charles said, turning to the old man, who was carefully tucking the cross away. ¡°Why did you help us?¡±


    The old man smiled widely, but suddenly his face twisted in fear, and he crouched down like a gorilla, scrambling around the cluttered room.


    ¡°They¡¯re watching me! Oh my god, this is terrifying!¡±


    Watching this ridiculous scene, Fairbach scratched his head in confusion. ¡°What¡¯s he doing? Captain Charles, is this guy crazy?¡±


    Before he could finish, the old man pointed a trembling finger at Fairbach. ¡°They¡¯re looking at you! Oh no, they¡¯re looking at me again! There are so many of them! I need to find a way to hide!¡±


    The old man rummaged through the mess, and finally, he placed a half-rotten green mouse on his head, letting out a sigh of relief.


    ¡°Oh, thank goodness! They¡¯re afraid of dead mice! They find them disgusting and won¡¯t look at me anymore!¡±


    ¡°Who are ¡®they¡¯?¡± Charles asked.


    ¡°I can¡¯t say! If I do, we¡¯ll all disappear!¡± The old man waved his arms dramatically.


    Seeing his deranged behavior, Charles changed the subject. ¡°What¡¯s your name?¡±


    ¡°Tuba! Yes, that¡¯s right, I¡¯m Tuba!¡± The old man smiled foolishly, balancing the rotten mouse on his head.


    ¡°Why did you save us? Have we met before?¡±


    ¡°I¡­ I knew you were coming! I saw you in my mind! I¡¯ve known for thirty years that you would come! I even prepared a gift for you!¡±


    As he spoke, Tuba began rummaging through the chaotic trash again, soon pulling out a dirty, one-legged doll and handing it to the white rat on the floor.


    ¡°This is yours, little girl. I remember I had a little girl once, but she was even smaller than you.¡±

 **Chapter 127: The Story**

    ¡°Old man, how do you know I¡¯m a girl? Everyone else thinks I¡¯m a mouse,¡± Lily asked curiously, looking up at the old man who handed her the doll.


    This question intrigued not only Lily but also Charles. How could he be so sure that Lily was a transformed human and not a mouse with human memories?


    ¡°Do you know how to turn me back?¡± Lily asked nervously.


    But Tuba seemed to ignore her question, shoving the doll straight into a pile of rats and quickly rummaging through it.


    ¡°Here, this is for you,¡± Tuba said, pulling out a half-torn, tattered book and handing it to Fairbach.


    However, the ever-cautious green-haired youth reacted like a mouse seeing a cat, darting out the door in an instant.


    ¡°Throw that thing away! Now!¡± Fairbach¡¯s eyes widened in terror, his lips drained of color.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Charles noticed the book¡¯s cover was missing and caught a glimpse of its contents.


    The recipe for three servings of mushroom soup: one hard ham, 200 grams of white mushrooms, 5 grams of condensed milk, 25 grams of kelp, 5 milliliters of cooking oil, chicken powder¡­


    Charles took the book and flipped through it. Dirty illustrations of food appeared before him. ¡°It¡¯s just a cookbook. Why are you so worried?¡±


    Fairbach forced a smile, his face twisted in discomfort. ¡°Heh, my mistake. I thought he was holding something else¡­¡±


    He trailed off, leaving an uneasy silence.


    Seeing Charles take the cookbook, Tuba assumed he was trying to snatch it. ¡°Don¡¯t rush! Don¡¯t take his gift! I have something for you too¡­ wait, where did it go?¡±


    ¡°Stop rummaging for a moment,¡± Charles grabbed him and straightened him up. ¡°Who are you? Why do those pirates fear you?¡±


    ¡°They¡¯re not afraid. I turned invisible, so they couldn¡¯t see us,¡± Tuba proudly gestured with the cross again.


    Charles dismissed this as nonsense. Those many eyes had been fixed on him just moments ago; there was no way he was invisible.


    Realizing that the old man was not making sense, Charles didn¡¯t have time to continue the questioning.


    ¡°Regardless, thank you. I owe you one. I¡¯ll repay you next time we meet.¡±


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    With that, Charles turned to leave. He had no time to chat with a crazy old man, no matter how intriguing he seemed. He had already alerted the pirates and needed to find the fuel storage on this island before they reacted.


    ¡°Are you looking for something on the island? I can help! I¡¯ve been here a long time,¡± Tuba said, grinning widely, revealing his few remaining teeth.


    Charles, surprised, turned back. ¡°You know where the fuel is? Don¡¯t joke with me.¡±


    ¡°Really! The fuel is what the ship eats, right? I know where it comes from, and I can tell you, but you have to pay me first.¡±


    Hearing about payment, Charles felt a sense of relief; as long as he could get information, any cost was worth it. ¡°How much do you want?¡±


    Tuba waved his hands, shaking his head. ¡°No, no, I don¡¯t want money. I want a story! You must tell me a story I¡¯ve never heard before.¡±


    A story? What a strange request! Charles felt puzzled.


    At that moment, Richard seized control of their body. ¡°Let me handle this! I¡¯m good at dealing with crazies.¡±


    ¡°What kind of story do you want? Have you heard the tale of Little Red Riding Hood?¡± Richard said in a tone meant to amuse a child.


    ¡°Once upon a time, there was a beautiful girl. On her birthday, her grandmother gave her a little red velvet hood¡­¡±


    Richard quickly finished the brief bedtime story, and Lily listened with rapt attention. But Tuba, sitting among the trash, shook his head in disappointment.


    ¡°No, that¡¯s not the story I want! I¡¯ve heard that one before. You shouldn¡¯t tell that story; you should tell me something else.¡±


    ¡°What do you want to hear, then? Aren¡¯t you supposed to be able to predict the future? If you knew we were coming, you should know what story I¡¯m going to tell. Just predict it, and I¡¯ll repeat it!¡± Richard said, scratching his head in frustration.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know! I just know you have to tell me a story, and it has to be interesting. I want to laugh when I¡¯m done!¡±


    ¡°Hey, this old man¡­¡± Richard glared at Tuba, weighing the chances of using force to extract the fuel location from him. But thinking back to how Tuba had just intimidated the pirates, he couldn¡¯t tell if the old man was genuinely crazy or if he had some hidden strength.


    ¡°I have a story right here.¡± Charles took back control and took a deep breath, beginning to speak calmly.


    ¡°Once there was a man living in his own world. He was an ordinary person leading an ordinary life until one day, a disaster struck. The sea swallowed his classmates, but he was taken to a strange world where everything was water, and there was no light¡­¡±


    Charles spoke in a steady voice, devoid of emotion, but Tuba listened intently, utterly captivated.


    Meanwhile, Fairbach had unknowingly entered the room, listening to the story with a thoughtful expression as he watched Charles¡¯s back.


    ¡°For nine long years, he struggled and finally found his way home. But now, his ship had run out of fuel, and he needed it. There was an old man who knew where the fuel was. Whether he could return home depended on whether the old man would help him.¡±


    ¡°This story is good! This story is great!¡± Tuba exclaimed excitedly, clapping his hands and bouncing around like a monkey.


    ¡°No way! Such a good story! I need to write it down, or I¡¯ll forget it again!¡±


    Tuba rummaged through the trash and pulled out a yellowing notebook, quickly scribbling with a black stone.


    It was clear that Tuba didn¡¯t know how to write; he drew chaotic lines on the page, and in moments, the paper was completely covered in black.


    ¡°Done! Let¡¯s go! I¡¯ll take you to find the fuel, and then you can go home!¡± Tuba said, tucking the notebook into his clothes and heading for the door.


    Seeing Lily and Fairbach looking at him with questioning expressions, Charles said nothing, waved his hand, and followed Tuba out.

 **Chapter 128: The Other Side of the Mountain**

    For now, Charles trusted Tuba. The old man was indeed eccentric, but given his earlier actions, it seemed he had no ill intentions. After all, he could have easily left them to be captured by the pirates.


    As they walked along the rocky passage, Charles could see the pirates below, appearing like ants at the dock, and the distant ships on the sea looked like toy boats.


    The path through the mountain town was narrow, with a few pirates brushing past them without any sign of aggression. They merely glanced at Tuba and went about their business, as if the old man¡¯s cross truly granted them invisibility.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, are we really invisible? Why aren¡¯t they attacking us?¡± Lily, perched on Charles¡¯s shoulder, curiously reached out her tiny paw toward a pirate¡¯s clothing.


    ¡°No, we¡¯re not,¡± Charles replied, knowing they weren¡¯t invisible but still puzzled about how the old man had managed to create this illusion.


    After following Tuba for nearly half an hour, they arrived at the entrance of a low cave.


    ¡°Once we go through here, you¡¯ll see what you¡¯re looking for,¡± Tuba said cheerfully, bending down to crawl inside.


    ¡°You¡¯re not saying the fuel is buried in this mountain, are you?¡± Charles asked, skeptical.


    If the fuel was indeed hidden inside, he might as well have charged into the black market they had just left; at least there he would have had a fighting chance. Transporting fuel from inside the mountain would likely lead to them being surrounded by pirates before they could finish.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s on the other side of the mountain. The fuel comes out from there,¡± Tuba replied in a deep, echoing voice from within the cave.


    The cave was cramped and stifling, forcing them to crouch as they moved, creating a sense of oppression. After nearly ten minutes of walking, Charles, with his excellent physical resilience, was managing fine, but Fairbach was starting to struggle.


    Hearing Fairbach¡¯s heavy breathing behind him, Charles asked, ¡°Are you okay?¡±


    Fairbach wiped the sweat from his forehead with his sleeve. ¡°I¡¯m fine! Just a bit suffocated. Compared to this, I definitely prefer the open sea.¡±


    This discomfort didn¡¯t last long; five minutes later, they emerged from the other side of the mountain.


    The view opened up dramatically. Standing on the hillside, Charles looked down to see scattered buildings nestled within the valley. However, his gaze was drawn to the most striking sight: a massive, ruined circular structure by the seaside.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    This giant industrial facility, nearly as large as the surrounding mountains, was in a state of disrepair due to time, yet it still left Charles in awe.


    ¡°Wow, something this big couldn¡¯t have been built by the pirates. It must have been the Foundation¡¯s doing. How do they manage to be everywhere?¡± Richard chimed in.


    ¡°Over there, that¡¯s where the fuel comes from,¡± Tuba pointed towards a group of buildings beneath the circular structure.


    The area Tuba indicated was a black shed estimated to be the size of four football fields. From above, it was impossible to tell what was inside, but several tall towers surrounded it, with searchlights illuminating the area. The security looked extremely tight.


    From his vantage point, Charles noticed more details: behind the factory, a tangled maze of tracks could be seen. These weren¡¯t train tracks but rather those for mine carts, transporting something towards the back of the island¡¯s mountain.


    Due to the distance, Charles couldn¡¯t see what was in the mine carts, only that they were dark.


    ¡°Let¡¯s head down,¡± Tuba said, happily making his way down the steep rocky path.


    ¡°Is the fuel here coal or some leftover whale oil?¡± Charles asked.


    He didn¡¯t even bother asking about charcoal; in a place where not even grass grew, there was no way they could have charcoal fuel.


    ¡°Coal? Whale oil? What¡¯s that? I don¡¯t know! We just call it black balls. We¡¯ve been burning that stuff since we got here,¡± Tuba replied.


    Charles pondered this information. ¡°Sounds like coal. It seems this island has rich coal resources.¡±


    Once they descended the mountain, they cautiously approached the giant facility.


    After walking quietly for several minutes around the circular structure, they found themselves close to the dark shed. Charles could even see the white breath of the patrolling pirates on the high platform.


    Just as Tuba was about to walk towards the black iron door of the building, Charles stopped him. ¡°What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine! I can turn invisible; I¡¯m not afraid! They can¡¯t see us!¡± Tuba patted his chest and pulled out the crumpled cross again.


    Charles couldn¡¯t let him act recklessly. While Tuba might have some special ability, they were clearly in a crucial location for the island, likely guarded by much stronger pirates. If Tuba made even a slight mistake, it could ruin the entire mission.


    Instead of letting this crazy old man rush in, he had a better plan.


    ¡°Lily, let your friend scout ahead,¡± Charles instructed the mouse on his shoulder.


    The small mouse was clearly suited for stealth and reconnaissance, which was why Charles had brought Lily along.


    ¡°Eek! Eek!¡± The brown mouse quickly hopped around for a moment, and four mice scurried into the shadows toward the buildings.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, don¡¯t worry! I taught them a lot before! Jumping will definitely be able to communicate clearly this time,¡± Lily assured him.


    With a serious expression, Charles nodded. As long as they could determine whether this was indeed a fuel factory, their mission on the island would be complete.


    Time passed slowly, and Charles grew increasingly anxious, frequently checking his pocket watch. He had never felt time drag on so painfully.


    ¡°Hey, should we go take a look inside?¡± Richard suggested, glancing toward the massive circular structure beside them.


    ¡°Don¡¯t go looking for trouble; haven¡¯t you caused enough already?¡± Charles muttered through clenched teeth.


    ¡°How can that be called looking for trouble? The place is so dilapidated it doesn¡¯t even have a roof. What danger could there be? Look, there are spider webs.¡±


    Charles remained unmoved, standing still as he watched his watch.


    ¡°This is boring! This facility belongs to the Foundation. What if there¡¯s crucial information about an exit inside?¡± Richard pressed.


    ¡°Stop talking nonsense; I don¡¯t want to argue with you right now.¡±


    ¡°Then how about a compromise? Let Lily¡¯s mice go in? That should work, right?¡±

 **Chapter 129: The Return of the Mice**

    After glancing at the still and silent buildings, Charles reluctantly agreed to Richard¡¯s request. He didn¡¯t want to get into a prolonged argument over something so trivial.


    The mice selected for the mission quickly scurried toward the circular structure, while Richard gleefully patted their heads.


    ¡°Alright, little comrades, this is a tough task for you. Remember, bring back anything with writing on it or anything that looks valuable. If you can¡¯t carry it, just come back and tell me, and we¡¯ll go in together. Come on, Lily, make sure to translate well,¡± he said, beaming with pride.


    Watching the two mice dash toward the facility, Richard¡¯s face lit up with satisfaction.


    ¡°Humans always love compromise. For instance, if someone says this room is too dark and needs a window, everyone would object. But if you suggest tearing off the roof, they might agree to a window,¡± he chuckled.


    ¡°Enough chatter,¡± Charles interrupted, taking control of his body.


    They all stood quietly in the darkness, waiting for the mice to return. To Charles¡¯s surprise, it was the mice from inside the circular facility that emerged first. One was dragging a metal plate, while the other struggled with a small box the size of a matchbox.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, Maomao says it¡¯s really big inside but very broken. There¡¯s nothing good, just junk. They could only find these,¡± Lily translated the mice''s squeaks.


    Charles glanced at the still silent buildings and took the plate from the mouse. ¡°Nuclear Fusion Reactor Group C,¡± he read, and a chill ran down his spine as he turned to the small box that Lily was curiously examining.


    Richard¡¯s voice trembled as he spoke, ¡°Hey, this thing doesn¡¯t have radiation, does it?¡±


    In the next moment, Charles quickly grabbed the box and hurled it away.


    ¡°Mr. Charles, why did you throw it away? Maomao worked hard to bring it back,¡± Lily asked, tilting her head in confusion.


    Ignoring her question, Charles lifted her up and anxiously checked her tiny paws, relieved to find no signs of redness or blackening.


    ¡°It should be fine. If there were nuclear radiation, the mice wouldn¡¯t have been able to bring it back; they¡¯d have died halfway,¡± he reassured himself.


    ¡°This isn¡¯t your fault. Can you just stop causing trouble for me?¡± Charles muttered, placing the mice in his pocket as he continued to watch the distant entrance.


    Time passed slowly, and two hours later, Charles was growing increasingly impatient, and even Tuba was becoming restless.


    Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    ¡°This is pointless! Are you going in or not? If not, I¡¯m leaving,¡± Tuba said, frustration evident in his voice.


    ¡°Wait, we¡¯ll be there soon,¡± Charles replied, grabbing Tuba to keep him from leaving. He needed to ensure this madman didn¡¯t wander off; if someone got information out of him, it could become problematic.


    ¡°Then¡­ you have to tell me more stories,¡± Tuba insisted.


    ¡°Sure, no problem. Once we get off this island, I¡¯ll tell you as many stories as you want,¡± Charles promised, calming Tuba down. He resumed his vigil, contemplating whether to send more mice inside when Richard¡¯s voice broke through his thoughts.


    ¡°Dude, wait a minute! This circular facility is a nuclear fusion reactor, not a fission reactor. Fusion reactors use deuterium as fuel. That thing doesn¡¯t have radiation.¡±


    ¡°Whether it has radiation or not doesn¡¯t matter to us right now. It¡¯s just a facility the Foundation used for power generation. The Foundation is gone, and this facility is already defunct. Be quiet,¡± Charles replied, trying to dismiss Richard¡¯s excitement.


    But Richard didn¡¯t stop; instead, his voice grew more animated.


    ¡°No, this contains incredibly important information! Remember what we learned about nuclear energy in school? Fission reactors require uranium, which not only produces harmful radiation but also leaves behind waste that is nearly impossible to dispose of. In contrast, fusion radiation is so minimal it¡¯s almost nonexistent. Fusion fuel is practically limitless!¡±


    ¡°What are you trying to say?¡± Charles asked, trying to follow Richard¡¯s train of thought.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you get it? Fusion is an advanced technology that requires temperatures nearing millions of degrees to operate¡ªtemperatures that can only be achieved during a nuclear explosion. When we arrived, no country had achieved this technology. The Foundation¡¯s ability to create a fusion reactor means they possessed technology far beyond what we have on the surface!¡±


    Charles¡¯s mind went blank as he processed Richard¡¯s words. Both men fell silent, contemplating the implications.


    Charles recalled the supplementary information in the 1002 data: ¡°This region¡¯s knowledge could elevate humanity¡¯s development by an entire dimension, marking the second technological explosion in human history.¡±


    He looked up, awestruck by the massive circular structure beside him. It seemed the Foundation had indeed achieved its goals.


    Their ambitions were grand. If they hadn¡¯t vanished and had brought this technology to the surface, the technological landscape would have transformed dramatically.


    What would it be like for humanity to possess an inexhaustible energy source?


    ¡°Mr. Charles, look! The mice are back!¡± Lily¡¯s voice snapped Charles back to reality as he spotted the returning mice, dragging something behind them.


    Regardless of how the Foundation had achieved this, it was no longer his concern. What mattered now was securing fuel to return home.


    The mice returned, excitedly surrounding Charles and squeaking at Lily in the pocket.


    ¡°Hey, one at a time! It¡¯s too chaotic; I can¡¯t hear you,¡± Lily said as she climbed down Charles¡¯s pants leg.


    Charles crouched down to examine the items the mice had brought back.


    What he saw was a fist-sized, dark blue spherical object, with three small fingers protruding from it. It felt soft to the touch, somewhat like a balloon filled with jelly.


    As Charles squeezed it, the little fingers naturally wrapped around his own.


    ¡°Lily, what¡¯s going on inside? Why did they bring this out?¡± Charles asked, looking at the white mouse.


    ¡°Jumping said there¡¯s a big hole inside¡ªbigger than¡­ bigger than three of our ships combined!¡±


    The Unicorn Whale was 65 meters long; three of them would measure nearly 200 meters. Inside this facility was a 200-meter-wide pit, and Charles quickly calculated in his mind.


    ¡°There are some black monsters with heads taller than two people floating out of the hole.¡±

 **Chapter 130: The Floating Monsters**

    ¡°Some black monsters with heads taller than two people are floating out of the hole.¡±


    As soon as Lily relayed this information, the word ¡°natives¡± flashed through Charles''s mind. He hadn¡¯t expected that there would be space beneath the island, inhabited by indigenous creatures.


    After listening to the mice squeak for a moment, Lily turned to continue translating: ¡°The pirates threw a lot of fish into that hole, and those floating black monsters pushed the fish out.¡±


    At this point, she pointed to the soft black sphere in Charles¡¯s hand. ¡°There are tons of these inside¡ªso many that it¡¯s like several ships¡¯ worth. Then some ragged people moved these things onto iron carts. Those ragged folks must be slaves.¡±


    Charles looked at the black-blue creature in his hand, wondering if it was the fuel traded between the pirates and the natives.


    Tuba leaned in, grinning as he pointed at the object. ¡°That¡¯s it! Feed it to the ship, and it¡¯ll go really fast!¡±


    Despite the creature''s little hands grasping at him, Charles still found it hard to believe that this thing could be fuel.


    ¡°Who cares if it burns? We already have a product; let¡¯s give it a shot. Hey, do you have a lighter?¡± Richard chimed in.


    Taking the lighter from Fairbairn, Charles glanced at the distant tower. Cautiously, he turned his back and flicked the flame against the creature.


    ¡°Whoosh!¡± The bright flames rapidly engulfed the object, transforming it into a fireball.


    ¡°No doubt about it; this is the pirates¡¯ fuel.¡± Feeling the heat burn his palm, Charles couldn¡¯t help but show a hint of excitement. With this information, his mission on the island was complete.


    However, no one expected that the ignited creature would suddenly thrash violently, emitting a piercing shriek.


    The sound echoed through the canyon, quickly capturing the attention of the pirates atop the tower. A crackling voice blared over the intercom: ¡°Who¡¯s there? No approaching the back mountain!¡±


    Immediately, bright searchlights swung toward Charles¡¯s direction.


    Charles quickly extinguished the fireball in his hand and, along with the others, dashed toward the circular building behind them.


    Just when he thought he had evaded the pirates¡¯ lights, Tuba¡¯s foolish voice rang out behind him. ¡°You can¡¯t see me! You can¡¯t see me!¡±


    Charles whipped around to see Tuba standing foolishly under the glaring light, shielding his forehead with a cross gesture.


    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    Time seemed to freeze as everyone turned to look in that direction.


    Uncertain if Tuba¡¯s ability had affected them, the pirates atop the tower appeared confused.


    But just then, one of the searchlights shifted, and the beam quickly landed on Charles.


    ¡°Enemy attack!! Enemies are approaching!!¡±


    The steel gate in the distance slammed open, and a group of menacing pirates charged toward them.


    ¡°Damn it!¡± Charles sprinted out of the light, quickly determining the direction before leading everyone toward the sea.


    ¡°Rat-tat-tat!!¡± Gunfire erupted behind them, but in the darkness, the pirates clearly struggled to aim, and Charles¡¯s speed only increased.


    Both sides raced toward the shore at nearly the same pace.


    As they heard the distant sound of waves, Charles suddenly felt a tingling sensation on his head¡ªa warning of extreme danger. Instinctively, he grabbed Tuba and rolled quickly to the left.


    ¡°Crash!!¡± A heavy rock pillar fell from above, smashing into the ground and sending debris flying into Charles¡¯s face.


    Ignoring the pain, he dragged Tuba forward, using the opportunity to glance at the owner of the massive stone pillar.


    It was a nearly three-meter tall, humanoid floating monster, topped with a translucent, table-sized air sac.


    Its towering figure had swollen limbs, and its bizarre body was draped in a black robe. The features of its face seemed entangled in layers of webbing, obscuring any expression.


    Yet, even without seeing its face, Charles could feel its hostility. The floating creature lifted the heavy stone pillar again and swung it toward Charles.


    ¡°Boom!¡± The massive stone grazed Charles¡¯s clothing and crashed into the ground, shattering the rock beneath.


    ¡°Bang bang bang!!¡± Charles fired rapidly at the creature, but the bullets merely clanged off its black robe as if they were hitting iron, falling harmlessly to the ground.


    ¡°Shoot the air sac on its head!¡± Richard¡¯s voice echoed in his mind, prompting Charles to aim upward.


    Gunfire erupted again, but the bullets struck the floating creature¡¯s air sac, leaving only a few dimples before sliding off. The attack had no effect.


    ¡°Damn! What kind of structure do these guys have? They¡¯re invulnerable to blades and bullets!¡±


    Charles didn¡¯t have time to consider Richard¡¯s words, as the enormous stone pillar was already hurtling toward him with a whistling sound.


    Grinding his teeth, Charles bent sharply at a ninety-degree angle and narrowly dodged the attack.


    Seizing the moment when the creature¡¯s strength waned, Charles leaped onto the stone pillar, his muscles tensing as he propelled himself above it.


    With a burst of power, he sprinted up the pillar toward the floating monster¡¯s head.


    ¡°Zing~¡± The chainsaw in his left hand roared to life, and before it could react, Charles swung his prosthetic limb down toward its neck, splattering bone shards and translucent liquid everywhere.


    With a sickening crunch, the massive monster¡¯s head was severed from its body.


    As the headless corpse began to deflate with a hissing sound, the air sac propelled it swiftly into the air.


    Charles executed a swift roll as the body fell, landing gracefully on the ground.


    At that moment, he couldn¡¯t afford to ponder the creature¡¯s bizarre anatomy; he saw more black floating monsters approaching, wielding massive stone pillars.


    Dozens of thirty-meter-tall black-robed figures floated toward him from the distance, a scene that felt like a grim reaper descending.


    Charles knew that if he continued to flee, he would only end up entangled with them¡ªthese creatures were faster than he was.


    He pulled out the bat mirror, cut his hand on the chainsaw, and touched the mirror with it.


    ¡°You all run! I¡¯ll hold them off; I¡¯ll be back shortly,¡± Charles shouted to his companions as his body continued to morph.


    Before long, a five-meter-tall giant bat shot into the sky, charging toward the approaching monsters.

 **Chapter 131: The Little Trick**

    As Charles soared through the air as a giant bat, he knew that the floating monsters possessed tough bodies and immense strength. He avoided a direct confrontation, flapping his membranous wings and darting toward the hillside.


    The transformation immediately caught the attention of the floating creatures, which began to pursue him. Charles thought everything was going according to plan, but just as he reached halfway, a flash of light appeared before him. One of the floating monsters materialized right in front of him, with a man covered in skull tattoos standing on its shoulder, a smug grin on his face as he adjusted his single-eyed brass frame. It seemed the monster¡¯s sudden appearance was orchestrated by him.


    Before Charles could react, the heavy stone pillar came swinging toward him, crashing down with tremendous force. Blood sprayed from his mouth as he found himself in a dire situation.


    As he spiraled toward the ground, he noticed more floating monsters converging on him from all directions. Realizing that he needed to save himself or risk dying here, he gritted his teeth and flapped his wings with all his might, managing to hover in mid-air just as the monsters surrounded him, raising their stone pillars.


    Taking a deep breath, Charles opened his massive jaws and emitted a piercing shriek. The sound reverberated, causing the floating monsters to sway and dodge. One of them lagged slightly behind, and its air sac exploded with a loud pop.


    Seeing this, Charles¡¯s heart leaped with hope; he seemed to have discovered their weakness.


    However, he couldn¡¯t afford to linger. The pirates were closing in, and one of them pulled out a mirrored box. As the bright light spilled from the box¡¯s seams, an instinctual terror gripped Charles, prompting him to flee rapidly.


    Yet, his diversion had worked. He saw that, taking advantage of the chaos, his two companions¡ªa man and a mouse¡ªhad already reached the shore.


    But then, he received alarming news: several beams of light were rapidly approaching from the sea. They were the searchlights of the pirate ships.


    Charles dove down, reaching his companions, and pulled out a blood bag to suck on. ¡°We need to find our ship immediately! The pirate ships are coming!¡±


    ¡°Taking this route might be too late. We should swim back,¡± Fairbairn suggested, pointing toward the sea.


    ¡°Are you crazy? Do you know how far it is over there?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Captain Charles. Trust me; the sea is my domain. I don¡¯t want to be captured by the pirates either,¡± Fairbairn replied, flashing a brilliant smile.


    With the lights on the water growing ever closer, Charles gritted his teeth and plunged into the water.


    The depths were dark and oppressive. With his ability to see through the darkness, Charles noticed something moving in the shadows.


    If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    Fairbairn¡¯s deep green hair fanned out in the water, swaying like seaweed. He signaled to Charles and the others to wait, then opened his mouth as if chanting something. However, sound could not travel underwater, so Charles heard nothing.


    Before long, the surface above grew bright as the pirate ship passed overhead.


    Just as Charles began signaling Fairbairn to ask what he was doing, dark shapes began to writhe in the distance, stirring the water toward them.


    Under the illumination of the searchlights, Charles quickly recognized the forms: six massive sharks with dark red skin, each nearly seven meters long.


    Fairbairn gently stroked one of the sharks¡¯ fins, giving Charles a thumbs-up with a proud grin.


    Seeing that something had entered the water, Charles quickly climbed onto one of the sharks¡¯ backs.


    Once everyone had a firm grip, the sharks¡¯ powerful tails whipped, propelling them forward.


    Charles felt the immense water pressure pressing against his face, distorting his skin as the sharks shot through the water like high-speed torpedoes.


    After about a minute, he struggled to open his eyes and realized the light above had vanished; they had already left the coastline.


    At that moment, he spotted Lily, bubbles escaping her mouth, her face contorted in pain¡ªshe was on the verge of losing consciousness.


    Charles grabbed her and stuffed her into his mouth, signaling Fairbairn to surface.


    ¡°Are these your fish?¡± Charles asked breathlessly, taking the opportunity to replenish oxygen.


    The green-haired youth nodded proudly. ¡°I told you, I have a few tricks in the sea. These little guys are called ¡®Little Tricks.¡¯¡±


    After a brief moment of surfacing for air, the sharks continued to propel them toward the dark expanse of the ocean.


    As the lights of the coast quickly faded, darkness enveloped them, and Charles could feel the water temperature drop significantly¡ªsomething was approaching.


    Suddenly, a mass of thick, black, amorphous substance surged from below, lunging at Tuba¡¯s legs. But just then, the two sharks lunged forward, their gaping jaws tearing into the mass.


    The dark entity was instantly ripped apart.


    Watching Fairbairn¡¯s green hair sway in the water, Charles was now certain that this guy had been lying¡ªsomeone who could command such fierce sharks couldn¡¯t possibly be a novice.


    But regardless of his motives, he was helping Charles now.


    Thirty minutes later, after another breath of air, Charles spotted a ship on the surface: it was his ship, the Narwhal.


    Dragging Tuba, whose eyes were rolling back and who was sputtering water, Charles swam toward his vessel.


    Climbing up the soft ladder onto the deck, he found the other captains had already gathered, with the ever-enthusiastic Kode at the forefront.


    ¡°How did it go? Did you find any resource leads?¡±


    Taking the towel from Deep, Charles wiped his wet hair as he headed toward the cabin.


    Inside the dimly lit captain¡¯s room, everyone anxiously watched as Charles sketched the target island¡¯s map with swift strokes.


    Soon, a detailed map of Waterfall Island appeared on the paper. Charles pointed to the left edge of the island with his pen.


    ¡°This is where they replenish their fuel. According to my intel, there¡¯s enough fuel here to meet our needs.¡±


    Charles moved his pen across the map, marking several dashed lines.


    ¡°I¡¯ve drawn these lines representing freshwater waterfalls. The closest waterfall to the fuel point is five kilometers to its left. We can take advantage of the fuel transport to replenish our freshwater supplies.¡±


    ¡°Great, let¡¯s do it!¡± Kode jumped up, ready to head outside.


    Charles called out, ¡°Not so fast! What¡¯s the rush?¡±


    ¡°We need to discuss the enemy pirates¡¯ combat layout,¡± Charles said, drawing a circle around the Waterfall Island dock.


    ¡°This location is home to many warships. Based on my previous encounters, their support arrives quickly. If we¡¯re interrupted while replenishing supplies, it could cost us all our lives.¡±

 **Chapter 132: The Raid**

    ¡°We must find a way to delay the pirate ships at the dock for a while, so the others can seize the fuel factory,¡± Charles stated firmly.


    ¡°That¡¯s easy!¡± Kode, visibly excited, snatched the pen from Charles and drew several arrows on the map. ¡°Just send three ships to attack the Crab Claw head-on. The goal is to draw their attention; we only need to buy them ten more minutes.¡±


    ¡°But how will those three ships get back?¡± Charles questioned.


    ¡°Why do they need to come back?¡± Kode¡¯s statement instantly froze the atmosphere in the cabin.


    The burly man who had previously argued with Charles stood up, agitated. ¡°I absolutely disagree with this plan! My brothers will not go to their deaths!¡±


    Kode looked at him with a hint of disdain. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; I wouldn¡¯t want your men. I¡¯m afraid they¡¯d run away halfway. Comrades, the time has come to sacrifice for the God of Light!¡±


    As soon as Kode finished speaking, three captains from the Church of Light, adorned with white triangular hats, stood up in unison, their expressions solemn and fearless in the face of impending death.


    With a look of satisfaction, Kode walked up to them and patted their shoulders affectionately. ¡°Rest assured, you are the pioneers seeking the land of light, the most devout followers of the God of Light. Once I reach the divine realm, I will pray to the God of Light to guide your souls to the afterlife!¡±


    ¡°All for the God of Light!!¡±


    ¡°All for the God of Light!!¡±


    ¡°All for the God of Light!!¡±


    The three men, with unwavering expressions, brought their hands together on their foreheads, forming the white triangle.


    The other captains exchanged strange looks; even though they were accustomed to death, witnessing three entire ships willingly head to their demise felt unsettling.


    Charles quickly recalled the distribution of forces at the dock and shook his head. ¡°Three ships are still not enough; they won¡¯t last long. They¡¯ll be sunk by cannon fire as soon as they enter.¡±


    Kode smiled confidently. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; the Church of Light has resources beyond your imagination. If I say they can do it, they will!¡±


    As he spoke, Kode pulled a key from his sleeve and handed it to the captain of the Church of Light. ¡°Go retrieve the supplies from the third cargo hold of the Divine Domain. You know what to do.¡±


    Watching the three captains leave in unison, Charles turned his attention to the other exploration ship captains. ¡°Everyone, I know you¡¯ve been holding back your strongest abilities, but this is a critical moment. Let¡¯s see all your might! If we succeed, the rewards will exceed your wildest expectations!¡±


    Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.


    The turbines of all the exploration ships roared to life, black smoke billowing from their exhausts. The crew members were informed of the imminent danger, their faces tense but not panicked; they were seasoned veterans who had emerged from the blood-soaked battles of the island.


    Charles glanced to his left and saw Kode conducting some sort of ceremony for the devoted followers of the God of Light. He wouldn¡¯t interfere; the island was crawling with pirates, and only by sacrificing some could they hope to find a way out.


    Watching the fervent expressions of the followers, Charles understood that, at least for this moment, they were willing to die for the elusive God of Light.


    Just then, he noticed Linda and another follower of the God of Light who had escaped with him. The image of Sarin¡¯s dying face flashed through his mind, causing Charles to frown. He activated the grappling hook and swung over to their ship.


    ¡°Kode, I need these two,¡± Charles said, pointing at them.


    Kode raised an eyebrow in surprise. ¡°Why?¡±


    ¡°My ship is short two people, and these two fit the bill perfectly,¡± Charles replied, fabricating an absurd excuse.


    After glancing at Linda and the other follower, Kode smirked. ¡°Sister Linda, Alarg, your mission has been canceled. Report to Captain Charles¡¯s ship.¡±


    Linda, however, appeared ungrateful for Charles¡¯s kindness; her face flushed, and her breathing quickened.


    ¡°Sister Linda, follow my orders,¡± Kode reiterated firmly.


    After Kode¡¯s command, Linda shot Charles a cold glare before turning to head below deck.


    Charles didn¡¯t care whether she was grateful; he simply wanted to repay Sarin¡¯s debt.


    Feeling somewhat selfish, he realized that while he didn¡¯t care about the deaths of strangers, the loss of someone he knew stirred his conscience.


    Once everything was ready, Charles took the helm. Spotting the lighthouse beam in the sky, he took a deep breath and sounded the horn of the Narwhal. ¡°Woo-woo~~¡±


    Seventeen ships surged forward, their crews filled with excitement, heading toward Waterfall Island.


    They were not far from their destination, and soon Charles saw the hazy lights of the island.


    At that moment, three ships from the Church of Light broke away from the fleet, charging toward the dock without hesitation.


    In the distance, Charles noticed that the followers on those ships seemed to have consumed something.


    Quickly adjusting the helm, he directed the other exploration ships toward the fuel point.


    Before long, the Narwhal, with Charles at the helm, returned to the coastline they had fled from.


    Thirteen ships slowed down, except for one captain standing on the deck in a sharp black military uniform, sword pointed toward the distant fuel factory, commanding his ship to charge ashore.


    ¡°Captain! Isn¡¯t he going to run aground like that?¡± Deep asked worriedly.


    ¡°Just do your job; these guys have managed to survive this long for a reason,¡± Charles replied.


    ¡°Bang!¡± The ship collided with the rocks, producing a dull thud, but the grounding Deep feared didn¡¯t occur.


    Underneath the ship, barnacle-covered tracks spun rapidly, propelling the vessel directly onto the shore.


    ¡°My God, this ship can drive on land too?!¡± Deep exclaimed in astonishment.


    The show of force was clearly visible to the pirates.


    In the distance, alarm bells rang from the fuel point, and personnel began to mobilize for defense.


    Black floating monsters emerged from the buildings. Charles smeared blood on his bat mirror and leaped from the deck. ¡°Let¡¯s go!!¡±


    The deck cannons of the amphibious ships fired directly at the steel gate.


    With a deafening roar, the gate¡ªand the pirates behind it¡ªvanished without a trace.

 **Chapter 133: Sodom**

    The floating monsters raised their massive pillars, attempting to attack the amphibious exploration vessel, but Charles was not about to let that happen. He flapped his bat wings and charged forward.


    A piercing shriek echoed through the air, causing the floating monsters to scatter in fear.


    At the fuel factory, a pirate clutched a mirror box while standing on the shoulder of a floating monster, trying to break through the encirclement. Unfortunately, Charles was no longer fighting alone this time.


    Gunfire rang out continuously, and the pirate¡¯s body was riddled with bullets, blood spewing from his mouth as he fell to the ground.


    Behind the amphibious exploration ship, hundreds of crew members armed with various weapons surged forward. Leading the charge was the now-giant James, clad in armor and carrying a massive black cannon on his shoulder.


    Brown rats scurried up and down his body, and the cannon¡¯s fuse was ignited. With a thunderous boom, a tower at the fuel factory collapsed.


    Amidst the furious shouts and roars, the massive iron ship crashed into the fuel point¡¯s buildings, and the crew members poured down like a torrent.


    ¡°Don¡¯t use the cannons! Be careful not to ignite the fuel!¡± Charles shouted as he flew down to warn them.


    Under the well-coordinated assault planned by the crew, the pirates quickly fell into disarray, leaving behind a sea of corpses as they began to flee in panic.


    The black floating monsters were also chased away by Charles; although their air sacs provided strong physical defense, they were terrified of sonic attacks.


    Soon, everyone had stormed the fuel factory, completely taking control of the area.


    Having said everything necessary on the ship, the plan was set: a portion of the capable crew would stand guard while the weaker members began transporting fuel onto the ship.


    Before arriving, the kitchen and crew quarters of the amphibious ship had been emptied and filled with wooden barrels. It was not only meant to serve as an assault tank but also as a cargo truck.


    The barrels were quickly lowered, and the soft, black spheres were swiftly loaded onto the cargo ship, everything proceeding in an orderly fashion.


    Once the cargo ship was full, the amphibious vessel quickly headed toward the coast, while the remaining crew, not resting, rushed with the leftover barrels toward a nearby waterfall.


    The crew worked together to place the one-meter-tall barrels into the pool beneath the waterfall, then hurriedly lifted them and sealed the lids.


    Nearby, Kode shouted encouragement. ¡°Hurry up! Use the strength you have for women! If we can complete this mission, you can have anything you want! I swear it on my Sun God!¡±


    A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Above them, Charles, hovering with his bat wings, remained vigilant, wary of any sudden surprises.


    At that moment, a shadow flew by. Charles didn¡¯t attack; it was one of his vampire sailors.


    ¡°Captain! Those followers of the God of Light really managed to hold the dock¡¯s warships! By the Mother, you won¡¯t believe it; their bodies seem to have mutated into some kind of monster that can¡¯t be destroyed even by cannon fire!¡±


    ¡°Keep watching the dock. Report any unusual activity immediately,¡± Charles ordered.


    ¡°Understood, Captain.¡± The little bat quickly flew over the mountains.


    Hearing his crew¡¯s report, Charles felt a surge of relief. Kode hadn¡¯t exaggerated; those followers had truly succeeded.


    When the amphibious ship returned to empty the fuel, the crew quickly loaded full barrels of fresh water and retreated toward the coast.


    Everything was going so smoothly that Charles couldn¡¯t remember the last time things had gone this well.


    As the amphibious ship re-entered the sea, all the vessels began to turn around, preparing to head toward the Land of Light.


    Suddenly, a deafening explosion rang out, violently shaking the entire Narwhal.


    Ignoring the rocking of the ship, Charles looked over to see a ship that had been right beside him explode into a mass of scrap metal, billowing black smoke as it sank into the water.


    Charles mechanically turned his head, glancing at the left side of the sea, where giant dark shapes glimmered like stars on the black water, slowly approaching with an overwhelming sense of dread.


    ¡°Bang!¡± All the bright lights instantly turned on, revealing an island made from various scrap ships. A massive cannon, over seventeen meters long and two meters in diameter, protruded from the island¡¯s belly, smoke curling from its muzzle.


    Charles¡¯s eyes turned red as he grabbed Kode by the collar, glaring at him with a predatory gaze. ¡°Didn¡¯t you say the pirates of Sodom went to rob the refugees of Shadow Island? Now tell me, what is that thing?!¡±


    Kode forcefully pried Charles¡¯s hand away. ¡°No time for that! We have to go! It¡¯s coming!¡±


    Charles retaliated with a knee to Kode¡¯s gut, quickly rushing to the cockpit and snatching the helm from Deep, spinning it wildly.


    In the face of that giant cannon, all magical relics and mysterious powers were rendered useless; the cannonball¡¯s range was the only truth.


    Charles had never felt his power so insignificant, but he wasn¡¯t ready to give up. He shouted for the chief engineer in the turbine room to overload the turbines.


    The cannon of Sodom had an extremely long range but was slightly slower. After sacrificing three ships, Charles¡¯s fleet finally escaped the cannon¡¯s attack range.


    However, 134 and the ¡°King¡± were clearly not willing to let them go. Dozens of pirate ships broke away from Sodom and sped toward them.


    The Narwhal was getting further from Waterfall Island, but the aggressive pirates showed no signs of giving up, relentlessly pursuing them.


    Sodom was also following closely behind; if the Narwhal was caught, the despairing cannonballs would rain down upon them.


    Leading the pirate ships was an old wooden vessel, covered in mold and looking dilapidated, yet it skimmed the water like a ghost.


    As Charles watched the approaching wooden ship, he suddenly pulled out his binoculars to get a better look.


    At the bow stood the little girl, her face cold as she gazed back at him, her jagged teeth glinting in the light.


    But what shocked Charles wasn¡¯t just 134; it was the figurehead of the ship.


    The figurehead was a totem-like statue of a deity, reminiscent of a steamship that typically lacked such adornments, yet this decrepit wooden ship had one¡ªand it was something Charles recognized.


    The former ¡°King¡± of Sodom was gruesomely impaled at the bow, its dark fangs bared in a furious roar.


    But as Charles examined the details where the ¡°King¡± connected to the ship, he gasped in shock.


    No, it wasn¡¯t just impaled at the bow; the ¡°King¡± had fused with the ship itself!

 **Chapter 134: Maggots**

    Before long, the wooden ship had caught up with the Narwhal, both vessels racing side by side across the sea. At such a close distance, Charles could vaguely hear the furious roars of the ¡°King.¡±


    With a grim expression, Charles abruptly turned the helm, swinging the Narwhal 90 degrees to face the enemy. This maneuver minimized the chance of being hit while allowing his gunners to return fire.


    In an instant, the sea erupted with cannon fire, drowning out all sounds except for the explosions.


    Suddenly, the Narwhal shook violently, and Charles¡¯s face turned pale; the ship had been hit!


    Thick smoke billowed from the deck, obscuring his view of the outside. Pushing open the cockpit door, he rushed out.


    On the deck, he saw that the bow of the Narwhal had completely deformed, resembling a gaping maw, with smoke pouring out from within. It seemed that the turbine room hadn¡¯t been damaged, and the ship could still move.


    However, compared to the imminent threat of the wooden ship, this concern felt trivial.


    At this moment, several dark cannon muzzles were aimed directly at the Narwhal, and 134 looked over with a sinister grin.


    ¡°How interesting. When my crew reported that a large bat had landed on the island, I knew you had come. I didn¡¯t expect you to dare provoke me again after escaping last time. That was just luck, but luck runs out eventually. This time, you won¡¯t escape!¡±


    In the face of 134¡¯s threats, Charles remained unfazed and even managed a slight smirk. ¡°I know you¡¯re strong, but do you really think one ship can take on several exploration vessels?¡±


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!¡± The cannon fire continued relentlessly. Amidst the violent explosions, the entire wooden ship caught fire, emitting a mournful creaking sound as 134 became engulfed in flames and smoke.


    The ships that had previously left returned to assist.


    With the pursuing pirate ships drawing ever closer, Charles couldn¡¯t afford to delay any longer. He blew the horn, signaling for everyone to retreat at full speed.


    Some of the faster pirates had already rushed up, but their small numbers were insufficient to stop Charles and his crew from escaping.


    Just as the battle raged on, he suddenly heard a beautiful singing voice.


    Immediately, he felt his fatigue dissipating rapidly, accompanied by a slight itch on his skin.


    Having encountered 134¡¯s song before, Charles grabbed a nearby screwdriver, ready to pierce his eardrum at the first sign of bodily changes.


    Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    However, this time, he didn¡¯t experience any abnormalities; the strangeness was occurring on the burning wooden ship.


    As the song crescendoed, branches began to emerge, pushing through the flames. Before long, a lush grove appeared on the dark sea.


    The pirates following behind didn¡¯t rush to pursue; instead, they cheered excitedly at the rapidly growing forest.


    Seeing this, a sense of unease crept into Charles¡¯s heart.


    Standing beside him, Kode, whether to comfort himself or Charles, said, ¡°It¡¯s fine; it doesn¡¯t even have a ship. It can¡¯t catch up.¡±


    Suddenly, the singing stopped, and the entire grove split open like a cocoon. A pale, swollen mass crawled out from within.


    If the previous ¡°King¡± had merely been an obese human, it had now transformed into an immensely grotesque white maggot, magnified thousands of times.


    Various insect limbs writhed in and out of its segmented body, with rows of curved insect legs growing beneath it.


    Looking at this grotesque form, Charles finally understood why this creature had become the King of Sodom.


    He didn¡¯t know if this transformation was catalyzed by 134¡¯s song or if it had always been like this inside the ship, but he knew this creature was not to be trifled with.


    ¡°Roar!¡± The hideous head howled, its insect legs thrashing wildly as the deformed ¡°King¡± charged toward Charles with murderous intent.


    Lily¡¯s rats scurried up and down the deck, and cannonballs exploded against its body, tearing it apart. Yet, no amount of wounds could slow its speed; the exposed yellowish fat writhed like maggots, healing rapidly.


    The ¡°King¡± was incredibly fast, and within minutes, it was back on Charles¡¯s tail. He realized that if the fleet was caught up again, they would truly be finished.


    ¡°Kode! Order them to keep moving forward! I¡¯ll hold it off!¡± Charles shouted, biting his gums and smearing blood on the bat mirror before soaring into the air.


    Charles quickly positioned himself above the ¡°King,¡± opening his mouth to emit a piercing scream.


    However, 134 quickly countered this move; the melodious song from below drowned out Charles¡¯s voice, and he felt his muscles and bones swell again.


    As he witnessed his body swelling uncontrollably, Charles bit down hard, retracting his wings and diving toward the ¡°King.¡±


    Just before crashing into it, he drew out his Thunder Short Staff. Bright arcs of electricity danced over the ¡°King,¡± causing its insect limbs to thrash wildly, its white skin charred black, filling the air with a nauseating scent of burning flesh.


    The ¡°King¡± halted, but Charles found himself in dire straits as several insect legs shot up from beneath the flesh, ensnaring him tightly.


    Dressed in a princess gown, 134 floated toward Charles.


    Though paralyzed and unable to move, Charles¡¯s expression remained calm, as if he had some hidden trump card.


    Just as the distance between them closed to five meters, a sudden, unexpected voice broke through. ¡°Hey, what are you two doing? Stop fighting!¡±


    It was Tuba¡¯s voice, panting as he climbed up the ¡°King¡¯s¡± insect legs.


    ¡°I¡¯m exhausted. Help me out here,¡± Tuba complained, and just as he finished speaking, a blackened piece of flesh split open, and an insect leg emerged.


    Without hesitation, Tuba yanked it out, using it like a cane as he cheerfully walked forward.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t this Ximiti? Long time no see! Where have you been?¡±


    Tuba reached out to pat 134¡¯s head, but she quickly slapped his hand down with some unseen force, pinning him to the ground.


    Looking at the filthy old man, the little girl¡¯s face twisted in disgust.


    ¡°177! Others are coming to raid our island, and you¡¯re off helping them instead!¡±


    Tuba wore a look of grievance. ¡°They just wanted to go home! I just wanted to help a bit, and I saw that even if I didn¡¯t help, they¡ª¡±


    ¡°You useless fool! Ever since you went crazy four hundred years ago, you haven¡¯t had a clear thought for a single moment!¡±

 **Chapter 135: The Photograph**

    Hearing their conversation, Charles was taken aback. He hadn¡¯t expected Tuba to know 134, and from their tone, it seemed they had known each other for four hundred years.


    Glancing at the Narwhal not far away, Charles transformed his prosthetic limb into a chainsaw and swiftly slashed downward, severing the insect legs that sprayed green blood. He leaped forward like a leopard, charging at 134.


    Amidst Tuba¡¯s angry shouts, 134 didn¡¯t turn around. With a flick of her left hand, Charles found himself suspended in mid-air by a familiar telekinetic force.


    ¡°Crack, crack, crack!¡± The gears in Charles¡¯s prosthetic whirred as the sharp anchor hook shot toward 134¡¯s petite form.


    134 quickly floated upward, evading Charles¡¯s attack. In the process, the binding vanished, granting him an opportunity. Without hesitation, he reached for his waist, pulling out a revolver and firing at 134.


    Caught off guard by the barrage of bullets, 134 struggled to defend herself. Charles¡¯s aim was precise; he fired just as she attempted to counterattack, thwarting her efforts repeatedly. Yet, she wore a mocking smile, as if toying with a mouse.


    ¡°Listen to me! Why must it be like this? Can¡¯t we sit down and discuss things?¡± Tuba implored, his face etched with worry. But neither side paid him any heed.


    As Charles continued his barrage, a bullet tore through the fabric of 134¡¯s beautiful purple dress, creating a small hole. Suddenly, a pale bone flute with several holes burst forth from the ground, striking his revolver away and then stabbing into his abdomen.


    In disbelief, Charles looked down as a black, smoke-like figure emerged from the ¡°King¡¯s¡± flesh. Its ethereal hand grasped the bone flute embedded in Charles¡¯s body, and with a swift motion, it yanked it out.


    A walnut-sized circular wound on Charles¡¯s abdomen gushed blood uncontrollably.


    ¡°Oh my God, what are you doing? Why is there so much blood?¡± Tuba exclaimed, scrambling to his feet and rushing to the staggering Charles. He pulled out some dirty papers and clumsily attempted to apply them to Charles¡¯s wound.


    However, the blood quickly washed away Tuba¡¯s makeshift bandages, rendering them useless. The black mist ceased its assault, swirling around Tuba before hovering behind 134 like a servant.


    Pale and in pain, Charles looked at this strange scene and then at 134, suddenly realizing something. He pressed his hand tightly against his wound, gritting his teeth against the pain. ¡°You, ¡®King,¡¯ Tuba, and this one here¡ªyou all escaped from the Second Laboratory, right? The King of Sodom doesn¡¯t refer to a single individual, but to you four living relics, doesn¡¯t it? Or perhaps even more than four?¡±


    You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.


    ¡°Giggle, giggle, giggle. It seems you know quite a bit about us,¡± 134 said, bouncing over to pick up the fallen revolver.


    The large handgun in her small, delicate hands looked unsettling, sending chills down Charles¡¯s spine.


    Charles quickly scanned the surroundings. When he caught sight of a flash of red on the distant sea, he couldn¡¯t help but chuckle softly.


    ¡°What are you laughing at? Is it funny to be dying?¡± 134 said, removing the bullet chamber and seeing three brass bullets left inside before reloading.


    Charles turned his gaze toward the pirate ships chasing after them. ¡°I¡¯m laughing at those pirates. So many humans being led by four living relics.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! We¡¯re relics? You¡¯re just as ignorant as those from the Foundation! We are the fortunate ones in this world, while you lowly humans are nothing but insignificant bugs!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve been to the Second Laboratory. I¡¯ve seen the Foundation¡¯s torment of you, but that seems a bit excessive, don¡¯t you think? Don¡¯t forget, you were human once too,¡± Charles said, staring intently at the girl.


    134¡¯s face twisted in anger. ¡°How long were you there to speak about understanding me? A day? A week? A month? Do you know how long I endured in that hell? I was there for thirty whole years! Every human possesses a repulsive original sin! They¡¯re not my kin at all!¡±


    With a crack, 134¡¯s chubby face shattered like glass, revealing a dark, emotion-filled vertical pupil glaring from within. In that moment, she resembled a ghoul.


    Like a monster, 134 raised the oversized revolver with a cruel smile. ¡°Giggle, giggle, giggle. It must look wonderful to see the bullet pierce through your brain.¡±


    Tuba, looking anxious, rummaged through his pockets, pulling out various bits of trash and gesturing wildly at 134, attempting to block her actions. But his items were merely ordinary refuse, utterly ineffective.


    Suddenly, Tuba froze, a look of relief washing over him. He turned around, beaming at the black mist, extending his hands to grasp its flute tightly.


    ¡°Goma, long time no see! Your flute looks beautiful; can I play with it?¡±


    ¡°Bang! Bang! Bang!¡± Gunfire erupted as three bullets shot toward Charles.


    In the split second 134 pulled the trigger, Charles rolled to the right and flung something at her.


    ¡°Thud!¡± Blood erupted from Charles¡¯s left shoulder as he was hit; he managed to dodge two of the bullets but was struck by one.


    Dizzy and light-headed from blood loss, Charles staggered toward the nearby sea, refusing to give up.


    The black mist attempted to rush forward to block him, but Tuba clung tightly to the bone flute, preventing it from moving.


    Standing still, 134 didn¡¯t pursue further. Instead, she held a photograph, staring blankly at it as the cracks in her face slowly healed.


    It was a picture of a family of three, the same one Mihir had given to Charles. A bullet had pierced the child¡¯s head, while the two parents smiled brightly on either side.


    134 gazed at it with a strange expression, as if recalling something. Gradually, the malice on her face faded, and tears began to well up in her eyes, dripping onto the photograph.


    With a splash, Charles plunged into the frigid sea.


    134¡¯s lips tightened as she struggled to contain her emotions, but eventually, she couldn¡¯t hold back any longer. Like a real six-year-old child, she burst into tears.


    Hearing her sobs, Tuba quickly released the bone flute, rushing over to embrace her, patting her shoulder gently. ¡°Don¡¯t cry, don¡¯t cry. Grandpa¡¯s here. Grandpa¡¯s here.¡±


    The white flesh on the ground writhed and rose, gently pressing against her.

 **Chapter 136: Setting Off Again**

    ¡°Here come the enemy ships!! Everyone, prepare! Watch out for the pirates jumping aboard!!¡± Deep shouted loudly to his crew from the deck.


    He had no choice but to raise his voice; the entire sea had turned into a chaotic battlefield, and the fleet was already being swarmed by some fast-moving pirates. They were barely holding on, largely due to the disarray among their attackers.


    As the Sodom pirates charged forward, everyone braced for the worst, but for some unknown reason, the pirate leader halted their advance, leaving their ships motionless.


    The infighting among the pirates gave the crew a brief moment to breathe.


    Seeing the aggressive prow of a pirate ship approaching, Lily, stationed at the deck cannon, squeaked in alarm. The cannon quickly turned, firing directly at the ship that was now within arm''s reach.


    The explosion was so close that the shockwave rocked the Narwhal violently.


    Although the immediate danger had passed, the crew¡¯s faces remained tense, as the surrounding environment was still perilous. Bandage was maneuvering the Narwhal swiftly to evade incoming fire.


    Odric swooped down from above, landing on the deck in a hurry. ¡°The eastern encirclement has been broken! Other exploration ships are retreating in that direction!¡±


    Wrapped in a semi-transparent cocoon, Keder exclaimed excitedly, ¡°That¡¯s great! Let¡¯s hurry and follow them!¡±


    ¡°No way! The captain hasn¡¯t returned yet!¡± Deep immediately countered.


    ¡°If he could come back, he would have done so by now! What are we waiting for?¡± Keder¡¯s words drew hostile glares from all sides.


    Filled with anger, Deep stepped forward. ¡°If you say that again, I don¡¯t care who you are; don¡¯t blame me for throwing you overboard!¡±


    ¡°Are you just going to wait here and die while he doesn¡¯t come back? Open your eyes and look at the situation around us!!¡±


    ¡°Whoosh~¡± A cannonball flew overhead, crashing heavily into the sea and sending a towering spray of water skyward.


    ¡°I¡¯m not going anywhere until the captain returns!!¡±


    ¡°You!!¡±


    Keder regretted ever being on this ship at that moment.


    Just then, a red shark¡¯s head broke through the surface of the water, and a barely conscious Charles lay sprawled on its back.


    ¡°It¡¯s the captain!¡±


    Deep leaped over the ship¡¯s railing and plunged into the water, quickly hauling Charles onto the deck. Charles¡¯s abdominal wound had stopped bleeding, the circular injury now whitened by the seawater.


    ¡°Ship¡¯s doctor!! Where¡¯s the ship¡¯s doctor?!¡± Deep shouted helplessly as he looked at Charles¡¯s injury.


    Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    ¡°Get away! What are you all crowding around for? Step back!¡±


    The doctor limped over, carrying various prepared medical supplies. He had anticipated this scenario when Charles had rushed out.


    ¡°Get the ship moving¡­,¡± Charles said, summoning all his strength.


    ¡°Set sail!! Quick, set sail!! Your captain has returned!!¡± Keder waved his arms frantically at the bridge.


    Thick smoke billowed from the Narwhal¡¯s smokestack as the exploration ship¡¯s speed began to pick up rapidly.


    Amidst the ongoing explosions and gunfire, the weakened Charles turned to the doctor. ¡°Is there any medicine that can help me temporarily regain my combat strength?¡±


    The doctor shot him a glare. ¡°You still want to regain your strength? You¡¯re in this state and want to join the fight? Are you eager to die faster?¡±


    As he spoke, he increased the pressure of his treatment. ¡°Two of you, get him inside! I need to operate!¡±


    Kneeling on one knee, Deep looked at Charles with determination. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Captain. We¡¯ll take care of the rest!¡±


    Charles was carried by two sailors on a stretcher into the ship¡¯s interior.


    On the deck, Deep¡¯s voice reached his ears. ¡°Brothers! The captain has done his part! Now it¡¯s our turn to protect him!!¡±


    The crew responded in unison.


    While the doctor worked on Charles, the sounds of explosions and chaos continued outside, but as they had promised, everyone kept the danger at bay.


    As the sounds of burning and explosions gradually subsided, Charles¡¯s wound was finally stitched up.


    When the doctor wheeled Charles out in a wheelchair, he noticed that the pirate ships had vanished from the sea; they had retreated.


    Seeing Charles emerge onto the deck, the captains of the surrounding ships removed their tricorn hats and respectfully bowed in a gesture of gratitude.


    They all recognized that it was Charles who had held off the monstrous pirate ship; without him, they wouldn¡¯t have made it out today.


    Through his actions, Charles earned the respect of everyone.


    Keder¡¯s excitement was palpable as he rushed over, rubbing his hands together. ¡°Charles, we did it! We can head to the Land of Light now!!¡±


    A faint smile crept onto Charles¡¯s lips, quickly transforming into a radiant grin, a genuine happiness he hadn¡¯t felt since falling into the Abyss. ¡°Yes, we succeeded.¡±


    On the dark sea, aboard a luxurious three-deck passenger ship that had set sail from the Isle of Whispers, Anna reclined in a lounge chair, enjoying a massage from her maid while leisurely reading a newspaper.


    ¡°April 30th Breaking News: Peter, the Finance Minister of the Isle of Whispers, unexpectedly becomes bedridden. A large amount of assets from the treasury have been transferred, with all clues pointing to his daughter-in-law, Anna. The governor of the Isle is furious and has offered a bounty of ten million Echoes for the capture of this former socialite. The Whispers Police Department also stated that recent disappearances are significantly linked to her, and they have reason to suspect¡­¡±


    Anna poked her finger at her photo in the newspaper. ¡°The likeness is uncanny; I¡¯ll have to cover my face when I go out.¡±


    The maid, confused, glanced at the portrait of Charles nearby and asked, ¡°Mistress, didn¡¯t you say you could change your appearance? Why not transform into a new one?¡±


    Anna tilted her head. ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t like it.¡±


    The maid cast a side-eye at Charles¡¯s portrait but said nothing, continuing to knead Anna¡¯s soft shoulders.


    Flipping through a few more pages of the newspaper, Anna¡¯s left hand instinctively reached for Charles¡¯s portrait beside her.


    After studying it for a while, she grew irritated and slammed the portrait down onto the table. ¡°Martha, put this away.¡±


    The maid obediently nodded and stored the portrait in the nearby wardrobe.


    She knew that it wouldn¡¯t stay there for long, as this scenario had repeated several times.


    ¡°Why are we heading to the Crown of the World? Even if we can¡¯t stay on the Isle of Whispers, there are other large islands we could go to. I¡¯ve heard that while the Crown of the World has a grand name, it¡¯s not very populated and isn¡¯t ideal for living; it¡¯s more like a remote, impoverished place.¡±


    ¡°The larger places have too many eyes from various factions; it¡¯s hard to do anything without interference. Smaller places are better; they attract less attention. Now that the funds are in place, it¡¯s time for me to do something significant.¡±

 **Chapter 137: Anna**

    After the maid placed the book back, she returned to continue massaging Anna''s shoulders. ¡°Mistress, may I ask what you plan to do?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not fond of the way this world is; I want to see if I can change a place into what I like. Yes, that¡¯s right, that¡¯s what I want to do most at the moment¡ªnot dwell on those false memories all day long.¡±


    With that, Anna lazily pushed herself up from the lounge chair. ¡°How long until we arrive?¡±


    ¡°According to the crew, this passenger ship¡¯s next stop is the Crown of the World, and we should be there in an hour or two at most.¡±


    ¡°In that case, have the others in the cargo hold prepare. I¡¯ll grab a bite to eat first, then we¡¯ll disembark together.¡±


    As the door opened, Anna stepped out, dressed in a form-fitting black lace gown. To avoid being recognized, she wore a half-transparent veil over her face. This only added to her allure, shrouding her in an air of mystery.


    She gazed out at the dark sea, stretching her arms upwards and leaning back slightly, lazily yawning. The seductive curve of her body caught the attention of men in the corridors on either side.


    Before long, one man took action.


    With a confident stride, a middle-aged man in shiny high-heeled shoes and a tailored suit, sporting a thin mustache above his lips, approached her. ¡°Beautiful lady, may I invite you to the masquerade ball? If you choose to join, the queen of tonight''s ball may very well be you.¡±


    Anna quickly sized him up and shook her head. ¡°I would love to go, but I¡¯m not in a position to be in the spotlight right now.¡±


    With that, she turned and walked down another corridor.


    The middle-aged man, undeterred, hurried after her. ¡°Where are you headed? I¡¯m quite familiar with this ship; perhaps I can show you the way.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to the lower hold.¡± The sound of Anna¡¯s black heels clicking sharply against the deck echoed as she walked.


    Upon hearing ¡°lower hold,¡± the man¡¯s expression changed. He quickly followed her, trying to persuade her. ¡°Why would you want to go to such a place? That¡¯s where only the lower class goes; a beauty like you would be throwing a diamond into a gutter.¡±


    ¡°Ha ha,¡± Anna chuckled lightly.


    ¡°Madam, I¡¯m not joking. Those down there are ignorant crooks and criminals; it¡¯s very dangerous for you to go there.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? If it¡¯s so dangerous for a delicate woman like me, shouldn¡¯t you, as a gentleman, accompany me to protect me?¡±


    The man stood frozen, his expression a mix of confusion and embarrassment. After a long pause, he ultimately decided not to follow her.


    Anna descended the iron staircase from the VIP quarters down to the deck, ignoring the sailors¡¯ warnings as she ventured into the ship¡¯s hold.


    The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    She continued her descent, layer by layer, where dim oil lamps replaced bright electric lights, and a strange odor began to fill the air.


    When she finally reached the bottom level, the sight of overcrowded people made her feel as though she had entered a concentration camp.


    Perhaps due to the absence of windows, the air was stifling, filled with the smell of sweat. Most of the men were stripped down to their underwear, and the few women present wore as little as possible. Most people could only sit, with barely any space to lie down.


    A hint of discomfort crossed Anna¡¯s face. ¡°This ship is like the Titanic above; how can it be so different down here? There¡¯s not even a private space.¡±


    In such a place, the sudden appearance of a well-dressed woman drew significant attention. The eyes of several shirtless men lit up, but they only dared to look from a distance.


    Anna slightly bent down to a boy of about fourteen or fifteen standing nearby. ¡°Hello, may I ask if anyone here is named Charles¡­?¡±


    Before she could finish, the boy recoiled in fear, as if the alluring woman before him was more terrifying than anything else. When one¡¯s own status is reduced to the lowest point, the approach of beauty can only evoke instinctive fear.


    Anna glanced down at her own body, momentarily wondering if she had inadvertently revealed her true self.


    ¡°Excuse me, miss, do you need something?¡± Finally, a woman with a child spoke up.


    ¡°Um¡­ I¡¯m looking for someone named Charles. Never mind, it seems he¡¯s not here.¡±


    As Anna turned to ascend the stairs, the woman eagerly called out to the crowd, ¡°This lady is looking for someone named Charles! Can anyone help her find him?¡±


    The previously silent crowd suddenly buzzed with conversation, inquiring if anyone knew a Charles.


    Seeing this, Anna felt it would be rude to leave now.


    A short-haired girl beside the woman looked up at Anna¡¯s silk gown in awe. ¡°Sister, you¡¯re so beautiful.¡±


    No woman dislikes being complimented on her beauty. Anna bent down and gently patted the girl¡¯s head. ¡°You¡¯ll be beautiful too one day.¡±


    The little girl smiled sweetly. ¡°Sister, where are you going on the ship?¡±


    ¡°To the Crown of the World.¡±


    ¡°Really? My mom and I are going there too!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Why are you and your mother going there?¡±


    ¡°Because people at sea say the governor of the Crown of the World is very generous. If we go there, we¡¯ll get a piece of land, and if we really get land, we can plant rye and won¡¯t have to spend money on bread anymore.¡±


    Anna turned to the girl¡¯s mother. ¡°That place isn¡¯t very suitable for living. Are you sure you want to take your daughter there?¡±


    The woman¡¯s face showed a bittersweet smile. ¡°The child¡¯s father hasn¡¯t returned from the sea, and we have no other choice. At least there, we can survive.¡±


    Anna cupped the little girl¡¯s face in her hands, gazing into her innocent eyes, momentarily lost in thought.


    ¡°Why are you going to the Crown of the World, sister? Are you going there to farm too?¡±


    Hearing this, the woman quickly pulled her daughter back, embarrassed. ¡°I apologize; she doesn¡¯t know any better and speaks out of turn.¡±


    Anna shook her head, indicating she wasn¡¯t bothered.


    Just then, the crowded area parted, and a frail, bald old man emerged. ¡°I¡¯m Charles. Are you looking for me?¡±


    Upon connecting the name with the Charles in her mind, Anna suddenly burst into laughter, covering her mouth.


    This laughter left everyone else in the hold puzzled.


    ¡°Ha ha ha!! Gao Zhiming, is that really what you look like when you get old?¡±


    After finally managing to suppress her laughter, Anna crouched down again, gently hugging the little girl and saying to the woman behind her, ¡°Once you arrive at the Crown of the World, you should head back. It¡¯s not a suitable place to live, and it will soon become chaotic there.¡±


    With that, Anna turned and walked back up the stairs.


    The old man named Charles stood there, bewildered, unsure of what had just happened.


    The stifling environment suddenly buzzed with chatter as everyone discussed the veiled woman and her appearance.


    The little girl, feeling a bit stiff, leaned closer to her mother and whispered, ¡°Mom, look.¡±


    Her small palm opened to reveal a dazzling diamond earring.

 **Chapter 138: The Crown of the World**

    ¡°Woo~~¡±


    As the sharp whistle of the ship echoed, Anna was completely captivated by the unique island before her. At its center stood a giant mushroom, as large as a mountain peak, its broad cap shimmering with a faint blue glow, standing out starkly against the dark backdrop.


    Leaning over the ship¡¯s railing, Anna peered at the mushroom. ¡°What a spectacular sight! If only I had a phone, I could take a selfie.¡±


    As she spoke, the commotion below caught her attention. She looked down to see the people from the lower hold starting to disembark.


    Turning back to her servants, she commanded, ¡°Get everything ready; we¡¯re going down.¡±


    A dozen beautiful women stood neatly behind her. ¡°Yes, Mistress!¡± they replied respectfully.


    The crowd disembarking at the Crown of the World was sparse. Aside from the lower-hold passengers, only Anna and her entourage were present. Compared to the bustling Coral Island dock, this place felt lifeless, with very few laborers around.


    Anna''s several large trunks monopolized the few workers available at the dock.


    ¡°Be careful with those; they contain very valuable items. You wouldn¡¯t be able to pay for them if you sold yourselves,¡± Anna¡¯s maid, Martha, warned the laborers.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, esteemed guest. It¡¯s not every day we get business like this; we¡¯re just as nervous as you,¡± the laborers replied, their faces covered with cloth as they hurried to carry the boxes.


    As Anna slowly made her way onto the dock, she heard a series of coughs that started as a few sporadic sounds but quickly escalated to hundreds of people coughing in unison.


    A boy tugged at his mother¡¯s sleeve. ¡°Mom, my throat itches. It really itches.¡±


    At that moment, several merchants rushed into the crowd, brandishing thick cloth and masks, each trying to outdo the other in their sales pitches.


    ¡°Face masks for 35 echoes, masks for 40 echoes! Come quickly; too much exposure to the spores of the Crown of the World isn¡¯t good for you!¡±


    ¡°Exactly! There¡¯s a saying here: you can go out without clothes, but you can¡¯t go without a mask!¡±


    Most of the impoverished lower-hold passengers had little money, and aside from a few parents buying masks for their children, the majority simply pulled clothes from their bags to cover their mouths.


    One salesman approached Anna, holding a mask with a smile. ¡°Madam, yours is too thin. Try this one instead. Three layers of spider silk from Spider Island; it can block 90% of spores.¡±


    The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    Anna removed her veil, revealing her stunning beauty, leaving the salesman momentarily dumbfounded.


    She closed her eyes, took a deep breath, and smiled slightly. ¡°Mmm, a sweet scent. I¡¯m starting to like this place.¡±


    ¡°Sweet? How can it be sweet?¡± The puzzled salesman took off his mask and inhaled deeply, only to break into a series of sneezes before hastily putting the mask back on.


    Outside the dock was the port area, where the buildings, with mushrooms growing on their roofs and corners, looked dilapidated. Only a few people wandered the streets, a stark contrast to other islands.


    The people of the Crown of the World bore no significant difference in appearance from those elsewhere, except that they all wore masks or cloths covering their mouths and noses.


    As the impoverished lower-hold passengers stood helplessly on the street, a middle-aged man in a blue uniform approached, flanked by a dozen subordinates, holding a brass megaphone.


    The rotund man brought the megaphone to his lips and began to announce, ¡°I know you may have heard about the wonders of the Crown of the World on other islands. Yes, the flyers aren¡¯t wrong! As long as you have hands and feet, Governor Tucker will not only lend you farming tools but also provide seeds. When the rye is harvested, after the governor takes his 50% tax, the rest is all yours!!¡±


    The crowd erupted in excitement, rushing toward him.


    ¡°Don¡¯t push! Form a line and come one by one!¡±


    Martha, covering her nose with her scarf, looked at Anna in surprise. ¡°Mistress, I thought they were just making empty promises, but they really are giving away land! There are still such good people in the world.¡±


    Anna shook her head slightly. ¡°Silly girl, how could such a good thing be true? Look over there.¡±


    Following her pointed finger, Martha saw a row of neatly arranged fields outside the port area, where masked farmers bent over, carrying oil lamps as they worked, resembling fireflies scattered among the trees.


    ¡°Wow, the rye here grows so tall! The yield must be impressive.¡±


    ¡°This place is fertile precisely because of the land of the Crown of the World. However, this is both a blessing and a curse. The spores here can enrich the soil, but they pose a significant threat to human health.¡±


    Anna began walking toward the main road leading to the fields.


    ¡°The longer people stay here, the more their lungs will be eroded by the spores of the Crown of the World. Once their lungs fail, their lives will come to an end. This fertile rye is watered with human blood.¡±


    At this point, Anna suddenly chuckled. ¡°The Dewa tribe may indulge in cannibalism for fun, but when it comes to the art of eating people, humans are the true experts.¡±


    ¡°Cough~ cough!! Cough cough!!¡±


    An elderly man crouched on the street coughed violently, pulling down his mask to desperately inhale, but the spores in the air only worsened his condition.


    Seeing his reddened face, a hint of fear crossed Martha¡¯s face.


    ¡°Are you regretting bringing them here?¡±


    Hearing Anna''s voice, Martha hurried to catch up, shaking her head with determination.


    ¡°I¡¯ve been by your side since childhood; my life exists for you, Mistress. Wherever you go, I will follow, even if you want to eat me. I would gladly do so!¡±


    Anna smiled slightly, reaching out to stroke her maid¡¯s soft hair, her gaze akin to that of someone admiring a small cat or dog.


    ¡°Why would I eat you? You¡¯ve been with me for so many years; you¡¯re practically family.¡±


    Martha¡¯s face lit up with excitement. ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Mistress. I will serve you to the best of my ability until my lungs give out!¡±


    Anna pulled her up and walked toward the fields outside the port area. ¡°Don¡¯t worry; you¡¯re someone I chose with great care. I can¡¯t let you die like this. There¡¯s a place in the Crown of the World where you won¡¯t have to endure the torment of the spores, and that¡¯s our goal.¡±


    As she spoke, Anna leaned slightly to gaze toward the top of the Crown of the World, where scattered lights twinkled.

 **Chapter 139: The Crowns Apex**

    "Though there are few people on this island, the nobles live atop the giant mushroom, managing all the farmers below and collecting taxes from them." Anna said to her maid as they walked along the mushroom-lined streets.


    "Are they really profiting from the lives of these farmers? That''s just too wicked," her maid replied.


    Anna nodded in agreement. "You''re right; these people are truly despicable. Such a lucrative place should belong to me."


    With her servants in tow, Anna continued down the main road. Although there were rickshaws in the port area, she chose to walk, wanting to measure her new territory with her own feet.


    Not all of the land in the Crown of the World was farmland; between the fields were low huts where the farmers lived. As Anna entered one, she found it empty except for some mushrooms growing in the corners, with only faint coughing sounds indicating that it wasn''t a dead village.


    She navigated through the village and continued toward the end of the street. After three hours of walking, Anna finally reached the base of the Crown of the World. Beneath the giant mushroom hung a large wooden basket, the thick rope extending upwards.


    "I need to go up; I have important matters to discuss with your governor." Facing the black-skinned guard at the lift, Anna pulled out a badge from Heifang Island and spoke in a commanding tone.


    Seeing Anna''s demeanor and attire, the guards in black uniforms dared not obstruct her and quickly opened the lift door.


    As a group of strong men shouted commands, they operated the winch, slowly raising Anna''s wooden basket upwards. The basket ascended through a hole carved into the Crown of the World, eventually reaching the umbrella-like top.


    Anna felt the sweet scent in the air dissipate. The surface of the Crown seemed to possess some magical property, isolating the spores while also shielding her from the suffering and poverty below.


    Before her appeared a quiet and peaceful town. Under the bright streetlights, the townspeople were well-dressed, a stark contrast to the desolate farms below.


    Suddenly, a fluffy little dog ran up to Anna''s feet and sat, gazing at her with big eyes. A boy in a bowtie soon approached, apologizing to Anna before attaching a leash to the dog''s collar. "Goodbye, sister."


    Watching the boy lead the dog away, Anna closed her eyes and took a deep breath. "What a wonderful place; I''m feeling a bit hungry."


    After observing the surroundings for a while, Anna headed toward the largest building in the town¡ªthe governor''s mansion.


    This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    Her noble presence quickly earned her an audience, and she was led into a lavish reception room. As she surveyed the extravagant decor, disappointment crossed her face. "I don''t like this style. Martha, make a note to replace everything in this room."


    "Yes, Mistress, I''ll remember that," Martha replied.


    Just then, an elderly butler entered. "Governor Tucker is available now; you may go in."


    Anna was led to a bedroom where she found Tucker lying in bed, drinking milk. He was a tall and robust young man, surprisingly handsome.


    Sensing a familiar scent in the air and seeing the disheveled sheets, Anna frowned slightly. "Which island are you from? If you''re just here to buy grain, you can talk to the people below. Why do you need to see me? Hurry up; I have important matters to attend to."


    After finishing his milk, Tucker set the cup on the table and reclined back on his bed.


    "I''m not here to discuss grain, but rather matters concerning your island," Anna replied.


    Hearing her pleasant voice, Tucker propped himself up and looked at Anna. Upon seeing her alluring eyes through the veil, his expression brightened. "Name your price; stay on my island."


    Anna smiled slightly. "As long as you can meet my demands, I will consider your offer."


    "Oh?" Tucker seemed intrigued, throwing off his blanket and walking up to Anna in the nude. "This is interesting; no one from other islands has come to see me in ages. Who are you working for?"


    "Governor, the matters we need to discuss are very important. Don''t you think there are a bit too many people here?" Anna gestured to the servants and guards around them.


    Tucker waved his hand, and the room''s occupants respectfully exited. Anna''s maids followed suit.


    Anna''s expression shifted rapidly as her voice became stern. "Is it appropriate to speak to your sister like this?"


    Tucker''s eyes began to cloud, but as a ring on his left thumb glowed red, his expression quickly sharpened. "Are you altering my memory?"


    Suddenly, a wooden spike shot out from beneath the bed, striking Anna in the chest. Her beautiful face twisted in pain as a monstrous tentacle creature shrieked and fled the room.


    Shadows leaped from the bed, pursuing the creature. Hearing the commotion outside, Tucker displayed disdain and turned back toward his bed. "People really think they can come bother me? The Crown of the World may be small, but it¡¯s still a living island. Did they really think I was unprepared?"


    Just then, he heard a noise behind him. Turning around, he saw Anna and shouted impatiently, "Sister!! What''s wrong with me having fun with a woman? Why do you have to stare so intently?"


    "Have you forgotten your promise to Father? What have you been doing all these years?" Anna glared at him, unscathed.


    "So what? Father has been dead for five years! I''m the governor of this island now! Get out!" Tucker shouted angrily.


    "Keep living like this, and one day you''ll die at the hands of a woman," Anna said, leaving with a look of disappointment.


    "That¡¯s none of your business! You old maid who can¡¯t get married!" Tucker waved his arms in frustration, not noticing the faint crack forming on his ring.


    As Anna stepped outside, she saw her maids moving bodies, each now holding various peculiar artifacts.


    Among them were her former servants and some cloaked figures, all wearing expressions of shock and fear.


    "Mistress, congratulations! This island now belongs to you," Martha greeted her with a smile.


    Anna stretched and shook her head. "Not yet. The connections tied to a governor are too complex. Occupying someone else''s territory requires careful management. I wonder how Charles is doing."

 **Chapter 140: Kedes Secret**

    On the desolate plains, Charles walked blindly forward, his crew having vanished, leaving him alone. He had lost track of time and was unaware of how long he had been walking, but some force compelled him to keep moving.


    Suddenly, a red security door, adorned with an upside-down "¸£" character, appeared before him. It was the door to his home. An excited expression broke through Charles''s numb face as he rushed toward it. "I''m going back! I''ve found it!"


    The door opened, but inside was nothing¡ªno darkness, just an endless void. Charles''s body jerked violently as he awoke from the nightmare.


    He found himself staring at a book, his hand gripping a pen, writing something on the page.


    "Hey, you had another nightmare. Just give me a moment to finish this chapter, and I''ll return your body," came a voice.


    Once his body was back in his control, Charles pushed the door open and stepped onto the deck. The dim sea was still empty; they were still on their way to the Land of Light.


    Charles sighed, understanding why he had that dream. He had faced many dangers without fear, but now that he was close to home, he felt a twinge of anxiety. What if the marked location on the map had no exit? What if the exit led to another world? Thoughts raced through his mind, leaving him feeling restless.


    Suddenly, a whisper echoed in his ears, sharp enough to hurt his eardrums. "Shtunggli grah nn fhhui Y!!"


    "Damn!" Charles cursed, raising his prosthetic arm to hit his forehead, hoping to dispel his agitation with pain. After two strikes, his forehead broke skin and began to bleed. Just as he prepared for a third strike, a metallic hand reached out to stop him.


    It was the doctor''s prosthetic. He handed Charles a cup of dark green potion.


    Charles didn''t say anything; he tilted his head back and drank it. The extreme bitterness made his face contort, but the potion worked, dulling the whispers in his ears.


    "Thanks," he said, handing the cup back.


    "Just a reminder, that''s the last potion I can prepare. Your mind is unraveling. Although I''m a doctor, I can''t understand your condition anymore, and I don''t know how long you can hold on."


    "The voyage will end soon¡ªat most three days. After that, I won''t set sail again."


    "Hmph," the doctor scoffed. "Whether you sail or not, the other crew members are already showing mild symptoms of scurvy. If you don''t find supplies in that cursed place, everyone on this ship will die. Don''t forget your duty as captain; you must be responsible for the lives of your crew."


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    Before Charles could respond, the doctor limped back toward the cabin.


    Charles suppressed his unease and began his usual rounds on the Unicorn. The crew sensed their captain''s mood, each one working diligently to avoid drawing his ire.


    Three days passed, then two, then one. As they drew closer, the sea remained pitch black, and Charles''s agitation grew.


    On the last day, Charles sat in the cabin, attempting to paint a landscape, but the more he painted, the worse it looked.


    "Bang!" He slammed the canvas against the wall, splattering paint everywhere.


    With a twisted expression, he snapped his brush in half and threw it to the ground. Frowning, he stood up, loaded his gun, and prepared for another round of inspections. But someone stopped him.


    "Have a drink with me." Kede, with dark circles under his eyes and looking exceptionally haggard, stood before Charles, holding two bottles of liquor.


    Charles and Kede had never been friends; their relationship was purely utilitarian. Yet, if anyone could understand Charles''s feelings, it was the old man before him.


    "Fine." Charles took one of the bottles from Kede.


    The two stood on the deck, drinking and chatting.


    "Charles, you know, I haven''t slept much these past few days. My heart is really uneasy."


    "I can see that."


    "Do you think the Land of Light really exists?" Kede asked, hesitation lurking in his bloodshot eyes.


    "Why do you ask? That doesn¡¯t sound like something a devout believer would question."


    Kede opened his mouth to say something but seemed startled by his own words. He paused for a long time before lowering his voice. "What if there is no Land of Light? What if there''s nothing there? Maybe that map is a fake?"


    "It exists. I''ve been there; in fact, I''m from that place."


    Kede stared at Charles for a long time before bursting into laughter. "Charles, I believe you. Cheers!"


    Charles downed a large gulp of alcohol, feeling his chaotic thoughts begin to settle.


    As they took turns drinking, half the bottle was gone. Whether he was truly drunk or just pretending, Kede leaned closer, slapping Charles''s prosthetic arm playfully.


    "Charles, I have a secret to tell you. Don''t tell anyone else, okay?"


    "Go ahead."


    Kede leaned in close, his breath reeking of alcohol. "Actually, thirty years ago, during the blessing ceremony at the Church of Light, I saw so many people die. I was scared, so I found a way to hide and didn''t receive the blessing."


    Charles remained silent, taking a sip of his drink and waiting for Kede to continue.


    "Think about it! They drove thick steel nails into their heads¡ªhow painful that must have been! I still can''t forget the screams of those people. Only a fool would do that. I''m a smart man; do you know how easy it is for a smart person to blend in among fools? Why would I act like one?"


    Charles tapped his bottle against Kede''s. "I figured that out long ago."


    "Impossible!" Kede waved his bottle, nearly hitting Charles. "I¡­ I''ve hidden this secret for so many years. How could you possibly find out!"


    "How many times have you deceived me? Since the first time you tricked me in Sodom, I started to doubt you."


    Charles noticed a writhing black shape in the distance on the sea, instinctively pulling his gaze away.


    Kede slid down the ship''s railing and sat on the deck, resembling a drunken fool as he shouted into the vastness of the ocean. "Those fools, no matter how devout, what good are those disgusting rituals? In the end, it was an ordinary person like me, who never received the blessing, who found the Land of Light!"


    "When I get back, I''m going to pry open the eyelids of those stubborn old fools and show them who the true devout follower of the God of Light really is!!"

 Chapter 141: Dawn

    "Yes, yes, you will succeed." Charles casually responded to Kod''s ramblings, not taking them seriously.


    After taking another swig from his bottle, Kod suddenly stood up nervously and asked Charles with a jittery tone, "Tell me, do you think the God of Light will reject me because I didn¡¯t perform the ritual? Will he deny me entry into the divine realm?"


    "Don¡¯t worry, your God of Light isn¡¯t that petty. Besides, you¡¯re so devout."


    "Right, right, you¡¯re absolutely correct. I¡¯ve been praying every day for over thirty years. No one in the entire church is as devout as I am. The God of Light surely won¡¯t mind such a small thing." Kod repeated Charles¡¯ words, trying to reassure himself.


    "Do you want to know what the Land of Light looks like? If you beg me, I might tell you." Charles, slightly tipsy, teased Kod.


    "You¡­ hic! Go ahead, tell me." Kod¡¯s face was flushed red, and he was so drunk he could barely stand.


    Gazing at the dark sea in the distance, Charles began to recount his memories of the surface world, his voice tinged with nostalgia.


    As the conversation grew more animated, Charles even pulled out some of his old drawings depicting the surface and shared them with Kod.


    "No, no, the Land of Light can¡¯t possibly look like this. It¡¯s completely different from what¡¯s recorded in the New Testament. You must be drunk!" Kod shook his head vigorously, rejecting Charles¡¯ description of the surface. He tossed his empty bottle aside and snatched the bottle from Charles¡¯ hand.


    He took another gulp and began to speak with an air of authority.


    "Let me, a holy man of the Church of Light, tell you what the Land of Light truly looks like. It¡¯s the realm of the God of Light, a pure land that rejects all filth and darkness. There, every desire is fulfilled, and devout believers will attain eternal life under the divine radiance. And¡­"


    At this point, Kod suddenly stopped as if he had forgotten his lines.


    Charles, lying on the deck with his legs crossed, chuckled. "Hahaha, keep going. Why did you stop?"


    Kod¡¯s body began to tremble. He pointed at the sea and stammered, "Am I¡­ am I seeing things? Over there¡­ it just lit up."


    "What?!" Charles instantly sobered up. He quickly flipped over and stood up, looking out at the distant sea.


    At the horizon, a faint yellowish glow appeared, like the first light of dawn faintly visible on the edge of the world.


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    As their ship drew closer, the glow seemed to grow brighter.


    "What¡­ what is that? Charles, tell me, what is that?" Kod¡¯s voice was filled with both fear and anticipation as he shook Charles vigorously.


    Charles stood frozen, his eyes fixed on the yellow light. All he could hear was the sound of his own heartbeat growing faster and faster.


    The anomaly on the coastline quickly caught the attention of the other crew members. Soon, the entire crew of the exploration ship gathered on the deck, pointing and discussing the strange phenomenon.


    Just as they were heatedly debating what it could be, a piercing scream erupted on the deck.


    The scream snapped Charles out of his trance. He turned around and saw his vampire crewmate emitting white smoke from his body.


    "Mother above!! Aaaaah! My skin is melting! It hurts so much!! Aaaaah!!"


    Odrick screamed as he stumbled toward the cabin, trying to escape.


    Kod burst into maniacal laughter. "That¡¯s sunlight! That¡¯s the Land of Light! The Land of Light rejects all creatures of darkness, including vampires!! We¡¯ve reached the Land of Light!!"


    His words echoed across the deck, and everyone¡¯s expressions turned to astonishment. It seemed Kod¡¯s claims were true¡ªthey had indeed found the Land of Light.


    "Slap, slap, slap." Deep kept hitting his own face, trying to wake himself up from what he thought was a dream.


    "Big guy, I don¡¯t have the strength. Hit me."


    James, standing beside him, grabbed his neck and punched him squarely in the face. Blood immediately streamed from the young man¡¯s nose.


    "Does it hurt??"


    "It hurts. So this is real."


    Strange reactions spread among the crew. Some wept, others laughed hysterically, and many, like Deep, slapped themselves to ensure they were awake.


    As the ship slowly approached, a blinding light, like a sword of radiance, pierced through the dark sea.


    At the center of the light was an island completely bathed in sunlight¡ªa vibrant, green island full of life.


    Soon, the island¡¯s features became clear to Charles. It was a tropical island, larger than Coral Island by half, with several peaks in the distance.


    Unlike other islands in the sea, Charles immediately recognized the trees as familiar surface plants¡ªmajestic palm trees, broad-leafed banana trees, and coconut trees heavy with fruit. Everything felt so familiar.


    Facing the legendary land, no one could contain their excitement. The moment the ship docked, everyone rushed onto the white sandy beach like madmen.


    The first thing they did was look up, searching for the source of the light. Even Charles was no exception.


    The sunlight was too intense, causing tears to stream down Charles¡¯ face, but he couldn¡¯t bring himself to close his eyes. He was afraid that if he did, the hopeful light might disappear.


    Charles noticed that the source of light wasn¡¯t directly above the island but slightly off to the side. This life-giving sunlight was streaming through a crack in the celestial dome above.


    Charles stared in awe, and suddenly, he spoke.


    "Buddy, it¡¯s so high up. How do we get there?"


    "Yeah, how do we get there?" Though it was a question, Charles¡¯ voice was filled with joy, and a wide smile spread across his face.


    "Thud." Kod suddenly collapsed onto the ground, his fingers pressed against his white triangle hat. Tears of excitement streamed down his face.


    Charles, who had been looking up, glanced down and saw black spots in his vision. He wasn¡¯t alarmed; it was just the afterimage from staring at the sun for too long.


    "Hey, Kod, stop looking. You¡¯ll get cataracts if you keep this up." Charles walked over and nudged Kod¡¯s yellow-robed body with his foot.


    "I¡¯ve never felt such peace in my heart¡­ I feel¡­ I feel the God of Light has come to take me¡­" Kod murmured through his tears.

 Chapter 142: Sunlight

    Seeing Kod¡¯s dazed and incoherent state, Charles decided to ignore him and turned around, walking toward the others who stood frozen like wooden stakes. He snatched the telescope from the second mate¡¯s hand and rapped him on the head with it. "You¡¯re something else. You¡¯re probably the first person in the world to use a telescope to look directly at the sun."


    "Captain, what¡­ what is that thing?" Konor stammered, pointing at the sky.


    "The sun, obviously. What else could it be?"


    Charles shoved the telescope back into his arms and crouched down to pick up the motionless white mouse from the ground, kneading it in his hands. "Stop staring, or you¡¯ll go blind, little mouse."


    "Mr. Charles, is that your home up there? The place with the television and computers?" Lily¡¯s furry head popped out from between his fingers, her voice filled with excitement.


    Charles smiled, tossing her into the air and catching her as she squealed. "That¡¯s right, little Lily. That¡¯s my home."


    Just as Charles finished speaking, he heard a heavy thud behind him, as if something had fallen onto the sand.


    "Huh?" He turned around and saw Kod, who had been sitting on the ground, now lying face down in the sand.


    A sense of unease washed over Charles. He grabbed the mouse and rushed to Kod¡¯s side, pulling him up. "Hey, hey, what¡¯s wrong? What happened?"


    Kod didn¡¯t respond. His face bore a serene smile, but he was completely still.


    Charles¡¯ heart sank. He pressed his fingers to Kod¡¯s nose and found no breath.


    "Thud."


    "Thud."


    "Thud."


    The sound of heavy objects hitting the sand continued behind him. Even though he was bathed in warm sunlight, Charles felt a chill run down his spine.


    He turned around and saw people in the crowd collapsing onto the sand one by one, unable to move.


    The joy in his heart vanished instantly. Charles¡¯ lips trembled as he shouted, "Everyone, back to the ship!! Everyone, get back to the ship!! The sunlight is killing people!!"


    At Charles¡¯ command, the crew finally noticed the strange condition of their companions. Their expressions shifted from ecstasy to confusion, then to fear.


    The crowd began to move, rushing back to the ship faster than they had come. Some stumbled and fell, and those who hit the ground never got up again.


    Deep, agile and quick, was the first to return to the deck of the Narwhal. He stood at the ship¡¯s edge, pulling his comrades aboard one by one. After a headcount, he realized something was missing.


    Stolen content warning: this tale belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences elsewhere.


    The young man looked toward the beach and saw his captain standing at the boundary between light and darkness, half of his body illuminated by the sun and the other half shrouded in the shadows of the sea.


    "Captain!! Come back!! It¡¯s dangerous there!!" Deep shouted anxiously.


    Seeing the frantic crew on the ship, Charles signaled for them to wait. He lifted his left leg and stepped back.


    One by one, he removed his clothes until his scar-covered body was fully exposed to the blazing sunlight.


    Charles spread his arms and stood motionless under the watchful eyes of everyone. His gaze was resolute.


    He knew the most rational course of action was to return to the ship and figure out what was going on, but Charles couldn¡¯t wait any longer. He couldn¡¯t bear it anymore.


    If the sunlight from the surface was truly going to kill him, he¡¯d rather die under it right now.


    One minute, two minutes, three minutes passed. Charles felt nothing but warmth on his skin. There was no sign of harm.


    Looking up at the light in the dome, Charles¡¯ lips curled into a faint smile. He had guessed correctly. He had basked in the sunlight on the surface countless times. He refused to believe that after nine years, the sun wouldn¡¯t recognize him.


    Charles lowered his arms and looked at the ship on the dark sea and the pairs of eyes watching him. A wave of emotion washed over him.


    Kod¡¯s words echoed in his ears: "The Land of Light is the realm of the God of Light, a place that rejects all filth and darkness."


    He didn¡¯t know who had come up with that, but from what he saw now, it wasn¡¯t just vampires¡ªhumans from the sea were also rejected by the sunlight.


    "Maybe the humans of the sea have been in the dark for too long. Some things have become a part of them," Charles murmured to himself.


    After standing in the sunlight for a while, Charles gathered the bodies on the sand. After a quick count, he found that seventy-nine people had died on the beach, including Kod, one of the leaders. The loss was significant.


    Charles had wondered why the King of Sodom, knowing about this place, hadn¡¯t sent pirates to claim this paradise. Now he understood.


    With a sigh, Charles closed Kod¡¯s wide, lifeless eyes. He took one last look at the blinding light and turned to swim back to the Narwhal.


    As soon as Charles boarded the deck, he saw the captains of the remaining twelve exploration ships and the rest of the crew waiting for him.


    No one spoke. Their eyes, filled with a mix of emotions, were fixed on Charles.


    Wasn¡¯t this the Land of Light? Why had so many people suddenly died? Why was Charles unaffected? What was the true purpose of their mission? Too many questions swirled in their minds.


    Taking the towel from Deep, Charles dried himself and addressed them directly. "I won¡¯t say much else. You¡¯ve all seen what happened. Kod wasn¡¯t lying to you. We came here to find the Land of Light. But this island isn¡¯t it. The true Land of Light is up there, beyond that crack in the sky."


    The murmurs of the crowd were quickly silenced as Charles continued.


    "And I¡¯m from there. The fact that the sunlight didn¡¯t kill me is proof."


    Charles had said these words countless times in the sea, but this was the first time no one laughed.


    "Our next goal is to find a way to get up there."


    "But the divine light of the God of Light will kill us. Why should we go up? The legends of the Church of Light are lies! That place is filled with deadly light. It¡¯s uninhabitable!" someone objected.


    "No, no, you don¡¯t understand. Yes, the sunlight can kill you, and that¡¯s a challenge. But challenges can be overcome. If we can¡¯t find a solution here, there are plenty of smart people up there who can. Even if it means wearing protective suits all day or only coming out at night, it¡¯s still ten, a hundred, a thousand times better than this hellhole!"


    "You all know about the sinking of Shadow Island. Do you really want to live in constant fear that your island might sink next? Let me tell you something." Charles pointed at the light in the sky.


    "Up there, in the legendary Land of Light, there¡¯s a continent larger than the entire sea. The land is incredibly fertile, and it will never sink!"

 Chapter 143: The Way Up

    "What is your greatest wish? To occupy an island with fresh water? Let me tell you, in the Land of Light, fresh water flows as abundantly as seawater. People there even use fresh water to bathe."


    "Like¡­ like the Islanders??" Konor asked, his eyes filled with longing.


    "Exactly. Once we reach the Land of Light, none of us will have to struggle on this mad sea anymore. Everyone can live like the Islanders."


    Charles¡¯ enticing words eased the fear of death, and everyone began discussing excitedly.


    Those who lived on the sea had always been indifferent to life and death. Those who feared death wouldn¡¯t have boarded an exploration ship in the first place.


    However, not everyone was blindly optimistic. The captain of the amphibious exploration ship, dressed in a black uniform, calmly addressed Charles. "Captain Charles, even if what you say about the surface is true, how do we get up there?"


    Yes, how do they get up there? This was the same question troubling Charles. As far as he knew, the sea hadn¡¯t developed much in the way of aerial technology.


    "Does anyone among your crew have the ability to fly?" Charles asked them.


    The captains looked at each other, then turned their gazes back to Charles. "Mr. Charles, don¡¯t you have a relic that can turn you into a giant bat?"


    Charles pulled out the Bat Mirror, thought for a moment, then put it back. "This probably won¡¯t work. Its previous owner was a vampire, and vampire relics are likely even more vulnerable to sunlight."


    "You won¡¯t know until you try, Mr. Charles. Let me do it!" A young man with a white prosthetic eye eagerly stepped forward from the crowd.


    Without a word, Charles tossed the Bat Mirror to him.


    The result was disappointing. The giant bat burst into flames the moment it took to the sky, quickly turning to ash and scattering in the wind.


    Frowning, Charles picked up the mirror, which gleamed in the sand. He had thought finding the exit would solve everything, but he hadn¡¯t expected the exit to be in the air.


    "Right, how do we get up there with such a huge sun? What if it¡¯s Africa up there, where it¡¯s never cloudy? Wouldn¡¯t that mean we¡¯d never get up?"


    Listening to Richard¡¯s complaint, Charles¡¯ eyes lit up. He suddenly realized he had been stuck in a blind spot.


    Having spent so long in the underground sea, Charles had momentarily forgotten that the sun on the surface wasn¡¯t always present.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Richard immediately understood Charles¡¯ idea. "Buddy, you¡¯re brilliant! You remembered that there¡¯s no sun at night. That means we can return to the surface in at most twelve hours!"


    Charles nodded, looking at the Bat Mirror in his hand with a hint of excitement.


    This was good news, and Charles quickly shared it with everyone.


    Upon hearing this uplifting news, everyone¡¯s faces lit up with joy. It meant they could soon reach the legendary land.


    No one could remain calm in the face of such news. The day¡¯s emotional rollercoaster was unprecedented for the crew, and it was a serious challenge to their facial muscles.


    Among the whistling, celebrating crew, the first mate, Bandage, secretly spat blood into the sea.


    Charles noticed this immediately and walked over to ask, "What¡¯s wrong? Are you injured?"


    Bandage shook his head and opened his mouth, revealing a bloody mess inside.


    "Nothing¡­ ate too much fish¡­ mouth¡¯s a bit rotten¡­"


    Charles immediately understood. Bandage likely had scurvy, caused by a lack of vitamin C.


    Thinking back to what the ship¡¯s doctor had mentioned, it probably wasn¡¯t just him. Other crew members likely had the same issue, though the severity varied.


    Glancing at the bright tropical island in the distance, Charles thought for a moment and patted his first mate on the shoulder. "Wait here for a bit."


    Charles returned to the island and began searching through the dense forest. The trees were lush, and there were many plants. Soon, Charles found some familiar fruits.


    Among them were bananas nearly a foot long and pineapples the size of fists.


    Most fruits contained vitamin C, and these tropical fruits could easily solve the problem. As for testing whether these fruits were poisonous, Lily¡¯s mice could handle that task.


    Charles continued collecting various fruits, but as he did, he noticed that the distribution of fruit on the island was unusually dense, unlike an ordinary forest.


    When he climbed onto a tree trunk and saw the ruins almost completely covered by plants in the dense jungle, he finally realized who had brought these fruits here.


    Charles approached and found that, although most of the buildings were dilapidated and decaying, they still bore the minimalist style of the Foundation.


    Charles wasn¡¯t surprised to find Foundation buildings here. Given their opportunistic nature, it would have been strange if they hadn¡¯t noticed an exit point to the surface.


    Among the ruins, a long glass structure caught Charles¡¯ attention. Shattered glass pieces were scattered everywhere, and the rust-free steel rectangular frame, like the skeleton of a giant worm, stretched into the lush forest.


    "A greenhouse?" Charles dismissed the idea when he saw a steel house inside.


    "The Foundation is impressive. They managed to build an elevator at such a height," Richard said, looking up at the crack in the dome.


    The steel house was an elevator room, and the steel supports were part of the Foundation¡¯s elevator that once led directly to the crack in the sky.


    Charles didn¡¯t know if there were other exits, but he guessed this was one of the Foundation¡¯s main routes to the surface.


    "Time to go back." Charles gripped the fruits entangled in vines and quickly leaped through the trees toward the shore.


    Most of the fruits Charles brought back didn¡¯t taste great. The small green pineapples were numbing and astringent.


    The bananas, though large, had no sweetness, and their seeds were huge.


    Among all the fruits, only the coconuts were somewhat palatable.


    Still, the vitamin C intake was sufficient.


    The fruits were heavy with water, and after several trips, Charles was exhausted. There was no other way; he was the only one who could move freely under the sunlight.


    Wearing sunglasses he had taken from a vampire, Charles lay on the beach, sipping coconut water and basking in the sun.


    After finally seeing the sun again, he was reluctant to return to the darkness.


    "Chirp, chirp~" The sound of mice came from Charles¡¯ left. Curious, he looked up and saw Lily and her mouse friends nibbling on the coconuts he had picked.

 Chapter 144: The Earth Has Stopped

    Charles¡¯ heart tightened instantly. He quickly grabbed Lily and turned over, shielding her with his body from the sunlight. "Are you trying to get yourself killed?"


    "Mr. Charles, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m fine. It seems the sunlight doesn¡¯t harm mice."


    "How do you know that??"


    "It¡¯s true. Mao Mao and the others secretly followed you into the forest earlier."


    When Charles saw that none of the mice nibbling nearby had died, he finally let out a sigh of relief.


    Perhaps it was because mice and humans from the sea had different physiological structures, but it seemed the sunlight indeed didn¡¯t harm these rodents.


    "Looks like mice and cockroaches are the most adaptable creatures on Earth," Charles concluded, finding this the most plausible explanation.


    Lily scratched at the crisscrossing scars on Charles¡¯ body with her tiny paws. "Really? So mice are that amazing, huh?"


    "Yeah, Lily, you¡¯re incredible." Lying on the warm sand, Charles felt a wave of drowsiness wash over him. His eyes fluttered shut. "Lily, I¡¯m going to take a nap."


    This nap was unusually peaceful. He didn¡¯t have any nightmares, and when he woke up, his mind felt clear and refreshed.


    He found himself buried in the sand, with a few crooked little sand houses standing on top. The clear mouse paw prints on them were unmistakably Lily¡¯s handiwork.


    "She¡¯s still such a mischievous kid," Charles muttered as he sat up, brushing the sand off. Soon, he spotted the creator of these sand sculptures not far away.


    Lily was in the distance, directing the mice to bury the bodies. Each grave had a thoughtful half-branch stuck into it.


    "Mr. Charles, can you lead a funeral for them??" Lily looked up at Charles as he approached.


    "I don¡¯t know how," Charles replied, pulling out his pocket watch.


    "Come on, just say a few words. Leading a funeral is easy. My father¡¯s hospital had people die all the time. You just stand in front of their graves and¡­"


    Lily¡¯s voice trailed off as she saw Charles¡¯ relaxed expression twist into something grim. "Mr. Charles, what¡¯s wrong?"


    "Lily, how long was I asleep?" Charles¡¯ hand holding the pocket watch trembled slightly.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    "About ten hours or so. Mr. Charles, is your pocket watch broken? Doesn¡¯t it show the time?"


    "Clang!" The pocket watch slammed into the sand, startling Lily, who immediately hid behind her companions.


    Watching Charles unleash a torrent of curses in languages she didn¡¯t understand, the white mouse¡¯s eyes filled with concern.


    "Jump Jump, do you think Mr. Charles has gone mad?" Lily whispered sadly.


    The brown mouse beside her squeaked twice, and Lily smacked it with her paw. "Don¡¯t say that about Mr. Charles! How could he have always been crazy?"


    Soon, Charles¡¯ frantic movements stilled. He lay on the sand, panting heavily.


    Hesitantly glancing at the steamship in the darkness, Lily cautiously approached. "Mr. Charles, what¡¯s wrong?"


    "Whoosh!" Charles¡¯ hands shot out like shadows, grabbing Lily in an instant. His bloodshot eyes bore into her.


    "Why hasn¡¯t the sun set yet? It¡¯s been thirteen hours! Do you know what this means?"


    "Mr. Charles, you¡¯re hurting me." Lily winced, her tiny paws pushing against Charles¡¯ fingers.


    "It means the damn Earth has stopped spinning! It means something catastrophic has happened on the surface! It means everything up there has changed! It means even if I can get up there, my home is gone!!!" Charles¡¯ grip tightened unconsciously.


    "Hisss!!" The mice swarmed, frantically biting Charles¡¯ arms.


    Charles threw Lily down, standing frozen like a statue.


    Lily, lying in the sand, burst into tears, not just from the pain but also from Charles¡¯ terrifying behavior.


    The mice squeaked, carrying the sobbing Lily as they swam back to the Narwhal.


    When the crew on the ship asked Lily what had happened, she tearfully recounted the events.


    Hearing the story and glancing at their motionless captain on the beach, Second Mate Konor turned to the doctor with concern. "Doctor, has the captain caught some illness?"


    The doctor shook his head, taking a swig from his flask. "Not sure. If he were driven mad by the sea¡¯s whispers, it wouldn¡¯t look like this. Let¡¯s see how he behaves next."


    "Are you even qualified to be a doctor?"


    The doctor glared at him. "That area¡¯s filled with deadly light! What do you expect me to do? Rush over and die? I¡¯m old, but I¡¯m not ready to kick the bucket yet!"


    Time passed minute by minute, and the crew of the Narwhal began to grow restless. Anxiety was written on everyone¡¯s faces.


    Bandage, standing in a corner, silently walked over to the deck cannon.


    "Boom!!" The cannonball struck the beach, creating a massive crater.


    The sound jolted Charles awake. He glanced at the Narwhal, then swam over.


    As Charles climbed aboard using the rope ladder, the crew felt even more uneasy seeing his calm expression.


    "Deep, go call the other captains. I have an announcement to make."


    Deep, visibly unsettled, nodded and entered the wheelhouse to sound the horn.


    "Hey, Charles, what happened earlier?" the doctor asked, scrutinizing Charles¡¯ face.


    "Nothing, nothing."


    Charles walked over to Lily and knelt down. "Lily, I¡¯m really sorry for hurting you earlier. I apologize."


    Lily, her furry face streaked with tears, didn¡¯t respond. She curled up inside the brown mouse, leaving only her tail visible.


    "I¡¯m truly sorry. I lost control of my emotions when I realized something catastrophic had happened in the outside world. Please forgive me."


    Hearing this, Lily quickly poked her head out of the brown mouse, her voice filled with concern. "Mr. Charles, what about your home? Can you still go back?"


    Charles gently picked Lily up, stroking her tiny head.


    "Yeah, I might not be able to go home. But no matter what¡¯s happened up there, I want to see it for myself. If my family is still there, I¡¯ll do everything in my power to find them and save them. If¡­"


    Charles paused for a moment.


    "If my family and my home are gone, then I¡¯ll rebuild a new home right where it used to be!"

 Chapter 145: Other Solutions

    Listening to Charles¡¯ words, Lily nuzzled her furry face against his hand. "In that case, I won¡¯t be mad at you anymore. I¡¯ll help Mr. Charles build a new home. But you have to promise not to pinch me again. It really hurt."


    "I promise," Charles said, gently stroking her head.


    As Charles comforted his gunner, a bandaged arm suddenly rested on his shoulder. There was only one person on the Narwhal who dressed like that.


    Charles turned to look at his first mate. Though Bandage didn¡¯t say a word, Charles could sense his concern. "It¡¯s fine. Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ve endured so much over the years. A small setback like this won¡¯t break me."


    "Can¡­ you¡­ tell me¡­ about your past¡­?" Bandage spoke slowly.


    Charles looked at the bandaged face for a few seconds, then nodded. "Sure."


    He stood up and began recounting his journey to this world in a calm tone.


    As Charles recalled the events of the past nine years, he suddenly realized he had left many marks in this place.


    When Charles finished, Bandage paused for a moment before speaking. "Captain¡­ are you really¡­ sure that up there¡­ is your world¡­?"


    "I¡¯m absolutely certain!" Charles said firmly. "Not just because I fell into the sea when I arrived, but also because the Foundation¡¯s records provide crucial evidence. They mention surface locations. The artifact that replicates everything, 157, was discovered in Edinburgh. 1002 also mentioned that the Foundation¡¯s surface headquarters is in Washington. Though these places aren¡¯t in my country, they are part of my world!"


    Bandage looked up at the crack in the sky, his eyes filled with deep confusion. "Then¡­ do you think¡­ I might¡­ be from up there too¡­??"


    The question caught Charles off guard. Considering the mysteries surrounding Bandage, it was indeed a possibility.


    Charles smiled and patted Bandage on the shoulder. "When we get up there, try to recall your memories. Maybe seeing a familiar environment will help you remember."


    Bandage turned to Charles. "Then¡­ let¡¯s find a way¡­ to go up together."


    "Right."


    As Charles spoke, he suddenly noticed an unusual silence behind him. He turned around and saw that the other captains had arrived at some point and were quietly listening to his conversation with Bandage.


    Charles cleared his throat. "Let¡¯s head to the captain¡¯s cabin. There¡¯s been a change in the situation. We need to discuss our next steps. Linda, you come too."


    Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    Charles walked toward the cabin, and the twelve captains quickly followed, leaving the deck much emptier.


    "This is the situation. Due to the Earth¡¯s rotation stopping, the environment up there has undergone some changes. We might never see nightfall again. We need to find another way to get up there."


    Feuerbach raised his right hand, signaling he had something to say.


    Seeing Charles¡¯ gaze turn toward him, Feuerbach touched his nose and spoke. "Mr. Charles, you say you know the Land of Light very well, but do you really?"


    "What do you mean?" Charles frowned.


    Feuerbach stepped forward, standing out from the group of captains. "I¡¯m not questioning you, but I have a small doubt. Could you clarify something?"


    "Just like the sea here, no one can claim to know every island in the four seas. Since you say the Land of Light up there is much larger than down here, isn¡¯t it possible that in areas you¡¯re unfamiliar with, there¡¯s a place where it¡¯s always day?"


    "How could there be a place on Earth where the sun¡ª"


    Charles was about to refute when his pupils suddenly contracted. He hadn¡¯t thought of it before, but Feuerbach¡¯s reminder made him realize that such places did exist on Earth.


    The North and South Poles experienced polar day. If the crack above led to one of the poles, it was possible the Earth hadn¡¯t stopped rotating.


    A glimmer of joy rose in Charles¡¯ heart. If that were true, it meant everything up there was normal, and modern society still existed.


    "Buddy, that doesn¡¯t make sense. Look at that sun. The poles are so cold. Could the sun be that nice there?" Richard interjected.


    "Why are you so sure? Have you been to the North Pole?"


    "Come on, before we came down here, we hadn¡¯t even left our province. How would we know what the sun is like at the poles?"


    Seeing Feuerbach¡¯s questioning look, Charles pushed aside the myriad thoughts in his mind.


    "Maybe. But that¡¯s not important right now. Regardless of what¡¯s causing the polar day, we need to solve our problem. As long as there¡¯s sunlight, the Bat Mirror won¡¯t work."


    "Our main issue now is how to get up there. Once we reach the surface, all our questions will be answered. And our time isn¡¯t unlimited. The pirates of Sodom could come to collect sunlight at any moment."


    It was indeed possible that the crack led to one of the poles, but the pirates of Sodom wouldn¡¯t wait for Charles to go from polar day to polar night. The transition between the two took a full six months. And that was just a possibility.


    Hearing Charles¡¯ last words, all the captains¡¯ expressions turned serious. Before coming here, they had raided the pirates¡¯ occupied Freshwater Island. If they ran into those pirates again, none of them would fare well.


    "You¡¯re the leader now. So, what should we do?" the captain with a hook for a hand asked Charles.


    Charles, his brow furrowed, tapped his fingers rhythmically on the table. His current situation was difficult. He couldn¡¯t go up, couldn¡¯t go back, and the pirates of Sodom could arrive at any moment.


    The atmosphere in the cabin was tense. Everyone¡¯s eyes were on Charles. As the leader of the fleet, he had to come up with a solution.


    "Do any of you have a special way to contact other islands?" Charles asked.


    A captain with a cold expression stepped forward. "I do, but we¡¯re too far away. If my ship gets within three hundred nautical miles to the west, I can contact my father on the island."


    "Can you transport items?" Charles touched his prosthetic arm.


    "Yes, but only small things, and there¡¯s a chance they¡¯ll get lost."


    "Can your father send something to the main island of the Church of Light?"


    "He can. He¡¯s not far from the Grand Cathedral."


    "That¡¯ll do. Linda, I remember Kod had a camera, right? Is it still on the ship?"


    Linda, who had been standing in the background, was taken aback. She hadn¡¯t expected to be involved.


    "Yes, he brought it. It¡¯s in the darkroom of the Divine Domain."


    "Good. Bring me the camera. I need to take some photos of this island." Charles had thought of a way to get out of this predicament.

 Chapter 146: Photos and Charcoal

    "Click." The sound of the camera shutter echoed. Linda lifted the black cloth covering herself and the camera, handing the developed photo to Charles, who was waiting nearby.


    The unprocessed image was a blank, white expanse, nothing particularly interesting to look at.


    Charles flipped the photo over and, using a ruler and pen, began drawing a precise nautical map on the back, using Coral Island as the anchor point.


    On the table beside him, a small stack of photos already lay, each with an identical nautical map drawn on the back.


    As long as the Church of Light could obtain even one of these photos, they would be able to locate this sunlit island of hope.


    This task could have been delegated to others, but Charles trusted his own hands more than anyone else¡¯s.


    "Captain, we¡¯re almost out of film," Linda said calmly.


    "Wait." Charles took out a pair of sunglasses, removed the lenses, and crossed them over the camera lens.


    "Point it at the crack above and use up the remaining film."


    Charles refused to believe that, faced with such undeniable evidence, the followers of the Church of Light could still feign ignorance.


    This was the solution Charles had come up with: using concrete evidence to show the Church of Light followers that the Land of Light they so desperately sought was right here. If they wanted to meet their great God of Light, they needed to hurry.


    If there was any organization in the sea more eager than Charles to find the Land of Light, it had to be the Church of Light, which worshipped the sun as their deity.


    The Church of Light¡¯s influence in the sea was staggering. Once they arrived here, not only would they bring aircraft, but if it meant returning to the Land of Light, they would even mobilize the entire sea to build a tower reaching the heavens. That would be far faster than Charles working alone.


    Moreover, once the Church of Light followers arrived, the threat of the pirates of Sodom would naturally dissipate. In a head-to-head battle, pirates were no match for fanatics. Besides, the Church of Light had far more followers than the pirates of Sodom.


    After quickly finishing the nautical map on the photo, Charles carefully stacked the photos and handed them to the waiting, grim-faced captain.


    "Monchi, take these. I don¡¯t know what method you¡¯ll use to send them, but these photos are crucial to all our lives. Make sure your father delivers them to the lunatics at the Grand Cathedral. Tell them Kod is here, and he¡¯s found the legendary Land of Light. These photos are the proof."


    The captain named Monchi solemnly took the photos. However, he didn¡¯t turn to leave immediately. Instead, he looked up at Charles and said, "Three hundred nautical miles is a long way. My ship doesn¡¯t have enough fuel to make it there. If we pool the remaining fuel from all thirteen ships, I might be able to reach it."


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    "You can¡¯t go alone. Your ship needs an escort. We must ensure there are no mistakes."


    "What about fuel then?"


    Charles¡¯ gaze turned to the lush forest bathed in sunlight. "How could we not have fuel? Isn¡¯t that all fuel over there?"


    Monchi and Linda exchanged glances. "But apart from you, none of us can get over there right now."


    "There are plenty of ways to block sunlight. Are we going to let ourselves be defeated by such a small problem? If there¡¯s no good solution, there¡¯s always a crude one."


    Soon, the small boats used for landing from all thirteen exploration ships were lowered and rowed toward the shore.


    When they approached the edge of the sunlight, all the crew flipped their boats upside down, carrying them on their backs as they walked onto the shore. The bright sand was soon dotted with what looked like land submarines on legs.


    By the time they reached the shore, Charles had already built a simple thatched shelter.


    Most of the ship¡¯s workers, skilled in repairing ships, found building a shelter to block the sunlight an easy task.


    Using the wood, palm leaves, and banana leaves Charles had transported, the crew expanded the shaded area rapidly.


    Soon, a large shaded area covered by leaves appeared on Hope Island, expanding quickly.


    With the activity area completed, the crew got to work. Using their "land submarines," they felled the sturdy trees and quickly cut them into pieces.


    Simply hauling wet wood back to the ship as fuel was too inefficient. Before transporting the wood to the ships, they had to turn it into charcoal.


    Turning wood into charcoal was a simple process. First, they dug a pit in the ground, arranged the cut wood inside, and placed some dry grass on top.


    After layering wood and grass, they sealed the top with wet mud. They lit the dry grass from the bottom, and white smoke began to pour out of the ventilation holes at the top.


    In this incomplete combustion process, the wood quickly carbonized, turning into high-quality fuel.


    Under the thatched shelter, charcoal kilns of various sizes were lit. Within a day or two, the once beautiful forest on the island was left scarred, the serene woods reduced to bare stumps.


    Environmental protection was, of course, not on Charles¡¯ mind. His only concern was how to get more fuel.


    By the third day, the first batch of charcoal kilns had completely cooled. Charles pulled out the fully carbonized wood from the hardened mud.


    Breaking it in half, he saw that the charcoal was thoroughly burned, with clear texture and vibrant color.


    Even though Charles didn¡¯t know much about charcoal, he could tell this batch was good.


    "Throw it into the turbine and see how it burns," Charles said, handing the charcoal to James beside him.


    The big man nodded, bagged the charcoal, and headed toward the shore.


    By now, the thatched shelter extended into the sea, allowing direct passage from the island back into the darkness.


    Charles continued inspecting the other charcoal kilns. As he checked the third one, he saw someone dart out of the shelter, grab something from a bush, and quickly run back.


    It was his boatswain. Charles walked over and smacked the back of his head. "What are you doing? Trying to get yourself killed??"


    Only then did Charles see the rusted mechanical device in his hand, which looked like something left behind by the Foundation.


    Deep grinned nonchalantly. "Captain, it¡¯s fine. We¡¯ve all figured it out over the past few days. Staying in the sunlight for a short while won¡¯t kill you."


    Charles couldn¡¯t help but feel his boatswain was a bit reckless. There was no need to test such things. One mistake could cost a life.


    After repeatedly warning him not to do it again, Charles headed toward the left side of the shelter. The twelve captains were approaching, seemingly with something to discuss.


    As always, the enthusiastic Feuerbach was the first to speak. "Captain Charles, my men have found fresh water over there."


    "So what?" Charles replied. With the trees growing so well, of course there was fresh water, not to mention the Foundation¡¯s ruins.


    The other captains¡¯ faces lit up with eagerness. "Can we discuss the issue of claiming this island?"

 Chapter 147: Governor of Hope Island

    Seeing the eager looks in their eyes, Charles immediately guessed their intentions.


    "Are you seriously discussing this with me in such a critical situation?" Charles frowned slightly.


    At such a crucial moment, they still had the leisure to talk about the ownership of a livable island?


    Feuerbach stepped forward with a smile and said to Charles, "Everyone knows you¡¯re the one leading this fleet, and the nautical charts belong to you and Kod. So, of course, you¡¯re the governor of this island. But since we¡¯ve all risked our lives to help, don¡¯t we at least deserve the right to pledge our loyalty?"


    The other captains nodded in agreement.


    When they saw that the simple thatched shelter could block the deadly sunlight, they couldn¡¯t sit still anymore. The island¡¯s richness was obvious to anyone who wasn¡¯t blind.


    If it was habitable and had fresh water, it was a livable island.


    The burly man with a golden hook on his hand stepped forward. "When we seized fuel at Freshwater Island, everyone risked their lives. According to the old rules of conquering islands in the sea, we have the right to pledge our loyalty to you."


    After saying this, he glanced at Charles nervously and added in a low voice, "Of course, it¡¯s fine if you reduce the share a bit."


    Charles knew the so-called "old rules." As long as you helped the governor conquer a livable island, everyone on the assisting ships would own a portion of the island.


    This wasn¡¯t just a reward for conquering the island; it was also a reward for protecting it in the future. Only by tying everyone together with a chain of interests would they wholeheartedly assist the governor in managing the island.


    This was how the initial leadership of island governors in the sea was established. Only by banding together could they avoid being swallowed up by other governors.


    Hearing the captains¡¯ words, the crew members nearby stopped their work and looked over nervously.


    They couldn¡¯t help but be anxious. If Charles agreed, no matter what happened to the Land of Light, they would become islanders in the future.


    Seeing their expressions, Charles knew that if he didn¡¯t agree, they wouldn¡¯t be able to focus on anything else.


    "Fine, it¡¯s just a loyalty pledge, right? I¡¯ll sign it. Once it¡¯s done, get back to work."


    Everyone¡¯s faces lit up with joy, and the captains quickly pulled out the loyalty pledges they had already prepared.


    If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    "Looks like everyone was ready for this, huh?" Charles uncapped his pen.


    Feuerbach handed over a red, gold-lined paper first.


    "Actually, most exploration ship captains keep two copies of the contract in their captain¡¯s cabin. One is submitted to the Explorers¡¯ Association as proof of becoming a governor, and the other is a loyalty pledge to other governors."


    Charles took it and, after confirming it was a standard format, signed his full name¡ªCharles Reed¡ªin the governor¡¯s position.


    According to the sea¡¯s rules, each surviving captain would own 3% of the island. The twelve captains together would own 36% of the island¡¯s sovereignty, while the remaining 64% belonged to Governor Charles.


    This was equivalent to owning shares in an island. If the island collected taxes, the shareholders would never starve. They were the first beneficiaries.


    After quickly signing the twelve loyalty pledges, Charles capped his pen and said impatiently, "Alright, get back to work."


    To him, this was completely unnecessary. They were about to reach the surface, yet they were still fussing over such trivial matters.


    Feuerbach shook his head. "Governor, there¡¯s one more step."


    The crew in the shelter seemed to anticipate this. They put down their work and quickly formed a large circle, their faces filled with excitement as if witnessing history.


    Under everyone¡¯s gaze, all the captains knelt on one knee in front of Charles, their left hands on their right shoulders and their right hands holding the loyalty pledges, their expressions solemn and dignified.


    "I swear eternal loyalty to the governor, never to betray, never to deceive!"


    "I swear to bravely fight against all external threats, defend our territory, and never yield an inch!"


    "I swear that I and my descendants will forever serve the Reed family until the island sinks!"


    The captains read out the pledges one by one, their voices growing louder.


    When the final pledge was read, all twelve bowed their heads to Charles in unison. "Governor, please name the island."


    Charles glanced at the sunlight outside the shelter and said, "Hope Island."


    As soon as the words left his mouth, the crew erupted in cheers. Their identities had changed. They were no longer desperate outlaws struggling at sea; they were now noble islanders.


    Watching his second mate, Konor, jump around with a wide grin, Charles couldn¡¯t understand their excitement. Compared to the surface, what was so great about owning a barren island?


    Feuerbach leaned in with a smile. "Governor, while the scenery you described is indeed tempting, it¡¯s also too tempting and too distant. Everyone cares more about what they can see and touch right now."


    "Is that your goal too?" Charles looked at Feuerbach.


    "Of course," Feuerbach replied with a matter-of-fact expression. "I¡¯m also an exploration ship captain. My dream is to become an islander. Look how happy I am."


    Charles still didn¡¯t fully believe the green-haired man¡¯s words, but at least he didn¡¯t seem to have any ill intentions.


    "Enough of this nonsense. If we don¡¯t send out those photos, none of us will leave."


    Soon, Charles realized that the pledge ceremony had some use. The morale among the crew had noticeably improved, and everyone¡¯s faces were filled with hope for a better future. Hope Island, true to its name, brought hope to everyone.


    The enthusiastic crew worked quickly, and the fuel tanks of the twelve ships were soon filled.


    Standing in the wheelhouse, Charles frowned as he looked at the nautical chart on the wall. Three hundred nautical miles wasn¡¯t too far for a steam ship with a full tank.


    But Hope Island was already near the edge of human exploration. No one knew what lay in this uncharted sea.


    To ensure success, Charles decided to have all twelve ships escort Monchi.


    Although he was reluctant to return to the sea, there was no other choice.


    Watching the dozen exploration ships with their searchlights shining brightly, Charles slowly said, "Set sail. Let¡¯s go."


    Bandage nodded beside him and began turning the helm.


    The sunlight of Hope Island gradually disappeared on the horizon as the Narwhal, carrying Charles, and the twelve exploration ships merged back into the darkness.

 Chapter 148: The Elite

    "What¡¯s our current speed?" Charles asked, standing in the wheelhouse and staring at the nautical chart.


    "15 knots, Captain," Konor reported, his eyes shining as he turned to Charles. "Captain, after this voyage, there should be a long break, right? Since you¡¯ve already claimed a livable island, my goal has been achieved. I¡¯d like to take some time off and return to Volcano Island to bring my family here."


    "Sure. Once the Church of Light arrives, you can go back with their ship. When I¡¯ve settled things up there, I¡¯ll send someone to bring you back down," Charles agreed.


    Konor gripped the helm, hesitating as he looked at Charles¡¯ back.


    "Speak up if you have something to say. Don¡¯t beat around the bush."


    "Captain, if the Land of Light really exists, you won¡¯t stay with us on Hope Island, will you?"


    Charles glanced at him but didn¡¯t respond, continuing to study the chart on the wall.


    Konor chuckled awkwardly. "Actually, everyone can sense how much you want to return. The ship¡¯s doctor said you don¡¯t feel any attachment to this sea. You¡¯ve always been trying to escape it."


    Charles checked his pocket watch and drew a dotted line on the chart.


    After observing Charles¡¯ expression, Konor spoke again. "Captain, if you go up there, you don¡¯t need to come back for me. Even if the Narwhal never sails again, you¡¯ll always be my captain."


    "You¡¯re not going to the surface? Why?" Charles turned to his second mate in surprise.


    "Captain, just as your world is up there, mine is here in the sea. I¡¯ve achieved my dream. I plan to spend the rest of my life on Hope Island."


    "Haven¡¯t you heard me talk about the surface? Why would you want to stay in this hellhole?"


    "Because I¡¯ve become an islander. I don¡¯t want to keep struggling."


    "Everyone up there can live like islanders."


    "That¡¯s exactly why I don¡¯t want to go up!" Konor¡¯s voice suddenly rose.


    He breathed heavily, his voice filled with frustration. "I¡¯ve worked so hard to become one of the elite. I don¡¯t want to go to a place where everyone is equal! I want to enjoy the privileges of being an islander! I want to live the life of an islander, doing whatever I want!"


    Charles looked at his second mate with a complex expression. He hadn¡¯t expected this to be the reason Konor didn¡¯t want to go to the surface.


    You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.


    "Was I being too idealistic? Maybe the surface is paradise for me, but for them, it might not be so wonderful?"


    The air in the cabin felt heavy. "Captain, why don¡¯t you just stay here as governor? You have everything you need here. Why¡ª"


    "Enough. I don¡¯t want to discuss this. Bring the ship closer to Monchi¡¯s. I want to see how he¡¯s doing," Charles interrupted.


    If he didn¡¯t want to go, so be it. Everyone had their own ambitions, and Charles wasn¡¯t going to force him.


    Konor swallowed his words and silently turned the helm.


    When he saw Monchi¡¯s ship¡¯s searchlight shine over, Charles stepped out of the wheelhouse and raised his prosthetic arm toward the nearby exploration ship.


    The anchor hook shot across and latched onto the other ship. With a mental command, the chain retracted, pulling Charles over.


    Watching his captain leave, Konor pulled out a pendant from his chest and stared at it for a long moment before putting it back. His eyes were slightly red. "Misha, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m an islander now. I can take you back."


    As soon as Charles boarded the ship, he saw a grapefruit-sized purple crystal kept in a glass jar, tightly held by Monchi.


    Seeing Charles approach, Monchi greeted him. "Governor, the crystal lit up briefly earlier. I think we¡¯re close enough to establish contact now."


    "Will this artifact fail at a critical moment?" Charles pointed at the crystal with his index finger.


    "Absolutely not. This teleportation crystal is a family heirloom. My great-grandfather found it in the belly of a large fish, and it¡¯s been used for nearly a hundred years. It¡¯s saved lives several times."


    Charles stared at the crystal, feeling an odd sensation that it was staring back at him.


    Glancing at Monchi¡¯s gloomy expression, Charles took a step back. The artifact¡¯s side effects were probably severe.


    Just as Charles was about to ask about the cost of using the crystal, Monchi squinted and pointed into the distance. "Governor, look over there. There¡¯s something."


    Charles quickly turned and soon saw a faint white glow beneath the water in the distance.


    "Don¡¯t look at it. Pretend it¡¯s not there. Signal the Narwhal to change course," Charles immediately gave the most rational order.


    Whatever it was, Charles didn¡¯t want any complications right now.


    Bright yellow flags waved rapidly, and the fleet quickly turned, moving away from the faint, cold glow.


    Just as Charles thought this would be a minor incident, the white glow reappeared, this time closer¡ªclose enough for Charles to see the barnacle-covered deck.


    It was a steamship, a ghost ship sailing beneath the water.


    The hull, covered in thick barnacles and coral, emitted an eerie, cold light, making the sunken ship highly visible underwater.


    Of course, trouble always arises at the worst possible moment. Charles¡¯ expression darkened.


    It was clear this thing had targeted them. Without hesitation, Charles immediately ordered an attack.


    As the cannons roared, water columns over ten meters high erupted, but when the surface calmed, the ship remained unscathed, as if it were merely a reflection on the water.


    Seeing the cannons ineffective, Charles pulled out his lightning wand.


    At that moment, the ghost ship rapidly surfaced, releasing a nauseating stench of rot. A translucent green figure emerged from the ship¡¯s cabin.


    It appeared to be a ghost, but unlike the typical attire of sea captains, it wore a crisp naval uniform.


    As everyone on the ship stared in terror, the ghost politely saluted Charles.


    "Greetings, sir. I am the captain of Transport Ship D134. I¡¯m lost. Could you tell me the direction to East Nod?"


    Facing the eerie ghost, Charles quickly thought and replied calmly, "I¡¯m not familiar with the place you mentioned, East Nod."


    Whatever it was, he didn¡¯t want to provoke the ghost.


    Hearing Charles¡¯ response, the ghost¡¯s translucent face showed confusion. "You¡¯re not familiar? How could you not know? It¡¯s the place with an elevator leading to New Boundary City. Haven¡¯t you heard of it?"

 Chapter 149: Transmission

    An elevator? New Boundary City? "Is the ghost referring to Hope Island when it mentions East Nod?"


    Examining the ship''s design, Charles had reason to believe it had sunk during the time the Foundation still existed.


    If that were the case, it would explain why the ghost was asking such a question. All these years, it had been wandering the depths, searching for the vanished city.


    After a moment of quick thought, Charles slowly raised his hand and pointed in the exact opposite direction.


    His eyes were fixed on the ghost, wary of any sudden moves.


    To his surprise, the ghost showed no intention of attacking. It politely thanked him and turned to walk back to the wheelhouse.


    "Is this thing really just here to ask for directions?" Charles'' mind raced.


    As the ghost stepped into the cabin, Charles suddenly spoke up. "What¡¯s it like on the surface now?"


    The ghost slowly turned around, its translucent eyes filled with confusion. "What do you mean? The surface is just as it¡¯s always been."


    Recalling the never-setting sun under the dome, Charles pressed further. "Has the Earth stopped rotating? Or has some other disaster occurred?"


    Charles'' body tensed, his eyes locked on the ghost. If anyone in this world knew the state of the surface, it would be this ghost from the previous era.


    "What are you talking about? Sorry, I¡¯m in a hurry. I need to leave now," the ghost replied before turning back toward the cabin.


    The translucent ghost raised its hand in the direction Charles had pointed. "Transport Ship D134, full speed ahead! We must deliver this cargo before the 16th!"


    A chilling whistle sounded, and the ghost ship quickly submerged. The cold light faded like foam dissolving in water, and within seconds, the sea returned to its usual inky blackness.


    The surface of the sea calmed, but Charles'' mind remained unsettled.


    "What did the ghost captain mean by ''just as it¡¯s always been''? What¡¯s the surface really like?"


    "Did you see his reaction? There wasn¡¯t a hint of sorrow when we asked. If the Earth had stopped rotating, it would be a global catastrophe. He wouldn¡¯t have reacted like that."


    "That means the surface is fine! The Earth hasn¡¯t stopped rotating. Everything¡¯s normal up there. We can go home!"


    The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "Maybe¡­"


    Charles furrowed his brow, a darker suspicion creeping into his mind.


    Perhaps the surface had indeed stopped rotating, making it uninhabitable for humans. The Foundation might have brought everyone down to the underground sea to survive, like Noah¡¯s Ark in the Bible.


    If that were the case, it would also explain the ghost¡¯s strange demeanor.


    "Captain! The crystal¡¯s glowing!" Monchi¡¯s voice snapped Charles out of his thoughts. He turned to see the crystal in Monchi¡¯s hands emitting a faint purple light.


    "Start the transmission!" Charles hurried over. He quickly pushed aside the ghost¡¯s words. No matter what had happened, his goal was to reach the surface through the crack, and to do that, he needed to contact the Church of Light.


    Monchi first placed a sheet of white paper above the crystal. The paper floated, and then he placed his hands on either side of the crystal, shaking it in a specific rhythm.


    A solid purple beam of light emerged from the crystal. With a gentle touch, the paper instantly turned to powder, which then condensed and disappeared.


    Monchi nodded vigorously. "The test was successful. That was just a test sheet. Now we wait for my father¡¯s confirmation, and then I can start transmitting the photos."


    Not long after, a clump of powder materialized above the crystal, forming a ball of paper. Monchi caught it and quickly unfolded it.


    When they saw what was inside, both their pupils contracted. The transmission contained a piece of paper wrapped around a severed finger.


    In the top left corner of the paper, below the triangular emblem of the Church of Light, was a line of text written in blood: "Where is the traitor Kod?"


    "This¡­" Monchi trembled as he picked up the finger. "This is my father¡¯s finger."


    Seeing the white triangular emblem, Charles couldn¡¯t help but smile. It seemed the truth about Kod could no longer be hidden. The Church of Light had already found out, but that was even better¡ªthere was no need for an intermediary.


    "Governor, this is my father¡¯s finger," Monchi repeated, his voice filled with emotion.


    "Hurry, send the photos over. Quickly," Charles urged.


    Monchi quickly pocketed the finger and, with trembling hands, selected some of the prepared photos and placed them on the crystal artifact.


    But this time, something was different. When the crystal¡¯s light touched the photos, they burst into flames, quickly turning to blackened ash.


    "Did it fail? No matter, try again," Charles instructed.


    Monchi, forcing himself to stay calm, nodded and pulled out more photos.


    But before he could place them, another small bundle of paper wrapped around something was transmitted over.


    Charles quickly opened it to find a bloodied half of a palm, missing a finger.


    "Captain Monchi, tell your employer it¡¯s over. The Cardinal already knows of his deceit. No matter where he flees, he will be brought back to the Grand Cathedral to face final judgment!"


    "Keep transmitting," Charles ordered.


    Monchi, his lips tightly pressed together, said nothing and placed more photos on the crystal.


    As the light emerged from the crystal again, this time it succeeded. The photos disappeared perfectly.


    After the photos were transmitted, the other side seemed to pause, sending no more human remains.


    While they paused, Charles didn¡¯t. He ordered Monchi to transmit all the remaining photos in one go.


    Charles paced anxiously on the deck.


    Although he knew the news of the sun would be irresistible to these fanatics, as the critical moment approached, he still felt uncertain.


    The tense atmosphere lasted for a few minutes before being broken by a sheet of paper transmitted over.


    The handwriting was shaky, clearly reflecting the sender¡¯s excitement.


    "Esteemed Saint, your spirit shines as brightly as the Sun God¡¯s radiance. Your heroic deeds will be etched into the walls of the Grand Cathedral! The momentous news of your discovery of the Land of Light has been sent to the main island at the fastest speed. Please await further instructions!"


    Reading the message, Charles¡¯ lips curled into a faint smile, his eyes lighting up. It had worked.

 Chapter 150: The Cavendish Family

    Daniel, the Governor of Hefang Island, sat in his office, puzzled as he looked at the intelligence report in his hands.


    "What are those lunatics up to now?"


    Not just in Hefang, but followers of the Church of Light across the northern sea region were stirring, as if something significant was about to happen.


    "Could it be that after a few years of quiet, they¡¯re planning to go to war with the Ftan Cult again? Damn it."


    The thought made Daniel¡¯s head ache. If these two religions clashed, the entire northern sea region would be thrown into chaos, and his carefully laid plans would be completely disrupted.


    The door creaked open, and a handsome young man walked in. It was his son, Jack.


    "What have you been up to lately?"


    "I¡¯ve told you before," Jack said as he sprawled on the couch.


    "You¡¯re planning to take over the Seventh Division of the Police Bureau?"


    Jack¡¯s face showed a hint of disdain. "I don¡¯t want those people, Father. You probably don¡¯t know this, but some of them, relying on their ancestors being descendants of the island¡¯s founders, dare to collect salaries without even lifting a finger. I doubt they¡¯ve even touched an artifact. Hefang needs a completely new Seventh Division."


    Daniel¡¯s expression turned serious. "It¡¯s indeed time for a shake-up. The Seventh Division¡¯s strength must return to its peak. I¡¯ll issue a decree later. There¡¯s no room for negotiation. Anyone who dares to obstruct, no matter their background, will be dealt with."


    Jack knew his father meant business this time. The last incident had been a major embarrassment, with a woman making fools of them. It had turned the Cavendish family into a laughingstock among the other governors.


    "Why did you call me here? If there¡¯s nothing else, I¡¯ll head back. I¡¯ve got a lot of work to do."


    Daniel cleared his throat awkwardly. "Put aside what you¡¯re doing for now. I called you here to ask you to talk to your sister about that matter."


    Jack¡¯s eyes widened. "Why me?"


    "You¡¯re her brother."


    "So, because your daughter is ignoring you, you want me to be the bad guy, huh? My esteemed father."


    Daniel grabbed a nearby bronze cannon sculpture and hurled it at Jack. "Stop wasting my time and get to it!"


    With a thud, Jack caught the heavy miniature cannon with one hand. "Father, you owe me for this one."


    Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    Stepping into the garden outside, Jack casually plucked a flower and headed toward his sister¡¯s room.


    Ignoring the maid at the door who was about to announce him, Jack pushed the door open and walked in.


    "Brother, what do you want?" Margaret quickly shoved some papers into a drawer and turned to face her approaching brother.


    "This is the most beautiful flower I¡¯ve carefully selected in Hefang. Only such a flower is worthy of the princess of the Cavendish family."


    "Not this again. You just picked that from the garden, didn¡¯t you?" Margaret said with a look of disdain.


    Jack reached out and tucked the flower behind her ear. "As expected of my sister, so clever. I came here to tell you something. The son of the Governor of Mochen Island is coming to Hefang tomorrow. Do you want to meet him? I remember you used to play with him when you were kids."


    Margaret angrily pulled the flower from her hair. "Father sent you, didn¡¯t he? I¡¯ve said it enough times. I don¡¯t want to see them!"


    Jack, seeing the anger in his sister¡¯s eyes, quickly sidestepped and put an arm around her shoulders. "Don¡¯t be mad at me. The old man forced me to come. I had no choice."


    "Just leave. I don¡¯t want to talk to you right now," Margaret said, turning her head away.


    "Don¡¯t worry, sister. I¡¯m actually on your side," Jack said with a smile, nudging her with his shoulder.


    "Really?"


    "Of course. Honestly, your little secret is nothing. I¡¯ve already heard about it. It¡¯s just some boy, right? Let me help you figure it out. Do you really like him?"


    "What are you talking about?" The girl lowered her head shyly.


    "Why be shy? Do you want my help or not?"


    Margaret¡¯s face grew redder as she fidgeted with her skirt. In a barely audible voice, she said, "Yes¡­"


    Jack let go of her and paced around the room, pretending to think. "I¡¯ve come up with a few options. See which one suits you best. First, have him marry into our family and help us strengthen the Cavendish name. If you agree, I¡¯ll talk to Father."


    "That won¡¯t work. Captain Charles would never agree."


    "Then, second, let him go and wait until he conquers an island. Then he can come to Hefang to marry you."


    "How long would that take¡­ Besides, it¡¯s too dangerous," Margaret said, clearly unwilling.


    "Third, I¡¯ll have him captured and kept in a room, tied up for you to play with as you please. Once you¡¯re bored, you won¡¯t like him so much anymore."


    "Bang!" Margaret, her face bright red, slammed a thick book into Jack¡¯s chest. "Get out!"


    "Relax. Women of the Cavendish family can do whatever they want. Even if you play around with a few men, there¡¯ll still be a line of suitors waiting to marry you."


    More books flew toward him as Jack, chuckling, dodged and backed out of the room.


    Seeing her brother¡¯s grinning face at the door, Margaret sat down angrily, her back turned. Her eyes welled up with tears. "Liar! You¡¯re just teasing me!"


    Watching his sister¡¯s back, Jack¡¯s smile faded. He pulled a cigar from his pocket, lit it with a lighter, and took a puff.


    "No smoking in here!"


    As the flame flickered, white smoke enveloped Jack¡¯s face.


    "Margaret, you¡¯re 17 now. It¡¯s time to grow up. The reason you¡¯ve been so well protected isn¡¯t because the world is a kind place, but because Father has shielded you from its ugliness. You need to think about him too."


    Seeing his sister remain silent, Jack continued, "Do you know how much our family lost because of your last stunt, when Father had to search the entire sea for you? If the Cavendish family¡¯s position is taken by someone else, that so-called Captain Charles of yours won¡¯t give you the time of day."


    Margaret wanted to argue, but her brother¡¯s unfamiliar tone made her hesitate.


    "Sister, let go of those unrealistic fantasies. Think about what the daughter of a governor should do. Only by helping Father secure his position can you remain the jewel of Hefang Island."


    When Margaret finally turned around, her brother was gone, and the smell of smoke had faded.


    The girl pulled a piece of paper from the drawer. It was a lifelike portrait of Charles, secretly commissioned by her.


    She looked at the portrait, her lips downturned, her expression full of sorrow.


    "Why is it that when I like someone, everyone tries to keep us apart¡­"

 Chapter 151: Golden Radiance

    On the sunlit Hope Island, Charles sat in a grass hut on a small hill, shirtless, carefully examining the map of the island that had been surveyed.


    "This area can be designated as a residential zone, this one as a port area, and this flat area can be used for growing food. However, the black wheatgrass from the underground sea definitely can¡¯t withstand such intense sunlight. We¡¯ll need to find suitable crops."


    Drawing the map was a piece of cake for Charles, and soon the entire island was fully planned out. Normally, island planning would be done by professionals, but since there were none on the island, Charles had to take on the task himself.


    It had been a month since the photos were transmitted, and with nothing else to do, Charles began taking on the duties of the island¡¯s governor.


    Not only was he now the governor of Hope Island, but he also had another plan in mind. If he found his family and the surface was uninhabitable, bringing them down here would be a viable option.


    Charles stepped out of the grass hut with the completed map in hand.


    Looking around, the ground was covered with grass huts built by the crew. From above, they looked like a crooked, fat centipede nestled in the forest.


    The beauty of the island had made the crew restless, and many of them, wearing large leaf-made parasols, were excitedly exploring the area.


    They were sampling various fruits, undeterred even after getting poisoned several times.


    These explorers with their large parasols had scoured the entire island, bringing back valuable information about Hope Island.


    Hope Island was larger than Charles had imagined, measuring 63 kilometers in length and 42 kilometers in width, with an irregular diamond shape.


    Most of the island was covered in forests and shrubs, with gentle terrain and no significant peaks. The most ideal location for construction was undoubtedly the site of the Foundation¡¯s former ruins, where Charles planned to build the island¡¯s center.


    As Charles surveyed his territory, he noticed the crew cutting down trees in the distance. Frowning, he quickly rushed down.


    Upon arriving, he saw shirtless Dipp, wearing a large parasol, enthusiastically directing the workers.


    "Stop! Didn¡¯t I say no more tree cutting?"


    Dipp turned around with a grin. "Captain, we¡¯re planning to build you a governor¡¯s mansion! The carpenter from the Razorwave is amazing. He¡¯ll definitely build you the most impressive mansion in the entire underground sea!"


    "We¡¯ll build the governor¡¯s mansion later. No more trees are to be cut. I¡¯m not joking. This is an order."


    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    Trees were easy to cut down but much harder to grow. Charles didn¡¯t want his island to become barren in no time.


    Seeing Dipp¡¯s dejected expression as he walked back to the grass hut, Charles called him over. He needed to give this guy something to do, or he¡¯d definitely get restless.


    "Take some people and catalog all the plants on the island. Make sure to record the edible ones in detail."


    Selling charcoal was out of the question. If Hope Island had anything to offer in the underground sea, besides sunlight, it would be the fruits. Perhaps there was a business opportunity there.


    "Report, I request an extension of activity time by two hours," Richard¡¯s flippant voice echoed in Charles¡¯ mind.


    "What do you want now?"


    "I¡¯m preparing a gift for my sister. We¡¯ve been away for so long; we can¡¯t go back empty-handed. We should at least bring some local specialties."


    "So, last night when you went to the beach, you were also preparing local specialties for your sister?" Charles¡¯ question left Richard speechless.


    Charles didn¡¯t press further. He already knew what Richard was up to, and there was no point in asking more.


    The two would inevitably clash, but not now.


    Just as Charles was about to return to the grass hut to add more details to the map, he heard the sound of steam whistles from the sea.


    It wasn¡¯t just one whistle, but dozens of ships sounding their alarms simultaneously. In their code, this signaled the highest level of alert.


    "What situation would prompt the ships at sea to sound the highest alarm?" Charles¡¯ mind flashed to the suffocating shadow of Sorma.


    The crew, who had been happily exploring the island, rushed back to the coast at full speed.


    However, when they reached the beach, everyone froze. On the southern horizon, it seemed as if a new sun had risen.


    Grabbing a telescope from a nearby crew member, Charles saw the true nature of this "sun."


    It was a golden, radiant ship, over four hundred meters long. The dazzling light from the mirrors on the ship pierced through the surrounding darkness.


    Charles¡¯ heart, which had been racing, immediately calmed down. The prominent triangular emblem on the ship¡¯s hull confirmed its identity. It wasn¡¯t a pirate ship from Sorma; it was a ship from the Church of Light.


    Surrounding this massive ship were numerous smaller vessels.


    The sight of so many ships sailing toward Hope Island was spectacular, giving Charles the feeling of watching a military parade.


    But if anyone was more astonished, it was the people on the ships. Their reactions were similar to Charles¡¯ when he first arrived¡ªsome stood frozen in place, while others slapped their faces in disbelief.


    As the ships drew closer, almost to the point of running aground, Charles quickly had the Narwhal sound its whistle to alert them.


    The golden ship began launching smaller boats like dropping dumplings into water, rapidly approaching the beach.


    Some who didn¡¯t have boats couldn¡¯t wait and jumped into the sea, swimming desperately toward the island.


    Seeing their excitement, Charles and his crew on the beach shouted warnings. "Stay away from the sunlight!! It¡¯s deadly! Use the grass huts!!"


    Despite Charles¡¯ timely warnings, a dozen people still collapsed on the beach, their faces serene, as if they had returned to their mother¡¯s embrace.


    The thousands of people who disembarked from the ships filled the grass huts Charles had built to the brim.


    They were extremely excited, babbling incoherently as they looked around, making it difficult for Charles to find someone to talk to.


    Just as Charles was feeling overwhelmed by the frenzied crowd, a man with a monocle and a small mustache approached him excitedly.


    "Mr. Charles, hello. I¡¯m George, the branch president of the Coral Island Explorers¡¯ Association. Please sign here. Your ownership of this island will be recorded in our archives."


    Charles took the document. "I don¡¯t recall notifying you."


    He had already noticed that, apart from the golden ship, the smaller boats didn¡¯t carry Church of Light followers. He wondered why they were so eager to come here.


    The man with the monocle, distracted by the surreal surroundings, replied absentmindedly, "We have a partnership with the Church of Light. When we heard they had found the Land of Light, we thought it was absurd. But it turns out to be true."

 Chapter 152: Those Who Ascended

    "Hey, stop staring. I¡¯ve filled it out. Are we done here?" Charles patted the signed documents against the man with the monocle¡¯s chest.


    The man seemed to snap out of a trance, quickly reaching out to take the papers. "Sorry, sorry. This island is so beautiful it¡¯s hard to look away. By the way, Governor Charles, based on your agreement with our association, you¡¯ll need to allocate a piece of land for us to build a new Explorers¡¯ Association. Of course, we¡¯ll still pay the required taxes."


    Charles brushed him off with a few words. These were minor matters. His main concern now was finding the person in charge of the Church of Light.


    But before he could take two steps, someone shouted, "The island governor is here!" and a crowd surged toward him.


    "Governor, do you need an accountant? I¡¯ve been an accountant for many years, with extensive experience. I¡¯m excellent at managing finances."


    "Governor, do you need island planning? I graduated from the Moth Design Institute on Yinglun Island."


    "Governor, I used to work in the Seventh Division of Hefang Island. I have extensive experience in solving mysterious cases. As soon as I heard you¡¯d taken over a new island, I resigned to come assist you."


    They pushed forward, each face filled with the desire to be hired.


    Charles looked at them with growing impatience. The Explorers¡¯ Association was one thing, but how had these people also gotten the news? Did the Church of Light have no sense of discretion?


    As the crowd grew larger, Charles quickly scanned the area and pointed to the silent figure of Bandages in the corner. "For all island matters, go to him. He¡¯s in charge of personnel management."


    The crowd surged toward Bandages, quickly overwhelming him.


    Charles watched the sea of white triangular hats with a headache. These people still hadn¡¯t calmed down, their faces either excited or tearful.


    "Bang! Bang! Bang!" Bullets pierced holes in the grass hut. Seeing everyone turn toward him, Charles spoke up. "I¡¯m Charles, the governor of this island. Who¡¯s your leader?"


    Soon, an elderly man in a golden robe with graying hair stepped forward. His face still bore an unnatural excitement. "Where¡¯s Kod?"


    "He¡¯s dead. He died under the divine light of your god."


    To Charles¡¯ surprise, the old man didn¡¯t show sadness but instead a look of relief. The old man and the surrounding Church of Light followers pressed their fingers to their triangular foreheads and began reciting prayers.


    After a few minutes, the old man lowered his hand and approached Charles. "I¡¯m Cardinal Hoon of Yinglun Island. Are you the captain who found the Land of Light with Kod?"


    The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.


    Charles hadn¡¯t called them here for this. He pointed to the grass hut above. "You¡¯ve seen the photos, right? Have you figured out how to get up there?"


    Hoon nodded and spoke a few words to a servant behind him. Soon, a short old woman, only about four and a half feet tall, floated over.


    Charles shook his head. "People can¡¯t go up. Even if she can fly, the sunlight will easily take her life."


    Hoon stroked his beard and smiled confidently. "Don¡¯t worry, Governor Charles. To explore various islands, the Church of Light has all sorts of equipment. We¡¯ve brought everything for the Land of Light."


    Soon, the old woman was dressed in a black, swimsuit-like rubber suit, with thick dark lenses covering her eyes.


    The woman, dressed in the strange outfit, walked around in the sunlight for a few minutes without any adverse effects. The suit worked.


    "Remember, when you reach the Land of Light, if you encounter the God of Light, pray to Him devoutly. Beg Him to have mercy on us, the lost sheep, and ask Him to remove the divine punishment from the light. We are sinners, and we are willing to be judged in His kingdom," Hoon solemnly instructed the old woman.


    Charles doubted the giant fireball would answer her. He stepped forward and spoke to the old woman. "Once you¡¯re up there, observe the terrain carefully. See if there¡¯s a vast layer of ice. If you see any other animals, remember them and tell me when you return."


    The old woman nodded and floated out of the grass hut. Under the watchful eyes of everyone, she flew toward the crack in the sky.


    Charles stood in the sunlight, watching her rise higher and higher until she was completely absorbed by the light.


    He couldn¡¯t see the details clearly; it was too high and too bright.


    "Governor Charles, how can you stand in the divine light without being harmed? Do you have a special artifact?" Hoon asked with surprise.


    Charles didn¡¯t answer. Covering his eyes, which were tearing up from the brightness, he walked back into the grass hut.


    He wasn¡¯t in the mood to explain. The thought that everything about the surface was about to be revealed made his heart race.


    Whether the Earth had stopped rotating or some other disaster had occurred, the truth would soon be known.


    The news of the exploration of the Land of Light quickly spread across Hope Island. People discussed it excitedly, speculating about what the surface was like.


    "Tick, tock, tick, tock." As Charles¡¯ pocket watch slowly ticked, the chatter grew quieter, and the air became tense.


    Several hours had passed, and the old woman seemed to have been absorbed by the sunlight, never returning.


    Hoon¡¯s expression was grim. He stood with other high-ranking Church of Light followers, engaged in a heated discussion.


    When his crew brought him grilled fish and coconuts, Charles had no appetite. Frowning, he stepped out of the grass hut again, squinting at the crack in the sky. "What¡¯s happening up there?"


    Three more hours passed. Seeing that the woman truly wasn¡¯t coming back, Hoon and his group devised a new plan. This time, two people would go, each tied to a fishing line.


    "You two must watch each other. No matter how tempting it is up there, you must bring the message back! All our brethren in the Church are waiting for your news. Don¡¯t just think of your own enjoyment," Hoon said sternly to the two young men.


    "Do you have any offensive artifacts? Let them take something. There might be danger up there," Charles suggested.


    "What danger could there be in the land of the gods?" Hoon said, though he handed over a bracelet and a brown, writhing mass of flesh.


    As the nearly transparent fishing line was slowly pulled up by the young men, everyone¡¯s hearts were in their throats.


    Not long after the two young men disappeared into the sunlight, the fishing line suddenly jerked, then pulled taut. Everyone gasped.


    Charles rushed over, placing his hand on the line to feel the tension.


    The line was pulled tight, as if something on the other end was tugging it upward.


    This didn¡¯t last long. Soon, the line slackened and fell back down.


    When the front end of the line came into view, it was completely stained red with blood.

 Chapter 153: The Airship

    Seeing the blood-red fishing line, everyone¡¯s eyes widened in shock.


    If the disappearance of the old woman could have been dismissed as an accident, this bloody fishing line shattered all illusions. There was undoubtedly danger above, and it was deadly.


    "How strong were those two?" Charles asked Hoon, still holding the fishing line.


    "Second-tier. With artifacts, they could reach third-tier."


    Charles recalled the moment the fishing line had jerked. From taut to slack, it had happened in less than two seconds. This meant that whatever was up there was far more powerful than them. The two had been killed instantly, without even a chance to fight back.


    While Charles frowned in deep thought, the followers of the Church of Light were in a state of panic, their faith teetering on the edge of collapse.


    "Has the God of Light abandoned us?"


    "No wonder the divine light that was said to warm the heart can kill. The God of Light has forsaken us! He doesn¡¯t want us to enter His kingdom!"


    "My Lord, are we unworthy to live in Your divine realm?"


    As the murmurs grew louder, a furious voice exploded in everyone¡¯s ears. "Enough!!"


    It was Cardinal Hoon. His face was red with anger, and the old man¡¯s frailty had vanished. His white beard and hair seemed to float as if alive.


    He took the staff handed to him by a servant and addressed the crowd in a booming voice. "We¡¯ve searched for so many years and finally found the Land of Light. Are we going to retreat because of a single setback?"


    Hoon¡¯s commanding presence instantly quelled the panic among the followers.


    "Brothers and sisters! Where is your faith in the God of Light? What have you been praying for all these years? Even if the God of Light truly despises us, as devout followers, we must do everything in our power to reach Him and beg for His forgiveness!"


    Seeing the determination in Hoon¡¯s eyes, Charles couldn¡¯t help but wonder what would happen when they finally saw the sun.


    The more determined they were now, the more devastating their despair would be.


    With the situation stabilized, Charles approached Hoon. "Sending more people up like this won¡¯t solve anything. Do you have any other plans?"


    Hoon stroked his silver beard, his confidence unwavering. "Governor Charles, don¡¯t worry. This small obstacle is nothing. Warriors, bring the Ascension Vessel."


    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    A group of tall, burly men emerged from the crowd and ran toward the golden ship at the shore.


    Soon, Charles saw what the so-called Ascension Vessel was.


    It was a small ship, about the size of the Rat, roughly thirty meters long.


    It looked like a cargo ship but was much lighter¡ªso light that a hundred people could carry it ashore.


    The carefully built grass huts were crushed into a mess as the ship was hauled inland.


    Looking at the ship now on the ground, Charles didn¡¯t ask questions. He knew Hoon wouldn¡¯t have brought an ordinary cargo ship ashore for no reason.


    Soon, a large, deflated balloon-like leather sack was thrown onto the ground, and some Church of Light followers stepped forward.


    They quickly swallowed something, then made a small cut in the sack and began vomiting into it.


    The stench of stomach acid was unbearable, but as the sack rapidly inflated, Charles understood their plan. This so-called Ascension Vessel was an airship.


    As the airship began to wobble and float, Hoon quickly selected over twenty members to board.


    They were of different heights and genders, but they all shared the white triangle on their foreheads. The leader was a strong, muscular woman.


    Instinctively, Charles could tell this group was formidable.


    Hoon tapped each of their foreheads with his staff. "Remember, brothers and sisters, the information from above is more important than your lives. Even if you die, you must bring the message back."


    "Salute!" They pressed one hand to their foreheads and bowed in unison. "Yes, Your Eminence!"


    Under the watchful eyes of thousands, they donned black rubber suits and began boarding the airship.


    Just as the crew below was about to cut the ropes tethering the airship, Charles suddenly raised his hand. "Wait. I¡¯m going up this time."


    Charles¡¯ declaration stunned everyone. Knowing how dangerous it was up there, why would he risk it? Was he insane?


    The first to object were the crew of the Narwhal.


    "Mr. Charles, this isn¡¯t wise. It¡¯s too dangerous up there."


    "Captain, let me go in your place. If something happens to you, what will happen to the island?"


    Everyone¡¯s faces were filled with anxiety. They didn¡¯t want Charles to take such a risk. Only the doctor, who was drinking, didn¡¯t try to dissuade him. He knew it was pointless.


    "First mate, second mate, take care of things here while I¡¯m gone," Charles said, then kicked off the ground and leaped onto the deck of the Ascension Vessel.


    Charles wanted to see for himself what was happening up there. Waiting below was unbearable.


    Moreover, whether it was the Foundation¡¯s defense mechanisms or some danger on the surface, his modern knowledge might prove useful.


    Under the watchful eyes of the crowd, the airship floated toward the crack in the sky, which emitted blinding light.


    As the altitude increased, the sunlight grew brighter. Even with the sunglasses he¡¯d prepared, Charles found it painfully glaring.


    The glare was one thing, but what worried him more was the rising temperature.


    If the temperature on Hope Island was a comfortable 25 degrees Celsius, it was now climbing toward 40 degrees.


    Sweat dripped down Charles¡¯ face, and his anxiety grew.


    If it was this hot here, how scorching must the surface be?


    If Charles had held onto any hope for the polar hypothesis, he now abandoned it completely.


    The Arctic and Antarctic could never be this hot. Something catastrophic must have happened on the surface.


    When the airship was just a dozen meters from the crack, Charles noticed something in the distance above.


    Squinting, he realized it was half a corpse. The old woman¡¯s body was embedded in the rock of the dome. Her black rubber suit had been torn apart, and her body was mangled like a discarded doll.


    Not only had Charles seen it, but the Church of Light followers on the deck had also noticed. Everyone gripped their weapons or artifacts, on high alert.


    Just as the airship was about to enter the crack, a black shadow flashed from the side of the dome.


    In the next second, the entire airship shook violently, and the sound of air hissing from the balloon above filled the air.

 Chapter 154: The Mantis

    As the sound of air leaking from the balloon continued, the entire airship began to teeter precariously.


    "To the top! Repair the balloon! If it fails, our mission is over!" the leading female believer commanded. Five crew members flew toward the balloon above.


    Before long, the sound of leaking air ceased.


    Although the crisis of the airship crashing was averted, Charles knew the ordeal wasn¡¯t over.


    He stood at the edge of the ship, gripping the ropes that tethered the balloon, leaning most of his body over the side to scan the surroundings.


    The light pollution here was severe, everything a blinding white. Charles couldn¡¯t see where the enemy that had attacked them was hiding.


    "Dammit, what the hell is that thing?" Charles¡¯ muscles tensed in preparation for the impending battle.


    Suddenly, a black shadow flashed above again. In the next second, half of a believer¡¯s body, gushing blood, slid past Charles and plummeted downward.


    By the time Charles, agile as ever, climbed up the ropes to the balloon, the thing had vanished, leaving only the few believers who had come up earlier.


    Wiping the sweat from his face with his sleeve, Charles asked them, "Did you see what it was?"


    "Big. Felt like a bug."


    Before Charles could ask more, the Ascension Vessel below began to shake violently. The thing had gone down there.


    Charles leaped from the balloon.


    "Clank, clank, clank." As the hook from his prosthetic arm shot into the deck, Charles swung down and landed on the underside of the ship. The monster hanging upside down appeared before Charles for the first time.


    It was a colossal creature, six meters long, resembling a mantis covered in barbs. Its swollen abdomen and scythe-like forelimbs were similar to a mantis, but where its head should have been was a bud-like structure.


    The creature had no eyes but could sense Charles¡¯ presence. It charged at him with terrifying speed.


    "Bang! Bang! Bang!" Gunfire rang out, and purple holes appeared on its body, but the creature seemed unaffected, moving as if nothing had happened.


    The bud on the creature¡¯s head opened, revealing not a mouth but a grayish, slimy, amorphous mass.


    The chain on Charles¡¯ arm rapidly retracted, lifting him just in time to avoid the creature¡¯s grotesque mass.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    "Clang!" The creature¡¯s scythe-like forelimb slashed downward, first severing the chain attached to the deck, then aiming for Charles.


    The blade was incredibly fast. In the blink of an eye, the gleaming scythe was upon him.


    At the critical moment, Charles¡¯ right hand twitched, activating the ring of tentacles. Semi-transparent tendrils shot out, deflecting the blade.


    "Crack." Charles felt the phantom pain of severed fingers.


    Though the invisible tentacles were easily cut, the slight diversion allowed Charles to shift his body mid-air. The blade only took a small section of his bangs.


    Its attack ended, and Charles¡¯ counterattack began.


    Charles grabbed the back of the scythe and swung down. As the blade neared the creature¡¯s swollen abdomen, Charles pushed off, launching himself toward it.


    His left hand slapped against the barbed exoskeleton, gripping tightly. In the next second, Charles pulled out the Thunderbolt Wand and activated it against the creature¡¯s abdomen.


    "Zzzz." Arcs of electricity danced across the monster¡¯s body, and both Charles and the creature began to smoke.


    Faced with the intense electric shock, the creature couldn¡¯t hold on. Its limbs loosened from the ship¡¯s underside, and both Charles and the monster began to fall toward the dark sea below.


    But Charles wasn¡¯t planning to go down with it. Unlike the lone monster, he wasn¡¯t alone.


    Believers from the Ascension Vessel quickly descended, catching Charles and pulling him back to the ship.


    When Charles was placed on the deck, his body slowly regained sensation. He knew the fight had been perilous; one misstep, and he would have been cut in half.


    "The outcome isn¡¯t bad. Whatever that thing was, it¡¯s dealt with."


    He shakily stood up, looking around. Compared to his injuries, one male believer wasn¡¯t so lucky.


    His left leg was bubbling and rapidly rotting, his body convulsing.


    Charles guessed he had been touched by the creature¡¯s grotesque mouth.


    Seeing the rot spreading to the man¡¯s chest, Charles spoke to the believer tending to him. "Don¡¯t let him suffer. You or me?"


    As the man turned his head, Charles raised his revolver and fired, ending the man¡¯s pain.


    After a quick headcount, Charles realized the losses were significant: three believers dead, two out of commission.


    "Let¡¯s hope the rest of the journey is smoother. Otherwise, we won¡¯t have enough people left to die."


    The believers¡¯ morale recovered quickly. After disposing of the bodies, the Ascension Vessel continued its ascent toward the crack.


    As they entered the crack, the light above grew even more intense.


    In such brightness, Charles noticed the walls weren¡¯t smooth but pockmarked with underground structures and tunnels.


    The scale reminded Charles of modern underground parking lots and subway tunnels.


    Charles soon stopped looking. The environment outside was too blinding. Even with his eyes closed, everything was a deep red.


    As Charles rubbed his eyes, a voice called out. "Father, what is that?"


    Charles quickly opened his eyes, looking in the direction of the voice.


    A giant white flower, thirty meters in diameter, hung on the wall, pulsing with light in a rhythmic pattern.


    The priest being questioned shook his head. "Not sure. Maybe flowers in the Land of Light just grow like this."


    As they continued to ascend, more of these giant flowers appeared on the walls.


    "Am I seeing things? I feel like they¡¯re moving."


    Charles shook his head. "No, they are moving."


    He stared at these pulsating flowers, feeling a sense of familiarity, as if he¡¯d seen them before.


    Suddenly, the petals of the giant flowers were enveloped by green, barbed exoskeletons. They turned, revealing the hidden scythe-like limbs and grotesque bud-heads.


    Just as Charles thought they were about to attack, all the mantis creatures began fluttering their transparent wings. The rhythmic sounds of their wings intersected, forming a sentence in the language of the underground sea.


    "Light-skins, leave! Going up will only bring disaster!"

 Chapter 155: The Descent

    Charles wiped his sweaty palms on his clothes, his mind racing.


    These creatures were talking about disaster? What kind of disaster could there be on the surface? Could the extreme heat on the surface have been caused by humans themselves?


    "Light-skins, leave! Going up will only bring disaster!!"


    The giant mantises continued fluttering their wings, repeating the same words.


    Seeing the six-meter-long mantises surrounding them, Charles knew the most important thing now was not to provoke them.


    After carefully considering his words, he spoke up. "Who are you? Why won¡¯t you let us go up?"


    Since they could communicate, perhaps he could extract some information from them.


    But the mantises had no intention of engaging in conversation. The fluttering of their wings grew more frantic.


    "Light-skins, go down, now!! The last disaster was caused by you!! The contract is over! We will never trust your words again! Never!!" All the mantises extended their scythe-like limbs.


    "What disaster are you talking about? What¡¯s happening on the surface? I don¡¯t know who the humans were that you last interacted with, but I¡¯m not with them!" Charles shouted at them.


    The fluttering of wings ceased, and the mantises, gathered in a circle, hung on the cliff walls like statues.


    Time seemed to stand still at that moment, both humans and the monsters on the walls frozen in place.


    Charles felt the sunlight above growing even more intense. He grabbed the ropes and climbed up to the balloon like a nimble monkey.


    Standing firmly, he squinted upward. About three hundred meters above, a bright blue patch with the sun¡¯s glow peeked through. That was the surface, his original home.


    At that very moment, with a "buzz," the mantises spread their grotesque wings and pounced.


    Their sharp scythes sliced through the balloon like tofu. As the sound of tearing leather and splintering wood echoed, the Ascension Vessel was torn apart. Among the wreckage were the bodies of some crew members.


    But for some reason, the mantises didn¡¯t attack Charles. They hung on the cliff walls, their bud-like heads turned toward the falling Charles.


    Charles quickly adjusted his position mid-air, hoping the surviving Church of Light followers would come to his rescue.


    However, he was mistaken this time. The surviving believers from the Ascension Vessel didn¡¯t follow him down. They resolutely flew toward the dangerous tunnels. "The Cardinal¡¯s mission must be completed! Long live the Sun God!!"


    This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there.


    From Charles¡¯ perspective, they looked like moths flying into a flame.


    As he completely fell out of the crack, he saw countless mantises pouncing on the believers in the blinding sunlight.


    The speed of his descent was rapid. Charles had no time to worry about others now. If he hit the water from this height, it would be no different from hitting concrete.


    The howling wind pressure made Charles¡¯ hair whip around wildly. His mind raced, searching for a way to save himself.


    As the sea surface rapidly approached, Charles pulled out the Bat Lens and smeared it with blood from his right hand.


    The grotesque bat monster rapidly flapped its wings, slowing his descent. When he was about twenty meters above the sea, Charles finally stopped.


    But the next second, without warning, a "bang" sounded, and red flames engulfed him. Charles felt a searing pain all over his body.


    Sunlight was the bane of vampires. In just a few seconds, Charles¡¯ fate would change from falling to his death to burning to death.


    In desperation, Charles retracted his wings and plunged into the icy sea.


    Seeing something fall from the crack into the sea, the people on Hope Island were on edge. Those with good swimming skills rushed to the sea to try and rescue whoever had fallen.


    Soon, a barely conscious Charles was helped into the grass hut by Feuerbach.


    Cardinal Hoon, leading a group of believers, was the first to approach. He asked anxiously, "What happened up there? Did you see the God of Light?"


    Charles, blackened and weak, waved his hand dismissively. "No. We were attacked by creatures living on the cave ceiling. They¡¯re the ones stopping us from going up."


    "What do those creatures look like? How many are there?" Hoon pressed.


    But he wouldn¡¯t get an answer. Charles¡¯ head tilted to the side as he passed out.


    An unknown amount of time later, Charles awoke to find himself lying on a clean bed, his body wrapped in thick white bandages.


    As he moved slightly, a sharp pain shot through his body.


    "Don¡¯t move." The doctor¡¯s aged voice came from the left.


    Charles strained to turn his head and saw the ship¡¯s doctor mixing some kind of potion, with Bandages sitting nearby.


    "Didn¡¯t I tell you not to move?" The doctor quickly repositioned Charles¡¯ head.


    "How long was I out?"


    "About seven or eight days. You were badly injured; a lot of your skin was burned."


    "Heh, that serious? Looks like I¡¯ll have quite a few scars."


    Hearing Charles¡¯ light tone, the doctor¡¯s ugly face showed surprise. "You seem in good spirits for someone so badly injured."


    Recalling the glimpse he had seen, Charles¡¯ lips curled into a faint smile. It was the first time in nine years he had seen the outside world.


    Though the intense light had made it hard to see clearly, the sight had been beautiful in his mind. "It¡¯s fine. It was worth it."


    The doctor¡¯s face showed a hint of disdain. "Sure, keep risking your life. The day you lose it, I¡¯ll finally be able to leave this ship."


    Charles didn¡¯t have time for small talk. The important information he had seen in the crack needed to be shared with the Church of Light followers.


    Since the mantises were just living creatures, it would be easier to deal with them. Once they were cleared, the path to the surface would be open.


    "Doctor, call Hoon over. I need to talk to him."


    "Quiet. You¡¯re in no condition to see anyone. Focus on recovering."


    As the doctor spoke, he injected a black potion into Charles¡¯ arm. Charles¡¯ eyelids grew heavy, and he lost consciousness.


    The doctor limped out of the ward. A Church of Light follower waiting at the door immediately stood up, asking anxiously, "Has Governor Charles woken up?"


    "Why the rush? He¡¯s still out!" The doctor roughly pushed past him and left.


    Walking out of the narrow corridor, the doctor stepped onto the deck of the Narwhal. He gazed wistfully at the bright Hope Island in the distance and took a swig of liquor.


    "Captain¡­ woke up¡­ why didn¡¯t you¡­ tell them¡­"


    Hearing the slow, drawn-out voice behind him, the doctor didn¡¯t turn around. "Let him rest. The only thing keeping him still now is that sickbed."

 Chapter 156: The Pope

    Charles, wrapped like a mummy, lay on the bed, staring blankly at the white ceiling.


    He seemed to be daydreaming, but his mind was occupied with the brief statements made by the mantises.


    Though the creatures had only spoken a few sentences, their words carried significant implications.


    They had mentioned a disaster caused by humans, and judging from their behavior, this disaster had also affected them.


    Secondly, from their second statement, it seemed that a group of humans had previously negotiated with them and established some kind of contract. These humans were most likely the Foundation.


    What puzzled Charles the most was the first point. If it was such a major disaster, why was there no record of it in the history of the Underground Sea?


    When he first arrived, he had studied the history of the Underground Sea in search of an exit. Before the invention of the steam turbine, the records mainly documented sinkings or changes in island sovereignty, with no mention of any particularly unusual disasters.


    Could it have been a major disaster on the surface? But how could a surface disaster affect the mantis-like monsters living in the Underground Sea?


    As Charles pondered these questions, the door opened. Entering the room were the stern-faced doctor and an excited Hoon.


    "Governor Charles, you¡¯re finally awake. We thought you might never wake up."


    Charles glanced at the doctor. Hadn¡¯t he woken up earlier?


    "Please tell me, what exactly are those creatures living on the cave ceiling? Did you see the Land of Light?"


    Twisting the itchy bandage on his left arm, Charles sat up and recounted what had happened.


    "The bugs are numerous. I saw at least a few hundred of them. The crack leading to the Land of Light seems to be their nest. To reach the Land of Light, we must drive them all away. How many ships like the Ascension Vessel do you have now?"


    "There are two more on the Rebirth, but we¡¯ve run out of the suits that can withstand the divine light. They were originally for underwater use, so we didn¡¯t prepare many."


    Charles shook his head. "Even with the suits, two ships won¡¯t be enough. They¡¯re very powerful. We need far more strength than that."


    "Hmm¡­" Hoon pondered for a long time before looking up. "Please wait. This matter is beyond my authority. I need to consult the Pope."


    With that, he stood up and left. The excitement on his face had vanished, replaced by furrowed brows.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    Hundreds of six-meter-long monsters would be easy to handle on the ground with the current population of the island. But they were stuck at the top, bathed in deadly divine light, making it difficult to deal with them.


    As for the disaster the mantises mentioned, Charles didn¡¯t bring it up with Hoon. His purpose in involving the Church of Light was to have them help him reach the surface. Introducing other issues might distract them.


    One step at a time, Charles remained focused on his current goal: returning to the surface. Only after reaching the surface would he consider the next steps.


    "I feel like I¡¯ve recovered enough. Can I get out of bed now?" Charles, wrapped in bandages, asked the doctor.


    "Hmph, severe burns, and you want to get out of bed in such a short time? Go ahead and try." The doctor leaned against the wall, holding a metal flask, watching with amusement.


    As Charles moved, he felt a sharp, needle-like pain all over his body.


    Glancing at the doctor, Charles began to unwrap the bandages.


    When he reached the last layer, he found the gauze stuck to the scabs beneath.


    With a "rip," Charles tore off the bandage, a searing pain making him tremble. Clenching his teeth, he continued to peel off the blood-soaked gauze.


    "Enough, enough. If your body doesn¡¯t hurt, my eyes do." The doctor, with a look of disgust, stepped forward and quickly rebandaged the wounds.


    "Hold onto that black relic of yours that boosts recovery. Don¡¯t remove the bandages for five days. After that, you can take a few steps."


    Just as Charles¡¯ arm was rebandaged, Hoon pushed the door open and entered. "Governor Charles, the Pope wishes to see you."


    "Now? How?"


    Charles¡¯ bed was carried by several burly men onto a wooden boat, which swiftly glided toward the nearby golden ship.


    Soon, Charles was in a lavishly decorated room, face to face with the so-called "Pope"¡ªa three-meter-tall sculpture of an elderly man.


    The sculpture, with its hands empty and raised upward, wore only a stone skirt around its waist.


    As debris fell from the sculpture, it turned to face Charles on the bed. Its voice was hollow and distant, as if coming from a faraway place.


    "Greetings, young man. I¡¯ve heard of your deeds. All you¡¯ve done for the God of Light will be duly rewarded."


    "Why have you summoned me? I¡¯ve already told Hoon everything."


    "*Chuckle* Please repeat it for me, Governor of Hope Island."


    Charles looked at the sculpture with a puzzled expression. What were the Church of Light people up to?


    Though confused, Charles quickly recounted the situation above.


    After a moment of silence, the sculpture spoke. "Hmm, though I don¡¯t know what you¡¯ve omitted, your account of the situation above is truthful."


    Charles¡¯ heart tightened. Could this thing detect lies? No! Not only could it detect lies, but it also knew he had hidden what the mantises had said!


    As if sensing Charles¡¯ confusion, the sculpture chuckled. "Please forgive me. This is a matter of great importance to our church. We must be cautious."


    Charles¡¯ expression turned grim. The feeling of having his thoughts probed was unsettling.


    "Since you¡¯ve confirmed I¡¯m telling the truth, what will the Church of Light do? I believe those creatures are social. If we don¡¯t act soon, there¡¯s no guarantee they won¡¯t multiply."


    "Young man, what did I just say? Don¡¯t try to scare me with false information. I can detect lies. Don¡¯t worry. Hoon¡¯s group was just the vanguard. Soon, I¡¯ll mobilize all the church¡¯s forces in the Northern Sea to Hope Island. We¡¯ll return to the Land of Light as quickly as possible."


    As Charles was carried out, Hoon pressed his forehead, marked with a white triangle, to the ground, prostrating himself respectfully.


    "Hmm¡­ Hoon, I saw many strange visions in him. It seems he¡¯s not from here."


    Hoon raised his head to look at the sculpture. "Then, Your Holiness, our plan¡ª"


    "Proceed as planned. We must reach the divine realm. As the mortal representative of the Sun God, I feel our deity¡¯s suffering. We must aid our god."


    "As you wish, Your Holiness."

 Chapter 157: Island Appointments

    Five days passed quickly, neither too long nor too short. Soon, Charles, still wrapped in bandages, could slowly walk on the sand and bask in the sun.


    However, every time he walked out, Charles felt his first mate giving him strange looks.


    "Captain, it¡¯s normal. If someone wore the same clothes as me every day, I¡¯d be annoyed too," whispered Dipp, handing Charles a coconut.


    "Never mind him. How¡¯s your work going?" Charles asked, leaning against the shade of a tree.


    "Ah, Captain, spare me. I¡¯m not cut out to be a cop. When I was a beggar, I hated them the most."


    "If you don¡¯t know how, learn. Didn¡¯t I find people to teach you? You¡¯re only 17. What¡¯s there to fear? If you fail, try again. One year, two years, three years¡ªeventually, you¡¯ll get it. Key positions on Hope Island must be filled by our people."


    Dipp scratched his head, looking troubled. "But I¡¯ll end up arresting the wrong people. Why does it have to be me? Doesn¡¯t the second mate want this job?"


    "Konar has his own responsibilities. You¡¯re young and adaptable. The boatswain¡¯s job is similar to a sheriff¡¯s. With the island¡¯s small population, it¡¯s a good time for you to try. Once more people arrive, it¡¯ll be harder to take over."


    "Captain, are we really never going to sea again?" Dipp sprawled on the ground, his tone tinged with melancholy.


    Charles took a sip of the sweet coconut water. "Maybe."


    He had found the surface, and the Narwhal¡¯s mission was complete. His sailing career seemed to have truly ended.


    "Thinking about spending the rest of my life on the island, I suddenly feel like the sea was more comfortable."


    "Isn¡¯t living longer on land better than risking your life at sea? Didn¡¯t everyone join the exploration ships for this day?"


    "That¡¯s what I thought too. But when the day finally came, I wasn¡¯t as happy as I imagined. I still think sailing with you was more exciting."


    Charles looked at Dipp lying on the sand with disdain. If he weren¡¯t still recovering, he¡¯d have kicked him.


    Good days are here, and he¡¯s still longing for the hard ones.


    "Captain, do you remember when we first met? I was fighting with other beggars over a piece of black bread that fell on the ground. I was too weak and got beaten up. It hurt so much; I still remember it."


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Then you asked me if I wanted to eat. I nodded, and you took me to the Rat Ship."


    "It was nothing. A sailor had died, and I happened to need someone."


    "*Chuckle* Whatever the reason, you saved my life."


    As Dipp stretched on the ground, Charles suddenly noticed something black on the back of his neck.


    "What¡¯s that on your neck?"


    Dipp immediately sat up, excitedly unbuttoning his shirt to show off. "I thought your tattoo looked cool, so I got the same one."


    On Dipp¡¯s neck was a tattoo of a curled-up dead spider.


    "Thud!" The coconut shell hit Dipp. Charles scolded him sternly, "Do you even know what this is before you tattooed it? Get rid of it now!"


    This mark was associated with a cult. Who knew what kind of negative effects it could have?


    "Captain, it¡¯s just a tattoo. It¡¯s no big deal," Dipp said dismissively.


    As Charles moved toward Dipp, he saw people holding makeshift umbrellas approaching from the grass hut. Leading them was his first mate, Bandages.


    "There¡¯s someone¡­ you should see¡­ he wants to meet you¡­"


    Charles followed Bandages¡¯ finger to a handsome young man with blue eyes and white hair. Dressed in a white shirt, black pants, and a blue sweater, he looked out of place.


    "Good morning, wise and mighty Governor. I know you¡¯re both excited and confused about occupying a new island. You¡¯re unsure whom to hire or how to pay them. That¡¯s when I come in," the young man said, instantly taking control of the conversation.


    "Who are you?"


    "I am Leonardo. With all due respect, leaving the island¡¯s affairs to an amateur is highly unprofessional. If this continues, your island will turn into a pot of sticky mushroom soup."


    Charles understood his purpose. He was here to apply for a job.


    "If he¡¯s an amateur, are you the professional?"


    "Indeed. I was the Minister of Administration on Shadow Island. My expertise can solve your problems. My demands are modest: a 500-square-meter house in the island¡¯s center and a weekly salary of 30,000 Echoes."


    Charles walked up to Leonardo, looking at him calmly. "Minister of Administration on Shadow Island? At such a young age?"


    "Does the Governor judge people by their age? An old beggar is still just a beggar," Leonardo said with confidence and composure.


    Charles placed a hand on his shoulder. "I¡¯ve been to many islands, including Shadow Island. I don¡¯t recall you being the Minister of Administration."


    "Governor, how long has it been since you visited Shadow Island? Positions change," Leonardo replied, unfazed.


    Charles stared into his blue eyes, leaning closer. "You know that Governors are former desperados, right? If I find out you¡¯ve lied to me, how do you think I¡¯ll treat you? Former Minister of Finance of Shadow Island?"


    As Leonardo looked into Charles¡¯ cold, bandaged eyes and felt the iron grip on his shoulder, a drop of sweat slid down his forehead.


    Leonardo clenched his hands tightly, and his confident smile returned. "There¡¯s no doubt about it. I indeed held that position. You can ask any Shadow Islander."


    Charles slowly released his grip and turned to Bandages. "Fine. He¡¯s now the Minister of Administration of Hope Island. Hand over some of your tasks to him."


    "Mm¡­" Bandages nodded and led Leonardo toward the grass hut.


    Charles couldn¡¯t tell if it was his imagination, but Bandages¡¯ steps seemed lighter.


    "Captain, you just appointed him? Isn¡¯t that too hasty? What if he¡¯s up to no good? What if he¡¯s a fraud?" Dipp exclaimed, wide-eyed.


    "That¡¯s your job now, Chief Dipp. You know what to do next, don¡¯t you?" Charles sat back down.


    Dipp looked around, sighed in resignation, and headed toward the grass hut. "If he¡¯s a fraud, I¡¯ll hang him up as shark bait!"


    "Don¡¯t forget to remove that tattoo!"


    "Got it, got it."

 Chapter 158: The Minister of Administration

    Sitting in a simple wooden hut, Leonardo looked solemnly at the pair of brothers before him. "I heard you¡¯ve worked in the administrative departments of other islands?"


    "Yes, sir. We were responsible for document management on Spider Island. Of course, we can handle other tasks as well."


    "Then let me test you. What are the main responsibilities of a qualified Minister of Administration?"


    The Joseph brothers exchanged glances, a hint of surprise in their eyes. They hadn¡¯t expected to be asked this question during their recruitment.


    "What? Can¡¯t answer? The door¡¯s over there. Leave. Hope Island doesn¡¯t welcome liars," Leonardo said coldly.


    Hearing this, the two panicked. They had come all this way, and if they were sent back now, they wouldn¡¯t even have a ship to return on.


    "I know, of course I know. Responsible for implementing the Governor¡¯s instructions, facilitating communication between departments, and promptly reporting information to the Governor."


    "Right, right. Also, based on the Governor¡¯s intentions and the island¡¯s development strategy, drafting departmental work plans, annual summaries, and other important documents, leading or assisting in planning research for other departments."


    The two brothers blurted out everything they knew, trying to prove their worth.


    Leonardo nodded expressionlessly, quickly jotting down notes as they spoke.


    When they finished, he spoke again. "Second question. If you were the Minister of Administration, what would be your first priority in the island¡¯s current environment?"


    After a brief discussion, the older brother cautiously replied, "Um¡­ prioritize establishing the framework for the island¡¯s departments? Is that correct?"


    Leonardo¡¯s face hardened. "Are you asking me? Did you recruit me, or did I recruit you?"


    The brothers shrank back, nodding repeatedly.


    "Leave. Come back tomorrow for the results. Don¡¯t get your hopes up. The Governor¡¯s standards are very strict."


    As the brothers left, Leonardo¡¯s calm demeanor instantly vanished. With a sigh of relief, he tugged at his collar, breathing heavily. "Damn, finally found two usable people."


    He stood up and walked to the window, cautiously observing the bandaged figure on the sand in the distance.


    Though he appeared to be just an incapacitated patient, Leonardo knew the power this man, Charles, held. The entire island belonged to him.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    The thought of those cold eyes sent a shiver down Leonardo¡¯s spine.


    But more than the fear of death, Leonardo¡¯s heart burned with desire for power.


    Yes, Leonardo was a fraud. When he learned of a new island¡¯s emergence, he saw it as a golden opportunity to strike it big.


    He wasn¡¯t the Minister of Administration of Shadow Island, but he was certain these sea-faring lunatics wouldn¡¯t know what the real Minister looked like.


    Since no one knew, if he claimed to be the Minister, then he was.


    If this plan succeeded, he would rise from a small-time swindler in the port district to a core noble of an island!


    As Leonardo fantasized about his glorious future, the Governor in the distance suddenly turned and looked at him.


    Leonardo remained unfazed. With a bow and a hand on his shoulder, he respectfully acknowledged the Governor before returning to his seat to continue recruiting.


    Where there are people, there is society. Though Hope Island was initially chaotic and disordered, with the establishment of the Governor¡¯s departments, a structured social order began to return.


    "Governor, here¡¯s the six-month island development plan I¡¯ve drafted. What do you think?"


    Leonardo respectfully handed a booklet filled with writing to Charles.


    Seeing Charles take it, Leonardo stood confidently, waiting.


    "Governor, with ample food and fresh water on the island, I suggest issuing a recruitment order to other islands. After all, Hope Island¡¯s population is still quite small."


    Charles flipped through the pages, his mind elsewhere. "You¡¯ve done well these past days."


    "Naturally. As I said before, I¡¯m a professional."


    "Really? A professional fraud?"


    The room¡¯s atmosphere instantly chilled. Leonardo¡¯s smile froze. "Governor, I don¡¯t know what you mean."


    "You¡¯ve been very cautious, not revealing any flaws in front of my people. But coincidentally, one of my crew members isn¡¯t human."


    A white mouse climbed onto Charles¡¯ shoulder, sticking out its tongue at Leonardo.


    "A¡­ mouse?" Leonardo took half a step back, feeling something furry under his foot.


    He turned in horror to see a cluster of brown mice huddled behind him.


    "These are also my crew, and they understand human speech. Every word you¡¯ve said, they¡¯ve heard clearly."


    When Leonardo felt something cold and hard press against the back of his head, his body went cold, and his heart raced.


    He deeply regretted his earlier decision. Those who become Governors aren¡¯t ordinary people. What madness had driven him to deceive a Governor?


    Just as Leonardo thought he¡¯d be shot, the hard object retreated.


    "Fine, proceed as planned."


    Leonardo trembled as he turned, looking at the Governor in disbelief. "You¡¯re not going to kill me?"


    "Why would I? You¡¯ve done well with the island¡¯s affairs. I need someone like you as Minister of Administration."


    Leonardo¡¯s legs shook as he walked out. Once outside, he collapsed, gasping for breath.


    "Mr. Charles, why didn¡¯t you punish him? He deceived you," Lily asked, her big eyes wide.


    "Someone has to do the work. Since he¡¯s doing well, let him continue. We don¡¯t have anyone else to replace him right now."


    Charles scratched at the itchy bandages on his arm.


    "Aren¡¯t you worried he¡¯ll secretly cause trouble?"


    "As long as I hold the knife, I can replace the pen whenever I want."


    Charles scratched more vigorously, the sound of dead skin rustling beneath the bandages. Finally, he stood up and began unwrapping the bandages.


    On the table, Lily covered her eyes with her tiny paws, peeking through the gaps at Charles.


    Bandages, scabs, and dead skin fell to the floor in rolls. Standing naked before the mirror, Charles examined his body.


    His recovery was better than expected. The grotesque, fused flesh seen on the vampire sailors hadn¡¯t appeared.


    Apart from a few burn scars, most of his skin had healed, though it was patchy with pink and white areas. Full recovery would take time.


    Of course, all his body hair was gone. Charles rubbed his smooth head, feeling increasingly uncomfortable.

 Chapter 159: The Streets

    "Hmm." Charles leaned closer to the mirror, scrutinizing his reflection.


    He didn¡¯t often look at himself in the mirror, and now, seeing his face, it felt strangely unfamiliar.


    "Have I changed this much? I don¡¯t remember looking like this," Charles muttered to himself.


    "What did Mr. Charles look like before?"


    "I can¡¯t quite remember, but I¡¯m sure I wasn¡¯t this fierce-looking," Charles said as he put his clothes back on.


    After staring for a while longer, Charles turned to the gunner on the table. "Come on, Lily, let¡¯s take a walk around the streets."


    "Okay!" Lily nodded excitedly.


    The man and the mouse left the captain¡¯s quarters and stepped onto the deck of the Narwhal.


    From the deck, they looked out at Hope Island. The once simple grass huts had been renovated, now taller and wider.


    If the previous huts were like a crooked centipede, the current ones resembled a giant octopus sprawling across the island, its "tentacles" spreading as people¡¯s needs grew.


    In the distance, people wearing wide-brimmed hats moved in and out of the "octopus" like ants.


    When Charles reached the beach, a street within one of the "tentacles" came into view.


    On either side of the street, low houses had begun to appear. Since Charles had forbidden tree cutting, most houses were made of stone. To prevent collapses, many still lacked roofs.


    Despite their simplicity, these buildings somehow created a lively atmosphere.


    Charles walked slowly along the street, holding Lily in his hand. He examined the goods displayed on stone counters, surprised to find they weren¡¯t much fewer than on Coral Island.


    "Should I praise their business acumen or their fearlessness? The island¡¯s just been established, and they¡¯re already here to trade, without even a safe route explored."


    "Mr. Charles, I want that," Lily pointed to a shop selling drinks.


    "Banana wine? Is this made from bananas?" Charles pointed to the light brown liquid in a large jar.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    "Yes, sir. Made from the bananas named by the Governor himself. You won¡¯t find this on other islands. Would you like to try?"


    Perhaps due to his changed appearance, the shopkeeper didn¡¯t realize the Governor was standing before him.


    Charles was surprised by the price of 300 Echoes. He hadn¡¯t expected a cup of wine to be so expensive.


    "Sir, the Agriculture Department has set prices for bananas, and the supply is limited. I was lucky to get my hands on some. The price is justified."


    Charles said nothing more, handing over the money. He had indeed issued that order.


    Among fruits, bananas were the richest in starch, making them ideal as a staple food.


    He needed to preserve seeds and have Fred expand banana plantations. An island relying on imported food would be inconvenient.


    Banana trees took ten months to bear fruit, but they produced abundantly¡ªup to a hundred bananas per tree. While not as high-yielding as sweet potatoes, they could rival corn.


    As for storage, bananas could be sun-dried into banana chips. Hope Island¡¯s variety was low in sugar, making them durable.


    Lily excitedly took the cup, sipping through a straw before nodding enthusiastically. "Mr. Charles, this banana wine is delicious! Want to try?"


    The shopkeeper¡¯s expression was a mix of disgust at a mouse drinking from his cup and shock that the mouse could talk.


    "If you like it, drink more," Charles said before turning to the pot-bellied man. "Friend, is this street safe?"


    "Well¡­" The man hesitated.


    "What¡¯s wrong? Any issues?" Charles was surprised. Had order already been disrupted?


    "It¡¯s safe, but that young masked sheriff is too harsh. Theft gets a hand chopped off, and robbery leads to public execution. Everyone¡¯s walking on eggshells."


    "Is that so¡­"


    "Honestly, the Governor giving such power to a kid is reckless with lives."


    Seeing Lily glare at the shopkeeper, Charles returned the cup.


    "Maybe, but at least we¡¯re free of other islands¡¯ troubles."


    With that, Charles and Lily walked into the crowd.


    Dipp might be impulsive, but staying in his position would help him find his way.


    As they walked, Charles noticed things unseen on other islands.


    Followers of the Church of Light, crew members of exploration ships, and early settlers¡ªregardless of identity, everyone exuded vitality.


    Hope Island was full of opportunities. Anyone could make a living here, and with quick thinking, one could strike it rich.


    Soon, they reached a large square. The wide grass roof overhead indicated they were at the "octopus¡¯s" center.


    A massive notice board stood in the square, surrounded by a dense crowd.


    As Charles approached, he heard someone explaining the new decree to illiterate companions.


    "Basically, it¡¯s about selling land on Hope Island. Buy a plot, and you¡¯re a permanent resident. There¡¯s an extra clause¡ªinheriting land requires an inheritance tax."


    "How much does it cost?"


    "Prices vary by distance from the island¡¯s center. The cheapest is 2 million Echoes."


    "By the Sun God! How much land is there? No wonder they say becoming a Governor solves money problems."


    "Whatever you choose, I¡¯m buying a plot. I¡¯m retiring here. Settling on this island is better than anywhere else, and it¡¯s the least likely to sink."


    Lily looked up at Charles. "Mr. Charles, you¡¯re so rich now."


    Charles patted Lily¡¯s head, scanning the crowd.


    They debated whether to buy and which plot was the best deal.


    But no one mentioned the infinite lands of the Land of Light.


    "Hey, didn¡¯t the Governor say the Land of Light is above? With infinite land, why care about this?" Charles tapped someone¡¯s shoulder.


    The man gave Charles a disdainful look. "Are you a child? Believing everything you hear? Even if the Land of Light exists, the Governor would tax us commoners at the entrance."

 Chapter 160: Purpose

    "Don¡¯t worry, the Governor won¡¯t do that," Charles said to the man before him.


    "How do you know? Are you the Governor?" The passerby looked disdainfully at the man who seemed to lack even eyebrows.


    "He is¡ª" Lily was about to retort, but Charles quickly silenced her.


    "Let¡¯s go, we¡¯ll check out other places," Charles turned and walked away from the square.


    Arguing further was pointless. Once the new decree was posted, he¡¯d understand.


    Charles and Lily continued their walk, passing through the square to what was called the island¡¯s central area.


    Of course, due to the lack of building materials, the center wasn¡¯t much better than before, except the people here dressed better.


    Residents here were either staff serving the Governor¡¯s mansion or the exploration crew who had fought alongside Charles.


    The sparse population made the area feel somewhat empty, with some open spaces still holding stones.


    "What¡¯s this?" Charles picked up a stone and saw something carved on it. "John No. 3."


    "Mr. Charles, I know this! Jump told me. People use these stones to mark their land. Once the shipping routes are established, they¡¯ll build many houses here and rent them out for profit."


    "Huh, that¡¯s a first," Charles placed the stone back.


    Just then, Charles noticed someone familiar walking towards him.


    It was Fred, the cook from the Narwhal. He was flanked by two voluptuous women, chatting and laughing.


    The tall, thin man standing between the two curvaceous women looked somewhat comical.


    "Chef!" Lily¡¯s shout caught Fred¡¯s attention.


    Seeing his captain, Fred looked surprised and quickly approached. "Captain? Are you healed?"


    "Much better," Charles pointed to the women. "Who are they?"


    Fred grinned. "Four days ago, when I got home, they were waiting at my door, begging to be my wives. Where else would I find such a deal? Of course, I agreed."


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    "So, they came to you because you¡¯re now a central islander?"


    "Exactly, but isn¡¯t that a good thing? Captain, their skin is so soft, much softer than those on the streets. Here, feel it."


    "Lily¡¯s still here. Watch your words," Charles frowned slightly.


    Noticing the white mouse on Charles¡¯ hand, Fred felt awkward. "Lily, sorry, sorry."


    "How¡¯s your work on the island going? Any issues?"


    "You mean the Governor¡¯s Finance Department? Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m doing fine. I¡¯m working hard."


    Fred hesitated. "Captain, we¡¯re all family. You know me¡ªI can only cook. I¡¯m really worried I¡¯ll mess things up in such a crucial position. Maybe you should find someone else."


    "If not this, what do you plan to do?"


    Fred¡¯s eyes widened. "Captain, why do I have to do anything? Isn¡¯t it better to just play all day? Isn¡¯t that why we became central islanders¡ªto enjoy life?"


    "What about the Land of Light? You¡¯re not going there either?"


    Fred chuckled. "Captain, if it¡¯s as you say, life here isn¡¯t much worse than up there. Who knows if women like these would just show up there, right?"


    Charles stared at him intently, making Fred uneasy. "Captain, did I do something wrong?"


    "Nothing, you¡¯re doing fine," Charles turned and left with Lily.


    Charles walked through the streets, checking on his crew¡¯s residences. He realized the island¡¯s allure was stronger than he¡¯d thought.


    Most of the crew had eagerly started living their imagined lives as central islanders.


    Seeing their exaggerated behavior, a word popped into Charles¡¯ mind: nouveau riche.


    Of course, not everyone had fallen into decadence. The doctor spent his days holed up in his room, doing who knows what, while Bandages was fully immersed in building Hope Island¡¯s navy.


    Finally, Charles found his chief engineer, James, in a banana plantation.


    The tall James, wearing a large hat, was carefully inspecting the banana leaves.


    Seeing Charles wave, James greeted him with a warm smile. "Captain, are you healed? Hi, little Lily."


    "Not bad. You seem quite knowledgeable about this?"


    "Yeah, my grandpa taught me to grow ryegrass. But after he got sick, my employer let me go. That¡¯s why I became a sailor."


    "Any women climbing into your bed?"


    "Captain, what are you saying? I¡¯m married, and my wife is pregnant."


    At the mention of his child, James¡¯ face lit up with happiness. "I can¡¯t wait to see them. They must have been born by now. I wonder if it¡¯s a boy or a girl."


    Seeing his smile, Charles thought for a moment. "Your wish is to have your wife and child by your side?"


    James scratched his head sheepishly, then quickly put his hand down, his expression serious.


    "Mr. Charles, but rest assured, if you need me, I¡¯ll drop everything and return to the deck!"


    Charles shook his head. "No need. It¡¯s over. Stay on the island. If you really want to help me, take care of Hope Island¡¯s agriculture."


    Without waiting for James¡¯ reply, Charles turned and left. This time, he didn¡¯t head back to the grass huts but walked under the sunlight.


    Charles, under the sun, seemed to be in a different world from those in the grass huts.


    Sensing Charles¡¯ mood, Lily looked up at him.


    "Mr. Charles, are you unhappy?"


    "Not really, just reflecting. Everyone is so happy, no longer fearing the dangers of the sea.


    Women, family, money¡ªthey¡¯ve found what they need. The Land of Light is now just an optional place for them.


    Good thing we¡¯ve found the surface exit. Whether they follow or not doesn¡¯t matter anymore."


    Charles turned to look at the dark sea beside him. Suddenly, everything that had happened over the past nine years felt like a dream.


    "Mr. Charles, don¡¯t worry. Wherever you go, I¡¯ll always be with you," Lily hugged Charles¡¯ coat, leaning her little head against it.


    Charles stroked Lily¡¯s fur, looking up at the sunlight streaming through the cracks. "This dream is finally ending."

 Chapter 161: Flight Again

    September 14, Year 9 of the Crossing


    My tinnitus has been getting worse lately, but the doctor says there¡¯s not much he can do.


    Fortunately, it¡¯s not a major issue. With a bit of patience, it passes. No hallucinations have appeared yet.


    It¡¯s been two months since my conversation with the Pope of the Church of Light. Huen told me they¡¯d arrive in a day or two.


    I had hoped to learn the secret of the Church¡¯s flight ability. If others could acquire it, those mantis creatures wouldn¡¯t stand a chance.


    But to my disappointment, obtaining this ability is extremely difficult. According to him, Skywalkers must be sent to one of their islands from childhood, raised by local natives, to gain this power.


    I¡¯ve found a solution for myself. When they deliver the goods, I¡¯ll try it. Not being able to fly in such battles is a significant disadvantage.


    The island is becoming more prosperous. The dock is under construction, and banana trees are growing. The soil here is fertile. I¡¯m confident next year will bring a good harvest.


    "Woo~ woo~~" The deep sound of a horn echoed. Charles¡¯ heart leapt. "They¡¯re finally here."


    With that thought, Charles put down his pen and quickly left the captain¡¯s quarters.


    Reaching the Narwhal¡¯s aft deck, the scene before him widened his eyes. The sea was almost entirely covered by ships of various sizes.


    Most striking were the sixteen golden ships in the center¡ªall belonging to the Church of Light.


    Without a dock, the ships had to anchor in deep water, their occupants coming ashore in smaller boats.


    All Church of Light followers reacted the same upon seeing the sun. Charles, prepared for this, managed to save them from their suicidal tendencies.


    As their excitement subsided, Charles saw the Pope leading them. His appearance matched the lie-detecting statue exactly.


    "Governor Charles, we meet again. Didn¡¯t expect me, did you?" The Pope, surrounded by his entourage, smiled at Charles.


    "Indeed, I thought you were at the Cathedral of Holy Light. How did you get here so quickly?"


    The Pope chuckled. "The Church¡¯s resources are beyond your imagination. We have our ways. By the way, remember the pirates from Tianshui Island?"


    Charles was taken aback. "What about them?"


    Stolen novel; please report.


    "You¡¯ll never have to worry about them attacking you again. The island now belongs to the Church of Light."


    They¡¯ve taken over 134¡¯s territory?!


    134, with Sodom, isn¡¯t an easy opponent. And who knows how many "Kings" they have. Charles truly understood the Church¡¯s power for the first time.


    No wonder the pirates haven¡¯t been causing trouble here¡ªthey¡¯ve been wiped out.


    "Enough of that. Have you found a way to deal with the mantises above?" Charles asked, visibly tense.


    "Don¡¯t worry. To return to the Land of Light, the Church is fully committed. I¡¯ve even invited Governor Swan from England Island to assist."


    A well-dressed, flamboyant man beside him nodded at Charles. "Kid, your island¡¯s impressive. If it weren¡¯t for the Explorer¡¯s Association¡¯s three-year protection, I¡¯d take it for myself."


    His words drew angry glares from Charles¡¯ crew.


    The island was their sanctuary. Hearing someone openly threaten to take it enraged them.


    Charles calmly looked at the Governor of England Island. Known as the Island of Machines, though not the largest, it was the most powerful in the North Sea.


    The first steam turbine in the Underground Sea was invented there.


    But Charles didn¡¯t understand why the Pope had brought him along.


    When Charles asked, Governor Swan smiled smugly.


    "Just wait and see. It¡¯s our latest invention from the Science Academy. Originally intended for the Hefang battlefield, but since the Pope personally invited me, I¡¯ll help you first."


    The Pope chuckled. "Don¡¯t worry, Governor Swan. If you help us reach the Land of Light, feel free to ask for anything in the future."


    Swan nodded, snapping his fingers. A loud roar came from the mechanical steamship in the distance. Charles soon saw the so-called weapon.


    It was a helicopter¡ªmore precisely, a prototype.


    Swan stood proudly, watching the stunned crowd. Even he was amazed, let alone the others.


    But he quickly noticed that among the shocked faces, the so-called Governor of Hope Island showed no surprise, which irked him.


    As it approached, Charles¡¯ sharp eyes caught more details. To reduce weight, the helicopters lacked outer shells.


    Their internal structure looked crude, but the externally mounted rotating machine guns significantly boosted their combat power.


    Charles nodded in satisfaction. He had doubts about using airships against the mantises, but with these, success was much more likely.


    One by one, the Church¡¯s airships were brought ashore, and groups of followers donned black rubber suits.


    While they prepared, Charles wasn¡¯t idle. He approached Huen. "Did you bring what I asked for?"


    Huen nodded, presenting a large black rubber suit, distinct from the followers¡¯ attire¡ªbulkier and with wings.


    Seeing them inflating the airships, Charles grabbed the suit and rushed into the sea.


    Soon, a fearsome bat in a black rubber suit emerged from the water.


    As Charles stepped into the sunlight, sizzling sounds came from his body. Though painful, he didn¡¯t burst into flames¡ªthe suit worked.


    With this, mobility above would be much better.


    As airships rose and propellers roared, the sky became crowded, casting large shadows over Hope Island.


    Now, there were at least fifty to sixty helicopters and over a hundred airships in the air.


    "Once they¡¯re up, they¡¯ll follow my command, right?" Charles asked the Pope.


    The Pope smiled at the monstrous figure before him. "Of course, child. With such powerful weapons, the outcome is clear regardless of who commands. Huen, relay the order: all ships follow Governor Charles¡¯ command. By the way, I have a question."


    "What?"


    "I heard you came from the Land of Light, is that true?"


    "If I said I came from above, would you believe me?"


    "Of course, I believe you. Don¡¯t you remember? I can tell if someone¡¯s lying."


    Charles¡¯ ears twitched. He warned his crew while retreating. "Everyone, get back! Danger!!"


    As most scattered, a boulder the size of a small mountain fell from the sky, smashing two airships, piercing the grass huts, and crushing those who couldn¡¯t escape in time.

 Chapter 162: Aerial Battle in the Rift

    The massive boulder crashing to the ground was no less than an earthquake. Many grass huts collapsed, and those exposed to the sunlight who were a bit slow fell to the ground, never to wake again.


    Charles looked up and saw a familiar pseudo-star flickering faintly on the dome above.


    As the star dimmed, another huge boulder fell.


    Charles quickly flew into the air, shouting, "Everyone, follow me! The creatures above know we¡¯re attacking them! They¡¯re intelligent¡ªwe must stop them now!"


    With that, Charles flapped his wings and soared upward.


    Soon, the airships and helicopters followed.


    As they drew closer, Charles saw the pseudo-star clearly. The flickering light was actually the glowing abdomens of mantis-like creatures hanging upside down in a flower-like formation.


    As the light grew faster, the mantises¡¯ abdomens suddenly dimmed, and a massive boulder fell from above, crashing toward the island.


    Seeing the scattered mantises regroup to drop another boulder, Charles couldn¡¯t let them succeed.


    The giant bat flew beneath them, opening its ferocious mouth to emit a piercing screech.


    The sound disrupted the mantises. They quickly covered their abdominal organs with their shells, revealing sharp scythe-like blades as they lunged at Charles.


    Charles swiftly retreated, but the mantises were faster. Just as they were about to catch him, a barrage of bullets swept through from below.


    "Rat-tat-tat-tat!!" The helicopter guns spat fire, trying to rain bullets on the mantises.


    Though agile, some mantises were hit. The rotary machine guns were far more powerful than revolvers, tearing through flesh wherever they struck.


    With a sharp "snap," Charles¡¯ fangs severed the head of the last mantis.


    "Keep going," Charles, hanging upside down from the dome, waved his wings toward the sunlight rift. The airships and helicopters turned, flying toward it.


    The mantises weren¡¯t about to give up. They swarmed out of the rift like wasps from a nest, charging at their enemies.


    As the mantises broke through the bullet barrage, the first aerial battle in the Underground Sea erupted above Hope Island.


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    Bullets from a helicopter tore through a mantis¡¯s shell, but a shadow suddenly appeared behind it.


    With a flash of cold light, the steel machine was torn apart like paper.


    The successful mantis didn¡¯t pause. A solid shot from an airship¡¯s cannon ripped away half its flesh.


    This scene played out everywhere. Injured and dead creatures fell like rain.


    Gunfire, screams, cannon blasts, and screeches merged into one. It was a brutal war between species.


    But in the end, humans had the numbers. The mantises emerging from the rift began to dwindle.


    Charles, with a look of triumph, led the remaining forces toward the rift.


    As they reached the base of the rift, the bright light above suddenly dimmed.


    Charles looked up just as a boulder the size of a house slammed into him, sending him plummeting toward the water below.


    Gritting through the pain, Charles pushed against the boulder with all his might, freeing himself from its momentum and returning to the air.


    Others weren¡¯t so lucky. Wood, metal, and screaming humans fell with the boulders into the water.


    Charles grabbed one person with his hind claws, dragging them to safety.


    Back at the dome, Charles looked down and saw the person¡¯s head crushed¡ªlong dead.


    He let go and turned his gaze toward the rift.


    Against such boulder attacks, neither airships nor helicopters had a good solution.


    The mantises were above, humans below, and the intense sunlight made it impossible to aim guns or cannons.


    Charles carefully climbed to the edge of the rift, peering through the thick brown glass above.


    In the forty-meter-wide tunnel, hundreds of mantises formed a circle. Attacking from below was nearly impossible.


    And they couldn¡¯t delay. Airships were fine, but helicopters needed fuel.


    "Wait for me. When you hear the explosion, charge up. Understood?" Charles, hanging upside down, held several barrels of explosives as he spoke.


    Seeing everyone on the ships nod, Charles gripped the barrels and matches in his mouth, climbing upside down toward the rift.


    Pausing at the edge, he took a deep breath, mentally counting down. Suddenly, his muscles tensed, and he began scaling the rift wall with all his strength.


    The mantises noticed Charles. Boulders of all sizes began falling.


    Charles nimbly leaped across the cliff face, dodging the rocks.


    The lower part was easier to dodge, but the higher he went, the harder it became.


    With a loud "thud," a boulder the size of a table scraped the cliff, slamming into Charles¡¯ right shoulder.


    "Crack!" A searing pain shot through him. His right claw was almost useless.


    "No one¡ªno one can stop me from returning to the surface!!"


    Looking at the mantises just meters above, Charles struck a match against the wall, lit the fuse, and kicked off the cliff with all his strength, lunging upward.


    As boulders rained down on him, Charles hurled the explosives upward.


    Just as Charles fell back outside the rift, a deafening explosion erupted above.


    Half his bones shattered, Charles grabbed onto an ascending airship.


    A follower approached to help, but Charles sank his teeth into the man¡¯s neck, drinking deeply.


    As the blood flowed into him, his body rapidly healed.


    Releasing the pale-faced follower, Charles growled at the remaining four, "I need one more."


    After a moment of hesitation, the strongest stepped forward.


    Once restored, Charles flew back to the rift. The mantises were in disarray.


    Without the high ground, the outnumbered mantises were quickly overwhelmed.


    As Charles saw the faint blue light above, his black-furred face twisted into a terrifying grin.


    But the smile vanished. The blue light was being blocked by a living creature.


    As the light slowly dimmed, the helicopter crew¡¯s eyes widened in horror, some trembling uncontrollably.

 Chapter 163: The Shield-Borer

    Charles clung to the cliff face, his eyes wide as he watched the massive living shield-borer slowly descend.


    As it drew closer, more details became visible. The creature was a colossal amalgamation of black chitin, purple tendons, and viscous flesh, resembling a monstrous shield-borer.


    Giant insect-like legs, the size of small houses, extended from its sides, propping it against the rock walls as it inched downward.


    Beneath the creature, insectoid compound eyes, like deep-well searchlights, swayed back and forth.


    The remaining mantises perched on its body, their glowing abdomens arched in a lotus-like formation.


    A trembling, whale-like cry emanated from the fleshy web. Charles could sense the emotion in the sound¡ªit was grieving the death of the mantises.


    "Gulp." Charles swallowed hard.


    Though the creature hadn¡¯t done anything yet, every time its compound eyes swept over him, a chill ran deep into his core.


    Its shadow didn¡¯t just loom over the physical space but also over the minds of those who saw it.


    "Governor, the Church of Light said there were only some flying natives! What is this thing?" a helicopter pilot shouted, his voice trembling with fear.


    Charles also wanted to know what this thing was. Why had it appeared now, just as they were about to reach the surface?


    But he knew this wasn¡¯t the time for complaints. Whatever this thing was, he had to deal with it.


    If they retreated now, organizing another massive flight group would take who knew how long. He had waited too long already¡ªhe couldn¡¯t wait any longer.


    "All units, ascend!" Charles flapped his wings, climbing toward the living shield-borer.


    When Charles was about twenty meters away, the mantises on the shield-borer¡¯s surface fluttered their transparent wings again. The sound of their wings vibrated into the language of the Underground Sea.


    "Light-skins, haven¡¯t you brought enough disaster to all races?"


    Charles hovered in the air, his wings beating steadily. "I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re talking about! I live up there!! I¡¯m just going home!!"


    "Light-skins, you can¡¯t be from above. Those from above vanished with the great calamity!"


    "You mantis freaks are speaking in riddles!! What calamity happened up there? Are you going to tell me or not?!" Richard suddenly burst out, cursing angrily.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    The mantises didn¡¯t respond. Instead, they quickly dispersed, their scythe-like blades gleaming as they lunged at Charles.


    Seeing this, Charles knew there was no more talking. He shouted to the others below, "Open fire!!"


    Gunfire and cannon blasts erupted again. Purple blood splattered across the fleshy shield-borer, but the wounds healed almost instantly. Its regenerative abilities were formidable.


    The shield-borer trembled. The whale-like cry grew louder, and its insectoid legs retracted from the cliff walls. Its massive body plummeted like an out-of-control elevator, crashing downward.


    No one had anticipated such an attack. Charles and all the other fliers were caught in its descent.


    The helicopter propellers tore through the shield-borer¡¯s flesh, but it showed no reaction¡ªperhaps it felt no pain.


    The remaining airships played a crucial role. Their buoyancy significantly reduced the shield-borer¡¯s impact.


    Just as it seemed the shield-borer would stop mid-air, scythe-like blades, similar to the mantises¡¯, extended from its underside.


    However, while the mantises¡¯ scythes were connected to their forelimbs, the shield-borer¡¯s were attached to long, black-spotted tendrils.


    Like whips, the tendrils lashed out, piercing the airships¡¯ balloons.


    Whether it was human bodies or the ships themselves, anything that touched the blades was instantly cleaved in two.


    Charles tried to lead a counterattack, but wounds inflicted by bullets or cannonballs healed within seconds.


    Faced with the relentless assault of the shield-borer¡¯s tendrils, everyone began to retreat. Once again, they were forced back outside the sunlight rift.


    The shield-borer, either unable or unwilling to attack beyond the rift, remained lodged in the crevice, its tendrils flailing like a jellyfish, probing wildly in all directions.


    Charles frowned as he watched the creature occupying the rift. He knew that if he wanted to ascend, he had to deal with it.


    After careful observation, Charles devised a plan. He issued orders to the remaining fliers.


    "Divide into three groups. Focus your attacks on its left side. It¡¯s supported by six thick legs¡ªif we break them, it won¡¯t be able to hold its massive body."


    The followers on the airships nodded in agreement, but the helicopters ignored the order and began descending.


    Charles quickly flew to one of the helicopters, shouting angrily, "What are you doing?! At the most critical moment, you¡¯re running away?"


    The roar of the propeller was deafening. The pilot yelled back, "Look below! The Governor has ordered us to retreat!"


    Charles glanced down and saw steam ships below using searchlights to signal a retreat.


    While Charles was questioning the pilot, the other helicopters had already left. Only Charles and about twenty airships remained near the dome.


    If success had been possible before, now with so few people, charging up would be suicidal.


    Under normal circumstances, this would mark the failure of the plan, but Charles couldn¡¯t accept it.


    He opened his monstrous mouth and shouted to the airships, "Your Pope ordered you to follow my commands. Will you obey any order?"


    "Yes!" they all replied in unison.


    Charles wrestled with his thoughts. He had one last plan, but it was a decision he found difficult to make.


    But the thought of the surface just within reach steeled his resolve.


    "Now, I order you to gather all the explosives. I have a plan¡­"


    Minutes later, the remaining twenty airships began to move, heading toward the edge of the rift.


    A brutal battle erupted in the air. The airships¡¯ balloons were swiftly slashed by the scythes, their wreckage plummeting to the water below.


    They had anticipated this. Each crew member carried a barrel of explosives, flying toward the shield-borer¡¯s thick legs.


    Scythes lashed out, trying to cut them down.


    But the fuses on the explosives were short. Whenever a tendril approached, the followers detonated them without hesitation.


    With each explosion, Charles trembled. He knew each blast meant another death¡ªdeaths he had caused.


    "I don¡¯t care!! I¡¯m almost there!! I can¡¯t stop now! I have to go back!! I¡¯ve waited long enough!!"


    Charles, his eyes filled with madness, screamed hysterically.

 Chapter 164: It Doesn鈥檛 Matter

    The followers of the Church of Light were fearless. Even as they watched their comrades¡¯ bodies fall in pieces, they charged upward without hesitation.


    Charles, clutching a barrel of explosives, hung upside down from the ceiling, waiting for the right moment.


    When the explosions became most intense, he spread his wings and flew toward the distant rift.


    By now, the massive flesh shield-borer had lost most of its tendrils to the explosions. Its body was riddled with craters, and glaring sunlight pierced through its wounds. Three of its six thick insectoid legs were shattered. Though it was still healing, the process had noticeably slowed.


    But achieving this had cost nearly all the followers of the Church of Light. Only two airships remained, teetering in the air.


    Seeing the hope of reaching the surface, Charles flapped his wings and charged toward the gaping hole in the shield-borer¡¯s body.


    As he emerged from the fleshy disc, he was met with blinding sunlight that burned his skin. He had made it.


    At that moment, Charles felt a sharp pain in his leg.


    He looked down to see a small, slimy white mantis, its scythe-like blade piercing his calf.


    With a kick, he sent it flying and turned to look behind the shield-borer.


    Clusters of white eggs were piled on its back, trembling occasionally. This was a mantis hatchery!


    "Whoosh!" Flames erupted on Charles¡¯ calf. His heart sank¡ªthe rubber suit had been torn!


    As the fire rapidly spread, Charles wasted no time. He transformed back into his human form and sprinted across the shield-borer¡¯s back.


    Once human, he quickly used his black blade to cut away the burning flesh, averting the crisis of being consumed by flames.


    Charles glanced around, grabbed the explosives, and limped toward the nearest thick leg of the shield-borer.


    Its regenerative abilities were strong. To ensure their safety, they had to send it plummeting to the sea.


    Sensing Charles¡¯ intent, the eggs on the shield-borer¡¯s back began to crack. Malformed, underdeveloped mantises struggled to attack him.


    But these deformed creatures were no match for Charles. With swift strikes of his blade, he dispatched them efficiently.


    "Sssss¡­" The fuse was lit. Charles used his prosthetic arm and the black blade to climb rapidly up the cliff face.


    "Boom!!" A violent tremor shook the ground as the fourth leg was blown apart. The shield-borer could no longer hold itself up and began to fall toward the sea.


    As its massive body tilted, a barbed tendril as thick as a utility pole shot out from its flesh, aiming straight for Charles¡¯ back.


    Charles¡¯ sharp hearing caught the sound behind him. He strained to dodge left, but it was too late. The tendril pierced his prosthetic arm like a spear.


    A tremendous force yanked Charles downward with the shield-borer.


    As the blue sky above grew farther away, Charles gritted his teeth. He thrust the black blade horizontally into the cliff face.


    "Clang!" Charles¡¯ body jerked to a halt. The sound of flesh tearing followed as excruciating pain shot through his left arm. The prosthetic and its connections to his body were ripped out.


    Hanging precariously by the black blade, Charles quickly flipped himself, planting his feet firmly on the blade¡¯s back.


    Trembling, he removed his belt and tightly bound the wound on his shoulder.


    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "Ha¡­ ha¡­ ha¡­" Charles leaned against the cliff face, gasping for breath. Looking up at the blue sky, he laughed¡ªa laugh tinged with madness.


    Just as Charles was about to rest before climbing again, a half-deflated airship wobbled up from below.


    Only three people remained on the lopsided deck. Charles glanced at them, then leaped from the blade onto the airship.


    Grabbing one person, he drank their blood, then pointed upward, signaling to continue the ascent.


    Once the bloodlust subsided, Charles leaned on the ship¡¯s edge, breathing heavily.


    "Governor, was it worth it? So many people died."


    Charles glanced at the man. The rubber suit obscured his face, hiding his emotions.


    "Don¡¯t worry. It was all worth it. Once we find the Land of Light, I¡¯ll ask the God of Light to bring their souls to His kingdom."


    No one spoke further. The airship slowly ascended.


    The blue sky grew larger, and Charles could even see white clouds.


    "The weather¡¯s nice today," Charles said, unable to suppress his smile.


    As they approached the rift, Charles noticed what appeared to be a city outside. The area around the rift was littered with toppled skyscrapers.


    The towering buildings blocked part of the sunlight, but Charles could already see a portion of the blazing sun¡ªso familiar, so pure.


    The airship continued to climb but wouldn¡¯t last long. "Psssh~" The deflated balloon began to leak.


    "Quick, head toward the buildings!!" Charles urged.


    Using its last bit of power, the airship delivered the four to a hole in the wall of a skyscraper. Inside was a dusty stairwell.


    "Wait," Richard suddenly paused. He pulled out a crown studded with colorful gems, examined it, and tucked it away again.


    "What¡¯s that?"


    "A souvenir for my sister. I traded it for an echo on Hope Island."


    "Is that really a gift for a girl?"


    "It¡¯s fine. She¡¯s a sucker for anything valuable. Let¡¯s go."


    "This way," Charles led the four as they stumbled toward the rooftop.


    The building was tilted, so the stairs were slanted. As the floor numbers increased, Charles¡¯ heart raced.


    Suddenly, he stopped. Less than three meters away was the red door to the rooftop.


    The door wasn¡¯t locked. All he had to do was push it open, and he¡¯d be back on the surface.


    Charles reached out but hesitated. An indescribable fear washed over him.


    An impulse surged within him¡ªa desire to return to the Underground Sea, to Hope Island, to his crew.


    "B-bro¡­ we¡¯re home. It¡¯s okay. We¡¯re not scared. Let¡¯s go together," Richard¡¯s trembling voice echoed in his mind.


    Charles took a deep breath and reached for the door handle.


    Three¡­ two¡­ one! Both personalities controlled his arm as he turned the handle. The door creaked open, and blinding light flooded in.


    When Charles¡¯ eyes adjusted, he froze.


    It wasn¡¯t the sun. The bright light in the sky was more like a massive ring made of the same material as the sun.


    In the center of the ring floated pieces resembling tangram blocks, interlocking to form a giant white triangle.


    "Waaahh!!" The three followers of the Church of Light rushed onto the tilted rooftop, prostrating themselves and wailing.


    "Great God of Light, Your lost children have finally found You!!"


    "Almighty God, please accept my soul! Let me join Your kingdom!!"


    It wasn¡¯t the sun. It was the God of Light, worshipped by the Church of Light.


    Charles looked around in shock. The cliff walls were painted blue, dotted with white clouds. The blue he had seen earlier was just paint.


    This wasn¡¯t the surface. It was a hollowed-out cavern in the dome, created by the Foundation for habitation. They were still underground. He hadn¡¯t escaped.


    Charles¡¯ knees gave out, and he collapsed to the ground. His expression twisted as a sound emerged from deep within his throat.


    It wasn¡¯t crying. It was a choked, suppressed sob. Charles couldn¡¯t hold it back, and he began to cough, clutching his neck, his face turning red.


    The cough turned into a wail, a scream-like lament, like the cry of a bird dying on a cold winter night.


    "Why¡­ why!! What do you want from me!!! I just want to go home!! Why!!"


    As Charles screamed, saliva and tears mixed, forming a string that dripped onto the thick dust of the rooftop.


    Suddenly, Charles moved. He pulled out the crown and hurled it to the ground. Then he reached into his coat and pulled out a glass vial¡ªthe potion he had used to erase personalities.


    "Hahaha!! Fine! Charles, you stay in this dump. I¡¯m out!!"


    With that, Richard tilted his head back and downed the potion.


    Halfway through, his hand dropped. Charles felt an emptiness, as if something had vanished.


    Charles, still crying, laughed. He pulled out another vial.


    Amid the prostrate followers of the Church of Light, Charles stood, unscrewing the vial with his teeth.


    He raised it toward the blinding ring in the sky. "I don¡¯t care what you are anymore. Cheers. Long live the Sun God. May I have a good reincarnation."


    The bright ring flashed, and a gentle female voice echoed. "Dawn One reporting the time for New World citizens. It is now¡­ twelve¡­ o¡¯clock¡­ noon."


    Charles laughed hysterically, tilting his head back to drink. But his body swayed, and the vial slipped from his hand, shattering on the ground.


    "Ph¡¯nglui mglw¡¯nafh Cthulhu R¡¯lyeh wgah¡¯nagl fhtagn." The maddening whispers returned.


    As the whispers grew louder, Charles saw his fingers transforming into tentacles covered in eyes.


    His body began to sprout amorphous organs¡ªcrab-like claws, bloated black spheres, and triangular fish-like eyes.


    "Haha, interesting. All at once, huh?" The mutated Charles laughed maniacally as he walked toward the edge of the rooftop.


    Beyond it was the rift he had just climbed.


    Without hesitation, Charles leaped.


    The wind howled in his ears as the myriad eyes on his body opened slightly. Scenes from both the surface and the Underground Sea flashed before his eyes.


    But in that moment, none of it mattered anymore.

 Chapter 165: Going Home

    "Gao Zhiming, Gao Zhiming, move a bit. You¡¯re crushing my hair."


    A familiar woman¡¯s voice echoed in Charles¡¯ ears. He opened his eyes to see the familiar white energy-saving light on the ceiling.


    It was the light in his bedroom¡ªhe couldn¡¯t mistake it. He had lived in this place for over a decade. There was no way he could be wrong.


    "What are you staring at? I said you¡¯re crushing my hair." A soft hand reached over and pinched Charles¡¯ shoulder.


    Charles turned his head and saw Anna, who looked slightly annoyed. She lay beside him in her underwear, yawning.


    Charles bolted upright, scanning the room. He was back in his surface bedroom. Everything was exactly as it had been.


    "What¡¯s with you this early in the morning?" Anna got out of bed and started getting dressed.


    Charles, overwhelmed with emotion, walked to his desk and picked up a book. It was *100,000 Whys*, a gift from his father, complete with his childhood doodles.


    "Honey, we really need to get a bigger bed. It¡¯s ridiculous trying to fit two people in this tiny single bed. When Elizabeth joins us, there¡¯s no room to move."


    She sat at the desk, picked up a lipstick from the stationery box, and started applying it.


    Charles put the book down and rushed over, grabbing her shoulders and shaking her vigorously.


    "Anna, what¡¯s going on? I should be dead. Why am I here?"


    Anna pursed her lips to even out the bright red lipstick, then pressed it firmly onto Charles¡¯ mouth like a stamp.


    "Click." The door opened, revealing a ponytailed girl wearing a golden crown.


    She made a gagging gesture at the sight of the two kissing and turned to leave.


    "Gao Suling!" Charles rushed over and hugged the girl tightly, his eyes red.


    "What¡­ what are you doing? Molesting your own sister is illegal." The girl struggled half-heartedly.


    Charles looked up, his trembling hands touching her face. Tears streamed down his cheeks.


    The confused girl turned to Anna. "Hey, your husband¡¯s gone crazy."


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    Anna took off the men¡¯s slippers and put on her red high heels, then walked over and pulled Charles by the arm.


    "Looks like your mind¡¯s all muddled again. Come on, I¡¯ll show you something."


    Anna dragged Charles from the bedroom to the living room and forced him onto the sofa.


    Looking around the unchanged living room, Charles¡¯ mind was a mess.


    "Beep." Anna turned on the LCD TV on the wall. A news report was playing, showing a massive black hole in the desert. Several helicopters hovered above, and the area around the hole was filled with various facilities.


    "With the help of our fellow citizens from the Underground Sea, our scientists have reached the depths and have begun to master most of the Foundation¡¯s technologies. These advancements will elevate our nation¡¯s technological capabilities by a significant margin."


    "And all of this is thanks to the gentleman who wishes to remain anonymous. Let us express our heartfelt gratitude to this noble soul. He is a benefactor to all humanity."


    Anna leaned close to Charles¡¯ ear and whispered, "Don¡¯t you remember? Just as you were falling into the water, the Sun God exploded, creating a breach. The surface was right outside New World City."


    "After you found the surface, you came back and brought me up. And here we are. It¡¯s that simple. Oh, and I have good news¡ªI don¡¯t eat people anymore. Human food sustains me just fine."


    Charles stared at the news on the TV, speechless.


    "Click." The red security door opened, and Elizabeth walked in, her face slightly flushed. She fanned herself as she spoke. "Goodness, it¡¯s scorching outside. Must be at least 40 degrees."


    When she saw Charles, her eyes lit up. She rushed over and sat on the other side of the sofa, leaning against him.


    "Charles, sorry. The Governor of the Land of Light kept wanting to see me. It took forever to finish all the official business before I could come to you. Did you miss me?"


    Seeing Charles¡¯ blank stare, Elizabeth shot Anna a questioning look.


    "Nothing. His mind¡¯s a bit scrambled. Probably a side effect from before."


    "Oh, that¡¯s fine then." Elizabeth, with a hint of excitement, leaned in closer.


    Charles suddenly felt a wet sensation on his earlobe as Elizabeth¡¯s sultry voice whispered, "Tonight, you¡¯re mine. How about we try something different?"


    "That¡¯s not happening. We had an agreement when we came up here." Anna draped her leg over Charles.


    "Wait, both of you. My mind¡¯s¡­ a bit of a mess right now." Charles held them both back.


    "Ding, ding, ding." A crisp sound came from the kitchen.


    Charles turned to see his father tapping a spoon against a plate.


    "Son, lunch is almost ready. Set the table."


    Charles trembled as he stood, about to rush toward the middle-aged man.


    Anna and Elizabeth quickly stopped him. "Calm down. Don¡¯t scare Dad."


    After some chaos, Charles sat quietly at the dining table, looking around.


    Gao Suling, sitting beside him with her crown, was too engrossed in her mobile game to pay him any attention.


    Soon, dishes were brought out: stir-fried pork intestines, sweet and sour fish, saut¨¦ed spinach, braised pork. Though simple home-cooked meals, they looked delicious.


    "Mom, let me help you." Charles stood to take the plates.


    Charles¡¯ mother shook her head, her expression filled with emotion. "As long as you¡¯re back, I¡¯d do anything¡ªeven carrying plates. Do you know how much I¡¯ve missed you all these years? I thought you were dead."


    "Mom, you¡¯ve worked hard."


    "Come on, let¡¯s not dwell on sad things. You¡¯re finally back. Rest up. Sit down. There¡¯s still soup coming." The middle-aged woman pushed Charles back into his seat.


    At that moment, Elizabeth handed Charles a bowl of rice.


    Charles took it. "Elizabeth, thank you."


    "No need to be so formal. I¡¯m your legal wife now."

 Chapter 166: The Madman

    Anna, sitting beside Charles, tugged at his sleeve. "Gao Zhiming, why did the tattoo on your neck disappear?"


    Charles put down his bowl, pulled open his shirt, and saw that the spider-like tattoo was indeed gone.


    "Jiajia, wasn¡¯t this something you did?"


    "How could it be me? Don¡¯t talk nonsense. I¡¯d never do something like that."


    As they spoke, the food was served, and the family began eating happily.


    Charles picked up the dishes with his chopsticks, savoring each bite. He had never imagined that simple home-cooked meals could taste so good.


    "If only my crew were here too," the thought flashed through Charles¡¯ mind.


    "Ding dong." The doorbell rang. Charles opened the door to find all the crew members of the Narwhal standing outside, their faces lit up by the bright sunlight and their radiant smiles.


    "Dipper, Bandages, James, you¡­ how did you get here?"


    "Captain! We came up to find you!" Dipper excitedly gave Charles a hug.


    "Mr. Charles, we¡¯ve missed you so much since you left. Is this your home? It¡¯s so beautiful!" Lily quickly climbed up Charles¡¯ leg.


    With so many people, the small table was clearly insufficient. Fortunately, there was a large round table in the house. Once it was set up, everyone sat down together.


    Laughter filled the room as everyone toasted to Charles¡¯ escape from the Underground Sea. Family, friends, and lovers were all by his side. Charles had never felt so happy.


    "Crack." One of the legs of Charles¡¯ chair suddenly broke, and he fell to the ground. The room fell silent.


    Charles looked up at the concerned faces and quickly waved his hand. He pushed himself up with one hand and stood up.


    "It¡¯s fine, it¡¯s fine. The chair¡¯s just a bit flimsy. Everyone, keep eating. Suling, grab a bottle of cola."


    The reunion meal continued. Lily jumped onto Charles¡¯ table and looked up at him. "Mr. Charles, after we finish eating, can you take me out to play? I want to watch a movie, and I also want a phone."


    Charles smiled, picked her up, and gently patted her head. "No problem. I¡¯ll take you out and let you have as much fun as you want. Forget one phone¡ªI¡¯ll get you as many as you want!"


    If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    ...


    At the edge of the port district in Hefang, a worn-out house less than a meter tall stood. A haggard woman in her forties, her face lined with wrinkles, leaned against the doorframe, her eyes filled with worry as she gazed toward the port.


    Inside the room, a pair of siblings, around thirteen or fourteen years old, were skillfully weaving fishing nets. Their hands were cut and scarred from the rough nets, but they worked without slowing down.


    "Mom, it looks like Brother won¡¯t be coming back today," the older sister said, putting down her work.


    "Ah¡­" The woman¡¯s face grew even more troubled. She turned and joined her children in their work.


    "Mom, what should we do with the shark meat? It¡¯s been three days. If we leave it overnight, it¡¯ll definitely spoil," the younger brother asked.


    The woman hesitated for a few seconds, then walked over to the table.


    "I¡¯ll take it to the madmen over there. It¡¯s food, after all. It¡¯d be a shame to throw it away."


    The elderly woman picked up a plate of shark meat covered with green flies and bent over as she walked out the door.


    She carried the plate a few hundred meters down the street.


    In a corner, a group of madmen sat, muttering incomprehensible nonsense. Passersby paid them no attention.


    When the woman poured the fish meat onto the ground, the madmen swarmed over it, their dirty hands grabbing frantically.


    The woman kept one piece for herself. She looked around and noticed one more madman, curled up in the darkest, filthiest corner.


    She walked over and handed him the piece of meat. "Eat. You never fight for it. I don¡¯t know how much longer you¡¯ll last."


    The ragged, filthy madman, with only one arm, took the meat with his right hand. "Elizabeth, thank you."


    As the madman devoured the meat, the woman sighed. "Ah, I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re saying. We¡¯re all just trying to survive. Living one more day is better than dying."


    As she spoke, she noticed something. She pulled open the madman¡¯s collar and saw a black tattoo mixed with dirt on his neck.


    It was a creature somewhere between a spider and an octopus. Some of its tentacles were spread out, reaching up to the madman¡¯s face, wriggling as he chewed. "What is this?"


    Suddenly, the madman stopped chewing. He looked at the woman and slowly said, "Jiajia, wasn¡¯t this something you did?"


    The woman shook her head and stood up. "Stop talking nonsense. Eat up, or the others will take it."


    "Dipper, Bandages, James, you¡­ how did you get here?" The madman stood up, his face filled with surprise.


    The woman looked at him with a complex expression. "They say you madmen see things others can¡¯t. Can you see the ghost of my husband, Kevin?"


    "Come on, there¡¯s no room for so many people. The big round table is in that house. Let¡¯s move it."


    "If you see Kevin, ask him for me¡ªwhy did he have to go to sea? Why did he leave us behind? Why hasn¡¯t he sent any word back all these years? Doesn¡¯t he know how hard it¡¯s been for me to raise three children alone?" As she spoke, tears welled up in her eyes.


    At that moment, a young man in his early twenties suddenly rushed over. He kicked the madman, sending him flying, and shouted angrily, "You¡¯ve got a death wish! How dare you bully my mother!"


    The madman pushed himself up with one hand and stood up. "It¡¯s fine, it¡¯s fine. The chair¡¯s just a bit flimsy. Everyone, keep eating. Suling, grab a bottle of cola."


    "West, what are you doing?!" The woman quickly grabbed her eldest son, who was about to stomp on the madman.


    West anxiously looked his mother over. "That madman didn¡¯t do anything to you, did he?"


    "What are you talking about? I was just giving some spoiled fish meat to the madmen."


    West glanced at the one-armed madman, who was still devouring the meat, then pulled his mother toward the crumbling house. "Mom, let¡¯s go home. I have something to give you."


    As they left, the madman continued to shout, "Lily, be careful of the cars!"